FSP 3000R7 R13.3 Hardware Description IssA

Fiber Service Platform 3000R7
Hardware Description
Product Release 13.3

Document Issue A (3/19/2015)
Document Number 80000031910
Copyright 2001-2015 ADVA Optical Networking SE

All rights reserved. Hardware and software mentioned in this document includes software developed by ADVA
Optical Networking SE ("ADVA Optical Networking"), the Apache Software Foundation
(http://www.apache.org), Teodor Danciu (http://jasperreports.sourceforge.net), and/or other open source
software. Some software was created using ORBacus for Java by Object-Oriented Concepts, Inc.
Patents
The content described in this document may be covered by patents or pending patent applications of ADVA
Optical Networking. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents.
Disclaimers
Nothing in this document shall be construed as granting any license or rights with respect to its content or the
patents and trademarks mentioned above. The content of this document may include technical inaccuracies or
typographical errors, and is subject to change at any time without notice. Reliance on this content is at the relying
party's sole risk and will not create any liability or obligation for ADVA Optical Networking. Any references in this
document to publications and/or Internet sites that are not from ADVA Optical Networking are provided for
convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those publications and/or Internet sites.
The materials within those publications and/or Internet sites are not part of the materials for any ADVA Optical
Networking information, product, or service, and use of those publications and/or Internet sites is at your own
risk.
THE CONTENT OF THIS DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL ADVA OPTICAL NETWORKING, ITS AFFILIATES, EMPLOYEES, OFFICERS OR ITS SUPPLIERS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND BASED ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
DOCUMENT, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. THE SAME APPLIES FOR
ANY HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE COVERED BY THIS DOCUMENT, UNLESS A SIGNED AGREEMENT
WITH ADVA OPTICAL NETWORKING OR THE APPLICABLE PRODUCT LIABILITY LAW EXPRESSLY
STATES OTHERWISE.
ADVA Optical Networking SE
Fraunhoferstr. 9a
82152 Martinsried/Muenchen
Germany
Phone +49(0)89-890665-0
Fax +49(0)89-890665-699
http://www.advaoptical.com
Table of Contents
Related Documents Overview
63
Preface
67
Purpose and Scope

Audience
Document Revision History
Document Conventions
Typographic Conventions
Safety Symbol and Message Conventions
Obtaining Documentation
World Wide Web
Documentation Disc
Ordering Documentation
Documentation Feedback
Obtaining Technical Assistance
Customer Portal
Technical Services
Contact ADVA Optical Networking
Acronyms & Abbreviations
FSP 3000R7 Hardware Overview
Basic System Structure
Shelves With Accessories
Core Type Channel Modules
Access Type Channel Modules
Enterprise Type Channel Modules
Pluggable Transceivers
Management, Supervision and Optical Protection Switch Modules
Reconfigurable Optical Layer Devices
Optical Filter Modules
Optical Amplifiers
Dispersion Compensation Modules (DCMs)
Dummy Modules
Equipment Disposal
68
68
68
69
69
70
71
71
71
71
72
72
72
73
73
75
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
9
10
10
11
Shelves and Components
13
SHX9HU
SHX9HU Description
SHX9HU Features
SHX9HU Power Supply
Earthing
SHX9HU Shelf Cooling
15
15
16
16
17
17
FSP 3000R7 Hardware Description - Product Release 13.3 - Document Issue A
SHX9HU Slots
Fiber Management
SHX9HU Signal Transmission Path
SHX9HU Placement
SHX9HU LED Status Indicators
SHX9HU Accessories
Adaptor Brackets
SHX9HU Adaptor Brackets
Adaptor Brackets
21
SHX9HU NEBS-KIT 9HU

SHX9HU Cover Extension 7HU 9HU
Dummy Modules
Front Cover
SHX9HU Shelf Naming
SHX9HU Labeling
SHX9HU Shelf Type Label
SHX9HU Sales Kit Label
SHX9HU Certification Label
SHX9HU EMC Label for Japan
SHX9HU Shelf Supply Values Label
SHX9HU ESD and Laser Safety Label
Specifications
SH9HU
Description
Features
Power Supply
Shelf Cooling
Slots
Signal Transmission Path
Placement
Status LED Indicators
Accessories
Adaptor Brackets
NEBS-KIT/9HU
Cover Extension/7HU/9HU
Shelf Naming
Labeling
Shelf Type Label
Sales Kit Label
Certification Label
EMC Label for Japan
Shelf Supply Values Label
ESD and Laser Safety Label
Specifications
PSU/9HU-DC
Description
Features
Fuses
EMC
Connecting
19
20
20
21
21
21
21
21
21
22
22
22
23
23
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
30
30
32
33
33
33
33
33
34
34
34
35
36
36
36
37
37
38
38
39
39
40
40
40
41
Monitoring
Slot Positions
Removing and Replacing
LED Indicator
Labeling
Specifications
PSU/9HU-AC
Description
Features
Fuses
EMC
Connecting
Monitoring
Slot Positions
LED Indicator
Labeling
Specifications
FAN/9HU
Description
Features
Fuse
EMC
Monitoring and Control
Slot Positions
Replacing
LED Indicator
Labeling
Specifications
FAN/X9HU
FAN/X9HU Description
FAN/X9HU Features
Fuse
EMC
FAN/X9HU Monitoring and Control
FAN/X9HU Slot Positions
FAN/X9HU Replacing
FAN/X9HU LED Indicator
FANX9HU Labeling
Specifications
CEM/9HU
Front Panel Markings
Description
Features
EMC
Interconnect Ports
Ethernet Ports
Telemetry Port
TIF Alarm Contact Reset Button
Application Software
41
41
41
42
42
43
44
45
45
45
46
46
46
46
46
47
47
48
48
48
49
50
50
50
50
50
51
51
51
52
52
52
53
53
53
54
54
54
54
54
55
55
56
57
57
58
58
59
61
61

Placement
Replacing
Slot Status LEDs
Network Element Status LEDs
Module Status LED
Interconnect Port Status LEDs
Telemetry Port LEDs
Ethernet Port LEDs
Shelf Display and Arrow Buttons
Labeling
Specifications
SH7HU
Description
Features
Power Supply
Earthing
Shelf Cooling
Slots
Fiber Management Tray
Fiber Finger Set
Placement
Accessories
Adaptor Brackets
Dummy Modules
Front Cover
Shelf Naming
Labeling
Shelf Type Label
Sales Kit Label
Certification Label
EMC Label for Japan
Specifications
SH7HU-R
Description
Features
Power Supply
Earthing
Shelf Cooling
Slots
Fiber Finger Set
Placement
61
61
61
61
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
63
63
64
64
65
65
66
66
67
68
68
68
68
69
69
69
69
69
70
70
70
71
72
72
73
73
74
74
75
75
76
76
77
78
79
80
80
80
80

Accessories
Adaptor Brackets
Dummy Modules
Front Cover
Shelf Naming
Labeling
Shelf Type Label
Sales Kit Label
Certification Label
Specifications
PSU/7HU-DC
Description
Features
Fuses
EMC
Connecting
Monitoring
Slot Positions
LED Indicator
Labeling
Specifications
PSU/7HU-R-DC
Description
Features
Fuses
DC-Input Load Step
EMC
Connecting
Monitoring
Slot Positions
LED Indicator
Labeling
Specifications
PSU/7HU-AC
Description
Features
Fuses
EMC
Connecting
Monitoring
Slot Positions
LED Indicator
Labeling
80
81
81
81
81
81
82
82
83
83
84
84
85
85
86
86
87
87
87
88
88
89
89
89
89
90
90
91
92
92
92
92
93
93
94
94
94
94
95
96
96
97
97
97
97
98
98
99
99
99
Specifications
PSU/7HU-DC-HP
Description
Features
Fuses
EMC
Connecting
Monitoring
Slot Positions
LED Indicator
Labeling
Specifications
PSU/7HU-R-DC-HP
Description
Features
Fuses
DC-Input Load Step
EMC
Connecting
Monitoring
Slot Positions
LED Indicator
Labeling
Specifications
PSU/7HU-AC-HP
Description
Features
Fuses
EMC
Connecting
Monitoring
Slot Positions
LED Indicator
Labeling
Specifications
PSU/7HU-DC-800
Description
Features
Fuses
EMC
Connecting
Monitoring
Slot Positions
LED Indicator
Labeling
Specifications
99
100
100
101
101
101
102
102
103
103
103
103
104
105
106
107
107
107
107
108
108
109
109
109
109
110
110
111
111
111
111
112
112
113
113
113
113
114
115
115
116
116
117
117
117
118
118
118
119
119
PSU/7HU-AC-800
Description
Features
Fuses
EMC
Connecting
Monitoring
Slot Positions
LED Indicator
Labeling
Specifications
FAN/Plug-In
Description
Features
Signal Transmission Paths
Slot Position
Fan Status LED
Slot Status LEDs
Shelf Display
Labeling
Fan Unit Type Label
Bar Code Label
Specifications
SH1HU-HP/2DC Shelf
Description
Features
Power Supply
Earthing
Module Cooling
Slots
Placement
Fan Status LED
Slot Status LEDs
Power Status LEDs
Shelf Display
Adaptor Brackets
Dummy Modules
Shelf Naming
Shelf Labeling
Shelf Type Label
Certification Label
EMC Label for Japan
Hot Surface Hazard Warning Label
120
120
121
121
121
122
122
122
123
123
123
124
124
124
125
125
125
125
125
125
126
126
126
126
127
127
127
128
128
129
129
129
130
131
131
131
131
132
132
132
132
132
132
133
133
133
134
134
135
135

Specifications
SH1HU-HP/E-TEMP/2DC Shelf
Description
Features
Start-UP Procedure
Power Supply
Earthing
Module Cooling
Slots
Placement
Fan Status LED
Slot Status LEDs
Power Status LEDs
Shelf Display
Adaptor Brackets
Dummy Modules
Shelf Naming
Shelf Labeling
Shelf Type Label
Certification Label
EMC Label for Japan
Specifications
SH1HU-F/2DC Shelf
Description
Features
Power Supply
Earthing
Module Cooling
Slots
Placement
Fan Status LED
Slot Status LEDs
Power Status LEDs
Shelf Display
Adaptor Brackets
Dummy Modules
Shelf Naming
Labeling
Shelf Type Label
Sales Kit Label
10
135
136
137
137
138
139
139
140
140
141
142
142
142
143
143
143
143
143
143
144
144
144
144
145
145
146
146
146
147
147
147
148
148
149
149
150
150
151
151
151
151
151
152
152
152
152
152
153
153
154
Certification Label
EMC Label for Japan
Warranty Label
Specifications
SH1HU-R
Description
Features
Power Supply
Earthing
Module Cooling
Slots
Placement
Fan Status LED
Slot Status LEDs
Power Status LEDs
Shelf Display
Adaptor Brackets
Shelf Naming
Labeling
Shelf Type Label
Sales Kit Label
Certification Label
EMC Label for Japan
Warranty Label
Specifications
SH1HU-R/PF
Description
Features
Power Supply
Earthing
Module Cooling
Slots
Placement
Fan and Air Filter Status LED
Slot Status LEDs
Power Status LEDs
Shelf Display
Adaptor Brackets
FAN-FILTER-SET/1HU
Shelf Naming
154
155
155
156
156
156
156
157
157
158
158
159
160
160
160
160
161
161
161
161
162
162
162
162
163
163
163
164
164
165
165
165
166
166
168
168
169
169
170
171
171
171
172
172
172
173
173
173
173
174
11
Labeling
Shelf Type Label
Certification Label
EMC Label for Japan
Warranty Label
Specifications
FAN/1HU
Description
Features
Fuse
Slot Position
Replacing
LED Indicator
Specifications
PSU/1HU-R-AC
Description
Features
Fuses
EMC
Connecting
Monitoring
Slot positions
LED Indicator
Labeling
Specifications
PSU/1HU-R-AC-200
Description
Features
Fuses
EMC
Connecting
Monitoring
Slot Positions
LED Indicator
Labeling
Specifications
PSU/1HU-R-DC-200
Description
Features
Fuses
EMC
Connecting
Monitoring
Slot Positions
12
174
174
175
175
176
176
176
177
177
177
178
179
179
179
179
179
180
180
180
181
181
181
182
182
182
183
183
183
183
184
184
185
186
186
186
186
187
187
187
187
188
189
189
190
190
191
191
191
192
192
LED Indicator
Labeling
Specifications
SH1HU/PASSIVE/FT
Description
Features
Adaptor Brackets
Placement
Labeling
Shelf Type Label
Specifications
SH1HU/PASSIVE
Description
Features
Adaptor Brackets
Placement
Labeling
Shelf Type Label
Specifications
SH1HU/FIBERMANAGEMENT
Description
Features
Adaptor Brackets
Placement
Labeling
Specifications
FMT/1HU
Description
Features
Adaptor Brackets
Placement
Labeling
Specifications
OTDR
Description
Features
Power Supply
Earthing
Cooling
Placement
Labeling
Shelf Type Label
Warranty Label
Specifications
192
192
193
193
193
194
194
195
195
195
195
196
196
196
196
197
197
197
197
198
198
199
199
200
200
201
201
201
202
202
204
204
204
205
205
206
206
207
208
208
208
208
208
208
209
210
210
210
211
13
General Information
Identification
Naming Conventions
Module Design
Module Handling
Management and Operating Status
Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Labeling
Frontplate Labels
Module Type Label
Certification Label
Warranty Label
WCC-TN-40G-L#DC
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Client Interface Characteristics
Network Interface Characteristics
Signal Path
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Loopbacks
Network Interface Terminal Loopback
Client Interface Terminal Loopback
Specifications
4TCC-PCTN-10G+40G-L#DC
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Loopbacks
Network Terminal Loop
Client Facility Loop
Client Terminal Loop
Specifications
WCC-PCN-100G
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Transmit Direction
14
212
212
212
214
215
215
215
215
216
216
216
218
218
219
220
220
220
221
221
222
222
222
223
223
223
223
224
225
225
226
226
226
226
227
227
228
228
229
229
229
229
230
231
231
232
233
233
233
233
234
Receive Direction
Specifications
WCC-PCTN-100GA
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Specifications
WCC-PCTN-100GB
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Specifications
10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GC
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Specifications
10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GB
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Specifications
WCC-PCTN-10G
Faceplate Markings
Variants
Description
234
235
236
237
237
238
238
239
239
239
240
240
240
241
242
242
243
244
244
244
244
245
245
245
246
246
248
250
251
252
252
252
253
253
254
255
256
258
260
261
261
261
261
262
262
263
264
265
265
265
15
Features
Signal Path
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Specifications
4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G
Faceplate Markings
Variants
Description
Features
Signal Path
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Specifications
10TCC-PCTN-4GU+10G
Faceplate Markings
Variants
Description
Features
Signal Path
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Specifications
10TCC-PCTN-4GUS+10G
Faceplate Markings
Variants
Description
Features
Signal Path
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Specifications
10TCC-PCN-2G7US+10G
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
16
266
266
267
267
267
268
268
268
269
270
270
270
271
271
271
272
272
272
273
274
275
276
276
276
277
278
278
278
279
279
279
280
281
282
282
282
283
284
284
285
285
286
287
287
288
289
289
291
292
292
Signal Path
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Specifications
10TCC-PCN-3GSDI+10G
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Pluggable Transceivers, Transmitters and Receivers
Signal Path
Signal Path for Unidirectional Client Servies
292
292
293
294
294
295
295
296
297
298
299
299
300
300
Transmit Direction
301
Receive Direction
302
Signal Path for Bidirectional GbE Client Services
302
Transmit Direction
303
Receive Direction
303
Specifications
10WXC-PCN-10G
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Optical Interface Characteristics
Signal Path
Ingress Direction (Rx)
Egress Direction (Tx)
Specifications
2WCC-PCN-10G
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Specifications
2TWCC-PCN-2G7U
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
303
304
305
305
306
307
308
308
309
309
310
310
311
311
312
313
313
313
313
314
314
315
315
316
316
317
317
318
318
318
17
Dual Transponder Mode
318
Transmit Direction
318
Receive Direction
319
TDM Mode
320
Transmit Direction
320
Receive Direction
321
Specifications
WCC-PC1N-2G7U
Faceplate Markings
Description
Signal Path
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Specifications
4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Transmit direction
Receive direction
Specifications
General Information
Identification
Naming Conventions
Module Design
Module Handling
Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Labeling
Frontplate Labels
Module Type Label
Certification Label
Warranty Label
2PCA-PCN-10G
Faceplate Markings
Description
System Requirements
Connection Management
Interoperability
18
324
324
325
325
326
326
326
327
327
327
327
328
329
329
329
330
330
330
330
331
331
332
333
334
334
334
336
337
337
337
337
338
338
338
340
341
342
343
343
344
345
345
Features
XFP Transceivers
Signal Path
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Slot Positions
Specifications
10PCA-PCN-1G3+10G
Faceplate Markings
Description
System Requirements
Interoperability
Features
Signal Path
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Slot Positions
Specifications
2WCA-PCN-10G
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Transmission Modes
345
346
346
346
348
348
349
349
349
350
351
351
352
353
353
354
355
355
355
355
356
357
357
357
358
359
359
360
360
360
361
361
Transponder NE &NW
361
361
Signal Paths
Network Channel Protected Single Transponder
362
362
Transmit Direction
362
Receive Direction
362
Unprotected Dual Transponder
363
Transmit Direction
363
Receive Direction
363
Forcing the Network Laser

Specifications
5WCA-PCN-16GU
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
364
364
365
365
366
367
367
19

Signal Path
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Loopback
Client Interface Facility Loop
Network Interface Facility Loop
Specifications
WCA-PC-10G-V
Faceplate Markings
Optical Port Markings
LED Indicator Markings
Variants
Description
Features
Signal Path
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Specifications
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V
Faceplate Markings
Variants
Description
Features
Signal Path
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Specifications
4TCA-PCN-4GU+4G
Faceplate Markings
Description
Modes of Operation
367
368
368
369
369
370
370
370
370
370
371
372
372
372
372
373
373
373
373
374
374
375
375
375
376
377
377
377
378
378
379
379
379
380
380
382
382
382
383
384
384
385
Transponder Mode
385
Add-Drop Multiplexer Mode (ADM)
385
Terminal Multiplexer Operation Modes (Multiplexer NE Only/Multiplexer NW Only/Multiplexer NE &

NW)
386
Dual Terminal Operation Multiplexer Mode (Dual Muxponder)
387
Regenerator Modes
388
Features
20
388

SFP Transceivers
Signal Path
Transmit direction
Receive direction
Specifications
4TCA-PCN-4GUS+4G
Faceplate Markings
Description
Modes of Operation
Add-drop Multiplexer Transmission Mode
388
389
389
389
389
390
391
392
393
393
394
394
Terminal Multiplexer Operation Modes (Multiplexer NE Only/Multiplexer NW Only/Multiplexer NE &

NW)
394
Dual Terminal Operation Multiplexer Mode (Dual Muxponder)
395
Regenerator Mode
396
Features
Signal Path
Transmit direction
Receive direction
Specifications
WCA-PCN-2G5U
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Transmit direction
Receive direction
Specifications
2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Client Interface Characteristics:
Network Interface Characteristics:
Signal Path
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Specifications
2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5
396
397
397
397
397
398
398
399
400
401
401
401
401
402
402
403
403
403
404
404
405
405
406
406
406
407
407
407
407
408
408
409
409
21
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Specifications
4TCA-LS+1G3-V
Faceplate Markings
Variants
Description
Features
Client interface characteristics
Network interface characteristics
Signal Path
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Specifications
General Information
Identification
Naming Conventions
Module Design
Module Handling
Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Labeling
Frontplate Labels
Module Type Label
Certification Label
Warranty Label
Channel Grouping for 100 Gigabit Service
WCE-PCN-100GB
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Specifications
22
410
410
410
410
411
411
411
412
412
413
413
414
414
414
415
415
415
416
416
416
416
416
417
419
420
420
420
423
423
424
424
424
424
424
425
427
428
429
431
431
432
433
433
434
434
434
435
435
435
WCE-PCN-100G
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Specifications
10TCE-PCN-16GU+100G
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Specifications
10TCE-PCN-16GU+AES100G
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Data Encryption Function
Signal Path
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Battery
Shipping
Limitations
Specifications
10TCE-PCN-10G+100G-GF
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Specifications
10TCE-PCN-10G+100G
Faceplate Markings
436
437
437
438
438
439
439
439
440
440
440
441
442
442
444
445
445
445
446
446
447
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
454
454
455
455
456
456
456
456
457
458
458
460
460
461
461
461
462
462
463
464
465
23
Description
Features
Signal Path
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Specifications
5TCE-PCN-10GU+10G
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Transponder Mode
Transmit Direction
475
Receive Direction
475
TDM Mode (Multiplexer Mode)
475
Transmit Direction
476
Receive Direction
477
Specifications
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Transponder Mode
477
478
479
479
480
481
482
482
482
483
483
Transmit Direction
483
Receive Direction
484
484
Transmit Direction
485
Receive Direction
485
Battery
Shipping
Limitations
Specifications
5TCE-PCTN-10GU+10G
Faceplate Markings
Variants
Description
Features
24
465
467
467
468
468
468
469
470
470
471
472
472
473
473
474
474
474
474
485
485
486
486
487
487
488
488
489

Signal Path
Transponder Mode
489
490
490
490
490
Transmit Direction
491
Receive Direction
491
TDM Mode
491
Transmit Direction
492
Receive Direction
492
Specifications
5TCE-PCTN-10GU+AES10G
Faceplate Markings
Variants
Description
Features
Signal Path
Transponder Mode
493
494
495
495
495
496
497
498
498
499
499
499
Transmit Direction
500
Receive Direction
500
TDM Mode
500
Transmit Direction
501
Receive Direction
502
Battery
Shipping
Limitations
Specifications
5TCE-PCN-8GU+10GS
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Specifications
5TCE-PCN-8GU+AES10GS
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
502
502
502
502
503
504
504
505
505
505
506
506
507
508
508
509
509
510
511
511
512
25

Signal Path
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Battery
Shipping
Limitations
Specifications
5TCE-PCTN-8GU+10GS
Faceplate Markings
Variants
Description
Features
Signal Path
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Specifications
5TCE-PCTN-8GU+AES10GS
Faceplate Markings
Variants
Description
Features
Signal Path
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Battery
Shipping
Limitations
Specifications
8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V
Faceplate Markings
Variants
Description
Features
Signal Path
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Specifications
26
513
513
513
514
515
515
515
515
515
516
517
517
517
518
518
518
519
519
520
520
521
522
523
523
523
524
525
526
526
526
526
527
527
528
528
528
528
529
530
530
530
531
532
532
532
532
533
533
533
534
8TCE-GLINK+2G5-V
Faceplate Markings
Variants
Description
Features
Signal Path
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Specifications
4WCE-PCN-16GFC
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Loopback
Specifications
General Information
Identification
Transceiver Naming Conventions
Overview - Transceiver Types
Handling
Labeling
Transceiver Type Label
Bar Code Label
Cardboard Box Labeling
Package Label
Certification Label
SFP/SFP+/XFP/CFP Optical Transceivers
Features
Color Code
Optical Connectors
Management and Control
Application Notes
Specifications
SFP Optojack Transceivers
Optojack DE Features
Color Code
535
536
536
536
537
538
538
538
538
539
539
539
540
541
542
542
543
543
543
543
544
544
545
545
545
545
546
547
548
548
548
556
566
566
566
567
567
567
568
569
569
572
572
572
573
573
574
574
575
27
Management
Application Notes
Specifications
3G-SDI SFP Optical Dual Transmitters and Dual Receivers
SFP-2TX/3GSDI/1310S/SM/LC
SFP-2RX/3GSDI/1310S/SM/LC
Management
Application Notes
Specifications
SFP Electrical Transceivers
SFP Electrical Gigabit Ethernet Transceiver
Features
3G-SDI SFP Electrical Transceivers
Features
SFP/3GSDI/ELECTRICAL/DIN
585
SFP/3GSDI/ELECTRICAL/HBNC
586
Management
Application Notes
Specifications
3G-SDI SFP Electrical Dual Transmitters and Dual Receivers
SFP-2TX/3GSDI/ELECTRICAL/HBNC
Features:
586
586
587
587
587
588
SFP-2RX/3GSDI/ELECTRICAL/HBNC
Features:
589
590
Management
Application Notes
Specifications
591
591
592
Management and Switch Modules

General Information
Identification
Module Design
Module Handling
Management
Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Labeling
Frontplate Labels
Module Type Label
Certification Label
Warranty Label
NCU-II
Faceplate Markings
Description
Functions and Features
Interfaces
28
575
575
575
576
576
578
580
580
581
582
582
582
583
585
593
594
594
594
594
595
595
595
595
595
596
596
596
596
597
597
597
598
Serial Port
598
USB Ports
599
Ethernet Ports
Operating System
Reset Button
Default NCU-II Settings
Battery
LED Indicators
Labeling
Module Type Label
Warranty Label
Specifications
NCU (NCU2E Type)
Faceplate Markings
Description
Interfaces
599
600
600
601
601
601
602
602
602
603
603
603
604
604
604
605
Ethernet Ports
605
USB Ports
606
Operating System
Reset Button
Default NCU Settings
Battery
Slot Positions
LED Indicators
Labeling
Module Type Label
Certification Label
Warranty Label
Specifications
NCU-II-P
Faceplate Markings
Description
Interfaces
606
606
607
607
607
608
608
608
608
609
609
609
610
611
611
611
612
Ethernet Ports
612
USB Ports
613
Serial Port
614
Operating System
Reset Button
Switch Over Button
Default NCU-II-P Settings
Battery
Slot Positions
LED Indicators
Labeling
Module Type Label
Warranty Label
614
614
615
615
615
616
616
616
616
617
617
29
Specifications
UTM
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Interfaces
617
618
619
619
619
620
Ethernet Ports
620
Telemetry Port
621
LED Indicators
Slot Positions
Labeling
Module Type Label
Certification Label
Warranty Label
Specifications
PSCU
Faceplate Markings
Description
LED Indicators
Slot Positions
Labeling
Module Type Label
Certification Label
Warranty Label
Specifications
SCU
Faceplate Markings
Description
Optical Interfaces
Slot Positions
LED Indicators
Labeling
Module Type Label
Warranty Label
Specifications
SCU-S
Faceplate Markings
Description
Ethernet Ports
LED Indicators
Slot Positions
Labeling
Module Type Label
Warranty Label
Specifications
30
622
623
623
623
623
623
624
624
624
625
626
626
627
627
627
627
627
628
628
628
629
629
630
630
630
631
631
631
632
632
632
633
633
633
634
634
635
635
635
636
636
636
SCU-II
Faceplate Markings
Description
Optical Interfaces
Slot Positions
LED Indicators
Labeling
Module Type Label
Warranty Label
Specifications
Optical Path Protection Switch (OPPM)
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Slot Positions
LED Indicators
Labeling
Specifications
VSM
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Receive Direction
Transmit Direction
Slot Positions
LED Indicators
Labeling
Module Type Label
Certification Label
Warranty Label
Specifications
RSM-OLM#1630
Faceplate Markings
Description
Push Button
Signal Path (Fault Free)
Receive Direction
Transmit Direction
Signal Path (Fault Detected)
Receive Direction
Transmit Direction
Slot Positions
LED Indicators
Labeling
Module Type Label
Certification Label
637
637
637
638
638
639
639
640
640
640
640
641
641
642
642
642
643
643
643
644
645
646
646
646
646
647
647
647
648
648
648
648
649
649
649
650
650
650
651
652
653
653
654
654
655
655
655
656
656
656
31
Warranty Label
Specifications
RSM-SF#1510
Faceplate Markings
Description
Modes of Operation
Automatic Mode
Lock Mode
Push Buttons
Signal Path
Slot Positions
Labeling
Module Type Label
Certification Label
Warranty Label
LED Indicators
Specifications
RSM-SF#1310
Faceplate Markings
Description
Modes of Operation
Automatic Mode
Lock Mode
Push Buttons
Signal Path
Slot Positions
LED Indicators
Labeling
Module Type Label
Certification Label
Warranty Label
Specifications
OSCM-PN (HW Rev. 2.00)
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Client Ethernet Interface Characteristics
Reset Button
Interworking
Signal Path
Receive Direction
Transmit Direction
Slot Positions
LED Indicators
Labeling
Module Type Label
Certification Label
32
656
657
657
658
658
658
659
659
659
659
660
660
660
661
661
661
662
662
662
663
663
663
664
664
664
664
665
665
666
666
666
666
667
667
667
668
668
669
669
670
671
671
671
671
672
672
672
672
673
673
Warranty Label
Specifications
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Interworking
Signal Path
Receive Direction
Transmit Direction
Battery
Slot Positions
LED Indicators
Labeling
Module Type Label
Certification Label
Warranty Label
Specifications
OSCM-V#1630
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Reset Button
Signal Path
Receive Direction
Battery
Slot Positions
LED Indicators
Labeling
Module Type Label
Certification Label
Warranty Label
Specifications
2OSCM-V#1630
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Reset Button
Signal Path
Receive Direction
Transmit Direction
Battery
Slot Positions
LED Indicators
673
673
674
675
675
676
676
677
678
678
678
679
679
679
679
679
680
680
680
680
681
682
682
682
683
683
683
684
684
684
685
685
685
685
686
686
686
687
688
688
689
689
689
690
690
690
690
691
691
691
33
Labeling
Module Type Label
Certification Label
Warranty Label
Specifications
NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS
Faceplate Markings
Description
Interfaces
Serial Port
695
USB Port
695
Ethernet Port
696
Operating System
Reset Button
Battery
Slot Positions
LED indicators
Labeling
Module Type Label
Warranty Label
Specifications
697
697
697
697
698
698
699
699
699
699
699
Reconfigurable Optical Layer Device Hardware

ROADM-C40/40/OPM-3HU/2DC
Description
Key Features
Hardware Architecture
Optical Module Assembly
CM Assembly
Management Interface Assembly
Power Supply
Circuit Breakers
Grounding
Cooling
Management Ports
Craft Interface Port
Client Ports
Monitor Port
Network Port
Upgrade Port
Signal Path
West - East Direction
East - West Direction
LED Indicators
Fiber Tray
34
691
692
692
692
692
693
693
693
694
695
701
703
703
705
706
706
707
707
707
707
707
708
708
708
708
709
710
710
710
711
711
712
712
712
Adaptor Brackets
Labeling
Specifications
ROADM-C80/0/OPM
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Client Port
Upgrade Port
Network Port
Block Diagram
Signal Path
ROADM-C80/0/OPM Functional Applications
40 Channel ROADM NEs
Line Amp NE
Slot Positions
LED Indicators
Labeling
Module Type Label
Certification Label
Warranty Label
Specifications
8ROADM-C40/0/OPM
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Client Ports
Network Port
Signal Path
Slot Positions
LED Indicators
Labeling
Module Type Label
Certification Label
Warranty Label
Specifications
8ROADM-C80/0/OPM Module
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Client Ports
Network Port
Signal Path
Slot Positions
LED Indicators
Labeling
Module Type Label
Certification Label
Warranty Label
712
712
713
713
714
714
714
715
715
715
715
716
717
717
718
719
719
720
720
720
720
721
721
721
722
722
723
723
723
723
724
724
724
724
725
725
726
726
727
727
728
728
728
728
729
729
729
729
730
730
35
Specifications
9ROADM-C96/0/OPM
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Client Ports
Network Port
Signal Path
Slot Positions
LED Indicators
Labeling
Module Type Label
Certification Label
Warranty Label
Specifications
4ROADM-C96/0/OPM
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Client Ports
Network Port
Signal Path
Slot Positions
LED Indicators
Labeling
Module Type Label
Certification Label
Warranty Label
Specifications
4ROADM-E-C96/0/OPM
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Client Ports
Network Port
Signal Path
Slot Positions
LED Indicators
Labeling
Module Type Label
Certification Label
Warranty Label
Specifications
CCM-C40/8
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Client Port
Network Port
Compatible Modules
36
731
731
732
732
733
733
733
733
735
735
735
735
735
736
736
737
738
738
739
739
739
739
740
740
741
741
741
741
742
743
744
744
745
745
745
745
746
746
747
747
747
748
748
748
749
749
749
749
750
750
CCM-C40/8 Block Diagram

Optical Signal Flow
CCM-C40/8 Functional Applications
ROADM Fixed Add/Drop
Colorless Directionless Add/Drop
40 Channel Colorless Add/Drop
Slot Positions
LED Indicators
Labeling
Module Type Label
Certification Label
Warranty Label
Specifications
CCM-C80/8
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Client Port
Network Port
Compatible Modules
Optical Signal Flow
Slot Positions
LED Indicators
Labeling
Module Type Label
Certification Label
Warranty Label
Specifications
CCM-C96/9
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Client Port
Network Port
Compatible Modules
Block Diagram
Optical Signal Flow
Functional Application
Coherent Colorless and Directionless Add-Drop
Slot Positions
LED Indicators
Labeling
Module Type Label
Certification Label
750
751
752
752
753
754
755
755
755
756
756
756
757
757
757
758
758
758
758
759
759
760
760
760
761
762
763
764
764
764
765
765
765
766
766
766
767
767
767
767
768
768
769
769
769
770
770
770
770
771
37
Warranty Label
Specifications
4-OPCM
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Operating modes
Constant Attenuation
Constant Output Power
Applications
Replacement of Fixed Attenuators
Power Balancing
Power Pre-Emphasis
Alien Wavelength Support
Operating Mode Usage
Signal Path
Slot Positions
LED Indicators
Labeling
Module Type Label
Certification Label
Warranty Label
Specifications
779
General Information
Identification
Naming Conventions
Module Design
Demultiplexer and Multiplexer
Drop and Add Filter
Splitter/Coupler
Optical Interleaver/Deinterleaver
Module Handling
Management
Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Labeling
Frontplate Labels
Module Type Label
Certification Label
Warranty Label
ILM50-#DC
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Receive Direction
Transmit Direction
Slot Positions
38
771
771
772
772
773
773
773
773
774
774
774
774
774
775
775
775
776
776
776
776
777
777
777
781
785
785
788
789
789
789
789
789
790
790
790
790
790
790
791
792
793
794
794
794
795
795
795
796
Specifications
2CLSM-#D01-#D64
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Receive Direction
Transmit Direction
Slot Positions
Specifications
40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy
Faceplate Markings
Variants
Description
Features
Signal Path
Receive Direction
Transmit Direction
Placement
Accessories
Adaptor Brackets
FIBER FINGER/2HU
Front Cover
LED Indicator
Shelf Labeling
Shelf Type Label
Certification Label
Japanese Label
Specifications
40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Receive Direction
Transmit Direction
Placement
Accessories
Adaptor Brackets
FIBER FINGER/2HU
Front Cover
Shelf Labeling
Frontplate Labels
Shelf Type Label
Certification Label
Japanese Label
Specifications
40CSM/2HU-#19595-#19205
796
797
797
798
798
798
799
799
799
799
800
800
801
801
804
804
804
804
805
805
805
805
806
806
806
807
807
807
808
808
809
809
809
812
812
813
813
813
813
813
813
814
814
815
815
816
816
816
817
817
39
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Receive Direction
Transmit Direction
Placement
Accessories
Adaptor Brackets
FIBER FINGER/2HU
Front Cover
LED Indicator
Shelf Labeling
Frontplate Labels
Shelf Type Label
Certification Label
Japanese Label
Specifications
40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#19200
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Receive Direction
Transmit Direction
Placement
Accessories
Adaptor Brackets
FIBER FINGER/2HU LEFT
Front Cover
Shelf Labeling
Frontplate Labels
Shelf Type Label
Certification Label
Japanese Label
Specifications
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19xxx-#19yyy
Faceplate Markings
Variants
Description
Features
Signal Path
Receive Direction
Transmit Direction
Placement
Accessories
Adaptor Brackets
FIBER FINGER/2HU
40
817
818
820
820
821
821
821
821
821
822
822
823
823
823
823
824
824
825
825
826
826
826
829
829
830
830
830
831
831
831
832
832
832
832
833
833
833
834
834
834
835
835
839
839
840
840
840
840
840
841
Front Cover
LED Indicator
Shelf Labeling
Frontplate Labels
Shelf Type Label
Certification Label
Japanese Label
Specifications
40CSM/P-2HU#19590-#19200-DM
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Receive Direction
Transmit Direction
Placement
Accessories
Adaptor Brackets
FIBER FINGER/2HU
Front Cover
Shelf Labeling
Frontplate Labels
Shelf Type Label
Certification Label
Japanese Label
Specifications
40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
Faceplate Markings
Variants
Description
Features
Signal Path
Receive Direction
Transmit Direction
Placement
Specifications
96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
De-Multiplexing Direction
Multiplexing Direction
Placement
Accessories
Adaptor Brackets
Front Cover
IEEE 1394 Interface Cable
841
842
842
842
842
843
843
844
844
845
845
846
848
849
849
849
850
850
850
850
851
851
851
851
852
852
853
853
854
855
855
855
857
857
858
858
858
858
859
859
860
864
864
865
865
865
866
866
866
866
41
LED Indicator
Shelf Labeling
Frontplate Labels
Shelf Type Label
Japanese Label
Specifications
2BSM-#D01-#D32
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Receive Direction
Transmit Direction
Slot Positions
Specifications
4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
Faceplate Markings
Variants
Description
Features
Signal Path
Receive Direction
Transmit Direction
Slot Positions
Specifications
8GSM-#D01-#D32
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Receive Direction
Transmit Direction
Slot Positions
Specifications
1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy
Faceplate Markings
Variants
Description
Features
Signal Path
Receive Direction (Dropping a Channel Group)
Transmit Direction (Adding a Channel Group)
Slot Positions
Specifications
5GSM-#19590-#19200
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
42
866
867
867
867
868
868
869
870
870
871
871
871
872
872
872
872
873
874
874
874
875
875
876
876
876
876
877
878
878
879
879
879
880
880
880
881
881
882
883
883
883
884
884
884
884
885
886
886
886
887

Slot Positions
Specifications
8CSM-#19xxx-#19yyy
Faceplate Markings
Variants
Description
Features
Signal Path
Receive Direction
Transmit Direction
Slot Positions
Specifications
4CSM+#19xxx-#19yyy
Faceplate Markings
Variants
Description
Features
Signal Path
Receive Direction
Transmit Direction
Slot Positions
Specifications
4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
Faceplate Markings
Variants
Description
Features
Signal Path
Receive Direction
Transmit Direction
Slot Positions
Specifications
4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy
Faceplate Markings
Variants
Description
Features
Signal Path
Receive Direction
Transmit Direction
Slot Positions
Specifications
1CSM+#Dxx-E/W
Faceplate Markings
Variants
Description
Features
Signal path
887
887
888
888
889
890
890
891
894
894
895
895
895
896
896
897
897
898
901
901
902
902
902
903
903
904
904
905
906
906
907
907
907
907
908
909
909
910
911
911
912
912
912
913
913
914
914
915
915
916
43
Receive Direction (Dropping a Single Channel)

Transmit Direction (Adding a Single Channel)
Slot Positions
Specifications
1CSM+#Dxx-E/W
Faceplate Markings
Variants
Description
Features
Signal path
Transmit Direction (Adding a single Channel)
Slot Positions
Specifications
1CSM+#19xxx
Faceplate Markings
Variants
Description
Features
Signal Path
Transmit direction (Adding a Single Channel)
Slot Positions
Specifications
2CLSM-#D01-#D64-SFx
Faceplate Markings
Variants
Description
Features
Signal Path
Receive Direction
Transmit Direction
Slot Positions
Specifications
16CSM-#D01-#D32-SFx
Faceplate Markings
Variants
Description
Features
Signal Path
Receive Direction
Transmit Direction
Slot Positions
Specifications
16CSM-#D33-#D64-SFx
Faceplate Markings
Variants
Description
Features
Signal Path
44
916
916
916
917
917
918
918
919
920
920
920
920
921
921
921
922
922
923
923
924
924
924
924
925
925
926
926
926
927
927
928
928
928
928
929
930
930
930
933
934
934
935
935
935
936
937
937
937
940
941
Receive Direction
Transmit Direction
Slot Positions
Specifications
OSFM+#1490-SFA
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Transmit Direction (Adding an OSC)
Receive Direction (Dropping an OSC)
Slot Positions
Specifications
OSFM+#1510-SFB
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Slot Positions
Specifications
2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Receive Direction
Transmit Direction
Slot Positions
Specifications
3BSM-#G1310-#C1610
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Receive Direction
Transmit Direction
Slot Positions
Specifications
3BSM-#G1310-#C1610-E/W
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Receive Direction
Transmit Direction
Slot Positions
Specifications
4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy
941
941
942
942
943
944
944
944
945
945
945
945
946
946
947
947
947
948
948
948
948
949
949
949
950
950
950
951
951
951
951
952
953
953
954
954
954
955
955
955
956
957
957
958
958
959
959
959
959
960
45
Faceplate Markings
Variants
Description
Features
Signal Path
Receive Direction
Transmit Direction
Slot Positions
Specifications
8CSM+#C1470-#C1610
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Receive Direction
Transmit Direction
Slot Positions
Specifications
1CSM+#G1310
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Receive Direction (Dropping the Gray Channel)
Transmit Direction (Adding the Gray Channel)
Slot Positions
Specifications
1CSM+#Cxxxx
Faceplate Markings
Variants
Description
Features
Signal Path
Slot Positions
Specifications
1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W
Faceplate Markings
Variants
Description
Features
Signal path
Slot Positions
Specifications
1CSM/P-#Cxxxx-#Cxxxx-SF-E/W
Faceplate Markings
Variants
46
960
961
961
962
962
963
963
963
963
964
965
965
966
966
967
967
967
968
968
969
969
969
970
970
970
970
971
971
972
972
973
973
973
974
974
974
974
975
975
976
977
977
977
978
978
978
978
979
979
980
Description
Features
Signal Path
Slot Positions
Specifications
4CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-SF-E(W)
Faceplate Markings
Variants
Description
Features
Signal Path
Receive Direction
Transmit Direction
Slot Positions
Specifications
2CSM+#G1310-#Cxxxx-E/W
Faceplate Markings
Variants
Description
Features
Signal Path
Receive Direction (Separating Channels)
Transmit Direction (Adding Channels)
Slot Positions
Specifications
5GSM/P-#19590-#19200-DM
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Receive Direction
Transmit Direction
Slot Positions
Specifications
8CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-DM
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Receive Direction
Transmit Direction
Slot Positions
Specifications
2BSM/P-#C1270-#C1610-DM
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Receive Direction
Transmit Direction
981
981
981
982
982
983
983
984
984
985
985
986
986
986
987
987
988
988
989
990
990
990
990
991
991
992
992
993
994
994
995
995
995
995
996
997
997
998
998
999
999
999
1000
1000
1000
1001
1002
1002
1003
1003
47
Slot Positions
Specifications
8CSM/P+#C1470-#C1610-DM
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Receive Direction
Transmit Direction
Slot Positions
Specifications
8CSM/P-#19xxx-#19yyy
Faceplate Markings
Variants
Description
Features
Signal Path
Receive Direction
Transmit Direction
Slot Positions
Specifications
8CSM/P-#C1270-#C1450
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Receive Direction
Transmit Direction
Slot Positions
Specifications
1CSM/P+#Cxxxx
Faceplate Markings
Variants
Description
Features
Signal Path
Transmit Direction (Adding a single channel)
Slot Positions
Specifications
1CSM/P+#Cxxxx-E/W
Faceplate Markings
Variants
Description
Features
Signal Path
Slot Positions
Specifications
48
1003
1004
1004
1005
1005
1006
1007
1007
1007
1008
1008
1008
1009
1009
1010
1013
1013
1013
1014
1014
1014
1015
1016
1016
1017
1017
1017
1018
1018
1018
1019
1020
1020
1021
1022
1022
1023
1023
1023
1023
1024
1025
1025
1027
1027
1027
1028
1028
1028
1028
OSFM+#1510
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Receive Direction (Dropping the OSC)
Transmit Direction (Adding the OSC)
Slot Positions
Specifications
OSFM+#1630
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Slot Positions
Specifications
2-OTFM+#1650
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Traffic of N-1 to U-1 and N-2 to U-2(Dropping/Adding the 1650 nm Wavelength)
1029
1030
1030
1030
1031
1031
1031
1031
1032
1032
1033
1033
1033
1034
1034
1034
1034
1034
1035
1036
1036
1036
1037
1037
Receive Direction
1037
Transmit Direction
1038
Traffic of U-1 to N-1 and N-2 to U-2(Dropping/Adding the 1650 nm Wavelength)
1038
Receive Direction
1038
Transmit Direction
1038
Traffic of N-1 to U-1 and U-2 to N-2(Dropping/Adding the 1650 nm Wavelength)
1039
Receive Direction
1039
Transmit Direction
1039
Traffic of N-2 to U-2 and U-1 to N-1(Dropping/Adding the 1650 nm Wavelength)
1040
Receive Direction
1040
Transmit Direction
1040
Slot Positions
Specifications
5PSM
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Client Port
Network Port
Signal Path
Receive Direction
Transmit Direction
Slot Positions
Specifications
1041
1041
1042
1042
1043
1043
1043
1044
1044
1045
1045
1046
1046
49
8PSM
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Client Port
Network Port
Signal Path
N to C Path
C to N Path
Slot Positions
Specifications
PSM-95/5
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Slot Positions
Specifications
2PSM-95/5
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Ingress Direction
Egress Direction
Slot Positions
Specifications
1PM/SM
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Slot Positions
Specifications
1PM/MM
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Slot Positions
Specifications
2PM/SM
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
50
1047
1048
1048
1048
1048
1048
1049
1049
1050
1050
1050
1051
1052
1052
1052
1052
1053
1053
1054
1055
1055
1055
1056
1056
1056
1057
1057
1058
1058
1059
1059
1059
1060
1060
1060
1060
1061
1061
1062
1062
1062
1063
1063
1063
1063
1064
1064
1065
1065
1066
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Slot Positions
Specifications
2PM/MM
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Slot Positions
Specifications
2PM/MM-OM3
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Signal Path
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Slot Positions
Specifications
J-Y/SM Cable
Description
Variants
Features
Signal Path
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Specifications
J-Y/MM62 Cable
Description
Variants
Features
Signal Path
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Specifications
J-Y/MM-OM3 Cable
Description
Features
Signal Paths
Transmit Directions
Receive Directions
Specifications
J/SM/4CS-#C1270-#C1330/LC/0400
Description
Features
Fiber Cable Operation
Specifications
1066
1066
1066
1067
1068
1069
1069
1069
1070
1070
1070
1070
1071
1072
1073
1073
1073
1074
1074
1075
1075
1075
1076
1076
1077
1077
1078
1078
1079
1080
1081
1081
1082
1082
1083
1083
1084
1084
1085
1085
1086
1087
1089
1089
1090
1091
1091
1091
1092
1093
51
8-Port CWDM Passive MUX/DMX for Tyco FIST Enclosure

8-Port CWDM Passive MUX/DMX for Tyco FOSC Closures
8MDX/P+#C1470-#C1610-TE02
Description
Features
1099
Signal Path
1099
Receive Direction
1100
Transmit Direction
1100
Location Placement
Labeling
Specifications
8MDX/P-#C1270-#C1450-TE02
Description
1100
1101
1101
1102
1102
Features
1103
Signal Path
1103
Receive Direction
1104
Transmit Direction
1104
Location Placement
Labeling
Specifications
1104
1105
1105
Optical Amplification Hardware

General Information
Identification
Naming Conventions of EDFAs
Basic EDFA Functionality and Design
Features
Functions
Components
Mode of Operation
Use
Module design
Module Handling
Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Labeling
Frontplate Labels
Module Type Label
Certification Label
Warranty Label
EDFA-C-S10
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)
Signal Path
Slot Positions
52
1094
1097
1098
1098
1107
1108
1110
1110
1112
1112
1112
1112
1112
1113
1113
1113
1113
1114
1114
1114
1114
1114
1115
1116
1117
1117
1118
1118
1118
1119
1119
LED indicators
Labeling
Specifications
EDFA-C-S18-GCB
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Standby Mode
Signal Path
Slot Positions
LED indicators
Labeling
Specifications
EDFA-C-S18-GC
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Standby Mode
Signal Path
Slot Positions
LED Indicators
Labeling
Specifications
EDFA-C-S20-GCB
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Standby Mode
Signal Path
Slot Positions
LED Indicators
Labeling
Specifications
EDFA-C-D20-VGC
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Standby Mode
Signal Path
Slot Positions
LED indicators
Labeling
Specifications
EDFA-C-D20-GC
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Standby Mode
Signal Path
Slot Positions
1119
1119
1119
1120
1120
1121
1121
1121
1122
1122
1122
1122
1122
1123
1124
1124
1124
1125
1125
1125
1125
1126
1126
1126
1127
1127
1127
1128
1128
1128
1128
1129
1129
1130
1131
1131
1131
1132
1132
1133
1133
1133
1133
1134
1135
1135
1135
1136
1136
1137
53
LED Indicators
Labeling
Specifications
EDFA-C-D17-GC
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Standby Mode
Signal Path
Slot Positions
LED indicators
Labeling
Specifications
EDFA-L-D17-GC
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Standby Mode
Signal Path
Slot Positions
LED indicators
Labeling
Specifications
EDFA-C-S20-GCB-DM
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Standby Mode
Signal Path
Slot Positions
LED Indicators
Labeling
Specifications
EDFA-C-D20-VGC-DM
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Standby Mode
Signal Path
Slot Positions
LED indicators
Labeling
Specifications
EDFA-C-D20-VLGC-DM
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Standby Mode
Signal Path
Slot Positions
54
1137
1137
1137
1138
1139
1139
1139
1140
1140
1141
1141
1141
1141
1142
1143
1143
1143
1144
1144
1145
1145
1145
1145
1146
1146
1147
1147
1147
1147
1148
1148
1148
1148
1149
1150
1150
1150
1151
1151
1152
1152
1152
1152
1153
1154
1154
1154
1155
1155
1156
LED Indicators
Labeling
Specifications
EDFA-C-S26-VGC-DM
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Upgrade Interface Characteristics
Monitoring Interface Characteristics
Optical Output Power Monitoring
Laser Safety
APR
Recovery from Loss of Pilot Signal
Signal Path
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Interworking
Connecting
Slot Positions
LED Indicators
Labeling
Specifications
EDFA-C-S26-VGCB-DM
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Laser Safety
Signal Path
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Interworking
Connecting
Slot Positions
LED Indicators
Labeling
Specifications
EDFA-C-D27-GCB-DM
Faceplate Markings
Description
Labeling
Specifications
RAMAN-C10
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Components
1156
1156
1156
1157
1158
1158
1159
1159
1159
1159
1160
1160
1160
1161
1161
1161
1161
1162
1162
1162
1162
1162
1162
1162
1163
1163
1164
1164
1165
1165
1166
1166
1166
1167
1167
1167
1167
1167
1168
1169
1169
1169
1169
1170
1171
1171
1172
1172
1172
1173
55

Monitoring Interface
Power and Gain Control
Pump Modes of Operation
Laser Safety
ALS
APR
APS
Start-Up
Signal Path
Signal Amplification
Receive Direction
Transmit Direction
ASE Table
Application
Interworking
Slot Positions
LED Indicators
Labeling
Specifications
2RAMAN-C15-LL
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Components
Laser Safety
APS
Start-Up
Signal Path
FWD RAMAN Path
BWD RAMAN Path
ASE Table
Application
Compatible Modules
Functional Applications
Terminal Node Configurations
Line Node Configurations
Thru/Add/Drop/Regeneration Node Configurations
Slot Positions
LED Indicators
Labeling
Specifications
56
1173
1173
1173
1173
1174
1174
1175
1175
1175
1176
1176
1177
1177
1177
1177
1178
1178
1178
1178
1178
1178
1179
1180
1180
1181
1182
1182
1182
1182
1182
1183
1183
1183
1184
1184
1185
1186
1186
1186
1187
1187
1188
1188
1189
1189
1190
1191
1191
1191
1192
AMP-S20H-C15
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Laser Safety
Shut Down Behavior
1192
1193
1193
1194
1194
1195
1195
1195
1195
1196
1196
1196
EDFA Shut Down
1197
Raman Shut Down
1197
Fiber Detection
BWD Raman Start-Up
Signal Path
Signal Path
1197
1198
1198
1198
EDFA Path
1198
BWD RAMAN Path
1199
OSC Path
1200
ASE Table
1200
Application
Compatible Modules
Slot Positions
LED Indicators
Labeling
Specifications
AMP-S20L-C15
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Components
Laser Safety
Shut Down Behavior
1200
1201
1201
1201
1201
1201
1202
1203
1203
1204
1205
1205
1205
1205
1205
1206
1206
1206
1207
EDFA Shut Down
1207
Raman Shut Down
1207
Fiber Detection
BWD Raman Start-Up
Signal Path
Signal Path
EDFA Path
1208
1208
1208
1209
1209
57
BWD RAMAN Path
1210
OSC Path
1210
ASE Table
1211
Application
Compatible Modules
Slot Positions
LED Indicators
Labeling
Specifications
EDFA-S20H
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Components
Laser Safety
Fiber Detection
Signal Path
Application
Compatible Modules
Slot Positions
LED Indicators
Labeling
Specifications
EDFA-S20L
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Components
Laser Safety
Fiber Detection
Signal Path
Application
Compatible Modules
Slot Positions
LED Indicators
Labeling
Specifications
2EDFA-S20L-S10L
Faceplate Markings
Description
58
1211
1211
1212
1212
1212
1212
1213
1214
1214
1215
1215
1215
1215
1216
1216
1216
1216
1217
1217
1217
1218
1218
1218
1219
1219
1220
1220
1221
1221
1222
1222
1222
1222
1223
1223
1223
1224
1224
1224
1225
1225
1225
1226
1226
1227
1228
1228
Features
Components
Laser Safety
Fiber Detection
Signal Path
Application
Compatible Modules
Slot Positions
LED Indicators
Labeling
Specifications
Laser Safety Compliant Amplifier Configurations
Important Safety Information
Series Optical Amplifier Configurations
Series Pre-amp Configurations
Series Line-Amp Configurations
Series Booster-Amp Configurations
Parallel Optical Amplifier Configurations
S-Type EDFAs in Parallel Configurations
Hybrid EDFA in Parallel Configurations
RAMAN-C10
2RAMAN-C15-LL
Amp-S20H-C15 and Amp-S20L-C15
Dispersion Compensation Modules
General Information
Labeling
Frontplate Labels
Module Type Label
Certification Label
Warranty Label
DCF-M/xxx/SSMF
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Optical Connectors
Variants
Signal Path
Slot Positions
LED Indicator
Labeling
Specifications
DCG-M/xxx/SSMF
Faceplate Markings
1228
1229
1229
1229
1229
1230
1230
1230
1231
1231
1232
1232
1232
1233
1233
1233
1235
1236
1237
1237
1238
1239
1240
1240
1242
1245
1246
1247
1251
1252
1252
1252
1252
1253
1253
1254
1254
1255
1255
1255
1255
1256
1256
1256
1256
1257
1257
1257
59
Description
Features
Optical Connectors
Variants
Signal Path
Slot Positions
LED Indicator
Labeling
Specifications
DCG50-M/xxx/SSMF
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Optical Connectors
Variants
Signal Path
Slot Positions
LED Indicator
Labeling
Specifications
DCG-M/xxx/TWRS
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Optical Connectors
Variants
Signal Path
Slot Positions
LED Indicator
Labeling
Specifications
DCG50-M/xxx/TWRS
Faceplate Markings
Description
Features
Optical Connectors
Variants
Signal Path
Slot Positions
LED Indicator
Labeling
Specifications
DCF1HU-P Shelf
Description
Features
Optical Connectors
Variants
Adaptor Brackets
Signal Path
Placement
60
1258
1258
1258
1259
1259
1259
1259
1259
1259
1260
1260
1261
1261
1261
1261
1262
1262
1262
1262
1262
1263
1263
1264
1264
1264
1264
1265
1265
1265
1265
1265
1266
1266
1267
1267
1267
1267
1268
1268
1268
1268
1268
1269
1269
1269
1270
1270
1271
1271
1272
Labeling the Shelf

Shelf Type Label
Specifications
Dummy Modules
Variants
Description
Slot Positions
Labeling
Electrical Cables
Power Cables
AC Power Cables
Naming Conventions
Variants
DC Power Cables
CBL/DC/300/3AWG14/TB
CBL/DC/300/3AWG14/FLT/R-/B+
PC300/3WIRE/RED/BLACK/14AWG
CBL/DC/300/2AWG16/1HU-HP
CBL/DC/300/2AWG10/SUB-D
Earthing Kit for Shelves
Serial and Ethernet Cables
Overview
Serial Null Modem Cable
USB Cable
Ethernet Cables
Cable Wiring
Straight-Through Ethernet Cable Pinouts
Crossover Ethernet Cable
Telemetry Interface Cable
IC1/HBNCP/BNCJ/100
Fiber-Optic Accessories
SCU-Intercom-Kit
Optical Fiber Bundles
J/SM/LC/OCT/0800
J/SM/LC/HEX/0800
Breakout Cables for SR4 and SR10 Clients
J/MM50/MPO12-LC08/0300
J/MM50/MPO12-LC08/1000
J/MM50/MPO24-LC20/0300
J/MM50/MPO24-LC20/1000
1272
1272
1272
1273
1275
1276
1276
1276
1277
1279
1280
1280
1280
1281
1285
1285
1288
1291
1292
1294
1297
1298
1300
1302
1306
1307
1307
1307
1308
1309
1310
1311
1313
1315
1315
1317
1319
1320
1322
1322
1323
1324
1324
1324
1324
1325
61
Patch Cords for SR10 Clients

J/MM50/MPO24/0310
J/MM50/MPO24/1000
1326
1326
1326
Equipment Types of FSP 3000R7 Hardware Components
1327
Index
1339
62
Related Documents Overview

Refer to these documents when planning, installing, provisioning, operating,
troubleshooting, and working with FSP3000R7 equipment and management tools:
Planning
System Description
This reference document describes the architecture and principles behind major
features such as transport protocols, protection, optical amplification, reconfigurable
OADMs, DCN, control plane, and management-related features.
Hardware Description
This describes physical details about each module such as front plate pictures and
markings, signal path description with block diagrams, and allowed placement and
labeling of the modules. For details related to the supported configurations of each
module, parameter values, and other management related data, refer to the
Management Data Guide.
Starting with Release 13.1, the System Description and Hardware
Description replace the Planning and Engineering Guide.
Note
Module and System Specification

This document contains the technical specifications for the FSP 3000R7.
Pluggable Transceiver Module Specification

This document contains the descriptions and technical specifications for pluggable
transceiver modules used in ADVA Optical Networking products.
SH1PCS Technical Description
This document provides information about the Ethernet NT (FSP 3000R7-SH1PCS)

system such as PCP mode, automatic management provisioning, Ethernet ring
protection switching, Network topology, and service applications. It also describes the
hardware, such as:
l
SH1PCS 1U Chassis including connectors
Line Cards (XG-1S-CC, GE-8S-CC, GE-8E-CC)
Power Supply Units (PSU/AC-200 and PSU/DC-200)
Power Cables
supported pluggable interfaces,
and presents detailed technical specifications listed by functional area.
Installing
Critical Warnings
63
This document lists the most important safety requirements. Read this document
before installing, provisioning, or operating the FSP 3000R7.
Safety Guide
This document describes important safety precautions that are to be read and
observed before attempting to install, provision, configure, or operate the FSP
3000R7. Therefore, read this document first.
Installation and Commissioning Manual

This document includes procedures describing how to install an FSP 3000R7 node.
It covers everything from unpacking the shipment, rack-mounting the equipment,
connecting optical fibers, and includes basic commissioning.
OTDR Installation, Provisioning, and Operations Manual

This document covers installation, provisioning, operations, troubleshooting, and
maintenance of the OTDR unit.
SH1PCS Installation and Operations Manual

This document provides detailed information required to successfully install the
Ethernet NT (FSP 3000R7-SH1PCS) as well as how to provision, and operate the
system using the eVision Web Browser Management Tool. It also contains rules and
dependencies needed for configurations.
Provisioning and Operating
Network Element Director Online Help

This document describes how to provision, operate, and monitor the FSP 3000R7
system using Network Element Director. For detailed information about
configuration and management options, refer to the Management Data Guide.
Provisioning and Operations Manual

This document describes how to provision, operate, and monitor the FSP 3000R7
system using the Craft Console. Refer to the Management Data Guide while
following the procedures in the Provisioning and Operations Manual to look up
provisioning and management-related details.

SH1PCS Installation and Operations Manual

This document provides detailed information required to successfully install the
Ethernet NT (FSP 3000R7-SH1PCS) as well as how to provision, and operate the
system using the eVision Web Browser Management Tool. It also contains rules and
dependencies needed for configurations.
Working with Management Tools
Management Data Guide

This document contains all provisionable and read-only parameters for each module,
as well as the performance counters for the modules. This is a useful reference both
when planning and engineering a network and while following the instructions in the
management tool procedural documentation.
64
TL1 Commands and Syntax Guide
This document describes the TL1 commands available to provision, configure,

operate, and monitor the FSP3000R7.
TL1 Module Parameters Guide

This document provides reference information about all TL1-based provisioning and
performance monitoring options for the FSP 3000R7 modules, as well as the
conditions for them.
SH1PCS CLI Handbook

This document provides reference information about Command Line Interface
commands of the Ethernet NT (FSP 3000R7-SH1PCS) used for performance
monitoring, provisioning, operation, administration, and maintenance.
SH1PCS SNMP Users Guide

This document provides reference information about SNMP commands of the
Ethernet NT (FSP 3000R7-SH1PCS) used for performance monitoring, provisioning,
operation, administration, and maintenance.
Troubleshooting
Maintenance and Troubleshooting Manual

This document describes how to troubleshoot the FSP 3000R7 hardware and
software and perform maintenance tasks such as software and firmware upgrades.
TL1 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Manual

This document describes how to troubleshoot the FSP 3000R7 when managing it by
using TL1.

SH1PCS Maintenance and Troubleshooting Manual

This document describes how to troubleshoot the Ethernet NT (FSP 3000R7SH1PCS) system and perform Etherjack test procedures such as loopback,
Etherjack service assurance, connectivity fault management, and service
activation.
65
This page intentionally left blank.
66
Preface
The preface provides general information for the effective use of the FSP 3000R7
Hardware Description.
This publication is provided "as is," without express or implied warranty for accuracy and
completeness.
This chapter consists of these sections:
Purpose and Scope
68
Audience
68
68
69
71
72
72
73
67
Purpose and Scope
Purpose and Scope

This guide provides non-procedural descriptions of the Fiber Service Platform 3000
system, features, and hardware.
Audience
The Hardware Description is primarily intended to be read by anyone curious about FSP
3000R7 system capabilities and features.
This book is also intended for trained network engineers who require a convenient
reference detailing system and hardware functionality.

For an overview of the content of any one product release, please refer to the Release
Notes provided with your system.
Product
Release
Document
Number
Document
Issue
Issue
Date
Description
11.2
80000020923
Issue A
October
2012
New document updated

according to the content of
this release
Issue B
January
2013
Content updated according to

the content of this release.
Issue C
May 2013

the content of this release
12.1
80000024440
Issue A
August
2013

12.2
80000026935
Issue A
December
2013

Issue B
January
2014
Updated Client Channel Card

Protection feature for
2TWCC2G7
Issue A
March
2014

12.3
68
80000027939
Product
Release
Document
Number
Document
Issue
Issue
Date
Description
13.1
80000028987
Issue A
June 2014
Manual Name Change. Refer

to Related Documents
Overview
13.2
80000029751
Issue A
September
2014

13.3
80000031910
Issue A
March
2015

This section lists the common typographical conventions and symbols used throughout
this documentation.
Typographic Conventions
The documentation follows these typographic conventions:
Convention
Description
boldface font
Indicates keywords and emphasized words when appearing

in main text areas. All warnings are in boldface font.
blue font
Indicates a reference to a chapter, section, figure, table or

related documentation when appearing in main text areas.
CAPITALIZED font
Refers to the keys on your keyboard, e.g. ENTER marked .
courier
Courier font is used to identify words that can be read from

or typed into the command line interface.
[]
Elements in square brackets are optional.
Alternative elements are separated by a vertical bar.
The symbol ^ represents the key labeled Control - for

example, the key combination ^D means that you have to
hold down the Control key while you press the D key.
69
Convention
Description
<>
References are enclosed in angle brackets, for example:

<Esc> The escape key, marked Esc
<Enter> The Enter key, marked
<username> This reference, including the angle brackets, is
replaced by the appropriate user name.
Nonprinting characters, such as passwords.
Double inverted commas are used to enclose quoted text.
(bullet symbol)
Used in bulleted list of items where the sequence of items is

not relevant.
1, 2, 3 ...or
a), b), c)...
These numbering styles are used in lists of items where the

sequence of items is relevant.
* or 1, 2 etc.
These are used to point to table footnotes. The markers in

the text are arranged as continuous superscript numbers.
Footnote text (in smaller typeface) is placed at the bottom of
a table and starts with a superscript number.
->
Refers you to additional information.
Safety Symbol and Message Conventions

The safety alert symbols with the appropriate signal words and the note signs below are
used throughout this documentation to identify warnings, cautions, and notes.
WARNING
CAUTION
CAUTION
This symbol accompanies any instruction that draws attention to

the risks caused by electricity. These risks could result in death or
serious injury if the instruction is ignored or not followed correctly.
This symbol accompanies any instruction that draws attention to a

potentially hazardous situation/condition. This situation/condition, may
result in minor or moderate injury, if the instruction is ignored or not
followed correctly.
This symbol accompanies any instruction that draws attention to the risk
of possible laser radiation. This risk may result in serious eye injury, if
the instruction is ignored or not followed correctly.
This symbol accompanies any instruction that draws attention to the

possibility of equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge (ESD).
Damage can occur, if the ESD-prevention instructions are ignored or not
followed correctly.
70
This symbol accompanies any instruction that draws attention to the risk of
equipment damage, malfunction, process interruption, or negative impacts on
surroundings. These events can occur if the instruction is ignored or not followed
correctly.
A symbol that draws attention to the necessity and importance of
carefully reading all instructions before any installation or operation takes
place. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or damage to
equipment.
This symbol accompanies any instruction that draws attention to the
proper disposal of waste electrical or electronic equipment and its
components. Disregard of the instruction can threaten the environment.
This symbol accompanies any statement, supplemental information, or

helpful recommendation that should be observed.
Note
World Wide Web
You can access the most current ADVA Optical Networking documentation on the World
Wide Web by using the Customer Portal at:
http://www.advaoptical.com/
Contact your ADVA Optical Networking sales representative for details.
Documentation Disc
The FSP 3000R7 User Documentation Suite is available on disc delivered with the
product. The disc also contains a USB driver required for establishing a USB serial
connection.
Ordering Documentation
ADVA Optical Networking customers can order the FSP 3000R7 User Documentation
Suite and additional literature through a local ADVA Optical Networking sales
representative. For more current product release information, please refer to the home
page or contact Technical Services. See Obtaining Technical Assistance on p.72 and
Contact ADVA Optical Networking on p.73 for contact details.
71
We want our FSP 3000R7 documentation to be as helpful as possible. Feedback
regarding the manual is therefore always welcome.
You can email your comments/suggestions to:
global-techdocu@advaoptical.com
To submit your comments/suggestions by mail, use the following address:
ADVA Optical Networking SE
Technical Documentation
Mrzenquelle 1-3
98617 Meiningen-Dreissigacker
Germany
We appreciate and value your comments/suggestions to improve the quality of the
manual.

Product Maintenance Agreements and other customer assistance agreements are
available for ADVA Optical Networking products through your ADVA Optical Networking
distribution channel. Our service options include:
24 x7 telephone support
Web-based support tools
On-site support
Technical training, both on-site and at ADVA facilities in Germany and the USA
Expedited repair service
Extended hardware warranty service
Customer Portal
The ADVA Optical Networking Customer Portal provides a suite of interactive
networking services that provide immediate access to company information and
resources at any time, from anywhere in the world. This highly integrated internet
application is a powerful, easy-to-use tool for doing business with ADVA Optical
Networking.
The broad range of features and services provided by the portal helps customers and
partners to streamline business processes and to improve productivity. Through your
portal login, you will find information tailored especially for you, including networking
solutions, services, and programs. In addition, you can resolve technical issues by using
online support services, download and test software packages, and order ADVA Optical
Networking training materials.
Access the Customer Portal by using the ADVA Optical Networking home page at:
http://www.advaoptical.com/en/customer-login.aspx
72

Email questions regarding the Customer Portal to:
customer-portal-admin@advaoptical.com
Technical Services
Technical services are available to warranty or maintenance contract customers who
need technical assistance with a product from ADVA Optical Networking that is under
warranty or covered by a maintenance contract. To contact ADVA Optical Networking
Technical Services, go to the ADVA Optical Networking home page at:
http://www.advaoptical.com/en/about-us/contact-us.aspx
To contact ADVA Optical Networking by email, use the following address:
support@advaoptical.com

ADVA Optical Networking Europe, Middle East and Africa
Martinsried/Munich, Germany
+49 (0)89 89 06 65 0
ADVA Optical Networking America

Norcross, GA, USA
+1 687 728 8600
ADVA Optical Networking Asia

Shenzhen, China
+86 755 8621 7400
www.advaoptical.com
73
74
Acronyms & Abbreviations

This section contains the acronyms, abbreviations and symbols used in the Hardware
Description. The terms and their spelled out forms or their meaning are listed in
alphabetical order.
Symbols/Numerics
%
per cent
inch (a unit of length)
diameter
ohm (SI unit of electrical impedance or, in the direct current case,
electrical resistance)
degree Celsius
degree Fahrenheit
10 GE LAN
10 gigabit Ethernet used in local area network
10 GE WAN
10 gigabit Ethernet used in wide area network
1000BASE-T
1000 Mbit/s over twisted pair Cat 6e cable
100BASE-TX
100 Mbit/s over twisted pair Cat 6e cable (an Ethernet standard IEEE
802.3)
100GbE
100 Gigabit Ethernet (high-speed computer network standard which

supports sending Ethernet frames at 100 gigabits per second over
multiple 10 Gbit/s or 25 Gbit/s lanes)
10BASE-T
10 Mbit/s over twisted pair Cat 6 cable (an Ethernet standard IEEE
802.3)
10G
10 gigabit
10G FC
10 Gbit/s fiber channel (a network technology working at a line rate of

10.52Gbit/s (serial) or 12.75Gbit/s (parallel))
10G IB
10G infiniband
10GbE
10 gigabit ethernet (a version of ethernet with a nominal data rate of 10

Gbit/s)
10GbE LAN PHY
10 gigabit ethernet LAN physical layer

10GBase-R LAN Physical interface
10GbE WAN PHY
10 gigabit Ethernet WAN physical layer

10GBase-W WAN Physical interace
75
Symbols/Numerics
10PCA-PCN-1G3+10G
10PCA-PCN-1G3+10G is a 12-port packet channel access module

with ten 1 GbE client SFP and two 10 GbE network XFP type
pluggable interfaces.
10TCC-PCN-2G7US+10G
core type 10-port ADM channel module with ten client and two network
pluggable interfaces; up to eight GbE services on the client interface if
one network interface is configured and up to ten GbE services with
two network interfaces configured
10TCC-PCN-3GSDI+10G
core type 10-port 10G digital video add-drop multiplexer (ADM) channel
module with ten SFP client and two XFP network interfaces;
transports native digital video services over optical DWDM networks;
supports 3G-SDI, HD-SDI, SD-SDI, DVB-ASI, MADI digital audio as
unidirectional services as well as GbE as bidirectional service;
maximum aggregated data rate on the network ports of 10.7 Gbit/s
100G Core type 10-port TDM channel module (muxponder) with ten
SFP+ interfaces on the client side and an integrated single DWDM
interface on the network side; network interface is fully tunable over
the C band at 50 GHz channel spacing; the client interfaces support
10GbE WAN, STM64/OC192, 10GbE LAN, OTU2, OTU2e and
OTU1e services; network data rate for OTU4 protocols
100G Core type 10-port TDM channel module (muxponder) with ten
SFP+ interfaces on the client side and an integrated single coherent
DWDM interface on the network side; network interface is fully tunable
over the C band at 50 GHz channel spacing; the Rx wavelength is not
configurable but automatically tuned to the Tx wavelength; the client
interfaces support 10GbE WAN, STM64/OC192, 10GbE LAN, OTU2,
OTU2e and OTU1e services; network data rate for OTU4 protocols
10TCC-PCTN-4GU+10G
core type 10-port TDM channel module with ten pluggable interfaces
on the client side and one integrated 10 Gigabit DWDM interface on
the network side that is fully tunable in the C or L band; the client
interfaces support 1GbE, 1GFC, 2GFC and 4GFC services; module is
available in four variants:
10TCC-PCTN-4GU+10G-LN#DC
10TCC-PCTN-4GU+10G-V#DC
10TCC-PCTN-4GU+10G-V#D01-32
10TCC-PCTN-4GU+10G-V#DL
on the client side and one integrated, 10G long reach link, noise
optimized 50 GHz-spaced tunable DWDM interface on the network
side; support of C-band channels only; client port data rates of 1.25
Gbit/s, 1.0625 Gbit/s, 2.125 Gbit/s or 4.25 Gbit/s; maximum
aggregated data rate on the network port of 10.7 Gbit/s
on the client side and one integrated very-long reach 100 GHz-spaced
tunable DWDM interface on the network side; support of C-band
channels only; maximum client data rate of 4.25Gbit/s; aggregated
data rate on the network port of 10 Gbit/s
76
Symbols/Numerics
on the client side and one integrated, very-long reach link distance, 50
GHz-spaced tunable DWDM interface on the network side; support of
C-band channels only; client port data rates of 1.25 Gbit/s, 1.0625
Gbit/s, 2.125 Gbit/s or 4.250 Gbit/s; maximum aggregated data rate on
the network port of 10.7 Gbit/s
on the client side and one integrated, 10G very-long reach link
distance, 100 GHz-spaced tunable DWDM interface on the network
side; support of L-band channels only; client port data rates of 1.25
Gbit/s, 1.0625 Gbit/s, 2.125 Gbit/s or 4.250 Gbit/s; maximum
10TCC-PCTN-4GUS+10G
on the client side and one integrated 10 Gigabit DWDM interface on
the network side that is fully tunable in the C or L band; the client
interfaces support 1GbE, 1GFC, 2GFC, 4GFC, F155, F622 an F2488
services; module is available in three variants:
10TCC-PCTN-4GUS+10G-LN#DC
10TCC-PCTN-4GUS+10G-V#DC
10TCC-PCTN-4GUS+10G-V#DL
on the client side and one integrated, 10 G long reach link, noise
optimized 50GHz-spaced tunable DWDM interface on the network
side; support of C-band channels only; client port data rates between
155.52 Mbit/s and 4.25Gbit/s; maximum aggregated data rate on the
network port of 10.7Gbit/s
on the client side and one integrated, 10G very long reach link, 50
C-band channels only; client port data rates between 155.52 Mbit/s
and 4.25Gbit/s; maximum aggregated data rate on the network port of
10.7Gbit/s
on the client side and one integrated, 10G very long reach link, 100
L-band channels only; client port data rates between 155.52 Mbit/s and
4.25Gbit/s; maximum aggregated data rate on the network port of
10.7Gbit/s
10TCE-PCN-10G+100G
100G Enterprise type TDM channel module with ten SFP interfaces on
the client side (10x10G) and a single CFP interface on the network
side; aggregate network date rate of 111.81Gb/s (according to OTU-4
G.709); enhanced FEC (EFEC); two slots wide module
100G Enterprise type TDM channel module with ten SFP interfaces on
the client side (10x10G) and a single CFP interface on the network
side; aggregate network date rate of 111.81Gb/s (according to OTU-4
G.709); G.709 standard FEC (GFEC); two slots wide module
77
Symbols/Numerics
10TCE-PCN-16GU+100G
100G Enterprise type TDM channel module with ten SFP(+) interfaces
on the client side and a single CFP interface on the network side;
maximum client data rate of 14.025 Gbit/s; aggregated data rate on the
network port of 111.81 Gbit/s (according to OTU-4 G.709); two slots
wide module
100G Enterprise type TDM channel module with ten SFP(+) interfaces
on the client side and a single CFP interface on the network side;
supports encrypting of 100Gbit/s on the network interface; maximum
client data rate of 14.025 Gbit/s; aggregated data rate on the network
port of 111.81 Gbit/s (according to OTU-4 G.709); two slots wide
module
10WXC-PCN-10G
10 x 10G ODU-Cross-Connect module with 100G capacity providing

ten XFP interfaces; supports cross-connect of ODU2, ODU2e, ODU1
and ODU0s between OTU2/2e ports in accordance with ITU-T G.709
as well as mapping 10G-LAN into OTN
16CSM-#D01-#D32-SFA
16-port channel splitter module - single-fiber working - C band, location

A
16CSM-#D01-#D32-SFB
16-port channel splitter module - single-fiber working - C band, location

B
16CSM-#D01-#D32-SFx
16-port channel splitter module - single-fiber working - C band (short

form for 16CSM-#D01-#D32-SFA and 16CSM-#D01-#D32-SFB)
16CSM-#D33-#D64-SFA
16-port channel splitter module - single-fiber working - L band, location

A
16CSM-#D33-#D64-SFB
16-port channel splitter module - single-fiber working - L band, location

B
16CSM-#D33-#D64-SFx
16-port channel splitter module - single-fiber working - L band (short

form for 16CSM-#D33-#D64-SFA and 16CSM-#D33-#D64-SFB)
16G FC
16 gigabit fibre channel (a network technology working at a line rate of

14.025 Gbit/s)
1CSM/P+#Cxxxx
passive optical single channel CWDM splitter and combiner module

with upgrade port (It adds/drops a specific channel to/out of the
CWDM channel spectrum.)
1CSM/P+#Cxxxx-E/W
passive optical east/west single channel CWDM splitter and combiner

module with upgrade port (It adds/drops a specific channel to/out of the
CWDM channel spectrum.)
1CSM+#19xxx
single channel DWDM splitter and combiner module with upgrade port;
it adds/drops a specific channel to/out of the DWDM channel
spectrum #19590-#19200
1CSM+#19xxx-E/W
east/west single channel DWDM splitter and combiner module with

upgrade port; it adds/drops a specific channel to/out of the DWDM
channel spectrum #19560-#19240
78
Symbols/Numerics
1CSM+#Cxxxx
single channel CWDM splitter module with upgrade port (It adds/drops
a specific channel to/out of the CWDM channel spectrum.)
1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W
east/west single channel CWDM splitter module with upgrade port (It
adds/drops a specific channel to/out of the CWDM channel spectrum)
1CSM+#Dxx-E/W
east/west single channel DWDM splitter module with upgrade port; it

adds/drops a specific channel to/out of the DWDM C-band channel
spectrum
1CSM+#G1310
single channel CWDM splitter module with 1310-nm connectivity (It

adds/drops the gray 1310-nm channel to/out of the CWDM channel
spectrum.)
1G
1 gigabit
1G CL
1 gigabit coupling link
1G FC

1.0625 Gbit/s)
1GbE
1 gigabit ethernet (a technology for transmitting ethernet packets at a

rate of 1 Gbit/s)
1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy
1-port DWDM group splitter module with upgrade port - C band

(collective name)
1HU Shelf
1 HU-high equipment shelf
1PM/MM
single-port protection module multimode
1PM/SM
single-port protection module single-mode
2-OTFM+#1650
optical time-domain reflectometer filter module with upgrade port,

OTDR wavelength at 1650 nm
2.5G
2.5 Gigabit
2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610
2-port CWDM subband splitter module
2BSM-#D01-#D32
2-port DWDM red/blue splitter module - C band
2BSM/P-#C1270-#C1610-DM
passive 2-port CWDM band splitter module with gray interface at 1310
nm and monitoring port for dual power level monitoring
2CLSM
2-port DWDM C/L band splitter module (short form for 2CLSM-#D01#D64 or 2CLSM-#D01-#D64-SFx)
2CLSM-#D01-#D64
C-band/L-band splitter
2CLSM-#D01-#D64-SFA
DWDM 2-port C/L band splitter module - single-fiber working, location

A
2CLSM-#D01-#D64-SFB
DWDM 2-port C/L band splitter module - single-fiber working, location

B
79
Symbols/Numerics
2CLSM-#D01-#D64-SFx
DWDM 2-port C/L band splitter module - single-fiber working

(collective name)
east/west CWDM channel splitter module with 1310-nm connectivity

(It adds/drops a gray 1310-nm channel and a specific channel to/out of
the CWDM channel spectrum.)
2EDFA-S20L-S10L
dual optical amplifier module with 20dB and 10dB EDFAs ; supports 96
C-band channels, 15 to 30 dB span loss, OSC filter and level control,
Fiber Map Detection
2G CL
2 gigabit coupling link
2G FC

2.125 Gbit/s)
2OSCM-V#1630
Optical Supervisory Channel Module with optical line monitoring and

two very-long reach link distance optical network ports; the pilot laser
operates at a wavelength of 1630nm
2PCA-PCN-10G
4-port packet channel access module with two 10 GbE client XFP and
two 10 GbE network XFP type pluggable interfaces
2PM/MM
2-port protection module multimode
2PM/MM-OM3
2-port protection module with an optical multimode fiber according to

the OM3 standard
2PM/SM
2-port protection module single-mode
2PSM-95/5
2-way power splitter module 95%/5%

It separates 5% of optical power from the received and transmitted
signals for power monitoring and optical spectrum analyzing.
2R
reshaping and reamplifying (signal regeneration)
2RAMAN-C15-LL
full C-band dual fiber Raman amplifier module which provides up to 30

dB of Raman gain in multiple fiber types and which is optimized for use
in low latency networks
2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5
access type 2-port multirate TDM channel module with two client and
two network pluggable interfaces, max. 1 Gbit/s client port data rate,
2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5
access type 2-port multirate TDM channel module with two client and
two network pluggable interfaces, max. 622 Mbit/s client port data
rate, aggregated data rate on the network port of 2.5 Gbit/s
2TWCC-PCN-2G7U
core type WDM channel module with two pluggable client interfaces
and two pluggable network interfaces; maximum client port and
network port data rates of 2.7 Gbit/s
2WCA-PCN-10G
access type, 2-port multirate 10G WDM channel module with two
pluggable client and two pluggable network interfaces
80
Symbols/Numerics
2WCC-PCN-10G
core type WDM channel module with two pluggable client interfaces
and two pluggable network interfaces; client and network port data
rates from 9.9532 Gbit/s to 11.0957 Gbit/s
3BSM-#G1310-#C1610
CWDM band splitter module with gray interface at 1310 nm
3BSM-#G1310-#C1610-E/W
east/west CWDM band splitter module with gray interface at 1310 nm
3G-SDI
Third-generation Serial Digital Interface
3R
reshaping, reamplifying and retiming (signal regeneration)
4-OPCM
4-port Optical Power Control Module; the module has VOAs (variable
optical attenuators) managed by the NE-SW as alternative to
pluggable fixed attenuators
40CSM-#D02-#D32
40-port MUX/DMX channel splitter module - C band
40CSM-#D34-#D64
40-port MUX/DMX channel splitter module - L band
40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
40-port MUX/DMX channel splitter module - C or L band (collective

name)
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200
40-port MUX/DMX channel splitter/combiner 2HU shelf - even C band

channels, used for dual client configuration with the 8ROADMC80/0/OPM
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205
40-port MUX/DMX channel splitter/combiner 2HU shelf for C-band

channels, used for dual client configuration with the 8ROADMC80/0/OPM
40-port MUX/DMX channel splitter/combiner 2HU shelf - C-band

channels, used for dual client configuration with the 8ROADMC80/0/OPM (collective name)
40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#19200
40-port MUX/DMX channel splitter and combiner 2HU shelf for even
C-band channels and fiber connections to the left
40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200
40-port MUX/DMX channel splitter and combiner 2HU shelf for even
C-band channels
40CSM/2HU-#19595-#19205
40-port MUX/DMX channel splitter and combiner 2HU shelf for

interleaved C-band channels
40CSM/2HU-#D02-#D32
40-port MUX/DMX channel splitter 2HU shelf - even C band channels
40CSM/2HU-#D34-#D64
40-port MUX/DMX channel splitter 2HU Shelf - L band
40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy
40-port MUX/DMX Channel Splitter 2HU Shelf - C or L band (collective

name)
40CSM/P-2HU#19590-#19200-DM
passive 40-port MUX/DMX channel splitter and combiner 2HU shelf

with monitoring port for dual power level monitoring
40GbE
40 Gigabit Ethernet (high-speed computer network standard which

supports sending Ethernet frames at 40 gigabits per second over
multiple 10 Gbit/s lanes)
81
Symbols/Numerics
4CSM-#C1470-#C1610
CWDM 4-port channel splitter module for #C1470, #1490, #1590,

#C1610
4CSM-#C1510-#C1570
CWDM 4-port Channel Splitter Module for #C1510, #1530, #1550,

#C1570
4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy
4-port CWDM channel splitter module - subband #C1470-#C1610 or

#C1510-#C1590 (collective name)
4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
4-port DWDM channel splitter module - C band (collective name)
4CSM+#19xxx-#19yyy
4-port DWDM channel splitter and combiner module with upgrade port
- C band (collective name)
4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy
4-port DWDM channel splitter module with upgrade port - C band

(collective name)
4G
4 gigabit
4G FC

4.25 Gbit/s)
4GSM-#D01-#D16
4-port DWDM group splitter module - blue band (C band)
4GSM-#D17-#D32
4-port DWDM group splitter module - red band (C band)
4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
4-port DWDM group splitter module - C band (collective name)
4ROADM-C96/0/OPM
Reconfigurable Optical Add Drop Multiplexer for up to degree 4

interconnection nodes; supports 96 C-band channels and optical
power monitoring; WSS based, with integrated 1x4 power splitter,
directed/directionless, gridless, colored/colorless, for dual client
applications from 1 to 3 degrees. additional dual pass through
4ROADM-E-C96/0/OPM
Reconfigurable Optical Add Drop Multiplexer supporting up to 4

degrees (network interfaces) for add-drop applications or 5 degrees for
tandem switch applications; can handle 96 C-band channels with 50
GHz spacing and optical power monitoring; enables provisioning and
adjustment of add-drop and pass-through DWDM C-band channels
4TCA-LS+1G3-V
access type 4-port low-speed TDM channel module for very-long reach
fiber links; aggregated data rate on the network port of 1.25 Gbit/s
(collective name)
4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Cxxxx
access type 4-port low-speed TDM channel module with four

integrated 1310-nm interfaces on the client side and a single integrated
very-long reach CWDM interface on the network side; aggregated data
rate on the network port of 1.25 Gbit/s
4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx
access type 4-port low-speed TDM channel module with four

very-long reach DWDM inter-face on the network side; aggregated
data rate on the network port of 1.25 Gbit/s
82
Symbols/Numerics
4TCA-PCN-4GU+4G
access type 4-port TDM channel module with four client and two
network pluggable interfaces; supports 1GbE, 1G FC, 2GFC and 4G
FC on the client ports; multirate clock user selectable; aggregated data
rate on the network port of 4.25Gbit/s
4TCA-PCN-4GUS+4G
access type 4-port TDM channel module with four client and two
network pluggable interfaces; supports 1GbE, F155 and F622 on the
client ports; aggregated data rate on the network port of 4.25 Gbit/s
4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5
core type 4-port multirate TDM channel module with four client and two
network pluggable interfaces; max. client data rate of 2.125 Gbit/s;
core type 4-port WDM channel module with four pluggable interfaces
on the client side and one integrated, 40G, long reach, 50 GHz-spaced,
tunable DWDM interface on the network side; maximum client data
rate of 10.3 Gbit/s; aggregated data rate on the network port of 40
Gbit/s
4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G
core type 4-port TDM channel module with four pluggable interfaces on
the client side and one integrated DWDM interface on the network side
that is fully tunable in the C or L band; maximum client data rate of 2.7
Gbit/s; aggregated data rate on the network port of 10 Gbit/s;
Module is available in four variants:
4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-LN#DC
4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#DC
4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#DL
4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32
the client side and one integrated, long reach noise optimized, tunable
DWDM interface on the network side; support of 50-GHz spaced Cband channels; maximum client data rate of 2.7 Gbit/s; aggregated
data rate on the network port of 10 Gbit/s
the client side and one integrated, very-long reach tunable DWDM
interface on the network side; support of 100 GHz spaced C-band
channels; maximum client data rate of 2.7Gbit/s; aggregated data rate
on the network port of 10Gbit/s
interface on the network side; support of 50-GHz spaced C-band
interface on the network side; support of 100 GHz spaced L-band
83
Symbols/Numerics
4WCE-PCN-16GFC
enterprise type, multirate WDM quad transponder module with four

pluggable client interfaces and four pluggable network interfaces,
supports 16 G FC, 8 G FC and 10 GbE LAN PHY on the client and
network ports
5GIB
5Gbit/s Infiniband
5GSM-#19590-#19200
5-port optical channel group splitter and combiner module;

separates/combines 5 DWDM channel groups
5GSM/P-#19590-#19200-DM
passive 5-port DWDM channel group splitter and combiner module

with monitoring port for dual power level monitoring;
separates/combines 5 DWDM C-band channel groups
5PSM
5-port passive C-band optical power splitter and combiner module,

needed for the deployment of an CCM-C40/8 or CCM-C80/8
5TCE-PCTN-10GU+10G
enterprise type 5-port TDM channel module with five pluggable client
interfaces and one integrated 10 Gigabit DWDM network interface that
is fully tunable in the C or L band; module is available in three variants:
5TCE-PCTN-10GU+10G-V#DC, 5TCE-PCTN-10GU+10G-V#DL,
5TCE-PCTN-10GU+10G-LN#DC
enterprise type 5-port TDM channel module with five pluggable

interfaces on the client side and one integrated 10Gigabit long reach
noise optimized tunable 50GHz-spaced DWDM interface on the
network side; support of C-band channels only; maximum client data
rate of 10.5Gbit/s; maximum aggregated data rate on the network port
of 11.3 Gbit/s
5TCE-PCTN-10GU+10G-V#DC

interfaces on the client side and one integrated 10Gigabit very long
reach tunable 50GHz-spaced DWDM interface on the network side;
support of C-band channels only; maximum client data rate of
10.5Gbit/s; maximum aggregated data rate on the network port of 11.3
Gbit/s
5TCE-PCTN-10GU+10G-V#DL

reach tunable 100GHz-spaced DWDM interface on the network side;
support of L-band channels only; maximum client data rate of
Gbit/s
is fully tunable in the C or L band and supports data encryption; module
is available in three variants:
5TCE-PCTN-10GU+AES10G-V#DC,
5TCE-PCTN-10GU+AES10G-V#DL,
5TCE-PCTN-10GU+AES10G-LN#DC
84
Symbols/Numerics
5TCE-PCTN-10GU+AES10G-LN#DC enterprise type 5-port TDM channel module with five pluggable
interfaces on the client side and one integrated 10Gigabit long reach,
noise optimized, C-band tunable 50GHz-spaced DWDM interface on
the network side supporting data encryption; maximum client data rate
of 10.5Gbit/s; maximum aggregated data rate on the network port of
11.3 Gbit/s
5TCE-PCTN-10GU+AES10G-V#DC

reach C-band tunable 50GHz-spaced DWDM interface on the network
side supporting data encryption; maximum client data rate of
Gbit/s
5TCE-PCTN-10GU+AES10G-V#DL

reach, L-band tunable 100GHz-spaced DWDM interface on the
network side supporting data encryption; maximum client data rate of
10.5Gbit/s; maximum aggregated data rate on the network port of
11.3 Gbit/s
5TCE-PCN-10GU+10G
enterprise type 5-port TDM channel module with five SFP/SFP+

interfaces on the client side and a single SFP+ interface on the
network side; maximum client data rate of 10.5 Gbit/s; maximum

10.5 Gbit/s; maximum aggregated data rate on the network port of 11.3
Gbit/s
5TCE-PCTN-8GU+10GS
is fully tunable in the C band and supports SDH/Sonet; module is
available in two variants:
5TCE-PCTN-8GU+10GS-LN#DC,
5TCE-PCTN-8GU+10GS-V#DC
5TCE-PCTN-8GU+10GS-LN#DC

interfaces on the client side and one integrated 10Gigabit long reach,
noise optimized, tunable 50GHz-spaced C-band DWDM interface on
the network side; support of SDH/Sonet on the network interface;
maximum client data rate of 8.5Gbit/s; aggregated data rate on the
network port of 9.95328 Gbit/s

reach, tunable 50GHz-spaced C-band DWDM interface on the
network side; maximum client data rate of 8.5Gbit/s; aggregated data
85
Symbols/Numerics
5TCE-PCN-8GU+10GS

network side; maximum client data rate of 8.5 Gbit/s; aggregated data
interfaces and one integrated DWDM network interface that is fully
tunable in the C band and supports SDH/Sonet data encryption;
module is available in two variants:
5TCE-PCTN-8GU+AES10GS-LN#DC
5TCE-PCTN-8GU+AES10GS-V#DC
5TCE-PCTN-8GU+AES10GS-LN#DC enterprise type 5-port TDM channel module with five pluggable
interfaces on the client side and one integrated long reach, noise
optimized, C-band tunable 50GHz-spaced DWDM interface on the
network side supporting SDH/Sonet data encryption; maximum client
data rate of 8.5Gbit/s; aggregated data rate on the network port of
9.95328 Gbit/s

interfaces on the client side and one integrated very long reach, Cband tunable 50GHz-spaced DWDM interface on the network side
supporting SDH/Sonet data encryption; maximum client data rate of
8.5Gbit/s; aggregated data rate on the network port of 9.95328 Gbit/s

8.5 Gbit/s; aggregated data rate on the network port of 9.95328 Gbit/s
5WCA-PCN-16GU
access type, multirate WDM transponder module with five pluggable

client interfaces and five pluggable network interfaces, supports up to
16 G FC at each client and network port; also designed for the
transport of 40 GbE combined services using four pluggable
transceivers supporting 10 GbE LAN PHY each
7HU shelf
rack-mountable 7 HU-high equipment shelf
8CSM-#19xxx-#19yyy
8-port DWDM channel splitter and combiner module,

separates/combines 8 DWDM C-band channels
(collective name)
passive 8-port DWDM channel splitter and combiner module;

separates/combines 8 DWDM C-band channels (collective name)
8CSM/P-#C1270-#C1450
passive 8-port CWDM channel splitter and combiner module for

channels #C1270 - #C1450; separates/combines 8 CWDM channels
8CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-DM
passive 8-port CWDM channel splitter module with monitoring port for
dual power level monitoring; separates/combines 8 CWDM channels
and one gray channel
86
Symbols/Numerics
8CSM/P+#C1470-#C1610-DM
passive 8-port CWDM channel splitter and combiner module with

upgrade port and monitoring port for dual power level monitoring;
separates/combines 8 CWDM channels and one gray channel
8CSM+#C1470-#C1610
8-port CWDM channel splitter module with upgrade port;

separates/combines 8 CWDM channels and one gray channel
8G FC
8Gigabit Fibre Channel (a network technology working at a line rate of

8.50Gbit/s)
8GSM-#D01-#D32
8-port DWDM group splitter module - C band
8MDX/P-#C1270-#C1450-TE02
Passive 8-port CWDM channel multiplexer and demultiplexer mounted

in a TE FOSC-A-TRAY-S24-1 fiber-optic splice tray enclosure for
outside plant installation; separates/combines 8 CWDM channels
ranging from #C1270 to #C1450
8MDX/P+#C1470-#C1610-TE02
Passive 8-port CWDM channel multiplexer and demultiplexer with

upgrade port mounted in a TE FOSC-A-TRAY-S24-1 fiber-optic splice
tray enclosure for outside plant installation; adds/drops upto 8 CWDM
channels ranging from #C1470 to #C1610
8P8C
8 position 8 contact modular communications connectors (plug and

jack) which have eight positions, all containing conductors
8PSM
8-port passive C-band optical power splitter and combiner module,

needed for deployment of the CCM-C96/9
8ROADM-C40/0/OPM
reconfigurable optical add drop multiplexer for up to degree 8

interconnection nodes; supports forty 100 GHz spaced C-band
channels; WSS based, with integrated optical performance monitor
and 1x8 power splitter
8ROADM-C80/0/OPM
reconfigurable optical add drop multiplexer for up to degree 8

interconnection nodes; supports eighty 50 GHz spaced C-band
channels; WSS based, with integrated optical performance monitor
and 1x8 power splitter
9ROADM-C96/0/OPM
reconfigurable optical add-drop multiplexer for up to 10 degrees

(interconnection to other nodes) supporting ninety-six 50 GHz spaced
C-band channels with channel frequencies from 191.25 THz through
196.00 THz; each client port used for add-drop services reduces the
potential number of degrees supported.
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V
access type 8-port TDM channel module with eight pluggable

interfaces on the client side and a single integrated very-long reach
CWDM or DWDM interface on the network side; maximum client data
rate of 2.1 Gbit/s; multirate clock user selectable; aggregated data rate
on the network port of 10 Gbit/s (collective name);
Variants of the module are:
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx (DWDM, C and L band) and 8TCA-PC2G1U+10G-V#Cxxxx (CWDM)
87
Symbols/Numerics
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Cxxxx

CWDM interface on the network side; maximum client data rate of 2.1
Gbit/s; multirate clock user selectable; aggregated data rate on the
network port of 10 Gbit/s
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx

DWDM interface on the network side; maximum client data rate of 2.1
Gbit/s; multirate clock user selectable; aggregated data rate on the
network port of 10 Gbit/s;
C-band and L-band channels are supported.
8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V
enterprise type 8-port ESCON TDM channel module for very-long

reach fiber links in DWDM or CWDM networks; aggregated data rate
on the network port of 2.5 Gbit/s (collective name); refers to 8TCEESCON+2G5-V#Cxxxx and 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx
8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Cxxxx
enterprise type 8-port ESCON TDM channel module with eight

very-long reach CWDM inter-face on the network side; client data rate
of 200 Mbit/s eight times each; aggregated data rate on the network
port of 2.5 Gbit/s
8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx
enterprise type 8-port ESCON TDM channel module with eight

very-long reach DWDM inter-face on the network side; client data rate
of 200 Mbit/s eight times each; aggregated data rate on the network
port of 2.5 Gbit/s
96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125
96-port multiplexer/demultiplexer shelf with 4HU mounting height

supporting the C-band channels from #19600 through #19125 spaced
at 50 GHz
9HU shelf
rack-mountable 9 HU-high equipment shelf for high power consuming

CWDM or DWDM installations
A
A
ampere (SI base unit of electric current, or amount of electric charge per second)
A 2s
ampere squared seconds (a measure of heat energy supplied to a circuit while the
fuse is clearing a fault.)
AC
alternating current
acc.
according to
ADM
add-drop multiplexer
AES
Advanced Encryption Standard
AID
access identifier
88
AINS
automatic in-service
AIS
alarm indication signal
ALS
(1) automatic laser shutdown

(2) automatic link startup
amp
amplifier
Amp-S20H-C15
dual optical amplifier module with high gain EDFA and BWD Raman; supports 96
C-band channels, 15 to 30 dB span loss, OSC filter and level control, Fiber Map
Detection
Amp-S20L-C15
dual optical amplifier module with low gain EDFA and BWD Raman; supports 96
C-band channels, 15 to 30 dB span loss, OSC filter and level control, Fiber Map
Detection
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
APD
avalanche photodiode
approx.
approximately
APR
automatic power reduction
APS
(1) automatic protection switching

(2) automatic power shutdown
ARC
alarm reporting control
ASCII
American Standard Code for Information Interchange
ASE
amplified spontaneous emission
ASIC
application specific integrated circuit
ASTA
UK-based certification organization body for electrical testing and product safety
approval
ATC
adaptive threshold control
ATM
asynchronous transfer mode
ATM 155
asynchronous transfer mode 155 Mbit/s
ATM 622
asynchronous transfer mode 622 Mbit/s
AWG
(1) american wire gauge (standard method of denoting wire diameter, especially
for electrically conducting wires)
(2) arrayed waveguide grating
B
B1
bit interleaved parity covers the complete frame including overhead
B2
bit interleaved parity covers payload area + multiplexer section overhead
BI_DA-
bi-directional data pair -A (ethernet 1000BaseTtwisted pair pinout)
89
BI_DA+
bi-directional data pair +A (ethernet 1000BaseTtwisted pair pinout)
BI_DB-
bi-directional data pair -B (ethernet 1000BaseTtwisted pair pinout)
BI_DB+
bi-directional data pair +B (ethernet 1000BaseTtwisted pair pinout)
BI_DC-
bi-directional data pair -C (ethernet 1000BaseTtwisted pair pinout)
BI_DC+
bi-directional data pair +C (ethernet 1000BaseTtwisted pair pinout)
BI_DD-
bi-directional data pair -D (ethernet 1000BaseTtwisted pair pinout)
BI_DD+
bi-directional data pair +D (ethernet 1000BaseTtwisted pair pinout)
BMP
bit-synchronous mapping procedure
BR
pump back reflection
BS
British Standard (specifies the type of domestic AC power plugs and sockets
most commonly used in the United Kingdom and Ireland)
BSM
band splitter module (collective name)
C
Cat 5e
enhanced version of Cat 5 cable (used for both 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T
Ethernet)
Cat 6
category 6 cable (used for both 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T Ethernet)
CAUI
100Gigabit attachment unit interface
CBC
cipher-block chaining
CBL
power cable
CBL/AC/250/RA
AC power cable for the PSU/7HU-AC and PSU/7HU-AC-HP
CBL/AC/250/ST
AC power cable for the PSU/1HU-R-AC, PSU/1HU-R-AC-200,

OTDR/THC/2HU/AC and OTDR/8-OTH/1HU/AC
CBL/DC/300/2AWG10/SUBD
DC power cable for the 9HU shelf
CBL/DC/300/2AWG16/1HUHP
DC power cable for the SH1HU-HP/2DC
DC power cable for the SH1HU-F/2DC Shelf
DC power cable for the PSU/7HU-DC and PSU/7HU-DC-HP
CBS
committed burst size (bandwidth profile parameter according to MEF)
CCC
china compulsory certification (certification mark)
CCM
continuity check messages
CCM-C40/8
8-port colorless channel module supporting 40 C-band channels, WSS based
90
CCM-C80/8
CCM-C96/9
CDR
clock and data recovery
CDRH
center for devices and radiological health (standard)
CEC
canadian electrical code
CEM/9HU
common equipment module for 9HU shelf
CFM
configuration fault management
CFP
(1) centum form factor pluggable

(2) centum form factor pluggable transceiver
CH
channel
CIR
committed information rate (bandwidth profile parameter according to MEF)
CL
coupling link
CLEI
common language equipment identifier (registered trademark of Telcordia)
CLI
command line interface
CLNP
connectionless network protocol
CLSM
C/L band splitter module (collective name)
cm
centimeter (SI derived unit of length in the metric system)
CoS
class of service
CP
constant output power mode (VOA held at constant output power)
CPE
customer premises equipment
CPRI
common public radio interface
CPU
central processing unit
CSA
canadian standards association
CSF
client signal fail
CSF
client signal fail
CSM
channel splitter module (collective name)
CTS
clear to send (serial connection)
CV
coding violations
CVID
(1) customer edge VLAN Identification

(2) customer VLAN identifier
CVLAN
customer VLAN
CWDM
coarse wavelength division multiplexing
91
D
D-
differential data signal in pinout of USB data cable (data - signal)
D+
differential data signal in pinout of USB data cable (data + signal)
dB
decibel
dBm
decibel milliwatt
DC
direct current
DCC
data communications channel
DCCm
data communications channel for multiplexer section
DCCr
data communications channel for regenerator section
DCD
data carrier detect (serial connection)
DCF
dispersion compensating fiber
DCF-M/010/SSMF
dispersion compensation module that compensates for 10 km of G. 652 standard

single-mode fiber
DCF-M/020/SSMF

single-mode fiber
DCF-M/040/SSMF

single-mode fiber
DCF-M/060/SSMF

single-mode fiber
DCF-M/080/SSMF

single-mode fiber
DCF-M/100/SSMF

single-mode fiber
DCF-M/xxx/SSMF
dispersion compensation module (collective name)
DCF1HU-P
dispersion compensation shelf with an integrated DCF spool, rack-mountable, 1

HU high
DCF1HU-P/010/MCOR
dispersion compensation shelf with an integrated DCF spool that compensates for
10 km of G. 655 MetroCore fiber
DCF1HU-P/010/SSMF
10 km of G. 652 standard single-mode fiber
DCF1HU-P/020/MCOR
DCF1HU-P/020/SSMF
DCF1HU-P/030/MCOR
92
DCF1HU-P/040/MCOR
DCF1HU-P/040/SSMF
DCF1HU-P/050/MCOR
DCF1HU-P/060/MCOR
DCF1HU-P/060/SSMF
DCF1HU-P/100/LEAF
100 km of G. 655 standard large effective area fiber
DCF1HU-P/100/SSMF
DCF1HU-P/100/TWRS
100 km of G. 655 standard true wave reduced slope fiber
DCF1HU-P/120/LEAF
DCF1HU-P/120/SSMF
DCF1HU-P/120/TWRS
DCF1HU-P/140/LEAF
DCF1HU-P/140/SSMF
DCF1HU-P/140/TWRS
DCF1HU-P/160/LEAF
DCF1HU-P/160/SSMF
DCF1HU-P/160/TWRS
DCF1HU-P/180/LEAF
DCF1HU-P/180/SSMF
93
DCF1HU-P/180/TWRS
DCG-M/060/SSMF
fiber-bragg-grating dispersion compensation module that compensates in a 100

GHz channel grid for 60 km of G. 652 standard single-mode fiber
DCG-M/080/SSMF

DCG-M/100/SSMF

DCG-M/160/TWRS

GHz channel grid for 160 km of true wave-reduced-slope fiber
DCG-M/240/TWRS

DCG-M/320/TWRS

DCG-M/xxx/SSMF
fiber-bragg-grating dispersion compensation module for compensating the

chromatic dispersion of standard single-mode fiber according to G.652 (collective
name)
The part /xxx of the module name refers to the compensation capability.
DCG-M/xxx/TWRS

chromatic dispersion of true wave-reduced-slope fiber (collective name)
The part /xxx of the module name refers to the compensation capability.
DCG50-M/060/SSMF

DCG50-M/080/SSMF

DCG50-M/100/SSMF

DCG50-M/160/TWRS

DCG50-M/240/TWRS

DCG50-M/320/TWRS

DCG50-M/xxx/SSMF
fiber-bragg-grating dispersion compensation module (collective name)

The part /xxx of the module name refers to the compensation capability of C-band
channels in a 50 GHz channel grid.
DCG50-M/xxx/TWRS

chromatic dispersion of true wave-reduced-slope fiber (collective name)
The part /xxx of the module name refers to the compensation capability of C-band
channels in a 50 GHz channel grid.
DCN
data communication network
94
DE
disparity errors
DEMUX
(1) demultiplexer
(2) demultiplexing
DFB laser
distributed feed-back laser
DSA
digital signature algorithm key encryption scheme
DSC
digital supervisory channel
DSF
dispersion-shifted fiber
DSL
digital subscriber line
DSR
data set ready (serial connection)
DTR
data terminal ready (serial connection)
DVB-ASI
Digital Video Broadcasting - Asynchronous Serial Interface
DW
digital wrapper
DWDM
dense wavelength division multiplexing
E
E-LAN
Ethernet transparent LAN service
E-Line
Ethernet private line service
E-TREE
Ethernet tree service
e.g.
for example (exempli gratia)
e/o
electrical to optical conversion
ECC
embedded control channel
EDFA
erbium-doped fiber amplifier (collective name)
EDFA-C-D17-GC
full-band, fixed gain and transient-controlled, double-stage, C-band EDFA module,

21.3 dBm maximum output power; 17.2 dBm nominal output power
EDFA-C-D20-GC
full-band, fixed gain and transient-controlled, double-stage, C-band EDFA module,

21.3 dBm maximum output power
EDFA-C-D20-VGC
full-band, variable gain and transient-controlled, double-stage, C-band EDFA

module, 21.3 dBm maximum output power
EDFA-C-D20-VGC-DM
full-band, variable gain and transient-controlled, double-stage, dual monitoring Cband EDFA module, 21.3 dBm maximum output power
EDFA-C-D20-VLGC-DM
full C-band, variable low gain and transient-controlled, double-stage EDFA output
at 20 dBm nominal, dual optical monitor ports
EDFA-C-D27-GCB-DM
full-band, variable gain booster, double-stage, dual monitoring, C-band EDFA

module, 27 dBm maximum output power
95
EDFA-C-S10
group-based, fixed pump-power, single-stage, C-band EDFA module, 10 dBm to

13dBm output power
EDFA-C-S18-GC
full-band, fixed gain and transient-controlled, single-stage, C-band EDFA module,

18 dBm to 21 dBm maximum output power
EDFA-C-S18-GCB
full-band, fixed gain and transient-controlled booster, single-stage, C-band EDFA

EDFA-C-S20-GCB
full-band, fixed gain and transient-controlled booster, single-stage, C-band EDFA

EDFA-C-S20-GCB-DM
full-band, fixed gain and transient-controlled booster, single-stage, dual monitoring

C-band EDFA module, 18.5 dBm maximum output power
EDFA-C-S26-VGC-DM
full band, variable gain and transient-controlled single-stage, dual monitoring Cband EDFA module, 1510 nm OSC filter, maximum output power of 26.5 dBm
EDFA-C-S26-VGCB-DM
full band, variable gain and transient-controlled single-stage, dual monitoring Cband EDFA module, 1528.77 nm OSC filter, maximum output power of 26.5 dm
EDFA-L-D17-GC
full-band, fixed gain and transient-controlled, double-stage, L-band EDFA module,

21.3 dBm maximum output power; 17.2 dBm nominal output power
EDFA-S20H
high gain, gain-controlled single-stage EDFA with up to 20 dBm output power;

includes OSFM add-drop filter (1528.77nm), dual monitor ports, VOA at the output,
and Fiber Map Detector; operates over spans supporting 96-C band channels
EDFA-S20L
low gain, gain-controlled single-stage EDFA with up to 20 dBm output power;

includes OSFM add-drop filter (1528.77nm), dual monitor ports, VOA at the output,
and Fiber Map Detector; operates over spans supporting 96-C band channels
EEPROM
electrically erasable programmable read-only memory
EFEC
enhanced forward error correction
EFM
enterprise feedback management
EIA
electronics industry alliance
EM
(1) electronic module
EMC
electromagnetic compatibility
EMI
electromagnetic interference
EN
European Standard
EOC
embedded operations channel
EOL
end of life
EOP
excessive output power
EP-LAN
Ethernet private LAN
EPL
Ethernet private line
EPT
error propagation code
96
EQPT
equipment
eROADM
enhanced reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer
ES
errored seconds counter
ES-MUX
errored seconds counter on the multiplex section
ESCON
enterprise system connection
ESD
electrostatic discharge
ETH-CC
Ethernet continuity check
ETH-OAM
Ethernet OAM
ETSI
european telecommunications standards institute
EVC
Ethernet Virtual Connection
EVP-LAN
Ethernet Virtual Private LAN
EVPL
Ethernet Virtual Private Line
F
F2488
2.488 gigabit
F9953
9.953 gigabit
FAN/1HU
fan module for SH1HU-R/PF shelf
FAN/9HU
fan module for 9HU shelf
FAN/Plug-In
plug-in fan unit for a 7HU shelf
FC
(1) fibre channel (protocol)

(2) fixed clock
FCU
fan control unit
FDDI
fiber distributed data interface
FE
Fast Ethernet
FEC
forward error correction
FEC-5
proprietary super FEC with configurable coding gain
FEND
far end
FICON
FIbre CONnection. This is the IBM implementation of the ANSI Fibre Channel
Standard. FICON is identical to the Fibre Channel Protocol up to layer FC-3. All
FSP 3000R7 channel modules supporting Fibre Channel can transport FICON as
well unless otherwise noted.
FiGo (figo)
finish good
FIPS PUP 140-2
Federal Information Processing Standard Publication 140-2
97
FM
fault management, fault monitoring
FMT/1HU
passive unmanaged 1HU fiber management tray
FPGA
field programmable gate array
FSP
Fiber Service Platform
FSP 3000R7
Fiber Service Platform
FSP NM
FSP Network Manager
FSP NP
FSP Network Planner
FTP
file transfer protocol
FW
firmware
FWP
firmware package
G
G
gigabit
G-Link
gigabit link
GbE
Gigabit Ethernet
Gbit/s
gigabits per second (a unit of data transfer rate equal to 1.000.000.000 bits per
second)
GCC
general communication channel (G.709)
GCC0
general communication channel 0 in the OTU overhead (1312 kbit/s)
GCC0S
GCC1
GCC2
GCCx
general communication channel x in the OTU overhead (x stands for 0, 1, 2, etc.)
GFEC
generic forward error correction
GFF
gain flattering filter
GFP
generic framing procedure according to ITU-T G.7041
GFP-F
generic framing procedure, frame-mapped
GFP-T
generic framing procedure, transparent-mapped
GHz
gigahertz = 109 Hz (SI unit of frequency)
GMP
generic gapping grocedure according to ITU-T G.709 (for mapping a client signal
with any bit rate less than the payload capacity to the ODU
GND
signal ground (in pinout of serial cable, USB data cable or Ethernet cables)
GSM
DWDM group splitter module (collective name)
98
H
H
height
HD SUB-D44
high density 44-pin D subminiature connector
HDLC
high-level data link control
HD-SDI
high-definition serial digital interface
HP
horizontal pitch (1 HP = 5.08 mm = 1/5 in)
HST
hot standby (channel module)
HU
height unit (1 HU = 44.45 mm = 1.75 in)
HW
hardware
HW Rev.
hardware revision
Hz
hertz (SI base unit of frequency)
I
I-NNI
Internal-Network to Network Interface
I/O
Input/Output
IC
inter-integrated circuit
I2t
melting integral or total clearing (fuse characteristic)
ID
(1) identification (identification number)

(2) identification pin (in pinout of USB data cable)
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (leading standards-making

organizations)
ILM50-#DC
passive optical module that provides signal interleaving and de-interleaving in 50GHz channel spacing DWDM systems. It is optimized to cover the C-band
channels only.
In
rated current
in.
inch (unit of length)
Intel IXF19303 Device
bandwidth aggregation and channelizer devices with virtual concatenation
IP
internet protocol
IPv4
internet protocol version 4
ISO
international organization for standardization
ITU
international telecommunication union
ITU-T
International Telecommunications Union Telecommunications Standardization

Sector
99
J
J/SM/4CS-#C1270#C1330/LC/0400
5-port unidirectional CWDM channel splitter/combiner for channels #C1270 #C1330. It is designed for connecting a 40G transceiver CFP (LR4) to four 10G
transceiver SFP+ interfaces, enabling transmission of 40G traffic over 10G
channels.
K
kg
kilogram (SI base unit of mass)
km
kilometer (SI unit of length in the metric system)
L
L2
layer two
L2CP
Layer 2 Control Protocol
LAD
layer adjacency discovery
LAG
link aggregation group
LAN
local area network
LC
type of fiber-optic connector (Lucent Connector)
LCD
liquid crystal display
LDCC
line data communications channel
LEAF
large effective area fiber (LEAF optical fiber is a single-mode non-zero

dispersion-shifted fiber with large effective area)
LED
light emitting diode
LLP
loss of link pulse
LM
laser module
LOC
loss of clock
LOF
loss of frame
LOF
Loss of frame
LOL-TH
loss of light threshold of the internal photo diodes
LOS
loss of signal
LOSATT
loss of signal attenuation
100
M
m
meter (SI base unit of length in the metric system)
M3
metric ISO screw thread of nominal size M3 (nominal diameter = 3.0 mm)
M3.5
M4
M6
M6x12
cap screw with M6 thread and threaded length of 12 mm
M6x16
cap screw with M6 thread and threaded length of 16 mm
MAC
media access control
MADI
multichannel audio digital interface
MAN
metropolitan area network
max.
maximum
Mbit/s
megabits per second (a unit of data transfer rates equal to 1.000.000 bits per
second)
MDF
medium dispersion fiber
MDI
medium dependent interface
MDI-X
medium dependent interface crossover
MDXM
multiplexer/demultiplexer module
MEA
mismatch equipment alarm
MEF
metro Ethernet forum (is a nonprofit international industry consortium, dedicated to

worldwide adoption of Carrier Ethernet networks and services)
MEMS
micro electro mechanical system
MEP
maintenance entity group end point
mi
mile, miles (a unit of length)
MIB
management information base
min.
minimum
mm
millimeter (SI derived unit of length in the metric system)
MM
multimode
mm2
square millimeter (unit of area, derived from the SI base unit of the meter)
MOD
module
ms
millisecond (SI unit of time which is one thousandth of a second)
MSA
Multi-Sourcing Agreement standard
101
MSP
multiplexer section protection
MPO
MPO24 connector type which connects to an industry standard 2x12 parallel

multimode fiber cable (4 optical fibers are not used)
MU/PC
type of fiber-optic connector with physical contact
MUX
(1) multiplexer
(2) multiplexing
mV
millivolt (SI derived unit of electric potential difference, equal to one thousandth of
a volt)
mW
milliwatt (SI derived unit for measuring power, equal to one thousandth of a watt)
Cm
microchannel molding
micrometer or micron (SI unit of length in the metric system, equal to one millionth
of a meter, which is one-thousandth of a millimeter)
N
N-N
bidirectional regeneration network-to-network interface
NAT
network address translation
NCU
network control unit
NCU-II-P
network element control unit, high performance processor, supports redundant

controller configuration
NE
network element
NED
Network Element Director
NEND
near end
nm
nanometer (SI derived unit of length in the metric system, equal to one billionth of
a meter)
NM
FSP 3000R7 Network Manager
NMS
network management system
NNI
Network to Network Interface (is an interface which specifies signaling and

management functions between two networks)
NP
FSP 3000R7 Network Planner
NPCUP
network protected client unprotected protection
NSAP
network service access point
NTP
network time protocol
O
102
o/e
optical to electrical conversion
OA
optical amplifier
OAM
operations, administration and maintenance
OC-1
optical carrier level 1 (with 51.84 Mbit/s)
OC-12
optical carrier level 12 (with 622 Mbit/s)
OC-192
optical carrier level 192 (with 9.953 Gbit/s)
OC-3
optical carrier level 3 (with 155 Mbit/s)
OC-48
optical carrier level 48 (with 2.5 Gbit/s)
ODTU4.ts
optical channel data tributary unit 4 with an specific amount of tributary slots (ts)
ODU
optical channel data unit (frame structure of OTN standardization according to

ITU-T G.709
ODU4
optical channel data unit 4 (frame structure for transport of 100GbE according to
ITU-T G.709)
ODUflex
concept of a flexible rate ODU structure allowing an alternative mapping method

(GMP) without complexity of Virtual Concatenation defined by ITU-T G.709.
ODUk
optical channel data unit k (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3e, 4 and flex defined for specific bit
rates by ITU-T G.709); k = 1,2,3, and 4 corresponds to 2.5Gbit/s, 10Gbit/s and
40Gbit/s, and 100Gbit/s
OJG
optojack gate functionality
OL
optical lane
OLM
optical line monitoring
OM
optical multiplex
OPM
(1) optical power meter

(2) optical power monitor
OPR
optical power receive
OPT
optical power transmit
OPU4
optical channel payload unit 4 (frame structure for transport of 100GbE according
to ITU-T G.709)
OPUk
optical channel payload unit k (k is defined for specific bit rates by ITU-T G.709); k
= 1,2,3, and 4 corresponds to 2.5Gbit/s, 10Gbit/s and 40Gbit/s, and 100Gbit/s
OSA
optical spectrum analyzer
OSC
optical supervisory channel
OSCM
OSC module
OSCM
OSC module (collective name)
OSCM-OLM
OSC module with optical line monitoring facility
103
OSCM-PN
optical supervisory channel module with optical line monitoring and dual pluggable
optical network interfaces
OSCM-V#1630
Optical Supervisory Channel Module with optical line monitoring and one very-long
reach link distance optical network port; the pilot laser operates at a wavelength of
1630 nm
OSF
optical supervisory channel filter
OSFM
optical supervisory channel filter module (collective name)
OSFM+#1490-SFA
optical supervisory channel filter module - single-fiber working, location A
OSFM+#1510
optical supervisory channel filter module with upgrade port, OSC transmitter
wavelength at 1510 nm
OSFM+#1510-SFB
optical supervisory channel filter module - single-fiber working, location B
OSFM+#1630
optical supervisory channel filter module with upgrade port, OSC transmitter
wavelength at 1630 nm
OSI
open system interconnection
OSNR
optical signal-to-noise ratio
OSP
outside plant
OSPF
open shortest path first
OTDR
optical time domain reflectometer that combines a test head controller

(OTDR/THC/2HU/AC) unit and optical test head (OTDR/8-OTH/1HU/AC) unit
OTDR/8-OTH/1HU/AC
Optical Time Domain Reflectometer, 8-port Optical Test Head
OTDR/THC/2HU/AC
Optical Time Domain Reflectometer, Test Head Controller
OTH
optical transport hierarchy (ITU-T G.709)
OTL4.10
Type of optical channel tranport lanes

4 stands for: supported nominal bit rate of 111.809 Gbit/s
10 stands for: ten wavelengths
OTN
optical transport network (ITU-T G.709)
OTU
optical transport unit
OTU1
optical channel transport unit 1 (2.666 Gbit/s)
OTU1e
Overclocked OTN data rate for transportation of 10Gbe-LAN transparently over

OTN networks. The fixed stuff bytes of the 10GbELAN signal are removed. The
data rate is 11.0491 Gbit/s +/- 100 ppm.
OTU2
optical channel transport unit 2 (10.7092 Gbit/s)
OTU2e
Overclocked OTN data rate for transportation of 10Gbe-LAN transparently over

OTN networks. The 10GbE signal with fixed stuff bytes are mapped into an OPU
signal. As the stuff bytes are not removed the data rate of OTU2e is 11.0957
Gbit/s +/- 100 ppm, which is somewhat lower than the rate of OTU1e.
OTU4
optical channel transport unit 4 (for transport of 100 Gigabit Ethernet)
104
OTUk
optical channel transport unit k (k is defined for specific bit rates by ITU-T G.709);
k = 1,2,3, and 4 corresponds to 2.5Gbit/s, 10Gbit/s and 40Gbit/s, and 100Gbit/s
P
PACE
password authenticated connection establishment
PBC
polarization beam combiner
PC
personal computer
PC300/3WIRE/RED/BLACK/14AWG flexible 3-conductor DC power cable for the 7HU shelf equipped with
PSU/7HU-DC-HP
PCB
printed circuit board
PCS
(1) physical coding sublayer

(2) physical coding section
PD
photo-detector
PDU
(1) protocol data unit

(2) power distribution unit
PE
protective earth
PG
(1) protection group mode

(2) protection group (a pair of client ports on the same or different
channel modules)
PG-P
protection group mode - protection traffic
PG-W
protection group mode - working traffic
PHY
physical layer device
Pin max
maximum permissible optical input power at network port receiver
PIN receiver
photodiode with an intrinsic (i.e. unoped) region in between the n- and pdoped regions
PLC
planar lightwave circuit
PM
(1) protection module (collective name)

(2) passive module
(3) performance monitoring
(4) path performance monitoring (ITU-T G.709)
PM/MM
protection module multimode
PM/SM
protection module single-mode
PMD
polarization mode dispersion
ppm (oscillator)
parts-per-million
PPP
point-to-point protocol
105
PPP
point-to-point protocol
PRBS
pseudo random bit sequences
PSCP
PuTTY secure copy program
PSCU
Passive Shelf Control Unit
PSM-95/5
power splitter module 95%/5%

It separates 5% of optical power from the signal for power monitoring
and optical spectrum analyzing.
PSU
power supply unit (collective name)
PSU/1HU-R-AC
AC power supply unit for a 1HU shelf with rear power access
PSU/1HU-R-AC-200
AC-input power supply unit for a 1HU shelf with rear power access; It
delivers a maximum output power of 200 W
PSU/1HU-R-DC-200
DC-input power supply unit for a 1HU shelf with rear power access; It
delivers a maximum output power of 200 W
PSU/7HU-AC
AC power supply unit for a 7HU shelf with front power access; output
power of 400 W
PSU/7HU-AC-800
AC power supply unit for a 7HU shelf with front power access; output
power of 800 W
PSU/7HU-AC-HP
high-power AC power supply unit for a 7HU shelf with front power
access; output power of 600 W
PSU/7HU-DC
DC power supply unit for a 7HU shelf with front power access; output
power of 400 W
PSU/7HU-DC-HP
high-power DC power supply unit for a 7HU shelf with front power
access; output power of 600 W
PSU/7HU-R-DC
DC power supply unit for a 7HU shelf rear power access
PSU/7HU-R-DC-HP
high-power DC power supply unit for a 7HU shelf with front power
access
PSU/9HU-AC
AC-input power supply unit for a 9HU Shelf
PSU/9HU-DC
DC-input power supply unit for a 9HU Shelf
Q
R
R
receive
RADIUS
remote authentication dial-in user service
106
RAM
random access memory
RAMAN-C10
C-banddistributed fiber Raman amplifier with constant pump power,which

provides up to 10 dB of Raman gain in a G.652 fiber.
RDI
remote defect indicator
RFC
request for comments
RI
ring indicator (serial connection)
RJ
registered jack (old bell labs acronym)
RJ-45
registered jack-45 (8-pin connector used on ethernet cables)
RLM
remote line monitoring
RMA
return materials authorization
ROADM
reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer
ROADM-C40/40/OPM3HU-2DC
reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer designed as a rack-mountable 3HU

high standalone 19-inch shelf with dual DC power supply; supports up to 40 Cband channels and optical power monitoring
ROADM-C80/0/OPM
reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM) 2 degree, 80 channels in C

band, WSS based, with integrated performance monitor
RoHS
restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronical

equipment
rpm
revolutions per minute
RS
reed-solomon (ITU-T G.975)
RS-232
Recommended Standard-232
RSA
rivest, shamir and adelman key encryption scheme
RSM
remote switch module (collective name)
RSM-OLM#1630
remote switch module with optical line monitoring, the pilot laser of which operates
at a wavelength of 1630 nm
RSM-SF
single-fiber remote switch module (collective name)
RSM-SF#1310
single-fiber remote switch module working at 1310 nm
RTS
request to send (serial connection)
Rx
receiver
RX-
negative receive data signal (pin assignments of twisted-pair ethernet cables)
RX+
positive receive data signal (pin assignments of twisted-pair ethernet cables)
RxD
received data (serial connection)
RxESFail
Rx elastic storage failure
107
S
s
second (SI base unit of time)
S-tag
service tag; it designates the service in the provider network.

(outer network tag on network port)
Schuko
acronym for the german word Schutzkontakt. This means "protective

(earthed) contact".
SCP
secure copy program
SCSI
small computer system interface
SCU
shelf control unit
SCU-II
Shelf Control Unit, second generation, supporting redundant controller setups
SCU-S
shelf control unit for 1HU shelf
SD
(1) signal detect

(2) signal degrade
SDCC
section data communications channel
SDH
synchronous digital hierarchy
SDI
serial digital interface
SD-SDI
standard definition serial digital interface
sec.
second (SI base unit of time)
Ser
serial
SES
severely errored second counter
SES-MUX
severely errored second counter on the multiplex section
SF
(1) single fiber

(2) signal fail
SFP
(1) small form-factor pluggable

(2) small form-factor pluggable transceiver
SFP/GBE/ELECTRICAL/RJ45
SFP electrical GbE transceiver
SFTP
secure file transfer protocol
SFW
single-fiber working
SH1HU-F/2DC
1HU Shelf equipped with a DC power supply unit and dual front access
power feeds
SH1HU-HP/2DC
1HU Shelf High power equipped with a DC-input power supply unit and dual
front access power feeds; It is intended for applications requiring higher
wattage and cooling airflow rates.
108
SH1HU-HP/E-TEMP/2DC
1HU Shelf High Power equipped with a DC-input power supply unit and dual
front access power feeds; It is intended for extended low ambient
temperature operation and applications requiring higher wattage and cooling
airflow rates.
SH1HU-R
1HU Shelf Rear Power Access equipped with redundant AC power supply
SH1HU-R/PF
1HU Shelf Rear Power Access equipped with a pluggable fan unit, an
replaceable air filter and redundant AC power supply
SH1HU/FIBERMANAGEMENT 1HU fiber storage shelf

SH1HU/PASSIVE
1HU passive shelf
SH1HU/PASSIVE/FT
1HU Passive Shelf with fiber tray
SH7HU
7HU shelf front power access
SH7HU-R
7HU shelf rear power access
SH9HU
9HU shelf front and rear power access
SI
international system of units (abbreviated SI from the french le systme

international d'units)
SLA
service level agreement
SM
(1) single-mode
(2) section monitoring (G.709)
SMF
single-mode optical fiber (G.652)
SMPTE
Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (a standards body)
SNMP
simple network management protocol
SONET
synchronous optical network
SRS
stimulated raman scattering (raman effect)
SSH
secure shell protocol
SSMF
standard single-mode fiber
STM-1
synchronous transfer mode, level 1 (150 Mbit/s)
STM-16
synchronous transfer mode, level 3 (2.5 Gbit/s)
STM-4
synchronous transfer mode, level 2 (622 Mbit/s)
STM-64
synchronous transfer mode, level 4
STP
shielded twisted pair (ethernet cable)
STP CAT 6
shielded twisted pair category 6 (copper cable type)
SUB D9
9 pins D-subminiature connector
SVID
(1) service provider VLAN Identification

(2) service VLAN identifier
109
SVLAN
service VLAN
SW
software
SWDL
software download
T
T
transmit
T568A
T568B
definition of pin/pair assignments for eight-conductor 100-ohm balanced twistedpair cabling according to TIA/EIA-568-B
TCA
(1) access type TDM channel module

(2) threshold crossing alerts
TCC
core type TDM channel module
TCE
enterprise type TDM channel module
TCM
tandem connection monitoring (ITU-T G.709)
TCP
transmission control protocol
TDM
time division multiplexing
Telnet
teletype network, a telecommunications protocol
TFTP
trivial file transfer protocol
TIA
telecommunications industry association
TIA/EIA-568-B
A set of three standards that address commercial building cabling for

telecommuni-cations products and services
TIF
telemetry interface
TL1
Transaction Language 1
TODC
tunable optical dispersion compensator
TrueWave
true-wave optical fiber is a patented, non-zero dispersion fiber.
TWRS
true-wave-reduced slope fiber
Tx
transmitter
TX-
negative transmit data signal (pin assignments of twisted-pair ethernet cables)
TX+
positive transmit data signal (pin assignments of twisted-pair ethernet cables)
TxClkFail
transmitter clock failure
110
U.L., UL
underwriters laboratories inc. (product safety testing and certification

organization, based in USA)
UAS
unassigned
UEQ
unequipped
UK
United Kingdom
ULL
ultra low loss fiber
Un
rated voltage
UNI
user network interface (is a demarcation point between the responsibility of the
service provider and the responsibility of the subscriber)
USB
universal serial bus (serial bus standard to interface devices)
USB OTG
USB on-the-go
USI
unique serial identification
UTC
universal time coordinated
UTM
utility module
UTP
unshielded twisted pair (ethernet cable)
V
VCG
virtual container group
VID
VLAN identification (number)
VLAN
virtual local area network
VOA
variable optical attenuator
VSM
versatile switch module, triggered by system software via backplane
VSR
very short reach (interface)
VW-1
vertical-wire flame test (UL 1581)
W
W
(1) width
(2) watt (SI derived unit of power a term that refers to power produced as
electricity)
WAN
wide area network
WCA
WDM channel module access type
111
WCA-PC-10G-V
access type 10G WDM channel module with client pluggable interface and
integrated very long reach CWDM or DWDM network interface
WCA-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx
integrated very-long reach CWDM network interface
WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx
integrated very-long reach DWDM network interface
WCA-PCN-2G5U
access type 2.5G WDM channel module with a single client and dual network
pluggable interfaces
WCC
core type WDM channel module
WCC-PC1N-2G7U
core type 2.7G WDM channel module with a pluggable client and network port.
Both ports are designed for the support of intra-office, standard and long reach as
well for the support of CWDM long and very long reach and DWDM very long and
ultra-long reach
WCC-PCTN-100GA
Five-slot core type channel module with pluggable client interface for CFP
transceiver and a single integrated DWDM interface, network interface is tunable
in 50 GHz channel spacing, maximum client data rate for 100 GbE and OTU4,
maximum network data rate for OTU4 protocols
WCC-PCTN-100GB
four-slot core type channel module with pluggable client interface for CFP
transceiver and a single integrated DWDM interface; network interface is tunable
in 50 GHz channel spacing, maximum client data rate for 100 GBE and OTU4
protocols and network data rate for OTU4 protocols
WCC-PCTN-10G
core type channel module with a pluggable client interface and an integrated 10
Gigabit DWDM network interface that is fully tunable in the C or L band; module is
available in four variants: WCC-PCTN-10G-LN#DC
WCC-PCTN-10G-V#DC
WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32
WCC-PCTN-10G-V#DL
WCC-PCTN-10G-LN#DC
core type channel module with a pluggable client interface and an integrated 10
Gigabit long reach noise optimized tunable DWDM network interface; maximum
client and network data rate of 11.0957Gbit/s (#DC stands for one of 81 DWDM
channels in the C band at 50GHz according to ITU-T G.694.1.)
WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D0132
core type channel module with a pluggable client interface and integrated, 10
Gigabit very long reach link distance, tunable DWDM network interface;
maximum client and network data rate of 11.0957Gbit/s (#D01-32 stands for one
of 81 DWDM channels in the C band at 50GHz according to ITU-T G.694.1.)
WCC-PCTN-10G-V#DC
core type channel module with a pluggable client interface and an integrated, 10
maximum client and network data rate of 11.0957Gbit/s (#DC stands for one of 81
DWDM channels in the C band at 50GHz according to ITU-T G.694.1.)
WCC-PCTN-10G-V#DL
core type channel module with a pluggable client interface and an integrated, 10
maximum client and network data rate of 11.0957Gbit/s (#DL stands for one of 41
DWDM channels in the L band at 100GHz according to ITU-T G.694.1.)
112
WCC-TN-40G-L#DC
core type 40G WDM channel module with an integrated 40 Gigabit 1550-nm
VSR2000 interface on the client side and an integrated 40 Gigabit long reach
tunable DWDM interface on the network side; maximum client and network data
rate of 43.01841 Gbit/s (#DC stands for one of 41 or 81 DWDM channels in the Cband at 100GHz or 50GHz according to ITU-T G.694.1, depending on the HW
Rev. of the module.)
WCE
enterprise type WDM channel module (collective name)
WCE-PCN-100G
100G Enterprise type WDM channel module with a single CFP client interface and
a single CFP network interface; client port data rates of 103.1Gbit/s (100GbE) or
111.81Gbit/s (OTU4); network data rate of 111.81Gbit/s (OTU4); three slots wide
module
WCE-PCN-100GB
100G Enterprise type WDM channel module with a single CFP client interface and
a single CFP network interface; client port data rates of 103.1Gbit/s (100GbE) or
111.81Gbit/s (OTU4); network data rate of 111.81Gbit/s (OTU4); two slots wide
module
WCM
WDM channel module
WDM
wavelength division multiplexing
WSS
wavelength selective switch
X
XFP
(1) extended form-factor pluggable

(2) extended form-factor pluggable transceiver
XON/XOFF
software data flow communications protocol for controlling the flow of data
between computers and other devices. X stands for transmitter. This is frequently
referred to as "software flow control".
xTCA
x-port access type TDM channel module (x stands for number of client ports)
xTCC
x-port core type TDM channel module (x stands for number of client ports)
xTCE
x-port enterprise type TDM channel module (x stands for number of client ports)
Y
y-cable/MM
3-port multimode fiber-optic cable with an integrated 50/50 coupler on the common
end to facilitate channel card protection.
y-cable/SM
3-port single-mode fiber-optic cable with an integrated 50/50 coupler on the

common end to facilitate channel card protection.
113
114
Chapter 7
FSP 3000R7 Hardware Overview
This chapter gives an overview of the Fiber Service Platform (FSP 3000R7) basic
system structure and provides information about equipment disposal.

FSP 3000R7 is a high-performance WDM networking system for bidirectional
transmission of optical signals. These signals are transmitted in a defined number of
channels over a single fiber pair or one duplex fiber. The system uses a modular structure
which enables a flexible upgrade of capacity and functionality according to network
requirements.
The FSP 3000R7 is comprised of various types of shelves and modules. Each type
performs different functions within the system.
A general description of the shelves and modules are provided in the following chapters.
These descriptions provide the user with a complete understanding of how the individual
components work without getting too far into technical details. For all matters relating to
detailed product description, system management, installation, troubleshooting and
safety, refer to the appropriate documents. See the Preface.
The hardware components are grouped as follows:
Management, Supervision and Optical Protection Switch Modules
Optical Amplifiers
10
Dummy Modules
10

9HU shelf, AC or DC powered (SH9HU)
AC power supply unit for the 9HU shelf (PSU/9HU-AC)
DC power supply unit for the 9HU shelf (PSU/9HU-DC)
Fan Module for 9HU Shelf (FAN/9HU)
Common Equipment Module for the 9HU shelf (CEM/9HU)
7HU shelf, DC or AC powered (SH7HU)
7 HU Shelf rear power access, DC or AC powered
DC power supply units for 7HU shelf and 7HU rear power access (PSU/7HU-DC,
PSU/7HU-DC-800, PSU/7HU-DC-HP, PSU/7HU-R-DC and PSU/7HU-R-DC-HP)
AC power supply units for 7HU shelf front power access only (PSU/7HU-AC, PSU/7HUAC-HP, PSU/7HU-AC-800)
Plug-in fan unit for a 7HU shelf (FAN/Plug-In)
1HU High-Power Shelf, DC powered (SH1HU-HP/2DC)

1HU High-Power Shelf, DC powered, for extended low ambient temperature operation
(SH1HU-HP/E-TEMP/2DC)
1HU Shelf Front Power Access, DC powered (SH1HU-F/2DC)
1HU Shelf Rear Power Access, AC powered (SH1HU-R)
1HU Shelf Rear Power Access, AC powered, with replaceable fan module and air intake
filter pad (SH1HU-R/PF)
120 W AC power supply unit for the SH1HU-R (PSU/1HU-R-AC)
200 W AC power supply unit for the SH1HU-R/PF (PSU/1HU-R-AC-200)
200 W DC power supply unit for the SH1HU-R/PF (PSU/1HU-R-DC-200)
Fan Module for the SH1HU-R/PF Shelf (FAN/1HU)
1HU Passive Shelf with fiber tray (SH1HU/PASSIVE/FT)
1HU passive shelf (SH1HU/PASSIVE)
1HU Fiber Management Shelves (SH1HU/FIBERMANAGEMENT and FMT/1HU)
Rack-mountable optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR)

WCC-TN-40G-L#DC
WCC-PCN-100G
WCC-PCTN-100GA
WCC-PCTN-100GB
WCC-PCTN-10G
4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G
10TCC-PCTN-4GU+10G
10TCC-PCTN-4GUS+10G
10TCC-PCN-2G7US+10G
10TCC-PCN-3GSDI+10G
10WXC-PCN-10G
2WCC-PCN-10G
2TWCC-PCN-2G7U
WCC-PC1N-2G7U
4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5

2PCA-PCN-10G
10PCA-PCN-1G3+10G
2WCA-PCN-10G
5WCA-PCN-16GU

WCA-PC-10G-V
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V
4TCA-PCN-4GU+4G
4TCA-PCN-4GUS+4G
WCA-PCN-2G5U
2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5
2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5
4TCA-LS+1G3-V

WCE-PCN-100G
WCE-PCN-100GB
4WCE-PCN-16GFC
5TCE-PCN-10GU+10G
5TCE-PCTN-10GU+10G
5TCE-PCN-8GU+10GS
5TCE-PCTN-8GU+10GS
8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V
8TCE-GLINK+2G5-V
10TCE-PCN-10G+100G
10TCE-PCN-16GU+100G
Various Extended Form-factor Pluggable Optical Transceivers (XFP transceivers) used
for transmission speeds of 4.25 Gbit/s, 5 Gbit/s and 8.5 Gbit/s as well as around 10
Gbit/s or 11 Gbit/s and 14.025 Gbit/s
Various Small Form-factor Pluggable Optical Transceivers (SFP transceivers/SFP+
transceivers) used for transmission speeds of 125 Mbit/s, 270 Mbit/s, 360 Mbit/s, 622
Mbit/s, 1.485 Gbit/s, 2.5 Gbit/s, 2.67 Gbit/s, 2.97 Gbit/s, 4.25 Gbit/s, 8.5 Gbit/s, 10.3125
Gbit/s,10.51875 Gbit/s, 10.709 Gbit/s, 11.0491 Gbit/s, 11.0957 Gbit/s, 11.3176
Gbit/sand 14.025 Gbit/s
Various Centrum Form-factor Pluggable Optical Transceivers (CFP transceivers) used
for high data rate applications of 103.125 Gbit/s (100 GbE) and 111.81 Gbit/s (OTU4)
Management, Supervision and Optical Protection Switch

Modules
Management Modules
Network element control unit with high performance processor (NCU-II)
Network element control unit (NCU2E Type)
Network element control unit (NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS)
Network element control unit, high performance processor, single slot, full height,
supports redundancy (NCU-II-P)
Utility Module (UTM)
Passive Shelf Control Unit (PSCU)
Shelf control unit (SCU)
Shelf control unit for 1HU shelf (SCU-S)
Shelf control unit, second generation, increased performance (SCU-II)
Optical Protection Switch Modules

Versatile Switch Module (VSM)
Remote switch module with optical line monitoring (RSM-OLM#1630)
Single-fiber remote switch module working at 1510 nm (RSM-SF#1510)
Single-fiber remote switch module working at 1310 nm (RSM-SF#1310)
Optical Supervisory Channel Modules

optical supervisory channel module with optical line monitoring and dual pluggable optical
network interfaces (OSCM-PN)
Optical Supervisory Channel Module with optical line monitoring and one very-long reach
link distance optical network port (OSCM-V#1630)
Optical Supervisory Channel Module with optical line monitoring and two very-long reach
link distance optical network ports (2OSCM-V#1630)

Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer (ROADM-C40/40/OPM-3HU-2DC)
Reconfigurable Optical Power Control and Add/Drop Multiplexer Module (ROADMC80/0/OPM)
Reconfigurable Optical Add Drop Multiplexer for up to degree 4 interconnection nodes
supporting ninety-six 50 GHz spaced C-band channels with channel frequencies from
191.25 THz through 196.00 THz (4ROADM-C96/0/OPM)
Reconfigurable Optical Add Drop Multiplexer for up to degree 4 interconnection nodes
supporting ninety-six 50 GHz spaced C-band channels with channel frequencies from
191.25 THz through 196.00 THz. Fiber detection between 4ROADM-E-C96/0/OPM ports
and ports on other modules. Variable gain amplifier for channels received in the N port
(4ROADM-E-C96/0/OPM)
Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer Module for up to degree 8 interconnection
nodes supporting forty 100 GHz spaced C-band channels with channel frequencies from
192.00 THz through 195.90 THz (8ROADM-C40/0/OPM )

Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer Module for up to degree 8 interconnection
nodes supporting eighty 50 GHz spaced C-band channels with channel frequencies from
192.00 THz through 195.95 THz (8ROADM-C80/0/OPM )
Reconfigurable Optical Add-Drop Multiplexer Module for up to 10 degrees
(interconnection to other nodes) supporting ninety-six 50 GHz spaced C-band channels
with channel frequencies from 191.25 THz through 196.00 THz (9ROADM-C96/0/OPM).
Each Client port used for add-drop services reduces the potential number of degrees
supported.
8-port reconfigurable filter supporting 40 C-band channels (CCM-C40/8)
8-port reconfigurable filter supporting 80 C-band channels (CCM-C80/8)
9-port reconfigurable channel filter supporting 96 C-band channels CCM-C96/9
4-port Optical Power Control Module (4-OPCM)

Optical Interleaver Modules
C-band 50-100 GHz Optical Interleaver/De-Interleaver Module (ILM50#DC)
C/L band splitter modules (CLSMs)

DWDM 2-port C-band/L-band splitter module (2CLSM-#D01-#D64)
DWDM 2-port C/L band splitter module - single-fiber working, location A (2CLSM-#D01#D64-SFA)
DWDM 2-port C/L band splitter module - single-fiber working, location B
(2CLSM-#D01-#D64-SFB)
Band splitter modules (BSMs)

2-port DWDM red/blue splitter module - C band (2BSM-#D01-#D32)
2-port CWDM subband splitter module (2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610)
Passive 2-port CWDM band splitter module with gray interface at 1310 nm and
monitoring port for dual power level monitoring (2BSM/P-#G1310-#C1610-DM)
CWDM band splitter module with gray interface at 1310 nm (3BSM-#G1310-#C1610)
East/west CWDM band splitter module with gray interface at 1310 nm
(3BSM-#G1310-#C1610-E/W)
Group Splitter Modules (GSMs)

1-port DWDM group splitter module with upgrade port - C band (1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy);
Eight discrete module variants are available.
5-port DWDM group splitter and combiner module - C band (5GSM-#19590-#19200)
Passive 5-port DWDM channel group splitter and combiner module with monitoring port
for dual power level monitoring (5GSM/P-#19590-#19200-DM)
4-port DWDM group splitter module - C band (4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy)
Two discrete module variants are available.
8-port DWDM group splitter module - C band (8GSM-#D01-#D32)
Channel Splitter Modules (CSMs)

Single channel CWDM splitter module with upgrade port (1CSM+#Cxxxx)
8 variants are available, one for each of the 8 CWDM wavelengths it supports.

East/west single channel CWDM splitter module with upgrade port (1CSM+#CxxxxE/W)
The module is available in 8 variants, one for each of the 8 CWDM wavelengths it
supports.
East/west single channel DWDM splitter module with upgrade port (1CSM+#Dxx-E/W)
The module is available in 32 variants, one for each of the 32 DWDM C-band channels it
supports.
Single channel DWDM splitter and combiner module with upgrade port (1CSM+#19xxx)
The module is available in 40 variants, one for each of the 40 DWDM C-band channels it
supports.
East/west single channel DWDM splitter and combiner module with upgrade port
(1CSM+#19xxx-E/W)
The module is available in 9 variants.
Single channel CWDM splitter module with 1310-nm connectivity (1CSM+#G1310)
Passive optical single channel CWDM splitter and combiner module with upgrade port
(1CSM/P+#Cxxxx)
supports.
Passive optical east/west single channel CWDM splitter and combiner module with
upgrade port (1CSM/P+#Cxxxx-E/W)
supports.
East/west CWDM channel splitter module with 1310-nm connectivity (2CSM+#G1310#Cxxxx-E/W)
supports.
8-port DWDM channel splitter and combiner module (8CSM-#19xxx-#19yyy)
The module is available in 5 C-band variants covering 8 C-band channels each.
Passive 8-port DWDM channel splitter and combiner module (8CSM/P-#19xxx-#19yyy)
The module is available in 5 C-band variants covering 8 C-band channels each.
4-port CWDM channel splitter module - subband #C1470-#C1610 or #C1510-#C1590
(4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy)
4-port DWDM channel splitter module - C band (4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy)
The module is available in 8 C-band variants.
4-port DWDM channel splitter module with upgrade port - C band (4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy)
The module is available in 8 C-band variants.
4-port DWDM channel splitter and combiner module with upgrade port - C band
(4CSM+#19xxx-#19yyy)
The module is available in 10 variants covering 4 C-band channels each.
Passive 8-port CWDM channel splitter and combiner module for channels #C1270 #C1450 (8CSM/P-#C1270-#C1450)
Passive 8-port CWDM channel splitter and combiner module with upgrade port and
monitoring port for dual power level monitoring (8CSM/P+#C1470-#C1610-DM)
Passive 8-port CWDM channel splitter module with monitoring port for dual power level
monitoring (8CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-DM)
8-port CWDM channel splitter module with upgrade port (8CSM+#C1470-#C1610)
16-port channel splitter module - single-fiber working - C band (16CSM-#D01-#D32-SFx)
Two variants are available, one for each side of the communications link.

16-port channel splitter module - single-fiber working - L band (16CSM-#D33-#D64-SFx)
Two variants are available, one for each side of the communications link.
40-port MUX/DMX channel splitter module - C or L band (40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy)
40-port MUX/DMX Channel Splitter 2HU Shelf - C or L band (40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy)
Two discrete shelf variants are available.
40-port MUX/DMX channel splitter and combiner 2HU shelf for even C-band channels
(40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200)
40-port MUX/DMX channel splitter and combiner 2HU shelf for even C-band channels
and fiber connections to the left (40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#19200)
40-port MUX/DMX channel splitter and combiner 2HU shelf for interleaved C-band
channels (40CSM/2HU-#19595-#19205)
40-port MUX/DMX channel splitter/combiner 2HU shelf for C-band channels, used for
dual client configuration at the 8ROADM-C80/0/OPM (40CSM-C80/2HU-#19xxx#19yyy)
96-port multiplexer/demultiplexer shelf with 4HU mounting height supporting the C-band
channels from #19600 through #19125 spaced at 50 GHz (96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125)
Passive 40-port MUX/DMX channel splitter and combiner 2HU shelf with monitoring port
for dual power level monitoring (40CSM/P-2HU#19590-#19200-DM)
Optical Supervisory Filter Modules (OSFMs)

Optical supervisory channel filter module with upgrade port, OSC transmitter wavelength
at 1510 nm (OSFM+#1510)
Optical supervisory channel filter module with upgrade port, OSC transmitter wavelength
at 1630 nm (OSFM+#1630)
Optical supervisory channel filter module - single-fiber working, location A
(OSFM+#1490-SFA)
Optical supervisory channel filter module - single-fiber working, location B
(OSFM+#1510-SFB)
Optical Time Filter Modules

Optical time-domain reflectometer filter module with upgrade port, wavelength at 1650 nm
(2OTFM+#1650)
Optical Power Splitter Modules

Power splitter module 95%/5% (PSM-95/5)
2-way power splitter module 95%/5% (2PSM-95/5)
Protection Modules
o
o
o
o
o
Single-port protection module single-mode (1PM/SM)

2-port protection module single-mode (2PM/SM)
Single-port protection module multimode (1PM/MM)
2-port protection module multimode(2PM/MM)
2-port protection module with an optical multimode fiber according to the OM3
standard 2PM/MM-OM3
3-port multimode fiber-optic cable with an integrated 50/50 coupler for channel
card protection (y-cable/MM)
3-port single-mode fiber-optic cable with an integrated 50/50 coupler for channel
card protection (y-cable/SM)
5-port passive optical power splitter and combiner module (5PSM)

8-port passive optical power splitter and combiner module supporting up to 96 DWDM
channels from 19125 to 19600 (8PSM)
5-port unidirectional CWDM channel splitter/combiner for channels #C1270 - #C1330
required to support 100GbE LR4 interworking (J/SM/4CS-#C1270-#C1330/LC/0400)
Optical Amplifiers
EDFA-C-S10 (group-based C-band Erbium-doped fiber amplifier, fixed power)
EDFA-C-S18-GCB (full C-band fixed gain and transient-controlled, single-stage Erbiumdoped fiber booster amplifier
EDFA-C-S18-GC(full C-band, gain-controlled, single-stage Erbium-doped fiber amplifier)
EDFA-C-S20-GCB (full C-band, fixed gain-controlled, single-stage, Erbium-doped fiber
booster amplifier)
EDFA-C-D20-VGC (full C-band, variable gain-controlled, double-stage, Erbium-doped
fiber amplifier)
EDFA-C-D20-GC(full C-band, fixed gain-controlled double-stage Erbium-doped fiber
amplifier)
EDFA-C-D17-GC (full C-band, fixed gain-controlled, double-stage, double-stage Erbiumdoped fiber amplifier)
EDFA-L-D17-GC(full L-band, fixed gain-controlled, double-stage Erbium-doped fiber
amplifier)
EDFA-C-S20-GCB-DM (full C-band, fixed gain-controlled, single-stage, dual monitoring
Erbium-doped fiber booster amplifier
EDFA-C-D20-VGC-DM(full C-band, variable gain-controlled, double-stage, dual
monitoring Erbium-doped fiber amplifier)
EDFA-C-D20-VLGC-DM (full C-band, variable low gain-controlled, double-stage, dual
EDFA-C-S26-VGC-DM (full C-band, variable gain-controlled, single-stage, dual
monitoring Erbium-doped fiber amplifier with 1510 nm OSC filter)
EDFA-C-S26-VGCB-DM (full C-band, variable gain-controlled, single-stage, dual
monitoring Erbium-doped fiber amplifier with 1528.77 nm OSC filter)
EDFA-C-D27-GCB-DM (full C-band, variable gain, double-stage, high output power, dual
RAMAN-C10 (full C-band fiber Raman amplifier module with constant pump power)
2RAMAN-C15-LL (full C-band dual fiber Raman amplifier module, up to 30 dB of Raman
gain, optimized for use in low latency networks)
Amp-S20H-C15 (Dual optical amplifier module with high gain EDFA and BWD Raman.
Supports 96 C-band channels, 15 to 30 dB span loss, OSC filter and level control, Fiber
Map Detection).
Amp-S20L-C15 (Dual optical amplifier module with low gain EDFA and BWD Raman.
Supports 96 C-band channels, 15 to 30 dB span loss, OSC filter and level control, Fiber
Map Detection).
EDFA-S20H (high gain, gain-controlled single-stage EDFA with OSFM add-drop filter
(1528.77nm), dual monitor ports, VOA at the output, and Fiber Map Detector; supports
96-C band channels)

EDFA-S20L (low gain, gain-controlled single-stage EDFA with OSFM add-drop filter
(1528.77nm), dual monitor ports, VOA at the output, and Fiber Map Detector; supports
96-C band channels)
2EDFA-S20L-S10L (Dual low variable gain EDFA with up to 20dBm and 10dBm output
power, incl. OSFM add/drop filter (1528.77nm), dual monitor ports, VOA at the output, 96
channels in C-band, Fiber Map Detector)

Dispersion compensating fiber module, capable of compensating the chromatic
dispersion of standard single-mode fiber (DCF-M/xxx/SSMF)
Dispersion compensation with fiber-bragg-gratings module, capable of compensating the
chromatic dispersion of standard single-mode fiber (DCG-M/xxx/SSMF)
Dispersion compensation with fiber-bragg-gratings module with a 50 GHz channel
spacing, capable of compensating the chromatic dispersion of standard single-mode fiber
(DCG50-M/xxx/SSMF)
Dispersion compensation with fiber-bragg-gratings module, capable of compensating the
chromatic dispersion of TrueWave RS Fiber (DCG-M/xxx/TWRS)
Dispersion compensation with fiber-bragg-gratings module with a 50 GHz channel
spacing, capable of compensating the chromatic dispersion of TrueWave RS Fiber
(DCG50-M/xxx/TWRS)
Passive dispersion compensation shelf (DCF1HU-P)
Dummy Modules
4 HP wide and 5 HU high dummy module (DM/5HU)
4 HP wide and 2.5 HU high dummy module (DM/2HU5)
10
Equipment Disposal
Equipment Disposal
FSP 3000R7 equipment that has effectively reached the end of its life must be collected
separately for electronic waste recycling or for disposal of in an environmentally friendly
way. It is recommend to hand obsolete or unused equipment over to an appropriate
disposal facility.
The whole system or individual modules that becomes waste must
never be disposed of with the normal trash. The final disposal of these
products should be handled in accordance with all relevant national laws
and regulations concerning waste electrical and electronic equipment.
Batteries
Fully charged or partially discharged lithium batteries are hazardous waste, if simply
thrown away.
Used lithium batteries must never be disposed of by throwing them in the
normal trash can or in fire. Dispose of the NCU modules discrete lithium
battery promptly according to the instructions! Comply with the relevant
regulations on battery disposal of your country.
Dispose of the NCU modules RAM IC according to the IC

manufacturers instructions!
Pluggable transceivers are manufactured with materials considered to be hazardous.
They are an environmental risk, if simply thrown away. Obsolete pluggable transceivers
should be treated as electronic waste products.
Obsolete pluggable transceivers must never be disposed of by throwing
them in the normal trash can. Dispose of pluggable transceivers in
accordance with the corresponding national laws and regulations on
waste electrical and electronic equipment.
11
Equipment Disposal
12
Chapter 8
Shelves and Components
This chapter provides the descriptions of the various shelves, the power supplies and the
fan unit available at the publication date of thisHardware Description.
The descriptions are merely supposed to convey a basic understanding of the shelves
and components to the reader. For detailed information and underlying technologies,
contact ADVA Optical Networking.
For all matters relating to installation, troubleshooting and safety, refer to the Provisioning
and Operations Manual, Installation and Commissioning Manual, Maintenance and
Troubleshooting Manual and Safety Guide.
This chapter includes the following sections:
SH9HU on p.28, which describes the 9HU shelf including the power supply, module
cooling, module slots and basic configuration. Information about shelf naming, labeling
and accessories is also provided.
PSU/9HU-DC on p.39, which describes the DC power supply unit for the 9HU shelf in
detail and provides information about labeling.
PSU/9HU-AC on p.44, which describes the AC power supply unit for the 9HU shelf in
detail and provides information about labeling.
FAN/9HU on p.48, which describes the fan module for the 9HU shelf in detail and
provides information about labeling.
CEM/9HU on p.55 which describes the functions of the Common Equipment Module
required for the operation of the 9HU shelf.
The description provides details on the modules interfaces and refers to the various LED
indicators which the unit has. Information about the shelf display and labeling of the unit
is also included.
SH7HU on p.64, which describes the 7HU shelf including the power supply options,
module cooling, module slots and basic configuration. Information on shelf naming,
labeling and accessories is also provided.
SH7HU-R on p.75, which describes the 7HU shelf including the power supply options
for DC power rear access and AC power front access, module cooling, module slots and
basic configuration. Information on shelf naming, labeling and accessories is also
provided.
PSU/7HU-DC on p.86, which describes the DC power supply unit for the SH7HU Shelf
in detail.
PSU/7HU-R-DC on p.90, which describes the DC power supply unit for the SH7HU-R
Shelf in detail.
PSU/7HU-AC on p.96, which describes the AC power supply unit for an SH7HU and
SH7HU-R Shelf in detail.
PSU/7HU-DC-HP on p.100, which describes the high power DC power supply unit for
the SH7HU Shelf in detail.
PSU/7HU-R-DC-HP on p.105, which describes the high power DC power supply unit
for the SH7HU-R Shelf in detail.
13
PSU/7HU-AC-HP on p.110, which describes the high power AC power supply unit for
an SH7HU and SH7HU-R Shelf in detail.
PSU/7HU-DC-800 on p.115, which describes the high power DC power supply unit for
an SH7HU and SH9HU Shelf in detail.
PSU/7HU-AC-800 on p.120, which describes the high power AC power supply unit for
an SH7HU, SH7HU-R and SH9HU Shelf in detail.
FAN/Plug-In on p.124, which describes the fan unit required for the operation of the
SH7HU and SH7HU-R Shelf. The description provides details on how the fans work and
refers to the various LED indicators which the unit has. Information about the shelf
display and labeling of the unit is also included.
SH1HU-HP/2DC Shelf on p.127, which describes the DC-powered 1HU Shelf High
Power with integrated DC power supply, module cooling system, module slots, basic
configuration and the shelf display. Also included is information on the various LED
indicators, shelf naming, labeling and adaptor brackets for rack-mounting.
SH1HU-F/2DC Shelf on p.147, which describes the front access DC-powered 1HU
Shelf including the integrated power supply, module cooling system, module slots, basic
configuration and the shelf display. Also included is information on the various LED
indicators, shelf naming, labeling and adaptor brackets for rack-mounting.
SH1HU-R on p.156, which describes the rear power access 1HU Shelf including the
power supply, module cooling, module slots and basic configuration. Information on shelf
naming, labeling and accessories is also provided.
SH1HU-R/PF on p.166, which describes the rear power access 1HU Shelf with
pluggable fan module including the power supply, module cooling, module slots and basic
configuration. Information on shelf naming, labeling and accessories is also provided.
FAN/1HU on p.177, which describes the fan module for the SH1HU-R/PF shelf in
detail.
PSU/1HU-R-AC on p.180, which describes the 120 W AC power supply unit for the
SH1HU-R in detail.
PSU/1HU-R-AC-200 on p.184, which describes the 200 W AC power supply unit for
the SH1HU-R/PF in detail.
PSU/1HU-R-DC-200 on p.189, which describes the 200 W DC power supply unit for
the SH1HU-R/PF in detail.
SH1HU/PASSIVE/FT on p.193, which describes the 1HU passive shelf with fiber tray
that is intended to carry optical filter modules and dispersion compensating modules.
Information on labeling and accessories is also provided.
SH1HU/PASSIVE on p.196, which describes the 1HU passive shelf that is intended to
carry optical filter modules and dispersion compensating modules. Information on
labeling and accessories is also provided.
SH1HU/FIBERMANAGEMENT on p.199, which describes a fiber storage shelf, which
is not manufactured by ADVA Optical Networking.
FMT/1HU on p.202, which describes the ADVA Optical Networking fiber management
shelf.
OTDR on p.206, which describes the OTDR apparatus in brief. The various
components of the front panels and the rear panel are discussed.
14
SHX9HU
SHX9HU
Figure 1: SHX9HU Front
SHX9HU Description
The SHX9HU shelf is an improved version of the SH9HU shelf. The SHX9HU shelf is a
rack-mountable, 9 HU-high housing which can accommodate any optical channel and
system module from the entire FSP3000R7 range and the accessories (dummy modules,
adaptor brackets, front cover). Features for the SHX9HU shelf include support for highspeed backplane connections which allow UXC cross-connects, more powerful fans (the
FAN/X9HU), 1000W DC dual-slot and 800W AC dual-slot power supplies that operate in
redundant and non-redundant configurations. Each shelf supports up to 1600W with
redundant power supplies and a maximum of 100W per slot.
Just like the SH9HU shelf, the SHX9HU shelf has DC-inputs, Common Equipment
Module (CEM/9HU), card cage, fiber tray and fiber finger set, and the air filter unit.
The shelf also supports, improved fiber optic cabling management and improvements in
electrical signal cable management. Therefore, this shelf is particularly suitable for high
power consumption with DWDM installations and support of the PCA channel cards, and
the 9HU shelf continues to support all existing services supported by the 7HU shelf. The
SHX9HU shelf only supports the NCU-II, NCU-II-P and SCU-II management modules.
The FSP 3000R7 standard card cage features 22 vertical slots each 4 HP wide that can
be configured to support multiple configurations. It provides the physical mounting
location and all wiring connection points for the FSP 3000R7 plug-in modules of the
system. The backplane provides electrical connections for power supply and intra-shelf
communication, and supports hot-swapping of all modules. Internal backplane
connectors and card guides hold the modules in position. Communication between
modules occur over internal communication links. Modules installed in the slots 1 - 20
communicate with the SCU-II through 20 independent data connections. The 9HU shelf
slot flexibility allows simplification of configuration and upgrades. Actual configurations
can be viewed and monitored using the management software.
The common shelf configuration includes: three plug-in fan modules, a Common
Equipment Module (CEM/9HU), one or two power supply units, PSU/9HU-DC and
PSU/7HU-AC-800, one shelf control unit (SCU-II) and an air filter unit with air filter pad.
Optical modules and management modules may be pre-installed according to the system
configuration ordered. Slots 1-2, 10 -11,and 19-20 are used for power supply units. The
9HU shelf is backward compatible to all FSP 3000R7 modules.
Three individual swappable fan units ensure the effective cooling of the shelf. The
CEM/9HU incorporates fan control, LED signaling and alarm LED control, LCD-display
and plastic foil push-buttons, integrated utility feature (telemetry interface and three
management ports) and four PSCU interfaces (Passive Shelf Control interfaces). A
separate ESD 4mm socket is located on the top front face of the shelf toward the right
side to be used as a grounding connection using a wrist strap during maintenance.
The equipment type name of the SHX9HU used by the management software can be
found in Equipment Types of FSP 3000R7 Hardware Components of this documentation.
15
SHX9HU
SHX9HU Features
high-speed backplane connections that support UXC cross-connect functionality
more powerful fans (the FAN/X9HU)
redundant and non-redundant configurations
up to 1600W per shelf with redundant power supplies, max 100W per slot
Standard ETSI 300 mm dimensions and NEBS standard compliance
Robust, low-profile housing with SGCC G30 zinc-plated sheet metal
Powder coated outside surface (RAL 7035)
Single or dual DC or AC power supply options
Front or rear-DC power connections
Cooling through airflow passing from bottom front input to top rear output
Exchangeable air-filter
High-density support for all optical modules
Full front accessibility to all modules and connectors
Front fiber routing using the fiber interconnects
Shelf status LED indicators for the module slots, fans and network element
Active shelf display for identification
Slot configuration without tooling
SHX9HU Power Supply

Shelf power is provided by -48 V DC input from redundant A and B battery feeds. The
power feeds (A and B) are located on the front side, top left and right, and on the rear
panel of the shelf. Both front and rear DC power access are supported. The power input
connectors use a high-current D-Sub. Unused D-Sub power connectors (either on the
front or the rear) are equipped with a plastic protective cover that prevents the
unintentional touching of live pins and dust accumulation. The covers of the power
connectors should only be removed when in use. Each input feed has its own -48 V fail
detection.
The 9HU shelf is powered with a 1000 W DC power supply unit (PSU/9HU-DC), that
occupies two slots or 8HP in width. DC-input is applied to the modules via high-current
backplane connectors placed in slots 1 and 19, half way up the slot. The 9HU shelf can
also be powered by a 800 W AC power supply unit (PSU/7HU-AC-800). Like the
PSU/9HU-DC, the AC power supplies have the power feed connector (female AC
appliance coupler according to IEC/EN 60320-C13) on its faceplates.
For power redundancy, two independent PSU/9HU-DCs or two PSU/7HU-AC-800s
connect to separate power sources as needed per shelf. A mix of AC and DC power
supply units per shelf is not supported. In the redundant power case, both units supply
the power to the shelf and share the load. Load sharing between the PSUs occurs
automatically. If one of the two units fails, the remaining unit will continue to supply
power to the fully loaded shelf enabling the scheduled replacement of the failed power
supply as needed. The 9HU shelf supports the high power consumption alarms PSU
Limit-Provisioned and PSU Limit-Equipped.
16
SHX9HU
Note
Pay attention that for permanent power redundancy the total maximum
power consumption of the modules installed in an SH7HU-R Shelf does
not exceed the maximum output power specified for the lower-rated
power supply unit.
Output voltage and output current are continually monitored by the SCU-II. An alarm is
generated if the input voltage and output voltage falls to low limits. The power supply can
also be supervised via LED indicators on the shelf front panel.
The DC power supplies are placed in the slots 1+2 and 19+20. The AC power supplies
are typically placed in slots 1+2 and 19+20 but a third power supply can be placed in slots
10+11 for increased power.
Earthing
There are two different earthing terminals on the rear side of the shelf for making a
protective earth connection. See Figure 2.
Figure 2: Earthing Terminals of the SH9HU
An earthing kit is delivered with the shelf. For additional details, see Electrical Cables.
SHX9HU Shelf Cooling

The modules inside the SHX9HU shelf are cooled by forced convection. The air flow
meets the requirements of the Telcordia GR-3028 -CORE.
Three redundant single-fan plug-in modules (FAN/X9HUs) operate in the top of the shelf
to create airflow and dissipate heat produced by the system modules. All three fan
modules operate independently and are field replaceable.
The fans draw in air through the lower front air intake, and the air is filtered with the air
filter pad at the bottom of the shelf. The airflow passes up through the module slots, and
finally exits through the air outlets at the top of the rear and side panels. However, the
main air flow passes through the outlets at the top of the rear. In order to achieve NEBS
compliance for the 9HU shelf (EC Class F1-R3), the air outlet holes at the left and right
side panels must be covered with the appropriate air baffles (NEBS-KIT/9HU). Rerouting the airflow does not have negative impact on the module temperature within the
shelf. Figure 3 illustrates the airflow inside the shelf.
17
SHX9HU
Figure 3: Bottom-Front to Top-Rear Airflow Scheme for the 9HU Shelf
Top view of the 9HU shelf
Variant 1:
Side view of the 9HU shelf
Air outlet at the rear side only

(NEBS compliance)
Air
outlet
Air intake
Equipment Class F1 - R3
(Telcordia GR-3028-CORE)
Air inlet
Variant 2:
Air outlets at the rear side
Air outlets at
the left side
Air outlets at
the right side
Air inlet
For more information, see the subsection NEBS-KIT/9HU.

The shelfs internal air temperature controls the rotational speed of the fans. Under
normal ambient conditions, the fan modules operate at a low rotational speed. The fan
control unit (FCU) integrated in the CEM/9HU continually monitors the status of each fan
and reports each fan status to the shelf control unit (SCU-II). The status of a fan can also
be read from the fan LED indicator on its faceplate (named Status) and the shelf display
on the front panel of the CEM/9HU.
If a single fan module does not work properly, its LED turns yellow, and a fan abnormal
alarm is raised. If a fan module fails, the LED lights up red and a fan fault alarm is raised.
In this case, one minute after fan failure the intact fans increase their rotational speed to
maximum in order to compensate for the loss of cooling due the broken fan.
The failure of a single fan does not endanger the cooling of the modules
in the shelf up to 45C ambient temperature. However, the failed fan
module should be replaced by Service Personnel within 48 hours after
fan failure.
Note
To maintain system cooling, ensure the corresponding fan tray slot does
not remain empty for longer than 1 minute during the replacement
process.
The fan unit can be replaced while the shelf is in service. It is recommended to have a
spare fan module available at all times.
18
SHX9HU
If only one fan is working, the airflow inside the shelf will be insufficient to keep the
modules cool. To protect the modules from damage and to avoid the risk of fire due
to component overheating, the shelf must not be allowed to continue operation.
The air filter pad must be used at all times to prevent dust and debris from entering the
shelf. The pad is included with the air filter unit. The replaceable air filter is accessible at
the bottom of the shelf, as shown in Figure 4).
Figure 4: Shelfs Air Filter Unit
The air filter pad should be inspected regularly and replaced, if necessary.
Never operate the shelf without having an air filter pad fitted in the air filter unit.
Without the filter pad dirt can block the air inlets and outlets. Blocked air inlets and
outlets lead to inefficient cooling and considerable increase in fire risk.
Note
A dirty air filter pad negatively influences cooling efficiency. Replace

dirty air filter pads at least once a year. ADVA Optical Networking
strongly recommends replacing the air filter pad every 90 days.
SHX9HU Slots
The SHX9HU shelf features 22 slots. Slots numbered from 1 through 20 are 4 HP wide
and 5 HU high. These slots are designed to fit the portfolio of 5 HU FSP 3000R7
modules. Nearly any combination of modules is accepted. Double-width modules occupy
two slots. The preferred configuration of double-width modules is in odd slot number (1,2;
3,4; 5,6; etc.). Channel modules working in a protection group for channel module
protection do not need to be placed in neighboring slots. The two left-most slots are half
the height of all other slots and arranged one above the other. These slots are
predetermined for the management modules. The top slot is named slot A, and supports
the NCU-II. The lower slot is named slot B, and supports an SCU-II. Instead of installing
an NCU-II into slot A, two NCU-II-P modules can be installed into the shelf.The two
NCU-II-P modules are used to protect against communication failures. The NCU-II-P are
full-height modules and have to be placed into slots 3 and 18. Slot positions 1 and 2 or 19
and 20 (or both) are reserved for power supply units. A single power supply can be
installed, or dual power supplies can be installed for redundancy. Slot 20 cannot be
provisioned to contain a module. It can only be occupied by the right half of a double width
19
SHX9HU
PSU module. All other modules of the FSP 3000R7 can be plugged anywhere in slots 3
through 18.
The 9HU shelf must never be operated with open or empty slots. Slots not in use
must be filled with dummy modules to maintain proper cooling for all other modules.
When adding modules later on, store the dummy modules in a safe place for future
use.
Fiber Management
The horizontal fiber management tray allows fiber optic cables to be safely routed
between shelves and provides bend radius protection. In addition, the shelf has a set of
fiber fingers along the lower front edge of the shelf as shown in Figure 5.
Figure 5: Fiber Finger Set and Fiber Tray
The fiber tray can accommodate up to 240 optical fiber cables of 2 mm in diameter (120
east and 120 west, with no crossing of fibers). The perforated surface of the fiber tray
serves as an additional air inlet for cooling the modules. The fiber fingers are mounted
above the fiber tray. The space between two fingers routes and retains the optical fiber
jumpers connected to corresponding optical modules. The fingers provide excellent fiber
organization by reducing the number of fibers that need to be grouped.
Note
The fiber management of the 9HU shelf can also be supplement with the
separate SH1HU/FIBERMANAGEMENT Shelf (not part of the 9HU
Shelf), which supports 60 optical fibers of 2 mm diameter (30 fibers east
and 30 fibers west).
SHX9HU Signal Transmission Path

All optical modules, the power supply units and the fan modules can be monitored and
controlled by the SCU-II. Each module is connected to internal shelf communications
links on the backplane, and enables data exchange with the management modules. In
addition, the shelf supports independent signal paths between each module slot
(including the CEM/9HU) and the SCU-II. The fan modules are monitored through the
CEM/9HU. The NCU-II or NCU-II-P serves as the network element management
interface and controller, and communicates to all shelf modules via the SCU-II.
20
SHX9HU
SHX9HU Placement
The SHX9HU shelf can be placed in a 19-inch, ETSI or NEBS complaint rack by using
the appropriate adaptor brackets. The shelf also fits into a 300 mm (0.984ft.) deep ETSI
rack. The shelf occupies 9 HU of space in a rack.
SHX9HU LED Status Indicators

The shelf LEDs provide a quick visual indication of the operating status of the modules,
fans and network element. The LED indicators are located on the front panel of the
Common Equipment Module. For more information, see CEM/9HU on p.55 and FSP
3000R7 Rel. 13.3 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Manual, Chapter3.
SHX9HU Accessories
Adaptor Brackets
Separate adaptor brackets are available for rack mounting:
1 x 19-inch rackmount bracket pair
1 x ETSI bracket pair
1 x NEBS bracket pair
The SHX9HU comes with 19-inch rackmount brackets pre-installed. The ETSI and
NEBS bracket pairs are also included in the shipping box.
Each ETSI adaptor bracket has an opening at the top end for routing the power cable or
data cables from the front toward the back of the shelf.
SHX9HU Adaptor Brackets

Adaptor Brackets
The SHX9HU comes with 19-inch rackmount brackets pre-installed. The ETSI and
NEBS bracket pairs are also included in the shipping box.
SHX9HU NEBS-KIT 9HU

To meet the requirements of the GR-63-CORE, chapter 4.1.8. "Equipment Air Flow",
Issue 4, 2012, the air outlets at the top of the side panels must be covered with air baffles
(plates) to provide front-aisle to rear-aisle airflow.
For this purpose, ADVA Optical Networking offers the NEBS-KIT/9HU. The NEBSKIT/9HU includes the following:
21
SHX9HU
1 x Air baffle right
1 x Air baffle left
2 x Mounting screw M3x8 CSK TORX-T10 ZN for fixing the air baffles
The NEBS-KIT/9HU is intended for NEBS applications only.
The NEBS-KIT/9HU can be delivered with the shelf but must be ordered
separately (sales item number 1013700012-01).
Note
SHX9HU Cover Extension 7HU 9HU

The COVER EXTENSION/7HU/9HU is a mechanical adapter kit to increase cabling
space for 7HU and 9HU shelves.
This kit moves the shelf cover in order to allow for more space between the front plates of
the optical modules and cover. This may be applicable in cases where modules with nonangled optical feeds are used along with non-ADVA Optical Networking optical cables.
The COVER EXTENSION/7HU/9HU kit includes the following:
2 x FRONT COVER ADAPTER SLIDE
2 x FRONT COVER ADAPTER BASE
8 x SCREW M3X4 CSK TORX-T10 A2
The COVER EXTENSION/7HU/9HU can be delivered with the shelf but

must be ordered separately (sales item number 1013700009-01).
Note
Dummy Modules
Dummy modules are delivered with the shelf when not fully populated with optical
modules. For more information, refer to Chapter8: Dummy Modules.
Front Cover
The front cover is placed on the front of the shelf as shown in Figure 6. It protects the fiber
optic connectors of the modules against external influences and prevents the fibers from
being pulled out inadvertently. The cover is attached to the shelf by means of the latches
and fixing brackets on either side. The operating status of the shelf can still be observed
and the air filter pad can be changed when the cover is attached. The fan and CEM
modules can be replaced without removing the front cover.
22
SHX9HU
Figure 6: Front Cover Attached to the 9HU Shelf
Note that only the 9HU shelf front cover is compatible with the 9HU shelf, as the front
cover for the 7HU shelf differs slightly in size.
SHX9HU Shelf Naming

Depending on the configuration, a SHX9HU is referred to as:
master shelf if it is equipped with one NCU-II and one SCU-II (for non-redundant
configurations)
master shelf if it is equipped with two NCU-II-P modules (for redundant NCU
configurations) and one SCU-II
main shelf if it is equipped with one SCU-II only

Following network configurations are not allowed:
Note
using NCU-II together with NCU-II-P
using NCU-II-P together with SCU/SCU-S
Apart from management modules, a master shelf and a main shelf hold all active modules
such as channel modules, optical amplifiers, optical switch modules, and optical filter
modules.
SHX9HU Labeling
Each SHX9HU can be identified by several labels located on its rear panel and on the
right-hand side. See Figure 7 and Figure 8.
23
SHX9HU
Figure 7: Labels located on the Rear Panel of the SHX9HU
Figure 8: Labels Located on the Right-Hand Side of the SHX9HU
SHX9HU Shelf Type Label

The shelf type label contains the following relevant information about the shelf:
type and version
USI number and bar code
serial number and bar code
item number and bar code
figo number and bar code
The figure below shows an example.
24
SHX9HU
Figure 9: Example of a SHX9HU Shelf Type Label
SHX9HU Sales Kit Label

The sales kit label is located on the shelf if it is equipped with a shelf control unit. This
label contains the same information as the shelf type label. In addition, it indicates the
type of the shelf control unit. The figure below shows an example.
Figure 10: Example of an SHX9HU Sales Kit Label
SHX9HU Certification Label

The certification label provides current certification marks. Figure 11 shows an example.
25
SHX9HU
Figure 11: Example of an SHX9HU Certification Label
EMC-Warning:
This is a Class A product!
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
PJAA
In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference

in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Approvals are only valid, if all modules and/or blind panels are in place.
This product complies with FDA Raditation Performance Standard
21 CFR Subchapter J Part 15 1040.10 except for deviations pursuant to
Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007.
SHX9HU EMC Label for Japan

The EMC label provides current certification marks. Figure 12 shows an example.
Figure 12: Example of an SHX9HU Certification Label
EMC-Warning:
PJAA

SHX9HU Shelf Supply Values Label

The shelf supply values label provides:
shelf name
important operating data of the shelf
instructions for power supply
Figure 13 on p.27 shows an example.
26
SHX9HU
Figure 13: Example of an SHX9HU Shelf Supply Values Label
SHX9HU ESD and Laser Safety Label

The ESD and laser safety labels are located on the front at the bottom right hand side of
the air filter unit, as shown in Figure 15.
Figure 14: Example of the ESD and Laser Safety Label
Specifications
For technical details, refer to the Module and System Specification.
27
SH9HU
SH9HU
Figure 15: SH9HU Front View
Description
The 9HU shelf (SH9HU) is a rack-mountable, 9 HU-high housing which can
accommodate any optical channel and system module from the entire FSP3000R7 range
and the accessories (dummy modules, adaptor brackets, front cover). Feature for the
9HU shelf include (from top to bottom): the DC-inputs, three independent plug-in fan
units, Common Equipment Module (CEM/9HU), card cage, fiber tray and fiber finger set,
and the air filter unit. The front view of the 9HU shelf is illustrated in Figure 15 on p.28.
28
SH9HU
The 9HU shelf provides an increase in power and airflow. The 9HU shelf also has
enhanced backplane features, improved fiber optic cabling management and
improvements in electrical signal cable management. Therefore, this shelf is particularly
suitable for high power consumption with DWDM installations and support of the PCA
channel cards, and the 9HU shelf continues to support all existing services supported by
the 7HU shelf.
The FSP 3000R7 standard card cage features 22 vertical slots each 4 HP wide that can
be configured to support multiple configurations. It provides the physical mounting
location and all wiring connection points for the FSP 3000R7 plug-in modules of the
system. The backplane provides electrical connections for power supply and intra-shelf
communication, and supports hot-swapping of all modules. Internal backplane
connectors and card guides hold the modules in position. Communication between
modules occur over internal communication links. Modules installed in the slots 1 - 20
communicate with the SCUor SCU-II through 20 independent data connections. The
9HU shelf slot flexibility allows simplification of configuration and upgrades. Actual
configurations can be viewed and monitored using the management software.
The common shelf configuration includes: three plug-in fan modules (FAN/9HU), a
Common Equipment Module (CEM/9HU), one or two power supply units (PSU/9HU-AC,
PSU/9HU-DC, PSU/7HU-AC-800 or PSU/7HU-AC-HP), one shelf control unit (SCU or
SCU-II) and an air filter unit with air filter pad. Optical modules and management modules
may be pre-installed according to the system configuration ordered. Slots 1-2 and 19-20
are used for power supply units. The 9HU shelf is backward compatible to all FSP
3000R7 modules.
Three individual swappable fan units ensure the effective cooling of the shelf. The
CEM/9HU incorporates fan control, LED signaling and alarm LED control, LCD-display
and plastic foil push-buttons, integrated utility feature (telemetry interface and three
management ports) and four PSCU interfaces (Passive Shelf Control interfaces). A
separate ESD 4mm socket is located on the top front face of the shelf toward the right
side to be used as a grounding connection using a wrist strap during maintenance.
The equipment type name of the SH9HU used by the management software can be
Features
Modular extensible 19" carrier-class shelf design, based on the 19 format
Standard ETSI 300 mm dimensions and NEBS standard compliance
Robust, low-profile housing with SGCC G30 zinc-plated sheet metal
Powder coated outside surface (RAL 7035)
Single or dual DC or AC power supply options
Front or rear-DC power connections
Cooling through airflow passing from bottom front input to top rear output
Exchangeable air-filter
High-density support for all optical modules
Full front accessibility to all modules and connectors
Front fiber routing using the fiber interconnects
Shelf status LED indicators for the module slots, fans and network element
Active shelf display for identification
29
SH9HU
Power Supply
power feeds (A and B) are located on the front side, top left and right, and on the rear
panel of the shelf. Both front and rear DC power access are supported. The power input
connectors use a high-current D-Sub. Unused D-Sub power connectors (either on the
front or the rear) are equipped with a plastic protective cover that prevents the
unintentional touching of live pins and dust accumulation. The covers of the power
connectors should only be removed when in use. Each input feed has its own -48 V fail
detection.
The 9HU shelf is powered with a 1000 W DC power supply unit (PSU/9HU-DC), that
occupies two slots or 8HP in width. DC-input is applied to the modules via high-current
backplane connectors placed in slots 1 and 19, half way up the slot. The 9HU shelf can
also be powered by a 600 W or 800 W AC power supply unit (PSU/7HU-AC-HP or
PSU/7HU-AC-800). Alike the PSU/9HU-DC, the AC power supplies have the power
feed connector (female AC appliance coupler according to IEC/EN 60320-C13) on its
faceplates.
For power redundancy, two independent PSU/9HU-DCs connect to separate power
sources as needed per shelf. The PSU/7HU-AC-HP and PSU/7HU-AC-800 can be
combined in the same shelf. A mix of AC and DC power supply units per shelf is not
supported. In the redundant power case, both units supply the power to the shelf and
share the load. Load sharing between the PSUs occurs automatically. If one of the two
units fails, the remaining unit will continue to supply power to the fully loaded shelf
enabling the scheduled replacement of the failed power supply as needed.A shelf having
two power supplies with different power outputs operates with redundant power limited by
the lower-rated PSU. The 9HU shelf supports the high power consumption alarms PSU
Limit-Provisioned and PSU Limit-Equipped.
Note
power supply unit.
Output voltage and output current are continually monitored by the SCU/SCU-II. An
alarm is generated if the input voltage and output voltage falls to low limits. The power
supply can also be supervised via LED indicators on the shelf front panel.
The AC and DC power supplies are placed in the slots 1+2 and 19+20.
The power supplies mentioned above are described explicitly in this chapter.
Shelf Cooling
The modules inside the 9HU shelf are cooled by forced convection. The air flow meets
the requirements of the Telcordia GR-3028 -CORE.
Three redundant single-fan plug-in modules (FAN/9HUs) operate in the top of the shelf to
create airflow and dissipate heat produced by the system modules. All three fan modules
operate independently and are field replaceable.
The fans draw in air through the lower front air intake, and the air is filtered with the air
filter pad at the bottom of the shelf. The airflow passes up through the module slots, and
finally exits through the air outlets at the top of the rear and side panels. However, the
main air flow passes through the outlets at the top of the rear. In order to achieve NEBS
compliance for the 9HU shelf (EC Class F1-R3), the air outlet holes at the left and right
side panels must be covered with the appropriate air baffles (NEBS-KIT/9HU). Re-
30
SH9HU
routing the airflow does not have negative impact on the module temperature within the
shelf. Figure 16 illustrates the airflow inside the shelf.
Figure 16: Bottom-Front to Top-Rear Airflow Scheme for the SH9HU
Variant 1:
Air outlet at the rear side only

(NEBS compliance)
Air
outlet
Air intake
Air inlet
Variant 2:
Air outlets at
the left side
Air outlets at
the right side
Air inlet
For more information, see the subsection NEBS-KIT/9HU.

The shelfs internal air temperature controls the rotational speed of the fans. Under
normal ambient conditions, the fan modules operate at a low rotational speed. The fan
control unit (FCU) integrated in the CEM/9HU continually monitors the status of each fan
and reports each fan status to the shelf control unit (SCU or SCU-II). The status of a fan
can also be read from the fan LED indicator on its faceplate (named Status) and the
shelf display on the front panel of the CEM/9HU.
If a single fan module does not work properly, its LED turns yellow, and a fan abnormal
alarm is raised. If a fan module fails, the LED lights up red and a fan fault alarm is raised.
In this case, one minute after fan failure the intact fans increase their rotational speed to
maximum in order to compensate for the loss of cooling due the broken fan.
fan failure.
Note
process.
31
SH9HU
The fan unit can be replaced while the shelf is in service. It is recommended to have a
spare fan module available at all times.
The air filter pad must be used at all times to prevent dust and debris from entering the
shelf. The pad is included with the air filter unit. The replaceable air filter is accessible at
the bottom of the shelf, as shown in Figure 17).
Figure 17: Shelfs Air Filter Unit
The air filter pad should be inspected regularly and replaced, if necessary.
Never operate the shelf without having an air filter pad fitted in the air filter unit.
Without the filter pad dirt can block the air inlets and outlets. Blocked air inlets and
outlets lead to inefficient cooling and considerable increase in fire risk.
Note
A dirty air filter pad negatively influences cooling efficiency. Replace

dirty air filter pads at least once a year. ADVA Optical Networking
strongly recommends replacing the air filter pad every 90 days.
Slots
The 9HU Shelf features 22 slots. Slots numbered from 1 through 20 are 4 HP wide and 5
HU high. These slots are designed to fit the portfolio of 5 HU FSP 3000R7 modules.
Nearly any combination of modules is accepted. Double-width modules occupy two
slots. The preferred configuration of double-width modules is in odd slot number (1,2; 3,4;
5,6; etc.). Channel modules working in a protection group for channel module protection
do not need to be placed in neighboring slots. The two left-most slots are half the height of
all other slots and arranged one above the other. These slots are predetermined for the
management modules. The top slot is named slot A, and supports the NCU-II. The lower
slot is named slot B, and supports an SCU or SCU-II. Instead of installing an NCU-II into
slot A, two NCU-II-P modules can be installed into the shelf.The two NCU-II-P modules
are used to protect against communication failures. The NCU-II-P are full-height modules
and have to be placed into slots 3 and 18. Slot positions 1 and 2 or 19 and 20 (or both) are
32
SH9HU
reserved for power supply units. A single power supply can be installed, or dual power
supplies can be installed for redundancy. Slot 20 cannot be provisioned to contain a
module. It can only be occupied by the right half of a double width PSU module. All other
modules of the FSP 3000R7 can be plugged anywhere in slots 3 through 18.
The 9HU shelf must never be operated with open or empty slots. Slots not in use
must be filled with dummy modules to maintain proper cooling for all other modules.
When adding modules later on, store the dummy modules in a safe place for future
use.

All optical modules, the power supply units and the fan modules can be monitored and
controlled by the SCU/SCU-II. Each module is connected to internal shelf
communications links on the backplane, and enables data exchange with the
management modules. In addition, the shelf supports independent signal paths between
each module slot (including the CEM/9HU) and the SCU or SCU-II. The fan modules are
monitored through the CEM/9HU. The NCU-IIor NCU-II-Pserves as the network element
management interface and controller, and communicates to all shelf modules via the
SCU or SCU-II.
Placement
The 9HU shelf can be placed in a 19-inch, ETSI or NEBS complaint rack by using the
appropriate adaptor brackets. The shelf also fits into a 300 mm (0.984ft.) deep ETSI

The shelf LEDs provide a quick visual indication of the operating status of the modules,
fans and network element. The LED indicators are located on the front panel of the
Common Equipment Module. For more information, see CEM/9HU on p.55 and FSP
Accessories
Adaptor Brackets
33
SH9HU
The SH9HU comes with 19-inch rackmount brackets pre-installed. The ETSI and NEBS
bracket pairs are also included in the shipping box.
NEBS-KIT/9HU
To meet the requirements of the GR-63-CORE, chapter 4.1.8. "Equipment Air Flow",
Issue 4, 2012, the air outlets at the top of the side panels must be covered with air baffles
(plates) to provide front-aisle to rear-aisle airflow.
For this purpose, ADVA Optical Networking offers the NEBS-KIT/9HU. The NEBSKIT/9HU includes the following:
1 x Air baffle right
1 x Air baffle left
2 x Mounting screw M3x8 CSK TORX-T10 ZN for fixing the air baffles
The NEBS-KIT/9HU is intended for NEBS applications only.
The NEBS-KIT/9HU can be delivered with the shelf but must be ordered
separately (sales item number 1013700012-01).
Note

Note
Shelf Naming
Depending on the configuration, a 9HU shelf is referred to as:
34
master shelf if it is equipped with one NCU-II and one SCU/SCU-II (for nonredundant configurations)
master shelf if it is equipped with two NCU-II-P modules (for redundant NCU
configurations) and one SCU-II
main shelf if it is equipped with one SCU/SCU-II only
SH9HU
Following network configurations are not allowed:
Note
using NCU-II together with NCU-II-P
using NCU-II-P together with SCU/SCU-S
such as channel modules, optical amplifiers, optical switch modules, and optical filter
modules.
Labeling
Each SH9HU can be identified by several labels located on its rear panel and on the righthand side. See Figure 18 and Figure 19.
Figure 18: Labels located on the Rear Panel of the SH9HU
Figure 19: Labels Located on the Right-Hand Side of the SH9HU
35
SH9HU
Shelf Type Label

The shelf type label contains the following relevant information about the shelf:
type and version

Figure 20: Example of a 9HU shelf Type Label
Sales Kit Label

type of the shelf control unit. The figure below shows an example.
Figure 21: Example of an SH9HU Sales Kit Label
Certification Label
36
SH9HU
Figure 22: Example of an SH9HU Certification Label
EMC-Warning:
PJAA

EMC Label for Japan

The EMC label provides current certification marks. Figure 23 shows an example.
EMC-Warning:
PJAA


shelf name
Figure 24 on p.38 shows an example.
37
SH9HU
Figure 24: Example of an SH9HU Shelf Supply Values Label
Type
Rated Voltage
Rated Current
FSP 3000R7-9HU
(50-60 Hz) 100-240 V
-48 V
7.2-3.0 A
9.0-4.0 A
25 A
(AC Power)
(DC Power)
(PSU/7HU-AC-HP)
(PSU/7HU-AC-800)
(PSU/9HU-DC)
For proper selection of power supply cord refer to instruction manual.
Made in DE
01-26-2012
Only remove power cord when no voltage

is applied.
Always remove both power cords when
disconnecting from power source!
XXXXXXXXXXX
Read and understand the user documentation

before installing and using this device.

The ESD and laser safety labels are located on the front at the bottom right hand side of
the air filter unit, as shown in Figure 15.
Specifications
38
PSU/9HU-DC
PSU/9HU-DC
Figure 26: PSU/9HU-DC Front View
Variants:
none
Description
The PSU/9HU-DC is a high-capacity DC power supply unit specifically designed for the
9HU shelf. The unit is a 8HP wide, 5 HU high, plug-in module. The PSU/9HU-DC does
not have a power connector on its faceplate.
DC Power is supplied to the unit through the high-current D-Sub power connectors on the
front and rear side of the shelf and through the high-current backplane connector. The
PSU/9HU-DC transforms a higher DC input voltage received from a user-supplied power
source into a lower DC output voltage of the same polarity. The unit delivers 12.2V DC at
83.3 A maximum which powers the modules via backplane connectors. The unit
produces 1000W of output power.
In a redundant power supply configuration, two PSU/9HU-DCs work in load sharing
mode. In this case, both power supply units must be of identical type and should receive
DC power from separate circuits. If one unit fails, the remaining unit is capable of
powering the fully loaded shelf on a temporary basis until the fault is cleared.
39
PSU/9HU-DC
If the 9HU shelf includes two PSU/9HU-DCs, the total power consumption must not
exceed 1000 W.
When upgrading power supplies, different types of power supply units are permissible for
a short period of time. For example, if a PSU/9HU-DC is replaced with a PSU/7HU-DCHP, the PSUs can be replaced one after another maintaining shelf operation.
The power supply unit is cooled by the fan modules, and does not have built in fans. The
front view of the PSU/9HU-DC is shown in Figure 26.
Features
Rugged electrical and mechanical design
Nominal voltage: -48 V DC positive conductor of the power source is connected to

earth
Service voltage range: from -36 V DC to -72 V DC
Fully-redundant configuration
Inverse-polarity protection
Input over-current protection
Output over-current protection
Output over-voltage protection
Input under-voltage protection
Input over-voltage protection
Short-circuit protection
Over temperature protection
Fire protection
Holdup time of 10 ms
Alarm conditioning (over temperature, over current, power-fail)
Status LED indicator for power
Hot pluggable
Hot swappable
Fuses
Electrical safety is provided by one single pole fuse that is fitted inside the power supply
unit (-48 V conductor). The fuse is not accessible. If a fuse has blown, the power supply
unit must be replaced by service personnel and returned to ADVA Optical Networking for
repair.
Risk of hazardous voltage!
Do not open the power supply unit under any circumstances!
WARNING
There are no serviceable parts inside. A faulty unit should be

returned to ADVA Optical Networking for repair.
EMC
The PSU/9HU-DC has special EMC contact strips attached to it, which creates a tight
seal with neighboring modules.
40
PSU/9HU-DC
Risk of electromagnetic disturbances!

Make sure that the EMC contact strips are not damaged before inserting the unit.
Defective EMC contact strip must be replaced immediately. Otherwise EMC
compliance cannot be achieved. Return the unit with a defective EMC contact strip
to ADVA Optical Networking for repair.
Connecting
Before connecting to the power source, make sure that the 9HU shelf is earthed properly
and that no power is applied to the DC power source.
Risk of burn!
WARNING
Do not connect or disconnect the power cable if voltage is applied.

Doing so may result in burns and destruction of the connectors by
causing an arc.
Power connections should be made using ADVA Optical Networkings power cable of the
type CBL/DC/300/2AWG10/SUB-D. For details, see Electrical Cables and FSP 3000R7
Rel. 13.2 Installation and Commissioning Manual, Chapter 4.
Monitoring
The temperature, output voltage and output current are continually monitored by the
SCU. The network element generates an alarm, if the output voltage falls below a defined
limit or the temperature is too high. Failure or removal of the power supply unit from the
shelf is reported to the network management system. The power supply unit can also be
supervised via the LED indicator on its faceplate.
Slot Positions
The PSU/9HU-DC is 8 HP wide and therefore occupies two regular slots. It can only be
placed in the slots 1+2 and 19+20 of the 9HU shelf.

Modular, front access design and hot-swap capability both allow for quick and easy
replacement in the case of failure or upgrade. Two handles on the units front panel
support easy removal.
Risk of electric shock due to residual voltage.
Residual voltage may still be present inside the PSU/9HU-DC after
being disconnected from its power source.
WARNING
Wait at least 30 seconds after disconnecting the supply voltage

from the PSU/9HU-DC before you proceed to remove the unit.
41
PSU/9HU-DC
The internal capacitors are capable of dissipating their residual charges to a safe level
within a minimum of 30 seconds after disconnecting the PSU/9HU-DC from its power
source.
Power Supply Removal Alarm

Removing a PSU/9HU-DC from the 9HU shelf is alarmed through the management
system (RMVD alarm).
If you remove a PSU/9HU-DC (in the following referred to as PSU) and then reinsert it
immediately, an RMVD alarm will be generated even though the PSU has been
reinserted. You are required to wait at least 30 seconds between removal and reseating
the same PSU to avoid raising an RMVD alarm after reinsertion of the unit. This amount
of time is needed to dissipate any residual charge stored in the capacitors of the PSU.
This residual charge causes raising an RMVD alarm that cannot be cleared even after the
NCU was rebooted.
Note
A quick sequence of removing and reinserting the PSU/9HU-DC is not

allowed. Make sure that at least 30 seconds has elapsed between
removal and reseating the same unit.
LED Indicator
The PSU/9HU-DC has a single three-color LED indicator labeled "P" on the faceplate. Its
colors represent different operating status of the power supply unit. Table 1 describes the
functions of the LED.
Table 1: PSU/9HU-DC LED Description
LED Name
LED Colors
Meaning
Green
Normal operations
Yellow
Indicates that the rated output current has been

exceeded (90% load, about 74A)
Red
Overcurrent / Overtemperature / PSU failure
For more details, refer to the FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Manual, Chapter 3.
Labeling
The PSU/9HU-DC can be identified by the PSU type label on the board cover. It contains
the following relevant information about the unit:
42
name, type and version
PSU/9HU-DC
Figure 27: Example of a PSU/9HU-DC Module Type Label
Specifications
43
PSU/9HU-AC
PSU/9HU-AC
Figure 28: PSU/9HU-AC Front View
Variants:
none
44
PSU/9HU-AC
Description
The PSU/9HU-AC is an AC power supply unit specifically designed for a 9HU shelf. The
unit is a 5 HU high plug-in module with double width.
For power feeding, the power supply unit has an AC appliance coupler on its faceplate as
shown in Figure 69. When connected to the AC power source, the PSU/9HU-AC
converts AC into DC needed for powering the shelfs modules. The unit automatically
detects the input voltage within the specified range. No adjustment is necessary. The
PSU/9HU-AC delivers 12.2 V DC at 82 A to each module through the backplane
connectors. The unit produces approximately 1000 W of output power. Two PSU/9HUACs working in load sharing mode can be installed to provide power redundancy. In this
case, both power supply units must be of identical type and should receive AC power
from separate circuits. If one unit fails, the remaining unit is capable of powering a fully
loaded shelf on an ongoing basis until the fault is cleared.
The power supply unit is cooled by the fan modules, and does not have built in fans. The
front view of the PSU/9HU-AC is shown in Figure 26.
Features
Autoranging from 100 V AC to 240 V AC at 50 - 60 Hz
Usable in fully-redundant configuration
Status LED indicator for indicating the operational status of the unit
Hot-swappable
Field-replaceable.
Compliant with EN 55022 Class A (EMC classification)
Fuses
Electrical security is provided by two double pole fuses that are fitted inside the power
supply unit. The fuses are not accessible. If a fuse has blown, the power supply unit must
be replaced by service personnel and returned to ADVA Optical Networking for
manufacturer repair.
WARNING

45
PSU/9HU-AC
EMC
The PSU/9HU-AC has special EMC contact strips attached to it, which creates a tight

Connecting
Note
The PSU/9HU-AC has to be powered by an alternating current (AC)

source directly provided from the mains supply. It is not intended to be
powered by AC derived from a direct current (DC) source.
To avoid injury in the event of an electric shock, use the supplied AC power cable for
connecting the unit to a properly grounded electrical outlet. For details, see Electrical
Cables and Chapter 4 of the Installation and Commissioning Manual.
Monitoring
The temperature, output voltage and output current are continually monitored by the
SCU. The network element generates an alarm, if the output voltage falls below a defined
limit or the temperature is too high. Failure or removal of the power supply unit from the
shelf is reported to the network management system. The power supply unit can also be
supervised via the LED indicator on its faceplate.
Slot Positions
The PSU/9HU-AC is 8 HP wide and therefore occupies two regular slots. It can only be
placed in the slots 1, 2, 19, and 20 of the 9HU shelf.

Residual voltage may still be present inside the PSU/9HU-AC after
WARNING
46

from the PSU/9HU-AC before you proceed to remove the unit.
PSU/9HU-AC
within a minimum of 30 seconds after disconnecting the PSU/9HU-AC from its power
source.
Removing a PSU/9HU-AC from the 9HU shelf is alarmed through the management
If you remove a PSU/9HU-AC (in the following referred to as PSU) and then reinsert it
of time is needed to dissipate any residual charge stored in the capacitors of the PSU.
NCU was rebooted.
Note
A quick sequence of removing and reinserting the PSU/9HU-AC is not

LED Indicator
The PSU/9HU-AC has a single three-color LED indicator labeled "P" on the faceplate. Its
colors represent different operating status of the power supply unit. Table 2 describes the
functions of the LED.
Table 2: PSU/9HU-AC LED Description
LED Name
LED Colors
Meaning
Green
Normal operations
Yellow
Indicates that the rated output current has been

exceeded (90% load, about 74A)
Red
Overcurrent / Overtemperature / PSU failure
For more details, refer to Chapter 3 of the FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2 Maintenance and
Troubleshooting Manual.
Labeling
The PSU/9HU-AC can be identified by the PSU type label on the board cover. It contains
the following relevant information about the unit:
47
FAN/9HU
Figure 29: Example of a PSU/9HU-AC Module Type Label
Specifications
FAN/9HU
Figure 30: FAN/9HU Top View from the Front and Rear
Description
The FAN/9HU is a single-fan plug-in module specifically designed for vertical cooling of
modules in the 9HU shelf. The FAN/9HU is a key component of the shelfs cooling
system, which dissipates excess heat in order to keep the installed modules within
acceptable operating temperatures. Three of these fan modules are used to operate the
9HU Shelf.
48
FAN/9HU
To facilitate replacing a failed or malfunctioning fan, the fans are mounted in removable
trays. Figure 30 shows the FAN/9HU. The tray is 1 HU high, and the side walls have
slide guides for mounting into the 9HU shelf. Top and bottom sides are covered with
metal fan guards. A retaining screw on the front panel secures the FAN/9HU to the shelf.
The tray includes the fan assembly with one high capacity axial flow fan, the circuit board
(PCB) and one 10-pin connector located on the back wall.
The PCB has electrical components electrically connected to the connector and to the
electric motor. The fan uses a brushless 24-V DC powered motor, which produces less
electromagnetic interference. 24 V DC for the motor is generated by a 12 V/24 V booster
placed on the PCB. Electric power and management information are provided to the
FAN/9HU from the shelfs backplane connector. As soon as voltage is applied to one of
the PSU/9HU-DC in the 9HU shelf, the fan module is powered automatically and starts
operating. The fan module moves air through the shelf, drawing cooler outside air in
through the front and discharging hot air through the rear.
The system can operate without severe damage if one fan fails. The flow of cooling air
within the shelf is not necessarily impaired if one fan fails. In this case, the remaining two
fans automatically increase their rotation speed to the allowable maximum value to
provide sufficient airflow. However, the failed fan module must stay in its slot until the
fan module swap is executed. Call ADVA Optical Networking for a replacement forthwith
when you detect a failure, or have the faulty FAN/9HU replaced with an available spare
module immediately.
fan failure.
Note
process.
If the CEM/9HU fails or is removed, all fan modules will run at maximum speed.
Features
Compact design
Housing: made of sheet steel, zinc-passivated
Designed to provide bottom to top airflow within the 9HU shelf
Temperature controlled
Fan speed: max. 8400 rpm
Low noise level
Fan status LED indicator on front panel
Hot swappable
Field replaceable
Front accessible
49
FAN/9HU
Fuse
Electrical safety is provided by a fuse (9A, slow blow) that is fitted inside the fan module.
The fuse is not accessible. If it has blown, the fan module must be replaced with a new
component of the same type by service personnel. The faulty module should be returned
EMC
EMI shielding gaskets mounted on the sides of the module front panel block unwanted
electromagnetic emissions.

Make sure that the EMI shielding gaskets are not damaged before inserting the 9HU
fan. Defective EMI shielding gaskets must be replaced immediately. Otherwise
EMC compliance cannot be achieved. Return the module with defective EMI
shielding gaskets to ADVA Optical Networking for repair.

The FAN/9HU modules are directly monitored and controlled by the FCU that is
integrated in the CEM/9HU. Three independent I2C-bus interfaces are used for
monitoring the fans, and three independent analog interfaces are used for controlling the
fans. Sensors check the temperature inside the shelf. If they detect a temperature
outside of range, the fans rotate at maximum speed. When the internal temperature drops
below the defined threshold value again, the rotational speed of the fans will reduce. A fan
failure detector ensures high operational security. Failure or removal of the FAN/9HU
from the shelf is reported to the network management system. The fan module can also
be supervised via the LED indicator on its front panel.
The equipment type name of the FAN/9HU used by the management software can be
found in Equipment Types of FSP 3000R7 Hardware Components on p.1327 of this
documentation.
Slot Positions
Three FAN/9HU modules are placed at the top of the 9HU shelf. See Figure 15.
Replacing
Modular, front access design and hot-swap capability allow for quick and easy
replacement in the case of failure.
The FAN/9HU modules are separately interchangeable. The hinged handle on the front
panel helps in the removal or replacement of the unit after loosening the retaining screw.
To prevent modules from overheating, a defective FAN/9HU should be replaced by a new
one within 30 seconds. In this case, the two remaining fan modules will operate with
maximum rotational speed.
50
FAN/9HU
LED Indicator
The FAN/9HU has a single tri-color LED indicator labeled "Status" on the front panel. Its
colors represent different operating status. For details, refer to the FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2
Maintenance and Troubleshooting Manual, Chapter 3.
Labeling
The FAN/9HU can be identified by the fan type label on the top of the fan. It contains the
following relevant information of the FAN/9HU:
hardware revision
Figure 31: Example of a FAN/9HU Type label
Because the FAN/9HU is not manufactured by ADVA Optical Networking, the

manufacturer's label can be found on the top of the fan. See Figure 30.
Specifications
51
FAN/X9HU
FAN/X9HU
Figure 32: FAN/X9HU Top View from the Front and Rear
FAN/X9HU Description
The FAN/X9HU is a single-fan plug-in module specifically designed for vertical cooling of
modules in the SHX9HU shelf. The fan is an improved version of the FAN/9HU used in
the SH9HU shelf with more powerful fans to improve airflow.
The FAN/X9HU is a key component of the shelfs cooling system, which dissipates
excess heat in order to keep the installed modules within acceptable operating
temperatures. Three of these fan modules are used to operate the SHX9HU shelf.
To facilitate replacing a failed or malfunctioning fan, the fans are mounted in removable
trays. Figure 30 shows the FAN/X9HU. The tray is 1 HU high, and the side walls have
slide guides for mounting into the SHX9HU shelf. Top and bottom sides are covered with
metal fan guards. A retaining screw on the front panel secures the FAN/X9HU to the
shelf.
The tray includes the fan assembly with one high capacity axial flow fan, the circuit board
(PCB) and one 10-pin connector located on the back wall.
The PCB has electrical components electrically connected to the connector and to the
electric motor. The fan uses a brushless 24-V DC powered motor, which produces less
electromagnetic interference. 24 V DC for the motor is generated by a 12 V/24 V booster
placed on the PCB. Electric power and management information are provided to the fan
from the shelfs backplane connector. As soon as voltage is applied to the SHX9HU
shelf, the fan module automatically and starts operating. The fan module moves air
through the shelf, drawing cooler outside air in through the front and discharging hot air
through the rear.
The system can operate without severe damage if one fan fails. The flow of cooling air
within the shelf is not necessarily impaired if one fan fails. In this case, the remaining two
fans automatically increase their rotation speed to the allowable maximum value to
provide sufficient airflow. However, the failed fan module must stay in its slot until the fan
module swap is executed. Call ADVA Optical Networking for a replacement forthwith
when you detect a failure, or have the faulty FAN/X9HU replaced with an available spare
module immediately.
fan failure.
Note
not remain empty for longer than 30 seconds during the replacement
process.
If the CEM/9HU fails or is removed, all fan modules will run at maximum speed.
FAN/X9HU Features
52
Compact design
FAN/X9HU
Housing: made of sheet steel, zinc-passivated
Designed to provide bottom to top airflow within the SHX9HU shelf
Fan speed: max. 9600 rpm
Low noise level
Fan status LED indicator on front panel
Hot swappable
Field replaceable
Front accessible
Fuse
Electrical safety is provided by a fuse (9A, slow blow) that is fitted inside the fan module.
The fuse is not accessible. If it has blown, the fan module must be replaced with a new
component of the same type by service personnel. The faulty module should be returned
EMC

Make sure that the EMI shielding gaskets are not damaged before inserting the 9HU
fan. Defective EMI shielding gaskets must be replaced immediately. Otherwise
EMC compliance cannot be achieved. Return the module with defective EMI
shielding gaskets to ADVA Optical Networking for repair.
FAN/X9HU Monitoring and Control

The FAN/9HU modules are directly monitored and controlled by the FCU that is
integrated in the CEM/9HU. Three independent I2C-bus interfaces are used for
monitoring the fans, and three independent analog interfaces are used for controlling the
fans. Sensors check the temperature inside the shelf. If they detect a temperature
outside of range, the fans rotate at maximum speed. When the internal temperature drops
below the defined threshold value again, the rotational speed of the fans will reduce. A fan
failure detector ensures high operational security. Failure or removal of the FAN/9HU
from the shelf is reported to the network management system. The fan module can also
be supervised via the LED indicator on its front panel.
documentation.
53
FAN/X9HU
FAN/X9HU Slot Positions

Three FAN/9HU modules are placed at the top of the SHX9HU shelf.
FAN/X9HU Replacing
Modular, front access design and hot-swap capability allow for quick and easy
replacement in the case of failure.
The FAN/X9HU modules are separately interchangeable. The hinged handle on the front
panel helps in the removal or replacement of the unit after loosening the retaining screw.
To prevent modules from overheating, a defective fan should be replaced by a new one
within 30 seconds. In this case, the two remaining fan modules will operate with
maximum rotational speed.
FAN/X9HU LED Indicator

The FAN/X9HU has a single tri-color LED indicator labeled "Status" on the front panel.
Its colors represent different operating status. For details, refer to the FSP 3000R7 Rel.
13.3 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Manual, Chapter 3.
FANX9HU Labeling
The FAN/X9HU can be identified by the fan type label on the top of the fan. It contains
the following relevant information:
hardware revision
Figure 33: Example of a FAN/X9HU Type label
Because the fan is not manufactured by ADVA Optical Networking, the manufacturer's
label can be found on the top of the fan.
Specifications
54
CEM/9HU
CEM/9HU
Figure 34: CEM/9HU Front View

The following table lists all abbreviations on the CEM/9HU front panel and their
meanings.
Table 3: CEM/9HU Front Panel Markings
LED Indicators
Electrical Ports
2.5 HU Module slot status

LEDs
I1 to I4
Interconnect ports 1 to 4
C1 to
C3
Ethernet ports 1 to 3
1 to 20
5 HU module slot status LEDs
In/Out
Telemetry port
Mod
CEM/9HU module status LED
critical
Network element alarm status

LEDs
major
minor
I1 to I4
Interconnect port LEDs 1 to 4
1 to 20
Telemetry interface contact

LEDs (yellow)
Others
Reset
Alarm reset button for the telemetry interface
55
CEM/9HU
Description
The CEM/9HU (Common Equipment Module) is a plug-in unit specifically designed for
the 9HU shelf. The front view is illustrated in Figure 34.
The CEM/9HU monitors and controls the fans of the 9HU shelf and allows input of the
shelf ID. In addition, it acts as the management controller for up to four passive
40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy and 96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125 shelves. This module
recognizes all available 40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy and 96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125
shelves for monitoring and controlling of the shelves. The CEM/9HU registers the
shelves for the NCU-II, and provides inventory data and supplies the connected devices
with power.
The CEM/9HU additionally provides 3 Ethernet ports for centralized management access
to a single network element (NE) in any configuration. Furthermore, it features a
telemetry port for transferring external alarm signals. The Ethernet ports connect to a
management interface at a central location on the shelf. This allows removal and
replacement of NCU modules without disconnecting the Ethernet cabling. The use of the
CEM/9HU as a centralized management access does not restrict the use of any
functionality supported by the NCU-II. For security reasons, the detection of a
removed/faulty CEM/9HU does not autonomously disable management interfaces on the
NCU or OSCM. CEM/9HU-to-NCU communication does not require provisioning
knowledge of the NCU and SCU addresses.
One CEM/9HU is required per 9HU shelf.
The 3 Ethernet ports are only enabled in the CEM of the master shelf.
Note
As shown in the figure below, the CEM/9HU consists of:
An PCB assembly with two rear 64-pole (IEC 60603) connectors that connect the
module to the backplane
Front panel with two knurled screws (left and right) and two lever handles (top left and
right)
The CEM assembly includes the fan control unit (FCU), module processor, SD-Card
interface, LED signaling and alarm control, shelf display and push-buttons as shown in
the figure below.
Utility functions and passive shelf control functions are integrated in the FCU.
56
CEM/9HU
Figure 35: CEM-Assembly
Features
Designed as a plug-in unit for a 9HU shelf
Incorporates the fan control unit for the FAN/9HUs
Registers and deregisters all available passive 40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy shelves
Bidirectional transmission of management and configuration control information

to/from 40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy and 96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125 shelves
Support of 16 external opto-isolated input and 4 output alarm signals
Alarm reset button
An LCD display and push-buttons for shelf ID
Status LED indicators for slots, shelf and network element
Hot-swappable
Field-replaceable
Front access to all connectors
EMC

Make sure that the EMI shielding gaskets are not damaged before inserting the
CEM/9HU. Defective EMI shielding gaskets must be replaced immediately.
Otherwise EMC compliance cannot be achieved. Return the module with defective
EMI shielding gaskets to ADVA Optical Networking for repair.
57
CEM/9HU
Interconnect Ports
The interconnect ports, labeled I1 to I4, are used to connect up to four 40CSM/2HU or
96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125 shelves to the CEM/9HU for internal management
purposes. The interconnect ports are 6-pin panel-mounted IEEE1394 (FireWire) sockets.
Four pins are used for transferring inventory data, and two pins provide power to the
40CSM/2HUor 96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125 shelves in favor of a separate power
supply.
Note
Although the CEM/9HU and 40CSM/2HU shelves use FireWire 400

connectors for interconnecting, the Firewire standard itself is not
supported (neither the protocol nor pinout).
The cable for connecting the CEM/9HU to a 40CSM/2HU or 96CSM/4HU-#19600#19125 shelf is provided by ADVA Optical Networking. Use only cables provided by
ADVA Optical Networking. The use of cables other than those delivered by ADVA
Optical Networking will void the warranty and the EMC certificate. For more information,
refer to Electrical Cables on p.1279. The connection of the CEM/9HU to devices other
than 40CSM/2HU shelves is not permitted. ADVA Optical Networking assumes no
liability for potential damage to the equipment connected to other devices. The
40CSM/2HU and 96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125 shelves attached to the CEM/9HU are
managed as plugs in the management software. Any kind of loss of communication
between the CEM/9HU and the 40CSM/2HU shelves will be alarmed through the
management system.
Ethernet Ports
The Ethernet ports labeled C1, C2 and C3 are used for centralized management access
to an NE as external communication interfaces. The Ethernet ports are female 8P8C
(RJ45) receptacles used to connect the 9HU shelf to an NMS or a management PC via a
standard Ethernet crossover cable.
The ports comply with the IEEE 802.3 10/100BASE-TX and IEEE 802.3u standards.
Each Ethernet port supports:
Data rates of 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s (Fast Ethernet)
Disabling of 10/100 Mbit/s auto-negotiation
Autonegotiation of the data rates using the auto-negotiation function
Control to enable or disable each port
Compatibility with IEEE 802.3 (automatic MDI/MDI-X crossover capabilities)
Half/full duplex mode
See Table 4 for the Ethernet port pinouts.
58
CEM/9HU
Table 4: RJ-45 Panel Jack Pinout of the CEM/9HU
RJ-45 Panel Jack
Pin
Number
Signal
Signal
Direction
TXD+
output
TXD-
output
RXD+
input
no connection
no connection
RXD-
no connection
no connection
input
Use a standard CAT5E cable. Refer to the Module and System Specification for detailed
information.
Telemetry Port
The telemetry port, identified on the front panel as IN/OUT, is an external hardware
interface with contacts for 16 opto-isolated alarm input signals and 4 alarm output
signals. The physical interface is a 44-pin D-subminiature male panel connector high
density (HD SUB-D44). Table 5 lists the signal assignment of the connector pins as
viewed when facing the CEM/9HU module.
59
CEM/9HU
Table 5: Male HD SUB-D44 Connector Pinout of the CEM/9HU
Male HD SUBD44 Connector
31
16
44 30
Pin Number
Relay No.
Signal
31, 16, 1
Relay 1
Output 1 (normally-closed,
common, normally-open)
32, 17, 2
Relay 2
33, 18, 3
Relay 3
34, 19, 4
Relay 4
15
5, 20
Input 1 (Ground 1)
6, 21
Input 2 (Ground 2)
7, 22
Input 3 (Ground 3)
8, 23
Input 4 (Ground 4)
9, 24
Input 5 (Ground 5)
10, 25
Input 6 (Ground 6)
11, 26
Input 7 (Ground 7)
12, 27
Input 8 (Ground 8)
13, 28
Input 9 (Ground 9)
14, 29
Input 10 (Ground 10)
15, 30
44, 43
42, 41
40, 39
38, 37
36, 35
An operator may connect external alarming devices such as horns, beepers or warning
lamps (max. 42 V AC/50 VA or max. 60 V DC/60 W) to the outputs of the telemetry
interface (TIF) or may use the inputs for alarming external events (e.g. originating from a
door sensing device) within the management system of the FSP 3000R7. The telemetry
interface cable required for connecting to this port is not provided by ADVA Optical
Networking. For cable specification, see Electrical Cables on p.1279.
TIF inputs can be configured to create an alarm if a contact is closed or opened. The
severity of a TIF input contact alarm and the type of a reported TIF input contact alarm
are provisioned by the management software. TIF outputs summarize the alarm status of
the NE (critical, major, minor alarm groups). Each TIF input/output contact can be
provisioned independently.
60
CEM/9HU

A TIF alarm contact reset button allows the alarm status of all TIF output contacts as well
as the associated output LEDs to be reset. Pressing this button will not clear the alarm
status of the affected alarms in the management system such as an NMS. The activation
of the TIF reset button does not reset LEDs and alarms related to the TIF input contacts.
If required, press and release this button using a pointed tool.
The CEM/9HU supports the following management tools:
Craft Console accessed via TELNET application protocol
WEB-based GUI
Network Manager
Network Planner
TL1

The CEM/9HU is connected to the internal communications links of the shelfs
backplane enabling data exchange with the NCU-II and SCU. The NCU-II operates
management software for the network element and provides the interface for network
element access.
Placement
The CEM/9HU is placed above the module slots in the 9HU shelf. See Figure 15.
Replacing
The modular, front access design with hot-swap capability allows for quick and easy
replacement in the case of a failure. Lever handles top left and right on the front panel
support easy removal after loosening the two knurled screws.
When removing a defective CEM/9HU, the replacement unit should be installed within 30
seconds to avoid system overheating. During the exchange, the fans operate at
maximum speed, and the fan LEDs retain their most recent status (i.e., fan LED do not
change during CEM replacement.).

Different LED indicators behind the front panel provide a quick visual check of the
operating status of the network element, the modules installed in the 9HU shelf, the
CEM/9HU itself and the connected equipment. Each LED indicator has dedicated colors
to indicate different faults. LED behavior complies with generic ADVA Optical
Networking specification. The locations of all LED indicators are shown in Figure 34. For
details, refer to Chapter 3 of the Maintenance and Troubleshooting Manual.
61
CEM/9HU
Slot Status LEDs

The CEM/9HU has one status LED per slot. The LEDs for the 5 HU slots are numbered
and labeled from 1 through 20 (with the respective slot number). The two status LEDs
labeled A and B are used for the half-sized slots. Only the failure on the module with
the highest severity will be indicated by the respective slot status LED (according to the
corresponding ARC configuration).

The LEDs labeled critical, major and minor indicate different network element alarms.
Within the network element, only the failure with the highest severity will be indicated.
Therefore, only one of the three LEDs is lit at a time.
Note
The alarm status of a network element is only indicated by the master

shelf. The network element status LEDs of the remaining shelves within
the network element will be off.
Module Status LED

The tri-color LED labeled Mod indicates the operation status of the CEM/9HU.
Interconnect Port Status LEDs

Four tri-color interconnect port status LEDs labeled I1 through I4 (one LED per
interface) indicate different states of the connected 40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy and
96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125 shelves.
Telemetry Port LEDs

Twenty telemetry port LEDs labeled 1 to 20 indicate the TIF contact alarm status (16
TIF input contact LEDs for the alarm inputs and 4 TIF output contact LEDs for the alarm
outputs). These LEDs provide one color only (yellow) and provide information about the
alarm status.
Ethernet Port LEDs

Two LAN LEDs per Ethernet port (integrated in the jacket) indicate the interface status.
Shelf Display and Arrow Buttons

The shelf display (dot matrix LCD display) on the front panel (see Figure 34) indicates the
shelf ID number (unique within an NE). The arrow buttons and the enter button are used
to set the shelf ID and test the LEDs for service purposes. The buttons are also used to
read the rotational speeds of the individual fan modules and to check whether the manual
setting of the shelf ID is locked by management software (by a small lock in the lower
right corner).
62
CEM/9HU
Labeling
The CEM/9HU can be identified by a module type label on the top of the module. It
contains the following relevant information about the CEM/9HU:
Figure 36: Example of a CEM/9HU Module Type Label
Because the CEM/9HU is not manufactured by ADVA Optical Networking, a

manufacturer's label can be found on the CEM assembly. See Figure 35.
Specifications
63
SH7HU
SH7HU
Figure 37: SH7HU Front View
Description
The SH7HU Shelf is a rack-mountable, 7 HU-high housing which includes the entire FSP
3000R7 system and the accessories (dummy modules, adaptor brackets, front cover).
22 vertical slots each 4 HP wide are arranged in the middle of the shelf, into which the
standard FSP 3000R7 modules are plugged in. The slots occupy 5 HU space. The
remaining 2 HU of the shelf are occupied by the fan unit above the slots and the air filter
unit below the slots. The front view of an SH7HU is illustrated in Figure 37 on p.64. The
fiber finger set is not shown.
The basic configuration is: one power supply unit, one shelf control unit (SCU or SCU-II),
the fan unit and the air filter unit fitted. Optical modules and management modules may
be pre-installed according to the system configuration ordered. The backplane provides
electrical connections for power supply and intra-shelf communication. Internal
backplane connectors and tracks hold the modules in position. The SH7HU supports hotswapping of the modules. This allows for maximum flexibility when planning for upgrades
or reconfigurations. Actual configurations can be viewed and monitored using the
management software.
64
SH7HU
The equipment type name of the SH7HU used by the management software can be
documentation.
Features
Modular extensible design, based on the 19 format
Dimensions: width x height x depth

452 mm x 311 mm x 270 mm; (17.79 in x 12.25 in x 10.63 in)
Robust, low-profile housing made from alloyed steel sheet
Surface condition: uncoated
Single/dual universal DC or AC power supply options
Front power access
Heat dissipation using ventilation (bottom-front to top-rear airflow)
High-density racking for optical modules
Access to all components from the front of the shelf
Front fiber routing using the fiber finger set
Status indicators for the module slots, fans and network element on the front panel of
the fan unit
Shelf display
Power Supply
The SH7HU may optionally be powered by hot-swap AC or DC power supply units.
Power is available from the front side of the shelf using female AC appliance couplers
according to IEC/EN 60320-C13 and/or DC terminal blocks.
For power redundancy, two independent power supply units connected to separate power
sources are needed per shelf. In this case, both units supply the power to the shelf and
share the load. Load sharing between the PSUs occurs automatically. If one of the two
units fails, the remaining unit will take over the power supply for the fully loaded shelf until
a unit swap has been executed. The PSU/7HU-AC, PSU/7HU-DC, PSU/7HU-DC-HP,
PSU/7HU-DC-800 and PSU/7HU-AC-HP can be combined in the same shelf. The
PSU/7HU-AC-800 can only be employed in combination with the PSU/7HU-AC-HP. A
shelf having two power supplies with different power outputs operates with redundant
power limited by the lower-rated PSU. The SH7HU supports the high power consumption
alarms PSU Limit-Provisioned and PSU Limit-Equipped.
Pay attention that for permanent power redundancy the total maximum power
consumption of the modules installed in an SH7HU Shelf does not exceed the
maximum output power specified for the lower-rated power supply unit.
The AC and DC power supplies are placed in the slots 1+2 and 19+20.
65
SH7HU
Earthing
There are two options for making a functional earth connection to the shelf:
Option 1: Use the two different earthing terminals on the right-hand side of the shelf, as
shown in Figure 38.
Figure 38: Earthing Terminals on the Right-hand Side of the SH7HU Shelf
Using these terminals is the standard method for earthing the shelf.
Option 2: Use the two different earthing terminals on the rear side of the shelf, as shown
in Figure 39.
Figure 39: Earthing Terminals on the Rear Side of the SH7HU Shelf
Use the earthing terminals on the rear side of the shelf when the shelf is mounted in a
rack with a narrow opening. In this case, remove the earthing terminals on the right-hand
side of the shelf.
The shelf ships with both sets of earthing terminals installed to accommodate either
scenario.
The shelf ships with an earthing kit. For details, see Electrical Cables on p.1279.
Shelf Cooling
The modules inside the SH7HU are cooled by forced convection. The air flow meets the
requirements of the Telcordia GR-3028 -CORE.
66
SH7HU
The fan unit (FAN/Plug-In) is located above the module slots. It sufficiently dissipates the
heat produced by the system modules. Air is drawn in by the fans through the lower front
air intake, and the air is filtered with the air filter pad at the bottom of the shelf. The airflow
passes up through the module slots, and finally exits through the air outlet at the top of
the rear and side panels. However, the main air flow passes through the outlets at the top
of the rear. Figure 40 illustrates the airflow inside the shelf.
Figure 40: Bottom-Front to Top-Rear Airflow Scheme for the SH7HU
Air
outlet
Air outlets at
the left side
Air outlets at
the right side
Air intake
Air inlet
The air filter pad is included with the air filter unit. It is located beneath the module slots.
For details on the fan unit, see FAN/Plug-In on p.124.
Never operate the shelf without having an air filter pad fitted in the air filter unit. By
ignoring this, dirt can block the air inlets and outlets. Blocked air inlets and outlets
lead to inefficient cooling and considerable increase in fire risk.
A dirty air filter pad negatively influences cooling efficiency. Therefore it must be
inspected regularly and replaced, if necessary.
Note
Taking air pollution into consideration, replace dirty air filter pads at least
once a year. ADVA Optical Networking strongly recommends replacing
the air filter pad every 90 days.
Slots
The 7HU shelf features 22 slots.Slots numbered from 1 through 20 are 4 HP wide and 5
HU high. These slots accommodate all 5 HU FSP 3000R7 modules including the power
supply units. Nearly any combination of modules is accepted. Double-width modules
occupy two slots. Preferred configuration of such modules is to start at an odd slot
number (1,2; 3,4; 5;6; etc.). Channel modules working in a protection group for channel
module protection do not need to be placed in neighboring slots.
The two slots most left are half the height of all other slots and named A and B. These
slots are intended for the management modules.
67
SH7HU
The SH7HU must never be operated with open or empty slots. Slots not in use must
be filled with dummy modules to maintain proper cooling for all other modules. When
adding modules later on, store the dummy modules in a safe place for future use.

To prevent mechanical stress from the optical fibers there is a horizontal fiber tray to hold
them. It is located along the lower front edge of the shelf. The perforated part of the fiber
tray serves as air inlet for cooling the modules.
Fiber Finger Set

The fiber finger set is assembled above the perforated part of the fiber tray as shown in
Figure 41. The assembly includes a plurality of fiber fingers. Each interspace between
two fingers can be used for routing and retaining the optical fiber jumpers to be connected
to the corresponding optical module.
Figure 41: Fiber Finger Set

The modules including the fan unit can be monitored and controlled by the SCU or SCUII. Each module is connected to the internal bus of the backplane enabling data exchange
with the management modules. The only official access to the shelf is through the NCU
of the NE.
Placement
The SH7HU can be placed in a 19-inch, ETSI or NEBS complaint rack by using the
appropriate adaptor brackets. It also fits into a 300 mm (0.984ft.) deep ETSI rack. The
shelf occupies 7 HU of space in an rack.
68
SH7HU

Various LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating status of the
modules, fans and network element. The LED indicators are located on the front panel of
the fan unit. For more information, see FAN/Plug-In on p.124 and FSP 3000R7 Rel.
Accessories
Adaptor Brackets
1 x ESD connection adaptor
The SH7HU comes with 19-inch rackmount brackets pre-installed. The ETSI and NEBS
bracket pairs as well as the ESD connection adaptor are included in the shipping box.
The ESD connection adaptor must be mounted to the bracket.

Note
Dummy Modules
69
SH7HU
Front Cover
The front cover is placed in front of the shelf as shown in Figure 42. It protects the fiber
being pulled out inadvertently. The operating status of the shelf can still be observed and
the air filter pad can be replaced when the cover is attached. The cover is attached to the
shelf by means of the latches and fixing brackets on either side.
Figure 42: Front Cover Attached to the SH7HU
Shelf Naming
Depending on configuration, a SH7HU is referred to as:
master shelf if it is equipped with one NCU/NCU-II and one SCU/SCU-II
main shelf if it is equipped with one SCU/SCU-II
main shelf if it is equipped with two SCU-II modules only (for redundant SCU
configurations)
Note
For redundant SCU-II configurations in an SH7HU main shelf it is

mandatory that the master shelf is a SH9HU shelf equipped with NCUII-P.
such as channel modules, optical amplifiers and optical switch modules as well as
optical filter modules.
Labeling
Each SH7HU can be identified by several labels located on its rear panel and right-hand
side. See Figure 43 and Figure 44.
70
SH7HU
Figure 43: Labels located on the Rear Panel of the SH7HU
Figure 44: Labels Located on the Right-Hand Side of the SH7HU
Shelf Type Label

The shelf type label contains following relevant information of the shelf:
type and version
USI number and its bar code
serial number and its bar code
item number and its bar code
figo number and its bar code
71
SH7HU
Figure 45: Example of an SH7HU Shelf Type Label
Sales Kit Label

type of the shelf control unit. Figure 46 shows an example.
Figure 46: Example of an SH7HU Sales Kit Label
Certification Label
72
SH7HU
EMC Label for Japan

Figure 48 shows the Japanese EMC label for the SH7HU Shelf
Figure 48: Japanese EMC Label for the SH7HU
This label includes:
Compliance information (VCCI-A) confirming that the product satisfies the limits of
radio interference for Class A ITE
Warning statement in Japanese.
Translation of the warning statement:

In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference, in which case the
user may be required to take corrective actions.

shelf name
Figure 49: Example of an SH7HU Shelf Supply Values Label
73
SH7HU

The ESD and laser safety labels are located on the front at the bottom right on the air filter
unit, as shown in Figure 50.
Specifications
74
SH7HU-R
SH7HU-R
Figure 51: SH7HU-R Front View
The SH7HU-R is exclusively designed for the use in the USA.
Note
Description
The SH7HU-R (7HU Shelf for DC Power Rear Access and AC Power Front Access) is a
19-inch rack-mountable, 7 HU-high housing, which includes all system components and
the mounting parts (adaptor brackets, front cover and dummy modules).
22 slots each 4 HP wide are arranged in the middle of the shelf. The slots 1 through 20 are
5 HU high and hold all optical modules and the power supplies. The remaining 2 HU of the
shelf are occupied by the fan unit above the slots and the air filter unit below the slots.
The front view of an SH7HU-R is illustrated in Figure 51. The fiber finger set is not
shown.
75
SH7HU-R
The basic configuration of an SH7HU-R is: one power supply unit, one Shelf Control Unit
(SCU/SCU-II), the fan unit and the air filter unit fitted. Optical modules and management
modules may be pre-installed according to the system configuration ordered. The
backplane provides electrical connections for power supply and intra-shelf
communication. Internal backplane connectors and tracks hold the modules in position.
The SH7HU-R supports hot-swapping of modules. This allows for maximum flexibility
when planning for upgrades or reconfigurations. Actual configurations can be viewed and
monitored using the management software.
The equipment type name of the SH7HU-R used by the management software can be
documentation.
Features
Modular design, based on the 19 format
452 mm x 311 mm x 299 mm (17.79 in x 12.25 in x 11.77 in)
Single/dual universal DC (-36 to -57 V DC, 400 W or 600 W) or AC (100 to 240 V AC,
400 W, 600 W or 800 W) power supply options
DC power rear access
AC power front access
Heat dissipation using ventilation (bottom-front to top-rear airflow)
High-density racking for optical modules
Access to all components from the front of the shelf
Front fiber routing
Status indicators for the slots, fans and network element on the front panel of the fan
unit
Shelf display
Power Supply
The SH7HU-R may optionally be powered by hot-swap AC or DC power supply units. A
combination of AC and DC power supply units per shelf is not supported.
For power redundancy, two independent power supply units of the same type connected
to separate power sources are needed per shelf. In this case, both units supply the power
to the shelf and share the load. Load sharing between the PSUs occurs automatically. If
one of the two units fails, the remaining unit will take over the power supply for the fully
lloaded shelf until a unit swap has been executed. In the same shelf, the power supplies
can be combined as follows:
76
PSU/7HU-R-DC and PSU/7HU-R-DC-HP
PSU/7HU-AC and PSU/7HU-AC-HP
PSU/7HU-AC-HP and PSU/7HU-AC-800
SH7HU-R
A shelf having two power supplies with different power outputs operates with redundant
power limited by the lower-rated PSU. The SH7HU-R supports the high power
consumption alarms PSU Limit-Provisioned and PSU Limit-Equipped.
Note
power supply unit.
DC power input is available from the rear side of the shelf using filtered barrier strip
terminal blocks with 3 screw connections. To protect service personnel from bodily harm
a plastic cover is fitted on the terminal block. Figure 52 depicts the location of the terminal
blocks. The DC power supplies can only be installed in slots 1+2 and 19+20.
Figure 52: Rear View of the SH7HU-R
AC power is available from the front side of the shelf using female AC appliance couplers
according to IEC/EN 60320. The AC power supplies are placed in the slots 1+2 and
19+20.
Earthing
There are two options for making a functional earth connection to the shelf:
Option 1: Use the two different earthing terminals on the right-hand side of the shelf, as
shown in Figure 53.
77
SH7HU-R
Figure 53: Earthing Terminals on the Right-hand Side of the SH7HU-R Shelf
Using these terminals is the standard method for earthing the shelf.
Option 2: Use the two different earthing terminals on the rear side of the shelf, as shown
in Figure 54.
Figure 54: Earthing Terminals on the Rear Side of the SH7HU-R Shelf
Use the earthing terminals on the rear side of the shelf when the shelf is mounted in a
rack with a narrow opening. In this case, remove the earthing terminals on the right-hand
side of the shelf.
The shelf ships with both sets of earthing terminals installed to accommodate either
scenario. The shelf ships with an earthing kit. For details, see Electrical Cables on
p.1279.
Shelf Cooling
The modules inside the SH7HU-R Shelf are cooled by forced convection. The air flow
meets the requirements of the Telcordia GR-3028 -CORE.
The fan unit (FAN/Plug-In) is located above the module slots. It sufficiently dissipates the
heat produced by the system modules. Air is drawn in by the fans through the lower front
air intake, and the air is filtered with the air filter pad at the bottom of the shelf. The airflow
passes up through the module slots, and finally exits through the air outlet at the top of
the rear and side panels. However, the main air flow passes through the outlets at the top
of the rear. Figure 55 illustrates the airflow inside the shelf.
78
SH7HU-R
Figure 55: Bottom-Front to Top-Rear Airflow Scheme for the SH7HU-R
Air
outlet
Air outlets at
the left side
Air outlets at
the right side
Air intake
Air inlet
The air filter pad is included with the air filter unit. It is located beneath the module slots.
For details on the fan unit, see FAN/Plug-In on p.124.
Never operate the shelf without having an air filter pad fitted in the air filter unit. By
ignoring this, dirt can block the air inlets and outlets. Blocked air inlets and outlets
lead to inefficient cooling and considerable increase in fire risk.
Note
Taking air pollution into consideration, replace dirty air filter pads at least
once a year. ADVA Optical Networking strongly recommends replacing
the air filter pad every 90 days.
Slots
The SH7HU-R Shelf features 22 slots.Slots numbered from 1 through 20 are 4 HP wide
and 5 HU high. Slots 1 and 2 as well as 19 and 20 are dedicated to the power supply
units. Slots 3 through 18 accommodate the optical modules. Nearly any combination of
optical modules is accepted. Double-width modules occupy two slots. Preferred
configuration of such modules is to start at an odd slot number (3+4, 5+6, 7+8 etc.).
Channel modules working in a protection group for channel module protection do not need
to be placed in neighboring slots. The two slots most left are half the height of all other
slots and named A and B. These slots are intended for the management modules.
The SH7HU-R Shelf must never be operated with open or empty slots. Slots not in
use must be filled with dummy modules to maintain proper cooling for all other
modules. When adding modules later on, store the dummy modules in a safe place
for future use.
79
SH7HU-R

To prevent mechanical stress from the optical fibers there is a horizontal fiber tray to hold
them. It is located along the lower front edge of the shelf. The perforated part of the fiber
tray serves as air inlet for cooling the modules.
Fiber Finger Set

The fiber finger set is assembled above the perforated part of the fiber tray as shown in
Figure 56. The assembly includes a plurality of fiber fingers. Each interspace between
two fingers can be used for routing and retaining the optical fiber jumpers to be connected
to the corresponding optical module.
Figure 56: Fiber Finger Set

The modules including the fan unit can be monitored and controlled by the SCU/SCU-II.
Each module is connected to the internal bus of the backplane enabling data exchange
with the management modules. The only official access to the shelf is through the NCU
of the NE.
Placement
The SH7HU-R can be placed in a 19-inch, ETSI or NEBS complaint rack by using the
appropriate adaptor brackets. It also fits into a 300 mm deep ETSI rack.

Various LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operational status of the
modules, fans and network element. The LED indicators are located on the front panel of
the fan unit. For more information, see FAN/Plug-In on p.124 and FSP 3000R7 Rel.
80
SH7HU-R
Accessories
Adaptor Brackets
1 x ESD connection adaptor
The SH7HU-R comes with 19-inch rackmount brackets pre-installed. The ETSI and
NEBS bracket pairs as well as the ESD connection adaptor are included in the shipping
box. The ESD connection adaptor must be mounted to the bracket.

Note
Dummy Modules
Front Cover
The front cover is placed in front of the shelf as shown in Figure 57. It protects the fiber
being pulled out inadvertently. The operating status of the shelf can still be observed and
the air filter pad can be replaced when the cover is attached. The cover is attached to the
shelf by means of the latches and fixing brackets on either side.
81
SH7HU-R
Figure 57: Front Cover Attached to the SH7HU-R
Shelf Naming
Depending on configuration, a SH7HU-R Shelf is referred to as:
master shelf if it is equipped with one NCU/NCU-IIand one SCU/SCU-II only (for
non-redundant configurations)
main shelf if it is equipped with one SCU/SCU-IIonly (for non-redundant

configurations)
main shelf if it is equipped with two SCU-II modules only (for redundant SCU
configurations)
Note

such as channel modules, optical amplifiers and optical switch modules as well as
Labeling
Each SH7HU-R can be identified by several labels located on its rear panel and righthand side. See Figure 52 and Figure 58.
82
SH7HU-R
Figure 58: Labels locates on the Right-Hand Side of the SH7HU-R Shelf
Shelf Type Label

The shelf type label contains following relevant information of the shelf:
type and version
The following figure shows an example.

Figure 59: Example of an SH7HU-R Shelf Type Label
Sales Kit Label

type of the shelf control unit. Figure 60 shows an example.
83
SH7HU-R
Figure 60: Example of an SH7HU-R Sales Kit Label
Certification Label
Figure 61: Example of an SH7HU-R Certification Label

shelf name
Figure 62 shows an example.
84
SH7HU-R
Figure 62: Example of an SH7HU-R Shelf Supply Values Label

The ESD and laser safety labels are located on the front at the bottom right on the air filter
unit, as shown in Figure 63.
Specifications
85
PSU/7HU-DC
PSU/7HU-DC
Figure 64: PSU/7HU-DC Front View
Variants:
none
Description
The PSU/7HU-DC is a DC power supply unit specifically designed for the SH7HU. The
unit is a 5 HU high plug-in module with double width.
For power feeding, the power supply unit has a terminal block on its faceplate. It is
mounted to the faceplate with the upper and lower screws as shown in Figure 64. The
terminal block is equipped with a protective cover that protects the terminals from dust
and avoids unintentional contact with live terminals. The PSU/7HU-DC transforms a
higher DC input voltage received from a user-supplied power source into a lower DC
output voltage of the same polarity. The unit delivers 12.2 V DC at 33.5A to each module
through the backplane connectors. The unit produces at most 400W of output power.
Two PSU/7HU-DCs working in load sharing mode can be installed to provide power
redundancy. In this case, both power supply units must be of identical type and should
receive DC power from separate circuits. If one unit fails, the remaining unit is capable of
powering a fully loaded shelf on an ongoing basis until the fault is cleared.
86
PSU/7HU-DC
Features
Nominal voltage: -48 V DC (positive conductor of the power source is connected to

earth)
Hot-swappable
Field-replaceable
Fuses
be replaced by service personnel and returned for manufacturer repair.
WARNING

EMC
The PSU/7HU-DC has special EMC contact strips attached to it, which creates a tight

Make sure that the EMC contact strips are not damaged before inserting the unit. A
defective EMC contact strip must be replaced immediately. Otherwise EMC
87
PSU/7HU-DC
Connecting
Risk of electric shock or burns!
The protective earthing terminal must be used for altitudes above
2000 m (1.24 mi.) and for voltages equal to or greater than 60 V.
WARNING
If the input voltage might rise above 60 V, a 3-conductor supply

cable with protective grounding must be used.
If the site is located more than 2000 m above sea level or if a 60 V DC power source is to
be connected, the unit must be earthed properly. In this case a 3-core power supply cable
must be used. The protective earth terminal (PE) allows the user to connect the power
supply unit to a system safety ground lead. This avoids injury in the event of an electric
shock.
Power connections should be made using ADVA Optical Networkings DC power cables.
For details, see Electrical Cables on p.1279 and Chapter 4 of the FSP 3000R7 Rel.
13.2 Installation and Commissioning Manual.
Note
Even though the PSU/7HU-DC is protected against reverse polarity, pay

attention to polarity when connecting the power cable. If the polarity has
not been considered, the unit will not work. The power LED is off.

replacement in the case of failure or upgrade.
Residual voltage may still be present inside the PSU/7HU-DC after
WARNING

from the PSU/7HU-DC before you proceed to remove the unit.
within a minimum of 30 seconds after disconnecting the PSU/7HU-DC from its power
source.

Removing a PSU/7HU-DC from the 7HU shelf is alarmed through the management
If you remove a PSU/7HU-DC (in the following referred to as PSU) and then reinsert it
of time is needed to dissipate any residual charge stored in the capacotors of the PSU.
NCU was rebooted.
88
PSU/7HU-DC
Note
A quick sequence of removing and reinserting the PSU/7HU-DC is not

Monitoring
The output voltage and output current are continually monitored by the SCU. An alarm is
generated if the output voltage falls below a definite limit. Failure or removal of the power
supply unit from the shelf is reported to the network management system. The power
supply unit can also be supervised via the LED indicator on its faceplate.
Slot Positions
The PSU/7HU-DC is 8 HP wide and therefore occupies two regular slots. It can only be
placed in slots 1+2 and 19+20 of the SH7HU and SH7HU-R.
LED Indicator
The PSU/7HU-DC has a single two-color LED indicator labeled "P" on the faceplate. Its
Labeling
The PSU/7HU-DC can be identified by the PSU type label on the board cover. It contains
the following relevant information of the unit:
Figure 65: Example of a PSU/7HU-DC Module Type Label
89
PSU/7HU-R-DC
Specifications
PSU/7HU-R-DC
Figure 66: PSU/7HU-R-DC Front View
Variants:
none
90
PSU/7HU-R-DC
Figure 67: PSU/7HU-R-DC Rear View
Note
Description
The PSU/7HU-R-DC is a DC power supply unit specifically designed for the 7HU Shelf
Rear Power Access (SH7HU-R). The unit is a 5 HU high plug-in module with double
width.
This power supply unit has no terminal block on its faceplate. For power feeding, the 3-pin
input power connector of the unit (as shown in Figure 67) connects to the corresponding
connector on the backplane. This connector is electrically linked with the external
terminal block at the rear of the shelf. When connected to a user-supplied power source
the PSU/7HU-R-DC transforms a higher DC input voltage into a lower DC output voltage
of the same polarity. The unit delivers 12.2 V DC at 33.5 A via the backplane connectors
to the backplane. It distributes the power to the modules. The unit produces at most 400
W of power. Two PSU/7HU-R-DCs working in load sharing mode can be installed to
provide power redundancy. In this case both power supply units must be of identical
types and should receive DC power from separate circuits. If one unit fails, the remaining
91
PSU/7HU-R-DC
unit is capable of powering a fully loaded shelf (400 W) on an ongoing basis until the fault
is cleared.
Features

earth)
Service voltage range: from -40.5 V DC to -57.0 V DC
Holdup time 20 ms
Generates an periodical DC-input load pulse
Rear power accessible
Hot-swappable
Field-replaceable
Fuses
WARNING

DC-Input Load Step

An internal circuit in the PSU/7HU-R-DC assure a periodical additional 0,5A to 0,7A DCinput load step with 1s 0,1s duration and 60s 5s periodic time.
EMC
The PSU/7HU-R-DC has special EMC contact strips attached to it, which creates a tight
92
PSU/7HU-R-DC

Connecting
WARNING

2000 m (1.24 mi.).
If the site is located more than 2000 m above sea level, the unit must be earthed properly.
In this case a 3-core power supply cable must be used. The protective earth terminal (PE)
allows the user to connect the power supply unit to a system safety ground lead. This
avoids injury in the event of an electric shock.
For details, see Electrical Cables on p.1279 and FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2 Installation and
Commissioning Manual.
Note
Even though the PSU/7HU-R-DC is protected against reverse polarity,

pay attention to polarity when connecting the power cable. If the polarity
has not been considered, the unit will not work. The power LED is off.

Residual voltage may still be present inside the PSU/7HU-R-DC
after being disconnected from its power source.
WARNING

from the PSU/7HU-R-DC before you proceed to remove the unit.
within a minimum of 30 seconds after disconnecting the PSU/7HU-R-DC from its power
source.

Removing a PSU/7HU-R-DC from the SH7HU-R shelf is alarmed through the
management system (RMVD alarm).
93
PSU/7HU-R-DC
If you remove a PSU/7HU-R-DC (in the following referred to as PSU) and then reinsert it
NCU was rebooted.
Note
A quick sequence of removing and reinserting the PSU/7HU-R-DC is

not allowed. Make sure that at least 30 seconds has elapsed between
Monitoring
Slot Positions
The PSU/7HU-R-DC is 8 HP wide and therefore occupies two regular slots. It can only
be placed in the slots 1 + 2 and 19 + 20 of the SH7HU-R.
LED Indicator
The PSU/7HU-R-DC has a single two-color LED indicator labeled "P" on the faceplate.
13.2 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Manual.
Labeling
The PSU/7HU-R-DC can be identified by the PSU type label on the board cover. It
contains the following relevant information of the unit:
94
PSU/7HU-R-DC
Figure 68: Example of a PSU/7HU-R-DC Module Type Label
Specifications
95
PSU/7HU-AC
PSU/7HU-AC
Figure 69: PSU/7HU-AC Front View
Variants:
none
Description
The PSU/7HU-AC is an AC power supply unit specifically designed for an SH7HU and
SH7HU-R. The unit is a 5 HU high plug-in module with double width.
shown in Figure 69. When connected to the AC power source, the PSU/7HU-AC
PSU/7HU-AC delivers 12.2 V DC at 33.5 A to each module through the backplane
connectors. The unit produces approximately 400 W of output power. Two PSU/7HUACs working in load sharing mode can be installed to provide power redundancy. In this
case, both power supply units must be of identical type and should receive AC power
96
PSU/7HU-AC
Features
Hot-swappable
Field-replaceable.
Fuses
WARNING

EMC
The PSU/7HU-AC has special EMC contact strips attached to it, which creates a tight

Connecting
Note
The PSU/7HU-AC has to be powered by an alternating current (AC)

97
PSU/7HU-AC
To avoid injury in the event of an electric shock, use the supplied AC power cable for
Cables on p.1279 and Chapter 4 of the FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2 Installation and

Residual voltage may still be present inside the PSU/7HU-AC after
WARNING

from the PSU/7HU-AC before you proceed to remove the unit.
within a minimum of 30 seconds after disconnecting the PSU/7HU-AC from its power
source.

Removing a PSU/7HU-AC from a 7HU shelf is alarmed through the management system
(RMVD alarm).
If you remove a PSU/7HU-AC (in the following referred to as PSU) and then reinsert it
NCU was rebooted.
Note
A quick sequence of removing and reinserting the PSU/7HU-AC is not

Monitoring
regenerated if the output voltage falls below a defined limit. Failure or removal of the
power supply unit from the shelf is reported to the network management system. The
power supply can also be supervised via the LED indicator on its faceplate.
The equipment type name of the PSU/7HU-AC used by the management software can
be found in Equipment Types of FSP 3000R7 Hardware Components on p.1327 of this
documentation.
98
PSU/7HU-AC
Slot Positions
The PSU/7HU-AC is 8 HP wide and therefore occupies two regular slots. It can only be
placed into following shelves and slots:
SH7HU, slots 1+2 and 19+20
SH7HU-R, slots 1+2 and 19+20
LED Indicator
The PSU/7HU-AC has a single two-color LED indicator labeled "P" on the faceplate. Its
Labeling
The PSU/7HU-AC can be identified by the PSU type label on the board cover. It contains
the following relevant information of the unit:

Figure 70: Example of a PSU/7HU-AC Module Type Label
Specifications
99
PSU/7HU-DC-HP
PSU/7HU-DC-HP
Figure 71: PSU/7HU-DC-HP Front View
Variants:
none
Description
The PSU/7HU-DC-HP is a high power DC power supply unit specifically designed for the
SH7HU. The unit is a 5 HU high plug-in module with double width.
For power feeding, the power supply unit has a terminal block on its faceplate. It is
mounted to the faceplate with the upper and lower screws as shown in Figure 71. The
terminal block is equipped with a protective cover that protects the terminals from dust
and avoids unintentional contact with live terminals. The PSU/7HU-DC-HP transforms a
higher DC input voltage received from a user-supplied power source into a lower DC
output voltage of the same polarity. The unit delivers 12.2 V DC at 49.2 A to each module
through the backplane connectors. The unit produces approximately 600 W of output
power. Two PSU/7HU-DC-HPs working in load sharing mode can be installed to provide
power redundancy. In this case, both power supply units must be of identical type and
should receive DC power from separate circuits. If one unit fails, the remaining unit is
capable of powering a fully loaded shelf on an ongoing basis until the fault is cleared.
100
PSU/7HU-DC-HP
Features

earth)
Holdup time 20 ms
Hot-swappable
Field-replaceable
Fuses
WARNING

EMC
The PSU/7HU-DC-HP has special EMC contact strips attached to it, which creates a
tight seal with neighboring modules.

compliance cannot be achieved. Return the unit with a defective EMC contact strip to
ADVA Optical Networking for repair.
101
PSU/7HU-DC-HP
Connecting
2000 m (1.24 mi.) and for voltages equal or greater than 60 V DC.
WARNING
If the input voltage might rise above 60 V, a 3-conductor supply

cable with protective grounding must be used.
If the site is located more than 2000 m above sea level or if a 60 V DC power source is to
be connected, the unit must be grounded properly. In this case a 3-core power supply
cable must be used. The protective ground terminal (PE) allows the user to connect the
power supply unit to a system safety ground lead. This avoids injury in the event of an
electric shock.
Power connections should be made using ADVA Optical Networkings High-Power DC
power cables (PC300/3WIRE-HP). For details, see Electrical Cables on p.1279 and
Chapter 4 of the FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2 Installation and Commissioning Manual.
Note
Even though the PSU/7HU-DC-HP is protected against reverse polarity,

pay attention to polarity when connecting the power cable. If the polarity
has not been considered, the unit will not work. The power LED is off.

Residual voltage may still be present inside the PSU/7HU-DC-HP
WARNING

from the PSU/7HU-DC-HP before you proceed to remove the unit.
within a minimum of 30 seconds after disconnecting the PSU/7HU-DC-HP from its
power source.

Removing a PSU/7HU-DC-HP from a 7HU shelf is alarmed through the management
If you remove a PSU/7HU-DC-HP (in the following referred to as PSU) and then reinsert
it immediately, an RMVD alarm will be generated even though the PSU has been
NCU was rebooted.
102
PSU/7HU-DC-HP
Note
A quick sequence of removing and reinserting the PSU/7HU-DC-HP is

Monitoring
The equipment type name of the PSU/7HU-DC-HP used by the management software
can be found in Equipment Types of FSP 3000R7 Hardware Components on p.1327 of
this documentation.
Slot Positions
The PSU/7HU-DC-HP is 8 HP wide and therefore occupies two regular slots. It can only
be placed in the slots 1+2 and 19+20 of the SH7HU.
LED Indicator
The PSU/7HU-DC-HP has a single two-color LED indicator labeled "P" on the faceplate.
13.2 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Manual.
Labeling
The PSU/7HU-DC-HP can be identified by the PSU module type label on the board
cover. It contains the following relevant information of the unit:
103
PSU/7HU-DC-HP
Figure 72: Example of a PSU/7HU-DC-HP Module Type Label
Specifications
104
PSU/7HU-R-DC-HP
PSU/7HU-R-DC-HP
Figure 73: PSU/7HU-R-DC-HP Front View
Variants:
none
105
PSU/7HU-R-DC-HP
Figure 74: PSU/7HU-R-DC-HP Rear View
Note
Description
The PSU/7HU-R-DC-HP is a high power DC power supply unit specifically designed for
the SH7HU-R Shelf. The unit is a double-width 5 HU high plug-in module with rear power
access.
The power supply unit has no terminal block on its faceplate. For power feeding, the 3-pin
input power connector of the unit (as shown in Figure 74) connects to the corresponding
connector on the backplane. This connector is electrically linked with the external
terminal block at the rear of the shelf. When connected to a user-supplied DC power
source the PSU/7HU-R-DC-HP transforms a higher DC input voltage into a lower DC
output voltage of the same polarity. The unit delivers 12.2 V DC at 49.18 A to each
module through the backplane connectors. The unit produces approximately 600 W of
output power. Two PSU/7HU-R-DC-HPs working in load sharing mode can be installed
to provide power redundancy. In this case, both power supply units must be of identical
106
PSU/7HU-R-DC-HP
type and should receive DC power from separate circuits. If one unit fails, the remaining
unit is capable of powering a fully loaded shelf on an ongoing basis until the fault is
cleared.
Features

earth)
Service voltage range: from -40.5 V DC to -57.0 V DC
Holdup time 20 ms
Generates an periodical DC-input load pulse
Rear power accessible
Hot-swappable
Field-replaceable
Fuses
WARNING

DC-Input Load Step

An internal circuit in the PSU/7HU-R-DC-HP assure a periodical additional 0,5A to 0,7A
DC-input load step with 1s 0,1s duration and 60s 5s periodic time.
EMC
The PSU/7HU-R-DC-HP has special EMC contact strips attached to it, which creates a
107
PSU/7HU-R-DC-HP

Connecting
WARNING

2000m (1.24 mi.).
If the site is located more than 2000 m above sea level, the unit must be earthed properly.
In this case a 3-core power supply cable must be used. The protective earth terminal (PE)
allows the user to connect the power supply unit to a system safety ground lead. This
avoids injury in the event of an electric shock.
Power connections should be made using ADVA Optical Networking DC power cables.
For details, see Electrical Cables on p.1279 and the Installation and Commissioning
Manual.
Note
Even though the PSU/7HU-R-DC-HP is protected against reverse

polarity, pay attention to polarity when connecting the power cable. If the
polarity has not been considered, the unit will not work. The power LED
is off.

Residual voltage may still be present inside the PSU/7HU-R-DCHP after being disconnected from its power source.
WARNING

from the PSU/7HU-R-DC-HP before you proceed to remove the
unit.
within a minimum of 30 seconds after disconnecting the PSU/7HU-R-DC-HP from its
power source.

Removing a PSU/7HU-R-DC-HP from the SH7HU-R shelf is alarmed through the
108
PSU/7HU-R-DC-HP
If you remove a PSU/7HU-R-DC-HP (in the following referred to as PSU) and then
reinsert it immediately, an RMVD alarm will be generated even though the PSU has been
NCU was rebooted.
Note
A quick sequence of removing and reinserting the PSU/7HU-R-DC-HP

is not allowed. Make sure that at least 30 seconds has elapsed between
Monitoring
Slot Positions
The PSU/7HU-R-DC-HP is 8 HP wide and therefore occupies two regular slots. It can
only be placed in the slots 1 + 2 and 19 + 20 of the SH7HU-R.
LED Indicator
The PSU/7HU-R-DC-HP has a single two-color LED indicator labeled "P" on the
faceplate. Its colors represent different operating status. For details, refer to the FSP
3000R7 Rel. 13.2 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Manual.
Labeling
The PSU/7HU-R-DC-HP can be identified by the PSU type label on the board cover. It
109
PSU/7HU-AC-HP
Figure 75: Example of a PSU/7HU-R-DC-HP Module Type Label
Specifications
PSU/7HU-AC-HP
Figure 76: PSU/7HU-AC-HP Front View
Variants:
none
110
PSU/7HU-AC-HP
Description
The PSU/7HU-AC-HP is a high power AC power supply unit specifically designed for the
SH7HU, SH7HU-R and SH9HU. The unit is a 5 HU high plug-in module with double
width.
shown in Figure 76. When connected to the AC power source, the PSU/7HU-AC-HP
PSU/7HU-AC-HP delivers 12.2 V DC at 49.2 A to each module through the backplane
connectors. The unit produces approximately 600 W of output power. Two PSU/7HUAC-HPs working in load sharing mode can be installed to provide power redundancy. In
this case, both power supply units must be of identical type and should receive AC power
Features
Hot-swappable
Field-replaceable
Fuses
WARNING

EMC
The PSU/7HU-AC-HP has special EMC contact strips attached to it, which creates a
111
PSU/7HU-AC-HP

Connecting
Note
The PSU/7HU-AC-HP has to be powered by an alternating current (AC)

To avoid injury in the event of an electric shock use the supplied AC power cable for

Residual voltage may still be present inside the PSU/7HU-AC-HP
WARNING

from the PSU/7HU-AC-HP before you proceed to remove the unit.
within a minimum of 30 seconds after disconnecting the PSU/7HU-AC-HP from its
power source.

Removing a PSU/7HU-AC-HP from the 7HU shelf is alarmed through the management
If you remove a PSU/7HU-AC-HP (in the following referred to as PSU) and then reinsert
NCU was rebooted.
Note
112
A quick sequence of removing and reinserting the PSU/7HU-AC-HP is

PSU/7HU-AC-HP
Monitoring
regenerated if the output voltage falls below a defined limit. Failure or removal of the
power supply can also be supervised via the LED indicator on its faceplate.
The equipment type name of the PSU/7HU-AC-HP used by the management software
this documentation.
Slot Positions
The PSU/7HU-AC-HP is 8 HP wide and therefore occupies two regular slots. It can only
be placed into following shelves and slots:
LED Indicator
The PSU/7HU-AC-HP has a single two-color LED indicator labeled "P" on the faceplate.
Labeling
The PSU/7HU-AC-HP can be identified by the PSU module type label on the board
113
PSU/7HU-AC-HP
Figure 77: Example of a PSU/7HU-AC-HP Module Type Label
Specifications
114
PSU/7HU-DC-800
PSU/7HU-DC-800
Figure 78: PSU/7HU-DC-800 Front View
Description
The PSU/7HU-DC-800 is an 800-W DC-input power supply unit specifically designed for
the 7HU shelf (SH7HU). The power supply is a 5 HU high plug-in module with double
width.
115
PSU/7HU-DC-800
For power feeding, the power supply unit has a 3-pole SUB-D connector on its faceplate
as shown in Figure 78. The module backplane interface consists of three 2.0-mm hard
metric connectors according to IEC 61076-4-101.
The PSU/7HU-DC-800 transforms a higher DC input voltage received from a usersupplied power source into a lower DC output voltage of the same polarity. The unit
delivers 12.2 V DC at 65.6 A to each module through the backplane connectors. The unit
produces 800 W of output power.
Two PSU/7HU-DC-800 modules working in load sharing mode can be installed to provide
power redundancy. Permanent mixed operation of AC and DC-input power supplies with
different wattage in the same shelf is supported. The redundant power supplies should
receive input power from separate sources. If one unit fails, the remaining unit is capable
of powering a fully loaded shelf on an ongoing basis until the fault is cleared.
Mixed DC and AC operation enables support for dual-power environments and
conversion between AC and DC power.
Hot-swap capability of the power supply allows for upgrades and maintenance without
service interruption (assuming that the remaining power supply can provide enough
power to support the system).
Internal fault monitoring detects short circuits and component failures in the power supply
unit. If a failure is found, the unit is shut down. The PSU/7HU-DC-800 is cooled by the
fan tray of the shelf.
Features
Nominal voltage: -48 V DC
Rated input voltage range: from -36 V DC to -72 V DC
Mixed-mode AC and DC operation
Short-circuit protection (hiccup mode)
Fire protection
Holdup time 5 ms
Status LED indicator on the faceplate for indicating the operational status of the unit
Internal fault monitoring
Hot-swappable
Field-replaceable
Fuses
Electrical security is provided by a single pole fuse in the -48 V feed that is fitted inside
the power supply unit. The fuse is not accessible. If the fuse has blown, the power supply
unit must be replaced by service personnel and returned for manufacturer repair.
116
PSU/7HU-DC-800
WARNING

EMC
The PSU/7HU-DC-800 has special EMC contact strips attached to it, which creates a

compliance cannot be achieved.
Connecting
Before connecting to the power source, make sure that the 7HU shelf is earthed properly
and that no power is applied to the DC power source.
Risk of burn!
WARNING
Do not connect or disconnect the power cable if voltage is applied.

Doing so may result in burns and destruction of the connectors by
causing an arc.
Use only DC power cords listed in the PSU/7HU-DC-800 module specification, which
forms part of the Module and System Specification. For details, see Electrical Cables as
well as Installation and Commissioning Manual, Chapter 4.
Note
Even though the PSU/7HU-DC-800 is protected against reverse

polarity, pay attention to polarity when connecting the power cable. If the
polarity has not been considered, the unit will not work. The power LED
is off.

Residual voltage may still be present inside the PSU/7HU-DC-800
WARNING

from the PSU/7HU-DC-800 before you proceed to remove the unit.
117
PSU/7HU-DC-800
within a minimum of 30 seconds after disconnecting the PSU/7HU-DC-800 from its
power source.

Removing a PSU/7HU-DC-800 from a shelf is alarmed through the management system
(RMVD alarm).
If you remove a PSU/7HU-DC-800 (in the following referred to as PSU) and then reinsert
the same PSU to avoid raising an RMVD alarm after reinsertion of the unit. This residual
charge stored in the capacitors of the PSU causes raising an RMVD alarm that cannot be
cleared even after the NCU was rebooted. The capacitors supply the PSU's -contoller
with voltage.
Note
A quick sequence of removing and reinserting the PSU/7HU-DC-800 is

removal and reseating the same unit. This amount of time is needed to
dissipate any residual charge.
Monitoring
The output voltage and output current as well as the input voltage and input current are
continually monitored by the SCU. An alarm is generated if the output voltage falls below
a definite limit.
Failure or removal of the power supply unit from the shelf is reported to the network
management system. The power supply unit can also be supervised via the LED
indicator on its faceplate.
The equipment type name of the PSU/7HU-DC-800 used by the management software
this documentation.
Slot Positions
The PSU/7HU-DC-800 is 8 HP wide and therefore occupies two regular slots. It can only
be placed into the following shelves and slots:
LED Indicator
The PSU/7HU-DC-800 has a single two-color LED indicator labeled "P" (Power) on the
faceplate. Its colors represent different operating status. For details, refer to the
118
PSU/7HU-DC-800
Labeling
The PSU/7HU-DC-800 can be identified by the PSU module type label on the board

Figure 79: Example of a PSU/7HU-DC-800 Module Type Label
As the PSU/7HU-DC-800 is not manufactured by ADVA Optical Networking, a

manufacturer's label can be found on the top of the power supply unit.
Specifications
119
PSU/7HU-AC-800
PSU/7HU-AC-800
Figure 80: PSU/7HU-AC-800 Front View
Variants:
none
Description
The PSU/7HU-AC-800 is an AC power supply unit specifically designed for the 7HU
shelf. The unit is a 5 HU high plug-in module with double width. It can also be used by a
9HU shelf.
Up to two PSU/7HU-AC-800s can be installed into the shelf. If both units are operational,
they are redundant and sharing the electrical load equally. Both power supply units should
receive power from separate AC circuits directly provided by the mains. It is not intended
to be powered by AC derived from DC sources. If one power supply fails, the remaining
unit is capable of powering a fully loaded shelf on an ongoing basis until the fault is
cleared.
shown in Figure 80. When connected to the AC power source, the PSU/7HU-AC-800
PSU/7HU-AC-800 delivers 12.2 V DC at 65.6 A to each module through the backplane
connectors. The unit produces 800 W output power at the maximum.
The PSU/7HU-AC-800 has no inbuilt fan. Heat generated by the unit is dissipated using
the shelfs forced air cooling.
To achieve redundancy, the PSU/7HU-AC-800 power supply may also be used in
conjunction with the PSU/7HU-AC-HP in one shelf.
120
PSU/7HU-AC-800
The backward compatibility of the PSU/7HU-AC-800 with the PSU/7HU-AC-HP allows
an easy in-field replacement of these units or a permanent mixed operation.
Features
Holdup time greater or equal 10 ms (at full load over the entire input voltage range)
Hot-swappable
Field-replaceable
Compliant with EN 55022 (2006) Class A (EMC classification)
Fuses
be replaced by service personnel or returned to ADVA Optical Networking for
WARNING

EMC
The PSU/7HU-AC-800 has special EMC contact strips attached to it, which creates a

compliance cannot be achieved.
121
PSU/7HU-AC-800
Connecting
Note
The PSU/7HU-AC-800 has to be powered by an alternating current (AC)


Residual voltage may still be present inside the PSU/7HU-AC-800
WARNING

from the PSU/7HU-AC-800 before you proceed to remove the unit.
within a minimum of 30 seconds after disconnecting the PSU/7HU-AC-800 from its
power source.

Removing a PSU/7HU-AC-800 from the 7HU shelf is alarmed through the management
If you remove a PSU/7HU-AC-800 (in the following referred to as PSU) and then reinsert
NCU was rebooted.
Note
A quick sequence of removing and reinserting the PSU/7HU-AC-800 is

Monitoring
Failure or removal of the power supply unit from the shelf is reported to the network
management system. The power supply can also be supervised via the LED indicator on
its faceplate.
122
PSU/7HU-AC-800
The equipment type name of the PSU/7HU-AC-800 used by the management software
this documentation.
Slot Positions
The PSU/7HU-AC-800 is 8 HP wide and therefore occupies two regular slots. It can only
LED Indicator
The PSU/7HU-AC-800 has a single three-color LED indicator labeled "P" (Power) on the
faceplate. Its colors represent different operating status. For details, refer to the FSP
3000R7 Rel. 13.2 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Manual, Chapter 3.
Labeling
The PSU/7HU-AC-800 can be identified by the PSU module type label on the board

Figure 81: Example of a PSU/7HU-AC-800 Module Type Label
Mrzenquelle 1-3
98617 Meiningen
Germany
Made in DE
USI : LBADVAXXXXXXXXXXX
As the PSU/7HU-AC-800 is not manufactured by ADVA Optical Networking, a

123
FAN/Plug-In
Specifications
FAN/Plug-In
Figure 82: FAN/Plug-In Front View
Description
The FAN/Plug-In (plug-in fan unit) is an integral part of a SH7HU and SH7HU-R. It is
located above the module slots. The fan unit includes three fans used for the forced air
cooling of the modules. The front view is illustrated in Figure 82. The complete fan unit is
shown in Figure 83.
The three fans are powered via the backplane connectors. The fans are not field
replaceable. The shelfs internal air temperature controls the rotational speed of the fans.
Under normal ambient conditions all fans work independently at a low rotational speed.
The fan control unit (FCU) continually monitors the status of each fan and reports the
status to the shelf control unit (SCU). The status of the fans can also be read from the fan
LED indicator and the shelf display on the front panel of the FAN/Plug-In.
If a single fan fails, one minute after this failure the other operational fans increase their
rotational speed to maximum in order to compensate for the loss of cooling due the
broken fan. In this case, the fan LED turns yellow, and a fan abnormal alarm is raised. If
yet another fan stopped running, the fan LED goes red and a fan fault alarm is raised.
in the shelf up to 45C ambient temperature. However, the complete
plug-in fan unit should be replaced by Service Personnel within 48 hours
after fan failure.
Note
not remain empty for longer than 3 minutes during the replacement
process.
The FAN/Plug-In can be replaced while the shelf is in service. It is recommended to have
a spare plug-in fan unit available at all times.
124
FAN/Plug-In
Features
Designed as a plug-in unit for a 7HU shelf
Equipped with three non-detachable powerful fans
Includes the shelf display
Provides the status indicators for the shelf, the fans and all module slots
Hot-swappable
Field-replaceable
Front accessible
Signal Transmission Paths

The fan unit is connected to the internal bus of the shelfs backplane enabling data
exchange with the SCU.
Slot Position
The fan unit can be placed into the SH7HU and SH7HU-R above the module slots.

The fan unit has numerous two-color LED indicators that provide a quick visual check of
the operating status of the fans, installed modules and network element (NE). The LED
indicators are arranged in three groups on the front panel as shown in Figure 82. Each
LED indicator has dedicated colors to be able to indicate different faults.
Fan Status LED

There is only one LED labeled fan for the three cooling fans. If more than one fault
appears, it will indicate the fault with the highest severity. For details, refer to the FSP
3000R7 Rel. 13.2 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Manual, Chapter 3.
Slot Status LEDs

There is one status LED per slot. The LEDs for the 5 HU slots are numbered from 1
through 20 (with the respective slot number). The two status LEDs labeled A and B are
intended for the half-sized slots. Only the failure on the module with the highest severity
will be indicated by the respective slot status LED (according to the corresponding ARC
configuration). For details, refer to the FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2 Maintenance and
Troubleshooting Manual, Chapter 3.
125
FAN/Plug-In

Therefore only one of the three LEDs is lit at a time. For details, refer to Chapter 3 of the
Maintenance and Troubleshooting Manual.
Note

Shelf Display
The shelf display (LCD) on the front panel (see Figure 82) indicates the shelf ID number
(unique within an NE). The arrow buttons and the enter button are used to set the shelf ID
and the LED test. They are also used to read the rotational speeds of the individual fans
and to see whether the manual setting of the shelf ID is locked using management
software (by a small lock in the lower right corner).
Labeling
The FAN/Plug-In can be identified by two labels located on the top of the unit.
Figure 83: Labeling the Fan Unit
Fan Unit Type Label

The fan unit type label contains the official name, unique serial number and device code.
126
SH1HU-HP/2DC Shelf
Figure 84: Example of a Fan Unit Type Label
Bar Code Label

The bar code label contains the fan units bar code and the corresponding serial number.
Figure 85: Example of a Fan Unit Bar Code Label
Specifications
SH1HU-HP/2DC Shelf
Figure 86: SH1HU-HP/2DC Front View
Figure 87: SH1HU-HP/2DCRear View
127
SH1HU-HP/2DC Shelf
Description
The SH1HU-HP/2DC is a rack-mountable, 1 HU Shelf High Power with redundant DC
power supply. The shelf is the housing which holds the entire FSP 3000R7 system. The
internal power supply is integrated on the left side. Six powerful individual fans ensure the
effective cooling of the modules. Unlike the other 1HU equipment shelves, the SH1HUHP/2DC shelf provides an increased power output and a large increase in airflow.
The SH1HU-HP/2DC features four horizontal slots which accommodate the standard
FSP 3000R7 modules. The separate ESD jack, rightmost on the front side of the shelf, is
intended for the connection of a wrist strap. The front view of the SH1HU-HP/2DC is
illustrated in Figure 86. The complete shelf is shown in Figure 91
The SH1HU-HP/2DC is specifically designed for low channel count installations, single
services and feeder applications. It is principally used for modules which higher power
consumption and greater heat dissipation than conventional modules. This shelf may
also be used for single channel add/drop in a CWDM ring (one channel module, one
east/west optical filter module). The basic configuration is: 1 x network control unit (NCU
or NCU-II) and 1 x shelf control unit (SCU, SCU-S or SCU-II). Optical modules and
management modules may be pre-installed according to the system configuration
ordered.
The backplane provides electrical connections for power supply and intra-shelf
The SH1HU-HP/2DC supports hot-swapping of the modules. This allows for maximum
flexibility when planning for upgrades or reconfigurations. Actual configurations can be
viewed and monitored using the management software.
The equipment type name of the SH1HU-HP/2DC used by the management software
this documentation.
Features
128
Dimensions (without adaptor brackets): width x height x depth

Robust, low-profile housing made from stainless steel sheet
Built-in DC power supply using 4-pole connector with dual power feeds (-36 V to -72
V DC, 170W)
Front power access
Heat dissipation using ventilation (airflow from the right-hand side to the left-hand
side)
Access to all modules from the front of the shelf
Front fiber routing
Status indicators for the module slots, fans and network element on the front panel
7-segment shelf display on the front panel for Shelf ID
Backwards compatible to all FSP 3000R7 plug-in modules which are provisionable
for 1HU shelves
ETSI back-to-back compliant
SH1HU-HP/2DC Shelf
Power Supply
The power is available from the front side, top left of the shelf. A power cable consisting
of two power cables assembled with a 4-pole power plug (CBL/DC/300/2AWG16/1HUHP) for screw connection and with integrated strain relief has to be used. The fixing
screws of the plug are captive screws and can not be turned off completely when
unplugging.
The power supply converts a higher DC input voltage received from a user-supplied
power source into an isolated lower DC output voltage.
The unit delivers 12 V DC at 14.0 A to all modules through the backplane connectors. The
maximum input power consumption is 240 W.
Power redundancy is achieved through a dual power feed input labeled pwr 1 and pwr 2
on the front panel. Though the input connector power should be received from two
independent power sources. If one of the two power feeds fails, the power supply will
continue to provide the required power to the shelf until the fault is cleared. This shelf
supports the high power consumption alarms PSU Limit-Provisioned and PSU LimitEquipped.
Output voltage and output current are continually monitored by the SCU, SCU-S or SCUII. An alarm is generated if the input voltage and output voltage falls below a definite limit.
The power supply can also be supervised via LED indicators on the front. The power
supply unit is not field replaceable.
Earthing
There are two different earthing terminals on the rear-side of the shelf for making a
protective earth connection.
Figure 88: Earthing Terminals of the SH1HU-HP/2DC
An earthing kit is delivered with the shelf. For details, see Electrical Cables on p.1279.
Module Cooling
The SH1HU-HP/2DC operates with forced convection cooling. This shelf is designed as
a side exhaust ventilated equipment. It complies with essential requirements of the
Telcordia GR-3028-CORE. Airflow dissipating the heat of the system modules is moved
from the right side to the left side of the shelf. Figure 89 illustrates the airflow inside the
shelf.
129
SH1HU-HP/2DC Shelf
Figure 89: Side exhaust Airflow Scheme for the SH1HU-HP/2DC
Front view of the shelf
Air outlet (on the left)
Air intake (on the right)
Equipment Class X-SLX

Inside the shelf each side wall has three fans for ventilation. As the fans are arranged on
opposing sides, a good flow of air results within the shelf. The six fans operate
independently. Air is sucked in through the air intake on the right side of the shelf, passed
directly across the modules and blown out through the air outlets on the left side. The
ventilation holes should not be blocked at any time during operation.
The shelf internal air temperature controls the rotational speed of all fans. Under normal
ambient conditions, they simultaneously work at a low rotational speed. The fan control
unit (FCU) continually monitors the status of each fan and reports the status to the shelf
control unit (SCU, SCU-S or SCU-II). The status of the fans can also be read from the
fan LED indicator and the shelf display on the front panel.
broken fan. In this case, the fan LED turns yellow and a fan abnormal alarm is raised. If
two or more fans fail, the fan LED goes red and a fan fault alarm is raised.
The fans are not field replaceable.
Note
shelf should be replaced by Service Personnel at the earliest
opportunity. If two or more fans fail, the shelf should be replaced within
48 hours after failure.
If only four fans or even less are working, the airflow inside the shelf will be
insufficient to keep the modules cool. To avoid equipment damage and risk of fire
due to component overheating, the shelf must not be allowed to continue operation.
Slots
The slots numbered 1 (lower) and 2 (upper) are 4 HP wide and 5 HU high. They are
intended for accommodation of all FSP 3000R7 optical modules. Nearly any combination
of modules is accepted. Double-width modules occupy both slots. The two slots marked
A and B are of half size height and predetermined for the FSP 3000R7 management
modules. Slot A holds the network control unit (NCU or NCU-II), and slot B
accommodates the shelf control unit (SCU, SCU-S or SCU-II).
130
SH1HU-HP/2DC Shelf
The SH1HU-HP/2DC must never be operated with open or empty slots. Slots not in
for future use.

The modules can be monitored and controlled by the SCU, SCU-II or SCU-S. Each
module is connected to the internal bus of the backplane enabling data exchange with the
management modules. The only official external access to the shelf is through the NCU
or NCU-II of the NE.
Placement
The SH1HU-HP/2DC can be placed in a 19-inch, ETSI or NEBS compliant rack by using
the appropriate adaptor brackets. It also fits into a 300 mm deep ETSI rack. The shelf
only occupies 1 HU of space in a rack.

The SH1HU-HP/2DC has two-color LED indicators that provide a quick visual check of
the operating status of the fans, installed modules, and network element (NE). The LED
indicators are arranged in four groups on the front panel.
Figure 90: Front Panel of the SH1HU-HP/2DC
Each LED has dedicated colors to be able to indicate different faults.
Fan Status LED

There is only one LED labeled fan for the six cooling fans. Should appear more than one
fault, it will indicate the fault with the highest severity. For details, refer to the FSP
3000R7 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Manual, Chapter 3.
131
SH1HU-HP/2DC Shelf
Slot Status LEDs

The shelf has one status LED indicator per slot. The LEDs for the 5 HU slots are labeled
1 and 2 (with the respective slot number). The LEDs for the half-sized slots are labeled
A and B. Only the failure on the module with the highest severity will be indicated by
the respective slot status LED (according to the corresponding ARC configuration). For
details, refer to the FSP 3000R7 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Manual, Chapter 3.

The LEDs labeled critical, major and minor (see Figure 90) indicate different network
element alarms. Within the network element, only the failure with the highest severity will
be indicated. Therefore only one of the three LEDs is lit at a time. For details, refer to the
FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Manual, Chapter 3.
Note
The alarm status of a network element is only displayed by the master

shelf. The respective LEDs of the remaining shelves within the network
element will be off.
Power Status LEDs

The power status LEDs labeled pwr1 and pwr2 (seeFigure 90) indicate different states
of the power supply unit. For details, refer to the FSP 3000R7 Maintenance and
Shelf Display
The shelf display (7-segment display) on the front panel (see Figure 90 ) indicates the
to set the shelf ID.
Adaptor Brackets
This shelf comes with 19-inch rackmount brackets pre-installed. The ETSI and NEBS
bracket pairs are included in the shipping box.
Dummy Modules
modules. For more information, refer to Dummy Modules.
132
SH1HU-HP/2DC Shelf
Shelf Naming
Depending on configuration, a SH1HU-HP/2DC is referred to as
master shelf if it is equipped with one NCU-II/NCU and one SCU/SCU-S/SCU-II
main shelf if it is equipped with one SCU/SCU-S/SCU-II only
such as channel modules, optical filter modules, optical amplifiers as well as optical
switch modules.
Shelf Labeling
Each SH1HU-HP/2DC can be identified by several labels located on the top of the shelf.
Figure 91: Location of the SH1HU-HP/2DC Labels
Shelf Type Label

The shelf type label contains the following relevant information:
133
SH1HU-HP/2DC Shelf
Figure 92: Example of a SH1HU-HP/2DC Shelf Type Label
Certification Label
The certification label indicates the current certification marks for this shelf. Figure 93
shows an example.
Figure 93: Example of a SH1HU-HP/2DC Certification Label
EMC Label for Japan

The following shows the Japanese EMC label for the SH1HU-HP/2DC.
Figure 94: Japanese EMC Label for the SH1HU-HP/2DC
134
SH1HU-HP/2DC Shelf


the shelf name
Figure 95: Example of a SH1HU-HP/2DC Shelf Supply Values Label

Figure 96: Example of a SH1HU-HP/2DC Hot Surface Hazard Warning Label

The ESD and laser safety label is delivered with the shelf.
135
SH1HU-HP/2DC Shelf
Figure 97: ESD and Laser Safety Label
Note
The ESD and laser safety label is not visible with the shelf installed. For
safety reasons, it is recommended additionally to place such a label on
an easy-to-see location on the rack.
Specifications
136
Figure 98: SH1HU-HP/E-TEMP/2DC Front View
Figure 99: SH1HU-HP/E-TEMP/2DC Rear View
Description
The SH1HU-HP/E-TEMP/2DC is a rack-mountable, 1 HU Shelf High Power with
redundant DC-input power feeds. This shelf is based on the design of the SH1HUHP/2DC. It is primarly intended for extended low temperature operation and applications
requiring higher wattage and cooling airflow rates.
The shelf is the housing which holds the entire FSP 3000R7 system. The internal power
supply is integrated on the left side. Six powerful fans arranged in two redundant three-fan
groups ensure the effective cooling of the modules. The individual fans cannot be
swapped. For more detailed information, See "Module Cooling" on page 140.
The SH1HU-HP/E-TEMP/2DC features four horizontal slots which accommodate the
standard FSP 3000R7 modules. The separate ESD jack, rightmost on the front side of
the shelf, is intended for the connection of a wrist strap. The front view of the SH1HUHP/E-TEMP/2DC is illustrated in Figure 98. The complete shelf is shown in Figure 91
The SH1HU-HP/E-TEMP/2DC supports an ambient temperature up to -33 C (-27.4 F).
Heating resistors, a special start- up procedure for modules and sophisticated fan
regulation at low temperatures keep the operating temperatures for the equipped modules
within the working range, even if the temperature outside of the shelf is down to 33 C.
After cold start the shelf will establish an internal temperature towards the specified
working temperature for the equipped modules and is then powering up the modules.
The air intake temperature monitored by the air intake temperature sensor is crucial to the
operation mode of the shelf. If the air intake temperature is 0 C (32 F), the shelf will
start his operation immediately, like all other FSP3000R7 shelves. If the air intake
temperature is < 0 C, a cold start-up procedure will be performed. During cold start-up
procedure the network control unit and shelf control unit could remain in a undefined state
(no access to shelf management), but without damage of parts. Module 1 and 2 keep held
137
in Off-state to avoid any damage or cold stress. For more information, refer to Start-UP
Procedure.
The SH1HU-HP/E-TEMP/2DC is specifically designed for low channel count
installations, single services and feeder applications. It is principally used for modules
with higher power consumption and greater heat dissipation than conventional modules.
This shelf may also be used for single channel add/drop in a CWDM ring (one channel
module, one east/west optical filter module). The basic configuration is: 1 x network
control unit (NCU-II only) and 1 x shelf control unit (SCU-S) only. Optical modules and
management modules may be pre-installed according to the system configuration
ordered. Modules supported for the extended temperature range can be found in the
SH1HU-HP/E-TEMP/2DC shelf specification.
communication. In addition, it includes SMD-resistors which heat up the modules when
the ambient temperatures are below 0 C. The heater resistors are controlled by the CM
on the fan contol unit (FCU). Internal backplane connectors and tracks hold the modules
in position. The SH1HU-HP/E-TEMP/2DC supports hot-swapping of the modules. This
allows for maximum flexibility when planning for upgrades or reconfigurations. Actual
configurations can be viewed and monitored using the management software.
The equipment type name of the SH1HU-HP/E-TEMP/2DC used by the management
software can be found in Equipment Types of FSP 3000R7 Hardware Components on
p.1327 of this documentation.
Features
138
Dimensions (without adaptor brackets): width x height x depth

Built-in DC power supply using 4-pole connector with dual power feeds
front power access
Protective earth point: at the rear of the shelf
Earth connection point for personnel earthing: front-accessible 4 mm banana jack
side)
Internal 48 W shelf heater - only active for temperatures < 0 C
Additional air intake temperature sensor
Front fiber routing
Backwards compatible to all FSP 3000R7 plug-in modules (single or double slot)
which are provisionable for 1HU shelves
Start-UP Procedure
The start-up procedure for modules is only active for ambient temperatures < 0 C (32 F).
As soon as the SH1HU-HP/E-TEMP/2DC shelf is turned on, this procedure is
automatically carried out.
If the temperature within the shelf is < 0 C and the shelf is powered on, the fan control
unit (FCU) will
keep the modules in slot 1 and 2 in power-off status (to prevent these modules from
damage due to very low ambient temperatures during the startup phase)
keep SCU-S and NCU-II in Power-on status
switch the shelf's heating resistors on (to increase the shelf internal temperature up
to 0 C)
switch all fans off temporarily (to prevent these modules from under-cooling at very
low ambient temperatures during the start-up phase)
The duration of the shelf warmup phase depends on the environmental temperature. i.e.
the lower the environmental temperature, the longer it takes to reach an internal shelf
temperature of 0 C. At the lowest outside temperature of -33 C (-27.4 F), WARM-UP
takes up to 82 minutes and reduces linear interpolated down to 0 minutes at 0 C outside.
This means, if the environmental temperature at the shelf power on is greater or equal 0
C, then the WARM-UP is always inactive. In this case the shelf starts its operation
immediately (which is common with all other shelves). If the environmental temperature
at the shelf power on is < 0 C, WARM-UP is always active. Hence, the corresponding
SNMP names for these standing conditions are called WARM-UP active" (shelf heating
activated) and WARM-UP inactive" (shelf heating deactivated).
A message may appear on the .... whilst the shelf is warming up. This message is
informative and requires no corrective action.
Once the warm-up phase is completed (internal shelf temperature of 0 C was attained),
the FCU will
switch the shelf's heating resistors off
reset the NCU-II and the SCU-S modules
switch the modules in slots 1 and 2 on.
The shelf starts normal operation. The fans are automatically switched on and off as
needed. For more information, see Module Cooling on p.140
Fan alarm and module 1 and 2 off-state alarms are suppressed during the cold (< 0 C)
start-up procedure.
Note
The FCU is able to switch on the modules in slot 1 and 2 and to reset the
management modules once only. This means that the FCU cannot
affect the plug-in modules during operation later on.
Power Supply
The power is available from the front side, top left of the shelf. A 4 x AWG 16 (minimum)
DC power cable assembled with a 4-pole power plug for screw connection and with
integrated strain relief has to be used. The fixing screws of the plug are captive screws
and can not be turned off completely when unplugging. It is recommended to use the DC
power cables supplied by ADVA Optical Networking. For information about the
139
appropriate DC power cables, refer to the FSP 3000R7 Module and System Specification
and Appendix A in this manual.
The power supply converts a higher DC input voltage received from a user-supplied
power source into an isolated lower DC output voltage.
The unit delivers 12 V DC at 14.0 A to all modules through the backplane connectors. The
maximum input power consumption is 230 W (at full load, maximum fan speed, highest
ambient temperature).
Power redundancy is achieved through a dual power feed input labeled pwr 1 and pwr 2
on the front panel. Though the input connector power should be received from two
independent power sources. If one of the two power feeds fails, the power supply will
continue to provide the required power to the shelf until the fault is cleared.
Output voltage and output current are continually monitored by the SCU-S. An alarm is
generated if the input voltage and output voltage falls below a definite limit. The power
supply can also be supervised via LED indicators on the front. The power supply unit is
not field replaceable.
Earthing
There are two different earthing terminals on the rear-side of the shelf for making a
protective earth connection.
Figure 100: Earthing Terminals of the SH1HU-HP/E-TEMP/2DC
Module Cooling
The SH1HU-HP/E-TEMP/2DC operates with forced convection cooling. This shelf is
designed as a side exhaust ventilated equipment. It complies with essential requirements
of the Telcordia GR-3028-CORE. Airflow dissipating the heat of the system modules is
moved from the right side to the left side of the shelf. Figure 101 illustrates the airflow
inside the shelf.
140
Figure 101: Side Exhaust Airflow Scheme for the SH1HU-HP/E-TEMP/2DC
ambient conditions, they simultaneously work at a low rotational speed. An increase of
internal air temperature causes the fans to accelerate to the required rotational speed.
During operation in cold ambient (< 0 C), fans will be intermittently switched on/off to
maintain the modules temperature at least 0 C. This is controlled by the CM on the fan
control unit (FCU). The fan switch-on/off time interval depends on the environmental
temperature and module heat power dissipation.
The FCU) constantly monitors the status of each fan and reports the status to the shelf
control unit (SCU-S). The status of the fans can also be read from the fan LED indicator
and the shelf display on the front panel.
If a single fan fails, two minutes after this failure the other operational fans increase their
Note
in the shelf up to 45 C ambient temperature. However, the complete
Slots
modules. Slot A holds the network control unit (NCU-II), and slot B accommodates the
shelf control unit (SCU-S).
141
The SH1HU-HP/E-TEMP/2DC must never be operated with open or empty slots.

Slots not in use must be filled with dummy modules to maintain proper cooling for all
other modules. When adding modules later on, store the dummy modules in a safe
place for future use.

The modules can be monitored and controlled by the SCU-S. Each module is connected
to the internal bus of the backplane enabling data exchange with the management
modules. The only official external access to the shelf is through the NCU-II of the NE.
Placement
The SH1HU-HP/E-TEMP/2DC can be placed in a 19-inch, ETSI or NEBS compliant rack
by using the appropriate adaptor brackets. It also fits into a 300 mm deep ETSI rack. The
shelf only occupies 1 HU of space in a rack.
For use in outdoor areas, the SH1HU-HP/E-TEMP/2DC must be installed in a
weatherproof cabinet to fulfill IP20 requirements and to protect the shelf from dripping
water, driven rain, snow, hail, ice, driven sand, solar radiation, thunderbolts, rodents,
ants, etc.

The SH1HU-HP/E-TEMP/2DC has two-color LED indicators that provide a quick visual
check of the operating status of the fans, installed modules and network element (NE).
The LED indicators are arranged in four groups on the front panel.
Figure 102: Front Panel of the SH1HU-HP/E-TEMP/2DC
142
Fan Status LED

There is only one LED labeled fan for the six cooling fans. Should appear more than one
fault, it will indicate the fault with the highest severity. For details, refer to the FSP
3000R7 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Manual, Chapter 3.
Slot Status LEDs

The shelf has one status LED indicator per slot. The LEDs for the 5 HU slots are labeled
1 and 2 (with the respective slot number). The LEDs for the half-sized slots are labeled
A and B. Only the failure on the module with the highest severity will be indicated by
the respective slot status LED (according to the corresponding ARC configuration). For
details, refer to the FSP 3000R7 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Manual, Chapter 3.

Therefore, only one of the three LEDs is lit at a time.
Note

Power Status LEDs

The power status LEDs labeled pwr1 and pwr2 (seeFigure 90) indicate different states
of the power supply unit. For details, refer to the FSP 3000R7 Maintenance and
Shelf Display
The shelf display (7-segment display) on the front panel (see Figure 90 ) indicates the
Adaptor Brackets
This shelf comes with 19-inch rackmount brackets pre-installed. The ETSI and NEBS
bracket pairs are included in the shipping box.
143
Dummy Modules
modules. For more information, refer to Dummy Modules.
Shelf Naming
Depending on configuration, a SH1HU-HP/E-TEMP/2DC is referred to as
master shelf if it is equipped with one NCU-II and one SCU-S
main shelf if it is equipped with one SCU-S only
switch modules.
Shelf Labeling
Each SH1HU-HP/E-TEMP/2DC can be identified by several labels located on the top of
the shelf.
Figure 103: Location of the SH1HU-HP/E-TEMP/2DC Labels
Shelf Type Label

144
Figure 104: Example of a SH1HU-HP/E-TEMP/2DC Shelf Type Label
Certification Label
shows an example.
Figure 105: Example of a SH1HU-HP/E-TEMP/2DC Certification Label
EMC Label for Japan

The following is an example of the Japanese EMC label for the SH1HU-HP/ETEMP/2DC.
Figure 106: Japanese EMC Label for the SH1HU-HP/E-TEMP/2DC
145


the shelf name
Figure 107: Example of a SH1HU-HP/E-TEMP/2DC Shelf Supply Values Label

Figure 108: Example of a SH1HU-HP/E-TEMP/2DC Hot Surface Hazard Warning
Label

The ESD and laser safety label is delivered with the shelf. Figure 109 shows the label.
146
SH1HU-F/2DC Shelf
Note
Specifications
SH1HU-F/2DC Shelf
Figure 110: SH1HU-F/2DC Front View
Figure 111: SH1HU-F/2DC Rear View
Description
The SH1HU-F/2DC (1HU Shelf Front Power Access) is a rack-mountable, 1HU Shelf
with redundant DC power supply. The shelf is the housing which holds the entire FSP
3000R7 system. The internal power supply is integrated on the left side. Six individual
fans ensure the effective cooling of the modules.
147
SH1HU-F/2DC Shelf
The shelf features four horizontal slots which accommodate the standard FSP 3000R7
modules. The separate ESD jack, rightmost on the front side of the shelf, is intended for
the connection of a wrist strap. The front view of the SH1HU-F/2DC is illustrated in
Figure 110. The complete shelf is shown in Figure 115.
The SH1HU-F/2DC is specifically designed for low channel count installations, single
services and feeder applications. This shelf may also be used for single channel add/drop
in a CWDM ring (one channel module, one east/west optical filter module). The basic
configuration is: 1 x network control unit (NCU and NCU-II) and 1 x shelf control unit
(SCU, SCU-II or SCU-S). Optical modules and management modules may be preinstalled according to the system configuration ordered.
The SH1HU-F/2DC supports hot-swapping of the modules. This allows for maximum
flexibility when planning for upgrades or reconfigurations. Actual configurations can be
viewed and monitored using the management software.
The equipment type name of the SH1HU-F/2DC used by the management software can
documentation.
Features

Built-in DC power supply with dual power feeds (-36 V to - 72 V DC, 140 W)
Front power access
side)
Front fiber routing
Backwards compatible to all FSP 3000R7 plug-in modules which are provisionable
for 1HU shelves
Power Supply
Power is available from the front side of the shelf using a terminal block (block barrier
type connectors) with 4 screw terminals and plastic cover over the terminals.
The power supply transforms a higher DC input voltage received from a user-supplied
power source into a lower DC output voltage of the same polarity. The unit delivers 12 V
DC at 10 A to each module through the backplane connectors. The maximum input power
consumption is 140 W.
148
SH1HU-F/2DC Shelf
Power redundancy is achieved by two separate inputs (labeled pwr 1 and pwr 2 on the
front panel). In this case, power should be received from two independent power sources.
If one of the two power feeds fails, the power supply will continue to provide the required
power to the shelf until the fault is cleared. This shelf supports the high power
Output voltage and output current are continually monitored by the SCU, SCU-II or SCUS. An alarm is generated if the input voltage and output voltage falls below a definite limit.
The power supply can also be supervised via LED indicators on the front side. The power
supply unit is not field-replaceable.
Earthing
There are two different earthing terminals on the left-hand side of the shelf for making a
functional earth connection. Refer to the following figure.
Figure 112: Earthing Terminals of the SH1HU-F/2DC
Module Cooling
The SH1HU-F/2DC operates with forced convection cooling. This shelf is designed as a
side exhaust ventilated equipment. It complies with essential requirements of the
Telcordia GR-3028-CORE. Airflow dissipating the heat of the system modules is moved
from the right side to the left side of the shelf. Figure 113 illustrates the airflow inside the
shelf.
Figure 113: Side exhaust Airflow Scheme for the SH1HU-F/2DC

149
SH1HU-F/2DC Shelf
control unit (SCU, SCU-II or SCU-S). The status of the fans can also be read from the
Note
Slots
modules. Slot A holds the network control unit (NCU or NCU-II), and slot B
accommodates the shelf control unit (SCU, SCU-II or SCU-S).
The SH1HU-F/2DC must never be operated with open or empty slots. Slots not in
for future use.

or NCU-II of the NE.
150
SH1HU-F/2DC Shelf
Placement
The SH1HU-F/2DC can be placed in a 19-inch, ETSI or NEBS compliant rack by using
the appropriate adaptor brackets. It also fits into a 300 mm deep ETSI rack. The shelf
only occupies 1 HU of space in an rack.

The SH1HU-F/2DC has two-color LED indicators that provide a quick visual check of the
operating status of the fans, installed modules, and network element (NE). The LED
indicators are arranged in four groups on the front panel as shown in the following figure.
Figure 114: Front Panel of the SH1HU-F/2DC
Fan Status LED

There is only one LED labeled fan for the six cooling fans. Should more than one fault
appear, the LED will indicate the fault with the highest severity. For details, refer to the
Slot Status LEDs

The shelf has one status LED indicator per slot. The LEDs labeled 1 and 2 indicate the
status of the optical modules. The LEDs labeled A and B indicate the status of the
management modules. Only the failure on the module with the highest severity will be
indicated by the respective slot status LED (according to the corresponding ARC

The LEDs labeled critical, major and minor (see Figure 114) indicate a failure at the
network element (NE). Within the network element, only the failure with the highest
severity will be indicated. Therefore only one of the three LEDs is lit at a time. For details,
refer to the FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Manual, Chapter 3.
151
SH1HU-F/2DC Shelf
Note

Power Status LEDs

The power status LEDs labeled pwr1 and pwr2 (seeFigure 114) indicate different
states of the power supply unit. For details, refer to the FSP 3000R7 Maintenance and
Shelf Display
The shelf display (7-segment display) on the front panel (seeFigure 114) indicates the
Adaptor Brackets
1 x ETSI customized bracket pair
The SH1HU-F/2DC comes with 19-inch rackmount brackets pre-installed. The ETSI and
NEBS bracket pairs are included in the shipping box.
Dummy Modules
Shelf Naming
Depending on configuration, a SH1HU-F/2DC is referred to as
switch modules.
In addition to the SCU-S, an extension shelf only includes passive optical modules and
protection modules.
152
SH1HU-F/2DC Shelf
Labeling
Each SH1HU-F/2DC has several labels on the top of the shelf as shown in Figure 115.
They provide important information about the shelf itself and the operating safety. All
labels are described below.
Figure 115: Labeling the SH1HU-F/2DC
Shelf Type Label

The SH1HU-F/2DC can be identified by the shelf type label. It contains the following
relevant information:
Figure 116: Example of an SH1HU-F/2DC Shelf Type Label
153
SH1HU-F/2DC Shelf
Sales Kit Label

type of the shelf control unit.
Figure 117: Example of an SH1HU-F/2DC Sales Kit Label
Certification Label
The certification label indicates the current certification marks for this shelf.
Figure 118: Example of an SH1HU-F/2DC Certification Label
154
SH1HU-F/2DC Shelf
EMC Label for Japan

The following is an example of the Japanese EMC label for the SH1HU-F/2DC.
Figure 119: Japanese EMC Label for the SH1HU-F/2DC


the shelf name
Figure 120: Example of an SH1HU-F/2DC Shelf Supply Values Label
Made in China
06-22-2007
155
SH1HU-R
Warranty Label
Damage or removal of the warranty label will void the warranty. ADVA Optical
Networking will disclaim the implied warranty of merchantability. An example of a
SH1HU-F/2DC warranty label is shown in Figure 121.
Figure 121: Examples of an SH1HU-F/2DC Shelf Warranty Label
GUARANTEE
VOID IF SEAL
BROKEN

Figure 122 shows an example of the SH1HU-F/2DC ESD and laser safetylabel.
Figure 122: SH1HU-F/2DC ESD and Laser Safety Label
Note
Specifications
SH1HU-R
Figure 123: SH1HU-R Front View
156
SH1HU-R
Description
The SH1HU-R is a rack-mountable, 1HU rear power accessshelf with redundant AC
power supply. The shelf is the housing which holds the entire FSP 3000R7 system. The
shelf features four horizontal slots on the front side for accommodation of the standard
FSP 3000R7 modules. The left-hand slot contains the fan control unit (FCU). This slot is
covered by the front panel that holds the shelf display and the status LED indicators. The
separate ESD jack, rightmost on the front side of the shelf, is intended for the connection
of a wrist strap. The front view of the SH1HU-R is illustrated in Figure 123.
The SH1HU-R is powered by two independent hot-swappable AC power supply units
(PSU/1HU-R-ACs), which are inserted into the slots on the rear side as shown in Figure
124.
Figure 124: SH1HU-R Rear View
The backplane is arranged in the middle of the shelf. It provides electrical connections for
power supply and intra-shelf communication. Internal backplane connectors and tracks
hold the modules in position. Six integrated fans ensure the effective cooling of the
modules.
The SH1HU-R has been designed for low channel count installations, single services
and feeder applications. It is mainly used as an access carrier in the area of backhaul
transport. This shelf may also be used for single channel add/drop in a CWDM ring (one
channel module, one east/west optical filter module).
The basic configuration is: 1 x network control unit (NCU or NCU-II) and 1x shelf control
unit (SCU, SCU-II or SCU-S). Optical modules and management modules may be preinstalled according to the system configuration ordered.
The shelf supports hot-swapping of the modules. This allows for maximum flexibility
The equipment type name of the SH1HU-R used by the management software can be
documentation.
The shelf implements a set of remote operations, administration and maintenance (OAM)
capabilities and supports service provisioning from any node on the network.
Features
Modular extensible design, based on the 19 format or ETSI 600 standard
Dimensions: width* x height x depth*

*(Dimensions without adaptor brackets and power connectors of the PSU/1HU-RACs)
Robust, low-profile housing made from stainless steel sheets (screw/nut fastening
system)
157
SH1HU-R
Rear power access

(Dual AC power supply auto-ranging from 85 VAC to 264 V AC at
48 Hz - 63 Hz)
120 W maximum power consumption
side)
Access to the modules from the front of the shelf
External key buttons on front panel for changing Shelf ID manually
Support of 20 level cascades
Compatible with FSP 3000R7 NCU and SCU
Power Supply
Under normal operating conditions two redundant AC power supply units (PSU/1HU-RAC) inserted into the back half of the shelf provide the voltage the modules and
components need to operate properly. In this case both power supply units deliver the
required power to the shelf in a load-sharing mode. If one of the two units fails the
remaining unit will take over the power supply for the entire shelf until a unit swap has
been executed. For power redundancy, two separate AC power sources are needed. The
shelf may also be powered by a single power supply. AC inputs are on the rear side using
male AC connectors each with a protection clip. This shelf supports the high power
The DC output power (12 V for PSU/1HU-R-AC) is passed on to each module and the
internal components through the backplane connectors. Output voltage and output
current are continually monitored by the SCU-S. An alarm is raised if the input or output
voltage falls below a specified limit. The power supply can also be supervised via LED
indicators on the front side.
Earthing
functional earth connection. See Figure 125.
158
SH1HU-R
Figure 125: Earthing Terminals of the SH1HU-R
Module Cooling
The SH1HU-R operates with forced convection cooling. This shelf is designed as a side
exhaust ventilated equipment. It complies with essential requirements of the Telcordia
GR-3028-CORE. Airflow dissipating the heat of the system modules is moved from the
right side to the left side of the shelf. Figure 126 illustrates the airflow inside the shelf.
Figure 126: Side exhaust Airflow Scheme for the SH1HU-R

control unit (SCU, SCU-II or SCU-S). The status of the fans can also be read from the
A fan failure must exist for more than 1 minute before an alarm is raised. If a fan fails or
recovers, an event is generated and sent to the NCU or NCU-II via CAN bus. The NCU
or NCU-II records the event in its fault table.
The fans are not field-replaceable.
159
SH1HU-R
Note
Slots
The slots numbered 1 (lower) and 2 (upper) are intended for accommodation of all FSP
3000R7 optical modules. Nearly any combination of modules is accepted. Double-width
modules occupy both slots. Slot A holds the network control unit (NCU or NCU-II), and
slot B accommodates the shelf control unit (SCU, SCU-II or SCU-S).
The shelf must never be operated with open or empty slots. Slots not in use must be
filled with dummy modules to maintain proper cooling for all other modules. When
adding modules later on, store the dummy modules in a safe place for future use.
On the rear side it has two slots (indicated as "PSU1" and "PSU2") for the power
supplies.

or NCU-II of the network element.
Placement
The SH1HU-R can be placed in a 19-inch, ETSI or NEBS compliant rack by using the
appropriate adaptor brackets. The total depth of the rack should be not less than 600 mm
(23.6 in).

The SH1HU-R has two-color LED indicators that provide a quick visual check of the
operating status of the fans, the installed modules and the network element (NE). The
LED indicators are arranged in four groups on the front panel as shown here.
160
SH1HU-R
Figure 127: Front Panel of the SH1HU-R
Fan Status LED

There is only one LED labeled fan for the six air-cooling fans. Should more than one fault
appear, the LED will indicate the fault with the highest severity. For details, refer to the
Slot Status LEDs

status of the optical modules. The LEDs labeled A and B display the status of the
displayed by the respective slot status LED (according to the corresponding ARC

The LEDs labeled critical, major and minor (see Figure 127) indicate a failure at the
network element (NE). Within the network element, only the failure with the highest
severity will be indicated. Therefore only one of the three LEDs is lit at a time. For details,
refer to theFSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Manual, Chapter 3.
Note

Power Status LEDs

The power status LEDs labeled PSU1 and PSU2 (seeFigure 127) indicate the status
of each power supply unit. For details, refer to the FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2 Maintenance
and Troubleshooting Manual, Chapter 3.
Note
The PSU/1HU-R-ACs have a single two-color LED indicator marked P

on its faceplate. It provides more detailed information about the
operational status of the units.
161
SH1HU-R
Shelf Display
The shelf display (7-segment shelf display) on the front panel (seeFigure 127) indicates
the shelf ID number (unique within an NE). The arrow buttons and the enter button are
used to set the shelf ID.
Adaptor Brackets
The SH1HU-R comes with 19-inch rackmount brackets pre-installed. The ETSI and
Shelf Naming
Depending on configuration, a SH1HU-R is referred to as
switch modules.
Labeling
Each SH1HU-R has several labels on the top of the shelf as shown in Figure 128. They
provide important information about the shelf itself and the operating safety. All labels are
described below.
Figure 128: Labeling the SH1HU-R
162
SH1HU-R
Shelf Type Label

The SH1HU-R can be identified by the shelf type label. It contains the following relevant
information:
Figure 129: Example of an SH1HU-R Shelf Type Label
Sales Kit Label

The sales kit label is located on the shelf if it is equipped with a shelf control unit and the
power supply units. This label contains the same information as the shelf type label. In
addition, it indicates the type of the shelf control unit and the type of the power supply
units.
Figure 130: Example of an SH1HU-R Sales Kit Label
Certification Label
shows an example.
163
SH1HU-R
Figure 131: Example of an SH1HU-R Certification Label
EMC Label for Japan

The following is an example of the Japanese EMC label for the SH1HU-R.
Figure 132: Japanese EMC Label for the SH1HU-R


164
the shelf name
SH1HU-R
Figure 133: Example of an SH1HU-R Shelf Supply Values Label
Warranty Label
Figure 134 shows an example of the SH1HU-R warranty label. Damage or removal of the
warranty label will void the warranty. ADVA Optical Networking will disclaim the implied
warranty of merchantability.
Figure 134: Example of an SH1HU-R Warranty Label

The following is an example of the SH1HU-R ESD and laser safety label.
Figure 135: SH1HU-R ESD and Laser Safety Label
Note
Specifications
165
SH1HU-R/PF
SH1HU-R/PF
Figure 136: SH1HU-R/PF Front View Equipped with a 2PCA Channel Module as an Example
Description
The SH1HU-R/PF is a rack-mountable, rear power access 1HU Shelf equipped with a
pluggable fan module, an replaceable air intake filter and redundant field-replaceable
power supplies. The shelf is the housing which holds the entire FSP 3000R7 system. The
SH1HU-R/PF features four horizontal slots on the front side for accommodation of the
standard (native and legacy) FSP 3000R7 modules. The slot of the left-hand side of the
shelf contains the built-in fan control unit (FCU) and the replaceable fan module. This slot
is covered by the front panel that holds the shelf display and the status LED indicators.
The narrow slot on the right-hand side holds the air filter unit. The front view of the
SH1HU-R/PF is illustrated in Figure 136.
The fixed air filter guide frame projects over the shelf front as shown in Figure 137. The
separate ESD jack on the front plate of the removable air filter frame is intended for the
connection of a wrist strap.
Figure 137: Views of the SH1HU-R/PF Fixed Air Filter Guide Frame
This design ensures sufficient space for guiding fiber bundles below (from slot1) or above
(from slot 2) the air filter frame. The fiber quantity per slot is limited by the diameter of the
fiber optic cables. If the cable diameter is 2 mm (0.08in), up to 17 fiber optic cables are
supported per slot. The fiber bundles can be fixed using the fiber holders. An example is
shown in Figure 138.
166
SH1HU-R/PF
Figure 138: Routing the Fibers
The SH1HU-R/PF is powered by two independent hot-swappable AC or DC power

supply units (PSU/1HU-R-AC-200 or PSU/1HU-R-DC-200), which are inserted into the
slots on the rear side as shown in Figure 139.
Figure 139: SH1HU-R/PF Rear View Equipped with PSU/1HU-R-AC-200s as an Example
The backplane is arranged in the middle of the shelf. It provides electrical connections for
power supply and intra-shelf communication. Internal backplane connectors and tracks
hold the modules in position.
The fan control unit (FCU) is located to the left of the fan module. The FCU controls and
monitors the fan speed (temperature controlled), reads the fan tray inventory data and
send these to the management modules. Furthermore, it handles the shelf alarm reporting
(fan, power, AC/DC-input, over temperature, dust load at the air intake filter) and controls
the alarm and status LEDs on the shelf display.
The SH1HU-R/PF has been designed for low channel count installations, single services
and feeder applications. It is mainly used as an access carrier in the area of backhaul
transport. This shelf may also be used for single channel add/drop in a CWDM ring (one
channel module, one east/west optical filter module).
The basic configuration is: 1 x network control unit (NCU or NCU-II) and 1x shelf control
unit (SCU, SCU-II or SCU-S). Optical modules and management modules may be preinstalled according to the system configuration ordered.
The shelf supports hot-swapping of the modules. This allows for maximum flexibility
The equipment type name of the SH1HU-R/PF used by the management software can
documentation.
The shelf implements a set of remote operations, administration and maintenance (OAM)
capabilities and supports service provisioning from any node on the network.
167
SH1HU-R/PF
Features
Modular extensible design, based on the 19 format or ETSI 600 standard
Dimensions: width* x height x depth*

*(Dimensions without adaptor brackets and power connectors of the power supply
units)
Robust, low-profile housing made from stainless steel sheets (screw/nut fastening
system)
Surface condition: stainless steel, having a brushed finish, uncoated
Rear power access:

o
Dual field-replaceable AC power supply units auto-ranging from 100 V AC to 240

V AC at 47 Hz - 63 Hz
Dual field-replaceable DC power supply units, nominal voltage: -48 V DC
200 W maximum power consumption
side)
field-replaceable fan unit
field-replaceable air dust filter
Air filter contamination sensor
Access to the modules from the front of the shelf
Graphic LCD display for indicating the shelf ID and the internal temperature
External key buttons on front panel for changing Shelf ID manually
Support of 10PCA module deployments
Support of 20 level cascades
Backwards compatible to all FSP 3000R7-plug-in modules provisionable for

1HUShelves
Power Supply
Under normal operating conditions two redundant AC or DC power supply units
(PSU/1HU-R-AC-200 or PSU/1HU-R-DC-200) inserted into the back half of the shelf
provide the voltage needed by the modules and components to operate properly. In this
case both power supply units deliver the required power to the shelf in a load-sharing
mode. If one of the two units fails the remaining unit will take over the power supply for
the entire shelf until a unit swap has been executed. For power redundancy, two separate
AC or DC power sources are needed. The shelf may also be powered by a single power
supply. The power inputs are on the rear side. The PSU/1HU-R-AC-200 uses a male AC
connector with a protective clip according to IEC 320-C14. The PSU/1HU-R-DC-200 has
a male 3-pin Dinkle power connector.
The output power (max. input current of 16.4 A for both AC and DC power supplies) is
passed on to each module and the internal components through the backplane
connectors. An alarm is raised if the input or output voltage falls outside of the allowed
range. The power supply can also be supervised via LED indicators on the front side.
168
SH1HU-R/PF
Pay attention that the total power consumption of a fully populated shelf does not exceed
the specified value (see FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2 Module and System Specification).
Otherwise power redundancy cannot be guaranteed or power supply may even fail.
Earthing
functional earth connection, as shown here.
Figure 140: Earthing Terminals of the SH1HU-R/PF
Module Cooling
The SH1HU-R/PF operates with forced convection cooling. This shelf is designed as a
side exhaust ventilated equipment. It complies with essential requirements of the
Telcordia GR-3028-CORE.
The fan module (FAN/1HU) is located on the left side of the shelf. The module consists of
three fans. They generate sufficient air flow for module cooling. Airflow dissipating the
heat of the system modules is moved from the right side to the left side of the shelf.
Figure 141 illustrates the airflow inside the shelf.
Figure 141: Side exhaust Airflow Scheme for the SH1HU-R/PF

Air is sucked in through the air intake on the right side, cleared by the air filter, passed
If a fan fails, the whole fan module must be replaced. It can be replaced while the shelf is
in service. It is recommended to have a spare fan module available at all times.
169
SH1HU-R/PF
The failure of a fan does not endanger the cooling of the modules in the
shelf up to 45C ambient temperature. However, the failed fan unit
should be replaced by Service Personnel within 48 hours after fan
failure.
Note
To maintain system cooling, ensure the corresponding fan module slot

does not remain empty for longer than 1 minute during the replacement
process.
Air filter unit

The air filter unit comprises the fixed filter guide frame and the removable frame with the
air filter material (polyurethane foam filter pad). The removable frame is placed inside the
fixed filter guide frame.
The air intake filter pad must be used at all times to prevent dust and debris from entering
the shelf. An airflow sensor monitors the dust load at the air intake filter continuously. If
the filter pad reaches a certain preset threshold, an alarm is generated. This alarm is to
initialize the user to exchange the filter early enough. An excessive contamination of the
filter pad significantly reduces the airflow, which results in decreasing the cooling
efficiency. Therefore, the air filter pad should be inspected regularly and replaced, if
necessary. The integrated alarm function does not at all supersede regular maintenance
intervals.
Never operate the shelf without having an air filter pad fitted in the air filter unit. Without
the filter pad dirt can block the air inlets and outlets. Blocked air inlets and outlets lead to
inefficient cooling and considerable increase in fire risk.
Replace a dirty air filter pad at least once a year. ADVA Optical Networking strongly
recommends replacing the air filter pad every 90 days.
The air filter pad is accessible rightmost on the front side of the shelf, as shown in Figure
137.
Figure 142: SH1HU-R/PF Removable Air Filter Frame
The air filter pad can be replaced during operation without removing the fibers. For
replacing the air filter pad, refer to the Maintenance and Troubleshooting Manual.
Replacement air filter pads for this shelf are included in the FAN-FILTER-SET/1HU. For
more information, see sub-section FAN-FILTER-SET/1HU on p.173.
Slots
The SH1HU-R/PF features four module slots. The full height slots numbered 1 (lower)
and 2 (upper) are intended for accommodation of the valid 5HU module types supported
by the release. Nearly any combination of modules is accepted. Double-width module
types occupy both slots. The two left-most slots are designed to fit the half-height
management modules. The lower slot is named A and accepts a network control unit only
170
SH1HU-R/PF
(NCU or NCU-II). The top slot is named B and accepts a shelf control unit only
(SCU,SCU-II or SCU-S).
Note
The assignment of NCU and SCU type modules to the A and B slots of
this shelf are the reverse of all other 1HU Shelf types, due to the required
physical placement of certain internal components of the shelf.
The shelf must never be operated with open or empty slots. Slots not in use must be
filled with dummy modules to maintain proper cooling for all other modules. When adding
modules later on, store the dummy modules in a safe place for future use.
On the rear side it has two slots (indicated as "PSU1" and "PSU2") for the power
supplies.

or NCU-II of the network element.
Placement
The SH1HU-R/PF can be placed in a 19-inch, 600 mm deep ETSI or NEBS-3 compliant
rack/cabinet by using the appropriate adaptor brackets. The total depth of the rack should
be not less than 600 mm (23.6 in).

The SH1HU-R/PF has two-color LED indicators that provide a quick visual check of the
operating status of the fans, the installed modules and the network element (NE). The
LED indicators are arranged in four groups on the front panel as shown in Figure 143.
171
SH1HU-R/PF
Figure 143: Front Panel of the SH1HU-R/PF
Fan and Air Filter Status LED

There is only one LED labeled fan for indicating the status of the three air-cooling fans
and the air intake filter. Should more than one fault appear, the LED will indicate the fault
with the highest severity. For details, refer to the FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2 Maintenance and
Slot Status LEDs

status of the optical modules. The LEDs labeled A and B display the status of the
displayed by the respective slot status LED (according to the corresponding ARC

The LEDs labeled critical, major and minor indicate a failure at the network element
(NE). Within the network element, only the failure with the highest severity will be
indicated. Therefore only one of the three LEDs is lit at a time. For details, refer to the
Note
172

SH1HU-R/PF
Power Status LEDs

The power status LEDs labeled PSU1 and PSU2 indicate the status of each power
supply unit. For details, refer to the FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2 Maintenance and
Note
The PSU/1HU-R-AC-200 has a single two-color LED indicator marked

P on its faceplate. It provides more detailed information about the
operational status of the units.
Shelf Display
The shelf display (graphic LCD display) on the front panel (seeFigure 143) indicates the
shelf ID number (unique within an NE) and the internal temperature graphically. The arrow
buttons and the enter button are used to set the shelf ID.
If you push the enter button for 5 s, a submenu will appear. With the aid of the arrow
buttons, you can navigate within the submenu for displaying the current temperature, fan
speed and firmware package version. Using the submenu you can also perform the lamp
test to verify the function of the modules (except NCU and power supply).
Adaptor Brackets
1 x NEBS bracket pair (consisting of four brackets)
The SH1HU-R/PF comes with 19-inch rackmount brackets pre-installed. The ETSI and
FAN-FILTER-SET/1HU
To avoid dust and dirt buildup in the shelf and the power supplies, the air filter pads have
to be replaced at regular intervals. The FAN-FILTER-SET/1HU is available from ADVA
Optical Networking. The FAN-FILTER-SET/1HU includes the following:
10 x replaceable air filter pad for for use in the SH1HU-R/PF
20 x replaceable air filter pad for for use in the PSU/1HU-R-AC-200 and PSU/1HUR-DC-200
The pads are pre-cut to fit in to the filter frame of the shelf and the air duct of the power
supplies, respectively.
The FAN-FILTER-SET/1HU can be delivered with the shelf but must be

ordered separately (sales item number 1013700021-01).
Note
173
SH1HU-R/PF
Shelf Naming
Depending on configuration, a SH1HU-R/PF is referred to as
master shelf if it is equipped with one NCU/NCU-II and one SCU/SCU-S/SCU-II
main shelf if it is only equipped with one SCU/SCU-S/SCU-II
switch modules.
Labeling
Each SH1HU-R/PF has several labels on the top of the shelf as shown in Figure 144.
They provide important information about the shelf itself and the operating safety. All
labels are described below.
Figure 144: Labeling the SH1HU-R/PF
Shelf Type Label

The SH1HU-R/PF can be identified by the shelf type label. It contains the following
relevant information:
174
SH1HU-R/PF
Figure 145: Example of an SH1HU-R/PF Shelf Type Label
USI : LBADVAXXXXXXXXXXX
Mrzenquelle 1-3
98617 Meiningen
TEL: +49 3693 450-0
FAX: +49 3693 450-499
Certification Label
The certification label indicates the current certification marks for this shelf.
Figure 146: Example of an SH1HU-R/PF Certification Label
EMC-Warning:
N1246
UOAA

EMC Label for Japan

The following is an example of the Japanese EMC label for the SH1HU-R/PF.
Figure 147: Japanese EMC Label for the SH1HU-R/PF
175
SH1HU-R/PF


the shelf name
Figure 148: Example of an SH1HU-R/PF Shelf Supply Values Label
Warranty Label
Figure 149 shows an example of the SH1HU-R/PF warranty label. Damage or removal of
the warranty label will void the warranty. ADVA Optical Networking will disclaim the
implied warranty of merchantability.
Figure 149: Example of an SH1HU-R/PF Warranty Label

The following is an example of the SH1HU-R/PF ESD and laser safety label.
176
FAN/1HU
Figure 150: SH1HU-R/PF ESD and Laser Safety Label
Note
Specifications
FAN/1HU
Figure 151: FAN/1HU
Description
The FAN/1HU is a plug-in fan module specifically designed for the SH1HU-R/PF shelf.
The module consists of three high-power fans (3-Phase, 4-pole brushless, ball bearing
fans). The fans are assembled on a vertical arranged 2-layer PCB and connect on this
board with 10 pole MOLEX-connectors. The FAN/1HU is shown in Figure 151.
The three fans generate sufficient air flow for module cooling. Each fan is supplied
separately and operates independently of one another. The fans are powered using a
common backplane connector.
The exhaust air temperature controls the rotational speed of the fans. Under normal
ambient conditions, the fans work independently at a low rotational speed. The fan
control unit (FCU) continually monitors the status of each fan and reports the status to
the shelf control unit (SCU or SCU-S). The status of the fans can also be read from the
fan LED indicator labeled Fan on the shelf display.The operational fan concept
incorporates a 2+1 redundancy. If a single fan fails, one minute after this failure the other
operational fans increase their rotational speed to maximum in order to compensate for
177
FAN/1HU
the loss of cooling due the broken fan. In this case, the fan LED turns yellow, and a fan
abnormal alarm is raised. If yet another fan stopped running, the fan LED goes red and a
fan failure alarm is generated. If the fan module is removed from the shelf, a fanremoved alarm will be given. A fan failure or a fan module removal must exist for more
than 1 minute before an alarm is raised. If a fan fails or the fan module is removed, an
event is generated and sent by the FCU to the NCU. The NCU records the event in its
fault table.
in the shelf up to 45C ambient temperature. However, the failed fan unit
should be replaced by Service Personnel within 48 hours after fan
failure.
Note

process.
modules cool. To avoid equipment damage and risk of fire due to component
overheating, the shelf must not be allowed to continue operation.
At any indication of a fan failure, even at ambient temperatures, replace the fan module.
This is to protect the system modules from being damaged.
The likelihood that all three fans fail at the same time is very low.
The fans are not field replaceable. If a fan failed, the whole fan module must be replaced.
Features
178
Compact design
Designed as a plug-in module for the SH1HU-R/PF shelf
Equipped with three non-detachable powerful fans
Housing: made of plastics
Designed to provide airflow from right to left within the SH1HU-R/PF shelf
Provides a 2+1 fan redundancy
Airflow of a single fan: 43.5 m3/h (25.6 CFM)
Fan speed: max. 19.000 rpm
Low noise level (normal operation)
Fan status LED indicator on front panel (display front assembly) of the SH1HU-R/PF
shelf
Hot swappable
Field replaceable
FAN/1HU
Fuse
Each fan has an integrated 0.5 amp resettable fuse that provides over-current protection
and automatic restoration. This fuse is not accessible. The fuse will reset by itself after
power to the circuit is removed, the fault is cleared, and power is reapplied to the circuit.
There is no need for service personnel to physically replace a fuse.

The fans of the FAN/1HU are independently of each other monitored and controlled by
the FCU that is integrated in the SH1HU-R/PF shelf. Three separate conductive tracks
each are used for monitoring the fans and controlling the fan speed.
Sensors check the air intake temperature and temperature inside the shelf. If they detect
a temperature outside of range, the fans rotate at maximum speed. When the internal
temperature drops below the defined threshold value again, the rotational speed of the
fans will reduce. A fan failure detector ensures high operational security. Failure or
removal of the FAN/1HU from the shelf is reported to the network management system.
The fan module can also be supervised via the LED indicator labeled Fan on the shelfs
front panel.
documentation.
Slot Position
The FAN/1HU module is placed in the left most slot of the SH1HU-R/PF shelf only. The
slot is covered by the display front assembly.
Replacing
Modular design and hot-swap capability allow for quick and easy replacement in the case
of a fan failure. If a fan fails, the whole fan module must be replaced. The FAN/1HU may
be replaced during operation of the shelf. In order to replace the fan module the display
front assembly must be removed first.
Note
The fan module should be replaced by Service Personnel only.

process.
LED Indicator
The FAN/1HU has a single tri-color LED labeled "Fan" on the front panel as shown in
Figure 143. Its colors represent different operating status of the three fans. For details,
refer to the FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Manual, Chapter 3.
179
PSU/1HU-R-AC
Specifications
PSU/1HU-R-AC
Figure 152: PSU/1HU-R-AC Front View
Description
The PSU/1HU-R-AC is a plug-in AC power supply unit specifically designed for a 1HU
Shelf Rear Power Access. For power feeding, the power supply unit has a 3-pole IEC AC
appliance coupler on its faceplate. The coupler has to be equipped with a power cord
locking clamp to protect the AC plug from unintended loosening. The procedure for
assembling the power cord locking clamps is described in the Installation and
On the backplane side the unit has a DIN 41612/IEC60603-2 C/3 male connector (3 rows
with 10 pins each).
When connected to the line power, the PSU/1HU-R-AC converts AC into DC needed for
powering the shelfs modules. The unit automatically detects the input voltage within the
specified range. No adjustment is necessary. The PSU/1HU-R-AC delivers 12.2 V DC at
10 A to each module through the backplane connectors. The unit produces approximately
120W of output power. Two PSU/1HU-R-ACs working in active current sharing mode
can be installed to achieve a unit hot swap capability. In this case, both power supply
units must be of identical type and should receive AC power from separate circuits. If one
unit fails, the remaining unit is capable of powering a fully loaded shelf (ca. 120 W) on an
ongoing basis until the fault is cleared.
Primary to secondary input/output insulation (double isolation, 3kV AC isolation) test
voltage is included in the design.
An integrated fan and ventilation openings guarantees sufficient cooling.
180
PSU/1HU-R-AC
The power supply unit is field-replaceable. A handle on the faceplate allows the user to
easy pull out the unit of the shelf.
Features
Two-color LED indicator on the faceplate for indicating the operational status of the
unit
Current sharing
Hot swappable
Holdup time min. 20 ms
Forced air cooling
Fuses
The PSU/1HU-R-AC is equipped with an internal non-user serviceable HBD power input
fuse (3.15 A 250 V AC) for fault protection in both the live and neutral input lines. The
fuse is not accessible. If a fuse has blown, the power supply unit must be replaced by
service personnel and returned to ADVA Optical Networking for manufacturer repair.
WARNING

EMC
The PSU includes its own EMI gasket.

Make sure that the EMI gasket is not damaged before inserting the unit. A defective EMI
gasket must be replaced immediately. Otherwise EMC compliance cannot be achieved.
Return the unit with a defective EMI gasket to ADVA Optical Networking for repair.
181
PSU/1HU-R-AC
Connecting
Cables on p.1279 and Chapter 4 of the Installation and Commissioning Manual.

replacement in the case of failure or upgrade. A handle on the units front panel support
easy removal.
Residual voltage may still be present inside the PSU/1HU-R-AC
WARNING

from the PSU/1HU-R-AC before you proceed to remove the unit.
within a minimum of 30 seconds after disconnecting the PSU/1HU-R-AC from its power
source.

Removing a PSU/1HU-R-AC from the SH1HU-R shelf is alarmed through the
If you remove a PSU/1HU-R-AC (in the following referred to as PSU) and then reinsert it
NCU was rebooted.
Note
A quick sequence of removing and reinserting the PSU/1HU-R-AC is not

Monitoring
Output voltage, output current, fan status and board temperature of the PSU/1HU-R-AC
are continually monitored by the NCU of the SH1HU-R. If a parameter goes below or
exceeds the specified limit, a corresponding event is reported to the NCU. In doing so,
one or more alarms can be triggered. Failure or removal of the power supply unit from the
shelf is reported to the network management system. The power supply can also be
supervised using the LED indicator on its faceplate.
The equipment type name of the PSU/1HU-R-AC used by the management software can
documentation.
182
PSU/1HU-R-AC
Slot positions
The PSU/1HU-R-AC can only be placed in slots PSU1 or PSU2 on the rear side of the
SH1HU-R Shelf.
LED Indicator
The PSU/1HU-R-AC has one two-color LED indicator labeled P on its faceplate. The
LED colors represent different operating status. For details, refer to the FSP 3000R7 Rel.
Labeling
The PSU/1HU-R-AC can be identified by the PSU type label on the board cover. It

Figure 153: Example of a PSU/1HU-R-AC Module Type Label
Specifications
183
PSU/1HU-R-AC-200
PSU/1HU-R-AC-200
Figure 154: PSU/1HU-R-AC-200 Front View
Description
The PSU/1HU-R-AC-200 is a plug-in AC power supply unit specifically designed for a
1HU Shelf Rear Power Access. The power supply unit has a 3-prong IEC AC appliance
coupler on its faceplate. The coupler has to be equipped with a power cord locking clamp
to secure the AC power cord. The assembling of the power cord locking clamp is
described in the Installation and Commissioning Manual.
The module backplane interface has a DIN 41612/IEC60603-2 C/3 male connector (3
rows with 10 pins each).
The PSU/1HU-R-AC-200 converts AC supplied power into DC power for use by the
shelfs modules. The unit automatically detects whether the input voltage within the
specified range. The PSU/1HU-R-AC-200 supplies a total output power of 200 W (12.2 V
DC at 16.4 A).
The SH1HU-R/PF shelf requires max. 200 W for slots 1, 2, A, B, and for fan power
supply and fan control unit.
Two redundant PSU/1HU-R-AC-200s work in current sharing with hot swap capability
and should connect AC power from separate sources. If one unit fails, the remaining unit
is capable of powering a fully loaded shelf (ca. 200 W) on an ongoing basis until the failed
unit is replaced.
Primary to secondary input/output insulation (double isolation, 3kV AC isolation) test
voltage is included in the design.
The power supply unit is field-replaceable. Two handles on the faceplate allow the user to
184
PSU/1HU-R-AC-200
An integrated fan and ventilation openings guarantee sufficient cooling. The fan consists
of a replaceable air filter pad for air intake to prevent excessive dust accumulation inside
the power supply unit. This air filter pad is placed on the front panels fan air intake and
can be replaced during the system operation.
Replacement air filter pads for this PSU are included in the FAN-FILTER-SET/1HU. For
more information, see section SH1HU-R/PF, sub-section FAN-FILTER-SET/1HU on
p.173.
Never operate the PSU without having an air filter pad fitted in front of the fan air intake.
Without the filter, dirt can block the air inlets and outlets. Blocked air inlets and outlets
lead to inefficient cooling and fire risk.
Note
Replace air filter pads at least once a year. Based on air quality, ADVA
Optical Networking strongly recommends replacing the air filter pad
every 6 months.
Features
Input of 100 V AC to 240 V AC at 47 - 63 Hz
unit
AC failure protection (turnoff)
AC Auto-Recovery (Turn on)
Output limiting current protection
Fire protection
Current sharing
Hot swappable
Forced air cooling
Replaceable fan filter
185
PSU/1HU-R-AC-200
Fuses
The PSU/1HU-R-AC-200 is equipped with an internal non-user serviceable HBD power
input fuse (5 A 250 V AC) for fault protection in both the live and neutral input lines. The
fuse is not accessible. If a fuse has blown, the power supply unit must be replaced by
service personnel and returned to ADVA Optical Networking for manufacturer repair.
WARNING

EMC

Connecting
Cables on p.1279 and Chapter 4 of the Installation and Commissioning Manual.

Residual voltage may still be present inside the PSU/1HU-R-AC200 after being disconnected from its power source.
WARNING

from the PSU/1HU-R-AC-200 before you proceed to remove the
unit.
within a minimum of 30 seconds after disconnecting the PSU/1HU-R-AC-200 from its
power source.

Removing a PSU/1HU-R-AC-200 from the SH1HU-R/PF shelf is alarmed through the
186
PSU/1HU-R-AC-200
If you remove a PSU/1HU-R-AC-200 (in the following referred to as PSU) and then
reinsert it immediately, an RMVD alarm will be generated even though the PSU has been
NCU was rebooted.
Note
A quick sequence of removing and reinserting the PSU/1HU-R-AC-200

Monitoring
Input voltage, output voltage, output current, fan status and board temperature of the
PSU/1HU-R-AC-200 are continually monitored by the NCU of the SH1HU-R/PF. If a
parameter goes below or exceeds the specified limit, a corresponding event is reported to
the NCU. In doing so, one or more alarms can be triggered. Failure or removal of the
power supply can also be supervised using the LED indicator on its faceplate.
The equipment type name of the PSU/1HU-R-AC-200 used by the management software
this documentation.
Slot Positions
The PSU/1HU-R-AC-200 can be placed in slots PSU1 or PSU2 on the rear side of the
SH1HU-R/PF Shelf.
LED Indicator
The PSU/1HU-R-AC-200 has one two-color LED indicator labeled P on its faceplate.
The LED colors represent the operating status. For details, refer to the FSP 3000R7 Rel.
Labeling
The PSU/1HU-R-AC-200 can be identified by labels on the module. Label information
includes:
187
PSU/1HU-R-AC-200
Figure 155: Example of a PSU/1HU-R-AC-200 Module Type Label
Because the PSU/1HU-R-AC-200 is not manufactured by ADVA Optical Networking, a

Specifications
188
PSU/1HU-R-DC-200
PSU/1HU-R-DC-200
Figure 156: PSU/1HU-R-DC-200 Front View
Description
The PSU/1HU-R-DC-200 is a plug-in DC power supply unit specifically designed for a
1HU Shelf Rear Power Access. The power supply unit has a 3 pole connector (Plus,
Minus, Protective earth) on its faceplate.
The module backplane interface has a DIN 41612/IEC60603-2 C/3 male connector (3
rows with 10 pins each).
The PSU/1HU-R-DC-200 converts -36VDC to -72VDC supplied power into +12VDC
power for use by the shelfs modules. The unit automatically detects whether the input
voltage is within the specified range. The PSU/1HU-R-DC-200 supplies a total output
power of 200 W (12.2 V DC at 16.4 A).
The SH1HU-R/PF shelf requires maximum 200 W for slots 1, 2, A, B, and for fan power
supply and fan control unit.
Two redundant PSU/1HU-R-DC-200s or one PSU/1HU-R-DC-200and one PSU/1HU-RAC-200work in current sharing with hot swap capability and should connect input power
from separate sources. If one unit fails, the remaining unit is capable of powering a fully
loaded shelf (ca. 200 W) on an ongoing basis until the failed unit is replaced.
The power supply unit is field-replaceable. Two handles on the faceplate allow the user to
An integrated fan and ventilation openings guarantee sufficient cooling. The fan consists
of a replaceable air filter pad for air intake to prevent excessive dust accumulation inside
the power supply unit. This air filter pad is placed on the front panels fan air intake and
can be replaced during the system operation.
Replacement air filter pads for this PSU are included in the FAN-FILTER-SET/1HU. For
more information, see section SH1HU-R/PF, sub-section FAN-FILTER-SET/1HU on
p.173.
Never operate the PSU without having an air filter pad fitted in front of the fan air intake.
Without the filter, dirt can block the air inlets and outlets. Blocked air inlets and outlets
lead to inefficient cooling and fire risk.
189
PSU/1HU-R-DC-200
Note
Replace air filter pads at least once a year. Based on air quality, ADVA
Optical Networking strongly recommends replacing the air filter pad
every 6 months.
Features

earth)
unit
DC failure protection (turnoff)
DC Auto-Recovery (Turn on)
Output limiting current protection
Fire protection
Current sharing
Hot swappable
Forced air cooling
Replaceable fan filter
Fuses
The PSU/1HU-R-DC-200 is equipped with two double pole fuses that are fitted inside the
power supply unit. The fuses are not accessible. If a fuse has blown, the power supply
unit must be replaced by service personnel and returned to ADVA Optical Networking for
WARNING
190

PSU/1HU-R-DC-200
EMC

Connecting
Before connecting to the power source, make sure that the 1HU Shelf is earthed properly
and that no power is applied to the DC power source. If the site is located more than 2000
m above sea level or if a 60 V DC power source is to be connected, the unit must be
earthed properly. In this case a 3-core power supply cable must be used. The protective
earth terminal (PE) allows the user to connect the power supply unit to a system safety
ground lead. This avoids injury in the event of an electric shock.
Risk of burn!
WARNING
Do not connect or disconnect the power cable if voltage is applied. Doing

so may result in burns and destruction of the connectors by causing an
arc.
For details, see Appendix A: Electrical Cables and the Installation and Commissioning
Manual.

WARNING

Residual voltage may still be present inside the PSU after being
disconnected from its power source.
from the PSU before you proceed to remove the unit.
within a minimum of 30 seconds after disconnecting the PSU from its power source.

Removing a PSU from a 1HU shelf is alarmed through the management system (RMVD
alarm).
191
PSU/1HU-R-DC-200
If you remove a PSU and then reinsert it immediately, an RMVD alarm will be generated
even though the PSU has been reinserted. You are required to wait at least 30 seconds
between removal and reseating the same PSU to avoid raising an RMVD alarm after
reinsertion of the unit. This amount of time is needed to dissipate any residual charge
stored in the capacitors of the PSU. This residual charge causes raising an RMVD alarm
that cannot be cleared even after the NCU was rebooted.
Note
A quick sequence of removing and reinserting the PSU/1HU-R-DC-200

Monitoring
Input voltage, output voltage, output current, fan status and board temperature of the
PSU/1HU-R-DC-200 are continually monitored by the NCU of the SH1HU-R/PF. If a
parameter goes below or exceeds the specified limit, a corresponding event is reported to
the NCU. In doing so, one or more alarms can be triggered. Failure or removal of the
power supply can also be supervised using the LED indicator on its faceplate.
The equipment type name of the PSU/1HU-R-DC-200 used by the management
software can be found in Equipment Types of FSP 3000R7 Hardware Components on
p.1327 of this documentation.
Slot Positions
The PSU/1HU-R-DC-200 can be placed in slots PSU1 or PSU2 on the rear side of the
SH1HU-R/PF Shelf.
LED Indicator
The PSU/1HU-R-DC-200 has one two-color LED indicator labeled P on its faceplate.
The LED colors represent the operating status. For details, refer to Chapter 3 of the
Labeling
The PSU/1HU-R-DC-200 can be identified by labels on the module. Label information
includes:
192
SH1HU/PASSIVE/FT
Figure 157: Example of a PSU/1HU-R-DC-200 Module Type Label
Because the PSU/1HU-R-DC-200 is not manufactured by ADVA Optical Networking, a

Specifications
SH1HU/PASSIVE/FT
Figure 158: SH1HU/PASSIVE/FT Front View
Description
The SH1HU/PASSIVE/FT is a rack-mountable, 1 HU-high housing with an fiber
management tray at the front side. The shelf features four horizontal module slots. An
unused slot is covered by a blank panel or filled by a dummy module. The
SH1HU/PASSIVE/FT is intended to carry passive optical modules, such as filters and
splitters, as well as dispersion compensating modules.
The SH1HU/PASSIVE/FT can hold up to
193
SH1HU/PASSIVE/FT
four modules with a width of 4 HP or
two modules with a width of 4 HP and one module with a width of 8 HP or
two modules with a width of 8 HP
Fiber handling for the SH1HU/PASSIVE/FT is provided by means of the horizontal fiber
tray. It holds all the optical fibers that are routed to and from the optical connectors. That
way damage to fibers due to mechanical stress can be avoided. The fiber tray can also be
removed from the shelf, if desired.
The SH1HU/PASSIVE/FT is a standalone, non-managed shelf. The front view of the
SH1HU/PASSIVE/FT is illustrated in Figure 158.
Features
Dimensions: width x height x depth (without brackets)

446 mm x 71.5 mm x 270.5 mm; (17.6 in x 2.82 in x 10.65 in)
Designed for front panel rack mounting and rear panel rack mounting
Access to the passive optical modules from the front of the shelf
Totally passive
Adaptor Brackets
Separate adaptor bracket pairs are available for front panel installation and rear panel
installation. The relevant bracket pair must be fitted on the outside of the left-hand and
right-hand side walls for mounting the shelf. The procedures for fitting the different
adaptor brackets are described in the Installation and Commissioning Manual.
The front panel rack mounting kit contains the following items:
4 x screw M5x10 CSK TORX-T25 A2
The SH1HU/PASSIVE Shelf comes with no rackmount brackets pre-installed. The front
panel rack mounting kit is delivered with the shelf and included in the shipping box.
The rear panel rack mounting kit contains the following items:
1 x 19-inch rackmount bracket pair - rear
1 x ETSI bracket pair -rear
8 x screw M3.0x6 CSK TORX A2
The rear panel rack mounting kit is compatible with hardware revision 2.02 only. This rack
mounting kit is not delivered with the shelf. It must be ordered separately.
194
SH1HU/PASSIVE/FT
Placement
The SH1HU/PASSIVE/FT Shelf can be placed in a 19-inch, ETSI or NEBS compliant
rack under or above an SH1HU-F/2DC or SH7HU shelf by using the appropriate adaptor
brackets. It also fits into a 300 mm (0.984 ft.) deep ETSI rack. The SH1HU/PASSIVE/FT
Shelf occupies 2 HU of space in a rack. The installation of the SH1HU/PASSIVE/FT in a
rack is described in the Installation and Commissioning Manual.
Labeling
Each SH1HU/PASSIVE/FT Shelf has several labels on the top of the shelf as shown in
Figure 158. They provide important information about the shelf itself and the operating
safety. All labels are described below.
Shelf Type Label

Each SH1HU/PASSIVE/FT can be identified by the Shelf Type Label located on the top
of the shelf. It contains the following information:
Figure 159: Example of an SH1HU/PASSIVE/FT Shelf Type Label

The following is an example of the SH1HU/PASSIVE/FT ESD and laser safety label.
Figure 160: SH1HU/PASSIVE/FT ESD and Laser Safety Label
195
SH1HU/PASSIVE
Note
Specifications
SH1HU/PASSIVE
Figure 161: SH1HU/PASSIVE Front View
Description
The SH1HU/PASSIVE (1HU passive shelf) is a rack-mountable, 1 HU-high housing. It is
intended to carry passive optical modules, such as filters and splitters, as well as
dispersion compensating modules.
The 1HU passive shelf can hold up to
four modules with a width of 4 HP or
two modules with a width of 4 HP and one module with a width of 8 HP or
two modules with a width of 8 HP
The SH1HU/PASSIVE is a standalone, non-managed shelf. The front view of the

SH1HU/PASSIVE is illustrated in Figure 161.
Features

448 mm (without brackets) x 44 mm x 210 mm;
196
SH1HU/PASSIVE
(17.64 in x 1.73 in x 8.27 in)
Access to the passive optical modules from the front of the shelf
Adaptor Brackets
The SH1HU/PASSIVE/FT comes with no rackmount brackets pre-installed. The 19-inch

rackmount, NEBS and ETSI bracket pair is included in the shipping box. The relevant
bracket pair must be fitted on the outside of the left-hand and right-hand side walls for
mounting the shelf. The procedures for removing and fitting the different adaptor brackets
are described in the Installation and Commissioning Manual.
Placement
The SH1HU/PASSIVE Shelf can be placed in a 19-inch, ETSI or NEBS compliant rack
under or above an SH1HU-F/2DC or SH7HU shelf by using the appropriate adaptor
brackets. It also fits into a 300 mm (0.984 ft.) deep ETSI rack. The SH1HU/PASSIVE
Shelf occupies 1 HU of space in a rack. The installation of the SH1HU/PASSIVE Shelf in
a rack is described in the Installation and Commissioning Manual.
Labeling
Each SH1HU/PASSIVE Shelf has several labels on the top of the shelf as shown in
Figure 161. They provide important information about the shelf itself and the operating
safety. All labels are described below.
Shelf Type Label

Each SH1HU/PASSIVE can be identified by the Shelf Type Label located on the top of
the shelf. It contains the following information:
197
SH1HU/PASSIVE
Figure 162: Example of an SH1HU/PASSIVE Shelf Type Label

The following is an example of the SH1HU/PASSIVE ESD and laser safety label.
Figure 163: SH1HU/PASSIVE ESD and Laser Safety Label
Note
Specifications
198
Figure 164: SH1HU/FIBERMANAGEMENT Front View
Description
The SH1HU/FIBERMANAGEMENT is a rack-mountable, 1HU-high fiber management
shelf. It includes a fiber optic tray to efficiently manage the optical fibers used within an
FSP 3000R7 system deployment. The fiber management shelf is used to orderly
maintain the fiber storage of an SH1HU or SH7HU shelf. Slide latches allow access to
the fiber optic tray.
On the left and right side of the shelf sliding radius limiters provide cable management for
incoming and outgoing fibers. The trumpet flare slides backward when the tray is pulled
out and forward when the tray is closed.
The front view of the SH1HU/FIBERMANAGEMENT Shelf is illustrated in Figure 164.
The fiber optic tray is equipped with storage radius limiters and rear radius limiters to
protect the fiber cables from bend-induced losses. When the fiber optic tray is completely
open, the lock open latch is locked in place and has to be unlocked to close the tray.
The fiber optic tray is illustrated in Figure 165.
199
Figure 165: Fiber Optic Tray of the SH1HU/FIBERMANAGEMENT Shelf
The number and length of the cables that can be stored in the
SH1HU/FIBERMANAGEMENT depends on the cable dimension, refer to Table 6.
Table 6: Capacity of an SH1HU/FIBERMANAGEMENT
Cable Dimension
Max. Cable Number and Length
3 mm (0.118 in) cable
32 cables, 1.7 m (66.929 in) each
2 mm (0.079 in) cable
48 cables, 3.4 m (133.858 in) each
1.7 mm (0.067 in) cable
60 cables, 3.9 m (153.543 in) each
ADVA Optical Networking provides standard optical fibers with a cable dimension of
2mm(0.079 in) each. With this dimension 48 cables with a length of 3.4m (133.858 in)
each can be stored in the SH1HU/FIBERMANAGEMENT.
Features

438 mm (without brackets) x 43.4 mm x 279 mm;
(17.24 in x 1.709 in x 11.01 in)
Robust, low-profile housing made from black alloyed steel sheet
Surface condition: coated
Access to the fiber optic tray from the front of the shelf
Adaptor Brackets

The ETSI brackets can also be mounted as 19-inch brackets.
200
The NEBS brackets can also be mounted as 19-inch brackets.
The SH1HU/FIBERMANAGEMENT comes pre-installed with ETSI brackets. The
NEBS bracket pair is included in the shipping box.
Placement
The SH1HU/FIBERMANAGEMENT can be placed in a 19-inch, ETSI or NEBS
compliant rack under or above an SH1HU-F/2DC or SH7HU shelf by using the
appropriate adaptor brackets. It also fits into a 300 mm (0.984 ft.) deep ETSI rack. The
fiber storage shelf occupies 1 HU of space in a rack.
The installation of the SH1HU/FIBERMANAGEMENT in a rack is described in the
Installation and Commissioning Manual.
Labeling
Each SH1HU/FIBERMANAGEMENT can be identified by the Shelf Type Label located
on the top of the shelf.
It contains the following information:
Figure 166: Example of a SH1HU/FIBERMANAGEMENT Shelf Type Label
Because the shelf is not manufactured by ADVA Optical Networking, manufacture labels
can be found in the fiber optic tray. See Figure 165.
Specifications
201
FMT/1HU
FMT/1HU
Figure 167: FMT/1HU Front View
Description
The FMT/1HU is a rack-mountable, 1HU-high fiber management shelf. It includes a fiber
optic tray to efficiently manage the optical fibers used within an FSP 3000R7 system
deployment. The fiber management shelf is used to orderly maintain the fiber storage of
an SH1HU, SH7HU or SH9HU shelf. Two screws on the front side of the shelf allow
access to the fiber optic tray.
On the left and right side of the shelf, sliding radius limiters provide cable management for
incoming and outgoing fibers. The trumpet flare slides backward when the tray is pulled
out and forward when the tray is closed.
The front view of the FMT/1HU shelf is illustrated in Figure 167.
The fiber optic tray is equipped with storage radius limiters and rear radius limiters to
protect the fiber cables from bend-induced losses.
The fiber optic tray is illustrated in Figure 168.
202
FMT/1HU
Figure 168: Fiber Optic Tray of the FMT/1HU Shelf
The number of the cables that can be stored in the FMT/1HU depends on the cable
dimensions and lengths. Refer to table below for recommended capacity values.
Note
The maximum cable number listed in the table below is only a

recommended value. This value can differ when the stored cables have
different dimensions and cable lengths.
Table 7: Recommended Values for the Capacity of the FMT/1HU

Dimension
Stored Fiber Length

(Min. to Max.)
Max. Cable
Number *
3 mm (0.118 in)
45 cm (17.717 in) to 145 cm (57.086 in)
26 cables
146 cm (57.48 in) to 240 cm (94.488 in)
15 cables
241 cm (94.882 in) to 340 cm (133.858 in)
11 cables
45 cm (17.717 in) to 145 cm (57.086 in)
60 cables
146 cm (57.48 in) to 240 cm (94.488 in)
35 cables
241 cm (94.882 in) to 340 cm (133.858 in)
25 cables
45 cm (17.717 in) to 145 cm (57.086 in)
83 cables
146 cm (57.48 in) to 240 cm (94.488 in)
48 cables
241 cm (94.882 in) to 340 cm (133.858 in)
35 cables
2 mm (0.079 in)
1.7 mm (0.069 in)
* The maximum cable number applies to each side (incoming and outgoing) of
the FMT/1HU shelf.
203
FMT/1HU
The stored fiber length applies to the internal cable length stored in the
FMT/1HU Shelf and not to the overall length of each cable.
Note
Considering all cable dimensions, a minimum length of 45 cm (17.717 in.) of fiber can be
stored in the FMT/1HU when it is laid directly from one sliding radius limiter to the other.
ADVA Optical Networking provides standard optical fibers with a cable dimension of
2mm(0.079 in.) each. A maximum of 60 incoming and outgoing fibers with a dimension
of 2 mm (0.079 in.) each is limited by entry openings (left and right sliding radius limiter).
Note
A maximum of 60 fibers with a dimension of 2 mm (0.079 in.) each can

only be stored in the shelf when the cables are guided carefully in parallel
without crossing.
Features

443 mm (without brackets) x 43.4 mm x 273 mm;
(17.441 in x 1.709 in x 10.748 in)
Surface condition: coated
Access to the fiber optic tray from the front of the shelf
Adaptor Brackets
The FMT/1HU shelf comes with 19-inch rackmount brackets pre-installed. The ETSI and
NEBS bracket pairs are included in the shipping box. The adaptor brackets must be fitted
on the outside of the left-hand and right-hand side walls for mounting the shelf. The
procedures for removing and fitting the adaptor brackets are described in the Installation
and Commissioning Manual.
Placement
The FMT/1HU can be placed in a 19-inch, ETSI or NEBS compliant rack under or above
an SH1HU-F/2DC, SH7HU or SH9HU shelf by using the appropriate adaptor brackets. It
also fits into a 300 mm (0.984 ft.) deep ETSI rack. The fiber storage shelf occupies 1 HU
of space in a rack.
The installation of the FMT/1HU in a rack is described in the Installation and
204
FMT/1HU
Labeling
Each FMT/1HU can be identified by the Shelf Type Label located on the top of the shelf.
It contains the following information:

Figure 169: Example of a FMT/1HU Shelf Type Label
Specifications
205
OTDR
OTDR
Figure 170: OTDR Front View
Figure 171: OTDR Rear View
Description
The OTDR is a stand-alone, rack-mountable optical time domain reflectometer designed
to enable the user to perform inspection, verification, troubleshooting, and documentation
of fiber cabling.
206
OTDR
The OTDR combines a test head controller (OTDR/THC/2HU/AC) unit and optical test
head (OTDR/8-OTH/1HU/AC) unit. Both units form a unified 3HU high whole with
integrated AC power supplies.
Installed in a network element, the OTDR directly controls the measurements on fibers
connected to the optical ports. The OTDR supports sequential monitoring of up to eight
bi-directional switchable OTDR ports. It has an integrated Web application for managing
fiber monitoring and can store the data on a RAID protected hard disk.
The OTDR/THC/2HU/AC and OTDR/8-OTH/1HU/AC are interconnected using a SCSI
bus cable on the rear panels of the units. One OTDR/THC/2HU/AC can control one or
more OTDR/8-OTH/1HU/ACs simultaneously, with each optical test head unit
containing one OTDR laser module. The SCSI OUT port on the rear panel of the OTDR/8OTH/1HU/AC unit is used for connecting to an optional second OTDR/8-OTH/1HU/AC
unit.
The OTDR/THC/2HU/AC unit has an Ethernet port for local access on the front panel to
connect a portable computer and an additional Ethernet port (LAN) on the rear panel to
connect the NCU-II or NCU1 or OSCM.
The short Ethernet cable on the reverse side of the OTDR/THC/2HU/AC unit must not be
disconnect from the port next to the LAN port (Figure 171). Otherwise, the local access
port will no longer function.
THC on/off switch is used to run up/shut down the OTDR/THC/2HU/AC unit.
There are two dry contact relays on the rear panel of the OTDR/THC/2HU/AC. Relay #1
is activated when the OTDR is in good working order. Relay #2 is not in use. The relay
output may be used to control an alarm device that has to be connected to the
corresponding screw terminals on the rear panel of the OTDR/8-OTH/1HU/AC. The
alarm device warns the user whenever a fault is detected.
The OTDR must not be deployed in RAMAN-C10 and 2Raman-C15-LL

configurations.
Note
Features
Screen level integration of the OTDR Web application into the Network Element
Director (NED), launched by clicking the OTDR shelf in the NED.
All OTDR measurements are started/stored via the OTDR integrated Web
application
Support of CWDM and DWDM installations by using the 1650nm OTDR wavelength
option
Near field resolution of ~1m, far field resolution ~100m
Additional OTFM optical filter cards with upgrade port to support OTDR upgrade
without traffic interruption.
The OTDR will automatically detect ports to which fiber of at least 50 meters are
connected. Shorter fibers can only be measured manually.
1An NCU with a CF of 512 MB requires a separate procedure for an OTDR software
upgrade. Contact Technical Services for details.
207
OTDR
Power Supply
Power is available from AC integrated power supplies. Each unit is powered
independently. The power supplies operate over the voltage range from 100 V AC to 240
V AC at 50 - 60 Hz. For power feeding, both units have an AC appliance coupler
according to IEC/EN 60320 (power inlet) on their rear panel as shown in Figure 171. Each
input feed has its own power switch which are accessible from the rear. The AC power
cords are connected directly to the power source (for example, a power bar or power
receptacle).The OTDR/8-OTH/1HU/AC contains two fuses (T2.5A L). The fuse holder is
located at the back of the unit, just below the power inlet.
Earthing
The OTDR is intended to be earthed. For this purpose there are earth screws on the rear
side of both the THC and OTH units. See Figure 171.
Cooling
Two fans mounted on the front panel of the OTDR/THC/2HU/AC and one CPU fan
situated inside the unit dissipate the heat produced. Three air filters are located directly
behind the air intakes in the front panel. Warm air is exhausted through the air outlet in the
rear panel of the unit. Fans and air filters are field replacable.
Placement
The OTDR can be placed in a 19-inch, ETSI or NEBS compliant rack by using the
appropriate adaptor brackets. The OTDR occupies 3HU of space in a rack. The OTDR
apparatus should be installed directly beneath or above the master shelf.

The LED indicators located on the front panel of the OTH provide a quick visual indication
of the operation status of the OTH, THC and OTDR laser. For more information, refer to
the OTDR Installation, Provisioning, and Operations Manual.
Labeling
The OTDR/8-OTH/1HU/AC and the OTDR/THC/2HU/AC have several labels on the top
of the units, as shown in Figure 172 and Figure 172. They provide important information
about the shelf itself and the operating safety. All labels are described below.
208
OTDR
Figure 172: Labeling the OTDR/8-OTH/1HU/AC
Figure 173: Labeling the OTDR/THC/2HU/AC
Shelf Type Label

The OTDR/8-OTH/1HU/AC and OTDR/THC/2HU/AC can be identified by the shelf type
label. It contains the following information:
209
OTDR

the shelf name
important electrical operating data
instructions on the safe handling of the power cables
Warranty Label
Networking will disclaim the implied warranty of merchantability.
See the OTDR Installation, Provisioning, and Operations Manual for information about
further labeling.
Specifications
210
Chapter 9
This chapter contains the descriptions of all core type channel modules available at the
publication date of this Hardware Description.
Each description includes the front view of the module, the explanation of the ports, the
simplified block diagram and module specific details. The module key features are
presented, the signal path within the module is briefly discussed, and examples of
module labeling are given.
The descriptions are merely supposed to convey a basic understanding of the core type
channel modules to the reader. For detailed information about these modules and
underlying technologies, contact ADVA Optical Networking.
Before each module type is described in a separate section, general information about the
core type channel modules are provided such as module identification, naming
conventions, module design, and operation status.
For all matters relating to module management, installation, troubleshooting and safety,
refer to the Provisioning and Operations Manual, Installation and Commissioning Manual,
Maintenance and Troubleshooting Manual and Safety Guide.
This chapter includes the following module descriptions:
WCC-TN-40G-L#DC on p.219
4TCC-PCTN-10G+40G-L#DC on p.224
WCC-PCTN-100GA on p.236
WCC-PCTN-100GB on p.241
10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GB on p.255
WCC-PCTN-10G on p.264
4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G on p.269
10TCC-PCTN-4GU+10G on p.275
10TCC-PCTN-4GUS+10G on p.281
10TCC-PCN-2G7US+10G on p.288
10TCC-PCN-3GSDI+10G on p.295
10WXC-PCN-10G on p.304
2WCC-PCN-10G on p.310
2TWCC-PCN-2G7U on p.315
WCC-PC1N-2G7U on p.324
4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5 on p.328
211
General Information
General Information
Core type channel modules convert optical signals from customer equipment to WDM
channels for transport across metro-core networks. WDM channel modules core type
named WCCs and x-port TDM channel modules core type named xTCCs are available in
CWDM and DWDM variants. On the client side, WCCs and xTCCs interface to
customer premises equipment (CPE) directly or indirectly via protection modules. On the
network side, they connect to the FSP 3000R7 optical filter modules which perform
WDM in several stages. CWDM and DWDM channel modules work only in conjunction
with the appropriate optical filter modules.
WCCs and xTCCs support a set of SDH/Sonet and OTH features, such as digital
performance monitoring, G.709 standard conform mapping/ framing, Forward Error
Corrections (FEC), error forwarding and in-band DCN management. Depending on their
network interfaces, the core type channel modules are capable of transmitting services
over link distances in the 70km to 360 km range without using 3R devices or dispersion
compensating fiber (DCF).
Identification
Core type channel modules are identified by faceplate codes and the label printed on the
board cover. Identification information is provided in each module description.
Naming Conventions
The module name is made up of a set of parts assembled according to a very specific rule
as exemplified below. The parts of the name represent the modules specific features.
Example:
4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#D10
Integrated network interface type:
DWDM
transmission distance - very long reach
DWDM channel no. 10
Network port data rate : 10 Gbit/s
Max. Client port data rate : 2. 7Gbit/s
Pluggable interface(s):
pluggable client interfaces
Channel module type: Core type TDM channel module

Number of client ports: 4
This example describes a core type 4-port TDM channel module with four pluggable client
interfaces supporting a maximum client data rate of 2.7Gbit/s. The aggregated data rate
on the network port runs at 10Gbit/s. The module features an integrated very-long reach
DWDM interface for channel no. 10.
The following table lists the naming conventions used by the FSP 3000R7.
212
General Information
Table 8: Core Type Channel Module Naming Convention
Parts of the
Name
Code
Meaning
Number of client
ports (WDM and
TDM channel
modules
x = 2: 2-port WDM or TDM channel module

x = 4: 4-port TDM channel module
WCC
Core type WDM channel module
TCC
Core type TDM channel module
PC
Pluggable client interface(s)
PCN
Pluggable client interface(s) and network interface

(s)
PC1N
Pluggable client interface(s) and one pluggable

network interface
Pluggable and
tunable
interface(s)
(if applicable)
PCTN
Pluggable client interface(s) and tunable network

interface(s)
Maximum client
port data rates
100G
103 Gbit/s, 112 Gbit/s
10G
Depending on the module type:

9.9532 Gbit/s, 10.3125 Gbit/s, 10.51875 Gbit/s,
11.3176 Gbit/s
40G
39.81312 Gbit/s; 43.01841 Gbit/s
4GU
Universal data rates between 1.0625 Gbit/s and

4.250Gbit/s
4GUS
data rates of 155.52 Mbit/s, 622.08 Mbit/s and

1250 Mbit/s
2G7U
Universal data rates between 100 Mbit/s and

2.666057Gbit/s
2G7
2.48832 Gbit/s and 2.666057 Gbit/s
2G5
2.48832 Gbit/s
2G1U
1.0625 Gbit/s, 1.250 Gbit/s and 2.125 Gbit/s
Pluggable
interface(s)
(if applicable)
TN
213
General Information
Table 8: Core Type Channel Module Naming Convention
Parts of the
Name
Code
Meaning
Network port
data rates
100G
120.579 Gbit/s
10G

11.3176 Gbit/s
40G
2G7U
Universal data rates between 100 and 2700 Mbit/s
2G5
2.48832 Gbit/s
Integrated network interface type (if applicable):

Transmission
distances
WDM channels
WDM channels
regional reach link distances (240 km 360 km)
ultra-long reach link distances (120 km 240 km)
very-long reach link distances (70 km 120 km)
long reach link distances (30 km - 70 km)
LN
noise optimized, long reach link distances

(30 km - 70 km)
#Cxxxx
CWDM channel 1470, 1490, 1510, 1530, 1550,

1570 1590, 1610 according to FSP CWDM
wavelength table
#DC
DWDM C-band channels according to FSP

DWDM wavelength table
#DCx
DWDM C-band intermediate channel (x stands for

1 - 9, corresponding channels 65-72 and channel
81) according to FSP DWDM wavelength table
#DL
DWDM L-band channels according to FSP

#DLx
DWDM L-band intermediate channel (x stands for

1 - 9, corresponding channels 73-80 and channel
82) according to FSP DWDM wavelength table
#Dxx
DWDM channel (xx stands for channels 01 - 64)

according to FSP DWDM wavelength table
Module Design
Core type channel modules are designed as single-slot or two-slot plug-in modules that
are compatible with any 9HU shelf (SH9HU), 7HU shelf (SH7HU) or 1HU Shelf
(SH1HU).
214
General Information
The SFP/XFP design allows in-service configuration on an as-needed basis without
affecting other active ports. The receptacle connectors of the integrated interfaces and
the cages for the pluggable transceivers are angled at 45 to preserve minimum fiber bend
radii when connecting the fiber-optic jumpers.
Each core type channel module has either special EMC contact strips or an EMC textile
gasket on the narrow sides of the faceplate, which create a tight seal with neighboring
modules. The EMC contact strips and the EMC textile gaskets respectively avoid
unintended propagation of electromagnetic energy towards the external environment that
might disrupt other equipment.
The modules fully conform to the requirements of TELCORDIA SR-3580 (NEBS) level 3
and ETSI EN 300 019-1-3 Class 3.1 standards as well as all relevant SDH ITU-T and
SONET ANSI/Telcordia standards.
WCCs and xTCCs are hot swappable and customer installable. This enables a scalable,
in-service expansion at any time.
Module Handling
Normal handling precautions for electrostatic sensitive devices should be taken.

Using the network control unit (NCU), all core type channel modules are SNMP
manageable and fully supported through the Network Management System (NMS).
Management allows user access to module conditions as well as network status. The
status of receivers and transmitters can either be read off the faceplate LED indicators or
observed with SNMP-based network management tools. Commands for controlling and
status query are transmitted via the internal system bus between the channel modules
and the NCU.
The the equipment type names of the core type channel modules used by the
management software can be found in Equipment Types of FSP 3000R7 Hardware
Components on p.1327 of this documentation.
Faceplate Markings
All FSP 3000R7 core type channel modules have the same faceplate markings. LED
indicator and optical port markings of the individual modules are explained in the
appropriate module descriptions.
LED Indicators
All core type channel modules have tri-color LED indicators that are visible through the
faceplates. Their colors display different operating status. The status that each color of
the LED indicators represents is described in the Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Manual.
215
General Information
Labeling
Each core type channel module has printed several labels on the frontplate and the board
cover. These labels provide module specific information as shown in Figure 174, Figure
176, Figure 177, Figure 178, Figure 179 and Figure 180.
Frontplate Labels
For a quick identification all core type channel modules have two printed labels affixed on
its frontplate. These labels include the module name, item number, HW revision, serial
number and USI code. Figure 174 shows examples of 4TCC-PCTN-10G+40G-L#DC
frontplate labels affixed on the frontplates of the modules released prior to the Rel.12.3.
Starting from Rel. 12.3 the design of the frontplate labels changed. on p.216 shows the
frontplate labels of the 10TCC-PCN-3GSDI+10G as an example for all core channel
modules released starting from Rel. 12.3.
Figure 174: Example of 4TCC-PCTN-10G+40G-L#DC Frontplate Labels
Figure 175: Example of 10TCC-PCN-3GSDI+10G Frontplate Labels
Module Type Label

This label contains relevant information about the module, such as
216
the manufacturer
the module type
the hardware revision
the USI number and its bar code
the serial number and its bar code
the figo number and its bar code
the item number and its bar code
faceplate markings and descriptions of the ports
technical specifications (wavelength ranges, supported channels, etc.)
General Information
WEEE Crossed-out rubbish bin logo
Values will be different for other modules using these labels. The correct values can be
found in the module specifications.
The module type label of a channel module with pluggable interfaces on the client side
and the network side does not include port descriptions because the interface
specifications depends on the pluggable transceivers used. Instead, the module type
label contains the approved certification marks of the channel module
Examples of module type labels are shown in the following figures.
Figure 176: Example of a WCC-TN-40G-L#DC Module Type Label
Figure 177: Example of a 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#DC Module Type Label
217
General Information
Figure 178: Example of a 10TCC-PCN-3GSDI+10G Module Type Label
Certification Label
This label provides approved certification marks. An example of a core type channel
module certification label is shown in Figure 179.
Figure 179: Example of a Core Type Channel Module Certification Label
Depending on the channel module type the certification label may slightly differ.
Warranty Label
Networking will disclaim the implied warranty of merchantability. An example of a core
type channel module warranty label is shown in Figure 180.
218
WCC-TN-40G-L#DC
Figure 180: Example of a Core Type Channel Module Warranty Label
WCC-TN-40G-L#DC
Figure 181: WCC-TN-40G-L#DC Front View
Variants:
none
219
WCC-TN-40G-L#DC
Faceplate Markings
The table below lists all abbreviations on the WCC-TN-40G-L#DC faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 9: WCC-TN-40G-L#DC Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
modules power supply status
transmit
Mod
modules operating state
receive
operating state of the client port
client port
operating state of the network port
network port
Description
The WCC-TN-40G-L#DC is a core type 40G WDM channel module specifically designed
for the use in DWDM transport systems for Regional and Core distances in dispersion
managed links. It features an integrated 40-Gbit/s 1550-nm interface on the client side
and an integrated 40-Gbit/s DWDM interface on the network side. The transmitter of the
network interface uses an advanced modulation format (Adaptive Differential Phase Shift
Keying) to ensure a high performance for clear upgrades of existing 10G Metro and Core
networks even with multiple ROADM nodes. A tunable optical dispersion compensator
(TODC) is part of the integrated receiver chain to provide a clear upgrade and mix of
10G/40G data rates. This TODC sub-module delivers the capability to compensate the
residual dispersion load of the network within specified boundaries.
The network port provides a transmitter that is fully tunable in the C-band at a wavelength
grid of 100 GHz or 50 GHz due to the spectral behavior of the TODC. Each channel can
be tuned in the system management by using the NE management tools.
The module converts one optical client signal into one 43.0 Gbit/s network signal with a
specific wavelength in the ITU-T grid and vice versa.
The WCC-TN-40G-L#DC is intended for transport of SDH STM-256, SONET OC-768,
and OTU3 services over a specific ITU-T compliant wavelength. For all applications
standard FEC according to ITU-T G. 709 and enhanced FEC are supported on network
port only.
The client interface optionally provides SDH-ALS according to ITU-T G.664 for STM-256
or OC-768 services. The network interface does not support an ALS scheme.
The module can also be used as a bi-directional regenerator in back-to-back configuration
using OTU3 on network as well as client interface. Back-to-back placement with STM256/ OC-768 client signals must not be used in protected environments. In protected
environments the provisioned client service of back-to-back connected modules has to
be OTU3.
Interworking with gain-controlled EDFAs and Raman fiber amplifiers operating in the Cband is supported.
Features
220
Bit-synchronized mapping of STM-256/OC-768 into OPU3 according to ITU-T G.709
WCC-TN-40G-L#DC
Transport of OTU3 client signals via OTU (OTU OH is not terminated on client side)
Clock and data recovery with 3R signal condition
Channel card protection
Laser safety according to EN 60825-1 and EN 60825-2 (1M certified)
In-band DCN management via OTU3 on the network interface
Comprehensive fault and performance monitoring on the client and network interface
Dispersion compensating capabilities:

o
Manual configuration of internal chromatic dispersion compensation setting of

the receiver
Automatic search for optimized configuration of internal chromatic dispersion
compensation setting of the receiver
Continuous optimization of chromatic dispersion compensation setting of
receiver supported
Terminal loopback for the client port and network port
Size: 5HU high, 16 HP wide
integrated 40-Gbit/s, 1550-nm interface, specified according to

VSR 2000-3R2 (ITU-T G.694)
Wavelength spectrum: integrated 1550 nm interface, specification acc. to VSR 20003R2 (ITU-T G.694)
Fiber type: single-mode, multimode 9 m
LC receptacle connectors
The supported data rates and services are listed in the Module and
System Specification of Discontinued Modules.
Note
Integrated, 40-Gbit/s, long reach link distance, tunable DWDM interface
Fiber type: single-mode 9 m
Note
221
WCC-TN-40G-L#DC
Signal Path
The following figure shows the functional block diagram (very simplified) and illustrates
the signal path, which is described below.
Figure 182: WCC-TN-40G-L#DC Functional Block Diagram (Simplified)
Transmit Direction
In the transmit direction, the following takes place:
The client port receiver (Rx) receives the optical signal STM-256/OC-768 or OTU3
through the C-R connector from the CPE. This signal is converted to the electrical
domain and clock and data recovery is performed. The regenerated STM-256/OC-768
client signals are bit synchronously mapped into OPU3 payloads and wrapped by OTU.
Overhead processing as well as ingress and egress client data performance monitoring
are carried out. Standard FEC or enhanced FEC on the network port are accomplished.
The resulting OTU3 network signal is routed to the optical transmitter of the tunable
network port. The transmitter (Tx) converts the electrical output signal back to an optical
signal at a specific DWDM wavelength and transmits it through the N-T connector onto
the link.
An OTU3 client signal is not handled but passed through transparently.
Receive Direction
In the receive direction, the following takes place:
The network port receiver (Rx) receives an OTU3 signal at a specific DWDM wavelength
through the N-R connector from the link. This signal is converted to the electrical domain,
and data and clock recovery is performed. Overhead processing and network data
performance monitoring are accomplished. EFEC/FEC functions are carried out. The
OTU3 signal is then either de-mapped from the G.709 compliant frame into STM-256 or
OC-768 signal, or kept as a OTU3 client signal. The resulting client signal is again routed
to the client port transmitter (Tx). The transmitter converts the electrical signal back to an
optical one and transmits it through the client port connector C-T to the CPE.
222
WCC-TN-40G-L#DC
Loopbacks
For testing, service and fault diagnostics purposes, the module supports the network
interface terminal loopback and the client interface terminal loopback. The optical signal
flow is represented in the block diagram by red and blue traces, red for the network
interface terminal loopback and blue for the client interface terminal loopback as shown in
the figure below. The internal Loopbacks can be activated by using the NE management
tools.
Figure 183: Terminal loopbacks for the WCC-TN-40G-L#DC (Simplified)
Network Interface Terminal Loopback

The network interface terminal loopback can be initiated to test the communications link
between the network element (NE) and Customer Premises Equipment (CPE). When the
network interface terminal loopback is configured, the laser of the network port is
switched off. The client signal from the CPE is received by the client port receiver (Rx),
passed through the module, returned (looped back) on the network port to the client port
transmitter output (Tx) and then directly sent back to the CPE.
Client Interface Terminal Loopback

The client interface terminal loopback can be initiated to test the communications link
between the near-end module and the far-end module. When the client interface terminal
loopback is configured, the laser of the client port is switched off. The network port
receiver (Rx) receives the line signal from the fare-end site after passing through all or a
portion of the network. The incoming signal is then looped back to the network transmitter
(Tx) and directly sent back to the far-end module.
Specifications
For slot positions and technical details, refer to the Module and System Specification of
Discontinued Modules.
223
Figure 184: 4TCC-PCTN-10G+40G-L#DC Front View
Variants: None
224
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 4TCC-PCTN-10G+40G-L#DC faceplate
and their meanings.
Table 10: 4TCC-PCTN-10G+40G-L#DC Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
transmit
Mod
receive
C1
operating state of client port C1
C1
client port C1
C2
C2
client port C2
C3
C3
client port C3
C4
C4
client port C4
network port
Description
The 4TCC-PCTN-10G+40G-L#DC is a core type 40G WDM channel module specifically
designed for the use in DWDM transport systems for Regional and Core distances in
dispersion managed links. The transmitter of the network interface uses an advanced
modulation format called Adaptive Differential Phase Shift Keying (ADPSK) to ensure a
high performance for clear upgrades of existing 10G metro and core networks even with
multiple ROADM nodes. A Tunable Optical Dispersion Compensator (TODC) is part of
the integrated receiver chain to provide a clear upgrade and mix of 10G/40G data rates.
This TODC sub-module delivers the capability to compensate the residual dispersion
load of the network within specified boundaries.
The network port features an integrated, 40G, long reach, 50 GHz-spaced, tunable
DWDM interface. The transmitter is fully tunable to any of 81 C-band channels. Each
channel can be tuned in the system management by using the NE management tools.
Unlike the WCC-TN-40G-L#DC, the 4TCC-PCTN-10G+40G-L#DC has four pluggable
10G XFP ports on the client side that can convert four 10G optical client signals into one
40 Gbit/s network signal. The module performs electrical multiplexing and demultiplexing
of up to four client interface signals into one ITU-T compliant wavelength.
The 4TCC-PCTN-10G+40G-L#DC is intended for transport of OTU3 services over a
specific ITU-T compliant wavelength. For all applications standard FEC according to
ITU-T G.709 and enhanced FEC are supported on network port only.
The client interface optionally provides SDH-ALS according to ITU-T G.664 for STM-64
or OC-192 services. The network interface does not support an ALS scheme.
Interworking with gain-controlled EDFAs and Raman fiber amplifiers operating in the Cband is supported.
225
Features
Mapping of 10GBE LAN, STM-64, or OC-192 into OPU3 according to ITU-T G.709.
Laser safety according to EN 60825-1 and EN 60825-2 (1M certified)
Comprehensive fault and performance monitoring on the client and network interface
Dispersion compensating capabilities:

o
Manual configuration of internal chromatic dispersion compensation setting of

the receiver
Automatic search for optimized configuration of internal chromatic dispersion
compensation setting of the receiver
Continuous optimization of chromatic dispersion compensation setting of
receiver supported
Facility loopbacks and Terminal loopbacks on the client interfaces. Terminal

loopback only on the network interface.
Size: 5 HU high, 16 HP wide
Four independent, Extended Form-factor Pluggable (XFP) MSA compliant interfaces

using LC connectors for fiber termination
Use of XFP transceivers supporting gray wavelengths and CWDM channels

according to ITU-T 694
The supported XFP transceivers, data rates and services are listed in the
Module and System Specification of Discontinued Modules.
Note
Integrated, 40 Gigabit, long reach link distance, tunable DWDM interface
Note
Interface specification depends on the XFP transceiver used. For details about the
individual XFP transceiver types, refer to the Pluggable Transceiver Module
Specification.
226
Unused transceiver cages can remain empty. An unconnected interface or the
absence of an XFP transceiver does not affect operation of other terminated
services.
Note
XFP cages should only be populated with XFP transceivers that are
specifically intended for the channel module. These must be approved
by ADVA Optical Networking. If you use non-approved XFPs in
conjunction with the channel module, ADVA Optical Networking cannot
guarantee the behavior of the module. When a client interface is not
used, the corresponding XFP cage does not need to be populated with
an XFP transceiver, but should be covered with a dust protective plug.
Signal Path
Figure 185 shows the functional block diagram (very simplified) and illustrates the signal
path, which is described below.
Figure 185: 4TCC-PCTN-10G+40G-L#DC Functional Block Diagram
Transmit Direction
Each of the four client ports receive a 10G STM-64/OC-192 or 10 GbE LAN data stream
into the C-R connector from the Customer Premises Equipment (CPE). The signals from
each client port are converted from optical to the electrical domain and clock and data
recovery is performed. The four regenerated 10G client signals are mapped into ODU2
payloads then multiplexed into an OTU3. Overhead processing as well as ingress and
227
egress client data performance monitoring are carried out. Standard FEC or enhanced
FEC on the network port are accomplished. The resulting OTU3 network signal is routed
to the optical transmitter of the tunable network port. The transmitter (Tx) converts the
electrical output signal back to an optical signal at a specific DWDM wavelength and
transmits it through the N-T connector onto the link.
Receive Direction
The network port receiver (Rx) receives an OTU3 signal at a specific DWDM wavelength
through the N-R connector from the link. The optical signal is pre-amplified through the
Optical Amplifier (OA), dispersion compensated through the Tunable Optical Dispersion
Compensator (TODC) and converted from optical to the electrical domain, and data and
clock recovery is performed. EFEC/FEC functions are carried out. The OTU3 signal is
demultiplexed from the G.709 compliant frame into four 10G STM-64/OC-192 or 10 GbE
LAN client signals. Overhead processing and network data performance monitoring are
accomplished. The resulting 10G client signals are routed to the four client port
transmitters. The transmitters convert the electrical signals back to optical signals and
transmit them through each of the client port connectors C-T to the CPE.
Loopbacks
For testing, service and fault diagnostics purposes, the module supports loopbacks. The
client port supports both facility loopbacks and terminal loopbacks. The network port
supports terminal loopbacks only.The optical signal flow for these loopback modes are
represented in the block diagram shown in Figure 186 on p.228. The internal loopbacks
can be activated by using the NE management tools.
Figure 186: Loopbacks for the 4TCC-PCTN-10G+40G-L#DC
228
Network Terminal Loop

The network terminal loopback can be initiated to test the communications link between
the network element (NE) and Customer Premises Equipment (CPE). In this case, all of
the multiplexed data for all client ports is looped back.
The client signal from the CPE is received by the client port receiver (Rx), passed
through the module, returned (looped back) on the network port to the client port
transmitter output (Tx) and then directly sent back to the CPE.

The client facility loopback is initiated to test the link between the CPE and the near-end
module. The client signal from the CPE is received at the client port input, looped back to
the client port output and sent directly back to the CPE.
Client Terminal Loop

The client terminal loopback is initiated to test links between the near-end module and the
far-end module. The network port optical receiver (Rx) receives the line signal from the
far-end site after passing through all or a portion of the network. At the same time, the
incoming signal is looped back to the network optical transmitter (Tx) and directly sent
back to the far-end module.
Specifications
229
WCC-PCN-100G
WCC-PCN-100G
Figure 187: Example of a WCC-PCN-100G Front View
230
WCC-PCN-100G
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the WCC-PCN-100G module faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 11: WCC-PCN-100G Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
network port
Mod
client port
Description
The WCC-PCN-100G is a core transponder, two-slot WDM channel module with a single
centum form-factor pluggable (CFP) client interface and a single CFP network interface.
The front view of the module, equipped with two CFP/112G/LR4/SM/LC transceivers, is
illustrated in Figure 187 on p.230
The WCC-PCN-100G provides transport of 100 GbE or OTU4 client side service. The
100 GbE client signal is internally GMP mapped into OPU4 according to G.709. The
OTU4 client signal is transported transparently and standard compliant. The resulting
OTU4/OTU4V network port signal is connected to the core optical network.
The CFP transceivers perform the optical-to-electrical (o/e) and electrical-to-optical (e/o)
conversion, monitor physical layer performance, and monitor faults on each optical lane.
The optical performance of client and network interfaces is determined by the
specifications of the installed CFP transceiver module. See the selected CFP
transceiver module specification for additional information.
The WCC-PCN-100G provides fault and performance monitoring data at the
management interfaces. Furthermore, facility loopbacks and terminal loopbacks are
supported on the client and network interfaces.
For OTU4 clients, GFEC according to ITU-T G.709 compliant Reed-Solomon (RS) FEC
can be enabled. GFEC and Enhanced FEC (EFEC-5 and EFEC-6) are supported on the
OTU4/OTU4V network port.
This transponder module can be used for unprotected service and protected services
(Versatile Switched Protection). Using LR4 CFP transceivers the module supports Client
Channel Card Protection (CCCP) for dual-ended, bidirectional/unidirectional revertive
and non-revertive switching applications. CCCP for SR10 CFP transceivers is not
supported.
The WCC-PCN-100G works with all full-band C-band amplifiers, Raman amplifiers, and
with all released DWDM and hybrid network architectures.
231
WCC-PCN-100G
Note
The WCC-PCN-100G module must only be used in an SH9HU,

SH1HU-HP/2DC or SH1HU-R/PF that provide sufficient air flow to cool
the module. Insufficient cooling could overheat and destroy the module.
The WCC-PCN-100G module is supported by the network control unit

NCU-II and NCU-II-P only.
Note
Features
Major features specific to the WCC-PCN-100G module are:
Modes of operation:
o
o
o
Supported mapping of services:

o
o
Unprotected terminal transponder

Client channel card protected terminal transponder
Dual module back-to-back regenerator
OTU4 client services for transparent transport of ODU4
GMP mapping of 100 GbE client services into OPU4 acc. to ITU-T G.709
Clause 17.7.5
Depending on the pluggable transceivers following FEC codes for network interface
OTU4/OTU4V service are supported:
o
o
o
GFEC,
EFEC-5 and
EFEC-6 (SD-FEC)
Please refer to the Module and System Specification for the supported pluggable
transceivers and the FEC types.
Versatile switched protection (in conjunction with the RSM-OLM and VSM)
Client Channel Card Protection (using CFP/112G/LR4/SM/LC)

Following is supported:
o
o
o
1+1 unidirectional revertive and non-revertive switching

1+1 bidirectional revertive and non-revertive switching
Automatic protection switching (APS) channel
GCC0, GCC1 and GCC2 Embedded Communication Channels (ECC) for client and
network OTU4 service
Supported Fault Management (FM) and Performance Monitoring (PM):

Client interface for 100 GbE signals
o
o
o
Physical layer (PHYS)

Physical Coding Sublayer(PCS)
MAC/Packet layer
Client interface for OTU4 signals

o
o

OTN service layer
Network interface
232
WCC-PCN-100G
o
o

OTN service layer
PRBS test signal mapping into OPU4 according to ITU-T G.709
Manageable from all FSP 3000R7 management interfaces
Size: 5 HU, 8 HP wide (2 slots)
Single CFP MSA standard compliant interface
Maximum power level 3 (24W) of the CFPs is required

The supported CFP transceivers, data rates and services are listed in
the Module and System Specification.
Note
Single CFP MSA standard compliant interface
Maximum power level 4 (32W) of the CFPs is required
Note
Interface specification depends on the CFP transceiver used. For details about the
individual CFP transceiver types, refer to the Pluggable Transceiver Module
Specification.
Note
The CFP cage should only be populated with a CFP transceiver that is
specifically intended for the channel module. This must be approved by
ADVA Optical Networking. If you use a non-approved CFP in
guarantee the behavior of the module.
Signal Path
Figure 188 shows the simplified functional block diagram and illustrates the signal path.
The transmit and receive signal paths are described below.
233
WCC-PCN-100G
Figure 188: WCC-PCN-100G Functional Block Diagram
Transmit Direction
The transmit signal path originates at client port receive connector C-R and departs at
network port transmit connector N-T.
The client port connector C-R receives a 100 G Ethernet or OTU4 client signal. Client
signal modulation is defined by the CFP specifications. The CFP specifications contain a
set of specific wavelengths that operate together to deliver the 100 Gbit/s service at the
client receiver port. The CFP receiver optics convert the wavelengths to an electrical
signal. The OTU4 client signal with optional GFEC support is transmitted to the network
OTU4. The client 100 GbE signal is mapped into the OTU4 under the control of the
Generic Mapping Procedure (GMP), according to ITU-T G.709. The network OTU4 signal
is encoded using an forward error correcting code (FEC). On the network side, the CFP
transmitter performs electrical-to-optical conversion and transmits the OTU4 signal
through the N-T connector onto the link.
Receive Direction
The receive signal path originates at the network port receive connector N-R and departs
at client port transmit connector C-T.
The network port receives the OTU4 signal at specific wavelengths through the N-R
connector from the link. The optical input signal is converted to an electrical signal by the
CFP receiver optics. The OTU4 signal is further processed by the FEC decoder to
correct transmission errors introduced by the channel. The resulting signal is GMP
demapped if the client interface is 100 GbE or passed transparently for the OTU4 client.
The CFP optical transmitter then converts the client electrical signal to optical before it
departs at client port connector C-T.
234
WCC-PCN-100G
Specifications
For slot positions and technical details, refer to the Module and System Specification.
235
WCC-PCTN-100GA
WCC-PCTN-100GA
Figure 189: Example of a WCC-PCTN-100GA Front View
236
WCC-PCTN-100GA
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the WCC-PCTN-100GA module faceplate
and their meanings.
Table 12: WCC-PCTN-100GA Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
transmit
Mod
receive
client port
network port
Description
The WCC-PCTN-100GA core transponder provides transparent transport of 100 GbE or
OTU4 client side service in a five-slot module. The client signal is internally mapped
according to G.709 resulting in an OTU4V signal for transport over a core optical transport
network. The client interface is connected to the client equipment and the network
interface is indirectly connected to the core optical transport network via filters, ROADM
equipment, amplifiers, etc.
The WCC-PCTN-100GA transponder module contains a single network side interface
with an internal Dual Polarization Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (DP-QPSK)
transponder module and a single client side interface with a Centum Form-factor
Pluggable (CFP) Multi Source Agreement (MSA) standard compliant pluggable
transceiver.
The DWDM network side optics with DP-QPSK modulation is tunable within the 50 GHz
channel grid. Input wavelength selection is supported by a coherent receiver.
For OTU4 client signals, GFEC according to ITU-T G.709 compliant Reed-Solomon (RS)
FEC can be enabled. Enhanced FEC is provided on the network port OTU4V to enable
ultra long reach performance.
The client side CFP performs the optical-to-electrical and electrical-to-optical conversion
function as well as collection of physical Layer PMs and Fault monitoring. The optical
performance of the client interface is specified by the equipped CFP module. See the
selected CFP module specification for additional information.
The module provides performance monitoring data for 100 GbE client signals as well as
physical layer, service layer, and FEC for network signals. Performance monitoring data
is also provided at the 100 GbE client interface service for PCS layer. For OTU4 client
signals the WCC-PCTN-100GA transponder supports a limited set of physical level fault
reporting and performance monitoring.
The WCC-PCTN-100GA module is supported by the network control

unit NCU-II and NCU-II-P only.
Note
237
WCC-PCTN-100GA
Features
Module manageable from all FSP3000R7 management interfaces
Supported modes of operation

o
o
Supported mapping of services on the network interfaces

o
o
Enhanced FEC (EFEC4) for enabling ultra long reach performance.
Supported Fault Management (FM) and Performance Monitoring (PM)

o
G.709 compliant Reed-Solomon (RS) FEC (GFEC)

Option to enabling and disabling the RS-FEC (GFEC)
Supported FEC for network interface OTU4 service

o
DWDM optics with coherent detection

50 GHz channel grid tunable laser (supporting 50 GHz channel grid frequency
stability)
Supports FEC for client interface OTU4 service

o
OTU4 transparent transport

PCS code word transparent Ethernet transport
Supported network interface

o
Unprotected transponder
Back-to-back regenerator
Physical Coding Section in case of 100 GbE client interface service (PCS)
Service layer (Ethernet)
FEC PMs
Service layer (OTN)
FEC PMs
Network interface
Service layer
FEC PMs
Network interface test functions

o
o
PRBS generation and detection with PMs

Latency measurement

All CFP transceivers are supported which comply to the CFP MSA standard with M=10
host lanes.
Note
238
WCC-PCTN-100GA
Contains internal 100G optics with DP-QPSK modulation which is tunable within the
50 GHz channel grid
Input wavelength selection supported by a coherent receiver
System Specification.
Note
Specification.
Note
Signal Path
Figure 190 shows the simplified functional block diagram that illustrates the signal path.
The signal path is described below.
Figure 190: WCC-PCTN-100GA Functional Block Diagram
239
WCC-PCTN-100GA
Transmit Direction
The transponder transmit direction is the signal path originating at the client receiver port
(C-R) and departing the network transmitter port (N-T). The C-R port receives a 100 G
Ethernetor OTU4 client signal. The client signal modulation is defined by the CFP
specifications. The CFP specifications contain a set of CWDM wavelengths that operate
together to deliver the 100 Gbit/s service at the client receiver port. The CFP receiver
optics converts the input set of wavelengths to an electrical signal. The OTU4 client
signal is transparently mapped to the network OTU4. The 100 GbE signal is GMP
mapped to the network OTU4. The resulting network OTU4 signal may be encoded with
the enhanced forward error correcting code (EFEC-4). The network port optical
transmitter splits the OTU4 signal into two quadrature phase modulated wavelengths
obtained from a single tunable laser output. The two DP-QPSK signals are optically
combined with orthogonal polarizations and are transmitted on the N-T port.
Receive Direction
The transponder receive direction is the signal path originating at the network receiver
port (N-R) and departing the client transmitter port (C-T). The N-R port implements a
coherent receiver design to select the desired input wavelength. The coherent receiver
operates by mixing a tunable receiver laser with the arriving input signal to down convert
the desired wavelength for a fixed input filter stage. The receiver applies chromatic
dispersion and polarization mode dispersion compensation as needed to recover the input
signal that is converted to the electrical domain, recovering the clock and data signals.
The recovered OTU4 may be further processed by the enhanced FEC (EFEC-4) decoder
to correct transmission errors introduced by the channel. The resulting OTU4 signal is
GMP demapped if the client interface is 100 GbE or passed transparently for the OTU4
client. The CFP optical transmitter converts the client electrical signal into the optical
transport signal consisting of multiple CWDM wavelengths as specified by the equipped
CFP transceiver to the C-T port.
Specifications
240
WCC-PCTN-100GB
WCC-PCTN-100GB
Figure 191: Example of a WCC-PCTN-100GB Front View
241
WCC-PCTN-100GB
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the WCC-PCTN-100GB module faceplate
and their meanings.
Table 13: WCC-PCTN-100GB Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
transmit
MOD
receive
client port
network port
Description
The WCC-PCTN-100GB core transponder provides transparent transport of 100 GbE or
OTU4 client side service in a four-slot module. The client signal is internally mapped
according to G.709 resulting in an OTU4 signal for transport over a core optical transport
network. The client interface is connected to the client equipment and the network
interface is indirectly connected to the core optical transport network via filters, ROADM
equipment, amplifiers, etc.
The WCC-PCTN-100GB transponder module contains a single network side interface
with an internal Dual Polarization Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (DP-QPSK)
transponder module and a single client side interface with a Centum Form-factor
Pluggable (CFP) Multi Source Agreement (MSA) standard compliant pluggable
transceiver.
The DWDM network side optics with DP-QPSK modulation is tunable within the 50 GHz
channel grid. Input wavelength selection is supported by a coherent receiver.
For OTU4 client signals, GFEC according to ITU-T G.709 compliant Reed-Solomon (RS)
FEC is provided. Enhanced FEC is provided on the network port OTU4 to enable ultra
long reach performance.
The client side CFP performs the optical-to-electrical and electrical-to-optical conversion
function as well as collection of physical Layer PMs and Fault monitoring. The optical
performance of the client interface is specified by the equipped CFP module. See the
selected CFP module specification for additional information.
The module provides performance monitoring data for 100 GbE client signals as well as
physical layer, service layer, and FEC for network signals. Performance monitoring data
is also provided at the 100 GbE client interface service for PCS layer. For OTU4 client
signals the WCC-PCTN-100GB transponder supports a complete set of physical level
fault reporting and performance monitoring.
The module supports Client Channel Card Protection (CCCP) for LR4 and LR10 CFP
transceivers. CCCP for SR10 CFP transceivers is not supported.
The WCC-PCTN-100GB module is supported by the network control

Note
242
WCC-PCTN-100GB
Features
Module manageable from all FSP3000R7 management interfaces
Supported modes of operation
Unprotected transponder
Dual module back-to-back regenerator
Supported mapping of services on the network interfaces

l
OTU4 transparent transport
Inverted 231-1 PRBS
Supported network interface

l
DWDM optics with coherent detection
50 GHz channel grid tunable laser
Supported FEC for client interface OTU4 service

l
Supported FEC for network interface OTU4 service

l
G.709 compliant Reed-Solomon (RS) FEC (GFEC)
Enhanced FEC (EFEC4) for enabling ultra long reach performance.
Supported Fault Management (FM) and Performance Monitoring (PM)

l

Physical Coding Section in case of 100 GbE client interface service (PCS)
Service layer (Ethernet)
FEC PMs

Service layer (OTN)
FEC PMs
Network interface
Service layer
FEC PMs+

l
Latency measurement
Management from all management interfaces
243
WCC-PCTN-100GB

All CFP transceivers are supported which comply to the CFP MSA standard with M=10
host lanes.
Note
Contains internal 100G optics with DP-QPSK modulation which is tunable within the
50 GHz channel grid
Input wavelength selection supported by a coherent receiver
Note
Specification.
Note
Signal Path
The following figure shows the simplified functional block diagram that illustrates the
signal path. The signal path is described below.
244
WCC-PCTN-100GB
Figure 192: WCC-PCTN-100GB Functional Block Diagram
Transmit Direction
The transponder transmit direction is the signal path originating at the client receiver port
(C-R) and departing the network transmitter port (N-T). The C-R port receives a 100 G
Ethernet or OTU4 client signal. The client signal modulation is defined by the CFP
specifications. The CFP specifications contain a set of CWDM wavelengths that operate
together to deliver the 100 Gbit/s service at the client receiver port. The CFP receiver
optics converts the input set of wavelengths to an electrical signal. The OTU4 client
signal is transparently mapped to the network OTU4. The 100 GbE signal is GMP
mapped to the network OTU4. The resulting network OTU4 signal is encoded with the
enhanced forward error correcting code (EFEC-4). The network port optical transmitter
splits the OTU4 signal into two quadrature phase modulated wavelengths obtained from a
single tunable laser output. The two DP-QPSK signals are optically combined with
orthogonal polarizations and are transmitted on the N-T port.
Receive Direction
The transponder receive direction is the signal path originating at the network receiver
port (N-R) and departing the client transmitter port (C-T). The N-R port implements a
signal that is converted to the electrical domain, recovering the clock and data signals.
The recovered OTU4 is further processed by the enhanced FEC (EFEC-4) decoder to
correct transmission errors introduced by the channel. The resulting OTU4 signal is GMP
demapped if the client interface is 100 GbE or passed transparently for the OTU4 client.
The CFP optical transmitter converts the client electrical signal into the optical transport
signal consisting of multiple CWDM wavelengths as specified by the equipped CFP
transceiver to the C-T port.
Specifications
245
Figure 193: Example of a 10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GC Front View
Faceplate Markings
The following tables list the abbreviations on the 10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GC module
faceplate and their meanings.
Table 14: 10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GC Faceplate Markings:Pluggable and Fixed
Optical Interfaces
246
10G Operation
40G Client Connection

for LR4

for SR4
transmit (client ports and

network ports)
transmit (client ports

and network ports)

and network ports)
Table 14: 10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GC Faceplate Markings:Pluggable and Fixed
Optical Interfaces
R
receive (client ports and

network ports)
receive (client ports

and network ports)

and network ports)
C1
SFP+ client interface 1
1270 nm SFP+1
850 nm SFP+
C2
1290 nm SFP+1
850 nm SFP+
C3
1310 nm SFP+1
850 nm SFP+
C4
1330 nm SFP+1
850 nm SFP+
C5
not used
not used
C6
1270 nm SFP+2
850 nm SFP+
C7
1290 nm SFP+2
850 nm SFP+
C8
1310 nm SFP+2
850 nm SFP+
C9
1330 nm SFP+2
850 nm SFP+
C10
not used
not used
network interface
network interface
network interface
Note
When C1, C2, C3, and C4 are configured for 40G client support, C5 is
unavailable for 10G operation.
C1 to C5 operation is independent of C6 to C10 operation. C1 to C4 may
be configured for 40G operation, while simultaneously C6 to C10 may be
configured to operate with any five available 10G services.
Similarly, C6 to C10 operation is also independent of C1 to C5 operation.
C6 to C9 may be configured for 40G operation, while simultaneously C1
to C5 may be configured to operate with any five available 10G services.
Table 15: 10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GC Faceplate Markings:LED Indicators

Module and Network Interface
P
1LR4 operation requires one each of the following SFP+ plugs: 1270nm, 1290nm,
1310nm and 1330nm. These four plugs may be equipped in any sequence in the C1 to C4
ports of the 10TCC100GB. If the provisioned sequence does not match the equipped
sequence, the management system will present an equipment mismatch (MEA__
CONDITION) standing condition.
247
Table 15: 10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GC Faceplate Markings:LED Indicators
Mod
modules operating status
operating status of the network interface
Table 16: 10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GC Faceplate Markings: LED Indicators Client

Interfaces
10G Operation
40G Operation
C1
operating status of the client interface 1
logical "OR" of the operating status of

the C1C4 40G client and the physical
layer status of the C1 OTL
C2
physical layer status of the C2 OTL
C3
operating status of the client

interface 3
C4

interface 4
C5

interface 5
LED is off when a 40G client is active

on C1C4
C6

interface 6

C7

interface 7
C8

interface 8
C9

interface 9
C10

interface 10

on C6C9
Description
The 10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GC is a 100G core type four-slot TDM channel module
(muxponder) delivering a multiplex of up to ten 10Gbit/s client signals or up to two 40G
clients into a single OTU4 DWDM wavelength operating at 100Gbit/s. It features ten
small form-factor pluggable (SFP+) interfaces on the client side and an integrated single
coherent C-band tunable DWDM interface on the network side. This module is very
similiar to the 10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GB, but with slightly reduced OSNR performance.
It replaces traditional optical components with integrated silicon photonics components.
In addition, the Rx wavelength is not configurable but automatically tuned to the Tx
wavelength.
248
The front view of the module, equipped with ten SFP+ transceivers, is illustrated in Figure
193.
The client interfaces are customer-facing (connected to the client equipment) and the
network interface is network-facing (indirectly connected to the core or long-haul optical
transport network using optical filters, amplifiers, etc.).
The 10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GC provides muxponder functionality for the transport of
several client services over long-haul distances. Any combination of supported 10G
client services is possible.
1
Ten 10G clients only
Five 10G clients plus one 40G client
Two 40G clients only
Note that the second configuration is one of two possible arrangements either left or right
connection. The left 40G connection uses client ports C1 to C4. C5 is not available for
customer traffic when C1C4 is created. The right 40G connection uses client ports C6 to
C9. C10 is not available for customer traffic when C6C9 is created. SR4 and LR4 client
optics are supported for 40G services. Cables appropriate to each type of optics are used
in conjunction with compatible SFP+ optics for each service type. See subsection
Support of 40GbE client services on p.250 for more information.
The module performs electrical multiplexing/de-multiplexing of up to ten client interface
signals. Client signals can be a mix of 10Gbps and 40Gbps. The network port supports
OTU4 according to ITU-T G.709 transmitted at a data rate of 120 Gbit/s.
Using an ITU G.709 standard compliant method, all client port signals are mapped into a
low order ODUk format and multiplexed into the high order OPU4 frame via an ODTU4.8
multiplex structure for 10G clients or ODTU4.31 multiplex structure for 40G clients, as
described in ITU G.709, clause 19.3.7.The network interface is a factory installed
component that provides the optical-to-electrical (o/e) and electrical-to-optical (e/o)
conversions and collection of physical layer performance monitoring and alarm
monitoring for the interface. It incorporates a dual polarization quadrature phase shift
keying (DP QPSK) modulation is fully tunable over the C band at 50 GHz channel
spacing. Input wavelength selection is supported by a coherent receiver.The client-side
optics are included within the SFP+ transceiver modules. They perform the optical-toelectrical (o/e) and electrical-to-optical (e/o) conversion, monitor physical layer
performance, and monitor faults for each client service. The optical performance of each
client interface is determined by the specifications of the installed SFP+ transceiver
module. See the selected SFP+ transceiver module specification for additional
information. Each of the 10 client interfaces can be configured individually to any of the
supported client services.
The SFP+ transceiver modules used with the 10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GC support
multiple rates and can be configured for any of the supported client services. The choice
of which SFP+ transceiver to use depends on the optical characteristics of the connected
customer equipment. See the Module and System Specificationfor detailed information
about optical plug selection.
Soft Decision FEC (SD-FEC) Enhanced FEC (EFEC) core for OTN signals is supported
on the OTU4 network port to enable ultra long reach performance.
The 10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GC provides clock and data recovery and performs 3R
signal conditioning at any supported data rate by default. Service management,
administration, fault management, performance monitoring and alarm generation is
independently performed for the network port and for each client port including physical
layer monitoring of the SFP+ transceivers. In addition, loop functionality on the client and
network interfaces is provided.
249
The 10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GC supports in-band DCN management and versatile
switched protection for restoration. Client Channel Card Protection (CCCP) for dualended, bidirectional revertive and non-revertive switching applications and for 40GbE
client services are also supported. Client Channel Card Protection operation for 40GbE
clients is conceptually identical to operation with 10G clients. In case of CCCP operation
for LR4 clients (40GbE), four 10G SFP+ transceiver modules operate together as a single
client interface. Each group of four 10G SFP+ transceiver modules connectsusing the
J/SM/4CS-#C1270-#C1330/LC/0400) filter cable to a protection module (PM). For further
details, please refer to the "Client Channel Card Protection"section in the System
Description.Protection of SR4 clients is not supported.
The module is not interoperable with the 10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GB and WCC-PCTN100GB but operates in conjunction with all full-band C-band amplifiers, RAMAN-C10,
AMP-S20H-C15 and AMP-S20L-C15 amplifiers, as well as with all released optical filter
modules including the 96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125. In addition, the 10TCC-PCTN10G+100GC can also be employed in an ROADM node with 9ROADM-C96/0/OPM,
8ROADM-C80/0/OPM and 4ROADM-C96/0/OPM according to the design rules.
The 10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GC can only be used in the 9HU shelf. Up to four 10TCCPCTN-10G+100GC modules per 9HU shelf are supported.
Using the 10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GC module in the SH7HU or SH7HU-R shelf is

not supported due to heat dissipation issues. The 10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GC will
remain in a low power consumption state and service provisioning is not permitted.
The management interface will report a mismatch condition when installed in the
SH7HU or SH7HU-R shelf.
The 10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GC module is supported by the network

control unit NCU-II and NCU-II-P only.
Note
Support of 40GbE client services

The transparent transmission of 40G traffic over 10G channels requires the use of the
following special optical cables provided by ADVA Optical Networking:
1
Two J/SM/4CS-#C1270-#C1330/LC/0400 filter cables for each LR4 client
Refer to J/SM/4CS-#C1270-#C1330/LC/0400 for details on connecting J/SM/4CS#C1270-#C1330/LC/0400 filter cables.
Features
Major features specific to the 10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GC module are:
Mode of operation:
o
o
Mapping/multiplexing of services on client and network interfaces:

o
250
Unprotected terminal multiplexer

Protected terminal multiplexer using client channel card protection (with
protection modules)
GMP mapping of client services into ODUk (k=1e, 2, 2e) according to ITU-T
Rec. G.709 02/12
Network side multiplexing of ODUk (k=1e, 2, 2e) to ODTU4.8 into ODTUG4
according to ITU-T Rec. G.709 02/12
o
GMP mapping of 40GbE client signal into a low order ODU3(L) acc. to ITU-T
G.709
40GbE LAN into ODU3 using bit transparent mapping (CBR)
Client services for 10G clients and selection of SFP+ plugs is not restricted. 40G
clients are supported with LR4 and SR4 optics with these plug configurations:
o
o
SFP+/11GU/850I/MM/LC for SR4 clients

SFP+/11GU/CxxxxL/SM/LC for LR4 clients (Cxxxx must be one each of
C1270, C1290, C1310, C1330)
a predetermined set of four 10G client ports for each 40G client (See notation in
previous section).
Clock and data recovery with 3R signal conditioning
FEC for network interface OTU4 service

Soft Decision FEC (EFEC-6)
Service Protection:
o
o
10G clients
40GbE clients (LR4 optics only)
SDH/SONET DCC for client interfaces

OTN GCCx for client and network interfaces
Fault Monitoring (FM) and Performance Monitoring (PM) on the client and the network
interfaces
o
o
o
Embedded Communication Channel (ECC)

o
Client Layer Protection

Client Channel Card Protection
Physical Layer (PHYS)

Service Layer (SDH/SONET, OTN and Ethernet)
FEC layer

o
OTN PRBS generation and detection
Module manageable from all FSP 3000R7 management interfaces (Craft Console,
NED, TL1, SNMP, and NM)
Threshold crossing alerts on the PM records
Facility loopbacks and terminal loopbacks for the client ports and the network port
Size: 5HU high, 16 HP wide (4 slots)
Ten independent, small form-factor pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant interfaces for
SFP+ transceiver modules (field replaceable units)
Use of SFP+ transceivers supporting gray wavelengths and CWDM channels

The supported SFP+ transceivers, data rates and services are listed in
Note
251
Single integrated 100G DWDM interface for long-haul optical transmission

incorporating a dual polarization quadrature phase shift keying (DP QPSK)
modulation with a coherent receiver
Tunable laser supporting 50 GHz channel grid frequency stability
Independent provisioning of receive and transmit wavelength
Note
Interface specification depends on the SFP+ transceiver used. For details about the
individual SFP+ transceiver types, refer to the Pluggable Transceiver Module
Specification.
absence of an SFP+ transceiver does not affect operation of other terminated
services.
Note
SFP+ cages should only be populated with SFP+ transceivers that are
by ADVA Optical Networking. If you use non-approved SFPs in
used, the corresponding SFP+ cage does not need to be populated with
an SFP+ transceiver, but should be covered with a dust protective plug.
Signal Path
Figure 194 on p.253 provides a simplified functional block diagram illustrating the
10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GC signal path. The transmit and receive signal paths are
described below.
252
Figure 194: Functional Block Diagram of the 10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GC
Transmit Direction
In the transmit (ingress) direction, the following takes place:
The client port receivers (Rx) receive any supported service from the Customer Premises
Equipment (CPE) through the appropriate connector C1-R through C10-R. Each optical
input signal is converted to an electrical signal by the SFP+ receiver optics, and routed to
the associated CDR circuit where clock and data recovery are performed. All resulting
signals are encoded, synchronized and mapped into a Lower Order (LO) ODU signal by
the ODU Mapper using a G.709 standard compliant method. The network-side LO ODU
Multiplexer multiplexes the LO ODUs into the Higher Order ODU4/OPU4 frame structure
as defined in G.709. In the network framer, the OPU4 signal is then mapped to the
network OTU4V signal and encoded with the enhanced forward error correcting code
(EFEC-6). The network port optical transmitter performs electrical-to-optical conversion
and splits the OTU4 signal into two quadrature phase modulated wavelengths obtained
from a single tunable laser output. The two DP-QPSK signals are optically combined with
orthogonal polarizations and are transmitted through the N-T connector onto the link.
Receive Direction
In the receive (egress) direction, the following takes place:
The network port receiver (Rx) receives the OTU4V signal at specific DWDM
wavelengths through the N-R connector from the link. The N-R port implements a
signal that is converted to an electrical one and then regenerated (3R function). The
253
regenerated OTU4V signal is further processed by the EFEC decoder to correct other
transmission errors introduced by the channel. In the network framer, the resulting OTU4
signal is de-mapped into the ODU4 frame structure and directed to the network-side LO
ODU De-multiplexer. It electronically de-multiplexes the LO ODUs from the ODU4 and
then routes each individual LO ODU signal to a client LO ODU Demapper. In the Client
LO ODU Demapper, the client signal is de-mapped from the LO ODU, decoded,
serialized and fed into the SFP+ transceiver module of the corresponding client port. The
transmitters (Tx) convert the electrical signals to optical signals and transmit them
through the client port connectors C1-T throughC10-T to the CPE.
Specifications
254
Figure 195: Example of a 10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GB Front View
255
Faceplate Markings
The following tables list the abbreviations on the 10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GB module
Table 17: 10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GB Faceplate Markings:Pluggable and Fixed
Optical Interfaces
10G Operation

for LR4

for SR4
transmit (client ports and

network ports)

and network ports)

and network ports)
receive (client ports and

network ports)

and network ports)

and network ports)
C1
1270 nm SFP+1
850 nm SFP+
C2
1290 nm SFP+1
850 nm SFP+
C3
1310 nm SFP+1
850 nm SFP+
C4
1330 nm SFP+1
850 nm SFP+
C5
not used
not used
C6
1270 nm SFP+2
850 nm SFP+
C7
1290 nm SFP+2
850 nm SFP+
C8
1310 nm SFP+2
850 nm SFP+
C9
1330 nm SFP+2
850 nm SFP+
C10
not used
not used
network interface
network interface
network interface
256
Note
C1 to C5 operation is independent of C6 to C10 operation. C1 to C4 may
be configured for 40G operation, while simultaneously C6 to C10 may be
configured to operate with any five available 10G services.
Similarly, C6 to C10 operation is also independent of C1 to C5 operation.
C6 to C9 may be configured for 40G operation, while simultaneously C1
to C5 may be configured to operate with any five available 10G services.
Table 18: 10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GB Faceplate Markings:LED Indicators

P
Mod
operating status of the network interface
Table 19: 10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GB Faceplate Markings: LED Indicators Client

Interfaces
10G Operation
40G Operation
C1

C2
C3

interface 3
C4

interface 4
C5

interface 5

on C1C4
C6

interface 6

C7

interface 7
C8

interface 8
C9

interface 9
C10

interface 10

on C6C9
257
Description
The 10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GB is a 100G core type four-slot TDM channel module
(muxponder) delivering a multiplex of up to ten 10Gbit/s client signals or up to two 40G
clients into a single OTU4 DWDM wavelength operating at 100Gbit/s. It features ten
small form-factor pluggable (SFP+) interfaces on the client side and an integrated single
DWDM interface on the network side. The front view of the module, equipped with ten
SFP+ transceivers, is illustrated in Figure 195 on p.255.
The client interfaces are customer-facing (connected to the client equipment) and the
network interface is network-facing (indirectly connected to the core or long-haul optical
The 10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GB provides muxponder functionality for the transport of
severalclient services over long-haul distances. Any combination of supported 10G client
services is possible.
Each 40GbE client service consumes the resources of five 10G ports of the 10TCCPCTN-10G+100GB. The consequence of this operation is that one 10G port is not
available for service for each active 40GbE client. There are three operational
configurations possible:
1
Ten 10G clients only
Five 10G clients plus one 40G client
Two 40G clients only
Note that the second configuration is one of two possible arrangements either left or right
connection. The left 40G connection uses client ports C1 to C4. C5 is not available for
customer traffic when C1C4 is created. The right 40G connection uses client ports C6 to
C9.C10 is not available for customer traffic when C6C9 is created. SR4 and LR4 client
optics are supported for 40G services. Cables appropriate to each type of optics are used
in conjunction with compatible SFP+ optics for each service type. See Support of 40GbE
client services for more information.
The module performs electrical multiplexing/de-multiplexing of up to ten client interface
signals. Client signals can be a mix of 10Gbps and 40Gbps. The network port supports
OTU4 according to ITU-T G.709 transmitted at a data rate of 120 Gbit/s.
Using an ITU G.709 standard compliant method, all client port signals are mapped into a
low order ODUk format and multiplexed into the high order OPU4 frame via an ODTU4.8
multiplex structure for 10G clients or ODTU4.31 multiplex structure for 40G clients, as
described in ITU G.709, clause 19.3.7.The network interface is a factory installed
component that provides the optical-to-electrical (o/e) and electrical-to-optical (e/o)
conversions and collection of physical layer performance monitoring and alarm
monitoring for the interface.It incorporates a dual polarization quadrature phase shift
keying (DP QPSK) modulation is fully tunable over the C band at 50 GHz channel
spacing. Input wavelength selection is supported by a coherent receiver.The client-side
optics are included within the SFP+ transceiver modules. They perform the optical-toelectrical (o/e) and electrical-to-optical (e/o) conversion, monitor physical layer
performance, and monitor faults for each client service. The optical performance of each
client interface is determined by the specifications of the installed SFP+ transceiver
module. See the selected SFP+ transceiver module specification for additional
information. Each of the 10 client interfaces can be configured individually to any of the
supported client services.
258
The SFP+ transceiver modules used with the 10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GB support
multiple rates and can be configured for any of the supported client services. The choice
of which SFP+ transceiver to use depends on the optical characteristics of the connected
customer equipment. See subsection Client Interface Characteristics on p.261 for
more information about optical plug selection.
Soft Decision FEC (SD-FEC) Enhanced FEC (EFEC) core for OTN signals is supported
on the OTU4 network port to enable ultra long reach performance.
The 10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GB provides clock and data recovery and performs 3R
signal conditioning at any supported data rate by default. Service management,
administration, fault management, performance monitoring and alarm generation is
independently performed for the network port and for each client port including physical
layer monitoring of the SFP+ transceivers. In addition, loop functionality on the client and
network interfaces is provided.
The 10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GB supports in-band DCN management and versatile
switched protection for restoration. Client Channel Card Protection (CCCP) for dualended, bidirectional revertive and non-revertive switching applications and for 40GbE
client services are also supported. Client Channel Card Protection operation for 40GbE
clients is conceptually identical to operation with 10G clients. In case of CCCP operation
for LR4 clients (40GbE), four 10G SFP+ transceiver modules operate together as a single
client interface. Each group of four 10G SFP+ transceiver modules connectsusing the
J/SM/4CS-#C1270-#C1330/LC/0400) filter cable to a protection module (PM). For further
details, please refer to the "Client Channel Card Protection"section in the System
Description.Protection of SR4 clients is not supported.
The module operates in conjunction with the WCC-PCTN-100GB, all full-band C-band
amplifiers, RAMAN-C10, AMP-S20H-C15 and AMP-S20L-C15 amplifiers, as well as
with all released optical filter modules including the 96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125. In
addition, the 10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GB can also be employed in an ROADM node with
9ROADM-C96/0/OPM, 8ROADM-C80/0/OPM and 4ROADM-C96/0/OPM according to
the design rules.
The 10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GB can only be used in the 9HU shelf. Up to four 10TCCPCTN-10G+100GB modules per 9HU shelf are supported.
Using the 10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GB module in the SH7HU or SH7HU-R shelf is

not supported due to heat dissipation issues. The 10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GB will
remain in a low power consumption state and service provisioning is not permitted.
The management interface will report a mismatch condition when installed in the
SH7HU or SH7HU-R shelf.
The 10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GB module is supported by the network

Note
Support of 40GbE client services

The transparent transmission of 40G traffic over 10G channels requires the use of the
following special optical cables provided by ADVA Optical Networking:
Two J/SM/4CS-#C1270-#C1330/LC/0400 filter cables for each LR4 client
Refer to J/SM/4CS-#C1270-#C1330/LC/0400 for details on connecting J/SM/4CS#C1270-#C1330/LC/0400 filter cables.
259
Features
Major features specific to the 10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GB module are:
Mode of operation:
o
o
Unprotected terminal multiplexer

Protected terminal multiplexer using client channel card protection (with
protection modules)

o
GMP mapping of client services into ODUk (k=1e, 2, 2e) according to ITU-T
Rec. G.709 02/12
Network side multiplexing of ODUk (k=1e, 2, 2e) to ODTU4.8 into ODTUG4
according to ITU-T Rec. G.709 02/12
GMP mapping of 40GbE client signal into a low order ODU3(L) acc. to ITU-T
G.709
40GbE LAN into ODU3 using bit transparent mapping (CBR)
Client services for 10G clients and selection of SFP+ plugs is not restricted. 40G
clients are supported with LR4 and SR4 optics with these plug configurations:
o
o
FEC for network interface OTU4 service

Soft Decision FEC (EFEC-6)
Service Protection:
o
o
10G clients
40GbE clients (LR4 optics only)
SDH/SONET DCC for client interfaces

interfaces
o
o
o
Client Layer Protection

Embedded Communication Channel (ECC)

o

FEC layer

o
260
SFP+/11GU/850I/MM/LC for SR4 clients

SFP+/11GU/CxxxxL/SM/LC for LR4 clients (Cxxxx must be one each of
C1270, C1290, C1310, C1330)
a predetermined set of four 10G client ports for each 40G client (See notation in
previous section).
OTN PRBS generation and detection
Facility loopbacks and terminal loopbacks for the client ports and the network port
SFP+ transceiver modules (field replaceable units)
Use of SFP+ transceivers supporting gray wavelengths and CWDM channels

Note
Single integrated 100G DWDM interface for long-haul optical transmission

incorporating a dual polarization quadrature phase shift keying (DP QPSK)
modulation with a coherent receiver
Tunable laser supporting 50 GHz channel grid frequency stability
Independent provisioning of receive and transmit wavelength
Interface specification depends on the SFP+ transceiver used. For details about the
individual SFP+ transceiver types, refer to the Pluggable Transceiver Module
Specification.
absence of an SFP+ transceiver does not affect operation of other terminated
services.
Note
used, the corresponding SFP+ cage does not need to be populated with
an SFP+ transceiver, but should be covered with a dust protective plug.
Signal Path
10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GB signal path. The transmit and receive signal paths are
described below.
261
Figure 196: Functional Block Diagram of the 10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GB
Rx
o
o
e
e
C10 -T
Tx
C9-R
Rx
o
o
C9-T
e
e
Tx
10 TCC -PCN -10 G +100 GB

Client side #10
Low Order ODUk
Mapper /De -mapper
G .709
Network side ODU 4

Multiplexer /Mapper
&
ODU 4 De -Mapper /De multiplexer
Client side #9
Low Order ODUk
Mapper /De -mapper
G .709
G .709
ODU 4 Framing
DP -QPSK interface
Network
Port
Optical Transmitter
network
side
OTU 4
Framer
Mo dulator
N -T
10.4
C10 -R
SFP +
Transceivers
SD-FEC encoder
Client
ports
C1 to C 10
Mo dulator
6 x Client ports
OTN -PM
Optical Receiver
o
o
C2-T
C1-R
Tx
Rx
o
o
C1-T
e
e
Tx
Client side #2
Low Order ODUk
Mapper /De -mapper
G .709
Demo dulator
N -R
4 : 10
Rx
SD-FEC decoder
GCCx
C2-R
Demo dulator
Client side #1
Low Order ODUk
Mapper /De -mapper
G .709
Equipped with may be equipped with

SFP + transceiver types supporting OTU
OTU 2, OTU 2e, and 10 GbE LAN PHY
1,
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Transmit Direction
The client port receivers (Rx) receive any supported service from the Customer Premises
Equipment (CPE) through the appropriate connector C1-R through C10-R. Each optical
input signal is converted to an electrical signal by the SFP+ receiver optics, and routed to
the associated CDR circuit where clock and data recovery are performed. All resulting
signals are encoded, synchronized and mapped into a Lower Order (LO) ODU signal by
the ODU Mapper using a G.709 standard compliant method. The network-side LO ODU
Multiplexer multiplexes the LO ODUs into the Higher Order ODU4/OPU4 frame structure
as defined in G.709. In the network framer, the OPU4 signal is then mapped to the
network OTU4V signal and encoded with the enhanced forward error correcting code
(EFEC-6). The network port optical transmitter performs electrical-to-optical conversion
and splits the OTU4 signal into two quadrature phase modulated wavelengths obtained
from a single tunable laser output. The two DP-QPSK signals are optically combined with
orthogonal polarizations and are transmitted through the N-T connector onto the link.
Receive Direction
262
The network port receiver (Rx) receives the OTU4V signal at specific DWDM
wavelengths through the N-R connector from the link. The N-R port implements a
signal that is converted to an electrical one and then regenerated (3R function). The
regenerated OTU4V signal is further processed by the EFEC decoder to correct other
transmission errors introduced by the channel. In the network framer, the resulting OTU4
signal is de-mapped into the ODU4 frame structure and directed to the network-side LO
ODU De-multiplexer. It electronically de-multiplexes the LO ODUs from the ODU4 and
then routes each individual LO ODU signal to a client LO ODU Demapper. In the Client
LO ODU Demapper, the client signal is de-mapped from the LO ODU, decoded,
serialized and fed into the SFP+ transceiver module of the corresponding client port. The
through the client port connectors C1-T through C10-T to the CPE.
Specifications
263
WCC-PCTN-10G
WCC-PCTN-10G
Figure 197: Example of a WCC-PCTN-10G-LN#DC Front View
264
WCC-PCTN-10G
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the WCC-PCTN-10G faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 20: WCC-PCTN-10G Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
transmit
Mod
receive
client port
network port
Variants
The WCC-PCTN-10G module is available in four variants
WCC-PCTN-10G-LN#DC
WCC-PCTN-10G-V#DC
WCC-PCTN-10G-V#DL
WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32
All module variants feature the same design and use the same faceplate. They differ in
their network interface specification only. The front view of a WCC-PCTN-10G-LN#DC
is illustrated in Figure 197 as an example.
Description
The WCC-PCTN-10G is a core type 10G WDM channel module specifically designed for
the use in DWDM transport systems. It features a pluggable interface on the client side
and one fixed, 10 Gigabit DWDM interface on the network side. The network interface
provides a transmitter that is fully tunable in the C or L band. Each channel can be tuned
in the system management by using the NE management tools. The WCC-PCTN-10GLN#DC module variant offers a high extinction ratio and thus it is suitable for links with a
high amount of amplifiers and low OSNR.
The module converts one optical client signal into/from one 10-Gigabit network signal
with a specific wavelength in the ITU-T grid.
The WCC-PCTN-10G is intended for transport of several services listed in the Module
and System Specification of the WCC-PCTN-10G. All applications can be transmitted in
transparent mode. For all applications with the exception of 10G FC, standard FEC
according to ITU-T G.709 can be enabled for OTU2, OTU1e and OTU2e at both the client
port and the network port. For the support of OTU1e and OTU2e the WCC-PCTN-10G
module does not meet the payload type standard. Only in that case OTU2e was
implemented for OTU2LAN with stuff bytes and OTU1e is used for OTU2LAN without
stuff bytes.
Enhanced FEC with higher coding gain is only supported on the network port. 10G FC
can only be transmitted without FEC.
265
WCC-PCTN-10G
The module provides performance monitoring data at the client as well as at the network
port for the physical layer and the SDH/SONET or the OTN layer.
The WCC-PCTN-10G-V#DC can work together with the WCC-PCTN-10G-LN#DC.
The WCC-PCTN-10G can be used as a bi-directional regenerator in back-to-back
configuration using STM-64/OC-192/OTN only.
Features
OTU2 mapping
Bit-synchronize mapping of STM-64/OC-192 into OPU2 according to ITUT G.709
10 GbE LAN PHY mapping into OTU1e (OTU2LAN without stuff bytes)
and OTU2e (OTU2LAN with stuff bytes)
Pass through traffic function
Versatile switched protection for restoration (in conjunction with the RSM-SF, RSMOLM and VSM)
Auto laser shutdown (ALS) according to ADVA Optical Networking standard on

network port (C-band modules can be provisioned with enabled or disabled ALS)
ALS according to ITU on client port
In-band DCN management via OTU2 on the client and network interface
Performance monitoring:
Physical layer, physical coding sublayer, 10 GbE layer and SDH/SONET

layers on the client port
Physical layer, physical coding sublayer, 10 GbE layer, SDH/SONET

layers, OTN layer, FEC layer on the network port
Fault monitoring:
Physical layer and SDH/SONET layers on the client port
Physical layer, physical coding sublayer, SDH/SONET layers and OTN

fault monitoring on the network port
Threshold crossing alerts on the PM records of SDH/SONET/OTN services
Facility loopback and terminal loopback for the client port and network port
Size: 5HU high, 4HP wide (1 slot)
Extended Form-factor Pluggable (XFP) MSA compliant interface using LC

connectors for fiber termination
Use of XFP transceivers supporting gray wavelengths, CWDM channels and

DWDM channels according to ITU-T G.694
Module and System Specification.
Note
266
WCC-PCTN-10G
Integrated, 10 Gigabit very long reach link distance, tunable DWDM interface (WCCPCTN-10G-V#DC, WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32, WCC-PCTN-10G-V#DL)
Integrated, 10 Gigabit long reach noise optimized tunable DWDM interface

(WCC-PCTN-10G-LN#DC)
Note
Specification.
services.
Note
Signal Path
Figure 198 shows the functional block diagram of the WCC-PCTN-10G module (very
simplified) and illustrates the signal path, which is described below.
267
WCC-PCTN-10G
Figure 198: WCC-PCTN-10G Functional Block Diagram (Simplified)
Transmit Direction
The receiver (Rx) of the client port receives the client signal at a non-WDM wavelength
from the CPE through the C-R connector. The input signal is converted to the electrical
domain and a clock and data recovery circuit performs full 3R signal regeneration at any
selected data rate. The regenerated signal is optionally mapped into a G.709 compliant
frame structure. Overhead processing as well as ingress and egress client data
performance monitoring are performed. When operating in the OTU2 mode, the module
carries out standard FEC on the client port and enhanced FEC on the network port. The
transmitter (Tx) converts the output signal back to an optical signal and transmits any Cor L-band channel through the N-T connector to the far end of the link.
Receive Direction
The receiver (Rx) of the network port receives any C band channel through the N-R
connector from the link. The input signal is converted to the electrical domain and
regenerated (3R function). If an OTN signal is received, it is de-mapped from the G.709
compliant frame and EFEC/FEC functions are carried out. Overhead processing and
client data performance monitoring are performed. The resulting signal is then routed to
the transmitter (Tx) of the client port. The transmitter converts the electrical signal back
to an optical one and transmits it at a non-WDM wavelength through the connector C-T to
the CPE.
Specifications
268
4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G
4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G
Figure 199: Example of 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-LN#DC Front View
269
4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 21: 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
transmit
Mod
receive
C1
operating state of the client port 1
C1
client port 1
C2
C2
client port 2
C3
C3
client port 3
C4
C4
client port 4
network port
Variants
The 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G is available in four variants:
All module variants feature the same design and use the same faceplate. They differ in
their network interface specification only. The front view of a 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10GLN#DC is illustrated in Figure 199 as an example.
Description
The 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G is a core type 4-port TDM channel module with four
pluggable interfaces on the client side and one fixed 10 Gigabit DWDM interface on the
network side. The network interface provides a transmitter that is fully tunable in the C or
L band. Each channel can be tuned in the system management by using the NE
management tools. The 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-LN#DC module variant offers a high
extinction ratio and thus it is suitable for links with a high amount of amplifiers and low
OSNR.
The 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G performs electrical multiplexing/de-multiplexing of up to four
client interface signals onto/from one specific ITU-T compliant wavelength.
The client interfaces support SDH and OTN services. These services are multiplexed
according to the OTN standard, as described in ITU-T G.709, using transparent
asynchronous aggregation of ODU1 tributaries into OTU2. OTU1 client interface signals
are terminated at the OTU1 SM layer, and the ODU1 PM is transparently multiplexed into
the OPU2. STM-16/OC-48 client interface signals are either transported transparently or
regenerated at the RS/Section layer. The client interface signals are end-to-end clock
270
4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G
transparent and can be used for clock distribution, but holdover is not supported. If
demultiplexing fails, a local 20 ppm oscillator will be used as clock source.
As an end-to-end service the proprietary virtual facility scrambling can be provisioned in
the system management by using the NE management tools. See the Provisioning and
Operations Manual for details.
The network port supports OTU2 with standard FEC or OTU2V with enhanced FEC.
Each client and network port supports one in-band management channel (DCN). The
4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G supports comprehensive fault and performance monitoring of
network and client services.
Features
OTU mapping, according to ITU-T G.709:
OTU2 with standard FEC or
OTU2V with enhanced FEC
Virtual facility scrambling (proprietary)
Versatile switched protection (in conjunction with the RSM-SF, RSM-OLM and VSM)
Auto laser shutdown (ALS) according to ADVA Optical Networking standard on the
client ports and the network port
(C-band module variants can be provisioned with enabled or disabled ALS)
ALS according to ITU on the client ports
In-band DCN management (only one GCC or DCC channel per port)
Fault monitoring and performance monitoring on the client ports and the network port
Facility loopbacks and terminal loopbacks for each individual client port and the
network port
Four independent, Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant interfaces

Support of a mix of client services
Use of SFP transceivers supporting gray wavelengths, CWDM channels and

The supported SFP transceivers, data rates and services are listed in the
Note
One integrated, 10 Gigabit very-long reach tunable DWDM interface

(4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#DC, 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#DL and 4TCC-PCTN2G7+10G-V#D01-32)
271
4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G
One integrated, 10 Gigabit long reach noise optimized tunable DWDM network
interface (4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-LN#DC)
Note
Interface specification depends on the SFP transceiver used. For details about the
individual SFP transceiver types, refer to the Pluggable Transceiver Module
Specification.
absence of an SFP transceiver does not affect operation of other terminated
services.
Note
SFP cages should only be populated with SFP transceivers that are
used, the corresponding SFP cage does not need to be populated with
an SFP transceiver, but should be covered with a dust protective plug.
Signal Path
Figure 200 shows the functional block diagram (simplified) and illustrates the signal path,
which is described below.
Transmit Direction
Each client port receiver (Rx) receives signals from the CPE through the client port
connectors C1-R, C2-R, C3-R and C4-R. These signals are converted to the electrical
domain, data and clock recovery is performed and the signals are de-serialized. STM16/OC-48/OTU-1 client signals are monitored and mapped into ODU1s. Mapping of the
client signals into the ODU1 signals is performed in the following order based on 2.5
Gbit/s tributary slots:
Client port 1 signal is mapped into the 4th ODU1 tributary slot (TS)/tributary port (TP)
Client port 2 signal is mapped into the 3rd ODU1 tributary slot (TS)/tributary port (TP)
Client port 3 signal is mapped into the 2nd ODU1 tributary slot (TS)/tributary port (TP)
Client port 4 signal is mapped into the 1st ODU1 tributary slot (TS)/tributary port (TP)
The 4x ODU1 signals are then multiplexed into a 10G ODU2 signal.
272
4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G
The ODU2 signal is converted to OTU2 by adding monitoring overhead and FEC bytes.
This signal is serialized and routed to the transceiver of the tunable network port. The
transceiver converts the electrical signal to an optical signal and transmits any C band
channel through the N-T port onto the link.
Receive Direction
The network port receiver (Rx) receives any C band channel through the N-R port from
the link. This signal is converted to the electrical domain, data and clock recovery is
performed and the signal is de-serialized. The OTU2 FEC is terminated and the signal is
monitored. The ODU2 frame is demultiplexed into four individual ODU1 signals. The
ODU1 signals are then either de-mapped into 2.5G STM-16 or OC-48 signals, or kept as
ODU-1 client signals. De-mapping of the ODU1 signals will be performed in the following
order using 2.5 Gbit/s tributary slots:
1st ODU1 tributary slot (TS)/tributary port (TP) is de-mapped into

client port 4
2nd ODU1 tributary slot (TS)/tributary port (TP) is de-mapped into

client port 3
3rd ODU1 tributary slot (TS)/tributary port (TP) is de-mapped into

client port 2
4th ODU1 tributary slot (TS)/tributary port (TP) is de-mapped into

client port 1
Each client signal is de-serialized, and fed into the SFP transceiver, which converts the
electrical signal and transmits it through the client port connector C1-T, C2-T, C3-T or
C4-T to the CPE.
273
4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G
Figure 200: 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G Functional Block Diagram
Specifications
274
10TCC-PCTN-4GU+10G
10TCC-PCTN-4GU+10G
Figure 201: 10TCC-PCTN-4GU+10G-LN#DC Front View
275
10TCC-PCTN-4GU+10G
Faceplate Markings
The table below lists all abbreviations on the 10TCC-PCTN-4GU+10G faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 22: 10TCC-PCTN-4GU+10G Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
transmit
Mod
receive
C1
C1
client port 1
C2
C2
client port 2
C3
C3
client port 3
C4
C4
client port 4
C5
C5
client port 5
C6
C6
client port 6
C7
C7
client port 7
C8
C8
client port 8
C9
C9
client port 9
C10
C10
client port 10
network port
Variants
The 10TCC-PCTN-4GU+10G is available in the following variants:
All module variants feature the same faceplate design. The modules differ in their
network interface operational specification. The front view of the 10TCC-PCTN4GUS+10G-LN#DC is illustrated in Figure 201 as an example.
Description
The 10TCC-PCTN-4GU+10G is a core type 10-port TDM channel module with pluggable
client interfaces and one tunable DWDM network interface. Based on the variant, the
network interface is fully tunable over the C band at 50GHz spacing or over the L band at
100 GHz spacing. Each channel can be tuned in the system management by using the
NE management tools.
276
10TCC-PCTN-4GU+10G
Due to the high extinction ratio the 10TCC-PCTN-4GUS+10G-LN#DC is suitable for
links with a large amount of amplifiers and low OSNR. The 10TCC-PCTN-4GU+10G
performs electrical multiplexing/de-multiplexing of up to ten client interface signals
onto/from one ITU-T-compliant wavelength for network transport. The module fully
complies with ITU-T G.7041, G.707 and G.709 standards.
The network interface is configurable to support OTN or SDH/SONET transport. When
configured to OTN, OTU2 or OTU2V protocols are supported. Three FEC modes may be
configured: standard FEC, proprietary enhanced FEC, and FEC bypass. The services
are mapped via GFP-T, multiplexed into an SDH/SONET frame and optionally mapped
into the payload of an OTU2 signal. The services are mapped via GFP-T and multiplexed
into an SDH/SONET signal. Each of the 10 client interfaces can be configured
individually to any of the supported rates as follows:
9 x 1GbE (1.250 Gbit/s)
10 x 1G FC (1.0625 Gbit/s)
5 x 2G FC (2.125 Gbit/s)
2 x 4G FC (4.25 Gbit/s)
The combination of any of the above services is possible as long as the total amount of
VC4/STS-3c-SPE capacity is not exceed.
The 10TCC-PCTN-4GU+10G supports comprehensive fault and performance monitoring
of line and services. The 10TCC-PCTN-4GU+10G interworks with 10TCC-PCTN4GUS+10G module variants at the far-end unprotected (client protected) or channel card
protected configurations. It operates in conjunction with most optical amplifiers and all
released optical filter modules. The 10TCC-PCTN-4GU+10G cannot be used for
regenerator applications.
It is possible to initialize/reset PM records of one layer/interface or of all layers/interfaces
at the same time.
Features
OTU2 mapping with standard FEC, proprietary enhanced FEC and FEC bypass at
10.7092 Gbit/s
Trace identifier on OTU2 layer
Virtual concatenation, according to ITU-T G.707 and G.783
Auto laser shutdown (ALS) according to ADVA Optical Networking standard on the
network port
(C-band module variants can be provisioned with enabled or disabled ALS)
o
o
network port: physical layer, OTN SM/PM/TCM, SDH/Sonet line/section layers

client ports: physical layer, PCS data layer
Frame based performance monitoring of GbE client services
Fault management:
o
network port: physical layer, OTN SM/PM/TCM layers, SDH/SONET

line/section/path layers, GFP layer
Error forwarding: selectable for insertion of error propagation code or transmitter

switch off on client ports
277
10TCC-PCTN-4GU+10G
Back-to-back cascading (without protection capability)
Configurable SDH/SONET mapping via management
network port
Ten independent, Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant interfaces

Use of SFP transceivers supporting electrical interfaces as well as gray

wavelengths, CWDM channels and DWDM channels according to ITU-T G.694
Note
Integrated, 10G very-long reach tunable DWDM interface

(10TCC-PCTN-4GU+10G-V#DC, 10TCC-PCTN-4GU+10G-V#D01-32 and 10TCCPCTN-4GU+10G-V#DL)
Integrated, 10 G long reach noise optimized tunable DWDM interface (10TCCPCTN-4GU+10G-LN#DC)
Note
Specification.
services.
Note
278
10TCC-PCTN-4GU+10G
Signal Path
Figure 202 shows the simplified functional block diagram that illustrates the signal path.
Transmit Direction
Each client port (Rx) receives the optical signal from the CPE through the client port
connectors C1-R to C10-R. These signals are converted to the electrical domain, where
the clock and data recovery is performed. The signals are transmitted through three
transmission devices, the GFP-T Framer, SDH/SONET Mapper and OTN Mapper. In the
transmission devices, the client signals are mapped via GFP, as described in ITU-T
G.709, into an SDH/SONET frame and optionally into an ODU2 signal. The ODU2 signal
is converted to OTU2 by adding monitoring overhead and FEC bytes. The OTU2 signal,
or optionally the SDH/Sonet signal is routed to the transmitter of the tunable network port.
The transmitter converts the electrical signal back to an optical signal at a tuned DWDM
wavelength, and the optical signal is transmitted out the N-T connector onto the network
fiber.
Receive Direction
The network port (Rx) receives the signal at a DWDM wavelength through the N-R
connector from the network fiber. The optical signal is converted to the electrical domain,
where the clock and data recovery is performed. The signal is transmitted through three
transmission devices, the OTN Mapper, SDH/Sonet Mapper and GFP Framer. In the
transmission devices, the OTU2 signal is de-mapped to ODU2 in the OTN Mapper and
then to the SDH/SONET Mapper. The SDH/SONET Mapper maps the ODU2 signal to
SDH/SONET containers, where also virtual concatenation is performed. In the GFP
Framer, the client signal is converted and then demultiplexed into ten individual signals.
Each client signal is sent to the SFP transceiver of the corresponding client interface.
The client transmitters convert the electrical signals back to optical signals and transmit
them through the client port connectors C1-R to C10-R to the CPE.
279
10TCC-PCTN-4GU+10G
Figure 202: 10TCC-PCTN-4GU+10G Functional Block Diagram
Specifications
280
10TCC-PCTN-4GUS+10G
10TCC-PCTN-4GUS+10G
Figure 203: Example of a 10TCC-PCTN-4GUS+10G-LN#DC Front View
281
10TCC-PCTN-4GUS+10G
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 10TCC-PCTN-4GUS+10G module
Table 23: 10TCC-PCTN-4GUS+10G Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
transmit
Mod
receive
C1
C1
client port 1
C2
C2
client port 2
C3
C3
client port 3
C4
C4
client port 4
C5
C5
client port 5
C6
C6
client port 6
C7
C7
client port 7
C8
C8
client port 8
C9
C9
client port 9
C10
C10
client port 10
network port
Variants
The 10TCC-PCTN-4GUS+10G module is available in three variants:
network interface operational specification. The front view of the 10TCC-PCTN4GUS+10G-LN#DC is illustrated in Figure 203 as an example.
Description
The 10TCC-PCTN-4GUS+10G is a core type 10-port TDM channel module with
pluggable client interfaces and one tunable DWDM network interface.
Based on the variant, the network interface is fully tunable over the C band at 50GHz
spacing or L band at 100GHz spacing. Each channel can be tuned in the system
management by using the NE management tools.
Due to the high extinction ratio the 10TCC-PCTN-4GUS+10G-LN#DC is suitable for
links with a large amount of amplifiers and low OSNR.
282
10TCC-PCTN-4GUS+10G
The 10TCC-PCTN-4GUS+10G performs electrical multiplexing/de-multiplexing of up to
ten client interface signals onto/from one ITU-T-compliant wavelength for network
transport. The module fully complies with ITU-T G.7041, G.707 and G.709 standards.
The network port is configurable to support OTN or SDH/SONET transport. Three FEC
modes may be configured: standard FEC, proprietary enhanced FEC, and FEC bypass.
The services are mapped via GFP-T, multiplexed into an SDH/SONET frame and
optionally mapped into the payload of an OTU2 signal.
Each of the 10 client interfaces can be configured individually to any of the supported
rates as follows:
9 x 1GbE (1.250 Gbit/s)
10 x 1G FC (1.0625 Gbit/s)
5 x 2G FC (2.125 Gbit/s)
2 x 4G FC (4.25 Gbit/s)
10 x STM-1/OC-3 (155.52 Mbit/s)
10 x STM-4/OC-12 (622.08 Mbit/s)
3 x STM-16/OC-48 (2488.32 Mbit/s)
The combination of any of the above services is possible as long as the total amount of
VC4/STS-3c-SPE capacity is not exceed.
The 10TCC-PCTN-4GUS+10G supports comprehensive fault and performance
monitoring of line and services.
The 10TCC-PCTN-4GUS+10G interworks with 10TCC-PCTN-4GU+10G module
variants at the far-end in unprotected, client protected, and channel card protected
configurations. For channel card protection configurations interworking within a node (a
protection group) is not supported. It operates in conjunction with most optical amplifiers
and all released optical filter modules.
The 10TCC-PCTN-4GUS+10G cannot be used as a regenerator, but works together with
WCC-PCTN-10G as regenerator.
It is possible to initialize/reset PM records of one layer/interface or of all layers/interfaces
at the same time.
Features
OTU2 mapping with standard FEC, proprietary enhanced FEC, and FEC bypass at
10.7092 Gbit/s
Trace identifier on OTU2 layers
1+1 multiplex section protection (MSP) according to ITU-T G.841/6.7

SDH trail protection / SONET linear APS protection according to Telcordia
GR-253;
revertive protection switching
Versatile switched protection (in conjunction with the RSM-SF, RSM-OLM and
VSM), <10 s restoration time
Auto laser shutdown (ALS) according to ADVA Optical Networking standard on

network port (C-band modules can be provisioned with enabled or disabled ALS)
283
10TCC-PCTN-4GUS+10G
network port: physical layer, OTN SM/PM/TCM, SDH/Sonet line/section

layers
Frame based performance monitoring of GbE client services
Fault management:
network port: physical layer, OTN SM/PM/TCM layers, SDH/SONET

line/section/path layers, GFP layer
Error forwarding: selectable to insertion of error propagation code or laser off on client
ports
EFEC interoperable with WCC-PCTN-10G modules (for feeder/regenerator

applications); EFEC not interoperable with the EFEC on the 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G
module
In-band DCN management via OTU on the network interface
Back-to-back cascading (without protection capability)
Configurable SDH/SONET mapping via management
network port
Loop-timing on SDH/SONET level, required for interworking with SDH/SONET

networks


Note
Integrated, 10 G very-long reach tunable DWDM interface

(10TCC-PCTN-4GUS+10G-V#DC, 10TCC-PCTN-4GUS+10G-V#DL)
Integrated, 10 G long reach noise optimized tunable DWDM interface (10TCCPCTN-4GUS+10G-LN#DC)
Note
284
10TCC-PCTN-4GUS+10G
Specification.
services.
Note
Signal Path
The following figure shows the simplified functional block diagram that illustrates the
285
10TCC-PCTN-4GUS+10G
Figure 204: 10TCC-PCTN-4GUS+10G Functional Block Diagram
Transmit Direction
286
10TCC-PCTN-4GUS+10G
Each client port (Rx) receives the optical signal from the CPE through the client port
connectors C1-R to C10-R. These signals are converted to the electrical domain, where
clock and data recovery is performed. The signals are transmitted through three
transmission devices, the GFP-T Framer, SDH/SONET Mapper and OTN Mapper. In the
transmission devices, the client signals are mapped via GFP, as described in ITU-T
G.709, into an SDH/SONET frame and optionally into an ODU2 signal. The ODU2 signal
is converted to OTU2 by adding monitoring overhead and FEC bytes. The OTU2 signal,
or optionally the SDH/Sonet signal is routed to the transmitter of the tunable network port.
The transmitter converts the electrical signal back to an optical signal at a tuned DWDM
wavelength, and the optical signal is transmitted out the N-T connector onto the network
fiber.
Receive Direction
The network port (Rx) receives the signal at a DWDM wavelength through the N-R
connector from the network fiber. The optical signal is converted to the electrical domain,
where the clock and data recovery is performed. The signal is transmitted through three
transmission devices, the OTN Mapper, SDH/Sonet Mapper and GFP Framer. In the
transmission devices, the OTU2 signal is de-mapped to ODU2 in the OTN Mapper and
then to the SDH/SONET Mapper. The SDH/SONET Mapper maps the ODU2 signal to
SDH/SONET containers, where also virtual concatenation is performed. In the GFP
Framer, the client signal is converted and then demultiplexed into ten individual signals.
Each client signal is sent to the SFP transceiver of the corresponding client interface.
The client transmitters convert the electrical signals back to optical signals and transmit
them through the client port connectors C1-R to C10-R to the CPE.
Specifications
287
10TCC-PCN-2G7US+10G
10TCC-PCN-2G7US+10G
Figure 205: Example of a 10TCC-PCN-2G7US+10G Front View
288
10TCC-PCN-2G7US+10G
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 10TCC-PCN-2G7US+10G module
Table 24: 10TCC-PCN-2G7US+10G Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
transmit
Mod
receive
C1
C1
client port 1
C2
C2
client port 2
C3
C3
client port 3
C4
C4
client port 4
C5
C5
client port 5
C6
C6
client port 6
C7
C7
client port 7
C8
C8
client port 8
C9
C9
client port 9
C10
C10
client port 10
NE
operating state of the network port east
NE
network port east
NW
operating state of the network port west
NW
network port west
Description
The 10TCC-PCN-2G7US+10G is a core type 10-port 10G Add Drop Multiplexer (ADM)
channel module with ten client and two network pluggable interfaces. It performs
electrical multiplexing and de-multiplexing of up to ten client interface signals of lower
rate services onto and from one DWDM/CWDM channel (a specific ITU-T compliant
wavelength).
This module can be used as a single muxponder, two muxponders, or a single ADM
function within an ADM network of modules. The ADM function provides up to 10
interfaces for client signals to be added and dropped or passed through and transported
over the ADM network (which is a sub-network of the core optical network). The ADM
configuration can utilize one or both Network ports. The ADM function interfaces to the
customer premise equipment using the Client ports and interfaces to the core optical
transport network using one or both Network ports. The single muxponder configuration
can utilize up to 8 Client ports (depending on the client service type) and a single Network
port. When using the module as two muxponders, each of the two muxponders can utilize
up to 8 Client ports (allowing use of all 10 Client ports across the two muxponder
functions) and a single Network port. Each muxponder function interfaces to the
customer premise equipment using the Client ports and interfaces to the core optical
289
10TCC-PCN-2G7US+10G
transport network using one of the Network ports. Since the Client ports support lower
rate services (lower than 10Gbit/s), the module cannot be used as a regenerator.
This module provides transport of up to eight GbE services (including synchronous GbE),
up to eight STM-1/OC-3, up to eight STM-4/OC-12, up to four STM-16/OC-48, or up to
four OTU1 services (or some mix of a number of these services) on the Client port if one
Network port is configured. Up to ten GbE services (including synchronous GbE), up to
ten STM-1/OC-3, up to ten STM-4/OC-12, up to eight STM-16/OC-48, or up to eight
OTU1 sevices (or some mix of a number of these services) can be transported with two
Network ports configured.
The 10TCC-PCN-2G7US+10G supports path protection and Client Channel Card
Protection (CCCP). Protection for each protected service can be enabled or disabled.
This module supports provisioning of an ADVA Optical Networking proprietary Fast
Recovery ALS (FR-ALS) on the Network ports. The FR-ALS implements a faster
recovery of the transmitter (pulses in 5 sec) when the received signal is detected. The
Client ports support standard ALS for SDH/SONET services.
Performance monitoring and fault management of physical layer alarms and servicerelated alarms are also supported.
Disparity Correction for GbE services with non-compliant 802.3 idle sequences can be
enabled or disabled in the egress direction (Tx) from the Network ports to the Client ports.
The ADM configuration can support up to eight Client ports for a single Network port, or
up to all ten Client ports when both Network ports are installed. Each client service can
be added and dropped from either Network port to one of the Client ports. Services can
also pass through from one Network port to the other Network port. The figure below
shows a functional diagram of the 10TCC-PCN-2G7US+10G module.
Figure 206: 10TCC-PCN-2G7+10G Functional Diagram
In a core optical transport network, the following applications are currently supported:
Single or Dual Muxponder

o
290
Unprotected single or dual muxponder (each muxponder function utilizes one

Network port) multiplexes eight client services for a single muxponder or up to
ten client services for dual muxponders with a mixture of supported services
Single or dual muxponders with Client Channel Card Protection for up to eight
Client Channel Card protected services for a single muxponder or up to ten
Client Channel Card protected client services for dual muxponders with a
mixture of suppoerted services
10TCC-PCN-2G7US+10G
Add-Drop Multiplexer (ADM)

o
ADM terminal node (one Network port) multiplexing up to eight unprotected

client services with a mixture of suppoorted services
ADM node (both Network ports) multiplexing up to ten unprotected client
services (maximum of eight per Network port) with a mixture of supported
services
ADM node (both Network ports) with Path Protection for up to ten client services
(a maximum of eight Path Protected client services) with a mixture of supported
services
ADM node (both Network ports on two modules) with Client Channel Card
Protection for up to ten Client Channel Card protected client services with a
mixture of supported services
The 10TCC-PCN-2G7US+10G module is supported by the network

Note
Features
The module supports the following features:
Client service ODU mappings/termination

o
o
o
o
o
o
ODUs are cross-connected to provide add-drop, pass-through, and local

connections:
o
o
o
o
GbE TTT encoded using GMP into ODU0

STM-1/OC-3 using GMP into ODU0
STM-4/OC-12 using GMP into ODU0
STM-16/OC-48 using BMP into ODU1
OTU terminated transporting ODU1
OTU1 OPU terminated de-multiplexing up to two ODU0s
An add-drop connection is from a Client port to a Network port.

A pass-through connection is from a Network port to the other Network port.
A local (C-to-C) connection is from a Client port to another Client port.
A local connection is limited to a GbE (mapped into an ODU0) on a Client port
connected to an ODU0 de-multiplexed from a OTU1 on a different Client port.
Service protection type:

o
o
Path Protection
ECC:
o
o
GCCx for Client and Network ports

SDCC for Client ports
Fault Management and Performance Monitoring (PM)

o
o
o
Physical Layer
Service Layer (OTN, SDH/SONET, and Ethernet)
FEC PMs
Disparity Correction for GbE services with non-compliant 802.3 idle sequences in the
egress direction (Tx) from the Network ports to the Client ports.
Jitter and wander compliance with SyncE standard
291
10TCC-PCN-2G7US+10G
Facility and terminal loopback for each Client port and the Network ports


Note
Two independent, Extended Form-factor Pluggable (XFP) MSA compliant interfaces


Note
Interface specification depends on the SFP transceiver (SFP) and XFP transceiver (XFP)
used. For details about the individual SFP and XFP transceiver types, refer to the
Pluggable Transceiver Module Specification.
Unused transceiver cages can remain empty. An unconnected client or network interface
or the absence of an SFP transceiver or XFP transceiver does not affect operation of the
terminated services.
Note
SFP and XFP cages should only be populated with pluggable

transceivers that are specifically intended for the channel module. These
must be approved by ADVA Optical Networking. If you use nonapproved SFPs and/or XFPs in conjunction with the channel module,
ADVA Optical Networking cannot guarantee the behavior of the module.
When a client or network interface is not used, the corresponding SFP or
XFP cage does not need to be populated with an pluggable transceiver,
but should be covered with a dust protective plug.
Signal Path
Figure 204 on p.286 shows the simplified functional block diagram that illustrates the
292
10TCC-PCN-2G7US+10G
Figure 207: 10TCC-PCN-2G7US+10G Functional Block Diagram
Transmit Direction
In the transmit (ingress) direction (from Client port to Network port), the following takes
place:
293
10TCC-PCN-2G7US+10G
Each Client port receiver (Rx) receives the optical signals from the CPE through the
Client port connectors C1-R through C10-R. These signals are converted to the electrical
domain and clock and data recovery is performed. All non-OTN signals are encoded,
synchronized and mapped into a Lower Order (LO) ODU signal by the Client
Termination/ODU Mapper. The LO ODU Cross-Connect connects LO ODUs from Client
ports and Network ports. The Network OTU2 Termination/LO ODU Multiplexer
multiplexes the LO ODUs into a Higher Order ODU for each of the two Network ports.
This OTU2 signal is routed to the XFP transceivers of the Network East port (NE) and/or
the Network West port (NW). Each transmitter (Tx) converts the electrical signal to an
optical signal and transmits it through the NE-T and/or the NW-T connector onto the link.
Alternatively, a client service mapped into a LO ODU can be cross-connected to another
Client port to support a local C-to-C service.
Receive Direction
In the receive (egress) direction (from Network port to Client port), the following takes
place:
The Network port receivers (Rx) receive the OTU2 framed 10G signal through the NE-R
and/or NW-R connectors from the link. The signal is converted to the electrical domain
and clock and data recovery is performed by the Network OTU2 Termination/LO ODU
Multiplexer. The Network OTU2 Termination/LO LDU Multiplexer demultiplexes the LO
ODUs from the OTU2. The LO ODU Cross-connect connects LO ODUs from Client and
Network ports. The Client Termination/LO ODU Mapper de-maps the client signal from
the LO ODU (if the client service is an OTU1, then the LO ODU1 is transparently place in
an OTU1 signal on the Client port). The client signal is decoded, serialized and fed into
the SFP transceiver of the corresponding Client port. The transmitters (Tx) convert the
electrical signals to optical signals and transmit them through the Client port connectors
C1-T through C10-T to the CPE. Alternatively, a LO ODU de-multiplexed from a Network
port can be cross-connected to the other Network port to support a pass-through service.
Specifications
294
10TCC-PCN-3GSDI+10G
10TCC-PCN-3GSDI+10G
Figure 208: Example of a 10TCC-PCN-3GSDI+10G Front View
Figure 209:
Faceplate Markings
This table lists all abbreviations on the 10TCC-PCN-3GSDI+10G module faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 25: 10TCC-PCN-3GSDI+10G Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Ports for Pluggable

Transceivers
Mod
C1
C1
client port 1
C2
C2
client port 2
295
10TCC-PCN-3GSDI+10G
Table 25: 10TCC-PCN-3GSDI+10G Faceplate Markings
C3
C3
client port 3
C4
C4
client port 4
C5
C5
client port 5
C6
C6
client port 6
C7
C7
client port 7
C8
C8
client port 8
C9
C9
client port 9
C10
C10
client port 10
NE

east
NE
network port east
NW

west
NW
network port west
NOTE: One client port may carry one bidirectional or two independent unidirectional
services (depending on the SFP transceiver used). Consequently, the LEDs indicate the
status of two individual services in case of two unidirectional services being supported.
Contrary to this, the LEDs indicate the status of one service in case of bidirectional
services being supported.
Description
The 10TCC-PCN-3GSDI+10G is a core type 10-port 10G digital video add-drop
multiplexer (ADM) module with ten client and two network pluggable interfaces. It
optimizes real-time transport of digital SD and HD video content in native format by
multiplexing lower-speed video, audio, and data onto an ITU-T wavelength on a single
module. The front view of the module fully populated with 10 x SFP and 2 x XFP
transceiver modules is illustrated in Figure 208 on p.295.
The 10TCC-PCN-3GSDI+10G is capable of transmitting a range of raw and
uncompressed video and audio formats over metropolitan-area and regional distances.
Supported client formats include SD-SDI, HD-SDI, 3G-SDI, DVB-ASI, and MADI digital
audio as unidirectional services, as well as GbE as bidirectional service. Multiple low rate
client services are multiplexed into a specific ITU-compliant WDM wavelength and
transmitted over a 10G OTU-2 network interface with full transperency for uncompressed
video signals.
The client-side interface cages may be equipped with a mixture of optical and electrical
SFP interface types. The choice of video SFP dual transmitters and video SFP dual
receivers or GbE SFP transceivers (SFP plugs) depends on the customer equipment.
Refer to the specification of this module in the Module and System Specification for more
information about plug selection. Each of the client interfaces can be provisioned
individually to any service supported by the SFP plugs.
The module features an Adaptive Threshold Control (ATC) algorithm per network
interface to optimize performance of network transceivers. It supports in-service insertion
or removal of any SFP plugs without affecting other active ports.
296
10TCC-PCN-3GSDI+10G
The OTU2 network signal can contain up to 16 independent services per direction. These
independent services can be used in add/drop, pass-through, as well as drop and
continue configurations. Any client service can be routed to either of the network
interfaces. The ADM configuration can utilize one or both network ports. The ADM
function connects to the customer premise equipment by using the client ports and
connects to the core optical transport network by using one or both network ports. These
ADM cross-connecting capabilities are currently supported:
Bidirectional service add/drop (unprotected and protected)
Bidirectional service pass-through
Unidirectional service add (unprotected and protected)
Unidirectional service drop (unprotected and protected)
Unidirectional service pass-through
Unidirectional service drop (unprotected and protected) and unidirectional continue
Standard Forward Error Correction according to ITU-T (G.709 GFEC) and enhanced FEC
(EFEC) according to ITU-T G.975.1 are supported on network ports. FEC functions can
also be disabled.
The 10TCC-PCN-3GSDI+10G module supports ADM path protection, client channel
card protection (CCCP), and client channel card protection across diverse shelves.
Service management, administration, fault management, performance monitoring, and
alarm generation is independently performed for the network ports and for each client
service, including physical layer monitoring of the XFP and SFP plugs. The 10TCC-PCN3GSDI+10G module supports facility loopbacks only for bidirectional services (network
services and GbE client services). Loopbacks cannot be supported for unidirectional
client services. In-band management channels (DCN) are provided for the OTU2 network
services only.
The 10TCC-PCN-3GSDI+10G module is supported by the network

Note
Features
The module supports these features:
Client services:
o
o
o
o
o
o
MADI (125 Mbit/s)

SD-SDI Level C (270 Mbit/s)
DVB-ASI (270 Mbit/s)
HD-SDI (1.4835 (1.485 / 1.001) Gbit/s and 1.485 Gbit/s)
3G-SDI (2.967 (2.97 / 1.001) Gbit/s and 2.970 Gbit/s)
GbE (1250 Mbit/s)
Note
If a client port is configured for 3G-SDI with a data rate of 2.97 Gbit/s, it
enables the transmission of HD-SDI (1.485 Gbit/s) and SD-SDI (270
Mbit/s) as well. Be aware that in this application, the full bandwidth of
3G-SDI is allocated, and that the slew rate of the electrical SD-SDI
signal is faster than specified in the SMTPE standard.
Network Service: OTU2
Forward Error Correction (FEC) for network interface OTU2 service
297
10TCC-PCN-3GSDI+10G
o
o
o
GFEC: standard G.709 Reed-Salomon (RS) FEC

EFEC: Enhanced FEC standard G.975 1.4
Option to enabling and disabling the GFEC or EFEC
Mapping/multiplexing of client services and mapping to the network interfaces
Add-Drop Multiplexer (ADM) cross-connecting capabilities (services are crossconnected to provide add-drop, pass-through, and local connections)
Service protection schemes:

o
o
o
o
Client layer protection

Path protection (applicable for both optical and electrical pluggable transceivers)
Client channel card protection (applicable for optical pluggable transceivers)
Channel card protection across diverse shelves (applicable for optical pluggable
transceivers)
Mixing of protection schemes on one module is possible, but cascading two

schemes is not possible.
Versatile switched protection for restoration (in conjunction with the VSM, RSMOLM, and RSM-SF)
OTN GCCx Embedded Communication Channel (ECC) for network OTU2 service
Fault Management:
o
o
Physical coding sublayer for GBE and physical layer on the client services
Physical layer and OTN layer on the network ports
Performance Monitoring
o
Physical layer (applicable only if optical SFPs are equipped) and physical
coding sublayer for GBE on the client services
Physical layer and OTN layer on the network ports
Facility loopback at the Network port and facility loopback at the Client ports for
bidirectional services only
Ten independent Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) interfaces using LC connectors

for fiber termination or HD-BNC connectors for copper connections
Support of
o
o
MSA-compliant SFP transceivers for bidirectional communication

Video SFP dual transmitter and SFP dual receiver modules for unidirectional
communication
For information about the types of SFP transceivers, SFP dual transmitters and SFP dual
receivers (unidirectional dual SFPs), and data rates supported by the client interfaces,
refer to the 10TCC-PCN-3GSDI+10G specification included in the Module and System
Specification.
Note
The module uses a single PCB only. This implies that the two rows of
client SFPs are 180 rotated against each other. Thus the connector
positions of an SFP module would be reversed if the patched plug would
be removed, rotated, and inserted to a SFP cage of the other row.
Figure 210 provides information about modeling the client ports.
298
10TCC-PCN-3GSDI+10G
Figure 210: 10TCC-PCN-3GSDI+10G Entity Model
Two independent extended form-factor pluggable (XFP) MSA-compliant interfaces

Support of gray, CWDM, and DWDM XFP transceiver modules
For information about XFP transceiver types, data rates, and services supported by the
network interfaces, refer to the 10TCC-PCN-3GSDI+10G specification included in the
Note
The module uses a single PCB only. This implies that the two cages of
network XFPs are 180 rotated against each other. Thus the connector
positions of an XFP transceiver would be reversed if the patched plug
would be removed, rotated and inserted into the other XFP cage.
Pluggable Transceivers, Transmitters and Receivers

Interface specification depends on the pluggable transceiver, transmitters, and receivers
used by the 10TCC-PCN-3GSDI+10G. For details on the individual SFP transceiver,
SFP transmitter, and SFP receiver module types (SFP modules), as well as XFP
transceiver module types (XFP modules), refer to the combined Pluggable Transceiver
Module Specification.
299
10TCC-PCN-3GSDI+10G
Unused SFP and XFP cages can remain empty. An unconnected client or network
interface or the absence of an SFP or XFP module does not affect operation of the
Note

transceivers, transmitters and receivers that are specifically intended for
the channel module. These must be approved by ADVA Optical
Networking. If you use non-approved SFPs and/or XFPs in conjunction
with the channel module, ADVA Optical Networking cannot guarantee
the behavior of the module. When a client or network interface is not
used, the corresponding SFP or XFP cage does not need to be populated
with an SFP or XFP module, but should be covered with a dust
protective plug.
Signal Path
This subsection provides two typical examples of data signal flow through the module
when transporting unidirectional video and audio client services or transporting
bidirectional GbE client services.
Signal Path for Unidirectional Client Servies

signal path when unidirectional video and audio client services are transported. In case of
video and audio services, the different client interface directions may belong to different
services. The signal path is described below.
300
10TCC-PCN-3GSDI+10G
Figure 211: 10TCC-PCN-3GSDI+10G Functional Block Diagram - Unidirectional
Services
Transmit Direction
The signal path in client ingress direction (from the client ports to the network ports) is as
follows:
Each client port receiver (Rx) receives a client video/audio service from the CPE through
the dedicated client port connectors Cn-Rx (n=1...10; x=1...2). Received optical signals
are routed to the cross-point switch which connects the signals in accordance with the
required application to
a network interface Tx (as unicast service or multicast service) and/or
a client interface Tx using one of the four available video re-clocker data paths as
constant monitoring service
In the network direction, the individual services are passed to the multiplexer either as an
unprotected service or constantly bridged service. The multiplexer performs the
multiplexing and mapping functions. The resulting OTU2 framed 10G signal with optional
EFEC/GFEC coding exits the Network East port (NE) and/or the Network West port
(NW). This OTU2 signal is then converted by the respective XFP transceiver from the
electrical to the optical domain and transmitted through the NE-T and/or NW/T
connectors onto the network link.
In addition, a client video/audio service can be cross-connected to another client port to
support a local client to client monitoring.
301
10TCC-PCN-3GSDI+10G
Receive Direction
The signal path in network ingress direction (from the network ports to the client ports) is
as follows:
The network port receivers (Rx) receive the OTU2 framed 10G signal through the NE-R
and/or NW-R connectors from the network link with optional EFEC/GFEC decoding. The
OTU2 network signal is converted to the electrical signal. The signal is passed to the demultiplexer where the OPU2 payload is de-mapped and de-multiplexed. The data rate of
each client signal is recovered in client egress direction. The individual client signals are
routed to the cross point switch which connects them as required to
the client interfaces Tx (as unprotected or protected unicast/multicast service) and/or
the other network interface Tx to support a pass-through service.
The signals from the Cross Point Switch are then transmitted through the dedicated client
port connectors Cn-Tx (n=1...10; x=1...2) to the CPE.
Signal Path for Bidirectional GbE Client Services

signal path when bidirectional GbE client services are transported. In case of GbE
services, both directions of an client interface (Rx and Tx) are used. The signal path is
described below.
Figure 212: 10TCC-PCN-3GSDI+10G Functional Block Diagram - Bidirectional
Services
302
10TCC-PCN-3GSDI+10G
Transmit Direction
The signal path in client ingress direction (from the client ports to the network ports) is as
follows:
Each client port receiver (Rx) receives a GbE client service from the CPE through the
dedicated client port connectors C1-R through C10-R. Received optical signals are
converted to an electrical signal by the SFP receiver optics and routed to the cross-point
switch which connects the signals in accordance with the required application to a
network interface Tx. In the network direction, the individual electrical signals are passed
to the multiplexer which performs the multiplexing and mapping functions. The resulting
OTU2 framed 10G signal with optional EFEC/GFEC coding exits to the Network East
port (NE) and/or the Network West port (NW). Each transmitter (Tx) converts the
electrical signal back to an optical signal and transmits it through the NE-T and/or NW-T
connector onto the network link.
Receive Direction
The signal path in network ingress direction (from the network ports to the client ports) is
as follows:
The network port receivers (Rx) receive the OTU2 framed 10G signal through the NE-R
and/or NW-R connectors from the network link with optional EFEC/GFEC decoding. The
OTU2 network signal is converted to the electrical signal. This signal is passed to the demultiplexer where the OPU2 payload is de-mapped and de-multiplexed. The data rate of
each client signal is recovered in client egress direction. The individual client signals are
routed to the cross point switch which connects them to the dedicated client port SFP
transceivers. The client transmitters convert the electrical signals back to optical signals
and transmit them through the client port connectors C1-T through C10-T to the CPE.
Alternatively, individual client signals can also be connected to the other network
interface Tx to support a pass-through service.
Specifications
303
10WXC-PCN-10G
10WXC-PCN-10G
Figure 213: Example of a 10WXC-PCN-10G Front View
304
10WXC-PCN-10G
Faceplate Markings
This table lists all abbreviations and their meanings on the 10WXC-PCN-10G module
faceplate.
Table 26: 10WXC-PCN-10G Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Pluggable Optical Interfaces
transmit
Mod
receive
P1
operating status of the optical interface 1
Optical interface 1
P2
Optical interface 2
P3
Optical interface 3
P4
Optical interface 4
P5
Optical interface 5
P6
Optical interface 6
P7
Optical interface 7
P8
Optical interface 8
P9
Optical interface 9
P10
10
Optical interface 10
Description
The 10WXC-PCN-10G is a 10 x 10G ODU-cross-connection module with 100G capacity
used to switch high-speed optical signals in an optical transport network (OTN). It
performs cross-connect of ODU2/2e/1/0 between any OTU2 or OTU2e port on the same
module in accordance with ITU-T G.709. In addition, this module is capable of mapping
10GbE-LAN client signals into ODU2e/OTU2e, and 10GbE-WAN, STM-64, OC-192
client signals into OPU2/ODU2/OTU2.
The 10WXC-PCN-10G module provides ten extended form-factor pluggable (XFP)
optical interfaces that support a range of different XFP MSA standard compliant
transceiver modules (XFP transceiver). The front view of the module, equipped with ten
XFP transceivers, is illustrated in Figure 213 on p.304.
All optical interfaces are equal and can be individually used for client or network port
operation to any of the supported port rates and protocols using the management
software. The choice of which XFP transceiver to use depends on the optical
characteristics of the connected customer equipment. Refer to the specification of this
module in the Module and System Specification for more information about plug
selection.
Each of the 10 optical interfaces can be configured individually to any of the supported
services. Any combination of the supported services is possible.
305
10WXC-PCN-10G
The 10WXC-PCN-10G may operate as a stand-alone module interfacing third party
equipment or it can interface other FSP 3000R7 modules, thus forming flexible network
solutions.
Standard FEC (GFEC) and Enhanced FEC (EFEC) for OTN signals is supported. The
10WXC-PCN-10G provides clock and data recovery and performs 3R signal conditioning
at any supported data rate by default. Service management, administration, fault
management, performance monitoring, and alarm generation is independently performed
for each optical interface, including physical layer monitoring of the XFP transceiver
modules. In addition, in-band DCN management is provided.
The 10WXC-PCN-10G is typically used as ODU2 or ODU2e cross-connection for the
2WCC-PCN-10G and 10TCC-PCN-2G7US+10G modules using OTU2 or OTU2e. It
may also be used as a point-to-point transponder for the 2WCC-PCN-10G using 10GbELAN. This module allows up to ten 10G services to be cross-connected.
The 10WXC-PCN-10G module is able to operate in combination with most of the FSP
3000R7 full-band C-band amplifiers, including the RAMAN-C10, and can be deployed in
all released CWDM, DWDM, and hybrid network architectures.
The 10WXC-PCN-10G can only be used in either the NEBS-compliant 9HU shelf or the
ETSI-compliant 9HU shelf (maximum. +45 C ambient temperature).
Using the 10WXC-PCN-10G module in the SH7HU shelf or any variant of the
SH1HU shelf is not allowed due to the high power consumption and heat
dissipation. The 10WXC-PCN-10G will remain in a low power consumption state,
and service provisioning is not permitted. The management interface will report a
mismatch condition when installed in these shelves.
The 10WXC-PCN-10G module is supported by the network control unit

Note
Installation Rules
It is important to follow these rules while operating the 10WXC-PCN-10G module in the
SH9HU shelf. They are required to ensure proper module heat dissipation.
Ensure that the common equipment module (CEM) is running on firmware version
121.2.1 or higher. The module should not be operated on older firmware with a slower
fan speed.
Ensure that the 10WXC-PCN-10G module(s) are running on firmware version

121.6.3 or higher.
Close all unused open slots in the shelf using dummy modules to ensure maximum
airflow.
Features
Major features specific to the 10WXC-PCN-10G module are:
306
Operations: stand-alone 100G cross-connection operation
10WXC-PCN-10G
Capacity stand-alone cross-connection:

o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
10 x ODU2 services (transport of 5 x ODU2 services)

10 x ODU2e services (transport of 5 x ODU2e services)
10 x 10GbE-LAN services, cross-connected at ODU2e level (transport of 5 x
10GbE-LAN services)
10 x 10GbE-WAN services (transport of ODU2 services)
10 x STM-64 services (transport of ODU2 services)
10 x OC-192 services (transport of ODU2 services)
or any mix of these services
Mapping and Multiplexing schemes for OTN cross-connection:

o
o
o
Mapping of ODU2 into OTU2

Mapping of ODU2e into OTU2e
Multiplexing schemes: OTU2/ODU2/OPU2/ODTUG2/(4x)ODTU12/ODU1 (4x
ODU1) and OTU2/ODU2/OPU2/ODTUG2/(8x)ODTU2.1/ODU0 (8x ODU0)
Non-blocking cross-connection of ODU2, ODU2e, ODU1 or ODU0 between any
ports
OTN mapping schemes for client signals

Bit synchronous mapping of 10 GbE-LAN into OPU2e
FEC for OTN services:

o
o
o
ITU-T G.709 compliant Reed-Solomon FEC (GFEC), capable of correcting BER

<5x10-5
Enhanced FEC (EFEC), capable of correcting BER <1x10-3
Option to enabling and disabling the GFEC or EFEC
Service Protection: Supports Client Layer Protection
In-band management:
one Embedded Communication Channel (ECC) per port
Fault Monitoring (FM) and Performance Monitoring (PM) on the optical interfaces:
o
o
o

FEC layer
Optical Interface Characteristics
Ten independent, extended form-factor pluggable (XFP) MSA compliant interfaces

for XFP transceiver modules (field replaceable units)

Note
307
10WXC-PCN-10G
Interface specification depends on the XFP transceiver (XFP) used. For details about the
Specification.
Unused transceiver cages can remain empty. An unconnected optical interface or the
absence of an XFP transceiver does not affect operation of the terminated services.
Note
XFP cages should only be populated with pluggable transceivers that are
guarantee the behavior of the module. When an optical interface is not
an pluggable transceiver, but should be covered with a dust protective
plug.
Signal Path
Figure 214 on p.309 provides a simplified functional block diagram that illustrates the
signal path through the 10WXC-PCN-10G module. The ingress and egress signal paths
are described below.
308
10WXC-PCN-10G
Figure 214: Functional Block Diagram of the 10WXC-PCN-10G
Client /network ports
1 to 10
Backplane
Power
10 WXC -PCN -10 G

OTN Framer
FIC
FPGA 1
ODU 2e
OTU 2/2e
External interface
De -mapper
FEC
Rx
e
Client
Mux
XFP
ODU 2
ODU 2
ODU 1/0
Demapper
Segmen tation
Cell
ODU 2
ODU 2e
OTU 2/2e
Tx
o
Mapper
FEC
Tx
Client
Demux
5 x XFP
transceivers
ODU 2
ODU 2
ODU 1/0
Mapper
Reas sembly
Cell
Cell
Routing
Internal sw itching
Internal sw itching
Rx
18 x 10 .3
Cell
Reorder
ODU 2
ODU 2/2e/1/0
OTN -OH
SAR
5 x OTU 2
OTN Framer
ODU
Cross connect
FPGA 2
ODU 2e
OTU 2/2e
External interface
De -mapper
FEC
Rx
e
Client
Mux
XFP
ODU 2
ODU 2
ODU 1/0
Demapper
Segmen tation
Cell
ODU 2
ODU 2e
OTU 2/2e
Tx
o
Mapper
FEC
Tx
Client
Demux
5 x XFP
transceivers
5 x OTU 2
ODU 2
ODU 2
Mapper
ODU 1/0
Reas sembly
Cell
Cell
Routing
Internal sw itching
Rx
18 x 10 .3
Cell
Reorder
ODU 2
ODU 2/2e/1/0
OTN -OH
SAR
SYS clocks
NET clocks
Ingress Direction (Rx)

The input signals are defined by the XFP specifications. The XFP receiver optics convert
the input signals from each input port (Rx) to an electrical signal, and clock and data
recovery is performed at any selected data rate. The regenerated OTU2/2e interface
signals are de-mapped to ODU2/2e signals. Standard ITU-T G.709 RS FEC (GFEC) or
enhanced FEC (EFEC) is carried out. 10G-LAN is bit synchronously mapped into
ODU2e. 10G-WAN, STM-64 and OC-192 signals are mapped into OPU2/ODU2/OTU2.
Egress Direction (Tx)

The reassembly of the fabric cells into ODU flows is performed at the point of signal
egress (Tx). The ODU flows are then multiplexed and mapped into OTU2/2e signals. For
10G-LAN, the client signal is de-multiplexed from the ODU2e. For 10G-WAN, STM-64,
and OC-192 the client signals are de-multiplexed from the ODU2. Optionally, GFEC or
EFEC are processed. The resulted signal exits to the XFP transmitter, where
electrical/optical conversion occurs.
309
2WCC-PCN-10G
Specifications
2WCC-PCN-10G
Figure 215: 2WCC-PCN-10G Front View
310
2WCC-PCN-10G
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 2WCC-PCN-10G faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 27: 2WCC-PCN-10G Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
transmit
Mod
receive
C1
C1
client port 1
C2
C2
client port 2
NW
operating state of the network port west
NW
network port west
NE
NE
network port east
Description
The 2WCC-PCN-10G dual 10G core transponders provide two fully functional 10 Gbps
transponders in a single-slot module. In their basic configurations, each transponder
function provides an interface to a 10 Gbps client signal for transport over a core optical
transport network. The client interfaces are customer-facing (connected to the client
equipment) and the network interfaces are network-facing (indirectly connected to the
core optical transport network via filters, ROADM equipment, amplifiers, etc.). The
module can be used as a tranponder and regenerator.
All supported services can be transmitted natively or can be mapped according to ITU-T
G.709. STM-64, OC-192, 8G FC, and 10 GbE services can be mapped into an OTU2
signal. 10 GbE services can also be mapped into an OTU1e signal or an OTU2e signal.
OTU2, OTU1e, and OTU2e services cannot be mapped. GFEC can be enabled for
OTU2, OTU1e and OTU2e services at both the client port and the network port. EFEC
with higher coding gain is only supported on the network port.
The module provides performance monitoring data at the client port as well as at the
network port for the physical layer, PCS layer (for 10GbE and 8G FC), and data layers for
SDH/SONET, 10 GbE, or the OTN layer.
All optical interfaces utilize XFP pluggable optics. Therefore, if only a single transponder
function is desired, then only one client interface and one network interface needs to be
populated with XFPs. The XFP pluggable optics provides the optical-to-electrical
conversion (and vice versa) and collection of all PHY (Physical) Layer PMs for each
interface. It also provides the Loss Of Signal (LOS) alarm monitoring.
The signal termination and OTN mapping functions are all handled by the signal
processor. There are two signal processors on the 2WCC-PCN-10G module. Each signal
processor provides the signal termination for both a client interface and a network
interface. It also provides collection of all signal level PMs and signal level alarm
monitoring for both signal interfaces.
311
2WCC-PCN-10G
Features
EFEC (G.975 I.4), GFEC, or no FEC for OTN signals
Support of 100 GHz and 50 GHz (for tunable XFPs) lasers
Supports different modes of operation
Single unprotected transponder
Dual unprotected transponder
Single internally protected transponder using Channel Protection
Dual protected transponder using client channel card protection (with

protection modules)
Single regenerator (client-to-network)
Dual regenerator (client-to-network)
Single regenerator (network-to-network) with EFEC-2 only
Supports service protection
Versatile group protection
RSM line protection
Channel protection
Client channel card protection
Supports ECC
SDH/SONET DCC for client and network interfaces
Supports management from all management interfaces
In-band DCN management via SDH/SONET and OTU2 on the client and network
interface
Supports fault management and Performance Monitoring (PM)
312
Physical layer
Service layer (SDH/SONET, OTN, and Ethernet)
FEC PMs
Physical layer, physical coding sublayer, 10 GbE layer and SDH/SONET

layers, OTN layer, FEC layer on the client port
Physical layer, physical coding sublayer, 10 GbE layer, SDH/SONET

layers, OTN layer, FEC layer on the network port
Facility loopback and terminal loopback for the client port and network port
Size: 5HU high, 4HP wide (1 slot)
2WCC-PCN-10G
Two independent, Extended Form-factor Pluggable (XFP) MSA compliant interface


Note
Two independent, Extended Form-factor Pluggable (XFP) MSA compliant interfaces


Note
Specification.
or the absence of an XFP transceiver does not affect operation of the terminated
services.
Note
guarantee the behavior of the module. When a client or network interface
is not used, the corresponding XFP cage does not need to be populated
with an pluggable transceiver, but should be covered with a dust
protective plug.
Signal Path
Figure 216 shows a simplified functional block diagram and signal path of the 2WCCPCN-10G module.
313
2WCC-PCN-10G
Figure 216: 2WCC-PCN-10G Functional Block Diagram (Simplified)
Transmit Direction
The receiver (Rx) of the client port receives any supported channel from the Customer
Premises Equipment (CPE) through the client C1-R or C2-R connector. The input signal
is converted to the electrical domain by the XFP pluggable optics. The signal is optionally
mapped into a G.709 compliant frame structure. Overhead processing as well as ingress
and egress client data performance monitoring are performed. When operating in the
OTU2 mode, the module supports standard FEC on the client port, plus standard and
enhanced FEC on the network port. The transmitter (Tx) section of the XFP pluggable
optics converts the output signal back to an optical signal and transmits any supported
channel through the network NE-T or NW-T connector to the far end of the link.
Receive Direction
The receiver (Rx) of the network port receives any supported channel through the
network NE-R or NW-R connector from the link. The optical input signal is converted to
the electrical domain by the XFP pluggable optics. If an OTN signal is received, it is demapped from the G.709 compliant frame and EFEC/FEC functions are performed.
Overhead processing and client data performance monitoring are also performed. The
resulting signal is then routed to the transmitter (Tx) of the client port. The transmitter
section of the XFP pluggable optics converts the electrical signal back to an optical one
and transmits it at a supported wavelength through client connector C1-T or C2-T to the
CPE.
314
2TWCC-PCN-2G7U
Specifications
2TWCC-PCN-2G7U
Figure 217: 2TWCC-PCN-2G7U Front View
315
2TWCC-PCN-2G7U
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 2TWCC-PCN-2G7U faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 28: 2TWCC-PCN-2G7U Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
transmit
Mod
receive
C1
operating state of client port 1
C1
client port 1
C2
operating state of client port 2
C2
client port 2
NW
operating state of network port west
NW
network port west
NE
operating state of network port east
NE
network port east
Description
The 2TWCC-PCN-2G7U is a 2.7 Gbit/s core type WDM channel module with two
pluggable client and two pluggable network interfaces. The module can operate as a
single or a dual transponder or as a multiplexer. When operating as a single transponder,
it is possible to transport one unprotected or channel protected OTU1, one STM-16/OC48/OTU1 or one STM-16/OC-48 wrapped into an OTU1. When operating as a dual
transponder, it is possible to transport two unprotected STM-16/OC-48/OTU1, or two
STM-16/OC-48 wrapped into OTU1, or two OTU1 services.
The Transponder Modes (both dual transponder and protected transponder) support the
following applications:
OTU1 to OTU1
STM-16/OC-48 to STM-16/OC-48
STM-16/OC-48 to OTU1
When operating as a 2 port Multiplexer, two mapping/multiplexing methods are available,
an SDH/SONET method and an OTN method.
When operating as a SDH/SONET multiplexer, unprotected or channel protected
transport of 2x GbE or 2x G FC or 1GbE and 1G FC or 1x 2G FC services are possible.
The client signals are multiplexed into one STM-16/OC-48 using GFP-T and continuous
concatenation. The STM-16/OC48 signal may be transported in its native form or as an
OTU1 (the STM-16/OC48 signal is wrapped into the OTU1).
2G FC can be applied at client port 1 only.
Note
The OTN multiplexing method maps GbE into an ODU0 which are multiplexed into an
OTU1. When rate limiting is not used, GBE is mapped into the ODU0 using TTT/GMP.
When rate limiting is used, GBE is mapped into ODU0 using GFP-F. The resulting
ODU0s are multiplexed into an OPU1/ODU1/OTU1 for transport.
316
2TWCC-PCN-2G7U
Both the network and client ports incorporate pluggable interfaces. Use of pluggable
optics allows support of a variety of optical variants.
This module supports client channel card protection (CCCP) for all modes and conditions
with the exception of an OTN Muxponder when rate limiting is used.
About Bi-directional Protection Switching

The operation of bi-directional protection switching without the use of an APS channel
and protocol may lead to unexpected results. When using channel protection on the
2TWCC-PCN-2G7U, there are a number of options based on MODE and network Facility
Type. Not all configurations allow for the use of an APS channel. To insure the availability
of an APS channel, these configurations are recommended:
When MODE = Transponder, Client = STM16/OC48, recommend Network = OTU1 and
APS-TYPE of SNC-N-PM.
When MODE = Transponder, Client = OTU1, recommend Network = OTU1 and APSTYPE of SNC-N-PM.
When MODE = Muxponder, Network = STM16/OC48, recommend APS-TYPE of LINE.
When MODE = Muxponder, Network = OTU1, recommend APS-TYPE of SNC-N-PM.
Features
Modes of operation:
o
Single/dual protected or unprotected transponder, protected or unprotected

muxponder with STM16/OC48 mapping/multiplexing
Protected or unprotected muxponder with ODU0 mapping and multiplexing
Mapping or mapping/multiplexing according to ITU-T G.709
ODU0 mapping/multiplexing according to ITU-T G.709
Channel protection, client channel card protection
Auto laser shutdown (ALS) according to ADVA Optical Networking standard on client
and network ports
ALS according to ITU-T G.664 on the client ports
Auto laser shutdown (ALS) can be switched off via the management
Dual-ended Optojack on client ports
Comprehensive fault and performance monitoring on the client and network ports
Forced on setting on the transmitter port of the client and network interface
Facility and terminal loopback for client and network ports
Disparity transparency (does not allow correction of running disparity errors for GbE
services)
Rate limiting for GbE services (in ODU0 mode, module limits GbE client by pausing
or discarding frames)
Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant interface using LC connectors for
fiber termination

317
2TWCC-PCN-2G7U
Note
fiber termination

Note
Interface specification depends on the SFP transceiver (SFP) used. For details about the
Specification.
or the absence of an SFP transceiver does not affect operation of the terminated
services.
Note
SFP cages should only be populated with pluggable transceivers that are
is not used, the corresponding SFP cage does not need to be populated
protective plug.
Signal Path
Figure 218 shows the 2TWCC-PCN-2G7U dual transponder functional block diagram
(simplified) and illustrates the signal path, which is described below. Figure 219 shows a
simplified functional block diagram of the transponder module when used in the protected
mode.
Transmit Direction
318
2TWCC-PCN-2G7U
The client port receiver (Rx) receives the optical CWDM/DWDM signal through the C-R
connector from the CPE. The signal is converted to the electrical domain, and clock and
data recovery is performed. STM-16/OC-48, OTU1 frame alignment is carried out. The
resulting signal can optionally be mapped into an OTU1 output signal with GFEC
according to ITU-T G.709 into an OTU1 frame with GFEC at the network interface. The
transmitter (Tx) converts the electrical output signal back to an optical signal at a specific
CWDM/DWDM wavelength and transmits it through the N-T connector onto the link.
Receive Direction
The network port receiver (Rx) receives the optical CWDM/DWDM signal through the NR connector from the link. This signal is converted to the electrical domain, and clock and
data recovery is performed. STM-16/OC-48, OTU1 frame alignment is carried out. Data
can optionally be extracted from the OTU1 frame and routed to the transmitter (Tx) of the
client port. The transmitter converts the electrical signal back to an optical one and
transmits it through the client port connector C-T to the CPE.
Figure 218: 2TWCC-PCN-2G7U Dual Transponder Block Diagram
319
2TWCC-PCN-2G7U
Figure 219: 2TWCC-PCN-2G7U Block Diagram (Protected Mode)
TDM Mode
There are two mapping/multiplexing methods, an SDH/SONET method and an OTN
method.
Figure 220 shows the functional block diagram for the SDH/SONET
mapping/multiplexing method and illustrates the signal path when the module is operating
as a multiplexer in a channel protected configuration. Figure 2 shows the functional block
diagram for the OTN mapping/multiplexing method. The signal paths are described
below.
Transmit Direction
SDH/SONET Method:
Refer to the SDH/SONET Mapping Method figure below. Each client port receiver (Rx)
receives the optical signals from the CPE through the C1-R, and/or C2-R connectors.
These signals are converted to the electrical domain, data and clock recovery is
performed and the signals are serialized.
For GFP-T encapsulated Ethernet services, the 8B/10B incoming link is validated for
signal and character synchronization and passed to the GFP-T encapsulation. The GFPT encapsulation forms GFP-T superblocks from the 8B/10B characters. GFP frame
headers are added to a group of superblocks and mapped into contiguous containers. A
contiguous VC-4-8c or STS-24c container carries a full rate FC or GbE signal. A
contiguous VC-4-16c or STS-48c container carries a full rate 2FC signal.
The container naming is dependent on use of SDH or SONET terminology. The resulting
contiguous containers are multiplexed into STM-16 or STS-48 signals. The resulting
network port signals can remain STM-16/OC-48 signals or they can be mapped into
OPU1/ODU1/OTU1signals. The network port rate is selectable to be STM-16/OC-48 or
OTU1.
320
2TWCC-PCN-2G7U
The resulting network port signal is serialized and routed to the SFP transceivers (either
NE, or NW, or both NE and NW). At the SFP devices, the Tx signal is converted from an
electrical output signal to an optical signal at specific CWDM/DWDM wavelength and
transmits it through the NW-T and NE-T ports onto the network fiber.
For unprotected applications, only one network port is needed. For protected
applications, both NE and NW are required and each carries the same traffic.
OTN Method:
In the transmit direction the following takes place:
Refer to the OTN Mapping Method figure below. Each client port receiver (Rx) receives
the optical signal from the CPE through the C1-R, and/or C2-R connections. These
signals are converted to the electrical domain, data and clock recovery is performed and
the signals are deserialized.
When rate limiting is not used, the GBE signal is mapped into an ODU0 using TTT/GMP.
When rate limiting is used, the GBE interface is decomposed to the Ethernet frames,
encapsulated into GFP-F frames, and mapped into an ODU0. The ODU0 is now
multiplexed into an OPU1 via the ODTU01 transport unit. The OPU1 is part of an ODU1
where the OTU1 overhead is added from transport.
The resulting OTU1 is serialized and routed to the network SFP transceivers (either NE
or NW or both NE and NW). At the sFP devices, the Tx signal is converted from an
electrical output signal to an optical signal at specific CWDM/SWDM wavelengths and
transmits it through the NW-T and NE-T ports onto the network fiber.
For unprotected applications only one network port is added. For protected applications
both NE and NW are required and each carries the same traffic.
Receive Direction
SDH/SONET Method:
Refer to the SDH/SONET Mapping Method figure below. The network port receivers (Rx)
receive signals at a specific CWDM/DWDM wavelength through the NW-R and NE-R
connectors from the network fiber. These signals are converted to the electrical domain,
data and clock recovery is performed and the signals are de-serialized. In unprotected
applications, only one network port is required. In channel protected applications, both
network ports are required.
The received serialized signals, from each network port, are capable of independent and
identical monitoring. In an unprotected application, only the provisioned network port is
monitored.
In protected applications, both network ports are monitored. An active signal is selected
based on a set of switching criteria. Further processing of the selected signal is the same
for both unprotected and protected applications.
If the network port is OTU-1 service type, the mapped STM-16/STS-48 signal is removed
from the OPU1. The de-mapped STM-16/STS-48 signal is de-multiplexed into its
composite VC-4-8c/STS-24c or VC-4-16c/STS-48c contiguous containers. If the network
port is a STM-16 or OC-48 service type, then the same de-multiplexing process applies
but the additional de-mapping step is not required.
321
2TWCC-PCN-2G7U
From each de-multiplexed VC-4-8c/STS-24c or VC-4-16c/STS-48c contiguous container,
the GFP frames are removed. The GFP headers are examined and removed exposing the
GFP-T superblocks. Each superblock is examined for validity. From valid superblocks,
the 8B/10B encoded characters are reconstituted from the superblocks.
For each client, the reconstituted characters are serialized and applied to the respective
SFP transmitter which converts the electrical signal back to an optical one and transmits
it through the client port connectors (C1-T and/or C2-T) to the CPE.
OTN Method:
Refer to the OTN Mapping Method figure below. The network port receivers receive
signals at a specific CWDM/DWDM wavelength through the NW-R and/or NE-R
connectors from the network fiber. These signals are converted to the electrical domain,
data an clock recovery is performed and the signals are de-serialized. In unprotected
applications, only one network port is required. In channel protected applications, both
network ports are required.
The received serialized signals, from each network port, are capable of independent and
identical monitoring. In an unprotected application, only the provisioned network port is
monitored.
In protected applications, both network ports are monitored. An active signal is selected
based on a set of switching criteria. Further processing of the selected signal is the same
for both unprotected and protected applications.
The network ports are always OTU1. The ODTU01 transport units are removed from the
OPU1 restoring the ODU0 containers. The ODU0 containers are monitored for defects
and PMs.
For each ODU0, the original GbE client is demapped. The reconstituted characters are
serialized and applied to the respective SFP transmitter which converts the electrical
signal back to an optical one and transmits it through the client port connectors (C1-T
and/or C2-T) to the CPE.
322
2TWCC-PCN-2G7U
Figure 220: 2TWCC-PCN-2G7U Multiplexer Block Diagram (Protected Mode)
Figure 221: OTN Method
323
WCC-PC1N-2G7U
Specifications
WCC-PC1N-2G7U
Figure 222: WCC-PC1N-2G7U Front View
324
WCC-PC1N-2G7U
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the WCC-PC1N-2G7U faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 29: WCC-PC1N-2G7U Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
transmit
Mod
modules operating state modules

operating state
receive
client port
network port
Description
The WCC-PC1N-2G7U is a core type 2.7G WDM channel module specifically designed
for the use in DWDM transport systems. It features one pluggable interface on the client
side and one DWDM interface on the network side. Both interfaces are designed for the
support of 850 nm and 1310nm intra office, standard and long reach link as well for the
support of CWDM long and very-long reach link and DWDM very-long and ultra-long
reach link. Additionally the client interface is used for the transport of 1510 nm long reach
link.
The WCC-PC1N-2G7U converts optical client signals into 2.7 Gigabit network signals
with a specific wavelength in the ITU-T grid and vice versa.
The module is intended for the transport of STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12, STM-16/OC-48,
OTU-1 and GbE services. The supported services can be transmitted in transparent
mode.
The WCC-PC1N-2G7U can be used as back-to-back regenerator or bidirectional single
module N-C regenerator (both SDH/SONET/OTN only) and to create protection.
The WCC-PC1N-2G7U provides performance monitoring of standard STM-1, STM-4,
STM-16, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OTU1 and GbE signals on the client as well as on the
network port. Only for STM-16 and OC-48 standard FEC according to ITU-T G.709 can
be enabled at the client and network port. The module supports performance monitoring
data at the client and network ports for physical layer, SDH/SONET layer, OTN layer,
PCS layer and FEC layer. For all applications, standard FEC according to ITU-T G.709
can be enabled at the network and client port.
Features
OTU mapping according to ITU-T G.709 on the network interface (only for STM-16 and
OC-48)
Versatile switched protection (in conjunction with the VSM and RSM-OLM, RSM-SF)
ALS according to ADVA Optical Networking standard on client and network ports
ALS according to ITU-T G.664 on the client ports
ALS mode can be switched off via the management
325
WCC-PC1N-2G7U
Forced on setting on the transmitter port of the client and network interface
Size: 5 HU high, 4 HP wide (1 slot)
fiber termination

Note
fiber termination

Note
Specification.
services.
Note
326
protective plug.
WCC-PC1N-2G7U
Signal Path
Figure 223: WCC-PC1N-2G7U Functional Block Diagram (Simplified)
Transmit Direction
The client port receiver (Rx) receives the optical CWDM/DWDM signal through the C-R
connector from the CPE. The signal is converted to the electrical domain, and clock and
data recovery is performed.
STM-16/OC-48, OTU1 or GbE alignment is carried out. The resulting signal can
optionally be mapped into an OTU1 output signal with SFEC according to ITU-T G.709
into an OTU1 frame with SFEC at the network interface. The transmitter (Tx) converts
the electrical output signal back to an optical signal at a specific CWDM/DWDM
wavelength and transmits it through the N-T connector onto the link.
Receive Direction
The network port receiver (Rx) receives the optical CWDM/DWDM signal through the NR connector from the link. This signal is converted to the electrical domain, and clock and
data recovery is performed.
STM-16/OC-48, OTU1 or GbE frame alignment is carried out. Data can optionally be
extracted from the OTU1 frame and routed to the transmitter (Tx) of the client port. The
transmitter converts the electrical signal back to an optical one and transmits it through
the client port connector C-T to the CPE.
Specifications
327
4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5
4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5
Figure 224: 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5 Front View
328
4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5 faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 30: 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
transmit
Mod
receive
C1
C1
client port 1
C2
C2
client port 2
C3
C3
client port 3
C4
C4
client port 4
NE
operating state of the network port East
NE
network port East
NW
operating state of the network port West
NW
network port West
Description
The 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5 is a core type, 4-port multirate TDM channel module. It can
transport a mix of 1G FC, 2G FC and GbE, multiplexed into an STM-16/OC-48 link,
carried over a specific ITU-T compliant wavelength.
Transport of 2G FC is only supported by client port 4.
Note
The client signals are mapped into GFP frames, and virtual concatenation at STS-1/VC3/VC-4 level is used when multiplexing the GFP frames into the STM-16/OC-48 link.
Features
Transparent or framed GFP mapping, according to ITU-T G.7041
Channel protection (1+1 MSP)
Versatile protection (in conjunction with the VSM)
ALS according to ADVA Optical Networking standard on network ports (ALS mode
can be switched off via the management)
Fault and performance monitoring of line and services
In-band DCN management via DCCr, or DCCm on the network ports
329
4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5

Use of SFP transceivers supporting gray wavelengths and CWDM channels

according to ITU-T G.694
Note
Two independent Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant interfaces


Note
Specification.
services.
Note
protective plug.
Signal Path
path when the module is operating in channel protection mode.
330
4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5
Figure 225: 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5 Functional Block Diagram
Transmit direction
Each client port receiver (Rx) receives the optical signals from the CPE through the C1R, C2-R, C3-R and C4-R connectors. These signals are converted to the electrical
domain, data and clock recovery is performed and the signals are serialized. For framed
Ethernet services the signals are passed through a MAC and the idle frames are removed
from the payload. For all services the GFP Mapper/De-mapper maps each client signal
into GFP frames. These are then mapped into virtual containers, which again are
multiplexed into an STM-16/OC-48 line signal. For protected applications, the module
contains two SDH framers. The SDH/SONET signal from each framer is serialized and
routed to the SFP transceivers of the east and west network ports (NE and NW)
respectively. Each transmitter (Tx) converts the electrical output signal back to an optical
signal at a specific CWDM/DWDM wavelength and transmits it through the NW-T and
NE-T ports onto the link.
Receive direction
The network port receivers (Rx) receive signals at a specific DWDM wavelength through
the NW-R and NE-R connectors from the link. These signals are converted to the
electrical domain, data and clock recovery is performed and the signals are de-serialized.
The signal from the two links are monitored separately in two SDH/SONET framers. If
331
4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5
protection is enabled, the active signal is selected based on a set of switching criteria.
The GFP Mapper/De-mapper de-maps the client signals and routes each signal towards
the configured client port. Each client signal is de-serialized, and fed into the SFP
transceiver, which converts the electrical signal back to an optical one and transmits it
through the client port connectors
(C1-T, C2-T, C3-T or C4-T) to the CPE.
When the module operates in MUX mode on network port West or on network port East,
the signal path is just like the one described above. The difference is that the redundant
network port is not used.
Specifications
332
Chapter 10
This chapter provides the general descriptions of all access type channel modules
available at the publication date of this Hardware Description.
simplified operation scheme and module specific details. The module key features are
The descriptions are merely supposed to convey a basic understanding of the access
type channel modules to the reader. For detailed information on these modules and
access type channel modules are provided such as module identification, naming
conventions, module design and operation status.
2PCA-PCN-10G on p.342
10PCA-PCN-1G3+10G on p.350
2WCA-PCN-10G on p.358
5WCA-PCN-16GU on p.365
WCA-PC-10G-V on p.371
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V on p.376
4TCA-PCN-4GU+4G on p.383
4TCA-PCN-4GUS+4G on p.392
WCA-PCN-2G5U on p.400
2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 on p.405
2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5 on p.409
4TCA-LS+1G3-V on p.413
333
General Information
General Information
Access type channel modules convert optical signals from customer equipment to WDM
channels for transport across metro-access networks. WDM channel modules access
type named WCAs and x-port TDM channel modules access type named xTCAs are
available in CWDM and DWDM variants. On the client side, WCAs and xTCAs interface
to customer premises equipment (CPE) directly or indirectly via protection modules. On
the network side, they connect to the FSP 3000R7 optical filter modules which perform
WDM in several stages. CWDM and DWDM channel modules work only in conjunction
with the appropriate optical filter modules.
WCAs do not perform SDH/Sonet framing. TCAs support proprietary framing and
potentially in-band DCN management. Both WCAs and TCAs only carry out performance
monitoring on the optical layer. Access type channel modules are able to overcome link
distances of up to about 100 km without dispersion compensation or 3R signal
regeneration.
WCAs and xTCAs are hot swappable and customer installable. This enables a scalable,
in-service expansion at any time.
Identification
Access type channel modules are identified by faceplate codes and the label printed on
the board cover. Identification information is provided in each module description.
Naming Conventions
The module name is made up of a set of parts assembled according to a very specific rule
as exemplified below. The parts of the name represent the modules specific features.
Example:
This example describes an access type 4-port TDM channel module with four pluggable
client interfaces supporting a maximum client data rate of 4 Gbit/s. The aggregated data
rate on the network port runs at 4 Gbit/s. The module features an integrated very-long
reach CWDM interface for channel 1530.
334
General Information
Table 31: Access Type Channel Module Naming Convention
Parts of the
Name
Code
Meaning
Number of client
ports (WDM and
TDM channel
modules

x = 5: 5-port WDM channel module
TCA
Access type TDM channel module
WCA
Access type WDM channel module
xPCA
Ethernet packet transport channel module for

access
x stands for number of client pluggable
interfaces
Pluggable
interface(s)
(if applicable)
PC
Pluggable client interface(s)
PCN
Pluggable client interface(s) and network

interface(s)
Pluggable
interface(s)
PC1N
Pluggable client interface(s) and one pluggable

network interface
Pluggable and
tunable
interface(s)
(if applicable)
PCTN
Pluggable client interface(s) and tunable

network interface(s)
Maximum client
port data rates
16GU
universal data rates between 5.0 Gbit/s and

14.025Gbit/s
4GU

4.25Gbit/s
4GUS
data rates of 155.52 Mbit/s, 622.08 Mbit/s and

1250 Mbit/s
2G5U
universal data rates between 100 Mbit/s and

2.67Gbit/s
2G1U
1.0625 Gbit/s, 1.250 Gbit/s and 2.125 Gbit/s
1G3
1.0625 Gbit/s, 1.25 Gbit/s
622M
622.08 Mbit/s
335
General Information
Table 31: Access Type Channel Module Naming Convention
Parts of the
Name
Code
Meaning
Network port
data rates
16GU

14.025Gbit/s
10G

10.7092 Gbit/s
4G
1.0625 Gbit/s, 2.125 Gbit/s, 4.25 Gbit/s
2G5
2.488320 Gbit/s
2G5U
universal data rates between 100 Mbit/s and

2.67Gbit/s
1G3
1.0625 Gbit/s, 1.25 Gbit/s

transmission
distances
WDM channel
regional reach link distances (240 km 360 km)
ultra-long reach link distances (120 km 240

km)
long reach link distance (30 km - 70 km)
#Dxx
#DCx
#DLx
DWDM channel (xx stands for channels 01 to

64),
DWDM C-band intermediate channel (x stands
for 1 - 9, corresponding channels 65-72 and
channel 81),
DWDM L-band intermediate channel (x stands
channel 82)
#Cxxxx
CWDM channel 1470, 1490, 1510, 1530, 1550,

wavelength table
Module Design
Access type channel modules are designed as single-slot or two-slot plug-in modules
that are compatible with any 9HU shelf (SH9HU), 7HU shelf (SH7HU) or 1HU Shelf
(SH1HU).
The SFP/XFP design allows in-service configuration on an as-needed basis without
affecting other active ports.
The receptacle connectors of the integrated interfaces and the cages for the pluggable
transceivers are angled at 45 to preserve minimum fiber bend radii when connecting the
fiber-optic jumpers.
336
General Information
Each access type channel module has either special EMC contact strips or an EMC
textile gasket on the narrow sides of the faceplate, which create a tight seal with
neighboring modules. The EMC contact strips and the EMC textile gaskets respectively
avoid unintended propagation of electromagnetic energy towards the external
environment that might disrupt other equipment.
and ETSI EN 300 019/-1-3 Class 3.1 standards.
All access type channel modules are hot swappable and customer installable. This
enables a scalable, in-service expansion at any time.
Module Handling

Using the network control unit (NCU), all access type channel modules are SNMP
and the NCU.
The the equipment type names of the access type channel modules used by the
Faceplate Markings
All FSP 3000R7 access type channel modules have the same faceplate markings.
Legacy access type channel modules differ in marking of their faceplates. LED indicator
and optical port markings of the individual modules are explained in the appropriate
module descriptions.
LED Indicators
All access type channel modules have tri-color LED indicators that are visible through the
faceplates.
Legacy access type channel modules have additional multicolor LED indicators (two
LEDs per port).
The colors of each LED display different operating status. The status that each color
represents is described in the Maintenance and Troubleshooting Manual.
337
General Information
Labeling
Each access type channel module has printed several labels on the frontplate and the
board cover. These labels provide module specific information as shown in Figure 226,
Figure 228, Figure 229, Figure 230, Figure 232, and Figure 233.
Frontplate Labels
For a quick identification all access type channel modules have two printed labels affixed
on its frontplate. These labels include the module name, item number, HW revision, serial
number and USI code. The following figure is an example of 10PCA-PCN-1G3+10G
frontplate labels affixed on the frontplates of the modules released prior to the Rel.12.3.
Starting from Rel. 12.3 the design of the frontplate labels changed. Figure 227 on p.338
shows the frontplate labels of the 5WCA-PCN-16GU as an example for all access
channel modules released starting from Rel. 12.3.
Figure 226: Example of 10PCA-PCN-1G3+10G Frontplate Labels
Figure 227: Example of 5WCA-PCN-16GU Frontplate Labels
Module Type Label

338
the manufacturer
the module type
General Information
label contains the approved certification marks of the channel module.
Figure 228: Example of a 10PCA-PCN-1G3+10G Module Type Label
Figure 229: Example of a WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx Module Type Label
339
General Information
Figure 230: Example of a 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx Module Type Label
Figure 231: Example of a 5WCA-PCN-16GU Module Type Label
Certification Label
This label provides approved certification marks. An example of an access type channel
module certification label is shown here.
Figure 232: Example of an Access Type Channel Module Certification Label
340
General Information
Warranty Label
Networking will disclaim the implied warranty of merchantability. An example of an
access type channel module warranty label is shown here.
Figure 233: Example of an Access Type Channel Module Warranty Label
341
2PCA-PCN-10G
2PCA-PCN-10G
Figure 234: 2PCA-PCN-10G Front View
342
2PCA-PCN-10G
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 2PCA-PCN-10G faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 32: 2PCA-PCN-10G Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
transmit
Mod
receive
C1
operating status of the client port 1
C1
client port 1
C2
C2
client port 2
NW
operating status of the network port west
NW
network port west
NE
operating status of the network port east
NE
network port east
Description
The 2PCA-PCN-10G is a 4-port packet channel access module with two 10GbE client
and two 10GbE network pluggable interfaces. It provides Ethernet Virtual Local Area
Network (VLAN) service multiplexing between the two client and the two network ports.
The traffic flows are mapped between ports according to the provisioned VLAN services
configured on the module. Both the client and network interfaces also support tunable
10GbE XFP transceivers and do not differ in their features and functionality. This module
is designed in compliance with relevant IEEE, ITU-T and MEF standards, which allows
the module to work together with any other vendor Ethernet equipment.
The Ethernet services supported by this module are conform to the specifications of the
Metro Ethernet Forum (MEF6.1). Ethernet flows may be subject to filtering, policing, and
traffic classification. These capabilities enable the module to support Ethernet Line (ELine) services, as well as Ethernet LAN (E-LAN) services.
E-Line and E-LAN services support untagged (port-based/transparent service), singletagged (C- or S-tagged), or multi-tagged (C- and S-tagged) frames.1 The 2PCA-PCN-10G
can identify these services based on VLAN and in various ways transport,
aggregate/multiplex, or cross-connect/switch them between modules and ports on the
chosen topology. The 2PCA-PCN-10G performs:
Provider Bridging according to IEEE 802.1ad which allows each port to support
multiple parallel traffic flows and to use tags as a means of flow classification and
management
Link Aggregation according to IEEE 802.3ad providing link protection capabilities

(redundancy)
Ethernet Service OAM (CCM) according to IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE Y.1731
Ethernet Linear Protection (ITU-T G.8031 1+1 path (EVC) protection)
1 The module supports any level of tags, but only the outermost tag is a candidate for
inspection by the port depending on the port mode.
343
2PCA-PCN-10G
Policing, buffering, and shaping is done per Ethernet Virtual Connections (EVCs) in
compliance with MEF10.1. The 2PCA-PCN-10G supports up to 400 EVCs. All traffic is
handled with the same priority (one CoS). SLA parameters are CIR and CBS.Tag
translations may also be carried out. SVID translation may optionally be done for Stagged ports and CVID translation optionally for C-tagged ports. Each client and network
interface supports one in-band management channel (DCN).
Laser control
Laser control (on/off) and ALS are not supported.
Network applications
The module can be used in several applications, supporting point-to-point, linear
add/drop, ring, and meshed networks. It performs ADD/DROP to a ring or chain, PASSTHROUGH on a ring, and HAIRPIN between client ports or between network ports. To
increase the number of ports in a shelf, the 2PCA-PCN-10G and 10PCA-PCN-1G3+10G
can be cascaded. The modules are interconnected using the 10GbE interfaces.
Interworking
The module is designed to work together with the WCC-10G as a regenerator and with
the WCC-10G as an SDH/SONET/OTN mapper. The 2PCA-PCN-10G and EDFA
modules can also be used together.
System Requirements
The 2PCA-PCN-10G module is intended to be deployed in an SH9HU, SH1HU-HP/2DC
or SH1HU-R/PF Shelf. In these cases there are the following requirements:
Use of the NCU-II or NCU-II-P modules in the network element (NE) of an SH9HU
Shelf
Use of the NCU-II module in the network element (NE) of an SH1HU-HP/2DC or

SH1HU-R/PF Shelf
Deployment of a maximum of six Ethernet L2 aggregation modules (six 2PCA-PCN10G modules or in total a mix of six 2PCA-PCN-10G and 10PCA-PCN-1G3+10G
modules) per network element
Support of a maximum of 1600 EVCs per NE
This 2PCA-PCN-10G module can also be deployed in an SH7HU. In this case there are
the following requirements and environmental condition:
Use of the NCU-II module in the NE
Deployment of a maximum of three 2PCA-PCN-10G modules in specific slot

positions in the shelf due to heat dissipation (See Slot Positions on p.349.)
Adjacent slots may only be equipped with modules having a maximum power
consumption of 10 W.
The NE will be ETSI compliant (maximum ambient temperature of +45C or +113F)
The 2PCA-PCN-10G is managed using the Craft interface (Telnet/Web) or the Network
Manager (NM). The NM can be connected either locally or from a remote site via an
inband DCN connection.
344
2PCA-PCN-10G
Each port of the module must be configured to be used as MEF4 UNI/NNI or I-NNI. Each
port can handle up to 400 EVCs (Ethernet services) which is also the maximum for the
module.
Using the management software, each port is configured to operate in one of the
following port modes:
Port-based service interface

(All frames on the port are treated as one connection.)
C-tagged service interface

(The connection contains a C-tag and is identified by a CVID.)
S-tagged service interface:

(The connection contains a S-tag (outer tag) and optionally any number (incl. zero) of
C-tag (inner tag) and is identified with a SVID.)
The I-NNI port is always S-tagged and connections are identified with a SVID.
Using the management software, the properties for the different connections (connectionIDs) need to be defined for each port and flow separately. Examples of such properties
are VLAN registration tables, SVID translation tables, port default VID, and the SLA
attributes.
Cross-connecting of connections is done by the configuration of the ports. Connections
can be established from any port to any port, including local switching (UNI-to-UNI). All
connections through the module are manually established using the management
software (no automatic learning) or by using the automatic routing support of the control
plane for Ethernet layer 2 services. Switching is based on the SVID.
Interoperability
Because the 2PCA-PCN-10G supports in-band management channels on UNI/NNI
interfaces, it is possible to establish a management communication channel between the
FSP 150 and the FSP 3000.
The 2PCA-PCN-10G is interoperable with FSP 150 units supporting an "IP over VLAN"
EOC.
Features
The main features of the module are:
Support of Ethernet service types in accordance with MEF6.1: E-Line EPL and
EVPL, EPLAN and EVPLAN
Maximum number of EVCs: 400 (a protected E-Line service counts as two EVCs)
Maximum number of connections (EVCs) supported per module:

o
o
Unprotected E-Line services: 400

Protected E-Line services (Ethernet Linear Protection according to ITU-T
G.8031): 200
E-LAN services: 50
MEF10.1 E-Line (port/VLAN based, Point-to-Point, no MAC learning)
MEF10.1 E-LAN without MAC learning
IEEE 802.3 Link Aggregation for redundancy (no load sharing). Supported on all
ports; maximum 2 ports per LAG; restoration time <6s
345
2PCA-PCN-10G
Ethernet Linear Protection (ITU-T G.8031 1+1 path (EVC) protection) for E-Line;
protection switching time <50ms; uni-directional switching (no APS); supported on INNI
Fault monitoring per EVC according to CFM/ETH-OAM IEEE 802.1ag ITU-T Y.1731:
CCM Continuity check, RDI. Max 400 MEPs; Down-MEPs on S-tagged ports only.
Supported on UNI/NNI/I-NNI. CCM rates: 3.3 ms,
10 ms, 100 ms, 1 sec, 10 sec, 1 min, 10 min
Configurable CVLAN and SVLAN Ethertype
4095 CVLANs supported on a C-tagged port
EOC for remote management
Fault/performance monitoring per port
Performance monitoring per EVC (may be started / stopped)
Current and historic PM
Support for 9600 byte jumbo-frames
L2CP static filters according to MEF6.1
Facility loopbacks and Terminal loopback on all ports

(Each port can be looped back using management software individually.)
Two independent Extended Form-factor Pluggable (XFP) MSA compliant interfaces


Note


Note
XFP Transceivers
Specification.
346
2PCA-PCN-10G
services.
Note
protective plug.
347
2PCA-PCN-10G
Signal Path
Figure 235: 2PCA-PCN-10G Functional Block Diagram
Transmit Direction
The client port receivers (Rx) receive the optical signals through the connectors C1-R
and C2-R from the CPE. These signals are converted to the electrical domain and clock
and data recovery is performed.
The Network Processing Unit performs general ingress L2 packet processing: MAC,
packet analyzing, tag handling, routing, policing, statistics and fault, EOC processing,
and L2 Control Protocol filtering and processing. The Traffic Manager performs per-EVC
and CoS traffic management, packet queuing, switching, scheduling, and shaping. The
packets return to the Network Processing Unit which performs further L2 egress packet
processing. The transmitters (Tx) of the network ports convert the electrical output signal
348
2PCA-PCN-10G
back to an optical signal at a specific DWDM/CWDM wavelength and transmit it through
the NE-T or NW-T connector onto the link.
Receive Direction
The network port receivers (Rx) receive the signal at a specific DWDM/CWDM
wavelength through the NE-R or NW-R connector from the link. This signal is converted
to the electrical domain, and data and clock recovery is performed.
processing. The transmitters (Tx) of the client ports convert the electrical output signals
back to optical signals and transmit them through the client port connectors C1-T and
C2-T to the CPE.
Slot Positions
The 2PCA-PCN-10G module is 8 HP wide. It can be placed into the following shelves
and slots:
SH9HU, slots 3 through 17
SH7HU/SH7HU-R, slots 3+4, 11+12, or 17+18 only
SH1HU-HP/2DC, slot 1
SH1HU-R/PF, slot 1
Specifications
Note
Please note that module placement in the 9HU shelf and 7HU shelf is
subject to a number of restrictions due to high power consumption. The
7HU shelf may hold three modules at most. The 9HU shelf can
accommodate a maximum of six modules.
349
10PCA-PCN-1G3+10G
10PCA-PCN-1G3+10G
Figure 236: 10PCA-PCN-1G3+10G Front View
350
10PCA-PCN-1G3+10G
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 10PCA-PCN-1G3+10G faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 33: 10PCA-PCN-1G3+10G Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
transmit
Mod
receive
C1
C1
client port 1
C2
C2
client port 2
C3
C3
client port 3
C4
C4
client port 4
C5
C5
client port 5
C6
C6
client port 6
C7
C7
client port 7
C8
C8
client port 8
C9
C9
client port 9
C10
C10
client port 10
NW
NW
network port west
NE
NE
network port east
Description
The 10PCA-PCN-1G3+10G is a 12-port packet channel access module with ten 1GbE
client SFP and two 10GbE network XFP type pluggable interfaces. It provides Ethernet
Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) service multiplexing between the ten client and the
two network ports. The traffic flows are mapped between ports according to the
provisioned VLAN services configured on the module. The network interfaces also
support tunable 10GbE XFP transceivers. This module is designed in compliance with
relevant IEEE, ITU-T and MEF standards, which allows the module to work together with
any other vendor Ethernet equipment.
The Ethernet services supported by this module are conform to the specifications of the
Metro Ethernet Forum (MEF6.1). Ethernet flows may be subject to filtering, policing, and
traffic classification. These capabilities enable the module to support Ethernet Line (ELine) services, as well as Ethernet LAN(E-LAN) services.
351
10PCA-PCN-1G3+10G
E-Line and E-LAN services support untagged (port-based/transparent service), singletagged (C- or S-tagged), or multi-tagged (C- and S-tagged) frames.1 The 10PCA-PCN1G3+10G can identify these services based on VLAN and in various ways transport,
aggregate/multiplex, or cross-connect/switch them between modules and ports on the
chosen topology. The 10PCA-PCN-1G3+10G performs:
Provider Bridging according to IEEE 802.1ad which allows each port to support
multiple parallel traffic flows and to use tags as a means of flow classification and
management
Link Aggregation according to IEEE 802.3ad providing link protection capabilities

(redundancy).
Ethernet Service OAM (CCM) according to IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE Y.1731
Ethernet Linear Protection (ITU-T G.8031 1+1 path (EVC) protection)
Policing, buffering, and shaping is done per Ethernet Virtual Connections (EVCs) in
compliance with MEF10.1. The 10PCA-PCN-1G3+10G supports up to 400 EVCs. All
traffic is handled with the same priority (one CoS). SLA parameters are CIR and
CBS.Tag translations may also be carried out. SVID translation may optionally be done
for S-tagged ports and CVID translation optionally for C-tagged ports. Each client and
network interface supports one in-band management channel (DCN).
Laser control
Laser control (on/off) and ALS are not supported.
Network applications
The module can be used in several applications, supporting point-to-point, linear
add/drop, ring, and meshed networks. It performs ADD/DROP to a ring or chain, PASSTHROUGH on a ring, and HAIRPIN between client ports or between network ports. To
increase the number of ports in a shelf, the 2PCA-PCN-10G and 10PCA-PCN-1G3+10G
can be cascaded. The modules are interconnected using the 10GbE interfaces.
Interworking
The module is designed to work together with the WCC-10G as a regenerator and with
the WCC-10G as an SDH/SONET/OTN mapper. The 10PCA-PCN-1G3+10G and EDFA
modules can also be used together.
System Requirements
The 10PCA-PCN-1G3+10G module is intended to be deployed in an SH9HU, SH1HUHP/2DC or SH1HU-R/PF Shelf. In these cases there are the following requirements:
Use of the NCU-II or NCU-II-P modules in the network element (NE) of an SH9HU
Shelf
Use of the NCU-II module in the network element (NE) of an SH1HU-HP/2DC or

SH1HU-R/PF Shelf
Deployment of a maximum of six Ethernet L2 aggregation modules (six 10PCAPCN-1G3+10G modules or in total a mix of six 2PCA-PCN-10G and 10PCA-PCN1G3+10G modules) per network element
Support of a maximum of 1600 EVCs per NE
1 The module supports any level of tags, but only the outermost tag is a candidate for
inspection by the port depending on the port mode.
352
10PCA-PCN-1G3+10G
The 10PCA-PCN-1G3+10G module can also be deployed in an SH7HU. In this case
there are the following requirements and environmental condition:
Use of the NCU-II module in the NE
Deployment of a maximum of three 10PCA-PCN-1G3+10G modules in specific slot

positions in the shelf due to heat dissipation (See Slot Positions on p.357.)
Adjacent slots may only be equipped with modules having a maximum power
consumption of 10 W
The NE will be ETSI compliant (maximum ambient temperature of +45C or +113F)
The 10PCA-PCN-1G3+10G is managed using the Craft interface (Telnet/Web) or the

Network Manager (NM). The NM can be connected either locally or from a remote site via
an inband DCN connection.
Each port of the module must be configured to be used as MEF4 UNI/NNI or I-NNI. Each
port can handle up to 400 EVCs (Ethernet services) which is also the maximum for the
module.
Using the management software, each port is configured to operate in one of the
following port modes:
Port-based service interface

(All frames on the port are treated as one connection.)
C-tagged service interface

(The connection contains a C-tag and is identified by a CVID.)
S-tagged service interface:

(The connection contains a S-tag (outer tag) and optionally any number (incl. zero) of
C-tag (inner tag) and is identified with a SVID.)
The I-NNI port is always S-tagged and connections are identified with a SVID.
Using the management software, the properties for the different connections (connectionIDs) need to be defined for each port and flow separately. Examples of such properties
are VLAN registration tables, SVID translation tables, port default VID, and the SLA
attributes.
Cross-connecting of connections is done by the configuration of the ports. Connections
can be established from any port to any port, including local switching (UNI-to-UNI). All
connections through the module are manually established (preconfigured) using the
management software (no automatic learning) or by using the automatic routing support
of the control plane for Ethernet layer 2 services. Switching is based on the SVID.
Interoperability
Because the 10PCA-PCN-1G3+10G supports in-band management channels on
UNI/NNI interfaces, it is possible to establish a management communication channel
between the FSP 150 and the FSP 3000. The module is interoperable with FSP 150 units
supporting optionally an "IP over VLAN" EOC.
353
10PCA-PCN-1G3+10G
Features
The main features of the module are:
Support of Ethernet service types in accordance with MEF6.1: E-Line EPL and
EVPL, EPLAN and EVPLAN
Maximum number of EVCs: 400 (a protected E-Line service counts as two EVCs)
Maximum number of connections (EVCs) supported per module:

o
o
354
Unprotected E-Line services: 400

Protected E-Line services (Ethernet Linear Protection according to ITU-T
G.8031): 200
E-LAN services: 50
MEF10.1 E-Line (port/VLAN based, Point-to-Point, no MAC learning)
MEF10.1 E-LAN without MAC learning
IEEE 802.3 Link Aggregation for redundancy (no load sharing). Supported on all
ports; maximum 2 ports per LAG; restoration time <6s
Ethernet Linear Protection (ITU-T G.8031 1+1 path (EVC) protection); protection
switching time <50ms; uni-directional switching (no APS); supported on I-NNI
Fault monitoring per EVC according to CFM/ETH-OAM IEEE 802.1ag ITU-T Y.1731:
CCM Continuity check, RDI. Max 400 MEPs; Down-MEPs on S-tagged ports only.
Supported on UNI/NNI/I-NNI. CCM rates: 3.3 ms, 10 ms, 100 ms, 1 sec, 10 sec, 1
min, 10 min
Supports 1GbE and 10GbE LAN Ethernet ports
Configurable CVLAN and SVLAN Ethertype
4095 CVLANs supported on a C-tagged port
EOC for remote management
Fault/performance monitoring per port
Performance monitoring per EVC (may be started/stopped)
Current and historic PM
Support for 9600 byte jumbo-frames
L2CP static filters acc. to MEF6.1
Auto-negotiation (on 1GbE ports)
Facility loopbacks and Terminal loopback on all ports

(Each port can be looped back using management software individually.)
Static switching: connections manually established using management software
SFP Optojack - dual ended (1310nm, CWDM)
10PCA-PCN-1G3+10G


Note


Note
Interface specification depends on the SFP transceiver (SFP) and XFP transceiver (XFP)
used. For details about the individual SFP and XFP transceiver types, refer to the
or the absence of an SFP transceiver or XFP transceiver does not affect operation of the
Note

must be approved by ADVA Optical Networking. If you use nonapproved SFPs and/or XFPs in conjunction with the channel module,
When a client or network interface is not used, the corresponding SFP or
XFP cage does not need to be populated with an pluggable transceiver,
but should be covered with a dust protective plug.
Signal Path
The following illustrates the functional block diagram (very simplified) and illustrates the
signal path which is described below.
355
10PCA-PCN-1G3+10G
Figure 237: 10PCA-PCN-1G3+10G Functional Block Diagram
Transmit Direction
The client port receivers (Rx) receive the optical signals through the connectors C1-R
through C10-R from the CPE. These signals are converted to the electrical domain and
clock and data recovery is performed.
processing. The transmitters (Tx) of the network ports convert the electrical output signal
back to an optical signal at a specific DWDM/CWDM wavelength and transmit it through
the NE-T or NW-T connector onto the link.
356
10PCA-PCN-1G3+10G
Receive Direction
The network port receivers (Rx) receive the signal at a specific DWDM/CWDM
wavelength through the NE-R or NW-R connector from the link. This signal is converted
to the electrical domain, and data and clock recovery is performed.
processing. The transmitters (Tx) of the client ports convert the electrical output signals
back to optical signals and transmit them through the client port connectors C1-T through
C10-T to the CPE.
Slot Positions
The 10PCA-PCN-1G3+10G is 8HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and
slots:
SH7HU, SH7HU-R, slots 3+4, 11+12, or 17+18 only
SH1HU-HP/2DC, slot 1
SH1HU-R/PF, slot 1
Note
Specifications
Note
357
2WCA-PCN-10G
2WCA-PCN-10G
Figure 238: 2WCA-PCN-10G Front View
358
2WCA-PCN-10G
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 2WCA-PCN-10G faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 34: 2WCA-PCN-10G Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
transmit
Mod
receive
C1
C1
client port 1
C2
C2
client port 2
NW
NW
network port west
NE
NE
network port east
Description
The 2WCA-PCN-10G is an access type, 2-port multi-rate WDM channel module for
signals in the 10 Gbit/s range with two pluggable client and two pluggable network
interfaces. The module converts the client side signal wavelength to a specific ITU-Tcompliant network side CWDM or DWDM wavelength. The 2WCA-PCN-10G supports 8
CWDM and 82 DWDM channels according to ITU-T G.694.
The 2WCA-PCN-10G supports rate adaptive facilities which allow the module to
automatically adjust to and operate with a signal whose rate is within the range from
4.250 Gbit/s to 10.709 Gbit/s. All services are transmitted transparently.
Depending on the mode, the 2WCA-PCN-10G module can be used as a:
Network channel protected single transponder (C1 to NW/NE)
Unprotected single transponder or regenerator (C1 to NE or C2 to NW)
Unprotected dual transponder or regenerator (C1 to NE and C2 to NW)
Depending on the pluggable transceivers used on the client and network interfaces the
module provides following configuration options:
Adaptive odd clock (default configuration)

This mode allows the transport of all data rates specified for the module. That is, all
data rates of 4.25 Gbit/s, 8.5 Gbit/s, 9.9532 Gbit/s, 10.3125 Gbit/s, 10.51875 Gbit/s,
10.709 Gbit/s can be automatically detected and clocked.
Fixed clock 8500

The data rate of 8.5 Gbit/s (8G FC) is selected.
Fixed clock 4250

The data rate of 4.25 Gbit/s (4G FC) is selected.
359
2WCA-PCN-10G
4.25 Gbit/s (4G FC) and 8.5 Gbit/s (8G FC) can be configured in adaptive
odd clocked or fixed clocked mode. It has no impact to the traffic.
Note
More configuration options, provisioning as well as fault and performance management

information for the 2WCA-PCN-10G can be found in the FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2
Management Data Guide and in the Provisioning and Operations Manual.
Features
Channel protection
The XFP in use provides 3R signal conditioning via clock and data recovery
Implementation of media conversion along with wavelength conversion (e.g.

multimode to single-mode)
Fault monitoring and analogue performance monitoring on the client ports and
network ports for the physical layer
Facility Loopbacks on the client port and network ports

(Each network port can be looped back individually.)
Size: 5HU high, 4 HP wide (1 slot)

using LC receptacle connectors for fiber termination

Note
Dual independent Extended Form-factor Pluggable (XFP) MSA compliant interface

using LC receptacle connectors for fiber termination

Note
360
2WCA-PCN-10G
Specification.
services.
Note
protective plug.
Transmission Modes
The 2WCA-PCN-10G module may be configured to operate in two modes:
Hot standby (in management software referred to as Transponder NE &NW)
Dual transponder (in management software referred to as Dual Transponder)
On the network side, both interfaces must be equipped for operation in hot standby mode.
While for dual (unprotected) transponder mode, either one or both interfaces may be
equipped for this mode of operation, depending on the number of provisioned services.
On the client side, the number of pluggable interfaces used depends upon the
transmission mode in which the module is to operate. When operating in hot standby
mode, only client interface C1 may be equipped and provisioned. When operating in
unprotected dual transponder mode, each of the two pluggable client interfaces should be
equipped and provisioned.
Transponder NE &NW
In this mode, also known as "hot standby mode", the 2WCA-PCN-10G provides network
channel protection. The module converts a client side gray or CWDM optical signal on
the C1 interface into gray, CWDM or DWDM compatible optical signal(s) for transport.
The type of the client and network side facilities must be the same.
Transponder NE &NW mode provides only one deployment scenario (Standard).
If only one of the two network interfaces is configured, the module will operate as a
unprotected single transponder. If both network interfaces are configured, the module will
operate as a channel protected single transponder. Protection switching capabilities are
available.

In this mode, the module is able to operate as two parallel transponders - one transponder
using the C1 and NE port pair while the other uses the C2 and NW port pair. No on-board
protection switching capabilities are supported in this mode.
The dual transponder mode provides two optional deployment scenarios.
361
2WCA-PCN-10G
If the deployment scenario attribute is set to the value Standard, the module will support
gray (850/1310 nm) or CWDM XFPs on the client site only. On the network port all types
of XFPs are supported (gray, CWDM, DWDM or tunable DWDM).
The module will act as 2 bi-directional single module client to network (C-N) regenerator
with or without wavelength conversion, (C1-> NE; C2 -> NW) if the Deployment attribute
is set to the value "Pass Through". In this pass-through operation, the client ports can be
equipped with the appropriate DWDM XFP types transceivers.
Signal Paths
This subsection provides two typical examples of data signal flow through the module
when operating in transponder HST mode or dual transponder mode.
Network Channel Protected Single Transponder

Figure 239 illustrates the signal path when the module is operating in transponder HST
mode. The signal path is described below.
Figure 239: 2WCA-PCN-10G Operating as Channel Protected Single
Transponder
Transmit Direction
The client port receiver (Rx) receives the optical signals from the CPE through the C1-R
connector. These signals are converted to the electrical domain.
The signals are routed to the XFP transceivers of the east network port NE and west
network port NW respectively. Each transmitter (Tx) converts the electrical output signal
back to an optical signal at a specific DWDM wavelength and transmits it through the
NE-T and NW-T connectors onto the link.
Receive Direction
362
2WCA-PCN-10G
the NE-R and NW-R connectors from the link. These signals are converted to the
electrical domain. The signals from the two links are monitored continuously. If one of the
receivers (Rx) detects a loss of signal, the decision logic based on a set of switching
criteria initiates the automatic switch-over, provided a signal is available on the other
receiver. The signal is fed into the XFP transceiverof the appropriate client port. The
transmitter (Tx) converts the electrical signal back to an optical signal and transmit it
through the client port connector C1-T to the CPE.
Unprotected Dual Transponder

Figure 240 illustrates the signal path when the module is operating in dual transponder
mode. The signal path is described below.
Figure 240: 2WCA-PCN-10G Operating as Unprotected Dual Transponder
Transmit Direction
The client port receivers (Rx) receive the optical signals from the CPE through the C1-R
and C2-R connectors. These signals are converted to the electrical domain. Using the
switching matrix, the signal from the client port C1 is routed to the XFP transceiver of the
network port east (NE), and the signal from the client port C2 is routed to the XFP
transceiver of the network port west (NW). Each transmitter (Tx) converts the electrical
output signal back to an optical signal at a specific DWDM wavelength and transmits it
through the NE-T and NW-T connectors onto the link.
Receive Direction
363
2WCA-PCN-10G
the NE-R and NW-R connectors from the link. These signals are converted to the
electrical domain. Using the switching matrix, the signal from the network port east (NE)
is routed to the XFP transceiver of the client port C1, and the signal from network port
west (NW) is routed to the XFP transceiver of the client port C2. The transmitters (Tx)
convert the electrical signals back to optical signals and transmit them through the client
ports connectors C1-T and C1-T to the CPE.

For testing and servicing purposes, the network lasers can be switched to "forced on"
mode. If an XFP/16GFC/#19xxxL50 is used at the network port, the appropriate client
XFP transceiver has to be plugged. Without an XFP transceiver at the respective client
port, the network port will not send any light although the network laser is forced on.
Specifications
364
5WCA-PCN-16GU
5WCA-PCN-16GU
Figure 241: Example of a 5WCA-PCN-16GU Front View
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 5WCA-PCN-16GU faceplate and their
meanings.
365
5WCA-PCN-16GU
Table 35: 5WCA-PCN-16GU Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
transmit
Mod
receive
C1
C1
client port 1
C2
C2
client port 2
C3
C3
client port 3
C4
C4
client port 4
C5
C5
client port 5
N1
operating state of the network port 1
N1
network port 1
N2
N2
network port 2
N3
N3
network port 3
N4
N4
network port 4
N5
N5
network port 5
Description
The 5WCA-PCN-16GU is an access type, WDM transponder module for transmitting the
signals individually from the client to the network interfaces. It can have up to five SFP+
pluggable client and network interfaces. The module converts up to five client side
signals into five specific ITU-T compliant network side wavelengths.
The module supports up to 16G FC at each interface. If the module is operating with 16G
FC services the data rate of 14.025 Gbit/s is running. It is also designed for the transport
of 40 GbE combined services using four SFP+ transceivers supporting 10 GbE LAN PHY
each. All services are transmitted transparently. The data rates and services supported
on the 5WCA-PCN-16GU are listed in the Module and System Specification.
The client interfaces are customer-facing (connected to the client equipment), and the
network interface is network-facing (indirectly connected to the optical transport network
using optical filters, amplifiers, etc.).
The client-side and the network-side optics are included within the SFP+ transceiver
modules. The SFP+ transceivers perform the optical-to-electrical (o/e) and electrical-tooptical (e/o) conversion, monitor physical layer performance, and monitor faults for each
client and network service (SFP+). The optical performance of the client and network
interfaces is determined by the specifications of the installed SFP+ transceiver modules.
The 5WCA-PCN-16GU provides clock and data recovery and performs 3R signal
conditioning at any supported data rate by default. The module also provides fault
management and performance monitoring of network and client services.
The module supports versatile switched protection for restoration and client channel card
protection.
366
5WCA-PCN-16GU
The 5WCA-PCN-16GU module is supported by the network control unit

Note
Features
Five independent transponders for transparent service transport
Up to 16G FC services on the individual client and network port
40GbE combined services using 10GbE LAN PHY services on four client and
network ports
Channel card protection across diverse shelves
Fault management and Performance monitoring on the client ports and network
ports:
o
o
Equipment layer
Physical layer
Clock and data recovery with 3R signal conditioning at any supported data rate by
default
Facility loopbacks for each client and network port
Configurable Laser-Off delay for external protection schemes
Size: 5 HU high, 4 HP wide (1 slots)
Five independent, Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP+ types), MSA compliant

interfaces using LC connectors for fiber termination
Use of SFP+ transceivers supporting gray wavelengths

Note
Five independent, Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP+ types), MSA compliant

Use of SFP+ transceivers supporting gray wavelengths, CWDM channels and

Note
367
5WCA-PCN-16GU
Interface specification depends on the SFP+ transceiver modules used. For details on
the individual SFP+ transceiver module types, refer to the Pluggable Transceiver Module
Specification.
Unused transceiver cages can remain empty. An unconnected interface or the absence
of an SFP+ transceiver does not affect operation of other terminated services.
Note
by
ADVA Optical Networking. If you use non-approved SFP+ transceiver
devices in conjunction with the channel module, ADVA Optical
Networking cannot guarantee the behavior of the module. When an
interface is not used, the corresponding SFP+ cage does not need to be
populated with an SFP+ transceiver, but should be covered with an
appropriate dust protective plug.
Signal Path
path which is described below.
368
5WCA-PCN-16GU
Figure 242: Functional Block diagram of the 5WCA-PCN-16GU showing Facility
Loopbacks
Transmit Direction
Each client port receiver (Rx) receives the optical signals from the Customer Premises
Equipment (CPE) through the appropriate client port connector (C1-R, C2-R, C3-R, C4-R
or C5-R). All signals are converted from optical to the electrical domain where clock and
data recovery is performed. Then the signals are routed through the crosspoint to the
SFP+ transceivers of the network port transmitter (Tx). Each transmitter of the network
ports converts the electrical output signal to an optical signal at a specific DWDM
wavelength and transmits it through the N1-T, N2-T, N3-T, N4-T and N5-T connector
onto the link.
Receive Direction
369
5WCA-PCN-16GU
The network port receivers (Rx) receive optical signals at a specific DWDM wavelength
through the N1-R, N2-R, N3-R, N4-R and N5-R connectors from the link. These signals
are converted from optical to the electrical domain, and data and clock recovery is
performed. Then the signals are routed through the crosspoint to the SFP+ transceivers
of the client port transmitter (Tx). The transmitter of the client ports converts the electrical
output signal back to an optical signal and transmits them through each of the client port
connectors C1-T, C2-T, C3-T, C4-T and C5-T to the CPE.

mode. In this case the appropriate client SFP+ transceiver has to be plugged. Without
SFP+ transceiver at the respective client port, the network port will not send any light
although the network laser is forced on.
Loopback
For testing, service and fault diagnostics purposes, the module supports client interface
facility loopback and network interface facility loopback. The optical signal flow is
represented in Figure 242 on p.369 by the red traces. The internal loopbacks can be
activated by using the NE management tools.

The client interface facility loopback can be initiated to test the communications link
between the Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) and the near-end module. The client
signal from the CPE is received by the client port receiver (Rx). When clock and data
recovery is performed the signal is routed to the crosspoint and returns (looped back) to
the client port transmitter output (Tx). Then the signal is sent directly back to the CPE.

The network interface facility loopback can be initiated to test the communications link
between the Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) and the far-end module. The network
signal from the CPE is received by the network port receiver (Rx). When clock and data
recovery is performed the signal is routed to the crosspoint and returns (looped back) to
the network port transmitter output (Tx). Then the signal is retransmitted directly to the
CPE.
Specifications
370
WCA-PC-10G-V
WCA-PC-10G-V
Figure 243: Example of a WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx Front View
Note
The WCA-PC-10G-V is a converted FSP 2000 Release 6.6 module as

indicated by the asterisk printed on its faceplate. The module provides
full FSP 2000 Release 6.6 functionality. Monitoring and troubleshooting
follow FSP 2000 Release 6.6 rules. This mainly concerns ALS and LED
behavior.
371
WCA-PC-10G-V
Faceplate Markings
Table 36 and Table 37 list all abbreviations on the WCA-PC-10G-V faceplate and their
meanings.

Table 36: WCA-PC-10G-V Optical Port Markings
Optical Ports
Meaning
receive
transmit
client port
network port

There are two LED indicators per port. One displays the status of the transmitter and the
other the status of the receiver of the corresponding port.
Table 37: WCA-PC-10G-V LED Indicator Markings
LEDs
Meaning
LEDs
Meaning
O/E
modules power supply

status/error condition
Lp
looping back on the client

port or the network port
C/R
receiver status of the

client port
C/T
transmitter status of the

client port
N/R

network port
N/T

network port
Variants
The module is available in 82 DWDM variants and four CWDM variants.
The WCA-PC-10G-V is available in following DWDM variants:
WCA-PC-10G-V#D01 to WCA-PC-10G-V#D64
WCA-PC-10G-V#DC1to WCA-PC-10G-V#DC9
WCA-PC-10G-V#DL1 to WCA-PC-10G-V#DL9
The WCA-PC-10G-V is available in following CWDM variants:
372
WCA-PC-10G-V#C1530
WCA-PC-10G-V#C1550
WCA-PC-10G-V#C1570
WCA-PC-10G-V#C1590
WCA-PC-10G-V
All module variants feature the same design and use the same faceplate. They only differ
in the supported DWDM and CWDM transport systems.
Description
The WCA-PC-10G-V is an access type multi-rate 10G WDM channel module with
pluggable client interfaces. It is specifically designed for the use in DWDM/CWDM
transport systems with very-long distance transmission.
All applications are transmitted in transponder mode (transparent). The supported
services are listed in the Module and System Specification of Discontinued Modules.
WCA-PC-10G-V works only in conjunction with the appropriate DWDM/CWDM optical
filter modules.
The WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx features an ITU-T compliant, 100 GHz spaced DWDM
network interface for the support of 82 FSP 3000R7 DWDM channels via 82 discrete
module variants.
The WCA-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx features an ITU-T compliant, 20 nm spaced CWDM
interface allowing support for four CWDM channels via four discrete module variants. It
cannot be deployed in topologies with optical amplifiers. The maximum realizable fiber
link distances of the WCA-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx are shorter in comparison to the WCA-PC10G-V#Dxx.
Features
Auto Laser Shutdown (ALS) according to ADVA Optical Networking standard on the
network port
Clock and data recovery with 3R signal conditioning at any supported data rate
Fault and performance monitoring on the client port and network port for physical
layer only
Can be used as unidirectional dual module regenerator
Support of multiclock settings
Facility loopbacks on both client port and network port
One Extended Form-factor Pluggable (XFP) MSA compliant interface using LC

receptacle connectors for fiber termination
Use of XFP transceivers supporting gray wavelengths
Note
One integrated, 10 Gigabit, very-long reach DWDM interface (WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx)
373
WCA-PC-10G-V
One integrated, 10 Gigabit, very-long reach CWDM interface (WCA-PC-10GV#Cxxxx)
LC receptacle connectors for fiber termination
Fiber type: SM 9 m
Note
Specification.
services.
Note
Signal Path
Figure 244: WCA-PC-10G-V Functional Block Diagram
374
WCA-PC-10G-V
Transmit Direction
The client port receiver (Rx) receives the optical signal through the C-R connector from
the CPE. This signal is converted to the electrical domain and clock and data recovery is
performed. The regenerated signal is routed to the transmitter (Tx) of the network port.
The transmitter converts the electrical output signal back to an optical signal at a specific
DWDM/CWDM wavelength and transmits it through the N-T connector onto the link.
Receive Direction
The network port receiver (Rx) receives the signal at a specific DWDM/CWDM
wavelength through the N-R connector from the link. This signal is converted to the
electrical domain, and data and clock recovery is performed. The regenerated signal is
fed into the XFP transceiver. The transmitter (Tx) converts the electrical signal back to an
optical one and transmits it through the client port connector C-T to the CPE.
Specifications
375
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V
Figure 245: Front View of an 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx
Note
376
The 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V is a converted FSP 2000 Release 6.6

module as indicated by the asterisk printed on its faceplate. The module
provides full FSP 2000 Release 6.6 functionality. Monitoring and
troubleshooting follow FSP 2000 Release 6.6 rules. This mainly
concerns Auto Laser Shutdown (ALS) and LED behavior.
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V
Faceplate Markings
Table 38 and Table 39 list all abbreviations on the 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V faceplate and
their meanings.

Table 38: 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V Optical Port Markings
Optical Ports
Meaning
receive
transmit
C1
client port 1
C2
client port 2
C3
client port 3
C4
client port 4
C5
client port 5
C6
client port 6
C7
client port 7
C8
client port 8
N/R
receiver connector of the network port
N/T
transmitter connector of the network port

Table 39: 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V LED Indicator Markings
LEDs
Meaning
LEDs
Meaning
On
power supply status of the

module
Err
error condition; self-test

procedure
N/R
receiver status of the network

port
N/T
transmitter status of the network

port
C1/R
receiver status of the client port

1
C1/T
transmitter status of the client

port 1
C2/R

2
C2/T

port 2
377
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V
Table 39: 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V LED Indicator Markings
LEDs
Meaning
LEDs
Meaning
C3/R

3
C3/T

port 3
C4/R

4
C4/T

port 4
C5/R

5
C5/T

port 5
C6/R

6
C6/T

port 6
C7/R

7
C7/T

port 7
C8/R

8
C8/T

port 8
Variants
The module is available in 82 DWDM variants and four CWDM variants.
The 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V is available in following DWDM variants:
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#D01 to 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#D32 (C band)
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#DC1 to 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-VDC9 (C band)
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#D33 to 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#D64 (L band)
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#DL1 to 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#DL9 (L band)
The 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V is available following CWDM variants:
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#C1530
Description
The 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V is an access type 8-port TDM channel module with
pluggable client interfaces. It is specifically designed for the use in DWDM/CWDM
transport systems and very-long distance transmission.
The module performs electrical multiplexing and de-multiplexing of up to eight client
interface signals onto one DWDM/CWDM channel (a specific ITU-T compliant
wavelength).
378
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V
The eight client ports are arranged in four groups of 2 channels each. These four groups
are: ports 2/1, 4/3, 6/5, 7/8. Two GbE, two FC or one 2G FC data streams per group can
be transmitted. Mixing of applications within a group is not possible. The eight client
interfaces can be configured as follows:
8 x FC (8 x 1062.5 Mbit/s) on the client ports C1 to C8
8 x GbE (8 x 1250 Mbit/s) on the client ports C1 to C8
4 x 2G FC (4 x 2125 Mbit/s) on the client ports C2, C4, C6 and C7
The module uses a two-stage multiplexing method. In the first stage each group is
mapped into a data stream with a constant bit rate of 2.48832Gbit/s. The second stage
wraps these four data streams in four ODU-1 signals and multiplexes them in a
proprietary way to a network signal with a bit rate of 10.709 Gbit/s without FEC.
The 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V works only in conjunction with the appropriate
DWDM/CWDM optical filter modules.
It cannot be deployed in topologies with optical amplifiers. The maximum realizable fiber
link distances of the 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Cxxxx are shorter in comparison to the
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx.
Features
Auto Laser Shutdonw (ALS) according to ADVA Optical Networking standard on the
network ports (ALS mode can be switched off via the management)
Multiple clock settings
Fault and performance monitoring on the client ports (physical layer only) and
network port (physical layer and OTU layer)
Can be used as bidirectional regenerator
Facility Loopbacks on the client and network ports
Eight independent, Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant interfaces


Note
One integrated, very-long reach DWDM interface (8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx)
One integrated, very-long reach CWDM interface (8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Cxxxx)
Fiber type: SM 9 m
379
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V
Note
Specification.
services.
Note
an SFP transceiver but should be covered with a dust protective plug.
Signal Path
380
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V
Figure 246: Functional Block Diagram of the 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V
(Simplified)
381
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V
Transmit Direction
Each client port receiver (Rx) receives the optical signals from the CPE through the client
port connectors C1-R to C8-R. These signals are converted to the electrical domain and
clock and data recovery is performed. All signals are encoded, synchronized and mapped
into four data streams with a constant bit rate of 2.48832Gbit/s applying a proprietary
method. The 4 x 2.48832 Gbit/s data streams are multiplexed to a 10.70923 Gbit/s
common output signal. Mapping and multiplexing of the client signals into the output
signal is performed according to a minimal subset of the ITU-T G.709 standard. This
combined signal is routed to the transmitter (Tx) of the network port. The transmitter
converts the electrical output signal back to an optical signal at a specific
Receive Direction
electrical domain and clock and data recovery is performed.
The regenerated 10.70923 Gbit/s input signal is de-multiplexed into its four component
2.48832 Gbit/s data streams. Each client signal is demapped from the 2.48832 Gbit/s
data streams, decoded, serialized and fed into the transmitter (Tx) of the corresponding
client port. The transmitters convert the electrical signals back to optical signals and
transmit them through the client port connectors C1-R to C8-R to the CPE.
Specifications
382
4TCA-PCN-4GU+4G
4TCA-PCN-4GU+4G
Figure 247: 4TCA-PCN-4GU+4G Front View
383
4TCA-PCN-4GU+4G
Faceplate Markings
This table lists all abbreviations on the 4TCA-PCN-4GU+4G faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 40: 4TCA-PCN-4GU+4G Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
transmit
Mod
receive
C1
C1
client port 1
C2
C2
client port 2
C3
C3
client port 3
C4
C4
client port 4
NE
NE
network port east
NW
NW
network port west
Description
The 4TCA-PCN-4GU+4G is an access type 4-port 4G TDM channel module with four
client and two network pluggable interfaces. It performs electrical multiplexing and demultiplexing of up to four client interface signals onto one specific ITU-T compliant
wavelength between the ingress and egress node.
The module is able to operate in multiple modes and configurations, including a terminal
multiplexer (protected or unprotected), a dual terminal multiplexer (unprotected), an
add/drop multiplexer or a drop and continue multiplexer.
Each of the four client interfaces can be configured individually to any of the supported
data rates. It is possible to mix 1 GbE and 1G FC services. 4G FC is supported on client
ports C1 and C3. These client services are multiplexed to a data rate of 4.25Gbit/s with a
proprietary protocol for transmission at the network interfaces.
The 4TCA-PCN-4GU+4G provides clock and data recovery and performs 3R signal
conditioning at any supported data rate by default. Due to its dual network interface, the
module can be used to establish channel protection and ring configurations. The network
interfaces provide channel protection as well.
The 4TCA-PCN-4GU+4G provides fault and performance monitoring of the optical layer
OPR, OPT and LOS (in Auto Laser Shutdown (ADM)) on the network and client ports. In
addition, on the network ports it offers LOF (proprietary) with derived ES-MUX and SESMUX. When used as a terminal multiplexer (Multiplexer NE &NW), the module supports
two independent EOCs one per network port. The EOC protection needs to be carried
out by the routing entity within the network element.
Configuration options, provision as well as fault and performance management
information for the 4TCA-PCN-4GU+4G can be found in the Management Data Guide
and the Provisioning and Operations Manual.
384
4TCA-PCN-4GU+4G
Modes of Operation
The 4TCA-PCN-4GU+4G can be operated in the following modes:
Transponder mode west (Transponder NWOnly)
Add-drop multiplexer transmission mode (Add-Drop Multiplexer)
Terminal multiplexer operation modes (Multiplexer NE Only/Multiplexer NW

Only/Multiplexer NE &NW)
Dual terminal multiplexer operation mode (Dual Muxponder)
Regenerator modes
Transponder Mode
The module is able to operate as a transponder for a single 4G FC service operating
between client port C1 and the NW network port when the module is configured with the
Transponder NWOnly mode.
Figure 248: Transponder Mode NWOnly
Transponder Mode West
C1
NE
C2
C3
C4
4TCA -PCN -4GU +4G
NW
As shown in the figure above, service is transported unprotected using the network port
west NW ((CH-NW entity in the database).
The following restrictions apply to this mode:
Channel protection is not supported.
Segmental link establishment (Auto Laser Shutdown (ALS)) is not supported.
EOC is not supported.
No multiplexing
Add-Drop Multiplexer Mode (ADM)

In this mode, the module is able to operate as an add-drop multiplexer (ADM). The 4TCAPCN-4GU+4G multiplexes (TDM) up to four client services into a 4G (4.25 Gbit/s) data
stream and transmits it using a proprietary protocol through the network port to the far-end
module. Unlike the other configurations supported by this module, the mapping of client
facilities into the network side facilities' timeslots is not fixed - instead, cross
connections between the client facilities and like type virtual channels are used to
manage the mapping. The following services are supported:
4 x 1 GbE/1G FC (1.250 Gbit/s / 1.0625 Gbit/s) on client ports C1 to C4 or
2 x 2 2G FC (2.125 Gbit/s) on client ports C1 to C4 or
2 x 1 4G FC (4.25 Gbit/s) on client ports C1 or C3 or
2 x 1 4G FC (4.25 Gbit/s) on client ports C1 and C3 (in bidirectional C-N regeneration

mode)
385
4TCA-PCN-4GU+4G
It is possible to mix 1 GbE and 1G FC services. Services of 1 GbE, 1G FC and 2GFC
can be combined up to a 4G network stream per network port. For an overview of allowed
service combinations on the client ports, refer to the Module and System Specification or
the Management Data Guide.
Pass-through network to network is not possible for 4G FC as transported service. Add,
drop and pass-through connections for a service are realized by configuring cross
connections between the relevant client channel entities and the network virtual channels
as shown in the figure below.
Figure 249: Example of Add-Drop Multiplexer Cross-Connections
Add and Drop
Pass -through
4TCA -PCN -4 GU (S )+ 4G
4TCA -PCN -4GU (S )+ 4G
NE
NW
C1
C2 C3
NW
C4
NE
C1
C2
C3
C4
A service can, for example, be added in one network (NE), pass through several NEs,
and be dropped in yet another NE.
Terminal Multiplexer Operation Modes (Multiplexer

NE Only/Multiplexer NW Only/Multiplexer NE &
NW)
When operating in multiplexer configuration, the module is able to multiplex up to 4 client
signals into a single F4250 network side facility, or a protected F4250 network side
facility. The multiplexing does not perform any sort of traffic policing or rate limiting
functions, so all client signals mapped into the network side facility will experience
complete transfer of their payloads. The mapping of client facilities into the network side
facilities timeslots is fixed, and depends on the client service type. This mode is
achieved by provisioning the module to
Multiplexer NW Only (services are transported unprotected using the NW port)
Multiplexer NE Only (services are transported unprotected using the NE port)
Multiplexer NE & NW (services are transported protected using both network ports)
This is illustrated in the figure below.

Figure 250: Terminal Multiplexer Operation Modes (Multiplexer NE
Only/Multiplexer NW Only/Multiplexer NE & NW)
Multiplexer East
Multiplexer West
C1
C1
C1
NE
NE
C3
C3
C3
NW
NW
NW
C4
C4
C4
NE
C2
C2
C2
386
Multiplexer Hotstandby
4TCA-PCN-4GU+4G
The following services are supported:
4 x 1 GbE/1G FC (1.250 Gbit/s / 1.0625 Gbit/s) on client ports C1 to C4 or
2 x 2G FC (2.125 Gbit/s) on client ports C1 and C3 or
1 x 4G FC (4.25 Gbit/s) on client port C1 or
1 x 2G FC on client port C3 and 2 x 1G FC/1 GbE on client ports C1 and C2
It is possible to mix 1 GbE and 1G FC services in any mode with the exception of drop
and continue. In the latter case only 1GbE is supported.
Dual Terminal Operation Multiplexer Mode (Dual

Muxponder)
In Dual Muxponder mode the module works as two separate multiplexers where client
ports C1 and C2 use network port NE and client ports C3 and C4 use network port NW.
The following figure illustrates the Dual Muxponder mode.
Figure 251: Dual Terminal Multiplexer Mode
Dual Terminal
Multiplexer Mode
C1
NE
C2
C3
NW
C4
Services entering the module on one set of client ports are aggregated and transported
unprotected, leaving the module on one of the network ports. The mapping of client
facilities into the network side facilities timeslots is fixed, and depends on the client
service type. The following services are supported:
2 x 1 GbE/1G FC (1.250 Gbit/s / 1.0625 Gbit/s) on client ports C1 and C2, onto
network port NE or
2 x 2G FC (2.125 Gbit/s) on client port C1 and C2, onto network port NE or
1 x 4G FC (4.25 Gbit/s) on client ports C1, onto network port NE
and
2 x 1 GbE/1G FC (1.250 Gbit/s, 1.0625 Gbit/s) on client ports C3 and C4, onto
network port NW or
1 x 2G FC (2.125 Gbit/s) on client port C3 and C4, onto network port NW or
1 x 4G FC (4.25 Gbit/s) on client ports C3, onto network port NW
It is possible to mix 1 GbE and 1G FC services. Services of 1 GbE, 1G FC and 2GFC

can be combined up to a 4G network stream per network port. For an overview of allowed
service combinations on the client ports, refer to the Module and System Specification or
the Management Data Guide.
For network connections in Dual Muxponder mode, network East has to be connected to
network East (not to NW) and network West has to be connected to network West (not to
NE). The typical connection for other modes is NE to NW and/or NW to NE.
387
4TCA-PCN-4GU+4G
Regenerator Modes
Operating in Add-Drop Multiplexer mode, the 4TCA-PCN-4GU+4G can be used as a
bidirectional single module N-N regenerator for regeneration of GbE, 1G FC, 2G FC
applications multiplexed into the proprietary framed 4G signal. In this case, a total
cascade of up to 15 regenerators will be supported.
To generate a non-multiplexed 4G FC service the 4TCA-PCN-4GU+4G can be used in
transponder mode west (Transponder NWOnly) as a transparent bidirectional single
module C-N regenerator (C1-NW). In this case, only C band is supported for client and
network port. A cascade of two regenerators are supported.
Features
Dynamic add/drop traffic function per client port
Pass through traffic function per client port
Drop and continue traffic function per client port
In-band DCN management using EOCs
VSM): protection switching time <50ms for all services
Channel protection per sub-aggregate service (Path Protection)
Client channel card protection only in multiplexer operation modes (Multiplexer

NWOnly or Multiplexer NEOnly) providing individual switching for every protection
group (PG). The following is supported:
o
o
o
o
o
pairing client ports with the same client port number on different modules within
the same shelf
pairing client ports on the same module
1+1 bidirectional switching and non-revertive switching
Switching times <50ms
individual (proprietary) APS channel for each PG
client and network ports
(Using C-band DWDM SFP transceivers or CWDM SFP transceivers, the module
can be provisioned when ALS is enabled or disabled.)
Clock and data recovery with 3R conditioning at any supported data rate by default
Dual-ended Optojack on all client ports

Performance monitoring of the optical layer OPR, OPT and LOS (in ADM mode) on
the network and client ports
Forced on setting on the transmitters of the client and network ports

Each client and network port can be looped back individually.
388

4TCA-PCN-4GU+4G

Note
The supported data rates and selectable clock rates depend on the type
of the SFP transceiver implemented and the transmission mode. For a
list of the pluggable transceivers, data rates and services supported in
the "Operation Modes", please refer to the Module and System
Specification.
Two independent, Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant interfaces


Note
SFP Transceivers
Specification.
services.
Note
protective plug.
Signal Path
The signal path when the module is operating in channel protection mode is described
below. Figure 252 shows the functional block diagram (simplified).
Transmit direction
389
4TCA-PCN-4GU+4G
port connectors C1-R, C2-R, C3-R and C4-R. These signals are converted to the
electrical domain and clock and data recovery is performed. All signals are encoded,
synchronized and mapped in a higher bit rate frame. Using a proprietary method, the
mapped signals are then electronically multiplexed together to a combined output signal
at a data rate of 4.25 Gbit/s. This proprietary framed 4G signal is routed to the SFP
transceivers of the east network port (NE) and west network port (NW) respectively.
Each transmitter (Tx) of the network ports converts the electrical output signal to an
optical signal at a specific DWDM or CWDM wavelength and transmits it through the
NE-T and NW-T connector onto the link.
Receive direction
The network port receivers (Rx) receive proprietary framed 4G signals at a specific
DWDM or CWDM wavelength through the NE-R and NW-R connectors from the link.
These signals are converted to the electrical domain and clock and data recovery is
performed. The signals from the two links are monitored continuously. If one of the
receiver. The signal is directed to the DEMUX section where the proprietary frame is demultiplexed into its original component client signals. Each client signal is decoded,
serialized and fed into the SFP transceiverof the corresponding client port. The
through the client port connectors C1-T, C2-T, C3-T and C4-T to the CPE.
390
4TCA-PCN-4GU+4G
Figure 252: 4TCA-PCN-4GU+4G Functional Block Diagram
Specifications
391
4TCA-PCN-4GUS+4G
4TCA-PCN-4GUS+4G
Figure 253: 4TCA-PCN-4GUS+4G Front View
392
4TCA-PCN-4GUS+4G
Faceplate Markings
Table 41 lists all abbreviations on the 4TCA-PCN-4GUS+4G faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 41: 4TCA-PCN-4GUS+4G Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
transmit
Mod
receive
C1
C1
client port 1
C2
C2
client port 2
C3
C3
client port 3
C4
C4
client port 4
NE
NE
network port east
NW
NW
network port west
Description
The 4TCA-PCN-4GUS+4G is an access type 4-port 4G TDM channel module with four
client and two network pluggable interfaces. It performs electrical multiplexing and demultiplexing of up to four client interface signals onto one specific ITU-T compliant
wavelength between the ingress and egress node.
The module is able to operate in multiple modes and configurations, including a terminal
multiplexer (protected or unprotected), a dual terminal multiplexer (unprotected), an
add/drop multiplexer as well as a drop and continue multiplexer.
4 x GbE, 4 x STM-4/OC-12 or not more than 24 x STM-1/OC-3 services can be
transported. Each of the four client interfaces can be configured individually to any of the
supported data rates. These services are multiplexed to a data rate of 4.25 Gbit/s with a
proprietary protocol for transmission at the network interfaces.
The 4TCA-PCN-4GUS+4G provides clock and data recovery and performs 3R signal
conditioning at any supported data rate by default. Due to its dual network interface, the
module can be used to establish channel protection and ring configurations.
The 4TCA-PCN-4GUS+4G provides fault and performance monitoring of the optical layer
OPR, OPT and LOS (in ADM mode) on the network and client ports. In addition, on the
network ports it offers LOF (proprietary) with derived ES-MUX and SES-MUX.
When used as a terminal multiplexer (Multiplexer NE &NW), the 4TCA-PCN-4GUS+4G
supports two independent EOCs one per network port. The EOC protection needs to be
carried out by the routing entity within the network element.
Configuration options, provision as well as fault and performance management
information of the 4TCA-PCN-4GUS+4G, can be found in the Management Data Guide
and in the Provisioning and Operations Manual.
393
4TCA-PCN-4GUS+4G
Modes of Operation
The 4TCA-PCN-4GUS+4G can be operated in the following modes:
Add-drop multiplexer transmission mode (Add-Drop Multiplexer)
Terminal multiplexer modes (Multiplexer NE Only/Multiplexer NW Only/Multiplexer

NE & NW)
Dual terminal multiplexer operation mode (Dual Muxponder)
Regenerator mode
Add-drop Multiplexer Transmission Mode

In this mode, the module is able to operate as an add-drop multiplexer. The 4TCA-PCN4GUS+4G multiplexes (TDM) up to four client services into a 4G (4.25 Gbit/s) data
stream and transmits it using a proprietary protocol through the network port to the far-end
module. Unlike the other configurations supported by this module, the mapping of client
facilities into the network side facilities' timeslots is not fixed - instead, cross
connections between the client facilities and like type virtual channels are used to
manage the mapping. The following services are supported:
24 x STM-1/OC-3 (155 Mbit/s) on client ports C1 to C4 or
4 x 1 GbE (1.250 Gbit/s) on client ports C1 to C4
Any combination of STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12 and 1 GbE is possible up to a 4G

network stream per network port.
Add, drop and pass-through connections for a service are realized by configuring cross
connections between the relevant client channel entities and the network virtual channels
as shown in the figure below.
Figure 254: Add-Drop Multiplexer Cross-Connections
Add and Drop
Pass -through
4TCA -PCN -4 GU (S )+ 4G
NE
NW
C1
C2 C3
C4
NW
NE
C1
C2
C3
C4
Terminal Multiplexer Operation Modes (Multiplexer

NE Only/Multiplexer NW Only/Multiplexer NE &
NW)
When operating in multiplexer configuration, the module is able to multiplex up to 4 client
signals into a single F4250 network side facility, or a protected F4250 network side
facility. The multiplexing does not perform any sort of traffic policing or rate limiting
functions, so all client signals mapped into the network side facility will experience
complete transfer of their payloads. The mapping of client facilities into the network side
394
4TCA-PCN-4GUS+4G
facilities timeslots is fixed, and depends on the client service type. This mode is
achieved by provisioning the module to
Multiplexer NW Only(services are transported unprotected using the NW port)
Multiplexer NEOnly (services are transported unprotected using the NE port)
Multiplexer NE &NW (services are transported protected using both network ports)
This is illustrated in the figure below.

Figure 255: Terminal Multiplexer Operation Modes (Multiplexer NE
Only/Multiplexer NW Only/Multiplexer NE & NW)
Multiplexer East
Multiplexer West
Multiplexer Hotstandby
C1
C1
C1
NE
NE
C3
C3
C3
NW
NW
NW
C4
C4
C4
NE
C2
C2
C2
The following services are supported:
4 x 1 GbE (1.250 Gbit/s) on client ports C1 to C4
Dual Terminal Operation Multiplexer Mode (Dual

Muxponder)
In Dual Muxponder mode the module works as two separate multiplexers where client
ports C1 and C2 use network port NE and client ports C3 and C4 use network port NW.
The following figure illustrates the dual muxponder mode.
Figure 256: Dual Terminal Multiplexer Mode
Dual Terminal
Multiplexer Mode
C1
NE
C2
C3
NW
C4
4TCA -PCN -4GU (S)+ 4G
Services entering the module on one set of client ports are aggregated and transported
unprotected, leaving the module on one of the network ports. The mapping of client
facilities into the network side facilities timeslots is fixed, and depends on the client
service type. The following services are supported:
2 x 1 GbE (1.250 Gbit/s) on client ports C1 and C2, onto network port NE or
2 x STM-1/OC-3 (155 Mbit/s) on client ports C1 and C2, onto network port NE or
2 x STM-4/OC-12 (622 Mbit/s) on client ports C1 and C2, onto network port NE
and
395
4TCA-PCN-4GUS+4G
2 x 1 GbE (1.250 Gbit/s) on client ports C3 and C4, onto network port NW or
2 x STM-1/OC-3 (155 Mbit/s) on client ports C3 and C4, onto network port NW or
2 x STM-4/OC-12 (622 Mbit/s) on client ports C3 and C4, onto network port NW
It is possible to mix 1GbE, STM-1/OC-3 and STM-4/OC-12 services.

For network connections in Dual Muxponder mode, network East has to be connected to
network East (not to NW) and network West has to be connected to network West (not to
NE). The typical connection for other modes is NE to NW and/or NW to NE.
Regenerator Mode
Working in Add-Drop Multiplexer mode, the 4TCA-PCN-4GUS+4G can be used as a
bidirectional single module N-N regenerator for regeneration of all supported services. In
this case, applications are multiplexed into the proprietary framed 4G signal. A total
cascade of up to 15 regenerators will be supported.
Features
Dynamic add/drop traffic function per client port
Pass through traffic function per client port
Drop and continue traffic function per client port
VSM): restoration time <1 s for all services
Channel protection per sub-aggregate service (Path Protection)
Client channel card protection only in multiplexer operation modes (Multiplexer

NWOnly or Multiplexer NEOnly) providing individual switching for every protection
group (PG). The following is supported:
o
o
o
o
o
396
pairing client ports with the same client port number on different modules within
the same shelf
pairing client ports on the same module
individual (proprietary) APS channel for each PG
client and network ports
(Using C-band DWDM SFP transceivers or CWDM SFP transceivers, the module
can be provisioned when ALS is enabled or disabled.)
Dual-ended Optojack on all client ports

Performance monitoring of the optical layer OPR, OPT and LOS (in ADM mode) on
the network and client ports
Forced on setting on the transmitters of the client and network ports
One independent DCN channel (EOC) on network port east and west
Facility and terminal loopback for each client port and the network ports
4TCA-PCN-4GUS+4G


Note
The supported data rates and selectable clock rates depend on the type
of the SFP transceiver implemented and the transmission mode. For a
list of the pluggable transceivers, data rates and services supported in
the "Operation Modes", please refer to the Module and System
Specification.


Note
Specification.
services.
Note
protective plug.
Signal Path
The signal path when the module is operating in channel protection mode is described
below. Figure 257 shows the functional block diagram (simplified).
397
4TCA-PCN-4GUS+4G
Transmit direction
mapped signals are then electronically multiplexed together to a combined signal at a
data rate of 4.25 Gbit/s. This proprietary framed 4G signal is routed to the SFP
transceivers of the east network port (NE) and west network port (NW) respectively.
Each transmitter (Tx) of the network ports converts the electrical output signal to an
optical signal at a specific DWDM or CWDM wavelength and transmits it through the
NE-T and NW-T connector onto the link.
Receive direction
The network port receivers (Rx) receive proprietary framed 4G signals at a specific
DWDM or CWDM wavelength through the NE-R and NW-R connectors from the link.
These signals are converted to the electrical domain and clock and data recovery is
performed. The signals from the two links are monitored continuously. If one of the
receiver. The signal is directed to the DEMUX section where the proprietary frame is demultiplexed into its original component client signals. Each client signal is decoded,
serialized and fed into the SFP transceiverof the corresponding client port. The
through the client port connectors C1-T, C2-T, C3-T and C4-T to the CPE.
398
4TCA-PCN-4GUS+4G
Figure 257: 4TCA-PCN-4GUS+4G Functional Block Diagram
Specifications
399
WCA-PCN-2G5U
WCA-PCN-2G5U
Figure 258: WCA-PCN-2G5U Front View
Note
400
The WCA-PCN-2G5U is a converted FSP 2000 Release 6.6 module as

follow FSP 2000 Release 6.6 rules. This mainly concerns Auto Laser
Shutdown (ALS) and LED behavior.
WCA-PCN-2G5U
Faceplate Markings
Table 42 and Table 43 list all abbreviations on the WCA-PCN-2G5U faceplate and their
meanings.

Table 42: WCA-PCN-2G5U Optical Port Markings
Optical Ports
Meaning
transmit
receive
client port
NW
network port West
NE
network port East

Table 43: WCA-PCN-2G5U LED Indicator Markings
LEDs
Meaning
LEDs
Meaning
O/E

status/error condition
Lp
looping back on the client or

network ports
C/R
C/T

port
NW/R

port West
NW/T

port West
NE/R

port East
NE/T

port East
Description
The WCA-PCN-2G5U is an access type multi-rate WDM channel module with a single
client and dual network Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant interfaces.
The module offers multiple clock settings. The following clock modes can be configured:
clocked mode
401
WCA-PCN-2G5U
One data rate is selected from the specified range and is set by the user. The bit rate
is fixed. Only signals with the adjusted data rate can be received and transmitted. If
the incoming data rate does not match the adjusted data rate, the transceiver of the
client port is disabled and a clock error is indicated. Traffic stops.
adaptive discrete clocked mode

This mode is used for data rates that are one of the modules data rates. The
supported data rates are automatically detected. If the incoming data rate does not
match the module data rate, the local transceiver is disabled and a clock error is
indicated. Traffic stops.
adaptive odd clocked mode

This mode allows the transport of data rates other than those specified for the
module. That is, all possible data rates between 100Mbit/s and 2500 Mbit/s can be
automatically detected and clocked.
Due to its dual network interfaces, the module can be used to create channel protection
or perform full-duplex 3R regeneration, and be used for building ring configurations.
In case the module is deployed as a inline regenerator, the cage on the client side need
not be populated with an SFP transceiver.
The WCA-PCN-2G5U provides performance monitoring on the optical layer only.
Features
Channel protection
Multiple clock settings
Implementation of media conversion along with wavelength conversion (e.g.

multimode to single-mode or copper to fiber)
Transmission of SD-SDI and HD-SDI video signals in adaptive odd clocked mode
Fault and performance monitoring on the client port and network ports
Facility Loopbacks on the client port and network ports

(Each network port can be looped back individually.)
Single Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant interface using LC

connector for fiber termination
Use of SFP transceivers supporting electrical interfaces as well as gray wavelengths

and CWDM channels according to ITU-T G.694
Note
402
WCA-PCN-2G5U
Dual Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant interface using LC

connector for fiber termination

Note
Specification.
services.
Note
protective plug.
Signal Path
path when the module is operating in channel protection mode. The signal path is
described below.
403
WCA-PCN-2G5U
Figure 259: WCA-PCN-2G5U Functional Block Diagram (Simplified)
Transmit direction
The client port receiver (Rx) receives the signal from the CPE through the client port
connector C-R. This signal is converted to the electrical domain and clock and data
recovery performed.
The regenerated signal is routed to the SFP transceivers of the east and west network
ports (NE and NW) respectively. Each transmitter (Tx) converts the electrical output
signal back to an optical signal at a specific DWDM wavelength and transmits it through
the NW-T and NE-T connectors onto the link.
Receive direction
electrical domain and data and clock recovery is performed. The signals from the two
links are monitored continuously. If one of the receivers (Rx) detects a loss of signal, the
decision logic based on a set of switching criteria initiates the automatic switch-over,
provided a signal is available on the other receiver. The signal is fed into the SFP
transceiverof the client port. If an optical transceiver is used at the client side the
transmitter (Tx) converts the electrical signal back to an optical signal. The signal is
transmitted through the client port connector C-T to the CPE.
When the module operates in converter mode on network port West or on network port
East, the signal path is just like the one described above. The difference is that the
redundant network port is not used.
404
2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5
Specifications
2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5
Figure 260: 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 Front View
405
2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 44: 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
transmit
Mod
receive
C1
C1
client port 1
C2
C2
client port 2
NE
operating status of the network port East
NE
network port East
NW
operating status of the network port West
NW
network port West
Description
The 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 is an access type, 2-port multi-rate TDM channel module. It
features two client and two network Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant
interfaces. The SFP transceivers use LC connectors for fiber termination.
The module is designed for transport of 2 x GbE or 2 x 1G FC over a specific ITU-T
compliant wavelength between the ingress and egress node. It is possible to mix these
services such as 1 x GbE and 1 x 1G FC. The transmission of the client signals in
transparent mode is supported.
Due to its dual network interface, the module can be used to create channel protection
and versatile switched protection.
Facility loopbacks or terminal loopbacks are supported on both the client ports and on the
network ports. Each port can be looped back individually.
Features
406
Channel protection
Implementation of media conversion (multimode to single-mode or copper to fiber and

vice versa)
Performance monitoring on the network ports
Standard FEC according to ITU-T G.709 is not provided
Facility Loopbacks or terminal loopbacks on the client and network ports
2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5
Client Interface Characteristics:


Note
Network Interface Characteristics:

Proprietary EOC functionality

Note
Specification.
services.
Note
protective plug.
Signal Path
407
2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5
Figure 261: 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 Functional Block Diagram
Transmit Direction
Each client port receiver (Rx) receives the optical signals from the CPE through the C1R and C2-R connectors. These signals are converted to the electrical domain, and data
and clock recovery is performed. All signals are encoded, synchronized and mapped in a
higher bit rate frame. Using a proprietary method, the mapped signals are then
multiplexed together to a combined output signal at a data rate of 2.48832 Gbit/s. This
combined output signal is routed to SFPs of the East and West network ports (NE, NW)
respectively.
Each transmitter (Tx) converts the electrical output signal back to an optical signal at a
specific DWDM wavelength and transmits it through the NW-T and NE-T connectors
onto the link.
Receive Direction
electrical domain and data and clock recovery is performed.
The signals from the two links are monitored continuously. If one of the receivers (Rx)
detects a loss of signal, the decision logic based on a set of switching criteria initiates the
automatic switch-over, provided a signal is available on the other receiver. The signal is
directed to the DEMUX section where the proprietary frame is de-multiplexed into its
original component client signals. Each client signal is decoded, serialized and fed into
the SFP transceiverof the corresponding client port. The transmitters (Tx) convert the
electrical signals back to optical signals and transmit them through the client port
connectors C1-T and C2-T to the CPE.
408
2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5
Specifications
2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5
Figure 262: 2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5 Front View
409
2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5 faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 45: 2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
transmit
Mod
receive
C1
C1
client port 1
C2
C2
client port 2
NE
operating status of the network port East
NE
network port East
NW
operating status of the network port West
NW
network port West
Description
The 2TCA-PCN-622+2G5 is an access type, 2-port multi-rate TDM channel module. It
features two client and two network Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant
interfaces.
The transmission of the client signals in transparent mode is supported. The module
provides clock and data recovery to support 2xSTM-4/2xOC-12 services. Due to its dual
network interface, the module can be used to create channel protection and versatile
switched protection.
Facility loopbacks or terminal loopbacks are supported on both the client ports and on the
network ports. Each port can be looped back individually.
Features
Channel protection
Implementation of media conversion (multimode to single-mode or copper to fiber and

vice versa)
Performance monitoring on the network ports
Standard FEC according to ITU-T G.709 is not provided
Facility Loopbacks or terminal loopbacks on the client and network ports
410

2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5

Note

Proprietary EOC functionality

Note
Specification.
services.
Note
protective plug.
Signal Path
411
2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5
Figure 263: 2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5 Functional Block Diagram
Transmit Direction
Each client port receiver (Rx) receives the optical signals from the CPE through the C1R and C2-R connectors. These signals are converted to the electrical domain, and data
and clock recovery is performed. All signals are synchronized and mapped in a higher bit
rate frame. Using a proprietary method, the mapped signals are then multiplexed together
to a combined output signal at a data rate of 2.48832 Gbit/s. This combined output signal
is routed to SFP transceivers of the East and West network ports (NE, NW) respectively.
Each transmitter (Tx) converts the electrical output signal back to an optical signal at a
specific DWDM wavelength and transmits it through the NW-T and NE-T connectors
onto the link.
Receive Direction
electrical domain and data and clock recovery is performed. The signals from the two
links are monitored continuously. If one of the receivers (Rx) detects a loss of signal, the
decision logic based on a set of switching criteria initiates the automatic switch-over,
provided a signal is available on the other receiver.
The signal is directed to the DEMUX section where the proprietary frame is demultiplexed into its original component client signals.
Each client signal is serialized and fed into the SFP transceiverof the corresponding client
port. The transmitters (Tx) convert the electrical signals back to optical signals and
transmit them through the client port connectors C1-T and C2-T to the CPE.
412
4TCA-LS+1G3-V
Specifications
4TCA-LS+1G3-V
Figure 264: Front View of a 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx
Note
The 4TCA-LS+1G3-V is a converted FSP 2000 Release 6.6 module as

follow FSP 2000 Release 6.6 rules. This mainly concerns Auto Laser
Shutdown (ALS) and LED behavior.
413
4TCA-LS+1G3-V
Faceplate Markings
Table 46 and Table 47 list all abbreviations on the 4TCA-LS+1G3-V faceplate and their
meanings.

Table 46: 4TCA-LS+1G3-V Optical Port Markings
Optical Ports
Meaning
receive
transmit
C1
client port 1
C2
client port 2
C3
client port 3
C4
client port 4
network port

Table 47: 4TCA-LS+1G3-V LED Indicator Markings
414
LEDs
Meaning
LEDs
Meaning
C1/R
receiver status of the client

port 1
C1/T

port 1
C2/R

port 2
C2/T

port 2
C3/R

port 3
C3/T

port 3
C4/R

port 4
C4/T

port 4
N/R

port
N/T

network port
On
Err

procedure
4TCA-LS+1G3-V
Variants
The module is available in 41 DWDM variants and eight CWDM variants.
The 4TCA-LS+1G3-V is available in following DWDM variants:
4TCA-LS+1G3-V#D01 to 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#D32
4TCA-LS+1G3-V#DC1 to 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#DC9
The 4TCA-LS+1G3-V is available in following CWDM variants:
4TCA-LS+1G3-V#C1470
4TCA-LS+1G3-V#C1490
4TCA-LS+1G3-V#C1510
4TCA-LS+1G3-V#C1530
4TCA-LS+1G3-V#C1550
4TCA-LS+1G3-V#C1570
4TCA-LS+1G3-V#C1590
4TCA-LS+1G3-V#C1610
Description
The 4TCA-LS+1G3-V is an access type 4-port low-speed TDM channel module
specifically designed for the use in DWDM/CWDM transport systems with very-long
distance transmission.
The 4TCA-LS+1G3-V is intended for transport of FE, STM-1, OC-3, ATM155 and
ESCON over a specific ITU-T compliant wavelength between the ingress and egress
node. It is possible to mix the specified client services such as 2 x ESCON, 1 x STM-1
and 1 x ATM 155.
The 4TCA-LS+1G3-V works only in conjunction with the appropriate DWDM/CWDM
It cannot be deployed in topologies with optical amplifiers. The maximum realizable fiber
link distances of the 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Cxxxx are shorter in comparison to the 4TCALS+1G3-V#Dxx.
Features
network ports
Clock and data recovery with 3R signal conditioning.

The clock recovery of the network port is fixed to the clock frequency 1.25 Gbit/s.
Fault and performance monitoring on the client ports and network port
Terminal Loopbacks on the client ports

(The client channels are looped back simultaneously.)
No support of loopback operations on the network port
415
4TCA-LS+1G3-V
Client interface characteristics
Four integrated, short reach, 1310 nm interfaces using MU/PC simplex connectors
(also called MiniSC) for fiber termination
For the transmitter connectors it have to be used single-mode fibers and for the
receive connectors multimode fibers.
Note
Network interface characteristics
One integrated, very-long reach DWDM interface (4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx)
One integrated, very-long reach CWDM interface (4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Cxxxx)
MU/PC simplex connectors (also called MiniSC)
Fiber type: SM 9 m
Note
Signal Path
Transmit Direction
mapped signals are then electronically multiplexed together to a combined output signal
at a data rate of 1.25 Gbit/s. This combined signal is routed to the transmitter (Tx) of the
network port. The transmitter converts the electrical output signal back to an optical
signal at a specific DWDM/CWDM wavelength and transmits it through the N-T
connector onto the link.
Receive Direction
electrical domain and clock and data recovery is performed. In the DEMUX section, the
input signal is de-multiplexed into its original component client signals.
416
4TCA-LS+1G3-V
Each client signal is decoded, serialized and fed into the transmitter (Tx) of the
corresponding client port. The transmitters convert the electrical signals back to optical
signals and transmit them through the client port connectors C1-T, C2-T, C3-T and C4T to the CPE.
Figure 265: 4TCA-LS+1G3-V Functional Block Diagram (Simplified)
Specifications
417
4TCA-LS+1G3-V
418
Chapter 11
This chapter contains the descriptions of all enterprise type channel modules available at
the publication date of this Hardware Description.
simplified operation scheme and module specific details. The module key features are
The descriptions are merely supposed to convey a basic understanding of the enterprise
enterprise type channel modules are provided such as module identification, naming
conventions, module design and operation status.
WCE-PCN-100G on p.436
WCE-PCN-100GB on p.431
10TCE-PCN-16GU+100G on p.441
10TCE-PCN-16GU+AES100G on p.448
4WCE-PCN-16GFC on p.541
5TCE-PCN-10GU+10G on p.471
5TCE-PCN-10GU+AES10G on p.478
5TCE-PCTN-10GU+10G on p.487
5TCE-PCTN-10GU+AES10G on p.494
5TCE-PCN-8GU+10GS on p.503
5TCE-PCN-8GU+AES10GS on p.509
5TCE-PCTN-8GU+10GS on p.516
5TCE-PCTN-8GU+AES10GS on p.522
8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V on p.529
8TCE-GLINK+2G5-V on p.535
10TCE-PCN-10G+100G-GF on p.457
10TCE-PCN-10G+100G on p.464
419
General Information
General Information
Enterprise type channel modules convert optical signals from customer equipment to
WDM channels for transport across enterprise networks. WDM channel modules
enterprise type named WCEs and x-port TDM channel modules enterprise type named
xTCEs are available in CWDM and DWDM variants. On the client side, WCEs and
xTCEs interface to customer premises equipment (CPE) directly or indirectly via
protection modules. On the network side, they connect to the FSP 3000R7 optical filter
modules which perform WDM in several stages. CWDM and DWDM channel modules
work only in conjunction with the appropriate optical filter modules.
When operated within the outlined specifications, the WCEs and xTCEs will be capable
of a 100 km reach without using optical amplification, dispersion compensation or digital
signal regeneration. These module types typically do not support standard FEC
functionality according to ITU-T G.709 and in-band DCN management.
Identification
Enterprise type channel modules are identified by faceplate codes and the label printed
on the board cover. Identification information is provided in each module description.
Naming Conventions
The name of an enterprise type channel module is made up of a set of parts assembled
according to a very specific rule as exemplified below. The parts of the name represent
the modules specific features.
Example of the 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#D20 Channel Module:
8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#D20
Integrated network interface type: D WDM
transmission distance - very long reach
DWDM channel number 20
Network port data rate : 2.5 Gbit/s
Max. Client port data rate : 200Mbit/s
Channel module type: Enterprise type TDM channel module
This example describes an enterprise type 8-port TDM channel module with eight fixed
client interfaces supporting a maximum client data rate of 200 Mbit/s. The aggregated
data rate on the network port runs at 2.5Gbit/s. The module features an integrated verylong reach DWDM interface for channel number 20.
Example of the 10TCE-PCN-10GU+100G TDM Channel Module:
420
General Information
10TCE-PCN-10G-100G
Network port data rate : 111.8 Gbit/s

Max. client port data rate : 10.3 Gbit/s
Pluggable interface(s):
pluggable client interfaceand

(s)
pluggable network interface(s)
Channel module type: Enterprise type TDM channel module

This example describes an enterprise type 10-port TDM channel module with 10
plugguable interfaces on the client side and a single pluggable interface on the network
side. This module supports a maximum client data rate of 10.3Gbit/s. The aggregated
data rate on the network port runs at 111.8Gbit/s.
Table 48 lists the naming conventions used by the FSP 3000R7.
Table 48: Enterprise Type Channel Module Naming Convention
Parts of the
Name
Code
Meaning
Number of client
ports (WDM and
TDM channel
modules

Channel module
type
WCE
Enterprise type WDM channel module
TCE
Enterprise type TDM channel module
Pluggable and
tunable interface
(s)
(if applicable)
PCTN
Pluggable client interface(s) and tunable

network interface(s)
PCN
Pluggable client interface(s) and network

interface(s)
421
General Information
Parts of the
Name
Code
Meaning
Client port data

rates
GLINK
196,608 Mbit/s
Network port data

rates
ESCON
8GU
universal data rates: 1.250 Gbit/s,

1.0625Gbit/s, 2.125 Gbit/s, 4.250 Gbit/s and
8.5 Gbit/s
10GU
universal data rates between 1.250 Gbit/s,

1.0625 Gbit/s, 2.125 Gbit/s, 4.250 Gbit/s, 8.5
Gbit/s, 9.9532 Gbit/s, 10.0 Gbit/s, 10.51875
Gbit/s, 10.313 Gbit/s
16G FC
14.025 Gbit/s
100G
103.125 Gbit/s, 111.81 Gbit/s
2G5
2.488320 Gbit/s
10G

11.3176 Gbit/s
10GS
9.95328 Gbit/s SDH/Sonet
16G FC
14.025 Gbit/s
100G
111.81 Gbit/s
422
Encryption
function
AES
data encryption technique employing the

Advanced Encryption Standard
Transmission
distances
long reach link distance (30 km - 70 km)
LN
noise optimized, long reach link distances

(30 km - 70 km)
General Information
Parts of the
Name
Code
Meaning
WDM channel
#Dxx
DWDM channel (xx stands for channels 01 to

64)
#DCx
DWDM C-band intermediate channel (x stands

channel 81)
#DLx
DWDM L-band intermediate channel (x stands

channel 82)
#DC
DWDM C-band channels according to FSP

#DL
DWDM L-band channels according to FSP

#Cxxxx
CWDM channel 1470, 1490, 1510, 1530, 1550,

wavelength table
Module Design
Enterprise type channel modules are designed as single-slot or two-slot plug-in modules
that are compatible with any 9HU shelf (SH9HU), 7HU shelf (SH7HU) or 1HU Shelf
(SH1HU).
Enterprise type channel modules have either integrated or pluggable transceivers for the
client interfaces and only integrated transceivers for the network interfaces. The
SFP/XFP design allows in-service configuration on an as-needed basis without affecting
other active ports. The receptacle connectors are angled at 45 to preserve minimum fiber
bend radii when connecting the fiber-optic jumpers.
Each enterprise type channel module has either special EMC contact strips or an EMC
textile gasket on the narrow sides of the faceplate, which create a tight seal with
neighboring modules. The EMC contact strips and the EMC textile gaskets respectively
avoid unintended propagation of electromagnetic energy towards the external
environment that might disrupt other equipment.
All enterprise type channel modules are hot swappable and customer installable. This
Module Handling
423
General Information

Using the network control unit (NCU), all enterprise type channel modules are SNMP
and the NCU.
The the equipment type names of the enterprise type channel modules used by the
Faceplate Markings
WCEs and xTCEs have different faceplate markings. LED indicators and optical port
markings of the individual modules are explained in the appropriate module descriptions.
LED Indicators
All enterprise type channel modules have tri-color LED indicators that are visible through
the faceplates. Their colors display different operating status. The status that each color
of the LEDindicators represents is described in the Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Manual.
Labeling
Each enterprise type channel module has printed several labels on the frontplate and the
board cover. These labels provide module specific information as shown in Figure 266,
Figure 268, Figure 269, Figure 270, Figure 273 and Figure 274.
Frontplate Labels
For a quick identification all enterprise type channel modules have two printed labels
affixed on its frontplate. These labels include the module name, item number, HW
revision, serial number and USI code. Figure 266 shows examples of the 10TCE-PCN10G+100G frontplate labels affixed on the frontplates of the modules released prior to the
Rel.12.3. Starting from Rel. 12.3 the design of the frontplate labels changed. Figure 267
on p.425 shows the frontplate labels of the 10TCE-PCN-16GU+AES100G as an
example for all enterprise channel modules released starting from Rel. 12.3.
424
General Information
Figure 266: Examples of 10TCE-PCN-10G+100G Frontplate Labels
Figure 267: Example of 10TCE-PCN-16GU+AES100G Frontplate Labels
Module Type Label

This label contains module information, such as
the name of the module
the module type
port descriptions for channel modules with fixed optical ports only (relevant
specifications)
label contains the approved certification marks of the channel module.
425
General Information
Figure 268: Example of a 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx Module Type Label
Figure 269: Example of a 8TCE-GLINK+2G5-V#Dxx Module Type Label
Figure 270: Example of a 10TCE-PCN-10G+100G-GF Module Type Label
426
General Information
Figure 271: Example of 10TCE-PCN-16GU+100G Module Type Label
Figure 272: Example of 5TCE-PCN-8GU+10GS ;odule Type Label
Certification Label
This label provides approved certification marks. An example of an enterprise type
channel module certification label is shown in Figure 273.
427
General Information
Figure 273: Example of an Enterprise Type Channel Module Certification Label
Channel modules with pluggable interfaces on the client side and the network side do not
have a certification label. The approved certification marks are included in the module
type label. See Figure 270 on p.426.
Warranty Label
Networking will disclaim the implied warranty of merchantability. An example of an
enterprise type channel module warranty label is shown in Figure 274.
Figure 274: Example of an Enterprise Type Channel Module Warranty Label
428

A Channel Group is a fixed grid of four adjacent 100GHz spaced wavelengths where
each wavelength has 50GHz bandwidth that support a single 100 Gigabit service. The
100 Gigabit service is distributed over the 4 optical channels (or lanes) and supported by
a C form-factor pluggable (CFP) interface. All 4 lanes must be available through the node
and network path to support the Channel Group. All lanes must follow the same path. The
following channel and ROADM modules support the Channel Groups:
10TCE-100G
10TCE-100GF
10TCE100GB
10TCE100GAES
WCE-100G
8ROADM-C40
8ROADM-C80
ROADM-C80
4ROADM-C96
Four optical paths are provisioned through the node to create the channel group. A
channel group is provisioned by creating the network port on the channel module, and the
Optical Wavelength Group (OWLG) on the Optical Line (OL). The OWLG creates and
groups all four Wavelength Channel entities (WCH) into one entity. The filter module
combines the 4 lanes together. If the path contains a ROADM then the Optical Transport
Lane Group (OTLG) entity creates and groups the 4 channels and the OTLG cross
connect must be provisioned. Creating the OWLG on the OL and network port on the
channel module are the last step, after everything else is provisioned.
The diagram below shows how the four 28Gbit (includes payload and overhead) lanes are
combined into a approximately 112Gbit Channel Group and routed through the network.
429

Figure 275: Channel Group Flow Diagram
For information about how to provision a100G channel card to operate in a Channel Group
configuration, refer to Provisioning an Enterprise 100 Gbps Service through a Network, in
the FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2 Network Element Director Online Help.
430
WCE-PCN-100GB
WCE-PCN-100GB
Figure 276: Example of a FSP 3000R7 WCE-PCN-100GB Front View
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the WCE-PCN-100GB module faceplate and
their meanings.
431
WCE-PCN-100GB
Table 49: WCE-PCN-100GB Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
transmit
Mod
receive
operating state of the client interface

CFP
client interface
operating state of the network interface

CFP
network interface
Description
The WCE-PCN-100GB is an enterprise type, two-slot WDM channel module with a
single C form-factor pluggable (CFP) client interface and a single CFP network interface.
The front view of the module, equipped with a CFP/112G/LR4/SM/LC and
CFP/4x28G/#19xxx-#19xxxL/SM/LC transceiver, is illustrated in Figure 276 on p.431.
The WCE-PCN-100GB provides transponder functionality for the client signals The client
signal is internally mapped to the 100 Gbit/s network OTU4 signal for transport over an
enterprise optical network.
The client interface is customer-facing (connected to the client equipment) and the
network interface is network-facing (indirectly connected to the enterprise optical
The client-side and the network-side optics are included within the CFP Multi-Source
Agreement (MSA) standards-compliant transceiver modules (in the following referred to
as CFP transceivers). The CFP transceivers perform the optical-to-electrical (o/e) and
electrical-to-optical (e/o) conversion, monitor physical layer performance, and monitor
faults on each optical lane. The optical performance of client and network interfaces is
determined by the specifications of the installed CFP transceiver module. See the
selected CFP transceiver module specification for additional information.
The network interface may use tunable 100G DWDM CFP transceivers for high
flexibility. These CFP transceivers support fixed channel spacing at 100GHz between
the optical lanes. The lanes can be tuned as a block to different DWDM wavelengths in
the C band.
Enhanced FEC with configurable coding gain (EFEC-5) is supported on the OTU4
network port to enable metro-reach performance.
The WCE-PCN-100GB provides performance monitoring data at the client and network
interface for the physical layer, service layer, and FEC layer. Furthermore, facility
loopbacks and terminal loopbacks are supported on the client and network interfaces.
The WCE-PCN-100GB can be used for point-to-point unprotected service and protected
services (versatile switched protection). The module supports Client Channel Card
Protection (CCCP) for dual-ended, bidirectional revertive and non-revertive switching
applications, for 100GbE client services, (standard compliant usage of OTU4 APS/PCC
channels).
The WCE-PCN-100GB works with all full-band C-band amplifiers, Raman amplifiers, and
with all released DWDM and hybrid network architectures. However, interworking with
Express Layer modules is not supported.
432
WCE-PCN-100GB
The WCE-PCN-100GB may only be used in a SH9HU, SH1HU-HP/2DC, or SH1HUR/PF that provide sufficient air flow to cool the module.
Note
The WCE-PCN-100GB module must not be operated in a SH7HU,

SH7HU-R, SH1HU-R, or SH1HU-F/2DC due to heat dissipation issues.
Insufficient cooling could overheat and destroy the module.
The WCE-PCN-100GB module is supported by the network control unit

Note
Features
Major features specific to the WCE-PCN-100GB module are:
Mode of operation:
o
o
Supported mapping of services on the network interfaces:

o
o
ODU4 transparent transport

FEC for network interface OTU4 service:

o
o
unprotected terminal transponder

Enhanced FEC (EFEC-5)

Configurable EFEC performance to optimize latency caused by EFEC
computation at the cost of coding gain
Service protection:
o
o
o

Versatile switched protection (in conjunction with the RSM-SF, RSM-OLM, and
VSM)
OTN GCC0 Embedded Communication Channel (ECC) for network OTU4 service
Fault Management (FM) and Performance Monitoring (PM)

o
o
o
o
Physical layer
Physical Coding Sublayer (PCS) in case of 100GbE client service
Service layer (OTN)
FEC PMs
Facility loopbacks and terminal loopbacks for the client port and the network ports
Single C Form-factor Pluggable (CFP) MSA standard compliant interface for CFP
transceivers
Note
433
WCE-PCN-100GB
Single C form-factor pluggable (CFP) MSA standard compliant interface for CFP
transceivers
Note
Specification.
Note
Signal Path
Figure 277: WCE-PCN-100GB Functional Block Diagram
434
WCE-PCN-100GB
Transmit Direction
network port transmit connector(s) N-T. The client port connector C-R receives a 100G
Ethernet client signal. Client signal modulation is defined by the CFP specifications. The
CFP specifications contain a set of specific wavelengths that operate together to deliver
the 100Gbit/s service at the client receiver port. The CFP receiver optics convert the
wavelengths to an electrical signal. The client 100GbE signal is mapped into the OTU4
under the control of the Generic Mapping Procedure (GMP), according to ITU-T G.709.
The network OTU4 signal is encoded using an enhanced forward error correcting code
(EFEC). On the network side, the resulting 100G signal is distributed across a number of
optical lanes, each operating at a specific network port data rate, depending on the CFP
transceiver type used. The CFP transmitter performs electrical-to-optical conversion and
transmit the OTU4 signal through the N-T connector(s) onto the link.
Receive Direction
The receive signal path originates at network port receive connector(s) N-R and departs
at client port transmit connector C-T. The network port(s) receive the OTU4 signal at
specific DWDM wavelengths through the N-R connector(s) from the link. The optical
input signal is converted to an electrical signal and regenerated (3R function) by the CFP
receiver optics. The regenerated OTU4 signal is further processed by the enhanced FEC
(EFEC) decoder to correct other transmission errors introduced by the channels. GMP
demaps the 100GbE signal. The CFP optical transmitter then converts the client
electrical signal to optical before it departs at client port connector C-T.
Specifications
435
WCE-PCN-100G
WCE-PCN-100G
Figure 278: Example of a WCE-PCN-100G Front View
436
WCE-PCN-100G
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the module faceplate and their meanings.
Table 50: WCE-PCN-100G Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
transmit
Mod
receive
operating state of the client interface

CFP
client interface
operating state of the network interface

CFP
network interface
Description
The WCE-PCN-100G is an enterprise type, three-slot WDM transponder with a single C
form-factor pluggable (CFP) client interface and a single CFP network interface. The front
view of the module, equipped with a CFP/112G/LR4/SM/LC and CFP/4x28G/#19xxx#19xxxL/SM/LC transceiver, is illustrated in Figure 278 on p.436.
The client interface is customer-facing (connected to the client equipment) and the
The client-side and the network-side optics are included within the CFP Multi-Source
Agreement (MSA) standards-compliant transceiver modules (in the following referred to
as CFP transceivers). The CFP transceivers perform the optical-to-electrical (o/e) and
electrical-to-optical (e/o) conversion, monitor physical layer performance, and monitor
faults on each optical lane. The optical performance of client and network interfaces is
determined by the specifications of the installed CFP transceiver module. See the
selected CFP transceiver module specification for additional information.
The network interface uses tunable 100G DWDM CFP transceivers for high flexibility.
These CFP transceivers support fixed channel spacing at 100GHz between the optical
lanes. The lanes can be tuned as a block to different DWDM wavelengths in the C band.
Enhanced FEC with configurable coding gain (EFEC-5) is supported on the OTU4
network port to enable metro-reach performance.
The WCE-PCN-100G provides performance monitoring data at the client and network
interface for the physical layer, service layer, and FEC layer. Furthermore, facility
loopbacks and terminal loopbacks are supported on the client and network interfaces.
The WCE-PCN-100G supports Client Channel Card Protection (CCCP) for dual-ended
bidirectional, revertive and non-revertive, switching applications.
The WCE-PCN-100G can be used for point-to-point unprotected service and protected
services (versatile switched protection).
The WCE-PCN-100G works with all full-band C-band amplifiers, Raman amplifiers, and
with all released DWDM and hybrid network architectures. However, interworking with
Express Layer modules is not supported.
437
WCE-PCN-100G
The WCE-PCN-100G must be used in a 9HU shelf that provides sufficient air flow to cool
the module.
Note
Using the WCE-PCN-100G module in a 7HU Shelf or any SH1HU shelf

is not allowed due to heat dissipation issues. Insufficient cooling could
overheat and destroy the module.
The WCE-PCN-100G module is supported by the network control unit

Note
Features
Major features specific to the WCE-PCN-100G module are:
Mode of operation:
o
o
Supported mapping of services on the network interfaces:

o
o
ODU4 transparent transport


o
o
Unprotected terminal transponder


Configurable EFEC performance to optimize latency caused by EFEC
computation at the cost of coding gain
Service protection:
o
o
o

Versatile switched protection (in conjunction with the RSM-SF, RSM-OLM, and
VSM)
OTN GCC0 Embedded Communication Channel (ECC) for network OTU4 service
Fault Management (FM) and Performance Monitoring (PM)

o
o
o
o
Physical layer
Physical Coding Sublayer (PCS) in case of 100GbE client service
Service layer (OTN)
FEC PMs
Facility loopbacks and terminal loopbacks for the client port and the network ports
438
Single C Form-factor Pluggable (CFP) MSA standard compliant interface for CFP
transceivers
WCE-PCN-100G
Note
transceivers
Note
Specification.
Note
Signal Path
439
WCE-PCN-100G
Figure 279: WCE-PCN-100G Functional Block Diagram
Transmit Direction
network port transmit connector(s) N-T. The client port connector C-R receives a 100G
Ethernet client signal. Client signal modulation is defined by the CFP specifications. The
CFP specifications contain a set of specific wavelengths that operate together to deliver
the 100Gbit/s service at the client receiver port. The CFP receiver optics convert the
wavelengths to an electrical signal. The client 100GbE signal is mapped into the OTU4
under the control of the Generic Mapping Procedure (GMP), according to ITU-T G.709.
The network OTU4 signal is encoded using an enhanced forward error correcting code
(EFEC). On the network side, the resulting 100G signal is distributed across a number of
transmit the OTU4 signal through the N-T connector(s) onto the link.
Receive Direction
The receive signal path originates at network port receive connector(s) N-R and departs
at client port transmit connector C-T. The network port(s) receive the OTU4 signal at
specific DWDM wavelengths through the N-R connector(s) from the link. The optical
input signal is converted to an electrical signal and regenerated (3R function) by the CFP
receiver optics. The regenerated OTU4 signal is further processed by the enhanced FEC
(EFEC) decoder to correct other transmission errors introduced by the channels. GMP
demaps the OTU4 signal if the client interface is 100GbE. The CFP optical transmitter
then converts the client electrical signal to optical before it departs at client port
connector C-T.
Specifications
440
10TCE-PCN-16GU+100G
10TCE-PCN-16GU+100G
Figure 280: Example of a 10TCE-PCN-16GU+100G Front View
441
10TCE-PCN-16GU+100G
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 10TCE-PCN-16GU+100G faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 51: 10TCE-PCN-16GU+100G Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
transmit
Mod
receive
C1
C1
client port 1
C2
C2
client port 2
C3
C3
client port 3
C4
C4
client port 4
C5
C5
client port 5
C6
C6
client port 6
C7
C7
client port 7
C8
C8
client port 8
C9
C9
client port 9
C10

10
C10
client port 10
operating state of the network

port, optical lane 1
network port
N2

N3

N4

Description
The 10TCE-PCN-16GU+100G is a 100G (4 x 25G) enterprise type TDM channel module
with ten SFP+ capable cages for SFP+ transceivers on the client side and a single CFP
capable cage for a CFP transceiver on the network side.
The front view of the module, equipped with ten SFP+ transceivers and the
CFP/4x28G/#DCTL/SM/LC transceiver as an example, is illustrated in Figure 282 on
p.448.
442
10TCE-PCN-16GU+100G
The 10TCE-PCN-16GU+100G performs electrical multiplexing and de-multiplexing of up
to 10 client interface signals of up to 16 Gbit/s services onto/from specific ITU-Tcompliant wavelengths for transport over an optical network. The module supports ODU4
according to ITU-T G.709 with reduced functionality, ODUflex. The aggregate 100G
service signal (OTU4) is transmitted using the multi-lane concept according to the abovementioned standard.
The module is intended to be used as an unprotected terminal multiplexer and client
channel card protected terminal multiplexer in enterprise and metro networks.
The client interfaces use SFP+ transceivers (power level 2 requirements) for different
services. The network interface uses CFP transceivers with an aggregate bandwidth.
The client-side and the network-side optics are included within the SFP+ and CFP
transceiver modules. The SFP+ transceivers and the CFP transceiver perform the
optical-to-electrical (o/e) and electrical-to-optical (e/o) conversion, monitor performance,
and monitor faults for each client service (SFP+) as well as on each optical lane (CFP).
The optical performance of the client and network interfaces is determined by the
specifications of the installed SFP+ and CFP transceiver modules.
For details on the SFP+ transceivers and CFP transceivers refer to the Module and
For metro applications, the module supports enhanced FEC with configurable coding gain
(EFEC-5) on the network port. EFEC-5 is enabled by default.
The 10TCE-PCN-16GU+100G provides clock and data recovery and performs 3R signal
conditioning at any supported data rate by default.
Both facility and terminal loopbacks on the client ports are supported. Only terminal
loopback on the network port is supported.
The 10TCE-PCN-16GU+100G supports in-band DCN management, versatile switched
protection for restoration and client channel card protection (CCCP). The module can be
configured for unidirectional/bidirectional revertive and non-revertive protection switching.
Note
In case of protected 40GbE or 100 GbE client services all client

interfaces involved in service transport are switched simultanously in a
protection switch event.
The 10TCE-PCN-16GU+100G can only be used in the SH9HU, SH1HU-HP/2DC,

SH1HU-HP/E-TEMP/2DC or SH1HU-R/PF shelves that provide sufficient air flow too
cool the module.
Support of 40GbE and 100GbE client services

The transparent transmission of 40GbE and 100GbE traffic over 10GbE channels
requires the use of different breakout cables. To implement one SR4 (40 Gbit/s) client
interface, use ADVA Optical Networking's MPO breakout cables (J/MM50/MPO12LC08/0300 or J/MM50/MPO12-LC08/1000). To implement one LR4 (40 Gbit/s) client
interface, use ADVA Optical Networking's J/SM/4CS-#C1270-#C1330/LC/0400
breakout cable. In this case, two J/SM/4CS-#C1270-#C1330/LC/0400 cables are needed
per connection.
443
10TCE-PCN-16GU+100G
Similarly, to implement an SR10 (100 Gbits/s) client interface for the 10TCE-PCN16GU+100G, use ADVA Optical Networking's MPObreakout cables J/MM50/MPO24LC20/0300 or J/MM50/MPO24-LC20/1000.
The breakout cables are described in J/SM/4CS-#C1270-#C1330/LC/0400 on p.1091
and Breakout Cables for SR4 and SR10 Clients on p.1324.
Using the 10TCE-PCN-16GU+100G module in the SH7HU, SH7HU-R, 1HU Shelf

Front Power Access or SH1HU-R shelves is not allowed due to heat dissipation issues.
The 10TCE-PCN-16GU+100G module is supported by the network control unit NCU-II and NCU-II-P only.
Note
Features
Major features specific to the 10TCE-PCN-16GU+100G module are:
Modes of operation:
o
o
Unprotected terminal multiplexer supporting mapping of client services

Client channel card protected terminal multiplexer supporting mapping of client
services
Support of up to eight 10TCE-PCN-16GU+100G modules per 9HU shelf

o
GMP mapping of client services into ODUflex according to ITU-T Rec. G.709
12/09
Network side multiplexing of ODUflex using ODTU4.M into OPU4 according to
ITUT Rec. G.709 12/09
Network side mapping of OPU4 into ODU4/OTU4
Any combination of client services (limited by aggregate bandwidth) is supported in

unprotected and protected mode but not for 100GbE. Aggregated 100GbE cannot be
combined with any supported client services.
Forward error correction (FEC) enabled or disabled on the network port
Configurable EFEC performance to optimize latency caused by EFEC computation

at the cost of coding gain
Support of one DCN channel on the network port
Versatile switched protection (in conjunction with the RSM-OLM and VSM) for
restoration

o
o
o
o
444

Automatic protection switching (APS) channel per sub-aggregate service for
client channel card protection
Fault management and Performance monitoring on the client ports and network port:
10TCE-PCN-16GU+100G
o
o
o
o
Equipment layer
Physical layer (only on client ports)
PCS layer
OTN services
Facility loopbacks and terminal loopbacks for each client port as well as terminal
loopback on the network port
Ten independent, Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP+) capable cages for SFP+ MSA
compliant transceivers with maximum power level 2 requirements (1.5W) and LC

Note
Single C Form-factor Pluggable (CFP) capable cage for CFP MSA compliant
transceiver modules with 10 OTL4.10 host lanes and maximum power level 3
requirements (24W)
Note
Interface specification depends on the SFP+ transceiver (SFP+) and CFP transceiver
(CFP) used. For details about the individual pluggable transceiver types, refer to the
Unused SFP+ cages can remain empty. An unconnected client interface or the absence
of an SFP+ transceiver does not affect operation of the terminated services.
SFP+ cages and the CFP cage should only be populated with pluggable
must be approved by ADVA Optical Networking. If you use nonapproved pluggable transceivers in conjunction with the channel module,
Note
When a client interface is not used, the corresponding SFP+ cage does
not need to be populated with an pluggable transceiver, but should be
covered with a dust protective plug.
445
10TCE-PCN-16GU+100G
Signal Path
Figure 281 on p.446 shows the simplified functional block diagram and illustrates the
signal path. The transmit and receive signal paths are described below.
Figure 281: 10TCE-PCN-16GU+100G Functional Block Diagram
Transmit Direction
Each client port receiver (Rx) receives optical signals from the CPE through client port
connectors C1-R through C10-R. These are converted into electrical signals, and clock
and data recovery are performed. All signals are encoded and bit-synchronously GMP
mapped into an ODUflex frame structure in accordance with ITU-T G.709. The resulting
client signals are then electronically multiplexed into ODU4 with 1.25 Gbit/s tributary slot
granularity. In the network side framer, the ODU4 signal is then mapped into the
corresponding OTU4 signal with reduced functionality and encoded using an enhanced
forward error correcting code (EFEC). The resulting 100G signal is distributed across a
number of optical lanes, each operating at a specific network port data rate, depending on
446
10TCE-PCN-16GU+100G
the CFP transceiver type used. The CFP transmitter performs electrical-to-optical
conversion and transmits the OTU4 signal through the N-T connector(s) onto the link.
Receive Direction
Network port receivers (Rx) receive the OTU4 signal at specific DWDM wavelengths
through the N-R connector from the link. The optical input signal is converted to an
electrical signal and regenerated (3R function) by the CFP receiver optics.The
regenerated OTU4 signal is further processed by the EFEC decoder to correct other
transmission errors introduced by the channel(s). The OTU4 signal is de-mapped into the
ODU4 frame structure and electronically de-multiplexed. Next, OPU4 tributary 1.25G
time slots are de-mapped into ODUFlex frames. Each client signal is decoded serialized,
and sent to the transmitter (Tx) of the corresponding client port. The client transmitters
convert the electrical signals to optical signals and transmit them through the client port
connectors C1-T through C10-T to the CPE.
Specifications
447
Figure 282: Example of a 10TCE-PCN-16GU+AES100G Front View.
448
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 10TCE-PCN-16GU+AES100G faceplate
and their meanings.
Table 52: 10TCE-PCN-16GU+AES100G Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
modules power
supply status
transmit
Mod
modules operating
state
receive
C1
operating state of the

client port 1
C1
client port 1
C2

client port 2
C2
client port 2
C3

client port 3
C3
client port 3
C4

client port 4
C4
client port 4
C5

client port 5
C5
client port 5
C6

client port 6
C6
client port 6
C7

client port 7
C7
client port 7
C8

client port 8
C8
client port 8
C9

client port 9
C9
client port 9
C10

client port 10
C10
client port 10

network port, optical
lane 1
network port
N2

lane 2
Symbols
key symbol to
make support of
data encryption
visible
449
N3

lane 3
N4

lane 4
Description
The 10TCE-PCN-16GU+AES100G is a 100G (4 x 25G) enterprise type TDM channel
module with ten SFP+ capable cages for SFP+ transceivers on the client side and a
single CFP capable cage for a CFP transceiver on the network side supporting data
encryption. It is designed according to FIPS Publication 140-2 with security level 2 and
can be used for the transport of security-related data.
The front view of the module, equipped with ten SFP+ transceivers and the
CFP/4x28G/#DCTL/SM/LC transceiver as an example, is illustrated in Figure 282 on
p.448.
The 10TCE-PCN-16GU+AES100G performs electrical multiplexing and de-multiplexing
of up to 10 client interface signals of up to 16 Gbit/s services onto/from specific ITU-Tcompliant wavelengths for transport over an optical network. The module supports ODU4
according to ITU-T G.709 with reduced functionality, ODUflex. The aggregate 100G
service signal (OTU4) is transmitted using the multi-lane concept according to the abovementioned standard. The aggregated data stream is encrypted/decrypted using the
Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) in counter mode for transmitting it securely on four
DWDM wavelength. Data encryption and the use of an endpoint authentication
mechanism protect the network link between two communicating 10TCE-PCN16GU+AES100G modules against man-in-the-middle attacks.
The module is intended to be used as an unprotected terminal multiplexer and client
channel card protected terminal multiplexer in enterprise and metro networks.
The client interfaces use SFP+ transceivers (power level 2 requirements) for different
services. The network interface uses CFP transceivers with an aggregate bandwidth.
optical-to-electrical (o/e) and electrical-to-optical (e/o) conversion, monitor performance,
and monitor faults for each client service (SFP+) as well as on each optical lane (CFP).
The optical performance of the client and network interfaces is determined by the
specifications of the installed SFP+ and CFP transceiver modules.
For details on the SFP+ transceivers and CFP transceivers refer to the Module and
The 10TCE-PCN-16GU+AES100G provides clock and data recovery and performs 3R
signal conditioning at any supported data rate by default.
450
Both facility and terminal loopbacks on the client ports are supported. Only terminal
loopback on the network port is supported.
The 10TCE-PCN-16GU+AES100G supports in-band DCN management, versatile
switched protection for restoration and client channel card protection (CCCP). The
module can be configured for unidirectional/bidirectional revertive and non-revertive
protection switching.
Note
In case of protected 40GbE or 100 GbE client services all client

interfaces involved in service transport are switched simultanously in a
protection switch event.
The 10TCE-PCN-16GU+AES100G can only be used in the SH9HU, SH1HU-HP/2DC,

SH1HU-HP/E-TEMP/2DC or SH1HU-R/PFshelves that provide sufficient air flow too
cool the module.
Support of 40GbE and 100GbE client services

The transparent transmission of 40GbE and 100GbE traffic over 10GbE channels
requires the use of different breakout cables. To implement one SR4 (40 Gbit/s) client
interface, use ADVA Optical Networking's MPO breakout cables (J/MM50/MPO12LC08/0300 or J/MM50/MPO12-LC08/1000). To implement one LR4 (40 Gbit/s) client
interface, use ADVA Optical Networking's J/SM/4CS-#C1270-#C1330/LC/0400
breakout cable. In this case, two J/SM/4CS-#C1270-#C1330/LC/0400 cables are needed
per connection.
Similarly, to implement an SR10 (100 Gbits/s) client interface for the 10TCE-PCN16GU+AES100G, use ADVA Optical Networking's MPObreakout cables
J/MM50/MPO24-LC20/0300 or J/MM50/MPO24-LC20/1000.
The breakout cables are described in J/SM/4CS-#C1270-#C1330/LC/0400 on p.1091
and Breakout Cables for SR4 and SR10 Clients on p.1324.
Using the 10TCE-PCN-16GU+AES100G module in the SH7HU, SH7HU-R, 1HU Shelf

Front Power Access or SH1HU-R shelves is not allowed due to heat dissipation issues.
The 10TCE-PCN-16GU+AES100G module is supported by the network

Note
Features
Major features specific to the 10TCE-PCN-16GU+AES100G module are:
Modes of operation:
o
o

Client channel card protected terminal multiplexer supporting mapping of client
services
Hardware AES 256-bit Encryption and Decryption on the network interface
Support of up to eight 10TCE-PCN-16GU+AES100G modules per 9HU shelf
451
o
12/09
Network side multiplexing of ODUflex using ODTU4.M into OPU4 according to
ITUT Rec. G.709 12/09
Any combination of client services (limited by aggregate bandwidth) is supported in

unprotected and protected mode but not 100GbE. Aggregated 100GbE cannot be
combined with any supported client services.
Configurable EFEC performance to optimize latency caused by EFEC computation

at the cost of coding gain
Support of one DCN channel on the network port
Versatile switched protection (in conjunction with the RSM-OLM and VSM) for
restoration

o
o
o
o

Automatic protection switching (APS) channel per sub-aggregate service for
client channel card protection
Fault monitoring and performance monitoring

o
o
o
o
Equipment layer
Physical layer
PCS layer (only on client ports)
OTN services
Facility loopbacks and terminal loopbacks for each client port as well as terminal
loopback on the network port

The module uses the AES encryption algorithm in counter mode (CTR) with an 256-bit
encryption key to guarantee the privacy of the transmitted data.
Near-end and far-end modules need to know the same secret key for encrypting and
decrypting. This secret key is generated with the help of hardware random number
generators (RNG) on both modules. To establish the same key on both modules, the
well-known Diffie-Hellman algorithm is chosen. Near-end and far-end modules must
authenticate each other, using a variant of the PACE algorithm (Password Authenticated
Connection Establishment).
Encryption of data is done in hardware embedded within a physically secure section of
the module. Some bytes of the overhead section are required for synchronizing
encryption and decryption.
The key-exchange process is controlled by micro controllers on both modules. The
General Communication Channel GCC2 is reserved for communication between nearend and far-end module. Synchronization and key-exchange are done via these channels.
When the key exchange process has failed three times and an attack can be excluded,
the counter of failed key exchanges should be reset to get the traffic back. The key is
exchanged every minute.
452
After power-on, new session keys must be established between near-end and far-end
modules. This may take up to one minute. At regular time intervals new session keys are
generated and seamlessly exchanged without interrupting the traffic.
The first step for using the encryption module is to take the ownership of the module. This
is done by setting the initial Crypto-Officer's password on the module. Security-related
settings on encryption modules can only be done if the Crypto-Officer password is
known. The password is securely stored on the module and cannot be retrieved by any
interface. Different modules may have different Crypto-Officer passwords. Only the
Crypto-Officer is allowed to modify any security-related values on the module.
In case of split responsibilities for network operation and network security, ADMIN users
can create new users on the NCU with CRYPTO privileges. These CRYPTO users have
the same access rights as MONITOR users, except that they are allowed to modify
security-related settings on encryption modules. The Crypto-Officer password of the
module is still required for any security-related changes. The view on the network
element for CRYPTO users is reduced to focus on encryption-related values only.
In the next step, the Crypto-Officer must set the authentication password on the network
interface. Provisioning of an ADVA Optical Networking encryption module requires at
minimum that the Crypto-Officer's password is set on the module and that near-end and
far-end modules are configured with the same authentication password on their network
interfaces. After provisioning the other non-encryption parameters, encrypted data can be
transmitted.
A rechargeable thin film microchip battery provides uninterrupted backup power to the
module's secure password storage for more than eight hours in case of power loss. After
the battery has been discharged, the Crypto-Officer password and the Authentication
password will be erased immediately. New passwords for the encryption module at both
ends must be set when both modules were switched off for 8 or more hours. If there is a
power-failure only on one side, only this side must be configured again.
If the receive or the transmission fiber breaks, the encryption key exchange will fail. An
error message is given. The key exchange failure counter displays 1. The next key
exchange will start only after the fiber optic cable break has been repaired.
If the in-band communication channel is missing (e.g. loss of signal), the currently
running key exchange will fail. The next key exchange will start when the connection is
established again. The time for generate a key is less than one minute.
For more details, refer to the Provisioning and Operations Manual.
Ten independent, Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP+) capable cages for SFP+ MSA
compliant transceivers with maximum power level 2 requirements (1.5W) and LC

Note
453
Single C Form-factor Pluggable (CFP) capable cage for CFP MSA compliant
transceiver modules with 10 OTL4.10 host lanes and maximum power level 3
requirements (24W)
Note
Note
Signal Path
Figure 283 on p.455 shows the simplified functional block diagram and illustrates the
signal path. The transmit and receive signal paths are described below.
454
Figure 283: 10TCE-PCN-16GU+AES100G Functional Block Diagram
Transmit Direction
granularity. Following this, an encryption operation is carried out on this signal. In the
network side framer, the encrypted ODU4 signal is then mapped into the corresponding
OTU4 signal with reduced functionality and encoded using an enhanced forward error
correcting code (EFEC). The resulting 100G signal is distributed across a number of
transmits the OTU4 signal through the N-T connector(s) onto the link.
Receive Direction
455
through the N-R connector from the link. The optical input signal is converted to an
electrical signal and regenerated (3R function) by the CFP receiver optics. The
ODU4 frame structure, decrypted and electronically de-multiplexed. Next, OPU4
tributary 1.25G time slots are de-mapped into ODUFlex frames. Each client signal is
decoded serialized, and sent to the transmitter (Tx) of the corresponding client port. The
client transmitters convert the electrical signals to optical signals and transmit them
through the client port connectors C1-T through C10-T to the CPE.
Battery
The 10TCE-PCN-16GU+AES100G module includes a thin film microchip battery as a
rechargeable, on-board backup power source. The battery buffers the module's secure
password storage for more than eight hours. This enables the module to re-establish
automatically encrypted communication after power failures. The battery not needs to be
replaced during the life of the product.
The lithium content of this battery is much less than 1 mg. Therefore, it is considered to
be safe and eco-friendly. There are no special requirements for handling the module
including the transport in any quantity by aircraft.
Shipping
The module will be shipped from ADVA Optical Networking to the customer in a tamperproof transport bag. Once sealed, there is no way to tamper with the 10TCE-PCN16GU+AES100G module without showing evidence of the tampering.
Check the modules transport bag for evidence of tampering before you
unpack it. If there is any evidence of tampering, do not use the module.
Note
Limitations
Installation of new firmware is restricted because this could break the security of the
complete module.
Specifications
456
Figure 284: Example of a 10TCE-PCN-10G+100G-GF Front View
457
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 10TCE-PCN-10G+100G-GF module
Table 53: 10TCE-PCN-10G+100G-GF Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Pluggable Optical
Interfaces
transmit
Mod
receive
C1
C1
SFP client interface

1
C2
C2

2
C3
C3

3
C4
C4

4
C5
C5

5
C6
C6

6
C7
C7

7
C8
C8

8
C9
C9

9
C10
operating status of the client interface

10
C10

10
operating status of the network

interface
CFP network
interface
Description
The 10TCE-PCN-10G+100G-GF is a 100G enterprise type TDM channel module with ten
small form-factor pluggable (SFP+) interfaces on the client side and a single C formfactor pluggable (CFP) interface on the network side. The front view of the module,
equipped with ten SFP+ transceivers and the CFP/4x28G/#19xxx-#19xxxL/SM/LC
transceiver, is illustrated in Figure 284.
458
The module performs electrical multiplexing/de-multiplexing of up to 10 client interface
signals of up to 10Gbit/s services onto/from specific ITU-T-compliant wavelengths for
transport over an optical network. The 10TCE-PCN-10G+100G-GF supports ODU4
according to ITU-T G.709 with reduced functionality, ODUflex, and GMP. The aggregate
100G service signal is transmitted using the multi-lane concept according to the abovementioned standard.
The 10TCE-PCN-10G+100G-GF supports G.709 standard FEC (GFEC) on the network
interface.
The module is intended to be used as a terminal multiplexer in enterprise and metro
networks.
The client interfaces use SFP+ transceivers for different services. The network interface
uses CFP transceivers.
optical-to-electrical (o/e) and electrical-to-optical (e/o) conversion, monitor physical layer
performance, and monitor faults for each client service (SFP+) as well as on each optical
lane (CFP). The optical performance of the client and network interfaces is determined by
the specifications of the installed SFP+ and CFP transceiver modules. See the selected
SFP+ and CFP transceiver module specification for additional information.
data rates. Any combination of the supported client services is possible. All services are
transparently transmitted. The network interface uses tunable 100G DWDM CFP
transceivers for high flexibility. These CFP transceivers support fixed channel spacing at
100GHz between the optical lanes. The lanes can be tuned as a block to different DWDM
wavelengths in the C band.
For enterprise applications, the module supports G.709 generic forward error correction
code (GFEC) on the network port. GFEC is enabled by default.
The 10TCE-PCN-10G+100G-GF provides clock and data recovery and performs 3R
signal conditioning at any supported data rate by default. The module also provides fault
management and performance monitoring of network and client services. In addition, loop
functionality on the client and network interfaces is provided.
The 10TCE-PCN-10G+100G-GF supports in-band DCN management and versatile
switched protection for restoration. The module operates in conjunction with all full-band
C-band amplifiers, Raman amplifiers, and with all released optical filter modules. In
addition, the 10TCE-PCN-10G+100G-GF can also be used with ROADM-C80/0/OPM
and 8ROADM-C40/0/OPM according to the design rules. The four wavelengths of the
CFP transceiver have to be transmitted together. However, interworking with Express
Layer modules is not supported.
The 10TCE-PCN-10G+100G-GF can only be used in the 9HU shelf or SH1HU-HP/2DC
or SH1HU-R/PF shelf, that provide sufficient air flow too cool the module.
Using the 10TCE-PCN-10G+100G-GF module in the SH7HU, SH7HU-R, SH1HUF/2DC or SH1HU-R shelves is not allowed due to heat dissipation issues. Insufficient
cooling could overheat and destroy the module.
459
The 10TCE-PCN-10G+100G-GF module is supported by the network

Note
Features
Major features specific to the 10TCE-PCN-10G+100G-GF module are:
Support for up to eight 10TCE-PCN-10G+100G-GF modules per DC-powered 9HU

shelf

o
12/09
Network side multiplexing of ODUflex using ODTU4.ts into OPU4 according to
ITU-T Rec. G.709 12/09
Network side mapping of OPU4 into ODU4/ OTU4
Any combination of client services is supported (limited by aggregate bandwidth)
Standard GFEC according to ITU-T G.709 for network interface OTU4 service
Versatile switched protection for restoration (in conjunction with the RSM-OLM and
VSM; with restrictions)
Support of one DCN channel (GCC0) on the network interface
interfaces
o
o
o
Physical layer
Service layer (OTN)
FEC layer
Loopbacks
o
o
Facility loopback and terminal loopback for each individual client interface
Terminal loopback for the network interface
SFP+ transceiver modules
Note
460
transceiver modules
Note
Note
Signal Path
Figure 285 provides a simplified functional block diagram illustrating the 10TCE-PCN10G+100G-GF signal path. The transmit and receive signal paths are described below.
461
Figure 285: Functional Block Diagram of the 10TCE-PCN-10G+100G-GF
Client
interfaces
C1 to C 10
SFP /SFP +
Transceivers
10 TCE -PCN -10 G +100 G -GF

Main FPGA
C10 -R
Rx
o
o
3R
C10 -T
Tx
C9-R
Rx
Client side
Mapper /De -mapper
G .709 GMP ODUflex
ODU 4
Mapper /Multiplexer
De -Mapper /
Demultiplexer
&
CFP Transceiver
Tx
6 x Client ports
C9-T
3R
C2-R
Rx
o
o
Tx
C1-R
Rx
o
o
C1-T
Line
side
OTU 4
Framer
OTN -PM
GFEC
GCC 0
Client side
Mapper /De -mapper
G .709 GMP ODUflex
3R
Client side
Mapper /De -mapper
G .709 GMP ODUflex
CFP Opt Trans
G .709
ODU 4 Framing
3R
C2-T
Client side
Mapper /De -mapper
G .709 GMP ODUflex
3R
Electrical Interface
Independent clocking
Network
interface
N -T
Tx
Optics
CFP Opt Rcvr

Rx
Optics
N -R
Tx
CM
Client interfaces may be quipped with

SFP and SFP + transceiver types supporting
4GFC , 8GFC , 10 GbE WAN PHY , 10 GbE LAN PHY ,
OC -192 /STM -64
DCN FPGA
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Network interface may be

equipped with
CFP /4x28 G /#19 xxx -#19 xxxL
(proprietary )
Transmit Direction
Each client port receiver (Rx) receives the optical signals from the CPE through client
port connectors C1-R through C10-R. These are converted into the electrical signals,
and clock and data recovery are performed. All signals are encoded and bitsynchronously GMP mapped into an ODUflex frame structure in accordance with ITU-T
G.709. The resulting client signals are then electronically multiplexed into ODU4 with
1.25 Gbit/s tributary slots granularity. In the network side framer, the ODU4 is then
mapped into the corresponding OTU4 signal with reduced functionality and encoded
using the G.709 standard forward error correcting code (GFEC). The resulting 100G
signal is distributed across a number of optical lanes, each operating at a specific
network port data rate, depending on the CFP transceiver type used. The CFP
transmitter performs electrical-to-optical conversion and transmits the OTU4 signal
through the N-T connector(s) onto the link.
Receive Direction
462
through the N-R connector(s) from the link. The optical input signal is converted to an
regenerated OTU4 signal is further processed by the FEC decoder to correct other
time slots are de-mapped into ODUFlex frames. Each client signal is decoded,
serialized, and sent to the transmitter (Tx) of the corresponding client port. The client
transmitters convert the electrical signals to optical signals and transmit them through the
client port connectors C1-T through C10-T to the CPE.
Specifications
463
10TCE-PCN-10G+100G
10TCE-PCN-10G+100G
Figure 286: Example of a 10TCE-PCN-10G+100G Front View
464
10TCE-PCN-10G+100G
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 10TCE-PCN-10GU+100G module
Table 54: 10TCE-PCN-10G+100G Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Pluggable Optical
Interfaces
transmit
Mod
receive
C1
C1

1
C2
C2

2
C3
C3

3
C4
C4

4
C5
C5

5
C6
C6

6
C7
C7

7
C8
C8

8
C9
C9

9
C10
operating status of the client interface

10
C10

10
operating status of the network

interface
CFP network
interface
Description
The 10TCE-PCN-10G+100G is a 100G enterprise type, TDM channel module with ten
small form-factor pluggable (SFP+) interfaces on the client side and a single C formfactor pluggable (CFP) interface on the network side. The front view of the module,
equipped with ten SFP+ transceivers and the CFP/4x28G/#19xxx-#19xxxL/SM/LC
transceiver, is illustrated in Figure 286 on p.464.
465
10TCE-PCN-10G+100G
The module performs electrical multiplexing/de-multiplexing of up to 10 client interface
signals of up to 10Gbit/s services onto/from specific ITU-T-compliant wavelengths for
transport over an optical network. The 10TCE-PCN-10G+100G supports ODU4
according to ITU-T G.709 with reduced functionality, ODUflex, and GMP. The aggregate
100G service signal is transmitted using the multi-lane concept according to the abovementioned standard.
The module is intended to be used as an unprotected terminal multiplexer in enterprise
and metro networks.
The client interfaces use gray SFP+ transceivers for different services. The network
interface uses CFP transceivers.
optical-to-electrical (o/e) and electrical-to-optical (e/o) conversion, monitor physical layer
performance, and monitor faults for each client service (SFP+) as well as on each optical
lane (CFP). The optical performance of the client and network interfaces is determined by
the specifications of the installed SFP+ and CFP transceiver modules. See the selected
SFP+ and CFP transceiver module specification for additional information.
data rates. Any combination of the supported client services is possible. All services are
transparently transmitted. The network interface uses tunable 100G DWDM CFP
transceivers for high flexibility. These CFP transceivers support fixed channel spacing at
100GHz between the optical lanes. The lanes can be tuned as a block to different DWDM
wavelengths in the C band.
The 10TCE-PCN-10G+100G provides clock and data recovery and performs 3R signal
conditioning at any supported data rate by default. The module also provides fault
management and performance monitoring of network and client services. In addition, loop
functionality on the client and network interfaces is provided.
The 10TCE-PCN-10G+100G supports in-band DCN management and versatile switched
protection for restoration. The module operates in conjunction with all full-band C-band
amplifiers, Raman amplifiers, and with all released optical filter modules. In addition, the
10TCE-PCN-10G+100G-GF can also be used with ROADM-C80/0/OPM and 8ROADMC40/0/OPM according to the design rules. However, interworking with Express Layer
modules is not supported.
The 10TCE-PCN-10G+100G can only be used in the 9HU shelf, SH1HU-HP/2DC or
SH1HU-R/PF Shelf that provide sufficient air flow too cool the module.
The 10TCE-PCN-10G+100G module is supported by the network control

unit NCU-IIand NCU-II-P only.
Note
466
10TCE-PCN-10G+100G
Features
Major features specific to the 10TCE-PCN-10G+100G module are:
Support of up to eight 10TCE-PCN-10G+100G modules per DC-powered 9HU shelf

o
12/09
Network side multiplexing of ODUflex using ODTU4.ts into OPU4 according to
ITU-T Rec. G.709 12/09
Any combination of client services is supported (limited by aggregate bandwidth)

o
o

Configurable EFEC performance to optimize latency
Versatile switched protection for restoration (in conjunction with the RSM-OLM and
VSM; with restrictions)
Support of one DCN channel (GCC0) on the network port
interfaces
o
o
o
Physical layer
Service layer (OTN)
FEC layer
Loopbacks
o
o
Facility loopback and terminal loopback for each individual client interface
Terminal loopback for the network interface
For GFEC and EFEC variants, client terminal and network terminal
loopbacks result in traffic hits after the fiber loop is plugged in again.
Note
SFP+ transceiver modules
Note
467
10TCE-PCN-10G+100G
transceiver modules
Note
Note
Signal Path
10TCE-PCN-10G+100G signal path. The transmit and receive signal paths are described
below.
468
10TCE-PCN-10G+100G
Figure 287: Functional Block Diagram of the 10TCE-PCN-10G+100G
Client
interfaces
C1 to C 10
SFP /SFP +
Transceivers
10 TCE -PCN -10 G +100 G

Main FPGA
C10 -R
Rx
o
o
3R
C10 -T
Tx
C9-R
Rx
Client side
Mapper /De -mapper
G .709 GMP ODUflex
ODU 4
Mapper /Multiplexer
De -Mapper /
Demultiplexer
&
CFP Transceiver
Tx
6 x Client ports
C9-T
3R
C2-R
Rx
o
o
Tx
C1-R
Rx
o
o
C1-T
e
e
CFP Opt Trans
G .709
ODU 4 Framing
Line
side
OTU 4
Framer
OTN -PM
EFEC
GCC 0
3R
Client side
Mapper /De -mapper
G .709 GMP ODUflex
3R
Client side
Mapper /De -mapper
G .709 GMP ODUflex
C2-T
Client side
Mapper /De -mapper
G .709 GMP ODUflex
3R
Electrical Interface
Independent clocking
Network
interface
N -T
Tx
Optics
CFP Opt Rcvr

Rx
Optics
N -R
Tx
CM
Client interfaces may be quipped with

SFP and SFP + transceiver types supporting
4GFC , 8GFC , 10 GbE WAN PHY , 10 GbE LAN PHY ,
OC -192 /STM -64
DCN FPGA
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction
Network interface may be

equipped with
CFP /4x28 G /#19 xxx -#19 xxxL
(proprietary )
Transmit Direction
granularity. In the network side framer, the ODU4 is then mapped into the corresponding
OTU4 signal with reduced functionality and encoded using an enhanced forward error
correcting code (EFEC). The resulting 100G signal is distributed across a number of
transmits the OTU4 signal through the N-T connector(s) onto the link.
469
10TCE-PCN-10G+100G
Receive Direction
through the N-R connector(s) from the link. The optical input signal is converted to an
time slots are de-mapped into ODUFlex frames. Each client signal is decoded,
serialized, and sent to the transmitter (Tx) of the corresponding client port. The client
transmitters convert the electrical signals to optical signals and transmit them through the
client port connectors C1-T through C10-T to the CPE.
Specifications
470
5TCE-PCN-10GU+10G
5TCE-PCN-10GU+10G
Figure 288: Example of 5TCE-PCN-10GU+10G Front View
471
5TCE-PCN-10GU+10G
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 5TCE-PCN-10GU+10G faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 55: 5TCE-PCN-10GU+10G Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
transmit
Mod
receive
C1
C1
client port 1
C2
C2
client port 2
C3
C3
client port 3
C4
C4
client port 4
C5
C5
client port 5
network port
Description
The 5TCE-PCN-10GU+10G is a 5-port 10G enterprise type TDM channel module with
five SFP/SFP+ interfaces on the client side1 and a single SFP+ interface on the network
side. The front view of the module is illustrated in Figure 288 on p.471.
This 5TCE-PCN-10GU+10G is able to operate in TDM mode (muxponder) or transponder
mode (transponder).

When operating in TDM mode, the 5TCE-PCN-10GU+10G module performs electrical
multiplexing and de-multiplexing of up to five client interface signals onto one specific
ITU-T compliant wavelength. Two ways of service transport capability are supported: full
transparent transport of services called transparent mode or framed transport of services
called framed mode.
Fully transparent transport of services:

The physical layer of the client services are terminated before the client services are
mapped into proprietary used virtual containers. Then the virtual containers are
multiplexed and mapped into an OPU2/ ODU2 framing structure with reduced
functionality according to ITU-T G.709.
Clock rate adaption is performed through VCO adjustment.
Framed transport of services:
1Only client ports 1 and 2 support SFP+ transceivers.
472
5TCE-PCN-10GU+10G
The physical layer and physical coding sublayer (PCS) of the client services are
terminated before the client services are mapped into proprietary used virtual
containers. Then the virtual containers are multiplexed and mapped into an OPU2/
ODU2 framing structure with reduced functionality according to ITU-T G.709.
Brocade Trunk mode is supported. Clock rate adaption is performed through byte
stuffing.
Transponder Mode
When operating in transponder mode, the 5TCE-PCN-10GU+10G module supports
transmission of services bit transparently, i.e. any PCS layer coding will not be
terminated.
Note that the client interface does not support a transparent OTU2 signal for
regeneration. The data rate on the network port depends on the application.
The 5TCE-PCN-10GU+10G module is supported by the network control

Note
Features
Two modes of operation: TDM mode and transponder mode
VSM): restoration time <50ms for all services
Client channel card protection in muxponder and transponder mode providing

individual switching for every protection group (PG)
The following is supported:
o
o
o
o
Pairing client ports with the same client port number on different modules within
the same shelf
Individual (proprietary) APS channel for each PG
FEC layer performance monitoring at the network interface
PCS layer performance monitoring at client interface for PCS layer terminated
services (framed muxponder mode)
Latency measurement per client service and per network
Support of one DCN channel on network port
Facility loopbacks and terminal loopbacks for each client port and the network port
Five independent, Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP/SFP+) MSA compliant

Use of SFP/SFP+ transceivers supporting gray wavelengths
473
5TCE-PCN-10GU+10G
The supported SFP/SFP+ transceivers, data rates and services are

listed in the Module and System Specification.
Note
One Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP+) MSA compliant interface using LC


Note
Interface specification depends on the SFP/SFP+ transceiver (SFP/SFP+) used. For
details about the individual SFP/SFP+ transceiver types, refer to the Pluggable
Transceiver Module Specification.
or the absence of an SFP/SFP+ transceiver does not affect operation of the terminated
services.
Note
SFP/SFP+ cages should only be populated with pluggable transceivers

that are specifically intended for the channel module. These must be
approved by ADVA Optical Networking. If you use non-approved SFPs
in conjunction with the channel module, ADVA Optical Networking
cannot guarantee the behavior of the module. When a client or network
interface is not used, the corresponding SFP/SFP+ cage does not need
to be populated with an pluggable transceiver, but should be covered
with a dust protective plug.
Signal Path
Transponder Mode
Figure 289 shows the simplified functional block diagram that illustrates the signal path
when the module is operating in transponder mode. In transponder mode, client services
are mapped into proprietaryly used OPU2/ ODU2 framing structure acc. to ITU-T G.709.
474
5TCE-PCN-10GU+10G
Figure 289: Functional Block Diagram of the 5TCE-PCN-10GU+10G Operating in
Transponder Mode (Simplified)
Transmit Direction
Client port (Rx) receives the optical signal from the CPE through the client port connector
C1-R. The optical signal is converted into an electrical signal, where clock and data
recovery is performed.This recovered client signal is then proprietary mapped into an ITU
G.709 framing structure with reduced functionality and sent to the transmitter (Tx) of the
network port. Overhead processing and standard FEC on the framed signal may also be
performed. Standard FEC can be enabled or disabled. The transmitter converts the
electrical output signal to an optical signal at a specific wavelength, and the optical signal
is transmitted through the N-T connector onto the network fiber.
Receive Direction
The network port (Rx) receives a signal with an OTN-like framing structure at a specific
wavelength through the N-R connector from the network fiber. The optical signal is
converted into an electrical signal where data and clock recovery is performed. The OTNlike frame is proprietary de-mapped and decrypted, and the bit synchronous client
payload is extracted. Overhead processing and standard FEC on the framed signal may
also be performed. Standard FEC can be enabled or disabled. The client signal is
forwarded to the client interface where the electrical signal is converted into optical signal
and transmitted through the client port connector C1-T to the CPE.

when the module is operating in TDM mode. Multiplexed aggregated signal is mapped
into proprietarily used OPU2/ ODU2 framing structure acc. to ITU-T G.709. The signal
path is described below.
475
5TCE-PCN-10GU+10G
Figure 290: Functional Block Diagram of the 5TCE-PCN-10GU+10G Operating in
TDM Mode (Simplified)
Transmit Direction
port connectors C1-R, C2-R, C3-R, C4-R and C5-R. These signals are converted to
the electrical domain where clock and data recovery is performed. All signals are
encoded and synchronized. Using a proprietary method, the resulting client signals are
electronically multiplexed and mapped into an OTU2 frame with reduced functionality
according to G.709. At a data rate of 11.3176 Gbit/s this frame is routed to the transmitter
(Tx) of the network port. Standard FEC can be enabled or disabled. The transmitter
476
5TCE-PCN-10GU+10G
converts the electrical output signal to an optical signal at a specific wavelength, and the
signal is transmitted out the N-T connector onto the network link.
Receive Direction
The network port receiver (Rx) receives the signal at a specific DWDM wavelength
through the N-R connector from the network fiber. The optical signal is converted into an
electrical signal where the clock and data recovery is performed. The signal with OTU2
frame is proprietary de-mapped and demultiplexed. Each individual client signal is
decoded, serialized, and sent to the transmitter (Tx) of the corresponding client port. The
through the client port connectors C1-T, C2-T, C3-T, C4-T and C5-T to the CPE.
Specifications
477
Figure 291: Example of a 5TCE-PCN-10GU+AES10G Front View
478
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 5TCE-PCN-10GU+AES10G faceplate
and their meanings.
LED Indicators
Optical Ports

status
transmit
Mod
receive
C1
operating state of the client

port 1
C1
client port 1
C2

port 2
C2
client port 2
C3

port 3
C3
client port 3
C4

port 4
C4
client port 4
C5

port 5
C5
client port 5

network port
network port
Symbols
key symbol to
make support of
data encryption
visible
Description
The 5TCE-PCN-10GU+AES10G is a 5-port 10G enterprise type TDM channel module
with five SFP/SFP+ interfaces on the client side1 and a single SFP+ interface on the
network side supporting data encryption. The front view of the module is illustrated in
Figure 291 on p.478.
The 5TCE-PCN-10GU+AES10G module is designed according to FIPS Publication 1402 with security level 2 and can be used for the transport of security-related data. Up to
five data streams with a total bandwidth of 10 Gbit/s can be combined at the client
interfaces. The aggregated data stream is encrypted/decrypted using the Advanced
Encryption Standard (AES). Data encryption and the use of an endpoint authentication
mechanism protect the network link between two communicating 5TCE-PCN10GU+AES10G modules against man-in-the-middle attacks.
This module is able to operate in TDM mode (muxponder) or transponder mode
(transponder).
479
TDM Mode
When operating in TDM mode, the 5TCE-PCN-10GU+AES10G module performs
electrical multiplexing and de-multiplexing of up to five client interface signals onto one
specific ITU-T compliant wavelength. Two ways of service transport capability are
supported: full transparent transport of services called transparent mode or framed
transport of services called framed mode.

multiplexed, encrypted and mapped into an OPU2/ ODU2 framing structure with
reduced functionality according to ITU-T G.709.

containers. Then the virtual containers are multiplexed, encrypted and mapped into
an OPU2/ ODU2 framing structure with reduced functionality according to ITU-T
G.709. Brocade Trunk mode is supported. Clock rate adaption is performed through
byte stuffing.
Transponder Mode
When operating in transponder mode, the 5TCE-PCN-10GU+AES10G module supports
terminated.
Using the date rates of 10.709 Gbit/s and 11.0957 Gbit/s the 5TCE-PCN10GU+AES10G is able to interwork with the 10TCC-PCTN-10G+100GB as OTU2
aggregator.
The 5TCE-PCN-10GU+AES10G module is supported by the network

control unit NCU-IIand NCU-II-P only.
Note
Features
Hardware AES 256-bit Encryption and Decryption on the network interface in TDM
mode and transponder mode

o
o
o
480
the same shelf
o
(See also subsection Limitations on p.486).

General Communication Channels GCC1 and GCC2 are reserved for communication
between near-end and far-end module. Synchronization, key-exchange and latency
measurements are done via these channels. When the key exchange process has failed
three times and an attack can be excluded, the counter of failed key exchanges should be
reset to get the traffic back. It is recommended to force a manual key exchange to avoid a
ten-minute timeout before a new session key is exchanged.
modules. This may take up to three minutes. At regular time intervals new session keys
are generated and seamlessly exchanged without interrupting the traffic.
481
transmitted.
If the inband communication channel is missing (e.g. loss of signal), the currently running
key exchange will fail. The next key exchange will start when the connection is
established again. The time for generate a key is about 1.5 minutes.


Note
One Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP+) MSA compliant interface using LC


Note
482
services.
Note

Signal Path
Transponder Mode
Figure 292: Functional Block Diagram of the 5TCE-PCN-10GU+AES10G
Operating in Transponder Mode (Simplified)
Transmit Direction
recovery is performed. Following this, an encryption operation is carried out on this
signal. Subsequently, the encrypted client signal is then proprietary mapped into an ITU
electrical output signal to an optical signal at the specific wavelength, and the optical
signal is transmitted through the N-T connector onto the network fiber.
483
Receive Direction
The network port (Rx) receives a signal with an OTN-like framing structure at a specific

when the module is operating in TDM mode. Multiplexed aggregated signal is encrypted
and mapped into proprietarily used OPU2/ ODU2 framing structure acc. to ITU-T G.709.
Figure 293: Functional Block Diagram of the 5TCE-PCN-10GU+AES10G
Operating in TDM Mode (Simplified)
484
Transmit Direction
electronically multiplexed to a single signal. Subsequently, the encrypted signal is
mapped into an OTU2 frame with reduced functionality according to G.709. At a data rate
of 11.3176 Gbit/s this frame is routed to the transmitter (Tx) of the network port. The
transmitter converts the electrical output signal to an optical signal at a specific
wavelength, and the signal is transmitted out the N-T connector onto the network link.
Receive Direction
Battery
The 5TCE-PCN-10GU+AES10G module includes a thin film microchip battery as a
Shipping
The module will be shipped from ADVA Optical Networking to the customer in a tamperproof transport bag. Once sealed, there is no way to tamper with the 5TCE-PCN10GU+AES10G module without showing evidence of the tampering.
Note
485
Limitations
When running in encryption mode, a facility loopback or terminal loopback on the

network interface is not allowed. This would break the authentication of the far-end
module. When running in transparent mode (bypass), network loopbacks are
allowed.
complete module.
Specifications
486
5TCE-PCTN-10GU+10G
5TCE-PCTN-10GU+10G
Figure 294: Example of a 5TCE-PCTN-10GU+10G-LN#DC Front View
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 5TCE-PCTN-10GU+10G faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 57: 5TCE-PCTN-10GU+10G Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
487
5TCE-PCTN-10GU+10G
Table 57: 5TCE-PCTN-10GU+10G Faceplate Markings
P
transmit
Mod
receive
C1
C1
client port 1
C2
C2
client port 2
C3
C3
client port 3
C4
C4
client port 4
C5
C5
client port 5
network port
Variants
The 5TCE-PCTN-10GU+10G is available in three variants:
network interface operational specification. The front view of the 5TCE-PCTN10GU+10G-LN#DC is illustrated in Figure 294 as an example.
Description
The 5TCE-PCTN-10GU+10G is an enterprise type 5-port TDM channel module with
pluggable client interfaces and one tunable DWDM network interface. Based on the
variant, the network interface is fully tunable over the C band at 50GHz spacing or L
band at 100GHz spacing. Each channel can be tuned in the system management by
using the NE management tools. Due to the high extinction ratio the 5TCE-PCTN10GU+10G-LN#DC is suitable for links with a large amount of amplifiers and low OSNR.
The 5TCE-PCTN-10GU+10G is able to operate in TDM mode (muxponder) or
transponder mode (transponder).
TDM Mode
When operating in TDM mode, the 5TCE-PCTN-10GU+10G module performs electrical
multiplexing and de-multiplexing of up to five client interface signals onto one specific
ITU-T compliant wavelength. In doing so two ways of service transport capability are

multiplexed and mapped into an OPU2/ ODU2 framing structure with reduced
functionality according to ITU-T G.709.
488
5TCE-PCTN-10GU+10G

containers. Then the virtual containers are multiplexed and mapped into an OPU2/
ODU2 framing structure with reduced functionality according to ITU-T G.709.
Brocade Trunk mode is supported. Clock rate adaption is performed through byte
stuffing.
Transponder Mode
When operating in transponder mode, the 5TCE-PCTN-10GU+10G module supports
terminated.
Features
Support of C-band or L band (depending on the module variant)

o
o
o
o
the same shelf
Latency measurement per client service
Five independent, Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant interfaces


Note
489
5TCE-PCTN-10GU+10G
Integrated 10G very long reach tunable DWDM interface

(5TCE-PCTN-10GU+10G-V#DC, 5TCE-PCTN-10GU+10G-V#DL)
Integrated, 10 G long reach noise optimized tunable DWDM interface (5TCE-PCTN10GU+10G-LN#DC)

Note
Interface specification depends on the SFP/SFP+ transceiver used. For details
about the individual SFP/SFP+ transceiver types, refer to the Pluggable Transceiver
absence of an SFP/SFP+ transceiver does not affect operation of other terminated
services.
Note
SFP/SFP+ cages should only be populated with SFP/SFP+

must be approved by ADVA Optical Networking. If you use nonapproved SFPs in conjunction with the channel module, ADVA Optical
Networking cannot guarantee the behavior of the module. When a client
interface is not used, the corresponding SFP cage does not need to be
populated with an SFP/SFP+ transceiver, but should be covered with a
dust protective plug.
Signal Path
Transponder Mode
when the module is operating in transponder mode. The signal path is described below.
490
5TCE-PCTN-10GU+10G
Figure 295: Functional Block Diagram of the 5TCE-PCTN-10GU+10G Operating
in Transponder Mode (Simplified)
Transmit Direction
recovery is performed. This recovered client signal is then proprietary mapped into an ITU
electrical output signal to an optical signal at the configured DWDM wavelength, and the
optical signal is transmitted through the N-T connector onto the network fiber.
Receive Direction
The network port (Rx) receives a signal with an OTN-like framing structure at a DWDM
converted into an electrical signal where data and clock recovery is performed. The OTNlike frame is proprietary de-mapped and the bit synchronous client payload is extracted.
Overhead processing and standard FEC on the framed signal may also be performed.
Standard FEC can be enabled or disabled. The client signal is forwarded to the client
interface where the electrical signal is converted into optical signal and transmitted
through the client port connector C1-T to the CPE.
TDM Mode
when the module is operating in TDM mode. The signal path is described below.
491
5TCE-PCTN-10GU+10G
Figure 296: Functional Block Diagram of the 5TCE-PCTN-10GU+10G Operating
in TDM Mode (Simplified)
Transmit Direction
electronically multiplexed and mapped into an OTU2 frame with reduced functionality
according to G.709. At a data rate of 11.3176 Gbit/s this frame is routed to the transmitter
(Tx) of the network port. Standard FEC can be enabled or disabled. The transmitter
converts the electrical output signal to an optical signal at a tuned DWDM wavelength,
and the signal is transmitted out the N-T connector onto the network link.
Receive Direction
492
5TCE-PCTN-10GU+10G
Specifications
493
Figure 297: Example of a 5TCE-PCTN-10GU+AES10G-LN#DC Front View
494
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 5TCE-PCTN-10GU+AES10G faceplate
and their meanings.
Table 58: 5TCE-PCTN-10GU+AES10G Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports

status
transmit
Mod
receive
C1

port 1
C1
client port 1
C2

port 2
C2
client port 2
C3

port 3
C3
client port 3
C4

port 4
C4
client port 4
C5

port 5
C5
client port 5

network port
network port
Symbols
key symbol to
make support of
data encryption
visible
Variants
The 5TCE-PCTN-10GU+AES10G is available in three variants:
network interface operational specification. The front view of the 5TCE-PCTN10GU+AES10G-LN#DC is illustrated in Figure 307 as an example.
Description
The 5TCE-PCTN-10GU+AES10G is an enterprise type 5-port TDM channel module with
five pluggable client interfaces and one tunable DWDM network interface supporting data
encryption. The module is designed according to FIPS Publication 140-2 with security
level 2 and can be used for the transport of security-related data. Up to five data streams
with a total bandwidth of 10 Gbit/s can be combined at the client interfaces. The
aggregated data stream is encrypted/decrypted using the Advanced Encryption Standard
495
(AES). Data encryption and the use of an endpoint authentication mechanism protect the
network link between two communicating 5TCE-PCTN-10GU+AES10G modules
against man-in-the-middle attacks.
spacing or L band at 100GHz spacing. Each channel can be tuned in the system
management by using the NE management tools. Due to the high extinction ratio the
5TCE-PCTN-10GU+AES10G-LN#DC is suitable for links with a large amount of
amplifiers and low OSNR in regional and long haul applications. The 5TCE-PCTN10GU+AES10G-V#DC and 5TCE-PCTN-10GU+AES10G-V#DL are power budget
optimized module variants used for metro applications according to harmonized network
interface specification.
The 5TCE-PCTN-10GU+AES10G is able to operate in TDM mode (muxponder) or
transponder mode (transponder).
TDM Mode
When operating in TDM mode, the 5TCE-PCTN-10GU+AES10G module performs
electrical multiplexing and de-multiplexing of up to five client interface signals onto one
specific ITU-T compliant wavelength. Two ways of service transport capability are

multiplexed, encrypted and mapped into an OPU2/ ODU2 framing structure with
reduced functionality according to ITU-T G.709.

containers. Then the virtual containers are multiplexed, encrypted and mapped into
an OPU2/ ODU2 framing structure with reduced functionality according to ITU-T
G.709. Brocade Trunk mode is supported. Clock rate adaption is performed through
byte stuffing.
Transponder Mode
When operating in transponder mode, the 5TCE-PCTN-10GU+AES10G module supports
terminated.
The 5TCE-PCTN-10GU+AES10G module is supported by the network

Note
Features
496
Hardware AES 256-bit Encryption and Decryption on the network interface in TDM
mode and transponder mode
Support of C-band or L band (depending on the module variant)

o
o
o
o
the same shelf
(See also subsection Limitations on p.502.)

General Communication Channels GCC1 and GCC2 are reserved for communication
between near-end and far-end module. Synchronization, key-exchange and latency
measurements are done via these channels. When the key exchange process has failed
three times and an attack can be excluded, the counter of failed key exchanges should be
reset to get the traffic back. It is recommended to force a manual key exchange to avoid a
ten-minute timeout before a new session key is exchanged.
modules. This may take up to three minutes. At regular time intervals new session keys
are generated and seamlessly exchanged without interrupting the traffic.
497
transmitted.


Note
498
Integrated 10 Gigabit very long reach tunable DWDM interface

(5TCE-PCTN-10GU+AES10G-V#DC, 5TCE-PCTN-10GU+AES10G-V#DL)
Integrated, 10 Gigabit long reach noise optimized tunable DWDM interface (5TCEPCTN-10GU+AES10G-LN#DC)

Note
services.
Note
Signal Path
Transponder Mode
Figure 298: Functional Block Diagram of the 5TCE-PCTN-10GU+AES10G
Operating in Transponder Mode (Simplified)
(Transponder Mode)
Client
port C1
850 nm, 1310 nm

SFP+ transceivers
Network
port N
Rx
Rx
C1-R
N-T
e
e
G.709-like
framing
o
e
o
C1-T
Tx
N-R
Tx
Transmit direction
Receive direction
499
Transmit Direction
recovery is performed. Following this, an encryption operation is carried out on this
signal. Subsequently, the encrypted client signal is then proprietary mapped into an ITU
electrical output signal to an optical signal at the configured DWDM wavelength, and the
optical signal is transmitted through the N-T connector onto the network fiber.
Receive Direction
The network port (Rx) receives a signal with an OTN-like framing structure at a DWDM
TDM Mode
when the module is operating in TDM mode. Multiplexed aggregated signal is encrypted
and mapped into proprietarily used OPU2/ ODU2 framing structure acc. to ITU-T G.709.
500
Figure 299: Functional Block Diagram of the 5TCE-PCTN-10GU+AES10G
Operating in TDM Mode (Simplified)
Figure 300:
5TCE-PCTN-10GU+AES10G (TDM Mode)
Client ports
Client
port C5
850 nm, 1310 nm

SFP transceivers
Rx
C5-R
FPGA
e
1...4G
o
e
C5-T
Tx
Network port:
Signal with OTNlike framing
structure
Rx
C4-R
o
e
1...4G
o
e
C4-T
CWDM or DWDM
SFP+ transceiver
Tx
Rx
Rx
C3-R
N-T
AES
Encryption/
Decryption
e
1...4G
o
e
C3-T
G.709-like
framing
o
e
o
Tx
Tx
Rx
C2-R
o
e
1...5G
o
e
C2-T
Tx
Rx
C1-R
1...5G
o
e
o
8.5G
C1-T
Tx
Client
port C1
Network
port N
SFI4
850 nm, 1310 nm
SFP+ transceivers
on C1 and C2 only
SERDES
Transmit Direction
electronically multiplexed to a single signal. Subsequently, the encrypted signal is
mapped into an OTU2 frame with reduced functionality according to G.709. At a data rate
of 11.3176 Gbit/s this frame is routed to the transmitter (Tx) of the network port. The
501
N-R
Receive Direction
electrical signal where the clock and data recovery is performed. The signal with OTNlike frame is proprietary de-mapped, decrypted and demultiplexed. Each individual client
signal is decoded, serialized, and sent to the transmitter (Tx) of the corresponding client
port. The client transmitters convert the electrical signals to optical signals and transmit
them through the client port connectors C1-T, C2-T, C3-T, C4-T and C5-T to the CPE.
Battery
The 5TCE-PCTN-10GU+AES10G module includes a thin film microchip battery as a
Shipping
The module will be shipped from ADVA Optical Networking to the customer in a tamperproof transport bag. Once sealed, there is no way to tamper with the 5TCE-PCTN10GU+AES10G module without showing evidence of the tampering.
Note
Limitations

allowed.
complete module.
Specifications
502
5TCE-PCN-8GU+10GS
5TCE-PCN-8GU+10GS
Figure 301: Example of 5TCE-PCN-8GU+10GS Front View
503
5TCE-PCN-8GU+10GS
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 5TCE-PCN-8GU+10GS faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 59: 5TCE-PCN-8GU+10GS Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
transmit
Mod
receive
C1
C1
client port 1
C2
C2
client port 2
C3
C3
client port 3
C4
C4
client port 4
C5
C5
client port 5
network port
Description
The 5TCE-PCN-8GU+10GS is a 5-port 10G enterprise type TDM channel module with
five SFP/SFP+ interfaces on the client side1 and a single SFP+ interface on the network
side.
The 5TCE-PCN-8GU+10GS is designed for the use in SDH and Sonet applications. The
module performs electrical multiplexing and de-multiplexing of up to five client interface
signals onto one specific ITU-T compliant wavelength.
Two ways of service transport capabilities are supported:
Full transparent transport of services called transparent multiplexer mode:

multiplexed into a VC4-64c or STS192c payload. This payload is mapped into an
STM64 or OC192 framing structure with reduced functionality according to ITU-T
G.707 or Telcordia GR-253.
Framed transport of services called framed mode:

containers. Then the virtual containers are multiplexed into a VC4-64c or STS192c
payload. This payload is mapped into an STM64 or OC192 framing structure with
reduced functionality according to ITU-T G.707 or Telcordia GR-253. Brocade Trunk
mode is supported.
Clock rate adaption is performed through byte stuffing.
Data rates and services supported on each client port and the network port in transparent
multiplexer and framed mode are listed in the Module and System Specification.
504
5TCE-PCN-8GU+10GS
The 5TCE-PCN-8GU+10GS module is supported by the network control

Note
Features
Support of following service transport capabilities in the TDM mode:

o
o
Full transparent transport of services (transparent multiplexer mode)

Framed transport of services (framed mode)
Support of SDH/Sonet services on the network port
Fault monitoring and performance monitoring on the client ports and the network port:
o
o
o
o
Physical layer
PCS layer at client interface for PCS layer terminated services (framed mode)
Proprietary aggregate VF layer
SDH/Sonet
Clock rate adaption through VCO adjustment in transparent multiplexer mode
Clock rate adaption through byte stuffing in framed mode


Note
One Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP+ types) MSA compliant interface using LC

Support of SDH/Sonet services

Note
505
5TCE-PCN-8GU+10GS
services.
Note

Signal Path
506
5TCE-PCN-8GU+10GS
Figure 302: Functional Block Diagramm of the 5TCE-PCN-8GU+10GS
Transmit Direction
electronically multiplexed and mapped into an STM-64 or an OC-192 frame with reduced
functionality according to G.707 or GR-253. At a data rate of 9.95328 Gbit/s this frame is
routed to the transmitter (Tx) of the network port. The transmitter converts the electrical
output signal to an optical signal at a specific wavelength, and the signal is transmitted
out the N-T connector onto the network link.
507
5TCE-PCN-8GU+10GS
Receive Direction
electrical signal where the clock and data recovery is performed. The signal with STM-64
or OC-192 frame is proprietary de-mapped and demultiplexed. Each individual client
Specifications
508
Figure 303: Example of a 5TCE-PCN-8GU+AES10GS Front View
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 5TCE-PCN-8GU+AES10GS faceplate
and their meanings.
509
Table 60: 5TCE-PCN-8GU+AES10GS Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports

status
transmit
Mod
receive
C1

port 1
C1
client port 1
C2

port 2
C2
client port 2
C3

port 3
C3
client port 3
C4

port 4
C4
client port 4
C5

port 5
C5
client port 5

network port
network port
Symbols
key symbol to
make support of
data encryption
visible
Description
The 5TCE-PCN-8GU+AES10GS is a 5-port 10G enterprise type TDM channel module
with five SFP/SFP+ interfaces on the client side1 and a single SFP+ interface on the
network side supporting SDH/Sonet data encryption.
The module is designed according to FIPS Publication 140-2 with security level 2, and
can be used for the transport of security-related data. The 5TCE-PCN-8GU+AES10GS
performs electrical multiplexing and de-multiplexing of up to five client interface signals
onto one specific ITU-T compliant wavelength. The aggregated data stream is
encrypted/decrypted using the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES). Data encryption
and the use of an endpoint authentication mechanism protect the network link between
two communicating 5TCE-PCN-8GU+AES10GS modules against man-in-the-middle
attacks.
Two ways of service transport capabilities are supported:

multiplexed into a VC4-64c or STS192c payload. This payload is encrypted and
mapped into an STM64 or OC192 framing structure with reduced functionality
according to ITU-T G.707 or Telcordia GR-253.
510

payload. This payload is encrypted and mapped into an STM64 or OC192 framing
structure with reduced functionality according to ITU-T G.707 or Telcordia GR-253.
Brocade Trunk mode is supported.
Data rates and services supported on each client port and the network port in transparent
multiplexer and framed mode are listed in the Module and System Specification.
The 5TCE-PCN-8GU+AES10GS module is supported by the network

Note
Features
Support of following service transport capabilities in the TDM mode:

o
o
Full transparent transport of services (transparent multiplexer mode)

Framed transport of services (framed mode)
Support of SDH/Sonet services and encryption/decryption functionality on the

network port
o
o
o
o
Physical layer
PCS layer at client interface for PCS layer terminated services (framed mode)
SDH/Sonet
Clock rate adaption through VCO adjustment in transparent multiplexer mode
Clock rate adaption through byte stuffing in framed mode
Facility loopbacks and terminal loopbacks for each client port (See also subsection
Limitations on p.515.)

The module uses the AES encryption algorithm in counter mode (CTR) with a 256-bit
511
The key-exchange process is controlled by micro controllers on both modules. When the
key exchange process has failed three times and an attack can be excluded, the counter
of failed key exchanges should be reset to get the traffic back. It is recommended to force
a manual key exchange to avoid a ten-minute timeout before a new session key is
exchanged.
After power-on, the first encryption key is established between near-end and far-end. This
may take up to three minutes. At regular time intervals new session keys are generated
and seamlessly exchanged without interrupting the traffic.
transmitted.


Note
512
One Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP+ types) MSA compliant interface using LC

Support of SDH/Sonet services

Note
services.
Note

Signal Path
513
Figure 304: Functional Block Diagramm of the 5TCE-PCN-8GU+AES10GS
Transmit Direction
electronically multiplexed to a single signal. Following this, an encryption operation is
carried out on this signal. Subsequently, the encrypted signal is mapped into an STM-64
or an OC-192 frame with reduced functionality according to G.707 or GR-253. At a data
rate of 9.95328 Gbit/s this frame is routed to the transmitter (Tx) of the network port. The
514
Receive Direction
or OC-192 frame is proprietary de-mapped, decrypted and demultiplexed. Each individual
client signal is decoded, serialized, and sent to the transmitter (Tx) of the corresponding
client port. The client transmitters convert the electrical signals to optical signals and
transmit them through the client port connectors C1-T, C2-T, C3-T, C4-T and C5-T to
the CPE.
Battery
The 5TCE-PCN-8GU+AES10GS module includes a thin film microchip battery as a
Shipping
The module will be shipped from ADVA Optical Networking to the customer in a tamperproof transport bag. Once sealed, there is no way to tamper with the 5TCE-PCN8GU+AES10GS module without showing evidence of the tampering.
Note
Limitations

allowed.
complete module.
Specifications
515
5TCE-PCTN-8GU+10GS
5TCE-PCTN-8GU+10GS
Figure 305: Example of a 5TCE-PCTN-8GU+10GS-LN#DC Front View
516
5TCE-PCTN-8GU+10GS
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 5TCE-PCTN-8GU+10GS faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 61: 5TCE-PCTN-8GU+10GS Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
transmit
Mod
receive
C1
C1
client port 1
C2
C2
client port 2
C3
C3
client port 3
C4
C4
client port 4
C5
C5
client port 5
network port
Variants
The 5TCE-PCTN-8GU+10GS is available in two variants:
Both module variants feature the same faceplate design. The modules differ in their
network interface operational specification. The front view of the 5TCE-PCTN8GU+10GS-LN#DC is illustrated in Figure 305 as an example.
Description
The 5TCE-PCTN-8GU+10GS is an enterprise type 5-port TDM channel module with
pluggable client interfaces and one tunable DWDM network interface. The module is
designed for use in SDH and Sonet applications. Based on the variant, the network
interface is fully tunable over the C band at 50GHz spacing. Each channel can be tuned
in the system management by using the NE management tools. Due to the high
extinction ratio the 5TCE-PCTN-8GU+10GS-LN#DC is suitable for links with a large
amount of amplifiers and low OSNR.
The 5TCE-PCTN-8GU+10GS performs electrical multiplexing and de-multiplexing of up
to five client interface signals onto one specific ITU-T compliant wavelength. In doing so
two ways of service transport capability are supported: full transparent transport of
services called transparent multiplexer mode or framed transport of services called
framed mode.
517
5TCE-PCTN-8GU+10GS

multiplexed into a VC4-64c or STS192c payload. This payload is mapped into an
STM64 or OC192 framing structure with reduced functionality according to ITU-T
G.707 or Telcordia GR-253.

payload. This payload is mapped into an STM64 or OC192 framing structure with
reduced functionality according to ITU-T G.707 or Telcordia GR-253. Brocade Trunk
mode is supported.
The 5TCE-PCTN-8GU+10GS module is supported by the network

Note
Features
Support of C-band on the network interface
Support of SDH/Sonet services on the network port
o
o
o
o
Physical layer
PCS layer at client interface for PCS layer terminated services (framed mode) )
SDH/Sonet


Note
518

(5TCE-PCTN-8GU+10GS-V#DC)
5TCE-PCTN-8GU+10GS
Integrated, 10G long reach noise optimized tunable DWDM interface (5TCE-PCTN8GU+10GS-LN#DC)

Note
services.
Note

Signal Path
519
5TCE-PCTN-8GU+10GS
Figure 306: Functional Block Diagram of the 5TCE-PCTN-8GU+10GS
Transmit Direction
electronically multiplexed and mapped into an STM-64 or an OC-192 frame with reduced
functionality according to G.707 or GR-253. At a data rate of 9.95328 Gbit/s this frame is
routed to the transmitter (Tx) of the network port. The transmitter converts the electrical
output signal to an optical signal at a specific wavelength, and the signal is transmitted
out the N-T connector onto the network link.
Receive Direction
520
5TCE-PCTN-8GU+10GS
or OC-192 frame is proprietary de-mapped and demultiplexed. Each individual client
Specifications
521
Figure 307: Example of a 5TCE-PCTN-8GU+AES10GS Front View
522
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 5TCE-PCTN-8GU+AES10GS faceplate
and their meanings.
Table 62: 5TCE-PCTN-8GU+AES10GS Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports

status
transmit
Mod
receive
C1

port 1
C1
client port 1
C2

port 2
C2
client port 2
C3

port 3
C3
client port 3
C4

port 4
C4
client port 4
C5

port 5
C5
client port 5

network port
network port
Symbols
key symbol to
make support of
data encryption
visible
Variants
The 5TCE-PCTN-8GU+AES10GS is available in two variants:
Both module variants feature the same faceplate design. The modules differ in their
network interface operational specification. The front view of the 5TCE-PCTN8GU+AES10GS-LN#DC is illustrated in Figure 307 on p.522 as an example.
Description
The 5TCE-PCTN-8GU+AES10GS is an enterprise type 5-port TDM channel module with
five pluggable client interfaces and one tunable DWDM network interface supporting
SDH/Sonet data encryption. The module is designed according to FIPS Publication 1402 with security level 2, and can be used for the transport of security-related data. The
5TCE-PCTN-8GU+10GS performs electrical multiplexing and de-multiplexing of up to
five client interface signals onto one specific ITU-T compliant wavelength. The
aggregated data stream is encrypted/decrypted using the Advanced Encryption Standard
523
(AES). Data encryption and the use of an endpoint authentication mechanism protect the
network link between two communicating 5TCE-PCTN-8GU+AES10GS modules
against man-in-the-middle attacks.
spacing. Each channel can be tuned in the system management by using the NE
management tools. Due to the high extinction ratio the 5TCE-PCTN-8GU+10GS-LN#DC
is suitable for links with a large amount of amplifiers and low OSNR in regional and long
haul applications. The 5TCE-PCTN-8GU+AES10GS-V#DC is a power budget optimized
module variant used for metro applications according to harmonized network interface
specification.
The 5TCE-PCTN-8GU+AES10GS supports two ways of service transport capability: full
transparent transport of services called transparent multiplexer mode or framed transport
of services called framed mode.

multiplexed into a VC4-64c or STS192c payload. This payload is encrypted and
mapped into an STM64 or OC192 framing structure with reduced functionality
according to ITU-T G.707 or Telcordia GR-253.

payload. This payload is encrypted and mapped into an STM64 or OC192 framing
structure with reduced functionality according to ITU-T G.707 or Telcordia GR-253.
Brocade Trunk mode is supported.
The 5TCE-PCTN-8GU+AES10GS module is supported by the network

Note
Features
524
Support of C-band on the network interface
Support of SDH/Sonet services and encryption/decryption functionality on the

network port
Facility loopbacks and terminal loopbacks for each client port

(Facility loopbacks and terminal loopbacks on the network port only in bypass mode,
when encryption is disabled)

The module uses the AES encryption algorithm in counter mode (CTR) with a 256-bit
The key-exchange process is controlled by micro controllers on both modules. When the
key exchange process has failed three times and an attack can be excluded, the counter
of failed key exchanges should be reset to get the traffic back. It is recommended to force
a manual key exchange to avoid a ten-minute timeout before a new session key is
exchanged.
After power-on, the first encryption key is established between near-end and far-end. This
may take up to three minutes. At regular time intervals new session keys are generated
and seamlessly exchanged without interrupting the traffic.
transmitted.
525


Note

(5TCE-PCTN-8GU+AES10GS-V#DC)
Integrated, 10G long reach noise optimized tunable DWDM interface (5TCE-PCTN8GU+AES10GS-LN#DC)

Note
services.
Note

Signal Path
Figure 308 on p.527 shows the functional block diagram (simplified) and illustrates the
signal path, which is described below.
526
Figure 308: Functional Block Diagram of the 5TCE-PCTN-8GU+AES10GS
Transmit Direction
electronically multiplexed to a single signal. Following this, an encryption operation is
carried out on this signal. Subsequently, the encrypted signal is mapped into an STM-64
or an OC-192 frame with reduced functionality according to G.707 or GR-253. At a data
rate of 9.95328 Gbit/s this frame is routed to the transmitter (Tx) of the network port. The
Receive Direction
527
or OC-192 frame is proprietary de-mapped, decrypted and demultiplexed. Each individual
client signal is decoded, serialized, and sent to the transmitter (Tx) of the corresponding
client port. The client transmitters convert the electrical signals to optical signals and
transmit them through the client port connectors C1-T, C2-T, C3-T, C4-T and C5-T to
the CPE.
Battery
The 5TCE-PCTN-8GU+AES10GS module includes a thin film microchip battery as a
rechargeable, on-board backup power source. The Battery is enclosed in a secure
enclosure within the module. It buffers the module's secure password storage for more
than eight hours. This enables the module to re-establish automatically encrypted
communication after power failures. The battery not needs to be replaced during the life of
the product.
Shipping
The module will be shipped from ADVA Optical Networking to the customer in a tamperproof transport bag. Once sealed, there is no way to tamper with the 5TCE-PCTN8GU+AES10GS module without showing evidence of the tampering.
Note
Limitations

allowed.
complete module.
Specifications
528
8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V
8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V
Figure 309: Example of an 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx Front View
The 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx is a converted FSP 2000 Release 6.6

module as indicated by the asterisk printed on its faceplate. The
module provides full FSP 2000 Release 6.6 functionality. Monitoring
and troubleshooting follow FSP 2000 Release 6.6 rules. This mainly
concerns ALS and LED behavior.
529
8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V
Faceplate Markings
Table 63 and Table 64 list all abbreviations on the 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx faceplate
and their meanings.

Table 63: 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx Optical Port Markings
Meaning
receive
transmit
C1
client port 1
C2
client port 2
C3
client port 3
C4
client port 4
C5
client port 5
C6
client port 6
C7
client port 7
C8
client port 8
network port

Table 64: 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx LED Indicator Markings
530
LED
Markings
Meaning
LED
Markings
Meaning
receive
transmit
C1-R

client port 1
C1-T
transmitter status of the client port

1
C2-R

client port 2
C2-T

2
C3-R

client port 3
C3-T

3
8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V
Table 64: 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx LED Indicator Markings
LED
Markings
Meaning
LED
Markings
Meaning
C4-R

client port 4
C4-T

4
C5-R

client port 5
C5-T

5
C6-R

client port 6
C6-T

6
C7-R

client port 7
C7-T

7
C8-R

client port 8
C8-T

8
N/R

network port
N/T

port
On
modules power
supply status
Err
error condition; self-test procedure
Variants
The 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx is available in the following DWDM variants:
8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#D01 to 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#D32
8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#DC1 to 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#DC9
The 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V is available in following CWDM variants:
8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#C1470
All module variants feature the same design and use the same faceplate. The modules
differ in their network interface operational specification. The front view of the 8TCEESCON+2G5-V#Dxx is illustrated in Figure 160 on p. 283 as an example. Figure 309.
531
8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V
Description
The 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx is an enterprise type 8-port TDM channel module
especially designed for the transport of up to eight 200 Mbit/s ESCON services in
DWDM or CWDM networks. The module electrically multiplexes/de-multiplexes the
client signals into/from one WDM channel carried over a specific ITU-T compliant
wavelength. The module works only in conjunction with the appropriate DWDM/CWDM
The 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx features an ITU-T compliant, 100 GHz spaced DWDM
network interface for the support of 41 DWDM C band channels via 41 discrete module
variants. The 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Cxxxx features an ITU-T compliant, 20 nm spaced
CWDM interface allowing support for eight CWDM channels via eight discrete module
variants. It cannot be deployed in topologies with optical amplifiers. The maximum
realizable fiber link distances of the 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Cxxxx are shorter in
comparison to the 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx.
Features
ALS according to ADVA Optical Networking standard on the network port
Versatile switched protection (in conjunction with the VSM)
Performance monitoring on the optical layer only
Parallel terminal loop functionality on the client ports
Loopback operations on the network port are not supported
Eight independent, integrated, 1310-nm multimode interfaces
Support of ESCON protocol only
MU/PC duplex receptacles

Note
One integrated, very-long reach DWDM interface (8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx)
One integrated, very-long reach CWDM interface (8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Cxxxx)
MU/PC duplex receptacles

Note
532
8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V
Signal Path
Figure 310 illustrates the signal path, which is described.
Transmit Direction
In the transmit (ingress) direction, the following takes place: Each client port receiver
(Rx) receives the optical signals from the CPE through the client port connectors C1-R to
C8-R. These signals are converted to the electrical domain and clock and data recovery
is performed. All signals are encoded, synchronized and mapped in a higher bit rate
frame. Using a proprietary method, the mapped signals are then electronically
multiplexed together to a combined output signal at a data rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. This
combined signal is routed to the transmitter (Tx) of the network port. The transmitter
converts the electrical output signal back to an optical signal at a specific
Receive Direction
input signal is de-multiplexed into its original component client signals. Each client signal
is decoded, serialized and fed into the transmitter (Tx) of the corresponding client port.
The transmitters convert the electrical signals back to optical signals and transmit them
through the client port connectors C1-T to C8-T to the CPE.
533
8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V
Figure 310: Functional Block Diagram of the 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx
Specifications
534
8TCE-GLINK+2G5-V
8TCE-GLINK+2G5-V
Figure 311: Example of an 8TCE-GLINK+2G5-V#Dxx Front View
Note
The 8TCE-GLINK+2G5-V is a converted FSP 2000 Release 6.6 module

as indicated by the asterisk printed on its faceplate. The module
provides full FSP 2000 Release 6.6 functionality. Monitoring and
troubleshooting follow FSP 2000 Release 6.6 rules. This mainly
concerns ALS and LED behavior.
535
8TCE-GLINK+2G5-V
Faceplate Markings
Table 65 and Table 66 list all abbreviations on the 8TCE-GLINK+2G5-V faceplate and
their meanings.

Table 65: 8TCE-GLINK+2G5-V Optical Port
Markings
Optical Port
Markings
Meaning
receive
transmit
C1
client port 1
C2
client port 2
C3
client port 3
C4
client port 4
C5
client port 5
C6
client port 6
C7
client port 7
C8
client port 8
network port

Table 66: 8TCE-GLINK+2G5-V LED Indicator Markings
536
LED
Markings
Meaning
LED
Markings
Meaning
receive
transmit
C1-R

client port 1
C1-T

client port 1
C2-R

client port 2
C2-T

client port 2
C3-R

client port 3
C3-T

client port 3
8TCE-GLINK+2G5-V
Table 66: 8TCE-GLINK+2G5-V LED Indicator Markings
LED
Markings
Meaning
LED
Markings
Meaning
C4-R

client port 4
C4-T

client port 4
C5-R

client port 5
C5-T

client port 5
C6-R

client port 6
C6-T

client port 6
C7-R

client port 7
C7-T

client port 7
C8-R

client port 8
C8-T

client port 8
N/R

network port
N/T

network port
On

status
Err

procedure
Variants
The 8TCE-GLINK+2G5-V is available in following DWDM variants:
8TCE-GLINK+2G5-V#D01 to 8TCE-GLINK+2G5-V#D32
8TCE-GLINK+2G5-V#DC1 to 8TCE-GLINK+2G5-V#DC9
The 8TCE-GLINK+2G5-V is available in following CWDM variants:
8TCE-GLINK+2G5-V#C1470
537
8TCE-GLINK+2G5-V
Description
The 8TCE-GLINK+2G5-V is an enterprise type 8-port G-LINK TDM channel module
specifically designed for data transmission on G-Link protocol in DWDM or CWDM
networks. The module electrically multiplexes/de-multiplexes up to eight optical G-Links
into/from one WDM channel carried over a specific ITU-T compliant wavelength.
The module works only in conjunction with the appropriate DWDM/CWDM optical filter
modules.
The 8TCE-GLINK+2G5-V#Dxx features an ITU-T compliant, 100 GHz spaced DWDM
network interface for the support of 41 DWDM C band channels via 41 discrete module
variants.
The 8TCE-GLINK+2G5-V#Cxxxx features an ITU-T compliant, 20 nm spaced CWDM
interface allowing support for eight CWDM channels via eight discrete module variants. It
cannot be deployed in topologies with optical amplifiers. The maximum realizable fiber
link distances of the 8TCE-GLINK+2G5-V#Cxxxx are shorter in comparison to the
8TCE-GLINK+2G5-V#Dxx.
Features
ALS according to ADVA Optical Networking standard on the network port
Versatile switched protection (in conjunction with the VSM)
Performance monitoring on the optical layer only
Parallel terminal loop functionality on the client ports (all eight client channels are
looped back simultaneously)
Loop-back operations on the network port are not supported
Eight independent, integrated, 1310-nm multimode interfaces
Support of G-Link protocol only
MU/PC duplex receptacle connectors

Note
538
Single integrated, very-long reach, single-mode DWDM interface (8TCEGLINK+2G5-V#Dxx)
Single integrated, very-long reach, single-mode CWDM interface (8TCEGLINK+2G5-V#Cxxxx)
MU/PC duplex receptacle connectors
8TCE-GLINK+2G5-V
Note
Signal Path
which is described.
Transmit Direction
Each client port receiver (Rx) receives an optical G-Link signal from the CPE through the
client port connectors C1-R to C8-R. These signals are converted to the electrical
domain and clock and data recovery is performed. All signals are encoded, synchronized
and mapped in a higher bit rate frame. Using a proprietary method, the mapped signals
are then electronically multiplexed together to a combined output signal at a data rate of
2.5 Gbit/s. This combined signal is routed to the transmitter (Tx) of the network port. The
transmitter converts the electrical output signal back to an optical signal at a specific
Receive Direction
input signal is de-multiplexed into its original component client signals. Each client signal
is decoded, serialized and fed into the transmitter (Tx) of the corresponding client port.
The transmitters convert the electrical signals back to optical G-Link signals and transmit
them through the client port connectors C1-T to C8-T to the CPE.
539
8TCE-GLINK+2G5-V
Figure 312: Functional Block Diagram of the 8TCE-GLINK+2G5-V
Specifications
540
4WCE-PCN-16GFC
4WCE-PCN-16GFC
Figure 313: 4WCE-PCN-16GFC Front View
541
4WCE-PCN-16GFC
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 4WCE-PCN-16GFC faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 67: 4WCE-PCN-16GFC Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
transmit
Mod
receive
C1
C1
client port 1
C2
C2
client port 2
C3
C3
client port 3
C4
C4
client port 4
N1
operating status of the network port 1
N1
network port 1
N2
N2
network port 2
N3
N3
network port 3
N4
N4
network port 4
Description
The 4WCE-PCN-16GFC is an enterprise type, WDM quad transponder module. It can
have up to four SFP+ type pluggable client interfaces and four XFP type pluggable
network interfaces. The module converts up to four client side signals into four specific
ITU-T compliant network side wavelengths.
The 4WCE-PCN-16GFC contains four parallel transponders for transmitting the signal
individually from the client to the network interfaces. The module is especially designed
for the transport of 16 G FC services even though 8G FC and 10 GbE LAN PHY services
are also supported. If the module is operating with 16G FC services the data rate of
14.025 Gbit/s is running.
Each of the four client interfaces can be configured individually to any of the supported
data rates. All services are transmitted transparently.
The 4WCE-PCN-16GFC provides clock and data recovery and performs 3R signal
conditioning at any supported data rate by default.
Fault and performance monitoring information for the 4WCE-PCN-16GFC can be found in
The 4WCE-PCN-16GFC module is supported by the network control

Note
542
4WCE-PCN-16GFC
Features
Four independent transponders
VSM): protection switching time <50ms for all services
Fault monitoring and performance monitoring on the client and network interfaces
Clock and data recovery with 3R signal conditioning at any supported data rate by
default
Facility loopback for 8 G FC and 10 GbE LAN PHY services on client and network
interface (each client and network port can be looped back individually)
Configurable Laser-Off delay for external protection schemes
Four independent, Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP+ types), MSA compliant


Note
Four independent Extended Form-factor Pluggable (XFP) MSA compliant interfaces

Use of XFP transceivers supporting CWDM channels and DWDM channels

The supported XFP transceivers, data rates and services are listed in
Note
Interface specification depends on the SFP+/XFP transceiver modules used. For details
on the individual SFP+/XFP transceiver module types, refer to the Pluggable Transceiver
Unused transceiver cages can remain empty. An unconnected interface or the absence
of an SFP+/XFP transceiver does not affect operation of other terminated services.
543
4WCE-PCN-16GFC
SFP+/XFP cages should only be populated with SFP+/XFP
must be approved by ADVA Optical Networking. If you use nonapproved SFP+/XFP transceiver devices in conjunction with the channel
module, ADVA Optical Networking cannot guarantee the behavior of the
module. When an interface is not used, the corresponding SFP+/XFP
cage does not need to be populated with an SFP+/XFP transceiver, but
should be covered with an appropriate dust protective plug.
Note
Signal Path
path which is described below.
Figure 314: Functional Block Diagram of the 4WCE-PCN-16GFC showing Facility
Loopback for 8G FC and 10 GbE LAN PHY Services
Client
ports
SFP + transceiver
Rx
C 1-R
XFP transceiver
Tx
Crosspoint
o
e
8G FC and
10 GbE LAN PHY :
8G FC and
10 GbE LAN PHY :
Network Facility Loop
e
CDR
Tx
Tx
e
e
8G FC and
10 GbE LAN PHY :
8G FC and
10 GbE LAN PHY :
e
CDR
Rx
Tx
e
e
8G FC and
10 GbE LAN PHY :
8G FC and
10 GbE LAN PHY :
e
CDR
Tx
Tx
e
e
N 4-T
CDR
8G FC and
10 GbE LAN PHY :
8G FC and
10 GbE LAN PHY :
C 4-T
N 3-R
Rx
Rx
C 4-R
N 3-T
CDR
o
C 3-T
N 2-R
Rx
Tx
C 3-R
N 2-T
CDR
o
C 2-T
N 1-R
Rx
Rx
C 2-R
N 1-T
CDR
o
C 1-T
Network
ports
4WCE -PCN -16 GFC
Tx
e
CDR
N 4-R
Rx
Transmit Direction
Each client port receiver (Rx) receives the optical signals from the CPE through the
appropriate client port connector (C1-R, C2-R, C3-R or C4-R). All signals are converted
from optical to the electrical domain where clock and data recovery is performed. Then
the signals are routed through the crosspoint to the XFP transceivers of the network port
transmitter (Tx). Each transmitter of the network ports converts the electrical output
544
4WCE-PCN-16GFC
signal to an optical signal at a specific DWDM wavelength and transmits it through the
N1-T, N2-T, N3-T and N4-T connector onto the link.
Receive Direction
The network port receivers (Rx) receive optical signals at a specific DWDM wavelength
through the N1-R, N2-R, N3-R and N4-R connectors from the link. These signals are
converted from optical to the electrical domain, and data and clock recovery is performed.
Then the signals are routed through the crosspoint to the SFP+ transceivers of the client
port transmitter (Tx). The transmitter of the client ports converts the electrical output
signal back to an optical signal and transmits them through each of the client port
connectors C1-T, C2-T, C3-T and C4-T to the CPE.

mode. In this case the appropriate client SFP+ transceiver has to be plugged. Without
SFP+ transceiver at the respective client port, the network port will not send any light
although the network laser is forced on.
Loopback
For testing, service and fault diagnostics purposes, the module supports client interface
facility loopback and network interface facility loopback. The optical signal flow is
represented in Figure 314 on p.544 by the red traces. The internal loopbacks can be
activated by using the NE management tools.
Loopback is only supported for 8G FC and 10 GbE LAN PHY services.
Note

The client interface facility loopback can be initiated for 8G FC and 10 GbE LAN PHY
services to test the communications link between the Customer Premises Equipment
(CPE) and the near-end module. The client signal from the CPE is received by the client
port receiver (Rx). When clock and data recovery is performed the signal is routed to the
crosspoint and returns (looped back) to the client port transmitter output (Tx). Then the
signal is sent directly back to the CPE.

The network interface facility loopback can be initiated for 8G FC and 10 GbE LAN PHY
services to test the communications link between the Customer Premises Equipment
(CPE) and the far-end module. The network signal from the CPE is received by the client
port receiver (Rx). When clock and data recovery is performed the signal is routed to the
crosspoint and returns (looped back) to the network port transmitter output (Tx). Then the
signal is retransmitted directly to the CPE.
545
4WCE-PCN-16GFC
Specifications
546
Chapter 12
This chapter provides general descriptions of the pluggable fiber-optic, optojack and
electrical transceivers available at the publication date of this Hardware Description.
The descriptions are merely supposed to convey a basic understanding of the pluggable
transceivers to the reader. For detailed information on pluggable transceiver types and
Before the pluggable fiber-optic, optojack and electrical transceiver are described in a
separate section, general information about pluggable transceivers are provided such as
classification, naming conventions, color codes and labels.
For all matters relating to safety precautions as well as insertion and removal procedures,
refer to the Safety Guide and Maintenance and Troubleshooting Manual.
Insert pluggable transceiver devices correctly, with the clasp facing the right of the port,
and ensure that the pluggable transceiver seats securely in the port. Failure to install
pluggable transceivers properly may result in traffic-affecting conditions and cause
damage to the equipment.
General Information on p.548 which describes the basics of pluggable transceivers and
gives details to the naming conventions used for the pluggable transceiver namings.
Overview - Transceiver Types on p.556 which lists all pluggable transceiver types and
describes them in general.
SFP/SFP+/XFP/CFP Optical Transceivers on p.569 which describes the fiber-optic
transceivers in general. In addition, the transceivers key features are presented and
information about application are provided.
SFP Optojack Transceivers on p.574 which describes the optojack transceivers in
general. In addition, the transceivers key features are presented and information about
application are provided.
SFP Electrical Transceivers on p.582 which describes pluggable electrical transceivers
in general. In addition, the transceivers key features are presented and information about
application are provided.
547
General Information
General Information
Channel modules with interchangeable interfaces use pluggable fiber-optic, optojack or
electrical transceivers. The Fiber Service Platform uses three form factors:
Extended Form-factor Pluggable Transceivers (XFP transceivers) for transmission

data rates of 4.25 Gbit/s, 5 Gbit/s and 8.5 Gbit/s as well as around 10 Gbit/s, 11
Gbit/s or 14.025 Gbit/s
Small Form-factor Pluggable Transceivers (SFP/SFP+ transceivers) are used for the
following transmission data rates:
o
o
o
o
SFP transceivers for applications with data rates up to 4.25 Gbit/s

SFP transceivers for video applications with data rates between 270 Mbit/s and
2970 Mbit/s
SFP dual transmitters and SFP dual receivers for video and audio applications
with data rates between 125 Mbit/s and 2970 Mbit/s
SFP+ transceivers to support data rates between 2.125 Gbit/s and 14.025 Gbit/s
SFP+CDR transceivers with integrated clock and data recovery to support data
rates between 8.5 Gbit/s and 11.3176 Gbit/s
Centum Form Factor Pluggable Transceivers (CFP transceivers) for high data rates
of 103.125 Gbit/s (100 GbE) and 111.81 Gbit/s (OTU4)
These transceivers comply with the standard dimensions defined by the

XFP/SFP/SFP+/CFP Multi-Sourcing Agreement and meet the requirements of valid
Laser Eye and Electrical Safety Standards. The XFP/SFP/SFP+/CFP form factors
transceivers are not compatible with each other.
In the following, XFP transceivers, SFP transceivers, SFP+ transceivers, SFP dual
transmitters and SFP dual receivers as well as CFP transceivers are referred to as
pluggable transceivers.
Note
Pluggable transceivers must be specifically ordered from ADVA Optical

Networking. If ordered, they will be delivered together with the individual
XFP, SFP, SFP+ or CFP-based channel module.
All pluggable transceivers are easy to deploy and hot pluggable, allowing channel
modules to be changed without an interruption to system power. They give the end user
great flexibility in configuring and reconfiguring the network at low costs.
Identification
Pluggable transceivers are identified by labels. Identification information is provided in
each module description.
Transceiver Naming Conventions

The transceiver name is made up of a set of parts assembled according to a very specific
rule as exemplified below. The parts of the name represent the transceivers specific
features.
548
General Information
Table 68: Examples of XFP/SFP and CFP Naming Conventions
Example XFP/SFP
Transceivers
SFP/2G5U/D1529.55U/SM/LC#D01
WDM channel:
Connector type:
Type of optical : fiber
Dispersion tolerance:
Wavelength:
Form of the package:
DWDM channel 01
LC/PC
single-mode fiber
ultra long reach
DWDM 1529.55 nm
Small Form-factor pluggable (SFP)
This example describes a multi-rate 2.5 Gbit/s DWDM SFP

transceiver for ultra-long distance transmission. It supports
data rates between 100Mbit/s and 2.67 Gbit/s and is intended
for the DWDM channel no. 01 carried over the wavelength of
1529.55 nm and a frequency of 196.00 THz. The transceiver
features LC type connectors supporting single-mode fibers.
Table 69 lists the naming conventions used by the FSP
3000R7.
Example CFP
Transceivers
CFP/112G/LR4/SM/LC
Connector type:
Type of optical : fiber
LC/PC
single-mode fiber
L= Link distance:
long reach
R = 100GBASE-LR type
Form of the package:
Centum Form-factor pluggable (CFP)
This example describes a multi-rate 112 Gbit/s CFP

transceiver for long distance transmission. With a service of
100 GbE, the transceiver operates as a 100GBASE-LR type. It
supports data rates of
103.125 Gbit/s (100 GbE) and 111.81 Gbit/s (OTU4) over four
optical lanes providing wavelengths of 1295.56 nm, 1300.05
nm, 1304.58 nm and 1309.14 nm. The transceiver features LC
type connectors supporting single-mode fibers. Table 69 lists
the naming conventions used by the FSP 3000R7.
549
General Information
Table 69: Pluggable Transceiver Naming Conventions
550
Parts of the
Name
Code
Meaning
Form of the
package
CFP
centum form factor pluggable (centum =

lat. 100)
SFP
small form factor pluggable
SFP+
enhanced version of the small form

factor pluggable
SFP+CDR
small form factor pluggable with

integrated clock and data recovery
SFP-TRX
small form factor pluggable dual transmitter
SFP-2RX
small form factor pluggable dual receiver
XFP
extended form factor pluggable
Data rates
103G
103.125 Gbit/s
112G
103.125 Gbit/s,
111.81 Gbit/s
28G
25.78 Gbit/s, 27.95

Gbit/s
16G FC
Depending on the
transceiver type:
4.25 Gbit/s, 5.0
Gbit/s, 8.5 Gbit/s,
9.9532 Gbit/s, 10.0
Gbit/s, 10.3125
Gbit/s, 10.518 Gbit/s,
10.709 Gbit/s,
10.7595 Gbit/s
10.9747 Gbit/s,
11.0491 Gbit/s,
11.0957 Gbit/s,
11.3176 Gbit/s,
14.025 Gbit/s
General Information
Parts of the
Name
Code
11G
Depending on the
transceiver type:
9.95323 Gbit/s,
10.3125 Gbit/s,
10.51875 Gbit/s,
10.6642 Gbit/s,
10.709 Gbit/s,
11.0032 Gbit/s,
11.0491 Gbit/s,
11.0957 Gbit/s,
11.3176 Gbit/s
11GU
universal data rates

between 8.5 Gbit/s
and 11.3176 Gbit/s
10G
Depending on the
transceiver type:
9.95323 Gbit/s,
10.3125 Gbit/s,
10.51875Gbit/s,
10.6642 Gbit/s,
10.709Gbit/s
10G-2R
indicates
unclocked/transparent
operation;
4.25 Gbit/s, 5.0
Mbit/s, 8.5 Gbit/s
10GU

between 8.5 Gbit/s
and 10.3125 Gbit/s
8G
Depending on the
transceiver type: 4.25
Gbit/s, 5 Gbit/s and
8.5 Gbit/s
4GU

between 1.062 Gbit/s,
2.125Gbit/s and
4.250 Gbit/s
8GU

up to 8.5 Gbit/s
Meaning
551
General Information
552
Parts of the
Name
Code
3GSDI

between 125 Mbit/s,
270 Mbit/s, 360
Mbit/s,
1485 Mbit/s, and 2970
Mbit/s
3GU
universal data rates of

2.125 Gbit/s, 2.4576
Gbit/s, 2.488 Gbit/s
and 3.072 Gbit/s
2G5U

between 100 Mbit/s
and 2.67 Gbit/s or
between 622 Mbit/s
and 2.67 Gbit/s
2G1
1.062 Gbit/s, 1.250

Gbit/s and 2.125
Gbit/s
CL
supports 1G Coupling
Link
FE
125 Mbit/s only
GbE
1.250 Gbit/s
HS
1.062 Gbit/s and

1.250 Gbit/s
OTN
supports OTU2e
services
Meaning
General Information
Parts of the
Name
Code
Meaning
Wavelengths
850
850 nm
1310
1310 nm
1550
1550 nm unspecified (wide band,

grey,...)
C1270, C1290,
C1310, C1330,
C1350, C1370,
C1390, C1410,
C1430, C1450,
C1470, C1490,
C1510, C1530,
C1550, C1570,
C1590, C1610,
Cxxxx
DWDM channel
CWDM wavelengths acc. to ITU-T

G694.2:
1271 nm, 1291 nm, 1311 nm, 1331 nm,
1351 nm, 1371 nm, 1391 nm, 1411 nm,
1431 nm, 1451 nm,
1471 nm, 1491 nm, 1511 nm, 1531 nm,
1551 nm, 1571 nm, 1591 nm, 1611 nm
BCxxxx
bidirectional communication of CWDM

wavelengths over one single-mode fiber
#19600 to
#18700;
#xxxxx
DWDM frequencies acc. to ITU-T

G694.1,
100 GHz grid compatible
#D1528.77
DWDM wavelength of the OSC acc. to

ITU-T G694.1, 100 GHz grid compatible
#D01 to #D64;
#Dxx;
DWDM channels acc. to FSP 3000R7

wavelength table
#DC
DWDM C-band channels acc. to ITU-T

G694.1, 100 GHz grid compatible
#DCTC
tunable DWDM C-band channels acc. to

ITU-T G694.1, 50 GHz grid compatible,
coherent detection
DCT
tunable network interface for DWDM Cband channels according to ITU-T

G694.1, 50 GHz grid compatible
553
General Information
Parts of the
Name
Code
Meaning
Link distance
performances
0 km to 5 km (0 mi. to 3.1 mi.)
5 km to 30 km (3.1 mi. to 18.6 mi.)
30 km to 70 km (18.6 mi. to 43.4 mi.)
SRx
S = short reach for distances of 100 m

(OM3) and 150 m (OM4)
Rx = refers to 100 GbE support;
100GBASE-LR type; indicates the
number of optical lanes
LRx
L = long reach for distances of 10 km

(6.21 mi.)
LRxR
L = long reach for distances of 2 km

(1.242 mi.)
R= reduced set of technical data
LN
noise optimized, long reach link

distances (30 km - 70 km)
LNR
noise optimized, long reach link

distances (30 km - 70 km), reduced set
of technical data
70 km to 120 km (43.4 mi. to 74.4 mi.)
120 km to 240 km (74.4 mi. to 148.8 mi.)
160 km to 220 km (99.36 mi. to 136.62

mi.)
240 km to 360 km (148.8 mi. to 223.2

mi.)
360 km to 600 km (223.2 mi. to 372.0

mi.)
SM
single-mode fiber G. 652
MM 50
MM 62
multimode fiber 50 m, G. 651

multimode fiber 62.5 m, G. 651
Type of optical
fiber
554
General Information
Parts of the
Name
Code
Meaning
Connector type
LC
LC/PC
MPO
MPO24
RJ
RJ-45 (electrical connector)
DIN
DIN1.0/2.3 (electrical connector)
HBNC
high-density (HD) BNC (electrical

connector)
555

To support a wide range of applications, the FSP 3000R7 uses a whole set of pluggable
transceiver types. Table 70 andTable 71 on p.565list all pluggable transceiver types and
variants used by the FSP 3000R7 channel modules and the OSCM-PN. Each listed
pluggable transceivers is approved and released by ADVA Optical Networking.
Table 70: Overview of Pluggable Optical Transceivers
Transceiver Variants
Description*
8G XFP Short-wavelength (850 nm)

XFP/8G/850I/SM/LC
Multi-rate XFP transceiver for bidirectional communication over

single-mode fiber of 4.25 Gbit/s and 8.5 Gbit/s data rates;
nominal wavelength of 850 nm; intra office reach
8G XFP Long-wavelength (1310 nm)

XFP/8G/1310S/SM/LC

single-mode fiber of 4.25 Gbit/s and 8.5 Gbit/s data rates;
nominal wavelength of 1310 nm; standard reach
8G XFP DWDM (100 GHz wavelength grid)

XFP/8G/#xxxxxL/SM/LC#Dxx
Multi-rate DWDM XFP transceiver for bidirectional

communication over single-mode fiber of 4.25 Gbit/s and 8.5
Gbit/s data rates; long reach
8G XFP CWDM
XFP/8G/CxxxxL/SM/LC
Multi-rate CWDM XFP transceiver for bidirectional

communication over single-mode fiber of 4.25 Gbit/s and 8.5
Gbit/s data rates; long reach
10G XFP Short-wavelength (850 nm)

XFP/10G/850I/MM/LC
Multi-rate 10G XFP transceiver for bidirectional communication

over multimode fiber;
nominal wavelength of 850 nm, intra office reach
XFP/10G-2R/850I/MM/LC
Unclocked/transparent multi-rate XFP transceiver for

bidirectional communication over single-mode fiber up to
10Gbit/s data rates; nominal wavelength of 850 nm, intra office
reach

XFP/10G/1310S/SM/LC

over single-mode fiber;
nominal wavelength 1310 nm, standard reach
XFP/10G-2R/1310S/SM/LC
Unclocked/transparent multi-rate XFP transceiver for

bidirectional communication over single-mode fiber up to
10Gbit/s data rates; nominal wavelength of 1310 nm, standard
reach
556

Description*
10G XFP Wide band (1550 nm)

XFP/10G/1550L/SM/LC

over single-mode fiber;
nominal wavelength of 1550 nm, long reach

XFP/11G/1310S/SM/LC

single-mode fiber up to 11.3 Gbit/s data rate; nominal wavelength
of 1310 nm, standard reach
11G XFP Wide band (1550 nm)

XFP/11G/1550L/SM/LC

single-mode fiber up to 11.3 Gbit/s data rate; nominal wavelength
of 1550 nm, long reach

XFP/11G/Dxxxx.xxV/SM/LC#Dxx

communication over single-mode fiber up to 11.3 Gbit/s data
rate; very long reach
XFP/OTN11G/#19xxxV/SM/LC

communication over single-mode fiber for data rate of 11.0957
Gbit/s; very long reach in the C band; supports OTU2e services
according to ITU-T G.709 to enable GFEC

XFP/11G/DCTV/SM/LC

rate; tunable C-band network interface; very long reach
XFP/11G/DCTLNR/SM/LC

communication over single-mode fiber from 9.953 Gbit/s up to
11.3 Gbit/s data rate; long reach tunable in the C-band; low noise
optimized, suitable for links with a large amount of amplifiers and
low OSNR with slightly reduced set of technical data compared
to other module specifications also optimized for OSNR
XFP/11G/DCTLN/SM/LC

communication over single-mode fiber from 9.953 Gbit/s up to
11.3 Gbit/s data rates; long reach tunable in the C-band; low
noise optimized, suitable for links with a large amount of
amplifiers and low OSNR
11G XFP CWDM

XFP/11G/CxxxxL/SM/LC

rate; long reach
557

Description*
XFP/11G/CxxxxV/SM/LC

rate; very long reach

XFP/16GFC/#xxxxxL/SM/LC#Dxx

communication over single-mode fiber at data rates of 4.25
Gbit/s, 8.5 Gbit/s and 14.025 Gbit/s; supports 41 C-band
channels in a 100 GHz channel grid acc. to ITU-T G.694.1; long
reach
2G5U SFP Long-wavelength (1310 nm)

SFP/2G5U/1310S/SM/LC
Multi-rate SFP transceiver for bidirectional communication over

single-mode fiber; maximum data rate of 2.67Gbit/s; nominal
wavelength of 1310 nm; standard reach
SFP/2G5U/1310L/SM/LC

single-mode fiber; maximum data rate of 2.67Gbit/s; nominal
wavelength of 1310 nm; long reach
2G5 SFP DWDM (100 GHz wavelength grid)

SFP/2G5U/Dxxxx.xxU/SM/LC#Dxx
Multi-rate DWDM SFP transceiver for bidirectional

communication over single-mode fiber; maximum data rate of
2.67Gbit/s; 82 channels in the C and L band (ITU-T G.694.1
wavelengths); ultra long reach
2G5 SFP CWDM

SFP/2G5U/CxxxxV/SM/LC
(wavelengths range of 1271 nm to 1451
nm)
Multi-rate CWDM SFP transceiver for bidirectional

communication over single-mode fiber; data rates from 622
Mbit/s to 2.67Gbit/s; 8 channels according to ITU-T G.694.2;
very long reach
(wavelengths range of 1471 nm to 1611
nm)

communication over single-mode fiber; data rates from 100
Mbit/s to 2.67Gbit/s; 8 channels according to ITU-T G.694.2;
very long reach
SFP/2G5U/CxxxxL/SM/LC

communication over single-mode fiber; maximum data rate of
2.67Gbit/s; 8 channels according to ITU-T G.694.2; long reach
4G SFP Short-wavelength (850 nm)

SFP/4GU/850I/MM/LC

multimode fiber up to 4.250 Gbit/s data rate; nominal wavelength
of 850 nm; intra office reach
4G SFP Long-wavelength (1310 nm)
558

Description*
SFP/4GU/1310S/SM/LC

single-mode fiber up to 4.250 Gbit/s data rate; nominal
wavelength of 1310 nm; standard reach
4G SFP DWDM (100 GHz wavelength grid)

SFP/4GU/Dxxxx.xxV/SM/LC#Dxx

rate; ITU-T G.694 wavelengths across the C and Lband; very
long reach
4G SFP CWDM
SFP/4GU/CxxxxV/SM/LC

rate; ITU-T G.694.2 wavelengths; very long reach
SFP/4GU/CxxxxL/SM/LC

rate; ITU-T G.694.2 wavelengths; long reach
8G SFP+ Short-wavelength (850 nm)

SFP+/8GU/850I/MM/LC
Multi-rate SFP+ transceiver bidirectional communication over

multimode fiber; data rates between 2.125 Gbit/s, 4.25 Gbit/s
and 8.5 Gbit/s; nominal wavelength of
850 nm; standard reach
8G SFP+ Long-wavelength (1310 nm)

SFP+/8GU/1310S/SM/LC

single-mode fiber; data rates between 2.125 Gbit/s, 4.25 Gbit/s
and 8.5 Gbit/s; nominal wavelength of
10G SFP+ Short-wavelength (850 nm)

SFP+/10G/850I/MM/LC

multimode fiber; data rates of up to 10.51875 Gbit/s; nominal
wavelength of 850 nm; intra office reach
SFP+CDR/10GU/850I/MM/LC

multimode fiber; data rates of 8.5 Gbit/s and 10.3125 Gbit/s;
nominal wavelength of 850 nm; standard reach; supports clock
and data recovery

SFP+/10G/1310S/SM/LC

single-mode fiber; data rates of up to
10.51875 Gbit/s; nominal wavelength of 1310 nm; standard reach
559

Description*
SFP+CDR/10GU/1550L/SM/LC

multimode fiber; data rates between 8.5 Gbit/s and 10.3125
Gbit/s; nominal wavelength of 1550 nm; long reach; supports
clock and data recovery

SFP+CDR/11GU/1310S/SM/LC

single-mode fiber; data rates between 8.5 Gbit/s and 11.3176
Gbit/s; nominal wavelength of 1310 nm; standard reach;
supports clock and data recovery
11G SFP+ CWDM

SFP+/11GU/CxxxxL/SM/LC

communication over single-mode fiber, data rates from 8.5 Gbit/s
to 11.3176 Gbit/s; ITU-T G.694.2 wavelengths; long reach
SFP+/11GU/CxxxxV/SM/LC

communication over single-mode fiber, data rates from 5.0 Gbit/s
to 11.3176 Gbit/s; ITU-T G.694.2 wavelengths; very long reach
SFP+CDR/11GU/CxxxxL/SM/LC
Multi-rate SFP+ transceiver module with integrated clock and

data recovery (CDR) for bidirectional optical communication
applications over single-mode (SM) fiber; data rates between 8.5
Gbit/s and 11.3176 Gbit/s; 8 red CWDM wavelengths according
to ITU-T G.694.2; long reach; duplex LC connector
SFP+CDR/11GU/CxxxxS/SM/LC
Multi-rate SFP+ transceiver module with integrated clock and

data recovery (CDR) for bidirectional optical communication
applications over single-mode (SM) fiber; data rates between 8.5
Gbit/s and 11.3176 Gbit/s; 4 blue CWDM wavelengths according
to ITU-T G.694.2; short reach; duplex LC connector
11G SFP+ DWDM (100 GHz wavelength grid)

SFP+CDR/11GU/#19xxxV/SM/LC
Multi-rate SFP+ transceiver with integrated clock and data

recovery (CDR) for bidirectional optical communication
applications over single mode (SM) fiber; data rates between 8.5
Gbit/s and 11.3176 Gbit/s; 100 GHz DWDM wavelengths
according to ITU-T G.694.1, very long reach

SFP+/11GU/#19xxxL50/SM/LC
Multi-rate 11G DWDM SFP+ transceiver for bidirectional

communication over single-mode fiber at data rates from 8.5
Gbit/s up to 11.3 Gbit/s; supports 96 C-band channels in a 50
GHz wavelength grid acc. to ITU-T G.694.1; long reach
560

Description*
SFP+/11GU/DCTV/SM/LC
Multi-rate 11G DWDM SFP+ transceiver for bidirectional

Gbit/s up to 11.3 Gbit/s; supports 96 tunable C-band channels in
a 50 GHz wavelength grid acc. to ITU-T G.694.1; very long reach
16G FC SFP+ Short-wavelength (850 nm)

SFP+/16GFC/850I/MM/LC

single-mode fiber; data rates of 8.5 Gbit/s and 14.025 Gbit/s;
nominal wavelength of 850 nm; intra office reach
16G FC SFP+ Long-wavelength (1310 nm)

SFP+/16GFC/1310S/SM/LC

single-mode fiber; data rates of 4.25 Gbit/s,
8.5 Gbit/s and 14.025 Gbit/s; nominal wavelength of 1310 nm;
standard reach
16G FC SFP+ DWDM (50 GHz wavelength grid)

SFP+/16GFC/#19xxxL50/SM/LC
Multi-rate DWDM SFP+ transceiver for bidirectional

Gbit/s up to 14.025 Gbit/s; supports 96 C-band channels in a 50
GHz wavelength grid acc. to ITU-T G.694.1; long reach
Optojack SFP Long-wavelength (1310 nm)

SFP-OJDE/GBE/1310S/SM/LC
SFP transceiver for bidirectional communication over singlemode with integrated dual-ended Optojack communication
channel; data rate of 1.25Gbit/s only; nominal wavelength of
Optojack SFP CWDM

SFP-OJDE/GBE/CxxxxV/SM/LC
SFP transceiver for bidirectional communication over singlemode fiber with integrated dual-ended Optojack communication
channel; data rate of 1.25Gbit/s only; 8 channels according to
ITU-T G.694.2; very long reach
3G-SDI SFP Long-wavelength (1310 nm)

Multi-rate SFP dual transmitter module for unidirectional

communication over two single-mode fibers; used as client
interface for transmission of digital audio, DVB-ASI, SD-SDI,
HD-SDI, and 3G-SDI video signals; nominal wavelength of 1310
nm; standard reach
Multi-rate SFP dual receiver module for unidirectional

communication over two single-mode fibers; used as client
interface for reception of digital audio, DVB-ASI, SD-SDI, HDSDI, and 3G-SDI video signals; nominal wavelength of 1310 nm;
standard reach
561

Description*
3G-SDI SFP DWDM

SFP/3GSDI/#xxxxxV/SM/LC

communication over single-mode fiber; is used for transmission
of video signals on the client and network ports; supports data
rates of 270 Mbit/s, 360 Mbit/s, 1.485 Gbit/s and 2.97 Gbit/s;
ITU-T G.694.1 wavelengths across the C band; very long reach
HS SFP Long-wavelength (1310 nm)

SFP/HS/1310S/SM/LC

single-mode fiber; data rates of 1.0625 Gbit/s and 1.25Gbit/s;
nominal wavelength of 1310 nm; standard reach
Coupling Link SFP Long-wavelength (1310 nm)

SFP/CL/1310I/SM/LC

single-mode or multimode fiber; maximum data rate of
2.67Gbit/s; support of 1 Gbit/s Coupling Link; nominal
2G1 SFP Short-wavelength (850 nm)

SFP/2G1/850I/MM/LC

multimode fiber; maximum data rate of 2.125Gbit/s; nominal
3GU SFP CWDM for bidirectional communication over one single-mode fiber operating within
industrial temperature range (TIN)
SFP/3GU/BCxxxxL/SM/LC/TIN

one single-mode fiber; is transmitting a wavelength and receiving
a wavelength on complementary bidirectional transceiver
variants but relative to the nominal CWDM wavelength, data
rates of 2.125 Gbit/s, 2.4576 Gbit/s, 2.488 Gbit/s, 3.072 Gbit/s;
long reach; designed for industrial temperature range (-40C ...
+85C)
GBE SFP Short-wavelength (850 nm) operating within industrial temperature range (TIN)
SFP/GBE/850I/MM/LC/TIN
SFP transceiver for bidirectional communication over multi mode

fiber for Gbit Ethernet (data rate of 1.25 Gbit/s only); nominal
wavelength of 850 nm; intra office reach; designed for industrial
temperature range (-40C ... +85C)
GBE SFP Long-wavelength (1310 nm) operating within industrial temperature range (TIN)
SFP/GBE/1310S/SM/LC/TIN
562
SFP transceiver for bidirectional communication over singlemode fiber for Gbit Ethernet (data rate of 1.25 Gbit/s only);
nominal wavelength of 1310 nm; standard reach; designed for
industrial temperature range (-40C ... +85C)

Description*
SFP/GBE/1310L/SM/LC/TIN
nominal wavelength of 1310 nm; long reach; designed for
GBE SFP Wide band (1510 nm) operating within industrial temperature range (TIN)
SFP/GBE/1550V/SM/LC/TIN
nominal wavelength of 1510 nm; very long reach; designed for
FE SFP CWDM
SFP/FE/C1490V/SM/LC
CWDM SFP transceiver for bidirectional communication over

single-mode fiber; channel 1490; data rate of 125Mbit/s only;
very long reach
SFP/FE/C1490U/SM/LC

ultra long reach
SFP/FE/C1510U/SM/LC

ultra long reach
SFP/FE/C1510V/SM/LC

single-mode fiber; channel 1510; data rate of
125 Mbit/s only; very long reach
FE SFP OSC DWDM

SFP/FE/D1528.77E/SM/LC
DWDM SFP transceiver for bidirectional communication over

single-mode fiber; support of 1528.77 nm wavelength in the Cband according to ITU-T G.694.1 (be used as OSC wavelength in
Raman amplified systems); data rate of 125Mbit/s only;
extended reach
SFP/FE/Dxxxx.xxV/SM/LC
DWDM SFP transceiver for bidirectional communication over

single-mode fiber; support of 1531.12 nm or 1531.90 nm
wavelength in the C-band according to ITU-T G.694.1 (be used
as OSC wavelength in EDFA amplified systems); data rate of
125Mbit/s only; very long reach
103 CFP
CFP/103G/SR10/MM/MPO
Multi-rate CFP transceiver for bidirectional communication over

multimode fiber; used to transmit high speed data rate of 103.125
Gbit/s; offers ten optical transmit and receive channels
supporting wavelengths from 840 nm to 860 nm; date rate of 10.3
Gbit/s per lane; provides parallel multimode fiber connection per
optical lane through a single MPO24 port
563

Description*
112G CFP
CFP/112G/SR10/MM/MPO

multimode fiber; used to transmit high speed data rates of
103.125 Gbit/s and 111.81 Gbit/s; offers ten optical transmit and
receive channels supporting wavelengths from 840 nm to 860
nm; date rate of 10.3 Gbit/s or 11.18 Gbit/s per lane; provides
parallel multimode fiber connection per optical lane through a
single MPO24 port
CFP/112G/LR10R/SM/LC

single-mode fiber; integrated MUX and DEMUX filter for
transmitting data signal divided into ten optical lanes supporting
wavelengths of 1523 nm, 1531 nm, 1539 nm, 1547 nm, 1555 nm,
1563 nm,
1571 nm, 1579 nm, 1587 nm, 1595 nm; data rates of 103.125
Gbit/s (10 x 10.3125 Gbit/s) and 111.81 Gbit/s (10 x 10.709
Gbit/s), intended for the use in CFP cages on client ports, long
reach; with slightly reduced set of technical data
CFP/112G/LR4/SM/LC

single-mode fiber; integrated MUX and DEMUX filter for
transmitting data signal divided into four optical lanes supporting
wavelengths of 1295.56 nm, 1300.05 nm, 1304.58 nm, 1309.14
nm; data rates of 103.125 Gbit/s (4 x 25.78 Gbit/s) and 111.81
Gbit/s (4 x 27.95 Gbit/s), intended for the use in CFP cages on
client ports, long reach
CFP/112G/#DCTC/SM/LC
Coherent CFP transceiver for bidirectional communication over

single-mode fiber; used to transmit high speed data rate of
120.579 Gbit/s (includes 15% overhead due to SD-FEC);
supports 100G DP-QPSK modulation in conjunction with
coherent detection; DWDM C-band channels tunable within the
50 GHz grid; built-in FEC functionality and compensation for
chromatic and polarization mode dispersion; intended for the use
in channel module CFP cages on network ports; very long reach
564

Description*
CFP/4x28G/#19xxx-#19xxxL/SM/LC

single-mode fiber; long reach; data signal is divided into four
optical lanes supporting DWDM wavelengths in a frequency
range of 195.95 THz to 192.00 THz; available in five variants:
CFP/4x28G/#19595-#19520L/SM/LC
CFP/4x28G/#19515-#19440L/SM/LC
CFP/4x28G/#19435-#19360L/SM/LC
CFP/4x28G/#19355-#19280L/SM/LC
CFP/4x28G/#19275-#19200L/SM/LC
Each variant supports fixed channel spacing at 100 GHz

between the optical lanes; lanes can be tuned as a block to four
different nominal frequencies in a 50 GHz, 400 GHz or 450 GHz
offset grid; data rate of 27.95 Gbit/s per lane; tuning is performed
by setting the frequency of the first optical lane in the system
management using the NE management tools
CFP/4x28G/#19xxx-#19xxxLR/SM/LC

range of 196.00 THz to 191.55 THz; each of the 24 variants
support four optical lanes with fixed frequencies of a 50 GHz
channel grid; data rate of 27.95 Gbit/s per lane
CFP/4x28G/#DCTL/SM/LC

range of 196.00 THz to 191.25 THz; supports fixed channel
spacing at 100 GHz between the optical lanes; lanes can be
tuned as a block to 90 different nominal frequencies in a 50 GHz
channel grid; max. data rate of 27.95 Gbit/s per lane; tuning is
performed by setting the frequency of the first optical lane in the
system management using the NE management tools
* For more information about data rates of the pluggable transceivers refer to Table 69 on p.550.
Table 71: Overview of Pluggable Electrical Transceivers, Dual Transmitters and Dual Receivers
SFP Electrical GbE Transceiver (available in 1000Base-T IEEE 802.3ab)
SFP transceiver for electrical Gigabit Ethernet; data rate of

1000Base- T IEEE 802.3ab
SFP Electrical 3G-SDI Transceivers

SFP/3GSDI/ELECTRICALl/DIN
Multi-rate electrical SFP transceiver equipped with an

DIN1.0/2.3 interface, is used for transmission of video
signals with dates rates of 270 Mbit/s, 360 Mbit/s, 1.485
Gbit/s and 2.97 Gbit/s on the client ports
565

Table 71: Overview of Pluggable Electrical Transceivers, Dual Transmitters and Dual Receivers
Multi-rate electrical SFP transceiver equipped with an highdensity BNC interface, is used for transmission of video
signals with dates rates of 270 Mbit/s, 360 Mbit/s, 1.485
Gbit/s and 2.97 Gbit/s on the client ports
SFP Electrical 3G-SDI Dual Transmitter and Dual Receiver

Multi-rate electrical SFP dual transmitter module designed

to transmit two SDI signals up to 2.97 Gbit/s over two 75Ohm coaxial cables using two high-density BNC (HDBNC) connectors; supports MADI audio, DVB-ASI, SDSDI, HD-SDI, and 3G-SDI video services on the client
ports.
Multi-rate electrical SFP dual receiver module designed to

receive two SDI signals up to 2.97 Gbit/s over two 75-Ohm
coaxial cables using two high-density BNC (HD-BNC)
connectors; supports MADI audio, DVB-ASI, SD-SDI, HDSDI and 3G-SDI video services on the client ports.
Handling
Labeling
Each approved pluggable transceiver is clearly labeled by ADVA Optical Networking as
shown in Figure 320 on p.570. In addition, there may be labels from the manufacturer on
the narrow side.
Transceiver Type Label

The transceiver type label from ADVA Optical Networking is attached to the top of each
pluggable transceiver. The label illustrated in Figure 315 displays the transceiver type and
other relevant information as an example of DWDM and CWDM SFP/SFP+/XFP
transceivers.
Figure 315: Example of a DWDM SFP Transceiver Type Label
An example of an electrical SFP transceiver type label is shown in Figure 316. This label
is slightly different from the other SFP labels as there is no wavelength, distance
performance or channel number:
566

Figure 316: Example of an Electrical SFP Transceiver Type Label
Figure 317 shows an example of a CFP transceiver type label which contains information
needed to identify the CFP type based on the given information.
Figure 317: Example of an CFP Transceiver Type Label
Bar Code Label

Each SFP and XFP transceiver can be identified by the bar code label that is specifically
from ADVA Optical Networking. The label is on the narrow side of the device as can be
seen in Figure 320 and Figure 322 on p.571. This label contains the bar code and item
number corresponding to it.
Cardboard Box Labeling

The cardboard box in which the pluggable transceiver is shipped has two labels as shown
in Figure 318 and Figure 319 on p.568.
Package Label
the name of the transceiver
567
technical specifications (wavelength and data rates)
the figo Number and its bar code
Figure 318: Example of a Package Label (SFP/2G5U/Dxxxx.xxU/SM/LC#Dxx)
Certification Label
This label provides approved certification marks.
Figure 319: Example of a Certification Label (SFP/2G5U/Dxxxx.xxU/SM/LC#Dxx)
568

A pluggable fiber-optic transceiver is a compact, hot-swappable device that performs
both transmitting and receiving functions in full duplex in the same package. It includes
optical transmitter and receiver pairs (pair number depends on the transceiver type) with
or without clock and data recovery integrated circuit. SFP transceivers physically fit in
any cage of an SFP-based channel module, XFP transceivers in any cage of an XFPbased channel module and CFP transceivers in any cage of a CFP-based channel
module.
If a fiber-optic transceiver is installed and configured, it receives optical signals from the
client equipment or network fiber at the wavelength specific for the transceiver. Then it
performs optical to electrical conversion and transfers the electrical signals to the
relevant circuits on the board for further processing and transmission. Conversely, the
fiber-optic transceiver receives electrical signals from the relevant circuits and performs
electrical to optical conversion. Then it transmits the optical signals at the wavelength
specific for the transceiver over optical fibers to the client or network interfaces.
The fiber-optic transceivers are listed in Table 70 on p.556.
For the supported data rates and protocols of each fiber-optic transceiver refer to the
Features
The main features of pluggable fiber-optic transceivers are as follows:
Class 1 Laser safety compliance
Low EMI metallic enclosure
Uncooled or cooled laser transmitter (depending on the type)
Transmit disable and loss-of signal functions
Multi-rate capabilities
Multi-protocol compliancy
Very low jitter
Low power dissipation
EEPROM of each fiber-optic transceiver includes information about the transceiver

itself (vendor code, wavelength, data rates and other relevant factory parameters) as
well as information specifically from ADVA Optical Networking (device code, serial
number, etc.). The user can query the transceiver to make sure it is the right one for
the intended application.
On board digital diagnostics that provide remote monitoring capability
Measurements and real-time monitoring of:

o
o
o
o
o
Tx bias current (analog) [mA]

Rx optical input power (analog) [dBm]
Tx optical output power (analog) [dBm]
Transceiver temperature (analog) [C]
Transceiver supply voltage (analog) [mV]
569

Examples of SFP transceivers, SFP+ transceivers, XFP transceivers and CFP
transceivers used for client or network interfaces are shown in Figure 320, Figure 321,
Figure 322, Figure 323 and Figure 324.
Figure 320: Example of an SFP Transceiver (SFP/2G1/850I/MM/LC)
Figure 321: Example of a DWDM SFP Transceiver
570

Figure 322: Example of an SFP+ Transceiver (SFP+/10G/850I/MM/LC)
Figure 323: Example of an XFP Transceiver (XFP/10G/1310S/SM/LC)
Figure 324: Example of a CFP/112G/LR4/SM/LC and CFP/112G/LR10R/SM/LC
571

Figure 325: Example of a CFP/4x28G/#19275-#19200L/SM/LC
The design of the latching mechanism and dust cover may differ on other fiber-optic
transceivers.
Color Code
For easy and quick identification, the bale-clasp of an SFP/SFP+/XFP transceiver
provides a coloured sleeve. A blue sleeve indicates a long-wavelength (1310 nm)
transceiver and black sleeve points to a short-wavelength (850 nm) transceiver. See also
Figure 320, Figure 322 and Figure 323 on p.571. The bale-clasps of CWDM SFP
transceivers have sleeves colored green, red, orange etc. Each color represents a
specific CWDM wavelength (channel). The DWDM SFP transceivers have non-colored
sleeves and no other colored markings as shown in Figure 321. The CFP transceivers
have no bale-clasps and colored markings as shown in Figure 324.
Optical Connectors
Depending on the fiber-optic transceiver type each pluggable transceiver has an LC type
or MPO24 type connector. Both types are receive (Rx) and transmit (Tx) connectors that
make up one optical interface. Each fiber-optic transceiver is supplied with a dust cover
for protection of the optical ports and for optimization of EMI performance.
The dust cover should be left in to prevent contamination of the optical connectors
when not in use or during handling, shipping and storage of the transceiver.
Management and Control

Information about the pluggable fiber-optic transceiver itself, the operating status and
network operating conditions can be obtained using the management software.
The the equipment type names of the individual pluggable fiber-optic transceivers used
by the management software can be found in Equipment Types of FSP 3000R7
Hardware Components of this documentation.
572
Application Notes
To prevent system problems use only pluggable transceivers approved by ADVA Optical
Networking that are intended for installation into SFP/SFP+/XFP/CFP MSA compliant
FSP 3000R7 channel module and management module interfaces.
CAUTION
The use of pluggable fiber-optic transceivers other than those approved

by ADVA Optical Networking will result in loss of laser safety approval
for the respective channel module and entire system.
FSP 3000R7 pluggables-based channel modules and management modules only

accept fiber-optic transceivers specifically designed for the FSP 3000R7 and
approved by ADVA Optical Networking. These are modules identify any FSP
3000R7 transceiver by means of specific information about ADVA Optical
Networking in the EEPROM. Non-approved pluggable transceivers are inaccessible
and cannot be provisioned.
A disallowed configuration, mismatch, non-acceptance or missing of pluggable

transceivers will be reported by:
o
o
an alarm which is generated and logged by the management

SNMP traps.
These situations are also indicated by the corresponding port LEDs of the channel
module.
Specifications
573

The optojack technology is based on adding monitoring and diagnostic capabilities to
pluggable transceivers.
Optojack provides link demarcation between two SFPs via a separately modulated
embedded management channel (ECC). In order to allow for simple loops switching a
signal cross point switch for the data path is integrated.
Supported optojack transceivers are listed in Table 70.
Optojack DE Features
Operates in two modes

o
o
smart mode with communication channel turned on

free-running mode with communication channel turned off
Compatible with 1000Base-LX Ethernet standard (IEEE standard 802.3ah)
Optical-Layer management channel
Far-end SFP data available at near end
Facility loopback
Terminal loopback
Possibility to inhibit configurations triggered from the near end and far end
Optical dying gasp (The equipment power supply is monitored. When power failure
is imminent, the SFP will generate and send out a Dying Gasp signal promptly.)
EEPROM of each optojack DE transceiver includes information about the

transceiver itself (vendor code, wavelength, data rates and other relevant factory
parameters) as well as information specifically from ADVA Optical Networking
(device code, serial number, etc.). The user can query the transceiver to make sure it
is the right one for the intended application.
Figure 326: Example of an Optojack Transceiver
574
Color Code
For easy and quick identification, the bale-clasp of CWDM optojack transceivers
provides a coloured sleeve. A blue sleeve indicates a long-wavelength (1550 nm)
transceiver and black sleeve points to a short-wave-length (850 nm) transceiver. See
also Figure 326. The bale-clasps of CWDM optojack transceivers have colored sleeves
as well. Each color e.g. green, red, orange etc. represents a specific CWDM wavelength
(channel).
Management
Information about an optojack transceiver itself, the operating status and network
operating conditions can be obtained using the management software. The the equipment
type name of each optojack Transceiver used by the management software can be found
in Appendix12: Equipment Types of FSP 3000R7 Hardware Components of this
documentation.
Application Notes
To prevent system problems use only pluggable transceivers approved by ADVA

Optical Networking that are intended for installation into SFP MSA compliant FSP
3000R7 channel module interfaces.
CAUTION
The use of pluggable fiber-optic transceivers other than those approved

by ADVA Optical Networking will result in loss of laser safety approval
for the respective channel module and entire system.
FSP 3000R7 pluggables-based channel modules only accept optojack transceivers

specifically designed for the FSP 3000R7 and approved by ADVA Optical
Networking. These are modules identify any FSP 3000R7 transceiver by means of
specific information about ADVA Optical Networking in the EEPROM. Non-approved
pluggable transceivers are inaccessible and cannot be provisioned.
A disallowed configuration, mismatch, non-acceptance or missing of optojack

transceivers will be reported by:
o
o

SNMP traps.
These situations are also indicated by the corresponding port LEDs of the channel
module.
Specifications
575
3G-SDI SFP Optical Dual Transmitters and Dual

Receivers
FSP 3000R7 provides 3GSDI SFP fiber-optic dual transmitter and SFP fiber-optic dual
receiver modules for multi-format video transport on two single-mode fibers as a
complement to the existing SFP/3GSDI/#xxxxxV/SM/LC in order to more closely meet
the requirements for broadcast and media environments. These types of 3GSDI SFP
fiber-optic dual transmitter and 3GSDI SFP fiber-optic dual receiver modules are currently
available:
The SFP-2TX/3GSDI/1310S/SM/LC is an SFP fiber-optic dual transmitter module
designed to transmit two SDI signals up to 2.97 Gbit/s over two single-mode fibers and
convert electrical serial digital signals to optical serial digital signals. It is a compact, hotswappable device that only performs transmitting functions. The module contains two
independent 1310-nm laser transmitters in the same package which are mated to the dual
Tx ports of the fiber-optic LC duplex receptacle. Mechanical dimension is compliant with
SFP MSA standard, but the pinout of the host connector is not compatible with MSA
standard pinning.
Use the SFP-2TX/3GSDI/1310S/SM/LC only in conjunction with the 10TCC-PCN3GSDI+10G module. Other modules are not capable of auto-detecting the SFP2TX/3GSDI/1310S/SM/LC and could destroy this plug and damage themselves.
Figure 327 depicts the SFP-2TX/3GSDI/1310S/SM/LC module.
576

Figure 327: SFP-2TX/3GSDI/1310S/SM/LC
Data rates in the range between 125 Mbit/s and 2.97 Gbit/s are supported. The
appropriate data rate has to be selected using the management software. The SFP2TX/3GSDI/1310S/SM/LC provides module identification information and diagnostic
monitoring through a 2 wire serial interface, providing the ability to read the temperature.
EEPROM of SFP fiber-optic dual transmitter includes information about the module itself
(vendor code, data rates, and other relevant factory parameters), as well as information
specifically from ADVA Optical Networking (device code, serial number, etc.). The user
can query the SFP-2TX/3GSDI/1310S/SM/LC module to make sure it is the right one for
Features:
Class I laser safety compliance per international IEC-60825 standards
LC duplex connector
Fiber type: single-mode fiber
Wavelength: 1310 nm
Multirate from 125 Mbit/s to 2.97 Gbit/s
SMPTE 424M, SMPTE 344M, SMPTE 292M, and SMPTE 259M compliant
Supports DVB-ASI at 270 Mbit/s
Supports MADI at 125 Mbit/s
Supports SD-SDI, HD-SDI and 3G-SDI
577
Hot-pluggable
Low power consumption
Single power supply voltage: +3.3 V
Metal package for lower EMI
Form factor: SFP
Stacked cages mounting supported
Lead-free and RoHS compliant
The SFP-2RX/3GSDI/1310S/SM/LC is an SFP fiber-optic dual receiver module designed
to receive two SDI signals up to 2.97 Gbit/s over two single-mode fibers and convert
optical serial digital signals to electrical serial digital signals. It is a compact, hotswappable device that only performs receiving functions. The module contains two
independent 1310-nm PIN photodiode receivers in the same package which are mated to
the dual Rx ports of the fiber-optic LC duplex receptacle. Mechanical dimension is
compliant with SFP MSA standard, but the pinout of the host connector is not compatible
with MSA standard pinning.
Use the SFP-2RX/3GSDI/1310S/SM/LC only in conjunction with the 10TCC-PCN3GSDI+10G module. Other modules are not capable of auto-detecting the SFP2RX/3GSDI/1310S/SM/LC and could destroy this plug and damage themselves.
Figure 328 on p.579 depicts the SFP-2RX/3GSDI/1310S/SM/LC module.
578

Figure 328: SFP-2RX/3GSDI/1310S/SM/LC
appropriate data rate has to be selected using the management software. The SFP2RX/3GSDI/1310S/SM/LC provides module identification information and diagnostic
monitoring through a 2 wire serial interface, providing the ability to read the temperature
and the loss of signal status for both inputs. EEPROM of SFP fiber-optic dual receiver
includes information about the module itself (vendor code, data rates, and other relevant
factory parameters), as well as information specifically from ADVA Optical Networking
(device code, serial number, etc.). The user can query the SFP2RX/3GSDI/1310S/SM/LC module to make sure it is the right one for the intended
application.
Features:
Class I laser safety compliance per international IEC-60825 standards
LC duplex connector
Fiber type: single-mode fiber
Wavelength range: 1260 nm to 1600 nm
SMPTE 424M, SMPTE 344M, SMPTE 292M, and SMPTE 259M compliant
Supports MADI at 125 Mbit/s
Supports SD-SDI, HD-SDI, and 3G-SDI
579
Hot-pluggable
Form factor: SFP
Management
Information about an SFP fiber-optic dual transmitter or SFP fiber-optic dual receiver
itself, the operating status and network operating conditions can be obtained by using the
management software. The equipment type name of each SFP fiber-optic dual
transmitter and SFP fiber-optic dual receiver used by the management software can be
found in Appendix12: Equipment Types of FSP 3000R7 Hardware Components of this
documentation.
Application Notes
SFP fiber-optic dual transmitters and SFP fiber-optic dual receivers mentioned in this
document are intended for use with the 10TCC-PCN-3GSDI+10G module only.
Standard FSP 3000R7 channel modules are not capable of auto-detecting these
special SFP plugs.
Damage to equipment
It is strongly recommended that you do not install these special SFP plugs into SFP
MSA compliant channel module interface cages. If a 3G-SDI SFP fiber-optic dual
transmitter or receiver is inserted into another module than the 10TCC-PCN3GSDI+10G, then this plug and this channel module could be damaged.
Use only SFP fiber-optic dual transmitters and SFP fiber-optic dual receivers
Networking.
CAUTION
580
The use of SFP fiber-optic dual transmitters and SFP fiber-optic dual
receivers other than those approved by ADVA Optical Networking will
result in loss of laser safety approval for the respective channel module
and entire system.
Only the client interface cages of the 10TCC-PCN-3GSDI+10G module accepts

SFP fiber-optic dual transmitters and SFP fiber-optic dual receivers. An SFP check
is run every time such an SFP module is inserted into a cage of the 10TCC-PCN3GSDI+10GOnly SFP fiber-optic dual transmitters and SFP fiber-optic dual receivers
that pass this check are fit for use. Non-approved SFP fiber-optic dual transmitters
and SFP fiber-optic dual receivers are inaccessible and cannot be provisioned.
A disallowed configuration, mismatch, non-acceptance or missing of SFP fiber-optic

dual transmitters and SFP fiber-optic dual receivers are reported by:
o
o
an alarm which is generated and logged by the management software

SNMP traps
These situations are also indicated by the corresponding port LEDs of the 10TCC-PCN3GSDI+10G.
For more information about using the SFP fiber-optic dual transmitters and SFP fiberoptic dual receivers, see the 10TCC-PCN-3GSDI+10G module description in Chapter 3
of this manual.
Specifications
For technical details, refer to the Pluggable Transceiver Module Specification.
581

Since the client interface is sometimes a copper interface, it is useful to have a copper
connection option to the WDM system.
The SFP electrical transceiver modules as well as the 3G-SDI SFP dual transmitter and
reciver modules only plug into the SFP cage on the client side of a channel module. In
conjunction with a CWDM or DWDM SFP transceiver, both installed on the network side
of the same channel module, the electrical transceivers convert from copper to fiber, and
vice versa.
There is a limitation on installation of SFP electrical transceivers due to their physical
formats. For more information, refer Chapter 6 of the Installation and Commissioning
Manual.
SFP Electrical Gigabit Ethernet Transceiver

The SFP electrical GbE transceiver (SFP/GBE/ELECTRICAL/RJ45) provides
1000BASE-T GbE connectivity over a commonly installed copper cable S/FTP (PiMF)
CAT 6. Figure 329 depicts this transceiver.
The receiver and transmitter of the device are packaged in a die cast metal housing
delivering superior EMI and RFI performance. As can be seen in Figure 329, the front
portion of the transceiver is larger than those of fiber-optic transceivers. This is
necessary to accommodate the RJ-45 connector which integrates the magnetic coupling
circuitry required by the Ethernet physical layer specification. The host side of the
transceiver complies with the standard dimensions defined by the SFP MSA. Labeling
corresponds to that of fiber-optic transceivers.
Figure 329: SFP/GBE/ELECTRICAL/RJ45
Features
582
Fiber-port-compliant device that functions properly in any slot designed for optical
SFPs
1000 BASE-T operation
1.25 Gbit/s bi-directional data links
STP/FTP (PiMF) Cat-6 cable
Loss-of-signal functionality
No support of any analog values
Compatible with Gigabit Ethernet and 1000BASE-T standards (IEEE standard

802.3z-2000 and IEEE standard 802.3ab-1999)
Conventional RJ45 interface with built-in magnetics for optimized EMI performance.
EEPROM of each pluggable transceivers includes information about the transceiver

3G-SDI SFP Electrical Transceivers

The SFP electrical 3GSDI transceivers transmit and receive up to three video signals
SD-SDI, HD-SDI and 3G-SDI. Data rates of 270 Mbit/s, 360 Mbit/s, 1.485 Gbit/s and
2.97 Gbit/s are supported in compliance to SMPTE 424M, SMPTE 292M and SMPTE
259M standards. The appropriate data rate has to be selected using the management
software.
Electrical 3GSDI transceivers are available in following variants:
Figure 330 depicts the SFP/3GSDI/ELECTRICAL/DIN and Figure 331 shows the
SFP/3GSDI/ELECTRICAL/HBNC.
The transmitter and receiver of electrical 3G-SDI transceivers are equipped with
DIN1.0/2.3 or HD-BNC connectors and have to be installed commonly with 75 Belden
1694A coaxial cables. The host side of the transceivers complies with the standard
dimensions defined by the SFP MSA (SFF-8074 compliant). Labeling corresponds to that
of fiber-optic transceivers.
583

Figure 330: SFP/3GSDI/ELECTRICAL/DIN
584

Figure 331: SFP/3GSDI/ELECTRICAL/HBNC
Features
SFPs
Support of SD-SDI, HD-SDI and 3G-SDI video signals
DIN1.0/2.3 interface
Belden 1694A coaxial cables, 75
270 Mbit/s, 360 Mbit/s, 1.485 Gbit/s and 2.97 Gbit/s bi-directional data links
SMPTE 424M, SMPTE 292M and SMPTE 259M compliant
Hot pluggable

585
SFPs
Support of SD-SDI, HD-SDI and 3G-SDI video signals
HD-BNC (high-density BNC) interface
Belden 1694A coaxial cables, 75
270 Mbit/s, 360 Mbit/s, 1.485 Gbit/s and 2.97 Gbit/s bi-directional data links
SMPTE 424M, SMPTE 292M and SMPTE 259M compliant
Hot pluggable

Management
Information about the pluggable electrical transceiver modules itself, the operating status
and network operating conditions can be obtained using the management software. The
equipment type names of the pluggable electrical transceiver modules used by the
Components of this documentation.
Application Notes
To prevent system problems use only SFP electrical transceiver modules approved
by ADVA Optical Networking that are intended for installation into SFP MSA
compliant FSP 3000R7 channel module interfaces.
FSP 3000R7 pluggables-based channel modules only accept SFP electrical

transceivers specifically designed for the FSP 3000R7 and approved by ADVA
Optical Networking. These are modules identify any FSP 3000R7 pluggable
electrical transceiver by means of specific information about ADVA Optical
Networking in the EEPROM. Non-approved pluggable electrical transceivers are
inaccessible and cannot be provisioned.
A disallowed configuration, mismatch, non-acceptance or missing of pluggable

electrical transceivers will be reported by:
o
o

SNMP traps.
These situations are also indicated by the corresponding port LED of the channel
module.
CAUTION
586
SFP electrical transceiver modules must not be directly connected to

metallic tip and ring outside-plant conductors. They have to be used only
for inside-plant conductors.
Specifications
3G-SDI SFP Electrical Dual Transmitters and

Dual Receivers
FSP 3000R7 provides 3GSDI SFP electrical dual transmitter and SFP electrical dual
receiver modules for multi-format video transport on two copper cables as a complement
to the existing SFP electrical 3GSDI transceivers in order to more closely meet the
requirements for broadcast and media environments. These types of 3GSDI SFP
electrical dual transmitter and 3GSDI SFP electrical dual receiver modules are currently
available:
The SFP-2TX/3GSDI/ELECTRICAL/HBNC is an SFP electrical dual transmitter module
designed to transmit two SDI signals up to 2.97 Gbit/s over coaxial cables. It is a
compact, hot-swappable device that only performs transmitting functions. The module
contains a dual electrical transmitter in the same package equipped with two
unidirectional high-density BNC (HD-BNC) 75 connectors. Mechanical dimension is
compliant with SFP MSA standard, but the pinout of the host connector is not compatible
with MSA standard pinning.
Use the SFP-2TX/3GSDI/ELECTRICAL/HBNC only in conjunction with the 10TCCPCN-3GSDI+10G module. Other modules are not capable of auto-detecting the SFP2TX/3GSDI/ELECTRICAL/HBNC and could destroy this plug and damage themselves.
Figure 332 on p.588 depicts the SFP-2TX/3GSDI/ELECTRICAL/HBNC module.
587

Figure 332: SFP-2TX/3GSDI/ELECTRICAL/HBNC
appropriate data rate has to be selected using the management software. The SFP2TX/3GSDI/ELECTRICAL/HBNC provides module identification information and
diagnostic monitoring through a 2 wire serial interface, providing the ability to read the
temperature. EEPROM of dual transmitter includes information about the module itself
(vendor code, data rates, and other relevant factory parameters), as well as information
specifically from ADVA Optical Networking (device code, serial number, etc.). The user
can query the SFP electrical dual transmitter module to make sure it is the right one for
Features:
588
Up 3Gbit/s video short reach electrical data links
HD-BNC 75 connectors
Cable type: 75 Belden 1694A coaxial cable
SMPTE 424M, SMPTE 292M, and SMPTE 259M compliant
Supports MADI data rate of of 125 Mbit/s1
Supports video pathological patterns for SD-SDI,HD-SDI and 3G-SDI
Hot-pluggable
Form factor: SFP
1Output level is not in agreement with the 0.6V defined in the AES10-2003 standard. An
adaptation of the electrical level may be required in case of transport of MADI services to
and from the client equipment.
The SFP-2RX/3GSDI/ELECTRICAL/HBNC is an SFP electrical dual receiver module
designed to receive two SDI signals up to 2.97 Gbit/s over coaxial cables. It is a
compact, hot-swappable device that only performs receiving functions. The module
contains a dual electrical receiver in the same package equipped with two unidirectional
high-density BNC (HD-BNC) 75 connectors. Mechanical dimension is compliant with
SFP MSA standard, but the pinout of the host connector is not compatible with MSA
standard video pinning.
Use the SFP-2RX/3GSDI/ELECTRICAL/HBNC only in conjunction with the 10TCCPCN-3GSDI+10G module. Other modules are not capable of auto-detecting the SFP2RX/3GSDI/ELECTRICAL/HBNC and could destroy this plug and damage themselves.
Figure 333 on p.590 depicts the SFP-2RX/3GSDI/ELECTRICAL/HBNC module.
589

Figure 333: SFP-2RX/3GSDI/ELECTRICAL/HBNC
Data rates in the range between 125 Mbit/s and 2.97 Gbit/s are supported. Equalizer
features DC restoration to compensate for the DC content of SMPTE pathological test
patterns. The appropriate data rate has to be selected using the management software.
The SFP-2RX/3GSDI/ELECTRICAL/HBNC provides module identification information
and diagnostic monitoring through a 2 wire serial interface, providing the ability to read the
temperature and loss of signal status for both inputs. EEPROM of dual receiver includes
information about the module itself (vendor code, data rates, and other relevant factory
parameters), as well as information specifically from ADVA Optical Networking (device
code, serial number, etc.). The user can query the SFP electrical dual receiver module to
make sure it is the right one for the intended application.
Features:
590
Up 3Gbit/s video short reach electrical data links
HD-BNC 75 connectors
Cable type: 75 Belden 1694A coaxial cable
SMPTE 424M, SMPTE 292M, and SMPTE 259M compliant
Supports MADI data rate of 125 Mbit/s1
Supports video pathological patterns for SD-SDI,HD-SDI and 3G-SDI
Hot-pluggable
Form factor: SFP
1Output level is not in agreement with the 0.6V defined in the AES10-2003 standard. An
adaptation of the electrical level may be required in case of transport of MADI services to
and from the client equipment.
Management
Information about the SFP electrical dual transmitter and SFP electrical dual receiver
modules itself, the operating status, and network operating conditions can be obtained by
using the management software. The equipment type names of the SFP electrical dual
transmitters and SFP electrical dual receivers used by the management software can be
Application Notes
SFP electrical dual transmitters and SFP electrical dual receivers mentioned in this
document are intended for use with the 10TCC-PCN-3GSDI+10G module only.
Standard FSP 3000R7 channel modules are not capable of auto-detecting these
special SFP plugs.
Damage to equipment
It is strongly recommended that you do not install these special SFP plugs into SFP
MSA compliant channel module interface cages. If a 3G-SDI SFP electrical dual
transmitter or receiver is inserted into another module than the 10TCC-PCN3GSDI+10G, then this plug and this channel module could be damaged.
Use only SFP electrical dual transmitters and SFP electrical dual receivers
Networking.
CAUTION
The use of SFP electrical dual transmitters and SFP electrical receivers
other than those approved by ADVA Optical Networking will result in
loss of laser safety approval for the respective channel module and
entire system.
Only the client interface cages of the 10TCC-PCN-3GSDI+10G module accept SFP
electrical dual transmitters and SFP electrical dual receivers. An SFP check is run
every time such an SFP module is inserted into a cage of the 10TCC-PCN3GSDI+10G. Only SFP electrical dual transmitters and SFP electrical dual receivers
that pass this check are fit for use. Non-approved SFP electrical dual transmitters
and SFP electrical dual receivers are inaccessible and cannot be provisioned.
591
A disallowed configuration, mismatch, non-acceptance, or missing of SFP electrical

dual transmitters and SFP electrical dual receivers will be reported by:
o
o
an alarm which is generated and logged by the management software

SNMP traps.
These situations are also indicated by the corresponding port LED of the channel
module.
For more information about using SFP electrical dual transmitters and SFP electrical dual
receivers, see the 10TCC-PCN-3GSDI+10G module description in Chapter 3 of this
manual.
CAUTION
SFP electrical dual transmitter and SFP electrical dual receiver modules
must not be directly connected to metallic tip and ring outside-plant
conductors. They have to be used only for inside-plant conductors.
Specifications
592
Chapter 13
Management and Switch Modules
This chapter contains the descriptions of all management and optical protection switch
modules available at the publication date of this Hardware Description.
Each description includes the front view of the module, the explanation of the electrical
and optical ports and module specific details. In addition, the modules key features are
presented, and examples of the modules labeling are given. Besides, the descriptions of
the switch modules include an operation scheme and a brief discussion of the signal
path.
The descriptions are merely supposed to convey a basic understanding of the
management and optical protection switch modules to the reader. For detailed
information on these modules and underlying technologies, contact ADVA Optical
Networking.
Before each module type is described in a separate section, general information about
these modules are provided such as module design, LED indicators and labels.
NCU-II on p.596
NCU (NCU2E Type) on p.603
NCU-II-P on p.610
UTM on p.618
PSCU on p.625
SCU on p.629
SCU-S on p.633
SCU-II on p.637
VSM on p.645
RSM-OLM#1630 on p.649
RSM-SF#1510 on p.657
RSM-SF#1310 on p.662
OSCM-PN (HW Rev. 2.00) on p.667
OSCM-PN (HW Rev. 3.01) on p.674
OSCM-V#1630 on p.681
2OSCM-V#1630 on p.687
NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS on p.693
593
General Information
General Information
The management modules enable the management of the network element (NE). Every
NE contains a network control unit (NCU) that provides the sole management interface to
the outside of the NE. Every active (managed) shelf contains a shelf control unit (SCU).
All SCUs of an NE are connected by optical links. They connect the NCU to the modules
within the shelf.
The OSC module (OSCM) implements the optical supervisory channel (OSC). It provides
a communication path for the transmission of monitoring information (DCN) over a
network fiber independent of data traffic. A 1630 nm wavelength is used to transmit a 100
Mbit/s Ethernet signal. These signals outside of the normal filter spectrum must be added
and dropped directly at the network fiber. Each NE requires at least one OSCM. The
OSC signal is also used for protection purposes in VSM protected links.
The optical protection switch modules are used in protection schemes where only parts
of the optical system are duplicated. The working line is supervised continuously. If the
link is interrupted, the module will switch the communication to the protection line
automatically.
All management and optical protection switch modules are hot swappable and customer
installable. This enables a scalable, in-service expansion at any time.
Identification
Management modules, optical supervisory modules and optical protection switch
modules are identified by faceplate codes and the label on the board cover. Identification
information is provided in each module description.
Module Design
The modules are designed as single-slot plug-in modules, and are completely compatible
with any 7HU shelf (SH7HU) or 1HU Shelf (SH1HU). Each management and optical
protection switch module has either special EMC contact strips or an EMC textile gasket
on the narrow sides of the faceplate, which create a tight seal with neighboring modules.
The EMC contact strips and the EMC textile gaskets respectively avoid unintended
propagation of electromagnetic energy towards the external environment that might
disrupt other equipment.
The receptacle connectors of the integrated optical ports are angled at 45 to preserve
minimum fiber bend radii when connecting the fiber-optic jumpers.
Module Handling
594
General Information
Management
Using the network control unit (NCU), all optical switch modules and the OSC modules
are SNMP manageable and fully supported through the Network Management System
(NMS). Management allows user access to module conditions as well as network status.
The equipment type names of the management, supervisory and optical protection
switch modules used by the management software can be found in Equipment Types of
FSP 3000R7 Hardware Components on p.1327 of this documentation.
Faceplate Markings
Management and optical protection switch modules have different faceplate markings.
LED indicators and optical port markings of the individual modules are explained in the
appropriate module descriptions.
LED Indicators
Management and optical protection switch modules have tri-color LED indicators that are
visible through the faceplates. The colors of the LED indicator display different operating
status. The status that each color of the LED indicators represents is described in the
Labeling
Management and optical protection switch modules have printed labels on the front plate
and several printed labels (module type label, certification label and warranty label) on the
board cover, which contain specific module information. The labels of the individual
modules are shown in the appropriate module descriptions.
Frontplate Labels
For a quick identification all management and optical protection switch modules have two
printed labels affixed on its frontplate. The top label includes the module name, item
number, HW revision and serial number (excepting the NCU-II, it has no serial number on
its faceplate). The label at the bottom of the faceplate includes the USI code of the
module. Figure 334 shows examples of NCU-II frontplate labels.
Figure 334: Example of SCU-S Frontplate Labels
595
NCU-II
Module Type Label

the module type
technical specifications
Certification Label
This label provides approved certification marks.
Warranty Label
Networking will disclaim the implied warranty of merchantability.
NCU-II
Figure 335: NCU-II Front View
596
NCU-II
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the NCU-II faceplate and their meanings.
Table 72: NCU-II Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Electrical Ports
Other Matters
Power supply status

of the module
USB
USB port
Reset
Mod
operating status of
the module
Ser
Serial port
C2
Ethernet port 2
C1
Ethernet port 1
Reset
button
Description
The NCU-II is the second generation network element control unit, using a higher
performance processor than the first generation (NCU-A, NCU-B, NCU-GDPS and
NCU). Like the first generation NCUs it provides system management capabilities and
network connection to the FSP 3000R7 system. It is a single-slot, 2.5 HU high plug-in
module that acts as the hardware interface between the different modules of the system
and the equipment connected to the NCU's management interfaces.
The NCU-II extends the functionality of the existing NCU with a higher performance
processor, increased (1GB) and enhanced (type DDR2) RAM and a larger (4 GB)
Compact Flash. The external connectors of the NCU-II include two RJ45 Ethernet ports,
one serial USB and one serial DE9M interface (similar to the NCU).
Only one NCU-II is supported per NE. One NCU-II is able to manage a complete NE.
The NCU-II must be installed in the master shelf and requires a shelf control unit (SCU,
SCU-S, SCU-II) in each (master + any additional) shelf to communicate with the
modules.
An NCU communicates with the SCU types in the master shelf using an internal system
bus. Exchange of information between the SCU types in the master shelf and the SCU
types in the additional shelves takes place over the management fiber ring.
The NCU-II can be accessed through a serial, USB or Ethernet port.
The NCU-II must be configured for the specific operating environment. Depending on the
capabilities of the NE, specific Right to Use (RTU) versions may be required.
If both interfaces, USB and DE9M are connected, the serial line RS232 output goes to
both interfaces, but only one can be the master for input. Thus, in this case USB is the
master for input and DE9M input is disabled.

The main functions and features are:
Registration and de-registration of all inserted modules
Monitoring of the presence of all inserted modules, the power supply units and the fan
units
597
NCU-II
Detection of component failures
Alarms, errors and warning messages

between the NCU-II and all modules in all shelves (via SCUs interconnected using
fiber-optic patch cable pairs)
Control of a complete FSP 3000R7 network element consisting of up to 20 7HU

shelves or 9HU shelves (1 master shelf and 19 additional shelves)
Open platform to connect to any IP based system
Remote management and configuration of all interconnected shelves
SNMP monitoring and trap generation
Support of up to 20 ECC interfaces
External module reset button
Exchangeable compact flash (CF) card in case of a hardware failure (Requires

removal of NCU-II from shelf slot.)
Status LED indicators on the faceplate
Support of all NE types, such as OTM and OADM
Interfaces
The NCU-II provides one serial DE9M port, one USB port and two Ethernet ports on its
faceplate for management purposes.
Serial Port
The serial port (EIA/TIA-232) labeled Ser is a 9-pin male panel connector (DE9M). It can
be configured for a Point-to-Point-Protocol (PPP) IP based connection, or it may be
configured as a direct serial connection with a serial null modem cable (female/female).
The serial port can be disabled if needed. The DE9M connector has the following pinout:
Table 73: Male DE9M Connector Pinout
Male DE9M Connector
598
Pin
Number
Signal
Signal Direction
DCD
Data carrier detect
RXD
Received data
TXD
Transmitted data
DTR
Data terminal ready
SG
Signal ground
DSR
Data set ready
RTS
Request To Send
CTS
Clear To Send
RI
not connected
NCU-II
Typically a serial null modem cable with DE9M connectors on both ends is used to
connect to a PC. On delivery, the socket of the serial port is equipped with a protective
cap to prevent contamination.
Note
Note that EIA/TIA-232 was formerly known as recommended standard

RS-232 before its acceptance by the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA)
and Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA).
USB Ports
The USB port labeled USB is a Mini-AB receptacle which complies with USB 2.0
specifications. It acts as an USB slave and provides USB to RS232 emulation (acting as
USB slave) for a direct serial connection to a management PC (acting as USB master). If
necessary, this port can be disabled.
Note
A USB slave requires an appropriate driver in the management PC (USB

master). This driver is available on the User Documentation Suite disc or
can be obtained from ADVA Optical Networking.
The port can accept either a Mini-A USB plug (to act as master; for future use) or a Mini-B
USB plug (to act as slave). Use only a USB cable with a standard A-plug on one end and
a slave Mini-B plug on the other end. For pinout of the Mini-AB receptacles, see Figure
336.
Figure 336: Mini-AB USB Receptacle Pinout (NCU-II)
Mini-AB USB Receptacle
Pin
Function
Description
V BUS
USB power
D-
Negative Data
signal
D+
Positive Data
signal
ID
Identification
GND
Signal ground
Most of the pins of a Mini-USB receptacle are the same as a standard USB connector,
except pin 4. Pin 4 is called ID, and is not present in standard USB plugs. The ID pin
identifies which type of plug is connected. This pin is shorted to ground in the Mini-A plug
and unconnected in the Mini-B plug.
Ethernet Ports
The Ethernet ports labeled C1 and C2 are female 8P8C (RJ-45) receptacles and can be
used to connect the NCU-II to the NMS or the management PC, either directly or via an
external network, using standard Ethernet crossover cabling. (Please refer to "DCN" in
the System Description for further information about the different ways to connect the NE
to a network.)
599
NCU-II
Each Ethernet port supports
Adjustment of the data rates using the auto-negotiation function
Enabling/disabling of individual ports
Automatic MDI/MDI-X crossover capabilities
Standard shielded Category 5 cable should be used to connect to the Ethernet ports. See
Figure 337 for the Ethernet port pinouts on the NCU-II.
Figure 337: 8P8C Panel Jack Pinout (NCU-II)
8P8C Panel Jack
Pin
Number
Signal
Signal
Direction
TXD+
output
TXD-
output
RXD+
input
no connection
no connection
RXD-
no connection
no connection
input
Operating System
The NCU-II runs a Linux Distribution which is optimized for embedded applications.
Linux starts automatically when the FSP 3000R7 is powered up. Linux needs to be
configured for the specific environment. See the Provisioning and Operations Manual of
the FSP 3000R7 documentation suite for configuration information.
The NCU-II supports the following management tools:
600
Craft Console
TL1
SNMP agent
NCU-II
Reset Button
In case of emergency, the NCU-II, can be reset using the reset button located on its
faceplate. If required, press and release this button using a pointed tool. The green power
LED comes on and the module starts up. The optical transmission system is not affected
by an NCU restart. For normal reboots, the SW management functions should be used.
Default NCU-II Settings

The NCU-II comes with the following factory-default configuration:
Table 74: NCU-II Factory-Default Settings
Option
Settings
Mini-AB USB Port
19200 bit/s
8 bits
No parity
1 stop bit
No flow control
(Logging into the NE requires an activated carrier
detect signal.)
LAN IP Addresses
192.168.1.1 (port C1)

192.168.2.1 (port C2)
Subnet
255.255.255.0 (port C1 and C2)
Default Gateway
0.0.0.0
Hostname
nemi
User Accounts
ADMIN, PROVISION, OPERATOR, MONITOR
Account Passwords
All account passwords are factory set to

CHGME.1A
Battery
The NCU-II includes a coin type manganese dioxide lithium battery (ML battery) as a
rechargeable, on-board power source for backing up memory data. This enables the
module to re-establish automatically communication after power failures. The battery
usually not needs to be replaced during the life of the product. However, when a battery
need to be replaced, please contact your equipment manufacturer.
Risk of fire or explosion!
CAUTION
This battery contains metallic lithium and other combustible materials.

For this reason, improper handling or misusing of the battery could result
in rupture, overheating, explosion, or fire, causing bodily injury or
equipment trouble.
601
NCU-II
Because of the above risks, shipping and carriage of the module, particularly transport as
air cargo, may be subject to national or international Dangerous Goods Regulations. Care
should be taken when disposing of the module and its ML battery to prevent accidents
and environmental damage. Lithium is considered to be dangerous to the environment.
LED Indicators
The NCU-II has two LED indicators on the faceplate and two LAN port LEDs per
Ethernet Interface. The LED colors represent different operating status. For details, refer
to the FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Manual, Chapter 3.
Labeling
The labels on the board cover provide module specific information as shown in Figure 338
and Figure 339.
Module Type Label

This label affixed on the board cover contains relevant information about the module,
such as
the manufacturer
the module type
the USI number
the figo Number and its bar code
the port description
WEEE crossed-out rubbish bin logo
approved certification marks
An example of the NCU-II module type label is shown in Figure 338.

Figure 338: Example of an NCU-II Module Type Label
602
NCU (NCU2E Type)
Warranty Label
Networking will disclaim the implied warranty of merchantability. An example of a NCU-II
warranty label is shown in Figure 339.
Figure 339: Example of an NCU-II Warranty Label
Specifications
NCU (NCU2E Type)

Figure 340: NCU Front View
603
NCU (NCU2E Type)
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the NCU faceplate and their meanings.
Table 75: NCU Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Electrical Ports
power supply status of the module
USB2
USB port 2
Mod
operating status of the module
USB1
USB port 1
C2
Ethernet port 2
C1
Ethernet port 1
Description
The network control unit (NCU) provides system management capabilities and network
connection to the FSP 3000R7 system. The NCU is a single-slot 2.5 HU high plug-in
module, that acts as the hardware interface between the different modules of the system
and the equipment connected to its management interfaces. One NCU is supported per
NE and is able to manage a complete NE. It must be installed in the master shelf and
requires a shelf control unit (SCU) in each (master + any additional) shelf to communicate
with the modules.
An NCU communicates with the SCU in the master shelf using an internal system bus.
Exchange of information between the SCU in the master shelf and the SCUs in the
additional shelves takes place over the management fiber ring.
The NCU can be accessed through a USB or Ethernet port.
The NCU must be configured for the specific operating environment. Depending on the
capabilities of the NE, specific Right to Use (RTU) versions may be required.

604
unit

between the NCU and all modules in all shelves (via SCUs interconnected using
Control of a complete FSP 3000R7network element consisting of up to 20 7HU

shelves (1 master shelf and 19 additional shelves)
Support of up to 10 ECC interfaces
NCU (NCU2E Type)
External module button to reset the module
Exchangeable compact flash (CF) card in case of a hardware failure

(For this purpose, the NCU must be removed from the shelf slot.)
Interfaces
The NCU provides two USB ports and two Ethernet ports on its faceplate for
management purposes.
Ethernet Ports
The Ethernet ports labeled C1 and C2 are female 8P8C (RJ-45) receptacles and can be
used to connect the NCU to the NMS or the management PC, either directly or via an
external network, using standard Ethernet crossover cabling. (Please refer to the chapter
about DCN for further information on the different ways to connect the NE to a network.)
Enabling/disabling the port
See Figure 341 for the Ethernet port pinouts on the NCU.
Figure 341: RJ-45 Panel Jack Pinout (NCU)
RJ-45 Panel Jack
Pin
Number
Signal
Signal
Direction
TXD+
output
TXD-
output
RXD+
input
no connection
no connection
RXD-
no connection
no connection
input
Use a standard shielded Category 5 cable.
605
NCU (NCU2E Type)
USB Ports
The USB ports labeled USB1 and USB2 are Mini-AB receptacles that complies with USB
2.0 specifications. The USB1 port acts as USB slave and provides only USB to RS232
emulation (acting as USB slave) for a direct serial connection to a management PC
(acting as USB master). If necessary, this port can be disabled. The USB2 port is not yet
supported by the software, and can therefore not be used. If necessary, the ports can be
disabled.
Note

Both ports can accept either a Mini-A USB plug (to act as master; for future use) or a
Mini-B USB plug (to act as slave). Use only a detachable USB cable with a standard Aplug on one end and a slave mini B-plug on the other end. For pinout of the Mini-AB
receptacles, see Figure 342.
Figure 342: Mini-AB USB Receptacle Pinout (NCU)
Pin
Function
Description
V BUS
USB power
D-
Negative Data
signal
D+
Positive Data
signal
ID
Identification
GND
Signal ground
Operating System
The NCU runs a Linux Distribution which is optimized for embedded applications. Linux
starts automatically when the FSP 3000R7 is powered up. Linux needs to be configured
for the specific environment. See the Provisioning and Operations Manual of the FSP
3000R7 documentation suite for configuration information.
The NCU supports the following management tools:
606
Craft Console
TL1
NCU (NCU2E Type)
SNMP agent
Reset Button
In case of emergency, the NCU can be reset using the reset button located on its
LED comes on and the module starts up. The optical transmission system is not affected
by a restart. For normal reboots, the SW management functions should be used.

The NCU comes with the following factory-default configuration:
Table 76: NCU Factory-Default Settings
Option
Settings
Mini-AB USB Port
19200 bit/s
8 bits
No parity
1 stop bit
No flow control
detect signal.)
LAN IP Addresses
192.168.1.1 (port C1 and C2)
Subnet
255.255.255.0 (port C1 and C2)
Default Gateway
0.0.0.0
Hostname
nemi
User Accounts
Account Passwords

CHGME.1A
Battery
The NCU includes a coin type vanadium pentoxide lithium battery (VL battery) as a
CAUTION

equipment trouble.
607
NCU (NCU2E Type)

should be taken when disposing of the module and its VL battery to prevent accidents
Slot Positions
The shelf containing the NCU is the master shelf and should have shelf ID 1. The NCU
can be placed into following shelves and slots:
SH7HU/SH7HU-R, slot A
SH1HU-R, slot A
SH1HU-F/2DC, slot A
SH1HU-HP/2DC, slot A
SH1HU-R/PF, slot A
LED Indicators
The NCU has two LED indicators on the faceplate and two LAN port LEDs per Ethernet
Interface. The LED colors represent different operating status. For details, refer to the
Labeling
Several labels on the board cover provide module specific information as shown in Figure
343, Figure 344 and Figure 345.
Module Type Label

Figure 343: Example of an NCU Module Label
608
NCU (NCU2E Type)
Certification Label
Figure 344: Example of a NCU Certification Label
Warranty Label
Figure 345: Example of an NCU Warranty Label
Specifications
609
NCU-II-P
NCU-II-P
Figure 346: NCU-II-P Front View
610
NCU-II-P
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the NCU-II-P faceplate and their meanings.
Table 77: NCU-II-P Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Electrical Ports
USB
USB port
Mod
Serial
DSUB
H/S
hot standby status of the module
C1
Ethernet port 1
S/O
switch over button
C2
Ethernet port 2
Reset
reset switch
C3
Ethernet port 3
Description
The network control unit (NCU-II-P) providessystem management capabilitiesand
network connection to the FSP 3000R7 system. The NCU-II-P is a single-slot full height
(5HU) plug-in module, that acts as the main network element controller and offers
different management interfaces (SNMP, WEB, Craft, TL1, etc) to the outside world via
ethernet, serial or in-band management connections. It interfaces with and controls all
equipment in the system. The full height NCU-II-P contains one NCU-II-P in a single card
and protects against a single point of failure of the communication between the NCU-II-P
and the modules. The module is designed only to be used with another NCU-II-P in a
redundant configuration. In a redundant configuration the module can only be used with
another NCU-II-P.Please note: Continuous operation of a single NCU-II-P in a shelf is
not planned. The NCU-II-P always waits for a second standby NCU-II-P in the same
shelf.
The NCU-II-P only works with the shelf control unit, second generation (SCU-II).
The NCU-II-P must be installed in the master shelf and requires a SCU-II in each (master
+ any additional) shelf to communicate with the modules.
The NCU-II-P communicates with the SCU-II in the master shelf using an internal
system bus. Exchange of information between the SCU-II in the master shelf and the
SCU-IIs in the additional shelves takes place over the management fiber ring.
The NCU-II-P can be accessed through a serial, Mini USB or Ethernet port.
The module has a Reset button used to re-boot the NCU-II-P and a Switch Over button
used to initiate a graceful switch over from the active NCU-II-P to the standby NCU-II-P.
The NCU-II-P must be configured for the specific operating environment. Depending on
the capabilities of the NE, specific Right to Use (RTU) versions may be required.

611
NCU-II-P
unit

between the NCU-II-P and all modules in all shelves (via SCU-IIs interconnected
using fiber-optic patch cable pairs)
Control of a complete FSP 3000R7 network element consisting of up to 20 SH9HU

shelves (1 master shelf and 19 additional shelves)
Support of up to 10 embedded control channel interfaces
External module button to reset the module
Exchangeable compact flash (CF) card in case of a hardware failure

(For this purpose, the NCU-II-P must be removed from the shelf slot.)
For redundancy control, one NCU-II-P can re-boot the other (allows an SCU-II to
reboot or disable an unresponsive NCU-II-P)
Interfaces
The NCU-II-P provides one serial DE9M port,one mini USB port and three Ethernet ports
on its faceplate for management purposes.
Ethernet Ports
The Ethernet ports labeled C1 and C2 and C3 are female 8P8C (RJ-45) receptacles and
can be used to connect the NCU-II-P to the NMS or the management PC, either directly
or via an external network, using standard Ethernet crossover cabling. (Please refer to
the chapter about DCN in the System Description of the FSP 3000R7 documentation
suite for further information on the different ways to connect the NE to a network.)
See Figure 341 for the Ethernet port pinouts on the NCU-II-P.
612
NCU-II-P
Figure 347: RJ-45 Panel Jack Pinout (NCU-II-P)
RJ-45 Panel Jack
Pin
Number
Signal
Signal
Direction
TXD+
output
TXD-
output
RXD+
input
no connection
no connection
RXD-
no connection
no connection
input
USB Ports
The USB port is a Mini-AB receptacle that complies with USB 2.0 specifications. The
USB port can act as a USB slave to provide only USB to RS232 emulation. If necessary,
this port can be disabled.
Note

can be obtained from ADVA Optical Networkingg.
The USB port can accept either a Mini-B USB plug to act as slave or a Mini-A USB plug
to act as master. Use only a detachable USB cable with a standard A-plug on one end
and a slave mini B-plug on the other end. For pinout of the Mini-AB receptacles, see
Figure 342.
Figure 348: Mini-AB USB Receptacle Pinout (NCU-II-P)
Pin
Function
Description
V BUS
USB power
D-
Negative Data
signal
D+
Positive Data
signal
ID
Identification
GND
Signal ground
613
NCU-II-P
Serial Port
The serial port can be disabled if needed. The DE9M connector has the following pinout:
Figure 349: Male DE9M Connector Pinout

Male DE9M Connector
Pin
Number
Signal
Signal Direction
DCD
Data carrier detect
RXD
Received data
TXD
Transmitted data
DTR
Data terminal ready
SG
Signal ground
DSR
Data set ready
RTS
Request To Send
CTS
Clear To Send
RI
not connected
Note

Operating System
The NCU-II-P runs a Linux Distribution which is optimized for embedded applications.
Linux starts automatically when the FSP 3000R7 is powered up. Linux needs to be
configured for the specific environment. See the Provisioning and Operations Manual of
the FSP 3000R7 documentation suite for configuration information.
The NCU-II-P supports the following management tools:
614
Craft Console
TL1
SNMP agent
NCU-II-P
Reset Button
In case of emergency, the NCU-II-P can be restarted using the reset button located on its
LED comes on and the module starts up. The reset button on the module only restarts
this particular module. Reset from the Craft, GUI, TL1, or SNMP resets both NCU-II-Ps.
Activation of the reset button on the active NCU-II-P will trigger a switch-over. Activation
of the reset button on the standby NCU-II-P does not lead to a role change.The optical
transmission system is not affected by a restart. For normal reboots, the SW
management functions should be used.
Switch Over Button

Pressing the front panel Switch Over button triggers a graceful switch-over from the
active NCU-II-P to the standby NCU-II-P.The user can locally or remotely place an
inhibit command on the Switch Over button that cannot be bypassed.
Default NCU-II-P Settings

The NCU-II-P comes with the following factory-default configuration:
Table 78: NCU-II-P Factory-Default Settings
Option
Settings
Mini-AB USB Port
19200 bit/s
8 bits
No parity
1 stop bit
No flow control
detect signal.)
LAN IP Address
192.168.1.1 (Port C1)
Subnet
255.255.255.0 (Port C1)
Default Gateway
0.0.0.0
Hostname
nemi
User Accounts
Account Passwords

CHGME.1A
615
NCU-II-P
Battery
The NCU-II-P includes a coin type vanadium pentoxide lithium battery (VL battery) as a
usually does not need to be replaced during the life of the product. However, when the
battery needs to be replaced, please contact your equipment manufacturer.
CAUTION

equipment trouble.
Slot Positions
The shelf containing the NCU-II-P is the master shelf and should have shelf ID 1. The
NCU-II-P can be placed into following shelves and slots:
SH9HU, slot 3 and 18
LED Indicators
The NCU-II-P has three LED indicators on the faceplate and two LAN port LEDs per
Ethernet Interface. The LED colors represent different operating status. For details, refer
to Chapter 3 of the Maintenance and Troubleshooting Manual.
Labeling
350 and Figure 351.
616
NCU-II-P
Module Type Label

Figure 350: Example of an NCU-II-P Module Label
Warranty Label
Figure 351: Example of an NCU-II-P Warranty Label
Specifications
617
UTM
UTM
Figure 352: UTM Front View
618
UTM
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the UTM faceplate and their meanings.
Table 79: UTM Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Electrical Ports

module
C1
Ethernet port 1
Mod
C2
Ethernet port 2
1 to 16
operating status of the telemetry

interface input ports
C3
Ethernet port 3
17 to
20
operating status of the telemetry

interface output ports
In/Out
Telemetry port
Description
The UTM (Utility Module) provides centralized management access to a single network
element (NE) in any configuration. In addition, it features a telemetry interface (TIF) with
alarm output and input contacts for the FSP 3000R7.
The telemetry interface enables the user to connect the NE to alarm inputs of other
devices of the system or directly control external alarm devices. The alarm status of
these input/output alarm signals is visualized to the user via 20 TIF LEDs.
With the UTM it is also possible to connect management traffic at a centralized position
within a network element (NE) regardless of the NCU (i.e. all released NCU variants)
being protected or not as well as the placement of the NCU within the NE. Therefore, in
case of exchanging a defective NCU with a new one, it is no longer required to
disconnect the management connections (however they may not be active depending on
NCU redundancy).
The use of the UTM module as centralized management access does not restrict the use
of any functionality supported by the NCU. For security reasons the detection of a
removed/faulty UTM does not lead to any autonomously enabling of disabled
management interfaces on NCU or OSCM. UTM-to-NCU communication does not
require provisioning/knowledge of NCU and SCU addresses.
It is not possible to use more than a single UTM within one NE. The UTM can be used
both in the SH7HU and SH1HU shelves, and supports NEs built of a any mixture of
these shelf types. The Utility Module should be placed in the same shelf as the NCU.
The UTM works in the following network management configurations:
Unprotected SCU shelf interconnect (with or without closed SCU ring)
Unprotected NCU (any released NCU variants, such as NCU-A, NCU-B, and NCUGDPS)
Features
The main features are:
3 Ethernet ports for management access
619
UTM
Support of 16 external opto-isolated input and 4 output alarm signals
Alarm reset button for resetting the alarm status
All external connectors front accessible
Error and warning messages
Size: 5HU high, HP wide (1 slot)
Interfaces
The UTM provides 3 Ethernet ports for management access and one telemetry port for
transferring alarm signals.
Ethernet Ports
The UTM supports three Ethernet ports for centralized management access to an NE as
external communication interfaces. The Ethernet ports labeled C1, C2 and C3 are female
8P8C (RJ45) receptacles used to connect the UTM to the NMS or the management PC
via a standard Ethernet crossover cable.
Each Ethernet port supports:
Disabling of 10/100 Mbit/s auto-negotiation
Enabling/disabling of each port
Data Communications Equipment (DCE) according to IEEE 802.3 (automatic

MDI/MDI-X crossover capabilities)
See Table 80 for the Ethernet port pinouts on the UTM.

Table 80: RJ-45 Panel Jack Pinout of the UTM
RJ-45 Panel Jack
Pin Number
Signal
Signal
Direction
TXD+
output
TXD-
output
RXD+
input
no connection
no connection
RXD-
no connection
no connection
input
620
UTM
Telemetry Port
The UTM provides a telemetry port with contacts for 16 opto-isolated alarm input signals
and 4 alarm output signals as external hardware interface. The telemetry port, identified
on the faceplate as IN/OUT, is a 44-pin D-subminiature male panel connector high
density (HD SUB-D44). Table 81 lists the signal assignment of the connector pins as
viewed facing the UTM module.
The user may connect either external alarming devices such as horns, beepers or
warning lamps (max. 42 V AC/50 VA or max. 60 V DC/60 W) to the outputs of the
telemetry interface or may use the inputs for alarming external events (e.g. originating
from a door sensing device) within the management system of the FSP 3000R7. The
telemetry interface cable required for connecting to this port is not provided by ADVA
Optical Networking. For cable specification, see Electrical Cables on p.1279.
TIF inputs can be configured to create an alarm if a contact is closed or opened. The
severity of a TIF input contact alarm and the type of a reported TIF input contact alarm is
provisioned by the management software. TIF outputs summarize the alarm status of the
NE including all FCUs and PSUs (critical, major, minor alarm groups). Each TIF
input/output contact can be provisioned independently.
621
UTM
Table 81: Male HD SUB-D44 Connector Pinout of the UTM
31
16
44 30
Pin Number
Relay No.
Signal
31, 16, 1
Relay 1
32, 17, 2
Relay 2
33, 18, 3
Relay 3
34, 19, 4
Relay 4
15
5, 20
Input 1 (Ground 1)
6, 21
Input 2 (Ground 2)
7, 22
Input 3 (Ground 3)
8, 23
Input 4 (Ground 4)
9, 24
Input 5 (Ground 5)
10, 25
Input 6 (Ground 6)
11, 26
Input 7 (Ground 7)
12, 27
Input 8 (Ground 8)
13, 28
Input 9 (Ground 9)
14, 29
15, 30
44, 43
42, 41
40, 39
38, 37
36, 35
The UTM supports the following management tools:
622
Craft Console accessed via TELNET application protocol
Network Manager
Network Planner
TL1
UTM

An TIF alarm contact reset button allows resetting the alarm status of all TIF output
contacts as well as the associated output LEDs. It does not clear the alarm status of the
affected alarms in the management system. An activation of the TIF reset button does
not reset LEDs and alarms related to the TIF input contacts. If required, press and
release this button using a pointed tool.
LED Indicators
Different LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating status of the
module and the status of the alarm inputs and alarm outputs. For details, refer to the FSP
Slot Positions
The UTM is 4 HP wide and should be placed in the same shelf as the NCU. It can be
SH7HU/SH7HU-R, slots 1 through 20
SH1HU, slots 1 and 2
Labeling
Module Type Label

Figure 353: Example of a UTM Module Type Label
623
UTM
Certification Label
Figure 354: Example of a UTM Certification Label
Warranty Label
The warranty label must not be damaged or removed. Otherwise ADVA Optical
Networking will disclaim the implied warranty of merchantability. Figure 355 shows an
example of a warranty label.
Figure 355: Example of a Warranty Label
Specifications
624
PSCU
PSCU
Figure 356: PSCU Front View
625
PSCU
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the PSCU faceplate and their meanings.
Table 82: PSCU Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Electrical Ports
I1 to I8
Mod
I1 to I8
operating status of interconnect

ports 1 to 8
Interconnect ports 1 to
8
Description
The PSCU (Passive Shelf Control Unit) is a single-slot plug-in module. It acts as the
controller for 40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy and 96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125 shelves and is
the connecting point of any 40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy and 96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125
passive shelf to support management functionality. The PSCU recognizes all available
40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy and 96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125 shelves and allows
monitoring and controlling. It basically registers these shelves to the NE controller,
provides inventory data and supplies the connected devices with power.
The PSCU has to be placed in a main or master shelf. A maximum of 8 40CSM/2HU#Dxx-#Dyy and 96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125 shelves can be connected to one PSCU
via one of the eight interconnect ports featured by the module.
The interconnect ports are 6-pin panel-mounted IEEE1394 (FireWire) sockets. Four pins
are used for transferring inventory data, and two pins provide power to the 40CSM/2HU#Dxx-#Dyy and 96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125 in favor of a separate power supply.
However, the FireWire itself is not supported (neither the protocol nor pinout).
Note
Although the PSCU and 40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy and 96CSM/4HU#19600-#19125 use FireWire 400 connectors for interconnecting, the
FireWire itself is not supported (neither the protocol nor pinout).
The cable for connecting the PSCU to a 40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy and 96CSM/4HU#19600-#19125 is delivered by ADVA Optical Networking. This cable must be used
solely. The use of cables other than those delivered by ADVA Optical Networking will
void the warranty and the EMC certificate. For more information, refer to Electrical
Cables on p.1279.
It is not allowed to connect the PSCU to devices other than 40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy
and 96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125. If you do not adhere to this, ADVA Optical Networking
assumes no liability for potential damages to equipment.
The 40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy and 96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125 shelves attached to the
PSCU will be handled like plugs in the management software. Any kind of loss of
communication between the PSCU and the 40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy and 96CSM/4HU#19600-#19125 shelves will be alarmed to the management.
626
PSCU

Registration and de-registration of all available passive shelves (40CSM/2HU-#Dxx#Dyy and 96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125)
Support of eight interconnect ports for internal management purposes (monitoring of

all available 40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy and 96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125 passive
shelves, management access to passive shelves)
LED Indicators
module and the states of the connected 40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyyand 96CSM/4HU#19600-#19125 shelves. For details, refer to the Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Manual, Chapter3.
Slot Positions
The PSCU can be placed into following shelves and slots:
Labeling
Module Type Label

Figure 357: Example of a PSCU Module Type Label
627
PSCU
Certification Label
Figure 358: Example of a PSCU Certification Label
Warranty Label
Networking will disclaim the implied warranty of merchantability. Figure 359 shows an
example of a warranty label.
Figure 359: Example of a PSCU Warranty Label
Specifications
628
SCU
SCU
Figure 360: SCU Front View
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the SCU faceplate and their meanings.
Table 83: SCU Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports

module
transmit
Mod
receive
U-T*
operating status of the

transmitter of the uplink interface
uplink interface
U-R*
operating status of the receiver

of the uplink interface
downlink interface
D-T*
operating status of the

transmitter of the downlink
interface
not used
D-R*
operating status of the receiver

of the downlink interface
X-T*
not used
X-R*
not used
* Designations of the port LED indicators are not explicitly marked on the
faceplate.
629
SCU
Description
The SCU (shelf control unit) is a single-slot 2.5 HU high plug-in module, which acts as
the controller for an entire main shelf. It recognizes all inserted optical modules and
downloads their configuration data stored in the NCU. The SCU communicates with
each module of its shelf using the internal system bus on the backplane. The SCU
queries each module for relevant information, such as module type, serial number, device
code, operating status, link status, etc. If the response is not correct, the SCU
interrogates in greater detail for the exact fault. This allows the SCU to determine
whether any of the conditions have changed since the last time it was queried. The
module fully supports digital diagnostics for optical performance monitoring of pluggable
transceivers as well.
The SCU also monitors the power supply units and the cooling fans. Furthermore, it is
responsible for module extraction supervision. In routine operation, SNMP traps are set
and passed on to the NCU to provide instant alerts to potential problems.
The SCU contains cross-connect circuitry for the internal and external management
connections of the network element (NE).
Uplink and downlink ports are available to daisy chaining multiple shelves together for
single controller communication. In a ring, the SCU provides redundant inter-shelf
communication. The SCU in the master shelf (the shelf with the NCU) connects the main
shelves of the NE to the NCU.
The master shelf and not more than 19 main shelves can be interconnected to build one
NE (maximum system configuration). In Release 13.3 only one SCUis supported per
main shelf.

unit
Enabling of ring closing

to/from the SCU to which it is physically connected using a fiber-optic patch cable
pair
Redundant connectivity to two main shelves equipped with one SCU each
No configuration requirements
Three management interfaces
Optical Interfaces
Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant interfaces using LC receptacle

connectors for optical fiber termination
Fiber type: 62.5 m multimode fiber (for each interface)

o
630
Uplink interface U: redundant 1.25 Gbit/s optical connection between main and
master shelves
SCU
o
Downlink interface D: redundant 1.25 Gbit/s optical connection between main

and master shelves
Supported pluggable transceivers (for each interface):

o
o
SFP/2G5U/1310S/SM/LC (HW Rev. 2.01)

SFP/2G1/850I/MM/LC
For details about the SFP/2G5U/1310S/SM/LC and SFP/2G1/850I/MM/LC, refer to

the FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2 Module and System Specification.
Note
specifically intended for the SCU. These must be approved by ADVA
Optical Networking. If you use non-approved SFPs in conjunction with
the SCU, ADVA Optical Networking cannot guarantee the behavior of
the shelf control units.
SFP transceivers and the optical fibers are not included in delivery. They must be
specifically ordered from the ADVA Optical Networking.
The SFP transceiver cages will be equipped with dust plugs on delivery to prevent
impurities. These dust plugs should be in the cages as long as the SCU is not installed in
a running system.
The uplink interface (U) is used for connection to the SCU of the upper main shelf, and
the downlink interface (D) is used for connection to the SCU of the lower main shelf.
When one or two interfaces are not used, the corresponding SFP cages need not be
populated with an SFP transceiver. Make sure to insert dust plugs into the empty cages.
Slot Positions
The SCU can be placed into following shelves and slots:
SH9HU, slot B
SH7HU/ SH7HU-R, slot B
SH1HU-F/2DC, slot B
SH1HU-HP/2DC, slot B
SH1HU-R, slot B
SH1HU-R/PF, slot B
LED Indicators
The SCU has tri-color LED indicators on the faceplate. The LED colors represent
different operating status. For details, refer to the FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2 Maintenance
Labeling
361 and Figure 362 on p.632.
631
SCU
Module Type Label

Figure 361: Example of an SCU Module Type Label
Warranty Label
Networking will disclaim the implied warranty of merchantability. The following figure
shows an example of a warranty label.
Figure 362: Example of an SCU Warranty Label
Specifications
632
SCU-S
SCU-S
Figure 363: SCU-S Front View
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the SCU-S faceplate and their meanings.
Table 84: SCU-S Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Electrical Ports

module
UP
Ethernet port 2
Mod
DOWN
Ethernet port 1
Description
The SCU-S (shelf control unit for 1HU shelf) is a single-slot 2.5 HU high plug-in module,
which acts as the controller for the SH1HU-F/2DC and SH1HU-R shelves. It recognizes
all inserted optical modules and downloads their configuration data stored in the NCU.
The SCU-S communicates with each module of its shelf using the internal system bus on
the backplane. The SCU-S queries each module for relevant information, such as module
type, serial number, device code, operating status, link status, etc. If the response is not
correct, the SCU-S requests further detailed information on the exact fault. This allows
the SCU-S to determine whether any of the conditions have changed since the last time it
was queried. The module also monitors the power supply units and the cooling fans.
Furthermore, it is responsible for module extraction supervision. In routine operation,
SNMP traps are set and passed on to the NCU to provide instant alerts to potential
problems.
The SCU-S contains cross-connect circuitry for the internal and external management
connections of the network element (NE).
633
SCU-S
In a ring, the SCU-S also provides redundant inter-shelf communication. The SCU-S in
the master shelf (the shelf with the NCU) connects the main shelf to the NCU. When
using SCU-S modules a maximum of two SH1HU-F/2DC or SH1HU-R shelves can be
connected to build one network element.

unit
Enabling of ring closing

to/from the SCU-S to which it is physically connected using a standard shielded
Cat.5e cable
Redundant connectivity to two main shelves equipped with one SCU-S each
Ethernet Ports
The Ethernet ports labeled UP and DOWN are female RJ-45 receptacles used for intershelf communication via standard Ethernet cables. The uplink interface (UP) is used for
connection to the SCU-S of the upper main shelf, and the downlink interface (DOWN) is
used for connection to the SCU-S of the lower main shelf. One IP address (that on the
NCU) is used for the complete NE.
Data Communications Equipment (DCE) according to IEEE 802.3 (automatic

MDI/MDI-X crossover capabilities)
See Figure 364 for the Ethernet port pinouts on the SCU-S
634
SCU-S
Figure 364: RJ-45 Panel Jack Pinout of the SCU-S
RJ-45 Panel Jack
Pin
Number
Signal
Signal
Direction
TXD+
output
TXD-
output
RXD+
input
no connection
no connection
RXD-
no connection
no connection
input
SCU-S is not allowed to connect any other Ethernet devices such as switch or router. It
can only be used to connect with SCU-S. Use a standard shielded Category 5 cable.
LED Indicators
The SCU-S has 2 bicolored LED indicators on the faceplate and two LAN port LEDs per
Ethernet interface. The LED colors represent different operating status. For details, refer
to the Chapter 3 of the FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Manual.
Slot Positions
The SCU-S can be placed into following shelves and slots:
SH1HU-F/2DC, slot B
SH1HU-R, slot B
SH1HU-R/PF, slot B
Labeling
365 and Figure 366 on p.636.
635
SCU-S
Module Type Label

Figure 365: Example of an SCU-S Module Type Label
Warranty Label
Figure 366: Example of an SCU-S Warranty Label
Specifications
636
SCU-II
SCU-II
Figure 367: SCU-II Front View
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the SCU-II faceplate and their meanings.
Table 85: SCU-II Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Electrical Ports

module
UP
Ethernet port 2
Mod
DOWN
Ethernet port 1
H/S
hot standby status of the module
Description
The SCU-II (shelf control unit second generation) is a single-slot 2.5 HU high plug-in
module, which acts as a communication gateway between the NCU and modules for an
entire main shelf. It recognizes all inserted optical modules and downloads their
configuration data stored in the NCU. The SCU-II has increased RAM, ROM and CPU
performance and is fully compatible with other SCUs. The module is also designed to
operate with the NCU-II-P.
637
SCU-II
The SCU-II communicates with each module in its shelf using the internal system bus on
the backplane. The SCU-II queries each module for relevant information, such as module
type, serial number, device code, operating status, link status, etc. If the response is not
correct, the SCU-II interrogates in greater detail for the exact fault. This allows the SCUII to determine whether any of the conditions have changed since the last time it was
queried. The module fully supports digital diagnostics for optical performance monitoring
of pluggable transceivers as well.
The SCU-II also monitors the power supply units and the cooling fans. Furthermore, it is
responsible for module extraction supervision. In routine operation, traps are set and
passed on to the NCU to provide instant alerts to potential problems.
The SCU-II contains cross-connect circuitry for the internal management connections of
the network element (NE).
Uplink and downlink ports are available to daisy chain multiple shelves together for multishelf controller communication. In a ring, the SCU-II provides redundant inter-shelf
communication. The SCU-II in the master shelf (the shelf with the active NCU) connects
the main shelves of the NE to the NCU.
The master shelf and not more than 19 main shelves can be interconnected to build one
NE (maximum system configuration). An SCU-II is placed in slot B of every shelf.

unit
Two optical Ethernet interfaces
Fully compatible with existing SCU
Interworks with the NCU-II-P, NCU-II and NCU
Increased RAM, ROM, and CPU memory compared to SCU
Supports redundancy of SCU-II connectivity by supporting a SCU-II ring

configuration
Communication to/from the SCU-II via optical 1GbE port
Communication to other cards via 100M FE backplane connection
Redundant connectivity to two main shelves equipped with one SCU-II each
Optical Interfaces
Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant interfaces using LC receptacle

connectors for optical fiber termination
Fiber type: 62.5 m multimode fiber (for each interface)

o
638
Uplink interface U: redundant 1.25 Gbit/s optical connection between main and
master shelves
Downlink interface D: redundant 1.25 Gbit/s optical connection between main
and master shelves
SCU-II
Supported pluggable transceivers (for each interface):

o
o
SFP/2G5U/1310S/SM/LC (HW Rev. 2.01)

SFP/2G1/850I/MM/LC
For details on the SFP/2G5U/1310S/SM/LC and SFP/2G1/850I/MM/LC, refer to the

FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2 Module and System Specification.
Note
specifically intended for the SCU. These must be approved by ADVA
SFP transceivers and the optical fibers are not included in delivery. They must be
specifically ordered from the ADVA Optical Networking.
The SFP transceiver cages will be equipped with dust plugs on delivery to prevent
impurities. These dust plugs should be in the cages as long as the SCU-II is not installed
in a running system.
The uplink interface (U) is used for connection to the SCU-II of the upper main shelf, and
the downlink interface (D) is used for connection to the SCU-II of the lower main shelf.
When one or two interfaces are not used, the corresponding SFP cages need not be
populated with an SFP transceiver. Make sure to insert dust plugs into the empty cages.
Slot Positions
For non-redundant configurations, the SCU-II can be placed into following shelves and
slots:
SH9HU, slot B
SH7HU/ SH7HU-R, slot B
SH1HU-F/2DC, slot B
SH1HU-R, slot B
SH1HU-R/PF, slot B
For redundant configurations, the SCU-II can be placed into following shelves and slots:
SH9HU, slots A and B
SH7HU/ SH7HU-R, slots A and B
Note

LED Indicators
The SCU-II has three tri-color LED indicators on the faceplate. The LED colors represent
different operating status. For details, refer to Chapter 3 of the Maintenance and
639
SCU-II
Labeling
368 and Figure 369.
Module Type Label

Figure 368: Example of an SCU-II Module Type Label
Warranty Label
Figure 369: Example of an SCU-II Warranty Label
Specifications
640

Figure 370: Optical Path Protection Switch Front
Faceplate Markings
The table below lists all abbreviations on the OPPM faceplate and their meanings.
Table 86: OPPM Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
receive
Mod
operating state of the module
transmit
NW

west
NW
network port west
NE
NE
network port east
client port
641
Description
The Optical Path Protection Switch Module, (OPPM) is for optically switched protection
purposes. It offers optical connection protection in multiple ways for access, metro and
core meshed networks.
The OPPM provides optical path protection for a single channel or an aggregate of
channels by splitting the client receive optical signals and broadcasting them to network
east and west transmit ports, which feed the working and the protection path. At the
network east and west receive ports, the OPPM selects the optical signal and switches it
to the client transmit port. An integrated optical power monitor can be used as a switch
trigger. In addition the OPPM can be triggered by a signal fail from a single or a group of
up to four channel cards called Protection Trigger Partners.
Amplifiers (boosters, pre-amplifiers, or inline amplifiers) may be used between channel
modules and the OPPM, as well as in the optical path between peer OPPMs.
Features
single client interface for optical signals composed of a single channel or multiple
channels
two network interfaces for working and protection optical paths
constant bridging from client to network interface
selector controlled path selection from network to client interface latching to last
active path
physical layer fault management and performance management of working and

protected path optical signals
option to include protection trigger partner signal fail status information in selector
decision process if protection trigger partner signal is available
single-ended protection switching option
protection switching function for CWDM and DWDM optical signals
Signal Path
The figure below shows the functional block diagram (simplified) of the OPPM.
642

Figure 371: Operation Scheme of the OPPM
Receive and Transmit Optical Paths

For the receive (client to network path), the protected optical signal is monitored at the
client receive interface by an Optical Power Monitor (OPM). The optical signal is split
50:50 and connected to network east and west transmit interfaces to provide a constant
bridging function.
For the transmit (network to client path), the optical signals at network east and west
receive interfaces are monitored by OPMs. The optical switch selects the best signal and
passes it on to the client transmit interface.
A Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) handles LoL detection. Switch position is
controlled by the micro controller based on signal fail conditions and commands the
FPGA to position the switch.
Slot Positions
Refer to the Module and System Specification for the module shelf and slot positions.
LED Indicators
The OPPM has tri-color LED indicators on the faceplate. The LED colors represent
Labeling
Several labels printed on the OPPM board cover provide module specific information as
shown in the figures below.
643

Figure 372: OPPM Module Type Label
Figure 373: OPPM Warranty Label
Specifications
644
VSM
VSM
Figure 374: VSM Front View
645
VSM
Faceplate Markings
The table below lists all abbreviations on the VSM faceplate and their meanings.
Table 87: VSM Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
receive
Mod
operating state of the module
transmit
NW

west
NW
network port west
NE
NE
network port east
C2
client port 2
C1
client port 1
Description
The Versatile Switch Module (VSM) is an optical switch for line, band, subband, group or
channel protection.
Protection switching can be triggered by commands of other modules communicated to
the VSM module. These commands are transmitted via the backplane bus and the SCUs
of the FSP 3000R7 system.
The backup path can only be monitored in configurations with the OSCM ports.
The VSM switches when a LOS occurs on the Optical Supervisory Channel Modules
(2OSCM-V#1630 and OSCM-PN) ports.
Features
Enable full access to high and low priority traffic
Switch over in less than 50 ms
Two cross switches to switch the traffic in phase
Supports point-to-point and ring topologies.
Network interfaces for east/west application and client interfaces using full duplex
LC receptacle connectors for fiber termination
Size: 5 HU high and 4 HP wide
Signal Path
Figure 375 shows the functional block diagram (simplified) and illustrates the path when
the module switches the traffic for protection.
646
VSM
Figure 375: Operation Scheme of a VSM
Receive Direction
The VSM receives a composite signal of a channel module through the receiver
connector of the east and west network elements. The incoming signal of the NW port is
routed for high priority traffic and the incoming signal of the NE port is routed for low
priority traffic. Using two cross switches each signal is switched onto one client port. The
high priority signal is switched towards C1-T and the low priority signal is switched
towards C2-T.
Transmit Direction
The module transmits a high priority signal through C1-R and a low priority signal through
C2-R. Each signal is routed onto a switch and directed to the network ports NE-T and
NW-T.
When a fault occurs, the traffic will be switched over. For details, refer to the System
Description.
Slot Positions
The VSM can be placed into following shelves and slots:
647
VSM
LED Indicators
The VSM has tri-color LED indicators on the faceplate. The LED colors represent
Labeling
Several labels printed on the board cover provide module specific information as shown in
Figure 376, Figure 377 and Figure 378 on p.649.
Module Type Label

Figure 376: Example of a VSM Module Type Label
Certification Label
Figure 377: Example of a VSM Certification Label
648
RSM-OLM#1630
Warranty Label
Figure 378: Example of a VSM Warranty Label
Specifications
RSM-OLM#1630
Figure 379: RSM-OLM#1630 Front View
649
RSM-OLM#1630
Note
The RSM-OLM#1630 is a converted FSP 2000 Release 6.6 module as

follow FSP 2000 Release 6.6 rules. This mainly concerns auto laser
shutdown (ALS) and LED behavior.
Faceplate Markings
Table 88 lists all abbreviations on the RSM-OLM#1630 faceplate and their meanings.
Table 88: RSM-OLM#1630 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
On
C1mo
monitoring port C1
Lk
C2mo
monitoring port C2
NW
operating status of the network port

west
receive
NE

east
transmit
NW
network port west
NE
network port east
C2
client port 2
C1
client port 1
Description
The Remote Switch Module with Optical Line Monitoring (RSM-OLM#1630) is used to
provide optical line monitoring and line protection. Pilot lasers are used to monitor the
optical lines for fiber cuts, fiber intrusion and fiber degradation/aging. The thresholds
defining signal degrade and fiber intrusion are user configurable. Protection switching
takes place in the event of LOS (fiber break) or fiber degradation (signal degrade).
The network lines are two independent and physically separated fiber pairs, named NE
and NW. By default NE is the working line and NW the protection line.
The RSM-OLM#1630 supports two priorities of data streams: port C1 is used for high
priority traffic and port C2 is intended for low priority traffic. The high priority data traffic is
line protected and switches over in case of trouble with a fiber. As long as both network
fiber pairs are available, low priority traffic can also be transmitted. If the module
switches over, the low priority data traffic is disconnected.
650
Continuous monitoring of optical line quality with records
Autonomous switch to the low priority data stream when a fiber breaks or degrades
RSM-OLM#1630
Both network fiber pairs can be used for data transmission in case of error-free
operation
Optical monitoring output for network ports, e.g. for connecting an OSA
Optical input power measurements of pilot laser available for analysis and indication
of fiber cut, intrusion, and degradation/aging
Supports point-to-point topology
Pilot laser signal at a wavelength of 1630 nm
Two independent alert-thresholds (upper and lower) can be adjusted for fiber
attenuation
Manual protection switch and inhibited protection switch controlled both via
management and Lock/Auto push button on faceplate.
Network interfaces, client interfaces and monitoring interfaces using MU type

Push Button
The Lock/Auto push button on the faceplate allows manual operation of protection
switching. This button has FSP 2000 behavior, which is slightly different from the FSP
3000R7 behavior. Table 89 describes the function and effect of the button, translated to
FSP 3000R7 behavior. If required, press and release this button with a pointed tool.
651
RSM-OLM#1630
Table 89: RSM-OLM#1630 Push Button Description
Button
Function
Description
Lock/Auto
Toggle
between
autonomous
switching,
inhibit switch to
inactive line,
autonomous
switching, and
manual switch
+ inhibit switch
to resulting
inactive line.
First press of button: Inhibit switching to the inactive

line (west or east line). This is the equivalent of using
the management tool to:
issue the command Inhibit Switch to Protection to

a currently active working line, or
issue the command Inhibit Switch to Working to a

currently active protection line.
Second press of button: Autonomous protection

switching to the appropriate line depending on
measured fiber conditions.
Third press of button: Switch and lock to the currently
inactive line (west or east line). This is the equivalent of
using the management tool to:
issue the command Protection Switch to a

currently active working line + the command Inhibit
Switch to Working to the protection line, or
issue the command Protection Switch to a

currently active protection line + the command
Inhibit Switch to Protection to the working line
Fourth press of button: Autonomous protection

switching to the appropriate line depending on
measured fiber conditions.
Fifth press of button: Same as first press of button.
Toggling to chosen setting must be completed within
10 seconds. If you use more than 10 seconds between
pressing the button, you will return to the beginning of
the toggle sequence again; the first press of the button.
Signal Path (Fault Free)

The RSM-OLM#1630 at the near end has to be connected to another RSM-OLM#1630 at
the far end. Figure 380 shows a fault-free operation scheme and illustrates the signal
paths of the data signal and the 1630 nm pilot laser signal. The signal path is described
below.
652
RSM-OLM#1630
Figure 380: Operating Scheme of an near-end and far-end RSM-OLM#1630
working in Fault Free Operation
near-end
Client ports C
C1-R
High priority traffic
C2-R
Low priority traffic
far-end
Network ports N
RSM-OLM
Switch Tx
OSF
NE-T
NE-R
NW-T
NW-R
OSF
Client ports C
RSM-OLM
Switch Rx
coupler
C1-T
OSF
coupler
C2-T
C1-R
C2-R
OSF
ACT
STBY
STBY
coupler
C1-T
C2-T
Switch Rx
OSF
coupler
NE-R
NE-T
NW-R
NW-T
ACT
Switch Tx
OSF
OSF
OSF
C1 mo
C2 mo
C1 mo
R-NWSTBY
R-NEACT
R-NEACT
R-NWSTBY
C2 mo
Control Unit
Control Unit
Data traffic
Pilot laser signal
- signal sent on NE-T
as active port
- signal sent on NW-R as standby port (S TB Y )
In this example the NE direction is the working path as active line and NW is the
protection path as standby line. When no faults are detected, the near-end RSMOLM#1630 routes high priority traffic straight ahead from C1 through the switch onto NE
to the connected far-end RSM-OLM#1630. It is also possible to transmit low priority
traffic from C2 onto NW to the far-end module.
Receive Direction
The near-end RSM-OLM#1630 receives a composite data signal from a filter module
through the inputs C1-R and C2-R. The data signal is passed through the switch onto the
NE-T and NW-T connectors of the near-end module to the NE-R and NW-R connectors
of the opposite connected far-end module. A pilot laser signal of the near-end RSMOLM#1630 is splitted by the pilot transmitter and coupled over the active network line
NE-T and standby network line NW-R to the far-end RSM-OLM#1630.
The data signal is passed from the NE-R and NW-R of the far-end module through the
switch onto the outputs C1-T and C2-T for transmission to the linked filter module.
The received pilot signals on the NE-R and NW-T ports of the far-end RSM-OLM#1630
are separated from the network line using internal filters.
The pilot laser signal is converted by the pilot receivers from optical to electrical signal
and forwarded to the control unit for continuous measurement and evaluation. If a fiber
breaks, degrades/ages, or is intruded, an alarm (SNMP trap) is sent.
Two 5% monitoring ports C1mo and C2mo are used to check the transmitted signal of
the C1-T and C2-T ports. If a fiber breaks, degrades, or a fiber intrusion is detected
during the operation, an alarm (SNMP traps) is sent.
Transmit Direction
The far-end RSM-OLM#1630 receives a composite data signal from a filter module
through the inputs C1-R and C2-R. The data signal is passed through the switch onto the
NE-T and NW-T connectors of the far-end module to the NE-R and NW-R connectors of
the opposite connected near-end RSM-OLM#1630. A pilot laser signal of the far-end
RSM-OLM#1630 is split by the pilot transmitter and coupled over the active network line
NE-T and standby network line NW-R to the near-end RSM-OLM#1630.
653
RSM-OLM#1630
The data signal is passed from the NE-R and NW-R of the near-end RSM-OLM#1630
through the switch onto the outputs C1-T and C2-T for transmission to the linked filter
module.
The received pilot laser signals on the NE-R and NW-T ports of the near-end RSMOLM#1630 are separated from the network line using internal filters.
and forwarded to the control unit for continuous measurement and evaluation.
Two monitoring ports C1mo and C2mo provide 5% optical power for monitoring the
transmitted signal of the C1-T and C2-T ports. If a fiber breaks, degrades, or a fiber
intrusion is detected during the operation, an alarm (SNMP traps) is sent.
Signal Path (Fault Detected)

The RSM-OLM#1630 at the near end has to be connected to another RSM-OLM#1630 at
the far end. Figure 381 shows the situation when a fault occurs in the NE direction at the
near end and illustrates the signal paths of the data signal and the 1630 nm pilot laser
signal. The signal path is described below.
Figure 381: Operating Scheme of an near-end and far-end RSM-OLM#1630
working in Fault Detected Operation
near-end
Client ports C
C1-R
C2-R
far-end
Network ports N
RSM-OLM
Switch Tx
OSF
OSF
NE-T
NE-R
NW-T
NW-R
Switch Rx
C2-T
C1-T
coupler
OSF
C2-T
C1-R
STBY
STBY
coupler
coupler
OSF
ACT
C1-T
Client ports C
RSM-OLM
Switch Rx
NE-R
NE-T
OSF
coupler
NW-R
ACT
Switch Tx
OSF
NW-T
C2-R
OSF
C1 mo
C1 mo
R-NWACT
C2 mo
R-NESTBY
R-NWACT
R-NESTBY
C2 mo
Control Unit
Control Unit
Data traffic
Pilot laser signal
- signal sent on asN
NW-T
active port (ACT)
- signal sent on asNE-R
standby port (STBY)
In this example the NW direction is the active line and NE is the standby line. When a
fault is detected in the NE direction the near-end RSM-OLM#1630 routes high priority
traffic from C1 through the switch onto NW to the connected far-end RSM-OLM#1630. In
this case the low priority traffic of C2 is disconnected.
Receive Direction
The near-end RSM-OLM#1630 receives a composite data signal from a filter module
through the inputs C1-R and C2-R. In case of a fault in the NE direction, the data signal
of C1-R is routed across the switch and directed onto the NW-T connector of the nearend module to the NW-R connector of the opposite connected far-end module. The data
signal received on C2-R is disconnected. A pilot laser signal of the near-end RSMOLM#1630 is splitted by the pilot transmitter. These signals are routed to the active
network line NW-T and standby network line NE-R to the far-end RSM-OLM#1630.
654
RSM-OLM#1630
The data signal is passed from the NW-R port of the far-end module across the switch
onto the output C1-T for transmission to the linked filter module.
The received pilot signals on the NW-R and NE-T ports of the far-end RSM-OLM#1630
Transmit Direction
The far-end RSM-OLM#1630 receives a composite data signal from a filter module
through the inputs C1-R and C2-R. The data signal of C1-R is routed across the switch
and directed onto the NW-T connector of the far-end module to the NW-R connector of
the opposite connected near-end module. The data signal received on C2-R is
disconnected. A pilot laser signal of the far-end RSM-OLM#1630 is splitted by the pilot
transmitter. These signals are routed to the active network line NW-T and standby
network line NE-R to the near-end RSM-OLM#1630.
The data signal is passed from the NW-R port of the near-end module across the switch
onto the output C1-T for transmission to the linked filter module.
The received pilot signals on the NW-R and NE-T ports of the near-end RSM-OLM#1630
Slot Positions
The RSM-OLM#1630 may be placed into following shelves and slots:
SH9HU, 3 through 18
SH7HU/SH7HU-R, 1 through 20
The RSM-OLM#1630 cannot be used together with the OSC as both use the same
wavelength for different purposes.
LED Indicators
The RSM-OLM#1630 has tri-color LED indicators on the faceplate. The LED colors
represent different operating status. For details, refer to Chapter 3 of the latest
655
RSM-OLM#1630
Labeling
Module Type Label

Figure 382: Example of an RSM-OLM#1630 Module Type Label
Certification Label
Figure 383: Example of an RSM-OLM#1630 Certification Label
Warranty Label
Figure 384: Example of an RSM-OLM#1630 Warranty Label
656
RSM-SF#1510
Specifications
RSM-SF#1510
Figure 385: RSM-SF#1510 Front View
657
RSM-SF#1510
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the RSM-SF#1510 faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 90: RSM-SF#1510 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
On
power supply status
NW
network output port

west
Lk
NE
network output port

east
NW

west
C1
client port
NE

east
Note
The RSM-SF#1510 is a converted FSP 2000 Release 6.6 module as

behavior.
Description
The Single-Fiber Remote Switch Module working at 1510 nm (RSM-SF#1510) enables
line protection in case of fiber break.
The RSM-SF#1510 only works in tandem with an RSM-SF#1310. The RSM-SF#1510 is
connected with the RSM-SF#1310 for data traffic of the network port directed over one of
the two network fibers. The fibers are named NW and NE. One fiber line operates as the
working line and the other serves as the backup path.
A pilot laser signal monitors the availability of the network fibers between the near-end
and far-end network element. The laser works at a wavelength of
1510 nm. The pilot laser signal carries information about the position of the switch. A
software routine analyzes this information and ensures that the position of the RSMSF#1510 is identical to the RSM-SF#1310.
The network fibers are monitored at all times. If communication is interrupted in the
working line the module links the communication to the backup line automatically.
658
Simultaneous and permanent availability monitoring of the network fibers
Automatic switching from the working line to the backup path when a fiber breaks
Provide line protection for Single-Fiber-Systems
Allow signaling of switch states and parameters in conjunction with the RSMSF#1310
RSM-SF#1510
Two operation modes (auto and locked mode)
Can be controlled locally via the push button on the faceplate
Network interfaces east/west application and client interface using full duplex LC
Modes of Operation
The RSM-SF#1510 supports the following operation modes:
Automatic mode
Lock mode
Automatic Mode
Automatic mode is the standard mode that enables the automatic switching function of
the RSM-SF#1510.
After power on, and if all lines are connected and a signal is applied to the RSM-SF#1510,
it will run in automatic mode. One line is the working line while the other line operates as
the backup path. The RSM-SF#1510 continuously monitors the availability of the NW
and NE line. If the working line (e.g. NW line) breaks and the backup path (e.g. NE line) is
functioning, the RSM-SF#1510 automatically moves the communication to the NE line.
This switching occurs in less than 50 ms. After the NW line has recovered, no further
switching takes place so that the NE line continues to operate as the working line.
Lock Mode
Lock mode is used for line testing and for servicing purposes. It can be enabled either for
the current working line or for the current backup path.
If the working line is locked, communication cannot be switched to the backup path. If
lock mode is enabled for a current backup path by pressing the respective button, the
RSM-SF#1510 checks the availability of the backup path and - if the line is in working
order - switches the communication to it, so that it becomes the locked working path.
After that, automatic switching to the backup path is impossible.
Both operation modes can be set by using the push button on the faceplate.
Push Buttons
There are three push buttons on the faceplate to control the RSM-SF#1510 locally. Table
91 describes function and effect of these push buttons. If required, press and release this
button.
659
RSM-SF#1510
Table 91: RSM-SF#1510 Push Button Description
Label
Function
Effect
Lk-W
Locks to network line west

(NW)
Line NW is active and switch is locked

to line NW.
Lk-E
Locks to network line east

(NE)
Line NE is active and switch is locked

to line NE.
Auto
Enables automatic
protection switching
The module runs in automatic mode.
Signal Path
The RSM-SF#1510 receives a composite data signal from a filter module through C1 and
feeds it via the switch into NW and NE. The pilot laser signal 1510 nm is splitted by the
pilot transmitter and coupled onto NW and NE as well. The NW and NE signals are
transported over the network lines to the corresponding network elements.
The RSM-SF#1310 receives data signal and pilot laser signal from the RSM-SF#1510,
separates pilot laser signal from data signal using internal filters. The data signal is
passed through the switch onto C1 for transmission to the linked filter module. The pilot
laser signal is converted by the pilot receivers from optical to electrical signal and
forwarded to the decision logic. There, it is analyzed if both receivers get a pilot laser
signal and if the switch on the other side of the link is still in the same position.
The RSM-SF#1510 works in tandem with the RSM-SF#1310. Hence, the pilot signal and
the data signal of the RSM-SF#1310 run opposite to the signals of the RSM-SF#1510 as
shown in .
Slot Positions
The RSM-SF#1510 can be placed into following shelves and slots:
SH9HU, 3 through 18
Labeling
660
RSM-SF#1510
Module Type Label

Figure 386: Example of an RSM-SF#1510 Module Type Label
Certification Label
Figure 387: Example of an RSM-SF#1510 Certification Label
Warranty Label
Figure 388: Example of an RSM-SF#1510 Warranty Label
661
RSM-SF#1310
LED Indicators
The RSM-SF#1510 has tri-color LED indicators on the faceplate. The LED colors
represent different operating status. For details, refer to the FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2
Specifications
RSM-SF#1310
Figure 389: Example of a RSM-SF#1310 Front View
662
RSM-SF#1310
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the RSM-SF#1310 faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 92: RSM-SF#1310 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
On
power supply status
NW
network output port

west
Lk
NE
network output port

east
NW

west
C1
client port
NE

east
Note
The RSM-SF is a converted FSP 2000 Release 6.6 module as indicated

by the asterisk printed on its faceplate. The module provides full FSP
2000 Release 6.6 functionality. Monitoring and troubleshooting follow
FSP 2000 Release 6.6 rules. This mainly concerns ALS and LED
behavior.
Description
The single-fiber remote switch module working at 1310 nm (RSM-SF#1310) enables line
protection in case of fiber break.
The RSM-SF#1310 only works in tandem with an RSM-SF#1510. The RSM-SF#1310 is
connected with the RSM-SF#1510 for the data-traffic of the network port directed over
one of the two network fibers. The fibers are named NW and NE. One fiber line operates
as working line and the other serves as backup path.
A pilot laser signal monitors the availability of the network fibers between the near-end
and far-end network element. The laser works at a wavelength of
1310 nm. The pilot laser signal carries information about the position of the switch. A
software routine is analyzing these information and ensures that the RSM-SF#1310 has
an identical position like the RSM-SF#1510.
The network fibers are monitored at all times. If communication is interrupted in the
working line the module links the communication to the backup line automatically.
Simultaneous and permanent availability monitoring of the network fibers
Automatic switching from the working line to the backup path when a fiber breaks
Provide line protection for Single-Fiber-Systems
Allow signaling of switch-states and parameters in conjunction with the RSMSF#1510
663
RSM-SF#1310
Two operation modes (auto and locked mode)
Can be controlled locally via the push button on the faceplate
Network interfaces east/west application and client interface using full duplex LC
Modes of Operation
The RSM-SF#1310 supports following operation modes:
Automatic mode
Lock mode
Automatic Mode
Automatic mode is the standard mode that enables the automatic switching function of
the RSM-SF#1310.
After power on, and if all lines are connected and a signal is applied to the RSM-SF#1310,
it will run in automatic mode. One line is the working line while the other line operates as
backup path. The RSM-SF#1310 monitors the availability of the NW and NE line
permanently. If the working line (e.g. NW line) breaks and the backup path (e.g. NE line)
is functioning, the RSM-SF#1310 will move the communication to the NE line
automatically. This switching occurs in less than 50 ms. After the NW line has
recovered, no further switching takes place so that the NE line continues to operate as
the working line.
Lock Mode
Lock mode is used for line testing and for servicing purposes. It can be enabled either for
the currently working line or for the currently backup line.
If the working line is locked, the communication cannot be switched to the backup path. If
lock mode is enabled for a current backup path by pressing the respective button, the
RSM-SF#1310 will check the availability of the backup path and - if the line is in working
order - will switch the communication to it, so that it becomes the locked working path.
After that, automatic switching to the backup path is impossible.
Both operation modes can be set by the push button on the faceplate.
Push Buttons
There are three push buttons on the faceplate to control the RSM-SF#1310 locally. Table
93 describes function and effect of these push buttons. If required, press and release this
button with a pointed tool.
664
RSM-SF#1310
Table 93: RSM-SF#1310 Push Button Description
Label
Function
Effect
Lk-W
Locks to network line west

(NW)
Line NW is active and switch is locked

to line NW.
Lk-E
Locks to network line east

(NE)
Line NE is active and switch is locked

to line NE.
Auto
Enables automatic
protection switching
The module runs in automatic mode.
Signal Path
The RSM-SF#1310 receives a composite data signal from a filter module through C1 and
feeds it via the switch into NW and NE. The pilot laser signal 1310 nm is splitted by the
pilot transmitter and coupled onto NW and NE as well. The NW and NE signals are
transported over the network lines to the corresponding network elements.
The RSM-SF#1510 receives data signal and pilot laser signal from the RSM-SF#1310,
separates pilot laser signal from data signal using internal filters. The data signal is
passed through the switch onto C1 for transmission to the linked filter module. The pilot
laser signal is converted by the pilot receivers from optical to electrical signal and
forwarded to the decision logic. There, it is analyzed if both receivers get a pilot laser
signal and if the switch on the other side of the link is still in the same position.
The RSM-SF#1310 works in tandem with the RSM-SF#1510. Hence, the pilot signal and
the data signal of the RSM-SF#1510 run opposite to the signals of the RSM-SF#1310 as
shown below.
Figure 390: RSM-SF#1310 working in Tandem with RSM-SF#1510
Slot Positions
The RSM-SF#1310 can be placed into following shelves and slots:
SH9HU, 3 through 18
665
RSM-SF#1310
LED Indicators
The RSM-SF#1310 has tri-color LED indicators on the faceplate. The LED colors
represent different operating status. For details, refer to Chapter 3 of the latest
Labeling
Module Type Label

Figure 391: Example of an RSM-SF#1310 Module Type Label
Certification Label
Figure 392: Example of an RSM-SF#1310 Certification Label
666
Warranty Label
Figure 393: Example of an RSM-SF#1310 Warranty Label
Specifications

Figure 394: OSCM-PN Front View
667
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the OSCM-PN faceplate and their meanings.
Table 94: OSCM-PN Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical and Electrical Ports
Power supply status of the module
Transmit
Mod
Receive
NW

west
NW
Network port west
NE

east
NE
Network port east
C3
Client Ethernet port 3
C2
C1
Description
The OSCM-PN is an optical supervisory channel module with optical line monitoring and
dual pluggable optical network interfaces for east-west applications.
This module provides an out-of-band, full-duplex OSC for remote system operation,
network monitoring and control. Using the OSC, all NEs can be connected to provide a
DCN for network management. The OSCM-PN is a central component of the DCN.
The pluggable network interfaces of the module allow flexibility to configure the OSC for
different wavelengths or fiber span reach.
The OSCM-PN switches the OSC signal to/from electrical 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet
signals. The module has an integrated Ethernet switch and three Ethernet RJ-45
electrical client ports. The OSCM-PN performs layer-2-switching between the electrical
and optical Ethernet ports. In addition, this module integrates an optical line monitoring
facility to monitor fiber breaks and fluctuations in fiber attenuation. The control logic
checks the conditions of the network lines east and west permanently and
simultaneously using a pilot laser at each end of the link. The pilot lasers of the near-end
OSCM-PN and far-end OSCM-PN modules on the east and west side of the optical ring
ensure that the appropriate pilot channels function independently. In case of fiber
degradation or fiber break, an alarm is raised. If there is a physical break in the OSC ring,
the restoration time of the OSC will be less than 1 second.
The OSCM-PN works only in conjunction with the corresponding OSFM or RAMAN
amplifier in both directions. The OSFMs must match the SFP transceivers selected for
use with the OSCM-PN optical ports.
Network interfaces and client interfaces are configurable. See the Provisioning and
Operations Manual of the FSP 3000R7 documentation suite for configuration information.
Additionally, the OSCM-PN can be employed:
668
with the SFP/FE/C1510U/SM/LC and in conjunction with the OSFM+#1510
with the SFP/2G5U/#Dxxxx.xxU/SM/LC#Dxx (only C band) and in conjunction with

the appropriate port of an DWDM filter (40CSM, 4CSM e.g.) to use one DWDM
channel for DCN communication (32/40ch systems only)
to provide the OSC as an integral part of the laser safety mechanisms in Raman
amplifier configurations using the SFP/FE/D1528.77E/SM/LC
(The Raman amplifier will only comply with Class 1M laser safety requirements if the
OSC is present and detected.)
for DCN communication in single-fiber working configurations using the

SFP/FE/C1490U/SM/LC or SFP/FE/C1490V/SM/LC as well as
SFP/FE/C1510U/SM/LC (to be used in conjunction with the OSFM+#1490-SFA or
OSFM+#1510-SFB filter module)
The OSCM-PN can be used in point-to-point, linear add/drop and ring topologies. The
OSCM-PN can also be used to configure protected applications such as well as in dualhomed feeder applications.
Features
Supports various SFP transceivers for OSC topology and distances
Depending on the SFP transceivers used, enhanced un-amplified OSC budget of 40

dB/46 dB (or 37 dB/43 dB span budget including OSFM losses)
SFP transceiver for an OSC wavelength of 1528.77 nm with extended reach to be

used in Raman amplified links
SFP transceivers for an OSC wavelength of 1490 nm with very long reach or ultra
long reach to be used in combination with the 1510nm OSC wavelength for DCN
communication in single-fiber working applications
Versatile switched protection (in conjunction with the VSM, service restoration time
<50ms)
Legacy ALS scheme according to ADVA Optical Networking standard for OSC pilot
laser on the network ports
Optical line monitoring (OLM)
Three Ethernet-switched electrical ports (10/100Base-TX acc. to IEEE 802.3)

supporting automatic MDI/MDI-X capabilities
Type 8P8C (RJ45) female receptacles with two LAN port LEDs
Switching data rates of 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s (Fast Ethernet)
Enabling/disabling the ports
See Figure 395 for the client Ethernet port pinouts on the OSCM-PN.
669

Figure 395: 8P8C Panel Jack Pinout on the OSCM-PN
8P8C Panel Jack
Pin
Number
Signal
Signal
Direction
TXD+
output
TXD-
output
RXD+
input
no connection
no connection
RXD-
no connection
no connection
input
A standard shielded Category 5 cable must be used for making management

connections.
Two Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant interfaces for east and west
direction each using duplex LC receptacle connectors for fiber termination
Fiber type: SM G.652
125 Mbit/s data rate only
Fast Ethernet as a protocol
Independent link establishment on network port east and west
Adding/removing an SFP transceiver without affecting service on the other interface
Support of the following SFP transceivers:

CWDM types
DWDM types
SFP/FE/C1490U/SM/LC
SFP/FE/C1510U/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/#Dxxxx.xxU/SM/LC#Dxx
(only C band is supported)
SFP/FE/C1630U/SM/LC
SFP/FE/C1490V/SM/LC
SFP/FE/C1510V/SM/LC
Note
670
specifically intended for the OSCM-PN. These must be approved by
ADVA Optical Networking. If you use non-approved SFPs in conjunction
with the OSCM-PN, ADVA Optical Networking cannot guarantee the
behavior of the OSCM-PN.
Reset Button
The OSCM-PN including the Ethernet switch can be reset locally using the reset button
on the faceplate. If required, press and release this button with a pointed tool. The green
power LED comes on and the module starts up. The OSC will be interrupted by a reset.
Interworking
Interworking with
RAMAN-C10 amplifier
all released CWDM and DWDM network architectures
all released hybrid network architectures
Signal Path
Figure 396 shows a simplified functional block diagram and illustrates the path of the
OSC signal. The OSC signal is carried by the pilot laser. It uses a wavelength out of the
payload wavelength band, typically at 1490nm or 1510 nm (depends on the system
configuration).
Figure 396: Operating Scheme of the OSCM-PN
Receive Direction
The network port receivers (Rx) receive the modulated OSC through the NW-R and NER labeled connectors. The SFP converts the optical signal to an internal electrical signal
and separates the Ethernet and pilot signals. The Ethernet signal is forwarded to the
integrated Ethernet switch that switches the OSC traffic to the other client Ethernet
ports. Management traffic may be directly forwarded to the complementary network port
671

or client RJ-45 ports labeled C1 to C3. Additionally, local management traffic may be
forwarded on the module backplane to SCU.
The received pilot laser signals are measured and evaluated permanently by the control
unit. If a fiber breaks or degrades, an alarm will be raised and forwarded towards the
management via SNMP traps.
Transmit Direction
Management information from the local network element enters the module through the
backplane or through client Ethernet ports C1 to C3. The integrated Ethernet controllers
switch the local management traffic and forward the Ethernet frames to the network
ports. The SFP in each network port converts the electrical Ethernet signal into an optical
signal based on the wavelength of the SFP. The optical Ethernet signal is transmitted as
the OSC through the NW-T and NE-T connectors.
Slot Positions
The OSCM-PN can be placed into following shelves and slots:
SH9HU, 3 through 18
LED Indicators
The OSCM-PN has tri-color LED indicators on the faceplate. The LED colors represent
Labeling
Labels on the module cover provide module specific information, as shown in Figure 397,
Figure 398 and Figure 399.
672
Module Type Label

Figure 397: Example of an OSCM-PN Module Type Label
Certification Label
Figure 398: Example of an OSCM-PN Certification Label
Warranty Label
Figure 399: Example of an OSCM-PN Warranty Label
Specifications
673

Figure 400: OSCM-PN Front View
674
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the OSCM-PN faceplate and their meanings.
Table 95: OSCM-PN Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Transmit
Mod
Receive
NW

west
NW
Network port west
NE

east
NE
Network port east
C3
C2
C1
Description
The OSCM-PN is an optical supervisory channel module with optical line monitoring and
dual pluggable optical network interfaces for east-west applications.
network monitoring and control. Using the OSC, all NEs can be connected to provide a
DCN for network management. The OSCM-PN is a central component of the DCN.
The pluggable network interfaces of the module allow flexibility to configure the OSC for
different wavelengths or fiber span reach.
The OSCM-PN switches the OSC signal to/from electrical 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet
signals. The module has an integrated Ethernet switch and three Ethernet RJ-45
electrical client ports. The OSCM-PN performs layer-2-switching between the electrical
and optical Ethernet ports. In addition, this module integrates an optical line monitoring
facility to monitor fiber breaks and fluctuations in fiber attenuation. The control logic
checks the conditions of the network lines east and west permanently and
OSCM-PN and far-end OSCM-PN modules on the east and west side of the optical ring
ensure that the appropriate pilot channels function independently. In case of fiber
degradation or fiber break, an alarm is raised. If there is a physical break in the OSC ring,
the restoration time of the OSC will be less than 1 second.
The OSCM-PN works only in conjunction with the corresponding OSFM or RAMAN
amplifier in both directions. The OSFMs must match the SFP transceivers selected for
use with the OSCM-PN optical ports.
Network interfaces and client interfaces are configurable. See the Provisioning and
Additionally, the OSCM-PN can be employed:
with the SFP/FE/C1510U/SM/LC and in conjunction with the OSFM+#1510
675
with the SFP/2G5U/#Dxxxx.xxU/SM/LC#Dxx (only C band) and in conjunction with

the appropriate port of an DWDM filter (40CSM, 4CSM e.g.) to use one DWDM
channel for DCN communication (32/40ch systems only)
to provide the OSC as an integral part of the laser safety mechanisms in Raman
amplifier configurations using the SFP/FE/D1528.77E/SM/LC
(The Raman amplifier will only comply with Class 1M laser safety requirements if the
OSC is present and detected.)
for DCN communication in single-fiber working configurations using the

SFP/FE/C1490U/SM/LC or SFP/FE/C1490V/SM/LC as well as
SFP/FE/C1510U/SM/LC (to be used in conjunction with the OSFM+#1490-SFA or
OSFM+#1510-SFB filter module)
The OSCM-PN can be used in point-to-point, linear add/drop and ring topologies. The
OSCM-PN can also be used to configure protected applications such as well as in dualhomed feeder applications.
Features
Supports various SFP transceivers for OSC topology and distances
Depending on the SFP transceivers used, enhanced un-amplified OSC budget of 40

dB/46 dB (or 37 dB/43 dB span budget including OSFM losses)
SFP transceiver for an OSC wavelength of 1528.77 nm with extended reach to be

used in Raman amplified links
SFP transceivers for an OSC wavelength of 1490 nm with very long reach or ultra
long reach to be used in combination with the 1510nm OSC wavelength for DCN
communication in single-fiber working applications
<50ms)

See Figure 401 for the client Ethernet port pinouts on the OSCM-PN.
676

Figure 401: 8P8C Panel Jack Pinout on the OSCM-PN
8P8C Panel Jack
Pin
Number
Signal
Signal
Direction
TXD+
output
TXD-
output
RXD+
input
no connection
no connection
RXD-
no connection
no connection
input

connections.
Two Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant interfaces for east and west
direction each using duplex LC receptacle connectors for fiber termination
Adding/removing an SFP transceiver without affecting service on the other interface
Support of the following SFP transceivers:

CWDM types
DWDM types
SFP/FE/C1490U/SM/LC
SFP/FE/C1510U/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/#Dxxxx.xxU/SM/LC#Dxx
(only C band is supported)1
SFP/FE/C1490V/SM/LC
SFP/FE/Dxxxxx.xxV/SM/LC 1
SFP/FE/C1510V/SM/LC
Note
specifically intended for the OSCM-PN, approved by ADVA Optical
Networking. If you use non-approved SFPs with the OSCM-PN, ADVA
Optical Networking cannot guarantee the behavior of the OSCM-PN.
1The signal from these DWDM SFPs must not pass ROADMs.
677
Interworking
Interworking with
RAMAN-C10 amplifier
all released CWDM and DWDM network architectures
all released hybrid network architectures
Signal Path
Figure 402 shows a simplified functional block diagram and illustrates the path of the
OSC signal. The OSC signal is carried by the pilot laser. It uses a wavelength out of the
payload wavelength band, typically at 1490nm or 1510 nm (depends on the system
configuration).
Figure 402: Operating Scheme of the OSCM-PN
Receive Direction
The network port receivers (Rx) receive the modulated OSC through the NW-R and NER labeled connectors. The SFP converts the optical signal to an internal electrical signal
and separates the Ethernet and pilot signals. The Ethernet signal is forwarded to the
integrated Ethernet switch that switches the OSC traffic to the other client Ethernet
ports. Management traffic may be directly forwarded to the complementary network port
or client RJ-45 ports labeled C1 to C3. Additionally, local management traffic may be
forwarded on the module backplane to SCU.
unit. If a fiber breaks or degrades, an alarm will be raised and forwarded towards the
management via SNMP traps.
678
Transmit Direction
Management information from the local network element enters the module through the
backplane or through client Ethernet ports C1 to C3. The integrated Ethernet controllers
switch the local management traffic and forward the Ethernet frames to the network
ports. The SFP in each network port converts the electrical Ethernet signal into an optical
signal based on the wavelength of the SFP. The optical Ethernet signal is transmitted as
the OSC through the NW-T and NE-T connectors.
Battery
The OSCM-PN includes a coin type vanadium pentoxide lithium battery (VL battery) as a
Note

equipment trouble.
Slot Positions
The OSCM-PN can be placed into following shelves and slots:
SH9HU, 3 through 18
LED Indicators
The OSCM-PN has tri-color LED indicators on the faceplate. The LED colors represent
Labeling
Labels on the module cover provide module specific information, as shown in Figure 403,
679
Module Type Label

Figure 403: Example of an OSCM-PN Module Type Label
Certification Label
Figure 404: Example of an OSCM-PN Certification Label
Warranty Label
Figure 405: Example of an OSCM-PN Warranty Label
Specifications
680
OSCM-V#1630
OSCM-V#1630
Figure 406: Example of an OSCM-V#1630 Front View
681
OSCM-V#1630
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the OSCM-V#1630 faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 96: OSCM-V#1630 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Transmit
Mod
Receive
Network port
C3
C2
C1
Description
The OSCM-V#1630 is an Optical Supervisory Channel Module with optical line
monitoring and one very-long reach link distance optical network port.
network monitoring and control.
The OSCM-V#1630 converts the OSC signal to/from electrical 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet
signals. The module has an integrated Ethernet switch with routing processor and three
Ethernet ports on the client side. The OSCM-V#1630 performs layer-2-switching between
the electrical and optical Ethernet ports. In addition, this module integrates an optical line
monitoring facility to monitor fiber breaks and fluctuations of fiber attenuation. The control
logic checks the conditions of the network lines east and west permanently and
OSCM-V#1630 and far-end OSCM-V#1630 modules ensure that the appropriate pilot
channels function independently.
The OSCM-V#1630 works only in conjunction with the OSFM+#1630 in both directions.
The OSCM-V#1630 can be used in protected point-to-point, linear add/drop and ring
topologies as well as in dual-homed feeder applications.
Features
682
<50ms)
OSCM-V#1630

See Figure 407 for the client Ethernet port pinouts on the OSCM-V#1630.
Figure 407: 8P8C Panel Jack Pinout on the OSCM-V#1630
8P8C Panel Jack
Pin
Number
Signal
Signal
Direction
TXD+
output
TXD-
output
RXD+
input
no connection
no connection
RXD-
no connection
no connection
input

connections.
Independent link establishment
Fiber type: single-mode G.652
Reset Button
The OSCM-V#1630 including the Ethernet switch can be reset locally using the reset
button on the faceplate. If required, press and release this button with a pointed tool. The
green power LED comes on and the module starts up. The OSC will be interrupted by a
reset.
683
OSCM-V#1630
Signal Path
Figure 408 shows the functional block diagram (simplified) and illustrates the path of the
OSC signal, which is described below. The OSC is carried by the pilot laser. It uses a
wavelength of 1630nm which is out of the payload wavelength range.
Figure 408: Operating Scheme of an OSCM-V#1630
Receive Direction
The network port receivers (Rx) receive the modulated OSC through the N-R and N-R
labeled connectors network elements. Optical to electrical conversion takes place. After
conversion, the pilot laser signal is separated from the electrical Ethernet signals (OSC).
The OSC is forwarded to the integrated Ethernet switch that switches the OSC traffic to
the appropriate client Ethernet ports. Management information exits the module through
the client Ethernet ports labeled C1 to C3.
unit. If a fiber breaks or degrades, an alarm (NSMP traps) will be set off.
Transmit Direction
Management information from the near-end network element enters the module through
the client Ethernet ports labeled C1 to C3. The integrated Ethernet switch collects the
management information and passes it on via the control unit to the pilot lasers
(transmitters Tx) of the network ports. The transmitter converts the electrical Ethernet
signal back to an optical signal at a specific wavelength and transmits the modulated
OSC through the N-T and N-T connectors to the network elements.
Battery
The OSCM-V#1630 includes a coin type vanadium pentoxide lithium battery (VL battery)
as a rechargeable, on-board power source for backing up memory data. This enables the
684
OSCM-V#1630
Note

equipment trouble.
Slot Positions
The OSCM-V#1630 can be placed into following shelves and slots:
SH9HU, 3 through 18
LED Indicators
The OSCM-V#1630 has tri-color LED indicators on the faceplate. The LED colors
Labeling
Module Type Label

Figure 409: Example of an OSCM-V#1630 Module Type Label
685
OSCM-V#1630
Certification Label
Figure 410: Example of an OSCM-V#1630 Certification Label
Warranty Label
Figure 411: Example of an OSCM-V#1630 Warranty Label
Specifications
686
2OSCM-V#1630
2OSCM-V#1630
Figure 412: Example of an 2OSCM-V#1630 Front View
687
2OSCM-V#1630
Faceplate Markings
the following table lists all abbreviations on the 2OSCM-V#1630 faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 97: 2OSCM-V#1630 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical and Electrical

Ports
Transmit
Mod
Receive
NW
NW
Network port west
NE
NE
Network port east
C3
Client Ethernet port

3
C2

2
C1

1
Description
The 2OSCM-V#1630 is an Optical Supervisory Channel Module with optical line
monitoring and two very-long reach link distance optical network ports for east-west
applications.
network monitoring and control.
The 2OSCM-V#1630 converts the OSC signal to/from electrical 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet
signals. The module has an integrated Ethernet switch with routing processor and three
Ethernet ports on the client side. The 2OSCM-V#1630 performs layer-2-switching
between the electrical and optical Ethernet ports. In addition, this module integrates an
optical line monitoring facility to monitor fiber breaks and fluctuations of fiber attenuation.
The control logic checks the conditions of the network lines east and west permanently
and simultaneously using a pilot laser at each end of the link. The pilot lasers of the nearend 2OSCM-V#1630 and far-end 2OSCM-V#1630 modules on the east and west side of
the optical ring ensure that the appropriate pilot channels function independently. In case
of fiber degradation or fiber break, an alarm is raised. If there is a physical break in the
OSC ring, the restoration time of the OSC will be less than 1 second.
The 2OSCM-V#1630 works only in conjunction with the corresponding OSFM.
The 2OSCM-V#1630 can be used in protected point-to-point, linear add/drop and ring
topologies as well as in dual-homed feeder applications.
688
2OSCM-V#1630
Features
<50ms)

See Figure 407 for the client Ethernet port pinouts on the OSCM-V#1630.
Figure 413: 8P8C Panel Jack Pinout on the OSCM-V#1630
8P8C Panel Jack
Pin
Number
Signal
Signal
Direction
TXD+
output
TXD-
output
RXD+
input
no connection
no connection
RXD-
no connection
no connection
input

connections.
689
2OSCM-V#1630
Fiber type: single-mode G.652
Reset Button
The 2OSCM-V#1630 including the Ethernet switch can be reset locally using the reset
button on the faceplate. If required, press and release this button with a pointed tool. The
green power LED comes on and the module starts up. The OSC will be interrupted by a
reset.
Signal Path
Figure 414 shows the functional block diagram (simplified) and illustrates the path of the
OSC signal, which is described below. The OSC is carried by the pilot laser. It uses a
wavelength out of the payload wavelength band 1630 nm.
Figure 414: Operating Scheme of a 2OSCM-V#1630
Receive Direction
The network port receivers (Rx) receive the modulated OSC through the NW-R and NER labeled connectors from the west and east network elements. Optical to electrical
conversion takes place. After conversion, the pilot laser signal is separated from the
electrical Ethernet signals (OSC). The OSC is forwarded to the integrated Ethernet
switch that switches the OSC traffic to the appropriate client Ethernet ports.
Management information exits the module through the client Ethernet ports labeled C1 to
C3. The received pilot laser signals are measured and evaluated permanently by the
control unit. If a fiber breaks or degrades, an alarm (NSMP traps) will be set off.
Transmit Direction
Management information from the near-end network element enters the module through
the client Ethernet ports labeled C1 to C3. The integrated Ethernet switch collects the
management information and passes it on via the control unit to the pilot lasers
(transmitters Tx) of the network ports.
690
2OSCM-V#1630
Each transmitter converts the electrical Ethernet signal back to an optical signal at a
specific wavelength and transmits the modulated OSC through the NW-T and NE-T
connectors to the west and east network elements.
Battery
The 2OSCM-V#1630 includes a coin type vanadium pentoxide lithium battery (VL
battery) as a rechargeable, on-board power source for backing up memory data. This
enables the module to re-establish automatically communication after power failures. The
battery usually not needs to be replaced during the life of the product. However, when a
battery need to be replaced, please contact your equipment manufacturer.
Note

equipment trouble.
Slot Positions
The 2OSCM-V#1630 can be placed into following shelves and slots:
SH9HU, 3 through 18
LED Indicators
The 2OSCM-V#1630 has tri-color LED indicators on the faceplate. The LED colors
Labeling
691
2OSCM-V#1630
Module Type Label

Figure 415: Example of an 2OSCM-V#1630 Module Type Label
Certification Label
Figure 416: Example of an 2OSCM-V#1630 Certification Label
Warranty Label
Figure 417: Example of an 2OSCM-V#1630 Warranty Label
Specifications
692

Figure 418: Example of NCU-A Front View
Variants:
NCU-A
NCU-B
NCU-GDPS
NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS modules uses the same faceplate.
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the NCU faceplate and their meanings.
Figure 419: NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Electrical Ports
Ser
Serial port
Mod
USB
USB port
Ethernet port
Description
The network control unit (NCU) provides system management capabilities and network
connection to the FSP 3000R7 system. Depending on the desired capability of the
network element (NE), the NCU-A, NCU-B or NCU-GDPS is used. These module
variants have the same basic functionality and design. Therefore, this description applies
to all module variants. Table 98 points out module specific features.
The NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS are single-slot 2.5 HU high plug-in modules, that
act as the hardware interface between the different modules of the system and the
equipment connected to their management interfaces.
693

Only one NCU-A, NCU-B or NCU-GDPS is supported per NE. One NCU-A, NCU-B or
NCU-GDPS is able to manage a complete NE. It must be installed in the master shelf
and requires a shelf control unit (SCU or SCU-S) in each (master + any additional) shelf
to communicate with the modules.
An NCU communicates with the SCU in the master shelf using an internal system bus.
Exchange of information between the SCU in the master shelf and the SCUs in the
additional shelves takes place over their management fiber ring.
The NCU-A, NCU-B or NCU-GDPS can be accessed through a serial DE9M, USB or
Ethernet port. Each NCU variant must be configured for the specific operating
environment.
Table 98 shows management capabilities of the NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS
modules.
Table 98: NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS Management Capabilities
Features
NCU-A
NCU-B
NCU-GDPS
CWDM support
DWDM support
Hybrid support
WCC /xTCC support (core type)
WCA /xTCA support (access type)
WCE /xTCE support (enterprise

type)
FC support
GDPS
0 X means supported; - means not supported

The main functions and features of the NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS are:
694
unit

between the NCU and all modules in all shelves (via SCUs interconnected using
Control of a complete FSP 3000R7 network element consisting of up to 20 7HU

shelves (1 master shelf and 19 main shelves)
Support of up to 10 ECCs
External module reset button
Interfaces
The NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS provide one serial DE9M port, one USB port and
one Ethernet port on their faceplates for management purposes.
Serial Port
The serial port can be disabled. The DE9M connector has the following pinout:
Figure 420: Male DE9M Connector Pinout (NCU-A, NCU-B, NCUGDPS)
Male DE9M Connector
Pin
Number
Signal
Signal Direction
DCD
Data carrier detect
RXD
Received data
TXD
Transmitted data
DTR
Data terminal ready
SG
Signal ground
DSR
Data set ready
RTS
Request To Send
CTS
Clear To Send
RI
not connected
Note

USB Port
The USB port labeled USB is a Mini-AB receptacle that complies with USB 2.0
specifications. It acts as a USB slave and provides only USB to RS232 emulation for a
direct serial connection to a management PC (acting as USB master). If necessary, this
port can be disabled.
695
Note

The port can accept either a Mini-A USB plug (to act as master; for future use) or a Mini-B
USB plug (to act as slave). Use only an USB cable with a standard A-plug on one end
and a slave mini B-plug on the other end.
For pinout of the Mini-AB receptacle, see Figure 421.
Figure 421: Mini-AB USB Type Receptacle Pinout (NCU-A, NCU-B,
NCU-GDPS)
Pin
Function
Description
V BUS
USB power
D-
Negative Data
signal
D+
Positive Data
signal
ID
Identification
GND
Signal ground
Most of the pins of a Mini-USB connector are the same as a standard USB connector,
Ethernet Port
The Ethernet port labeled C is a female 8P8C (RJ-45) receptacle and can be used to
connect the NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS to the NMS or the management PC, either
directly or via an external network, using standard Ethernet cabling. (Please refer to the
chapter about DCN for further information on the different ways to connect the NE to a
network.)
Standard shielded Category 5 cable should be used to connect to the Ethernet port.
See Figure 422 for the Ethernet port pinout on the NCU variants.
696

Figure 422: RJ-45 Panel Jack Pinout (NCU-A, NCU-B and NCUGDPS)
RJ-45 Panel Jack
Pin
Number
Signal
Signal
Direction
TXD+
output
TXD-
output
RXD+
input
no connection
no connection
RXD-
no connection
no connection
input
Operating System
The NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS run a Linux Distribution which is optimized for
embedded applications. Linux starts automatically when the FSP 3000R7 is powered up.
Linux needs to be configured for the specific environment. See the Provisioning and
The NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS supports the following management tools:
Craft Console
TL1
SNMP agent
Reset Button
In case of emergency, the NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS can be reset using the reset
button located on their faceplates. If required, press and release this button using a
pointed tool. The green power LED comes on and the module starts up. The optical
transmission system is not affected by a restart. For normal reboots, the SW
management functions should be used.

The NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS come with the following factory-default
configuration:
697

Table 99: NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS Factory-Default Settings
Option
Settings
DE9M/Mini-AB USB Port
19200 bit/s
8 bits
No parity
1 stop bit
No flow control
detect signal.)
LAN IP Addresses
192.168.1.1 (port C)
Subnet
255.255.255.0 (port C)
Default Gateway
0.0.0.0
Hostname
nemi
User Accounts
Account Passwords

CHGME.1A
Battery
The NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS modules include a coin type vanadium pentoxide
lithium battery (VL battery) as a rechargeable, on-board power source for backing up
memory data. This enables the module to re-establish automatically communication after
power failures. The battery usually not needs to be replaced during the life of the product.
However, when a battery need to be replaced, please contact your equipment
manufacturer.
Note

equipment trouble.
Slot Positions
The shelf containing the NCU-A, NCU-B or NCU-GDPS is the master shelf and should
have shelf ID 1. The NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS can be placed into following
shelves and slots:
698
SH7HU/SH7HU-R, slot A
SH1HU, slot A
LED indicators
The NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS have two LED indicators on the faceplate and two
LAN port LEDs per Ethernet Interface. The LED colors represent different operating
status. For details, refer to the FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Manual, Chapter 3.
Labeling
Module Type Label

Figure 423: Example of an NCU-A Module Type Label
Warranty Label
Figure 424: Example of an NCU-A Warranty Label
Specifications
699
700
Chapter 14
Reconfigurable Optical Layer
Device Hardware
This chapter provides the descriptions of reconfigurable optical layer devices for the FSP
3000R7 system.
The descriptions are merely supposed to convey a basic understanding of reconfigurable
optical layer devices to the reader. For detailed information on these devices and
ROADM-C40/40/OPM-3HU/2DC on p.703
This section describes the hardware and the function of the Reconfigurable Optical
Add/Drop Multiplexer (ROADM). The description includes the front view of the ROADM,
the explanation of the optical and management ports as well as product-specific details.
In addition, the ROADMs key features are presented and the signal path within the
device is briefly discussed. Information about accessories and labeling are also provided.
ROADM-C80/0/OPM on p.713
This section describes the physical features of and the functions provided by the
ROADM-C80/0/OPM module. Topics discussed in this section include front panel
markings, signal path, supported configurations, and key features. In addition examples
of the modules labeling are given.
8ROADM-C40/0/OPM on p.721
8ROADM-C40/0/OPM module. Topics discussed in this section include front panel
8ROADM-C80/0/OPM Module on p.726
701
CCM-C40/8 on p.748
This section describes the physical features of and the functions provided by the CCMC40/8 module. Topics discussed in this section include front panel markings, signal path,
supported configurations, and key features. In addition, examples of the modules
labeling are given.
CCM-C80/8 on p.757
This section describes the physical features of and the functions provided by the CCMC80/8 module. Topics discussed in this section include front panel markings, signal path,
supported configurations, and key features. In addition, examples of the modules
labeling are given.
4-OPCM on p.772
This section describes the function of the 4-OPCM module. The description includes the
front view of the module and the explanation of the optical ports. In addition, the modules
key features are presented, the signal path within the module is briefly discussed, and
examples of the modules labeling are given.
702
Figure 425: Overview of ROADM-C40/40/OPM-3HU-2DC
In the following subsections the front panel markings are explained, the function and the
hardware architecture of the ROADM-C40/40/OPM-3HU-2DC including power supply as
well as external interfaces are generally described, the key features are listed, and the
signal path is discussed.

The ROADM-C40/40/OPM-3HU-2DC upper and lower front panels are painted metal
with silk-screen text.
Figure 426 shows the upper and lower front panel marking. The upper front panel includes
the management pluggable interfaces, the network optical connections, and the client
add/drop connections. The lower front panel includes the circuit breakers, console port,
and status LED indicators.
Figure 426: Marking of the Upper and Lower Front Panel
Each client port is labeled with the port number (C1 to C40) as well as ADVA Optical
Networkings channel name (#D02 to #D32, #DC1 to #DC8) and the corresponding
frequency [THz] which the port supports. See also Client Port Description on p.709.
The following table lists all abbreviations on the upper front panel and their meanings.
703
Table 100: Markings on the Upper Front Panel
Optical Ports
Management Ports
Network port
MGT
Management ports
N-M
Output connector of the network

port (multiplexing)
MGT-U
Management uplink
port
N-D
Input connector of the network port

(demultiplexing)
MGT-D
Management
downlink port
Upgrade port
Transmit connector
U-M
Input connector of the upgrade port

(multiplexing)
Receive connector
U-D
Output connector of the upgrade

port (demultiplexing)
C1 to C40
Client ports 1 through 40
Cx*-M
Input (add) connector of the client

port Cx
Cx*-D
Output (drop) connector of the

client port Cx
Monitor
Monitor port
MONITOR-M
Connector for monitoring the

output signal of the N port
MONITOR-D
Connector for monitoring the input

signal of the N port
* x stands for the client ports C1 to C40.
The following table lists all abbreviations on the lower front panel and their meanings.
Table 101: Markings on the Lower Front Panel
LED Indicators
704
Power Supply
Management Port
Status of the internal

power
POWER
A
Power
feed A
D1
MOD
Status of the module
POWER
B
Power
feed B
POWER
A
Loss of power feed at

terminal A
POWER
B
Loss of power feed at

terminal B
Craft
interface
port
Table 101: Markings on the Lower Front Panel
MGT U
Status of the
management uplink port
MGT D
Status of the
management downlink
port
Status of the network

port
Status of the upgrade

port
Description
The ROADM-C40/40/OPM-3HU-2DC is a reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer
(ROADM) designed as a rack-mountable 3HU high standalone 19-inch shelf. It contains
all components necessary for its function. This includes power supplies, the ROADM
system, control electronics, management interfaces, and adaptor brackets.
The ROADM system is based on a planar lightwave circuit (PLC) architecture. It uses a
switch matrix, a VOA array, internal AWG Multiplexer/Demultiplexers, and an array of
photo-detectors for monitoring channel powers.
The ROADM-C40/40/OPM-3HU-2DC provides remote re-configurability of up to forty Cband channels in the range from #D02 to #D32 inc. #DC1 to #DC9, eliminating the need
for the user to physically be at the site. Using the NE management tools any channel, or
combination of channels can be re-configured on demand, to either pass-through, drop
and continue or add/drop at the FSP 3000R7 node without interrupting existing services.
The mechanism for re-configurability utilizes a switch matrix. The switch matrix allows
selection of pass-through inputs or the add inputs to transmit at the network output at the
individual channel level. As for the drop channels, each channel is continuously dropped
and passed-through the NE. This provides the ability to provision drop-and-continue
services. Drop path is always passive based on AWG and power splitter. At the add/drop
client interfaces, the ROADM-C40/40/OPM-3HU-2DC also provides the 40-channel
OADM filter function.
In addition, the ROADM-C40/40/OPM-3HU-2DC shelf provides an equalized channel
output (all channels at roughly the same power level) at the transmit network port (N-M).
The mechanism for equalization utilizes the VOA array and the photo-detectors that
monitor each individual channel power. The equalization mechanism reads the power
level via the photo-detectors, and adjusts the VOAs to reach the desired power levels.
The ROADM-C40/40/OPM-3HU-2DC shelf supports the data transmission in one
direction only. An optical pre-amplifier and an optical post amplifiers are always required
to overcome the optical loss induced by the ROADM-C40/40/OPM-3HU-2DC shelf.
Consequently, bi-directional add/drop nodes require two ROADM-C40/40/OPM-3HU2DC shelves, two pre-amplifiers and two post amplifiers. In ROADM applications, a
separate optical supervisory channel filter module (OSFM+#1630) is also required for
dropping/reinserting the OSC from/into the network fiber.
705
The ROADM-C40/40/OPM-3HU-2DC Shelf can be deployed in point-to-point, linear, and
ring OADM network topologies. In doing so, it supports protected and unprotected
configurations. In a protected configuration, each ROADM network element in the
network requires two ROADM shelves and two pre-amplifiers and two post amplifiers.
The ROADM-C40/40/OPM-3HU-2DC interfaces with and operates as a sub-shelf to a
master FSP 3000R7 7HU shelf. The ROADM sub-shelf is managed by the FSP 3000R7
Master Shelf Processor (NCU) using the shelf control unit (SCU) connections. For the
equipment type name of the ROADM sub-shelf used by the management software, refer
to the Equipment Types of FSP 3000R7 Hardware Components on p.1327 of this
documentation. The physical management connection from the ROADM-C40/40/OPM3HU-2DC to an SCU of a 7HU shelf is a fiber connection (optical Ethernet).
Consequently, each ROADM-C40/40/OPM-3HU-2DC is managed as any other FSP
3000R7 sub-shelf in the node.Figure 425 shows the ROADM-C40/40/OPM-3HU-2DC
and provides an overview of the external interfaces.
Key Features
The ROADM-C40/40/OPM-3HU-2DC key features are:
Modular extensible design based on the 19 format
Dimensions: width x height x depth; 483 mm x 133 mm x 210 mm

(19.00 in x 5.25 in x 8.27 in)
Redundant power feeds (-40 V DC to -72 V DC)
PLC based switch matrix for dynamic configuration of add or pass through path
Support of 40 channels (wavelengths) in the C band according to ITU -T G.694.1 (100

GHz channel spacing)
Support of pass through, add/drop, or drop/continue configurations
Improved transmission performance due to adjustment of wave-length levels
Monitoring of the optical power at the network port, upgrade port, and client ports
Fully transparent
Transport protocol and bit-rate independent
Full management support
Managed as main shelf using optical SCU to SCU daisy chain connection
Status LED indicators for the power supply and the optical ports
LC connectors for fiber termination
All optical connectors front accessible
Hardware Architecture
The ROADM-C40/40/OPM-3HU-2DC principally consists of three major assemblies: the
optical module assembly, the CM based processor board assembly, and the
management interface assembly with optical Ethernet ports.
706
Optical Module Assembly

The optical module assembly provides the power supplies, mounting and interface to the
optical add module, platform for mounting the drop optics, and interface to front panel
serial port.
The power supplies section is composed of the power entry terminals, circuit breakers,
current inrush limit, and the main power supply. The main power supply is a common
component where the other components are duplicated for power input A and power input
B.
The drop module (optical demux) is passive. It is mounted to the optical module
assembly. Its fiber connections are fused with the add module and the front panel
connectors.
The add module is a sealed self contained module providing the optical switching,
adjustment, measurement, and multiplexing functions. The module is mounted to the
optical module assembly to allow fusing of the fiber connections to the front panel.
CM Assembly
The CM based processor board assembly (Cm assembly) is the shelf processor. It
employes the standard ADVA Optical Networking Cm. The CM assembly also
contains miscellaneous interface devices.
Management Interface Assembly

The management interface assembly provides locations for two Ethernet SFP
transceivers and an Ethernet layer 2 switch (Ethernet L2 switch). This switch is capable
of operating the SFP(s) at 1000Base-X rates. In addition, the Ethernet L2 switch performs
filtering on MAC addresses or VLAN tags. The two pluggable management interfaces
enables daisy-chaining of multiple ROADM shelves. To allow daisy chaining, the
Ethernet L2 switch forwards all frames that are not bound for the specific shelf to the
other port. The Ethernet L2 switch interfaces to the Cm through with an internal
100Base-T link.
Power Supply
power feeds are located on the side of the shelf, A on left and B on right. The power
connections are screw terminal blocks. Each input feed has its own -48 V fail detection
and its own circuit breaker, which is accessible from the front.
The power supply operates over the voltage range of -40 V DC to -72 V DC. Each
ROADM is powered independently. The power status LEDs indicate the status of the
power supplies.
Circuit Breakers
A circuit breaker is provided for each power feed. The circuit breakers are located on the
lower front panel of the shelf. Circuit breakers are rated at 2 A at 80 V DC.
707
Grounding
There are two grounding connectors on the left rack-mount bracket for making a
functional earth connection.
Cooling
The ROADM-C40/40/OPM-3HU-2DC is convection cooled. There are no fans installed in
the shelf.
Management Ports
The management ports, labeled MGT U and MGT D, are pluggable interfaces (SFPs)
which are located on the front left hand side of the shelf in the optical section. The
pluggable interfaces are capable of operation at 1000Base-X rates (optical Ethernet).
The management uplink (MGT U) and management downlink (MGT D) ports are used to
connect the ROADM-C40/40/OPM-3HU-2DC to SCUs (shelf interconnection). The
connections are via two ADVA Optical Networking approved gigabit Ethernet SFP
transceivers (SFP/2G1/850I/MM/LC) using multimode fibers. With two management
ports, multiple ROADM Shelves can be daisy-chained. Until the ring configuration is
supported, the management connections will be unprotected daisy chain. The MGT U/D
LEDs indicate the status of the selected port.
Note
SFP cages should only be populated with SFP transceivers that are specifically intended for the SCU. These must be approved by ADVA
Craft Interface Port

The craft interface port on the lower front panel, identified as D1, is a serial port (EIA/TIA232) which behaves as a mini CLI. The connector is an industry standard DB-9 type
(male). This port is only used for setting the shelf ID number (shelf address, unique within
a NE) or debug. On delivery, the connector is equipped with a protective cap to prevent
contamination. Use a standard serial cable of the type DB9 MALE TO DB9 FEMALE,
12FT long. The interface is a 3 wire interface. Baud rate 19200, 1 stop, no parity, no flow
control.
Note
708
In order to allow communications, the ROADM-C40/40/OPM-3HU-2DC

must have an Ethernet MAC address for the Ethernet management
ports. The MAC address is formed from the ADVA Optical Networking
OUI and the shelf address.
Client Ports
On the front panel, in the optical section, there are forty client ports with dual LC optical
bulkhead connectors for add/drop access, one port for each C-band channel. Sufficient
space is provided so no special tools are required to install and remove fiber connections.
The ports are labeled C1 through C40. Table 102 defines the connectors.
Table 102: Client Port Description
Client ports*
Wavelengths
Channel
Name
Client
ports*
Wavelengths
Channel
Name
C1
(C1-M; C1-D)
1530.33
nm
#D02
C21 (C21-M;
C21-D)
1546.12 nm
#DC5
C2
(C2-M; C2-D)
1531.12
nm
#D03
C22 (C22-M;
C22-D)
1546.92 nm
#D17
C3
(C3-M; C3-D)
1531.90
nm
#D04
C23 (C23-M;
C23-D)
1547.72 nm
#D18
C4
(C4-M; C4-D)
1532.68
nm
#DC1
C24 (C24-M;
C24-D)
1548.52 nm
#D19
C5
(C5-M; C5-D)
1533.47
nm
#D05
C25 (C25-M;
C25-D)
1549.32 nm
#D20
C6
(C6-M; C6-D)
1534.25
nm
#D06
C26 (C26-M;
C26-D)
1550.12 nm
#DC6
C7
(C7-M; C7-D)
1535.04
nm
#D07
C27 (C27-M;
C27-D)
1550.92 nm
#C21
C8
(C8-M; C8-D)
1535.82
nm
#D08
C28 (C28-M;
C28-D)
1551.72 nm
#D22
C9
(C9-M; C9-D)
1536.61
nm
#DC2
C29 (C29-M;
C29-D)
1552.52 nm
#D23
C10 (C10-M; C10D)
1537.40
nm
#D09
C30 (C30-M;
C30-D)
1553.33 nm
#D24
C11 (C11-M; C11D)
1538.19
nm
#D10
C31 (C31-M;
C31-D)
1554.13 nm
#DC7
C12 (C12-M; C12D)
1538.98
nm
#D11
C32 (C32-M;
C32-D)
1554.94 nm
#D25
C13 (C13-M; C13D)
1539.77
nm
#D12
C33 (C33-M;
C33-D)
1555.75 nm
#D26
C14 (C14-M; C14D)
1540.56
nm
#DC3
C34 (C34-M;
C34-D)
1556.56 nm
#D27
C15 (C15-M; C15D)
1541.35
nm
#D13
C35 (C35-M;
C35-D)
1557.36 nm
#D28
709
Table 102: Client Port Description
Client ports*
Wavelengths
Channel
Name
Client
ports*
Wavelengths
Channel
Name
C16 (C16-M; C16D)
1542.14
nm
#D14
C36 (C36-M;
C36-D)
1558.17 nm
#DC8
C17 (C17-M; C17D)
1542.94
nm
#D15
C37 (C37-M;
C37-D)
1558.98 nm
#D29
C18 (C18-M; C18D)
1543.73
nm
#D16
C38 (C38-M;
C38-D)
1559.79 nm
#D30
C19 (C19-M; C19D)
1544.53
nm
#DC4
C39 (C39-M;
C39-D)
1560.61 nm
#D31
C20 (C20-M; C20D)
1545.32
nm
#DC9
C40 (C40-M;
C40-D)
1561.42 nm
#D32
* M always represents the input connector and D the output connector of each
client port.
The client ports are connected to ADVA Optical Networking channel modules.
Loopbacks are not supported.
Monitor Port
On the front panel, top right in the optical section, there is one monitor port labeled
MONITOR. This port features dual LC optical bulkhead connectors. It provides optical
monitoring access with an external measuring device (power meter or OSA). The
MONITOR-D connector is used to monitor the input signals of the network port, and the
MONITOR-M connector is used to monitor the output signals of the network port.
Network Port
On the front panel, right most in the optical section, there is one network port labeled N.
This port features dual LC optical bulkhead connectors. M represents the output
connector and D the input connector. The network port connects to optical amplifiers
(EDFAs). Loopbacks are not supported. The network port can not be placed out of
service.
Upgrade Port
On the front panel, down right in the optical section, there is one upgrade port labeled U.
This port features dual LC optical bulkhead connectors. M represents the input connector
and D the output connector. The upgrade port connects between two ROADMC40/40/OPM-3HU-2DCs to provide cross plane connectivity. If a single ROADMC40/40/OPM-3HU-2DC is used, the upgrade-M port should be the network input in an
add or pass through situation. Loopbacks are not supported.
710
Signal Path
Figure 427 shows the functional block diagram (simplified) and illustrates the optical
signal path through an ROADM-C40/40/OPM-3HU-2DC, which is described below. The
optical signal flow is represented in the block diagram by red and blue traces, one for
each transmission direction.
Figure 427: ROADM-C40/40/OPM-3HU-2DC Optical Signal Path Block Diagram
To channel modules
From channel modules
Drop channels
Monitoring port
C40-D
C1-D
MONITOR-D
Add channels
C1-M
Client ports
C40-M
AWG Demux
Drop
Module
Network
port
PD1
N-D
10%
From
pre-amplifier
5% Tap
PD2
VOA
array
AWG Demux
5% Tap
To
post-amplifier
Upgrade
port
U-D
90%
PD3i
AWG Mux
N-M
Add Module
PLC switch matrix
To ROADM in
other plane
U-M
From ROADM
in other plane
PD3i
MONITOR-M
PLC switch matrix
Monitoring port
pass
through
i = 1 through 40
PD Photo detector
West - east direction
block
East - west direction

add
West - East Direction

Data signals within the C-band channel spectrum coming from a pre-amplifier enter the
ROADM through the network port input connector labeled N-D. A tap drops 5% of the
input signal power to get through the MONITOR-D connector into an attached external
measuring device. The remaining input signal then goes through a splitter for which 10%
of the optical power is directed toward the Drop Module, essentially just an AWG Demux.
The drop signal is de-multiplexed into 40 individual channel signals and coupled into just
as many fibers to have these channels separate on the C1-D to C40-D client port
outputs. The power levels of the client signals are compatible with FSP 3000R7 channel
modules incorporating APD receivers or PIN receivers with enhanced OSNR. The client
channel signals are then transmitted to the corresponding channel modules. The other
90% of the optical power is directed toward the upgrade port output connector labeled UD, which is generally connected to the upgrade port input connector U-M, on the
ROADM-C40/40/OPM-3HU-2DC shelf in the other plane. A photo detector (PD1) after
711
the splitter is used to measure the input power to the ROADM referenced to network port
input connector N-D.
East - West Direction

Up to 40 individual client channel signals enter the ROADM through the C1-M to C40-M
client port inputs and go to the Add Module. The data signal received at the upgrade port
input connector U-M is sampled at photo detector PD2 to measure this input power. After
sampling the input signal is directed to the Add Module. In the Add Module, the pass
through DWDM signal is de-multiplexed by an AWG Demux. The pass through channels
and the newly added channels are selected in a PLC switch matrix. The selected
channels go through channel VOA's in a PLC VOA array to be attenuated or blocked as
required. After the VOA array, the channel signals are measured by channel
photodectors, labeled PD3i, with i=1 to 40. The channel signals are recombined in a
AWG multiplexer. The resulting output signal is coupled into a single fiber and directed to
the network output connector N-M for transmission to a post amplifier. Before exiting 5%
of the output power signal is dropped by a tap to leave the ROADM through the
MONITOR-M connector for measuring the power level.
LED Indicators
ROADM-C40/40/OPM-3HU-2DC and its ports. For details, refer to the Maintenance and
Fiber Tray
Fiber handling for the ROADM-C40/40/OPM-3HU-2DC is provided by means of the
horizontal fiber tray. It holds all the optical fibers that are routed to and from the optical
connectors. That way damage to fibers due to mechanical stress can be avoided.
Adaptor Brackets
1 x 19-inch rackmount bracket pair (pre-installed) for 19-inch rack installation
1 x 23-inch adaptor bracket pair for standard 23-inch rack installation
The ROADM-C40/40/OPM-3HU-2DC comes with 19-inch rackmount brackets preinstalled. The 23-inch adaptor brackets and the shelf mounting screws are included in the
shipping box. The rack mounting screws are not delivered.
Labeling
Each ROADM-C40/40/OPM-3HU-2DC provides several labels. They provide important
information about the shelf itself and the operating safety.
712
ROADM-C80/0/OPM
Specifications
ROADM-C80/0/OPM
Figure 428: ROADM-C80/0/OPM Front View
Variants:
None
713
ROADM-C80/0/OPM
Faceplate Markings
Table 103: ROADM-C80/0/OPM Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Power supply status
Multiplex
Mod
Operational status of the

module
Demultiplex

client optical port
Client optical port

upgrade optical port
Upgrade optical port

network optical port
Network optical port
Description
The ROADM-C80/0/OPM module is used for channel add/drop and/or optical power
control. It also provides the ability to monitor individual channel power levels. The
ROADM-C80/0/OPM can be used in a number of different node configurations that
include Optical Terminal Multiplexer (OTM), Reconfigurable Optical Add Drop Multiplexer
(ROADM) and Line-amp. In most applications the ROADM-C80/0/OPM modules will be
used in pairs.
The ROADM-C80/0/OPM can be provisioned to handle up to 40 C-band channels with
100 GHz channel spacing or 80 C-band channels with 50 GHz channel spacing.
Features
The ROADM-C80/0/OPM key features are:
714
Dynamic configuration of add, drop, and/or pass through paths
Supports 80 multiplexed (50GHz spacing) DWDM C-band wavelengths per ADVA

Optical Networking channel plan 192.00 THz through 195.95 THz
Supports 40 multiplexed (100 GHz spacing) DWDM C-band wavelengths per ADVA
Optical Networking channel plan 192.00 THz through 195.90 THz (even frequency
channels)
Adjustment of individual channel power levels on the network interface
Fully transparent
Status LED indicators for power, module and optical port operation
Utilizes LC type optical connectors
ROADM-C80/0/OPM
Client Port
The ROADM-C80/0/OPM module features one client port with dual LC optical bulkhead
connectors. M is the input (add) connection and D is the output (drop) connection. No
special tools are required to install or remove the fiber connections.
Upgrade Port
The ROADM-C80/0/OPM module features one upgrade port with dual LC optical
bulkhead connectors. M is the input connection and D is the output connection. The
upgrade port is used to interconnect two ROADM-C80/0/OPM modules for pass though
channels. No special tools are required to install or remove the fiber connections.
Network Port
The ROADM-C80/0/OPM module features one network port with dual LC optical
bulkhead connectors. Unlike the other optical ports, M is the output connection and D is
the input connection. The network port generally connects to optical amplifiers.
Loopbacks are not supported. No special tools are required to install or remove the fiber
connections.
Block Diagram
Figure 429 shows a simplified block diagram of the ROADM-C80/0/OPM module. The
module incorporates photo-detectors on the Network Port, Upgrade Port, and Client Port
inputs. These photo-detectors are used to monitor the total power input to these ports and
to provide port level Performance Monitoring (PM) and alarms.
The ROADM-C80/0/OPM functionality provides the ability to add-drop or pass-through up
to a maximum of 80 channels, using two ROADM-C80/0/OPM modules in each NE.
These channels are the International Telecommunication Union (ITU) channels from
192.00 THz to 195.95 THz (with 50 GHz spacing, in the range of 1529.94 nm to 1561.42
nm). The ROADM-C80/0/OPM also provides the ability to add-drop or pass-through up to
a maximum of 40 channels (with 100 GHz spacing, even channel frequencies, that fall in
the range of 192.00 THz to 195.90 THz).
715
ROADM-C80/0/OPM
Figure 429: ROADM-C80/0/OPM Block Diagram
Signal Path
The signal path through a ROADM NE is typically bi-directional and is not very different
from the standard fixed OADM NE. Refer to Figure 430. Since the Optical Supervisory
Channel (OSC) is required for ROADM NEs, the signal flow must pass through an
Optical Supervisory Filter Module (OSFM) which separates the OSC signal from the
service channels. The OSC signal is terminated on an Optical Supervisory Channel
Module (OSCM), and the signal carrying the service channels is passed through to the
internal modules of the NE.
716
ROADM-C80/0/OPM
Figure 430: ROADM-C80/0/OPM Optical Signal Path
Pre-amplifiers are required for ROADM NEs, and post-amplifiers are typically installed. In
rare cases when the span distances between NEs are very small, post-amplifiers are not
required. These amplifiers are used to offset the losses introduced by the ROADM
devices. The gain setting for the pre-amplifier is chosen to ensure that the power levels
for the drop channels are within the channel module desired receive power range (for AddDrop ROADM NEs). The pre-amplifier gain is also chosen so that the pass-through
channels are at an adequate power level to account for pass-through losses and to
provide some margin for equalization. The gain setting for the post-amplifier is chosen to
provide a specific launch power for each channel into the next optical span.
The ROADM-C80/0/OPM requires an Interleaver/De-Interleaver module to support
adding and dropping more than 40 channels and up to 80 channels. A 40CSM (normal)
and a 40CSM (offset) module is required to provide add-drop capabilities for all 80
channels. Single channel filters, group filters, and other lower channel count filters are not
illustrated in the diagram, they are supported. In the Figure 430, the blue and red traces
represent the signal flow for each direction through the NE, from one network interface to
the other.
ROADM-C80/0/OPM Functional Applications

The following section explains possible applications for ROADM NEs that contain
ROADM-C80/0/OPM modules.

The current FSP 3000R7 platform supports up to 40 add-drop channels. Thus, the current
available filtering (single-channel filters, band filters, and 40-channel
multiplexers/demultiplexers) is limited to the wavelength plan based on a 40-channel
system (channel range of 1530.33 nm to 1561.42 nm with 100 GHz channel spacing).
717
ROADM-C80/0/OPM
One application for the ROADM-C80/0/OPM is a 40-channel ROADM Add-Drop NE.
This is illustrated in Figure 431 below (new components are shaded). If the add-drop
channel count is low, the current available band splitters, band filters, and/or single
channel filters can also be used to add and drop channels (one of these filters are
illustrated in the following examples).
This configuration also provides the benefit of utilizing the existing channel modules
deployed for the FSP 3000R7 NE. However, if the ROADM-C80/0/OPM is deployed in
one of these 40-channel configurations, the NE cannot grow to support 80 channels
without significantly impacting traffic. Therefore, it is assumed that once the ROADMC80/0/OPM is deployed for this application, it will rarely (if ever) be upgraded to support
80 channels. This configuration can be used to replace the existing ROADM in future
deployments.
Figure 431: 40 Channel ROADM NE
ROADM Line Amp NE
Pre- amp
Post - amp
N-D
Post - amp
U- D
U-M
ROADM C 80/0/ OPM
OSFM
N-M
U- M
C- M
OSCM
C -D
40 CSM
Channel
Channel
Channel
Card
Card
Module
N- M
ROADM C 80/0/ OPM
U-D
OSFM
N-D
C- M
Pre- amp
C -D
40 CSM
OSCM
Channel
Channel
Channel
Card
Card
Module

To implement an 80-channel capable add-drop ROADM NE, two more components are
needed. They are the Interleaver/De-interleaver module and the 40CSM offset module.
Refer to Figure 432. The 80-channel ROADM Add-Drop NE is illustrated showing all new
components in gray.
The Interleaver/De-interleaver is a passive optical module. It utilizes periodic filtering to
separate the 80-channel input signal into two 40-channel signals in one direction, and
combine two 40-channel signals into an 80-channel signal in the other direction.
One of these two 40-channel signal groups is comprised of the 40-channels currently
supported by the FSP 3000R7 40-channel multiplexer/demultiplexer. These are the 50
GHz spaced channels known as the "normal" channels. The Interleaver/De-Interleaver
module outputs the other 40-channel signal group that contains the 40-channels offset by
50 GHz from the normal channels. This 50GHz spaced signal group of 40 channels falls
in between the normal channels. They are known as the "offset" channels.
The 40CSM offset module is a 40-channel multiplexer/demultiplexer that supports the
offset channels (offset from the "normal" channels by 50GHz, but still utilizes 100 GHz
filtering for each channel). The detailed descriptions for the Interleaver/De-interleaver and
the 40CSM offset are found in the Detail System Description Guide.
718
ROADM-C80/0/OPM
Figure 432: 80 Channel ROADM NE
ROADM
80 -Channel ADD
/ Drop NE
Pre - amp
Post - amp
N- D
U-D
Post - amp
N- M
ROADM C 80 /0/ OPM
N-M
U- M
C-M
C 1 -D
C 1 -M
40 CSM
Channel
Channel
Channel
Card
Card
Module
C 2 -M
N- D
C- M
C- D
N -M
N -D
Interleaver /De -Interleaver
OSFM
Pre - amp
U- D
C- D
N -M
OSCM
U- M
ROADM C 80 /0/ OPM
OSFM
N -D
Interleaver /De -Interleaver

C 2 -D
40 CSM
offset
Channel
Channel
Channel
Card
Card
Module
C 1 -M
C 1 -D
40 CSM
Channel
Channel
Channel
Card
Card
Module
OSCM
C 2-D
C 2 -M
40 CSM
offset
Channel
Channel
Channel
Card
Card
Module
Line Amp NE
Another application for the ROADM-C80/0/OPM is a Line-Amp NE. The ROADMC80/0/OPM is not used to add or drop channels in this configuration, it is used to equalize
the channel power levels at the network port output. The Line Amp configuration is
illustrated in Figure 465 below.
Figure 433: Line Amplifier NE
Slot Positions
The ROADM-C80/0/OPM module is 8HP (two slots) wide. It can be installed into
following shelves and slots:
719
ROADM-C80/0/OPM
LED Indicators
ROADM-C80/0/OPM and its ports. The LED indicators behave in accordance with the
generic ADVA Optical Networking specification. For details, refer to the FSP 3000R7
Rel. 13.2 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Manual, Chapter 3.
Labeling
Several printed labels affixed on the faceplate and the board cover provide module
specific information as shown in the figures below.
Module Type Label

This label contains relevant information about the ROADM-C80/0/OPM module. An
example of the ROADM-C80/0/OPM module type label is shown in the following figure.
Figure 434: Example of a ROADM-C80/0/OPM Module Type Label
Values may be different for other products using this label. The correct values can be
found in the FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2 Module and System Specification.
Certification Label
This label provides approved certification marks. An example of the ROADMC80/0/OPM certification label is shown in Figure 435.
Figure 435: Example of a ROADM-C80/0/OPM Certification Label
720
8ROADM-C40/0/OPM
Warranty Label
ROADM-C80/0/OPM warranty label is shown in Figure 436.
Figure 436: Example of an ROADM-C80/0/OPM Warranty Label
Specifications
8ROADM-C40/0/OPM
Figure 437: 8ROADM-C40/0/OPM Front View
Variants:
none
721
8ROADM-C40/0/OPM
Faceplate Markings
Table 104: 8ROADM-C40/0/OPM Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Power supply status
Multiplex (output)
Mod

module
Demultiplex (input)
C1-C8

client optical ports 1-8
C1C8
Client optical port 1 through

client optical port 8

Description
The 8ROADM-C40/0/OPM is an FSP 3000R7 channel module that functions as a
network wavelength switching point. The 8ROADM-C40/0/OPM module can be deployed
alongside existing FSP 3000R7 modules in an FSP 3000R7 network element (NE).
An FSP 3000R7 NE containing 8ROADM-C40/0/OPM modules supports multiple
interconnected rings and mesh network configurations. The 8ROADM-C40/0/OPM
module enables provisioning and adjustment of Add/Drop and pass-through DWDM Cband channels and supports these optical connection configurations:
Add/Drop
Pass-through
Drop/Continue
Multicast
Add
Drop
Drop/Multicast
The 8ROADM-C40/0/OPM module can handle 40 C-band channels with 100 GHz
spacing. It contains one duplex network interface and 8 duplex client interfaces. The D
path (N-D to Cx-D) signal is split into 8 identical copies, which are available on the
module front panel at the Cx-D outputs.
The NCU type can limit the number of degrees that a single FSP 3000R7
node can support.
Note
NCU2E, NCU-A, NCU-B, and NCU-GDPS limit the number of

supported degrees (network interfaces) to four.
One of these signals is typically used for local drop connections, and the others can be
routed to additional 8ROADM-C40/0/OPM modules in the node for transmission to one or
more degrees. The M path (Cx-M to N-M) allows selection of up to 40 different C-band
channels from the Cx-M inputs for transmission. Typically, the Cx-M inputs are
connected from the other 8ROADM-C40/0/OPM modules and the local add multiplexer.
722
8ROADM-C40/0/OPM
An integrated optical power monitor (OPM) in the 8ROADM-C40/0/OPM module allows
the transmit power level of each channel on N-M port to be set to a specified target power
level.
Features
The 8ROADM-C40/0/OPM key features are:
Dynamic configuration of add or pass through paths
Supports forty 100 GHz spaced channels for even frequency channels 192.00 THz
through 195.90 THz
Fully transparent
Status LED indicators for power, module and optical port operability
LC type receptacle connectors, non-angled for fiber termination
Client Ports
The 8ROADM-C40/0/OPM module features eight client ports with dual LC optical
bulkhead connectors. M is the input connection and D is the output connection. The eight
D client output ports transmit identical signal information - the N-D input port sends the
same signal, at reduced power levels, to the eight C-D output ports. No special tools are
required to install or remove fiber connections.
Network Port
The network port features dual LC optical bulkhead connectors. M is the output
connection and D is the input connection. The network port connects to optical EDFA
and RAMAN amplifiers. Loopbacks are not supported. No special tools are required to
install or remove fiber connections.
Signal Path
Figure 438 illustrates the signal path of the 8ROADM-C40/0/OPM . The 8ROADMC40/0/OPM module has two paths the D (Demultiplex) path and the M (Multiplex) path.
The D path travels from the network port to all client ports and does not control individual
wavelengths (channels). The M path passes from client ports to the network port and
supports the selection and power attenuation of wavelengths (channels) from client ports
for output on the networkport.
723
8ROADM-C40/0/OPM
Figure 438: 8ROADM-C40/0/OPM Block Diagram
Slot Positions
The 8ROADM-C40/0/OPM module is 12 HP (three slots) wide. It can be installed into
LED Indicators
8ROADM-C40/0/OPM and its ports. The LED indicators behave in accordance with the
Labeling
specific information as shown in Figure 437 and in the figures below.
Module Type Label

This label contains relevant information about the 8ROADM-C40/0/OPM module. An
example of the 8ROADM-C40/0/OPM module type label is shown in Figure 439.
724
8ROADM-C40/0/OPM
Figure 439: Example of a 8ROADM-C40/0/OPM Module Type Label
Certification Label
This label provides approved certification marks. An example of the 8ROADMC40/0/OPM certification label is shown in Figure 440.
Figure 440: Example of a 8ROADM-C40/0/OPM Certification Label
Warranty Label
8ROADM-C40/0/OPM warranty label is shown in Figure 441.
Figure 441: Example of an 8ROADM-C40/0/OPM Warranty Label
725
Specifications
Variants:
none
726
Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Power supply status
Mod

module
C1-C8

client optical ports 1-8
C1-C8
Client optical port 1

through client optical port 8

Description
The 8ROADM-C80/0/OPM is an FSP 3000R7 channel module that functions as a
network wavelength switching point. The 8ROADM-C80/0/OPM module can be deployed
alongside existing FSP 3000R7 modules in an FSP 3000R7 network element (NE).
An FSP 3000R7 NE containing 8ROADM-C80/0/OPM modules supports multiple
interconnected rings and mesh network configurations. The 8ROADM-C80/0/OPM
module enables provisioning and adjustment of Add/Drop and pass-through DWDM Cband channels and supports these optical connection configurations:
Add/Drop
Pass-through
Drop/Continue
Multicast
Add
Drop
Drop/Multicast

spacing. It contains one duplex network interface and 8 duplex client interfaces. The D
path (N-D to Cx-D) signal is split into 8 identical copies, which are available on the
module front panel at the Cx-D outputs.
The NCU type can limit the number of degrees that a single FSP 3000R7
node can support.
Note
NCU2E, NCU-A, NCU-B, and NCU-GDPS limit the number of

supported degrees (network interfaces) to four.
One or two of these signals are typically used for local drop connections, and the others
can be routed to additional 8ROADM-C80/0/OPM modules in the node for transmission
to one or more degrees. The M path (Cx-M to N-M) allows selection of up to 80 different
C-band channels from the Cx-M inputs for transmission. Typically, the Cx-M inputs are
connected from the other 8ROADM-C80/0/OPM modules and the local add connections.
The add and drop connections are connected to the optical filters associated with that
degree.
727
An integrated optical power monitor (OPM) in the 8ROADM-C80/0/OPM module allows
the transmit power level of each channel on N-M port to be set to a specified target power
level.
Features
Dynamic configuration of add or pass through paths
Supports eighty 50GHz spaced channels for frequency channels 192.00 THz through
195.95 THz
Fully transparent
Client Ports
The 8ROADM-C80/0/OPM module features eight client ports with dual LC optical
bulkhead connectors. M is the input connection and D is the output connection. The eight
D client output ports transmit identical signal information - the N-D input port sends the
same signal, at reduced power levels, to the eight C-D output ports. No special tools are
Network Port
The network port features dual LC optical bulkhead connectors. M is the output
connection and D is the input connection. The network port typically connects to EDFA
amplifiers. Loopbacks are not supported. No special tools are required to install or
remove fiber connections.
Signal Path
Figure 443 illustrates the signal path of the 8ROADM-C80/0/OPM . The 8ROADMC80/0/OPM module has two paths - the D (Demultiplex) path and the M (Multiplex) path.
The D path travels from the network port to all client ports and does not control individual
wavelengths (channels). The M path passes from client ports to the network port and
supports the selection and power attenuation of wavelengths (channels) from client ports
for output on the networkport.
728
8ROADM -C 80 /0/OPM
PD
N -D
C 1-D
C 2-D
C 3-D
C 4-D
C 5-D
C 6-D
C 7-D
C 8-D
1x8
Splitter
PDs
Switch
OPM
8x1
WSS
N -M
C 1-M
C 2-M
C 3-M
C 4-M
C 5-M
C 6-M
C 7-M
C 8-M
Slot Positions
The 8ROADM-C80/0/OPM module is 12 HP (three slots) wide. It can be installed into
LED Indicators
Labeling
Module Type Label

729
Certification Label
Warranty Label
730
9ROADM-C96/0/OPM
Specifications
9ROADM-C96/0/OPM
Variants:
None
731
9ROADM-C96/0/OPM
Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Power supply status
Mod

module
C1-C9

Client optical ports 1-9
C1-C9


Description
The 9ROADM-C96/0/OPM is an FSP 3000R7 module that functions as a Network
wavelength switching point. The 9ROADM-C96/0/OPM module can be deployed
alongside existing FSP 3000R7 modules in an FSP 3000R7 Network Element (NE). The
9ROADM-C96/0/OPM operates with the NCU-II and NCU-II-P which support up to 9
degrees (network interfaces) for add-drop applications and 10 degrees for tandem switch
applications.
An FSP 3000R7 NE containing 9ROADM-C96/0/OPM modules supports linear, ring, ring
interconnect, and mesh network configurations.The 9ROADM-C96/0/OPM module
enables provisioning and adjustment of add-drop and pass-through DWDM C-band
channels and supports these optical connection configurations:
Add-drop
Pass-through
Add
Drop

spacing. It contains one duplex network interface and 9 duplex Client interfaces. The N-C
path (N-R to Cx-T) signal is split into 9 identical copies, which are available on the
module front panel at the Cx-T outputs. For local drop connections, one or two of these Cband channels are typically used, and the others are routed to additional 9ROADMC96/0/OPM modules in the node for transmission to one or more degrees.
The C-N path (Cx-R to N-T) allows selection of up to 96 different C-band channels from
the Cx-R inputs for transmission on the N-T output. Typically, the Cx-R inputs are
The add and drop connections are connected to optical filters or any add-drop Fixed or
Directionless structure associated with that degree.
An integrated optical channel monitor (OCM) in the 9ROADM-C96/0/OPM module allows
the transmit power level of each channel on the N-T port to be set to a specified target
power level.
732
9ROADM-C96/0/OPM
Features
Dynamic configuration of add, drop and pass-through paths
Supports 96 50GHz-spaced channels for frequency channels 191.25 THz through

196.00 THz
Built-in variable-gain pre-amp for amplification of the received optical signal on the
Network interface
Optical power level balancing (equalization) for all channels transmitted on the
Network Interface
Fiber Detection circuitry to detect fiber connectivity to ports on other modules
Support of pass-through, add, drop, add-drop, or drop-and-continue configurations
Fully transparent
o
LC type receptacle connectors, angled 45 degrees for fiber termination
Client Ports
The 9ROADM-C96/0/OPM module features 9 Client ports with dual LC optical bulkhead
connectors. Cx-R is the input connection and Cx-T is the output connection. Fiber
detection circuitry is supported on all transmit and receive Client ports to detect module
connections and to provide fiber connection information that forms the NE fiber map. No
special tools are required to install or remove fiber connections.
Network Port
The 9ROADM-C96/0/OPM Network port features dual LC optical bulkhead connectors.
N-T is the output connection and N-R is the input connection. Fiber Detection circuitry is
supported on the transmit and receive Network ports to detect fiber connections and to
provide fiber connection information that forms the NE fiber map. No special tools are
Signal Path
Figure 443 illustrates a high level functional block diagram of the 9ROADM-C96/0/OPM.
The 9ROADM-C96/0/OPM module has two paths - the N-C path and the C-N path. The
N-C path travels from the Network port to all Client ports and does not control individual
wavelengths (channels). The C-N path passes from Client ports to the Network port and
supports the selection and power attenuation of wavelengths (channels) from Client ports
for output on the Networkport.
733
9ROADM-C96/0/OPM
The 9ROADM-C96/0/OPM incorporates a single-input OCM to monitor each channel

power level of the Network interface receive and transmit signals as well as the 9 Client
interface receive signals. The OCM monitors the channel power level input to the
Network interface upon request by the user or by the equalization process. It also
monitors a Client interface input upon request from the user or the equalization process
during a channel equalization attempt. The OCM continuously monitors the Network
output otherwise.
A 12:1 optical switch with inputs from the Network interface input, the Network interface
output, and the 9 Client interface inputs is used to select the OCM input (only 11
positions of the 12:1 switch are utilized).
The 9ROADM-C96/0/OPM also incorporates an internal variable gain amplifier
implemented as a pre-amp for the incoming optical signal from the Network interface. The
amplifier is a separate sub-assembly (separate circuit board) that installs within the
9ROADM-C96/0/OPM module.
The 9ROADM-C96/0/OPM incorporates optical taps with photo-detectors on each Client
interface input as well as the Network interface output. These photo-detectors (PDs) are
used to monitor the total power input to the Client interfaces, the Network interface output
and to provide port level Performance Monitoring (PM) and alarms. There are also two
PDs on either side of the internal variable-gain amplifier that monitor the total power of the
Network input and Client outputs.
The 9ROADM-C96/0/OPM incorporates a Fiber Detection mechanism that can
determine which other ports are connected to each 9ROADM-C96/0/OPM port. When a
port on another module is detected as being connected to a 9ROADM-C96/0/OPM port,
the information for this fiber connection is forwarded to the Network Control Unit (NCU)
module.
734
9ROADM-C96/0/OPM
Slot Positions
The 9ROADM-C96/0/OPM module is 16 HP (four slots) wide. It can be installed into
LED Indicators
generic ADVA Optical Networking specification. For details, refer to Chapter 3 of the
Labeling
Module Type Label

Certification Label
735
9ROADM-C96/0/OPM
Warranty Label
Specifications
736
4ROADM-C96/0/OPM
4ROADM-C96/0/OPM
737
4ROADM-C96/0/OPM
Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Power supply status
Mod

module
C1-C4

Client optical ports 1-4
C1-C4


Description
The 4ROADM-C96/0/OPM is an FSP 3000R7 module that functions as a Network
wavelength switching point. The 4ROADM-C96/0/OPM module can be deployed
alongside existing FSP 3000R7 modules in an FSP 3000R7 Network Element (NE). The
4ROADM-C96/0/OPM operates with the NCU-II and NCU-II-P which support up to 4
degrees (network interfaces) for add-drop applications and 5 degrees for tandem switch
applications.
An FSP 3000R7 NE containing 4ROADM-C96/0/OPM modules supports linear, ring, ring
interconnect, and mesh network configurations. Channel grouping of 100 Gigabit
services, distributed over the 4 optical channels (or lanes) is supported.
The 4ROADM-C96/0/OPM module enables provisioning and adjustment of add-drop and
pass-through DWDM C-band channels and supports these optical connection
configurations:
Add-drop
Pass-through
Drop

spacing. It contains one duplex network interface and 4 duplex Client interfaces. The N-C
path (N-R to Cx-T) signal is split into 4 identical copies, which are available on the
module front panel at the Cx-T outputs. For local drop connections, one or two of these Cband channels are typically used, and the others are routed to additional 4ROADMC96/0/OPM modules in the node for transmission to one or more degrees.
The C-N path (Cx-R to N-T) allows selection of up to 96 different C-band channels from
the Cx-R inputs for transmission on the N-T output. Typically, the Cx-R inputs are
The add and drop connections are connected to optical filters or any add-drop Fixed or
Directionless structure associated with that degree.
An integrated optical channel monitor (OCM) in the 4ROADM-C96/0/OPM module allows
the transmit power level of each channel on the N-T port to be set to a specified target
power level.
738
4ROADM-C96/0/OPM
Features
Dynamic configuration of add, drop and pass-through paths
Supports 96 50GHz-spaced channels for frequency channels 191.25 THz through

196.00 THz
Channel grouping of 100 Gigabit services, distributed over the 4 optical channels
Optical power level balancing (equalization) for all channels transmitted on the
Network Interface
Fully transparent
o
LC type receptacle connectors, angled 45 degrees for fiber termination
Client Ports
The 4ROADM-C96/0/OPM module features 4 Client ports with dual LC optical bulkhead
connectors. Cx-R is the input connection and Cx-T is the output connection. No special
tools are required to install or remove fiber connections.
Network Port
The 4ROADM-C96/0/OPM Network port features dual LC optical bulkhead connectors.
N-T is the output connection and N-R is the input connection. No special tools are
Signal Path
Figure 443 illustrates a high level functional block diagram of the 4ROADM-C96/0/OPM.
The 4ROADM-C96/0/OPM module has two paths - the N-C path and the C-N path. The
N-C path travels from the Network port to all Client ports and does not control individual
wavelengths (channels). The C-N path passes from Client ports to the Network port and
supports the selection and power attenuation of wavelengths (channels) from Client ports
for output on the Networkport.
739
4ROADM-C96/0/OPM
The 4ROADM-C96/0/OPM incorporates a single-input OCM to monitor each channel

power level of the Network interface receive and transmit signals. The OCM monitors the
channel power level input to the Network interface upon request by the user or by the
equalization process. The OCM continuously monitors the Network output otherwise.
The 4ROADM-C96/0/OPM incorporates optical taps with photo-detectors on each Client
interface input as well as the Network interface input and output. These photo-detectors
(PDs) are used to monitor the total power input to the Client interfaces, the Network
interface input, the Network interface output and to provide port level Performance
Monitoring (PM) and alarms.
Slot Positions
The 4ROADM-C96/0/OPM module is 8HP (two slots) wide. It can be installed into
LED Indicators
generic specification. For details, refer to Chapter 3 of the Maintenance and
740
4ROADM-C96/0/OPM
Labeling
Module Type Label

The label on the 4ROADM-C96/0/OPM module contains relevant information about the
module. An example of the 4ROADM-C96/0/OPM module type label is shown in Figure
454.
Certification Label
Warranty Label
741
4ROADM-C96/0/OPM
Specifications
742
4ROADM-E-C96/0/OPM
4ROADM-E-C96/0/OPM
Figure 457: 4ROADM-E-C96/0/OPM Front View
743
4ROADM-E-C96/0/OPM
Faceplate Markings
Table 108: 4ROADM-E-C96/0/OPM Faceplate Markings
Ports
C1-C4
N
Client Ports
Network Port
LEDIndicators
P
Mod
C1-C4
N
Power supply status

Operational status of the module
Operational status of the Client ports 1-4
Operational status of the Network port
Description
The 4ROADM-E-C96/0/OPM is an FSP 3000R7 module that functions as a wavelength
switch. This module can be deployed alongside existing modules in an FSP 3000R7
Network Element (NE). The 4ROADM-E-C96/0/OPM module requires the NEto be
managed by either an NCU-II or NCU-II-P. This module supports up to 4 degrees
(network interfaces) for add-drop applications and 5 degrees for wavelength switch
applications which do not have add-drop.
An NE containing 4ROADM-E-C96/0/OPM modules supports linear, ring, ring
interconnect, and mesh network configurations.The module enables provisioning and
optical power adjustment of add-drop and pass-through DWDM C-band channels and
supports these optical connection types:
Add-drop
Pass-through
Add
Drop
The 4ROADM-E-C96/0/OPM module supports 96 C-band channels with 50 GHz

spacing. It contains one duplex Nport and 4 duplex C ports. Refer to the diagram in
theSignal Path on p.745 section. For the N-to-C path (N-R to Cx-T), the N-Rinput
signal is optically split into 4 identical copies, which are transmitted on the Cx-T outputs
(where x=1, 2, 3, or 4). For the C-to-N path (Cx-R to N-T), up to 96 different C-band
channels can be selected from the Cx-R inputs for transmission on the N-T output. One
Cx port is typically used for local add-drop channels, and can be connected to an adddrop filter (i.e., 96CSM). The other Cx ports are typically used for pass-through channels,
and are connected to other 4ROADM-E-C96/0/OPM modules in the NE for transmission
to other degrees.
An integrated Optical Channel Monitor (OCM) in the 4ROADM-E-C96/0/OPM module
monitors the individual wavelength optical power levels at the N-T output. This individual
wavelength optical power monitoring allows the transmit power level of each channel on
the N-T port to be set to a specified target power level.
An integrated variable gain amplifier in the 4ROADM-E-C96/0/OPM module amplifies the
N-R input optical signal that is optically split and transmitted on the Cx-T outputs.
The 4ROADM-E-C96/0/OPM module provides fiber detection circuitry which
automatically detects fiber connection between 4ROADM-E-C96/0/OPM ports and ports
on other modules.
744
4ROADM-E-C96/0/OPM
Features
4ROADM-E-C96/0/OPM key features:
Supports 96 50GHz-spaced channels for channels 19600 though 19125
Dynamic configuration of add, drop and pass-through channels
Channel power balancing (equalization) for all channels transmitted on the N port
Status LED indicators for power, module and port operational status
Fiber detection
Variable gain amplifier for channels received in the N port
Client Ports
The 4ROADM-E-C96/0/OPM module has 4 Client ports with dual LC bulkhead
connectors. Cx-R is the input and Cx-T is the output. No special tools are required to
install or remove fiber connections.
Network Port
The 4ROADM-E-C96/0/OPM module Network port has dual LC bulkhead connectors. NT is the output and N-R is the input . No special tools are required to install or remove
fiber connections.
Signal Path
The figure below is a high level functional block diagram of the 4ROADM-E-C96/0/OPM.
This module has two paths; N-to-C and C-to-N. For the N-to-C path, channels from the N
port are amplified via an integrated variable gain amplifier and then routed to all C ports.
For the C-to-N path, selected channels are routed from a specified C port to the N port
and the channel powers are balanced at the Nport output.
745
4ROADM-E-C96/0/OPM
Figure 458: 4ROADM-E-C96/0/OPM Block Diagram
The module incorporates an OCM to monitor the channel power of the N port receive and
transmit channels. The OCM monitors the channel power input to the N port upon request
by the user. Otherwise, the OCM continuously monitors the channel power for the
Network transmit channels.
The module incorporates photo-detectors (PD) which monitor the total power input to
ports and are used to provide port level Performance Monitoring (PM) and alarms.
A fiber detection mechanism is incorporated on the 4ROADM-E-C96/0/OPM N and
Cports. If a port on the 4ROADM-E-C96 is connected to a port on another module that
supports fiber detection, the 4ROADM-E-C96 will detect this connection. The fiber
connection information is sent to the Network Control Unit (NCU).
Slot Positions
The 4ROADM-E-C96/0/OPM module is 12HP (three slots) wide and can be installed into
these shelves and slots:
LED Indicators
The LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating status on the module.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 of theMaintenance and Troubleshooting Manual.
746
4ROADM-E-C96/0/OPM
Labeling
Module Type Label

This label contains relevant information about the module. An example of a module type
label is shown in below.
Figure 459: Example of a Module Type Label
Certification Label
This label provides approved certification marks. An example of the a certification label is
shown in below.
Figure 460: Example of a module Certification Label
747
CCM-C40/8
Warranty Label
warranty label is shown in below.
Figure 461: Example of a Warranty Label
Specifications
CCM-C40/8
Figure 462: CCM-C40/8 Front View
Variants:
none
748
CCM-C40/8
Faceplate Markings
Table 109: CCM-C40/8 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Power supply status
Multiplex
Mod

module
Demultiplex
C1-C8

client optical ports
C1-C8
Client optical ports1 to 8

Description
The CCM-C40/8 is an eight port MUX/DEMUX channel filter for up to 8 channels. It
allows any channel from the 40 supported wavelengths on a Network port to be
connected to any client port. The CCM-C40/8 uses 2 primary components, a wavelength
selective switch (WSS) and an 8 port optical combiner. The WSS is used in the demultiplex path and the 8 port optical combiner is used in the multiplex path.
In the de-multiplex path, the CCM-C40/8 routes any channel from the Network port to
each client port. Any of the 40 standard DWDM channels can be routed. In the multiplex
path, the module combines the signals from all of the client ports and forward them to the
network port. The 5PSM can be used to create the optical multiplex of up to 40 channels
by combining the network ports of five CCM-C40/8 modules. The CCM-C40/8 requires
amplification in the add and drop paths in many applications to meet the target power
levels for channel transmission and/or reception.
Features
The CCM-C40/8 key features are:
Supports channel selection from the standard 40 DWDM wavelengths up to 40

wavelengths for add and drop channels
Selectively routes channels from the network port to the client port outputs
Combines all channels from client port inputs to the network port output
Provides port level Performance Monitoring for network input and output
Provides port level Performance Monitoring for client port outputs
Provides port level alarms
Client Port
The CCM-C40/8 module features 8 client ports with dual LC optical bulkhead connectors.
M is the input (add) connection and D is the output (drop) connection. No special tools are
required to install or remove the fiber connections.
749
CCM-C40/8
Network Port
The CCM-C40/8 module features one network port with dual LC optical bulkhead
connectors. The network port has the output connection M and the input connection D.
The network port generally connects to optical amplifiers. No special tools are required to
install or remove the fiber connections.
Compatible Modules
The CCM-C40/8 is generally compatible with modules that support standard 40 DWDM
C-band wavelengths. Existing 100 GHz filter configurations are compatible with the
CCM-C40/8.
Channel modules with CWDM channels on the network port(s) are not
compatible with the CCM-C40/8.
Note
Channel modules with L-band channels on the network port(s) are not
The CCM-C40/8 works with 100 GHz spaced channel but the channel numbers must be
the even ITU channels from 19200 to 19590.
Please refer to the FSP 3000R7 Module and System Specification, Appendix A for an
overview of the CCM supported channel modules.

The figure below shows a simplified block diagram of the CCM-C40/8 module. The CCMC40/8 is an eight port reconfigurable filter that allows a channel from any of the 40
supported wavelengths to be connected from the network port input to a client port
output. The ingress path is from N-D to Cx-D
(x = 1 ... 8). The egress path is from Cx-M (x = 1 ... 8) to N-M. The CCM-C40/8 module
has 2 primary components; a wavelength selective switch in the network ingress path
and an optical combiner in the network egress path. The network ingress allows a
channel or channels from the network input optical multiplex to be routed to one of the
client ports. When a signal channel is routed to a client port the output power can be
monitored and controlled. The network egress path combines all of the optical channels
present on the client port inputs into an optical multiplex on the network port output.
750
CCM-C40/8
Figure 463: CCM-C40/8 Block Diagram
Optical Signal Flow

The signal path through a node is typically bi-directional. Refer to Figure 464. Preamplifiers and booster amplifiers are also optional but due to the losses they will be
required in many cases.
In rare cases when the span distances between NEs are very small, pre-amplifiers and
post-amplifiers are not required. The gain setting for the pre-amplifier is chosen to ensure
that the power levels for the drop channels are within the channel module desired receive
power range. The gain setting for the post-amplifier is chosen to provide a specific launch
power for each channel into the next optical span.
The network ingress allows a channel or channels from the network input optical
multiplex to be routed to one of the client ports. The output power to the client output ports
can be monitored and controlled.
751
CCM-C40/8
Figure 464: CCM-C40/8 Optical Signal Flow

The following section illustrates possible functional applications for NEs that contain
CCM-C40/8 modules.

In this illustration, shown in Figure 465, the CCM-C40/8 colorless reconfigurable filter
module is connected to the fixed/add drop interface of each ROADM. The solution
provides a "colorless" add/drop of client signals on each network interface. Colorless is a
term found in the optical industry that means any wavelength in the ITU grid can be added
or dropped at the NE. This application is colorless and illustrates how any channel in the
ITU grid can be added or dropped from each network interface. The illustrated application
is limited to 8 colorless add/drop channels per network interface.
752
CCM-C40/8
Figure 465: ROADM Fixed Add/Drop NE

The CCM-C40/8 is also used in a colorless directionless add/drop application which is
illustrated in Figure 466 below. Directionless is also an optical industry term that means
any wavelength in the ITU grid can be routed to any NE. In the diagram below, added and
dropped channels are routed to as many as 7 network interfaces.This application is also
limited to 8 colorless directionless add/drop channels.
753
CCM-C40/8
Figure 466: Colorless Directionless Add/Drop NE

Combined with the 5PSM, the CCM-C40/8 can add/drop up to 40 total client channels.
The application is illustrated in Figure 467. Up to 40 channels can be added or dropped to
a fixed network interface or to a directionless ROADM add/drop interface using five
CCM-C40/8 modules and one 5-way Power Splitter Combiner module (5PSM).
754
CCM-C40/8
Figure 467: 40 Channel Colorless Add/Drop NE
Slot Positions
The CCM-C40/8 module is 12HP (three slots) wide. It can be installed into following
shelves and slots:
LED Indicators
Different LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating status of the CCMC40/8 and its ports. The LED indicators behave in accordance with the generic ADVA
Optical Networking specification. For details, refer to the FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2
Labeling
The printed labels affixed on the faceplate and the board cover provide module specific
information as shown in the figures below.
755
CCM-C40/8
Module Type Label

This label contains relevant information about the CCM-C40/8 module. An example of the
CCM-C40/8 module type label is shown in Figure 468.
Figure 468: Example of a CCM-C40/8 Module Type Label
Values may be different for other CCM-C40/8 modules using this label. The correct
values can be found in the Module and System Specification
Certification Label
This label provides approved certification marks. An example of the CCM-C40/8
certification label is shown in Figure 469.
Figure 469: Example of a CCM-C40/8 Certification Label
INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH
OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD LEVEL
1M
Wavelength
Max
.Outp .Power
1400 nm 1640 nm
136 mW
Approvals are only valid
, if all modules and
/or blind panels are in place
This product complies with FDA Radiation Performance Standard

21 CFR Subchapter J and
47 CFR Part 15 Subpart B (FCC ).
Complies with 21 CFR 1040 .10 and 1040 .11 except for deviations pursuant to
Laser Notice No . 50 , dated June 24 , 2007 .
LA C -000062-01
IEC 60825 -1:2007 -03 ; IEC 60825 -2 :2006 -11
Warranty Label
Networking will disclaim the implied warranty of merchantability. An example of a CCMC40/8 warranty label is shown in Figure 470.
Figure 470: Example of a CCM-C40/8 Warranty Label
756
CCM-C80/8
Specifications
CCM-C80/8
Variants:
none
Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Power supply status
Multiplex
Mod

module
Demultiplex
757
CCM-C80/8
C1-C8

C1-C8
Client optical ports1 to 8

Description
The CCM-C80/8 is an eight port reconfigurable channel filter for up to 8 channels. It
allows any channel from the 80 supported wavelengths on a network port to be connected
to any client port. The CCM-C80/8 uses 2 primary components, a wavelength selective
switch (WSS) and an 8 port optical combiner. The WSS is used in the de-multiplex path
and the 8 port optical combiner is used in the multiplex path.
In the de-multiplex path, the CCM-C80/8 routes any channel from the network port to
each client port. Any of the 80 standard DWDM channels can be routed. In the multiplex
path, the module combines the signals from all of the client ports and forwards them to
the network port. The CCM-C80/8 is only capable to be used with one 5PSM to have
40ch out of 80ch add/drop at one node. The CCM-C80/8 requires amplification in the add
and drop paths in many applications to meet the target power levels for channel
transmission and/or reception.
Features
Supports channel selection from the standard 80 DWDM wavelengths for add and
drop channels
o
Supports up to 80 channels using 50 GHz channel spacing
Selectively routes channels from the network port to the client port outputs
Combines all channels from client port inputs to the network port output
Provides port level Performance Monitoring for network input and output
Provides port level Performance Monitoring for client port outputs
Provides port level alarms
Client Port
M is the input (add) connection and D is the output (drop) connection. No special tools are
Network Port
connectors. The network port has the output connection M and the input connection D.
The network port generally connects to optical amplifiers. No special tools are required to
install or remove the fiber connections.
758
CCM-C80/8
Compatible Modules
The CCM-C80/8 is generally compatible with modules that support standard 80 DWDM
C-band wavelengths.
Channel modules with CWDM channels on the network port(s) are not
Note
Channel modules with L-band channels on the network port(s) are not
The CCM-C80/8 is compatible with 50 GHz spaced ITU channels from 19200 to 19595.
Please refer to the FSP 3000R7 Module and System Specification , Appendix A for an

The figure below shows a simplified block diagram of the CCM-C80/8 module. The CCMC80/8 is an eight port reconfigurable filter that allows a channel from any of the 80
supported wavelengths to be connected from the network port input to a client port
output. The ingress path is from N-D to Cx-D
(x = 1 ... 8). The egress path is from Cx-M (x = 1 ... 8) to N-M. The CCM-C80/8 module
has 2 primary components; a wavelength selective switch in the network ingress path
and an optical combiner in the network egress path. The network ingress allows a
channel or channels from the network input optical multiplex to be routed to one of the
client ports. When a signal channel is routed to a client port the output power can be
monitored and controlled. The network egress path combines all of the optical channels
present on the client port inputs into an optical multiplex on the network port output.
759
CCM-C80/8
Optical Signal Flow

required in many cases.

The following section illustrates possible functional applications for NEs that contain
CCM-C80/8 modules.

In this illustration, shown in Figure 474, the CCM-C80/8 colorless reconfigurable filter
module is connected to the fixed/add drop interface of each ROADM. The solution
provides a "colorless" add/drop of client signals on each network interface. Colorless is a
term found in the optical industry that means any wavelength in the ITU grid can be added
or dropped at the NE. This application is colorless and illustrates how any channel in the
ITU grid can be added or dropped from each network interface. The illustrated application
is limited to 8 colorless add/drop channels per network interface.
760
CCM-C80/8
Figure 474: ROADM Fixed Add/Drop NE

The CCM-C80/8 is also used in a colorless directionless add/drop application which is
illustrated in Figure 475 below. Directionless is also an optical industry term that means
any wavelength in the ITU grid can be routed to any NE. In the diagram below, added and
dropped channels are routed to as many as 7 network interfaces.This application is also
limited to 8 colorless directionless add/drop channels.
761
CCM-C80/8
Figure 475: Colorless Directionless Add/Drop NE

Combined with one 5PSM, the CCM-C80/8 can add/drop up to 40 total client channels.
The application is illustrated in Figure 476. Up to 40 channels can be added or dropped to
a fixed network interface or to a directionless ROADM add/drop interface using five
CCM-C80/8 modules and one 5PSM.
762
CCM-C80/8

The CCM-C80/8 is capable of adding or dropping up to 80 channels. The application is
illustrated in . Up to 80 channels can be added or dropped to a fixed network interface or
to a directionless ROADM add/drop interface using ten CCM-C80/8 modules, two
5PSMs and one PM module.
763
CCM-C80/8
Slot Positions
The CCM-C80/8 module is 12HP (three slots) wide. It can be installed into following
shelves and slots:
LED Indicators
Labeling
764
CCM-C80/8
Module Type Label

This label contains relevant information about the CCM-C80/8 module. An example of the
CCM-C80/8 module type label is shown in Figure 478.
Certification Label

OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD LEVEL
1M
Wavelength
Max
.Outp .Power
1400 nm 1640 nm
136 mW

LA C -000062-01
IEC 60825 -1:2007 -03 ; IEC 60825 -2 :2006 -11
Warranty Label
765
CCM-C96/9
Specifications
CCM-C96/9
Faceplate Markings
766
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Power status
Receive
CCM-C96/9
Mod

module
Transmit
C1-C9

C1-C9
Client optical ports 1 to 9

Description
The CCM-C96/9 is a reconfigurable channel filter that allows channels to be routed from
the network port to one of the client ports. It also routes all channels received on the client
ports to the network port. The CCM-C96/9 supports the 96 DWDM channels in the 96channel plan.
For coherent channel add-drop, the CCM-C96/9 is designed to be used with up to nine
8PSM (one connected to each client port) to add-drop up to 72 channels per add-drop
branch.
Features
Supports up to 96 channels with 50 GHz channel spacing
Selectively routes channels from the network port to a client port (drop path)
Routes all channels received on client ports to the network port (add path)
Includes an amplifier in the drop path
Provides fiber detection circuitry to determine the module/port connected to the

network port
Provides port level Performance Monitoring for all ports
Provides channel level Performance Monitoring for network port receive
Provides channel level Performance Monitoring for network and client port transmit
on demand.
Generates port level alarms
Generates channel level alarms on network port receive
Client Port
R is the input (add) connection and T is the output (drop) connection. No special tools are
Network Port
connectors. The network port has the output connection T and the input connection R. .
No special tools are required to install or remove the fiber connections.
767
CCM-C96/9
Compatible Modules
The CCM-C96/9 is compatible with 50 GHz spaced ITU channels from 19125 to 19600.
The CCM-C96 is not compatible with channel modules ports that

support CWDM or L-Band channels.
Note
Please refer to the FSP 3000R7Module and System Specification , Appendix A for an
Block Diagram
The figure below shows a block diagram of the CCM-C96/9 module. The CCM-C96/9 is a
reconfigurable filter for channel add-drop. The drop path is from N-R to Cx-T (x = 1 ... 9).
The add path is from Cx-R (x = 1 ... 9) to N-T. The CCM-C96/9 module has 2 primary
components; a wavelength selective switch in the drop path and an optical combiner in
the add path. The drop path allows channels from the network to be routed to one of the
client ports. Channels routed to a client port can be monitored and controlled. The add
path combines all of the channels present on the client port inputs to the network port.
The module has a built-in amplifier for the drop path and contains fiber detection circuitry
to determine the module/port connected to the network port.
768
CCM-C96/9
Optical Signal Flow

required in many cases. The 9Roadm and CCM-C96/9 modules have built in pre-amps on
the network receive ports which eliminate the need in some cases for an external preamp.
Functional Application
The following section illustrates the functional application for the CCM-C96/9 modules.
Coherent Colorless and Directionless Add-Drop

This configuration allows channels to be added and/or dropped to any degree for channel
modules with coherent receivers and tunable laser. This application supports 100G
channel modules which have a coherent receiver and supports of up to 72 channels.
769
CCM-C96/9
Figure 484: Coherent Colorless-Directionless Add-Drop
Slot Positions
The CCM-C96/9 module is 16HP (four slots) wide. It can be installed into following shelf
and slots:
LED Indicators
Labeling
Module Type Label

This label contains information about the CCM-C96/9 module. An example of the CCMC96/9 module type label is shown in Figure 485.
770
CCM-C96/9
Certification Label

OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD LEVEL
1M
Wavelength
Max
.Outp .Power
1400 nm 1640 nm
136 mW

LA C -000062-01
IEC 60825 -1:2007 -03 ; IEC 60825 -2 :2006 -11
Warranty Label
Specifications
771
4-OPCM
4-OPCM
Figure 488: 4-OPCM Front View
Variants:
none
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 4-OPCM faceplate and their meanings.
Table 112: 4-OPCM Faceplate Markings
772
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Power supply status of the

module
Receive
Mod
Operating status of the

module
Transmit
1-4
Operating status of the VOA

1 to VOA 4
1-4
Unidirectional network ports 1

-4
4-OPCM
Description
The 4-OPCM is a 4-port Optical Power Control Module that can incrementally adjust the
power of up to four optical signals passing through it. The module incorporates 4
individually controllable variable optical attenuators (VOAs), 4 output power monitors
(OPMs) and the control unit. Each of the four channel paths consists of one VOA and one
OPM. The OPM1 to OPM4 provide measurement points to measure the optical power
levels of the four channel paths. The control unit of the module controls the operation of
the four VOAs, manages all channels and operating modes. Upon losing power, the
VOAs will all be tuned to dark not to disturb other channels within the system, which may
still be operating. All provisioned parameters controlling the function of the 4-OPCM (e.g.
operational mode for each VOA, set attenuation, set output power, etc.) will be stored
persistently on the module.
The 4-OPCM is intended to be used as a replacement for pluggable fixed attenuators and
to open the path to additional functionality (described below).
The equipment type name of the 4-OPCM used by the management software can be
documentation.
Features
Single-slot plug-in module that enables flexible solutions
High integration density up to 82 channels in the C band and L band according to

ADVA Optical Networking channel plan
1529 nm to 1562 nm or 1569 nm to 1604 nm operating ranges (depending on the

setting for the module)
Operating modes
Each port (VOA) may be configured independently to operate in two different operating
modes:
In constant attenuation mode, the user can set the attenuation of the VOA. The value set
will reflect the net attenuation of the VOA device only and does not include the inherent
loss of the device, i.e. a setting of 0dB will represent the minimum intrinsic loss of the
VOA device.
773
4-OPCM

In constant output power mode, the user will set the desired output power at the egress of
the VOA. The VOA will try to set the provisioned optical output power and to hold it
constant within the control tolerances.
If the provisioned output power cannot be reached because the required attenuation is too
low (below intrinsic attenuation) or too high (exceeding setting range) the VOA will be set
to the respective boundary and an alarm is raised.
If the output power decreases below the minimum detectable value, a defined attenuation
is set. When the output power rises above this value, the VOA works in constant output
power mode again.
Applications
Different applications are addressed by the 4-OPCM:
In constant attenuation mode only:
Replacement of fixed attenuators
In constant attenuation mode or constant power mode but only with one wavelength
channel per channel:
Power balancing
Power pre-emphasis
Alien wavelength support
These different applications are described in the following.
Replacement of Fixed Attenuators

If a VOA of the 4-OPCM is operated in the constant attenuation mode it can be used as a
replacement of current fixed attenuators anywhere within the network for power adoption
where required.
Power Balancing
Power balancing may be required in different network scenarios:
Fixed balancing of individual channel powers within a channel group in a banded

network (group amplified networks)
Fixed balancing in single channel add-/drop NEs in banded networks
Fixed balancing of a multitude of channels within a complex network to eliminate

accumulated power differences
Power balancing using the 4-OPCM can be achieved either in the constant attenuation
mode or the constant output power mode.
Power Pre-Emphasis
Power pre-emphasis may be used at the transmitter of a channel module to compensate
for wavelength dependent loss/gain throughout the network. It can be achieved either in
the constant attenuation mode or the constant output power mode.
774
4-OPCM
Alien Wavelength Support

Besides issues of operating 3rd party equipment using the FSP 3000R7 transport layer in
regard to any special operating modes of the alien equipment (such as ALS functionality)
it is usually required that the optical power transmitted into the FSP 3000R7 transport
layer needs to be controlled (e.g. for laser safety reasons).
Optical power control for alien wavelengths using the 4-OPCM module can be achieved
either in the constant attenuation mode or the constant output power mode.
Operating Mode Usage

The use of the constant attenuation mode requires the preceding power to be stable
(within the tolerance of the deployed network) over time, e.g. as the signal comes from a
fixed interface of a channel module.
If a stable 4-OPCM ingress power can not be assumed and the differences expected
exceed the networks capability to operate with correctly, the 4-OPCM may be used in the
constant output power mode.
In this case it adapts (within its limits of attenuation) to the instable ingress power while
still providing power balancing functionality. However, using a VOA of the 4-OPCM in
constant output power mode does not allow for any further VOA operated in the same
mode in cascade.
Signal Path
Figure 489 shows the operation of the 4-OPCM and illustrates the signal path, which is
described.
The DWDM signals (individual channels or groups of channels) enter the module via the
network port input connectors 1-R to 4-R and pass through the corresponding VOAs.
Depending on the operation mode, the optical power of the input signals is attenuated or
kept constant. Data signal output power levels are monitored by OPM1 to OPM4. For this
purpose, each tap coupler drops about 1% of output signal power level and passes it on to
the corresponding OPM. The measured data are directed in constant power mode the
OPM value is used to adjust the VOA attenuation according to the target output power.
When the constant attenuation mode is activated the optical signal is attenuated by a
fixed magnitude. through the network port output connectors 1-T to 4-T.
775
4-OPCM
Figure 489: 4-OPCM Operation Scheme
Slot Positions
The 4-OPCM is 4 HP wide. It can be installed into following shelves and slots:
LED Indicators
Different LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating status of the 4OPCM module and its ports. For details, refer to the FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2 Maintenance
Labeling
Module Type Label

This label contains relevant information about the 4-OPCM module. An example of the 4OPCM module type label is shown in Figure 490.
776
4-OPCM
Figure 490: Example of a 4-OPCM Module Type Label
Values may be different for other 4-OPCMs using this label. The correct values can be
found in the Module and System Specification.
Certification Label
This label provides approved certification marks. An example of the 4-OPCM certification
label is shown in Figure 491.
Figure 491: Example of a 4-OPCM Certification Label
Warranty Label
Networking will disclaim the implied warranty of merchantability. An example of a 4OPCM warranty label is shown in Figure 492.
Figure 492: Example of a 4-OPCM Warranty Label
Specifications
777
4-OPCM
778
Chapter 15
This chapter provides general descriptions of all optical filter modules available at the
Each description includes the front view of the module, the explanation of the optical
ports, the operation scheme and module specific details. The module key features are
The descriptions are merely supposed to convey a basic understanding of the optical
filter modules to the reader. For detailed information on these modules and underlying
technologies, contact ADVA Optical Networking.
optical filter modules are provided such as module classification, naming conventions,
module design and labels.
ILM50-#DC on p.793
2CLSM-#D01-#D64 on p.797
40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy on p.800
40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200 on p.809
40CSM/2HU-#19595-#19205 on p.817
40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#19200 on p.826
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19xxx-#19yyy on p.834
40CSM/P-2HU#19590-#19200-DM on p.845
40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy on p.854
96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125 on p.859
2BSM-#D01-#D32 on p.870
4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy on p.873
8GSM-#D01-#D32 on p.877
1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy on p.881
5GSM-#19590-#19200 on p.885
8CSM-#19xxx-#19yyy on p.889
4CSM+#19xxx-#19yyy on p.896
4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy on p.903
4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy on p.908
1CSM+#Dxx-E/W on p.913
1CSM+#Dxx-E/W on p.917
779
1CSM+#19xxx on p.921
2CLSM-#D01-#D64-SFx on p.925
16CSM-#D01-#D32-SFx on p.929
16CSM-#D33-#D64-SFx on p.936
OSFM+#1490-SFA on p.943
OSFM+#1510-SFB on p.946
2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 on p.949
3BSM-#G1310-#C1610 on p.952
3BSM-#G1310-#C1610-E/W on p.956
4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy on p.960
8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 on p.964
1CSM+#G1310 on p.968
1CSM+#Cxxxx on p.971
1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W on p.975
2CSM+#G1310-#Cxxxx-E/W on p.987
5GSM/P-#19590-#19200-DM on p.992
8CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-DM on p.996
2BSM/P-#C1270-#C1610-DM on p.1000
8CSM/P+#C1470-#C1610-DM on p.1004
8CSM/P-#19xxx-#19yyy on p.1008
8CSM/P-#C1270-#C1450 on p.1015
1CSM/P+#Cxxxx on p.1019
1CSM/P+#Cxxxx-E/W on p.1024
OSFM+#1510 on p.1029
OSFM+#1630 on p.1032
2-OTFM+#1650 on p.1035
5PSM on p.1042
PSM-95/5 on p.1051
2PSM-95/5 on p.1054
1PM/SM on p.1058
1PM/MM on p.1061
2PM/SM on p.1064
2PM/MM on p.1068
2PM/MM-OM3 on p.1072
J-Y/SM Cable on p.1076
J-Y/MM62 Cable on p.1081
J/SM/4CS-#C1270-#C1330/LC/0400 on p.1091
8-Port CWDM Passive MUX/DMX for Tyco FOSC Closures on p.1097
780
General Information
General Information
Optical filter modules are essential components to perform specific functions in the FSP
3000R7 CWDM or DWDM system, such as the splitting and combining of bands,
channel groups and individual channels, the dropping and adding single channels, the
protection of channels etc. The optical filter modules can be classified by their functions
in the system as listed in the following table:
Table 113: Overview of Optical Filter Module Types
Module
Classification
Module Types
Description
Interleaver
Module
ILM50#DC
C-band 50-100 GHz interleaver/deinterleaver module
C/L band
splitter
modules
(CLSMs)
2CLSM-#D01-#D64
C-band/L-band splitter
2CLSM-#D01-#D64-SFx
DWDM C/L Band Splitter Module, 2

port - single-fiber working
Band Splitter
Modules
(BSMs)
2BSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
DWDM C/L Band Splitter Module, 2

port, red/blue; Two discrete module
variants are available.
Band Splitter
Modules
(BSMs)
2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610
CWDM Subband Splitter Module, 2 port
Band Splitter
Modules
(BSMs)
2BSM/P-#C1270#C1610-DM
Passive CDWM Band Splitter Module,

2 port, with 1310 nm interface and
Network monitoring port for both
transmit and receive
Band Splitter
Modules
(BSMs)
3BSM-#G1310-#C1610
CWDM Band Splitter Module with 1310

nm interface
Band Splitter
Modules
(BSMs)
3BSM-#G1310-#C1610E/W
CWDM Band Splitter Module with 1310

nm interface, east/west
Group Splitter
Modules
(GSMs)
1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy
DWDM C band Group Splitter Module

with upgrade port, 1 port; 16 discrete
module variants are available.
Group Splitter
Modules
(GSMs)
4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
DWDM C band Group Splitter Module,

4 port band; 4 discrete module variants
are available.
Group Splitter
Modules
(GSMs)
5GSM-#19590-#19200
Optical Channel Group Splitter and

Combiner Module, 5 port.
781
General Information
782
Module
Classification
Module Types
Description
Group Splitter
Modules
(GSMs)
5GSM/P-#19590-#19200DM
Passive DWDM Channel Group Splitter

and Combiner Module, 5 port, with
monitoring port for both transmit and
receive
Group Splitter
Modules
(GSMs)
8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
DWDM Group Splitter Module, 8-port;

Two discrete module variants are
available.
Channel Splitter Modules

(CSMs)
1CSM+#Cxxxx
Single Channel CWDM Splitter Module

with upgrade port; 8 variants are
available, one for each of the 8 CWDM
wavelengths it supports.
Channel
Splitter
Modules
(CSMs)
1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W
East/West Single Channel CWDM

Splitter Module with upgrade port; 8
variants are available, one for each of
the 8 CWDM wavelengths it supports.

(CSMs)
1CSM+#19xxx
Single Channel DWDM Splitter and

Combiner Module with upgrade port; 40
the 40 DWDM C-band channels.

(CSMs)
1CSM+#19xxx-E/W
East/West Single Channel DWDM

Splitter and Combiner Module with
upgrade port; 9 variants are available.

(CSMs)
1CSM+#G1310
Single Channel CWDM Splitter Module

with 1310 nm connectivity.

(CSMs)
1CSM/P+#Cxxxx
Passive Optical Single Channel CWDM

Splitter and Combiner Module with
upgrade port; 16 variants are available.

(CSMs)
1CSM/P+#Cxxxx-E/W
Passive East/West Optical Single

Channel CWDM Splitter and Combiner
Module with upgrade port; 16 variants
are available.

(CSMs)
2CSM+#G1310-#CxxxxE/W
East/West CWDM Channel Splitter

Module with 1310 nm connectivity; 8
the 8 CWDM wavelengths it supports.

(CSMs)
4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy
CWDM Channel Splitter Module, 4 port,

supporting the #C1470-#C1610 or
#C1510-#C1590 subband; Two discrete
General Information
Module
Classification
Module Types
Description

(CSMs)
4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
DWDM C band Channel Splitter

Module, 4 port; 16 discrete module

(CSMs)
4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy
DWDM C band Channel Splitter Module

with upgrade port, 4 port; 16 discrete

(CSMs)
4CSM+#19xxx-#19yyy
DWDM Channel Splitter and Combiner

Module, 8-port; 10 discrete module

(CSMs)
8CSM-#19xxx-#19yyy
DWDM Channel Splitter and Combiner

Module, 8 port; 5 discrete module
variants are available

(CSMs)
Passive DWDM Channel Splitter and

Combiner Module, 8 port; 5 discrete
module variants are available

(CSMs)
8CSM/P-#C1270-#C1450
Passive CWDM Channel Splitter and

Combiner Module, 8 port, supporting
channels #C1270 - #C1450
Channel
Splitter
Modules
(CSMs)
8CSM/P-#C1470#C1610-DM
Passive CWDM Channel Splitter

Module, 8 port, with monitoring port for
both transmit and receive

(CSMs)
8CSM/P+#C1470#C1610-DM
Passive CWDM Channel Splitter and

Combiner Module, 8 port, with upgrade
port and monitoring port for both
transmit and receive

(CSMs)
16CSM-#D01-#D32-SFx
C band Channel Splitter Module, 16

port, single-fiber working; Two variants
are available, one for each side of the
communications link.

(CSMs)
16CSM-#D33-#D64-SFx
Channel Splitter Module, 16 port, singlefiber working - L band; Two variants are
available, one for each side of the
communications link.

(CSMs)
40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
MUX/DMX Channel Splitter Module, 40

port, supporting C or L band. Two
discrete module variants are available.
783
General Information
Module
Classification
Module Types
Description

(CSMs)
40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy
MUX/DEMUX Channel Splitter, 40 port,

C or L band integrated in a separate
2HU shelf; Two discrete variants are
available.

(CSMs)
40CSM/2HU-#19595#19205
MUX/DMX Channel Splitter and

Combiner, 40 port, with 2HU shelf for
interleaved C-band channels.

(CSMs)
40CSM-C80/2HU#19xxx-#19yyy
MUX/DEMUX Channel Splitter and

Combiner 2HU Shelf, 40 port, C band,
used for dual client configuration with
the 8ROADM-C80/0/OPM

(CSMs)
40CSM/P-2HU#19590#19200-DM
Passive MUX/DMX Channel Splitter

and Combiner 2HU shelf, 40 port, with
monitoring port for both transmit and
receive
Optical
Supervisory
Channel Filter
Modules
(OSFMs)
OSFM+#1510
Optical Supervisory Channel Filter

Module with upgrade port, OSC
transmitter wavelength at 1510 nm
OSFM+#1630

Module with upgrade port, OSC
transmitter wavelength at 1630 nm
OSFM+#1490-SFA

Module - single-fiber working, location A
OSFM+#1510-SFB

Module - single-fiber working, location B
1PM/MM
Single-port Protection Module

Multimode
1PM/SM
Single-port Protection Module Singlemode
2PM/MM
Protection Module Multimode, 2 port
2PM/MM-OM3
Protection Module
Multimode according to OM3, 2 port
2PM/SM
Protection Module Single-Mode, 2 port
PSM-95/5
Power Splitter Module 95%/5%
2PSM-95/5
Optical Power Splitter Module 95%/5%,

bidirectional
Optical Power
Splitter
Modules
784
General Information
Module
Classification
Optical TimeDomain
Reflectometer
Filter Module
Module Types
Description
5PSM
Optical Power Splitter Module, 5 port
8PSM
Optical Power SplitterModule, 8 port
2-OTFM+#1650
Optical Time-Domain Reflectometer

Filter Module with upgrade port,
supporting 1650 nm wavelength.
Identification
Optical filter modules are identified by faceplate codes and the label on the board cover.
Identification information is provided in each module description.
Naming Conventions
The optical filter module name is made up of a set of parts assembled according to a very
specific rule as exemplified below. The parts of the name represent the modules specific
features. For clarification, see the example below.
This example describes a CWDM channel splitter/combiner module for east/west

applications. It provides two client ports and one upgrade port per transmission direction.
The module supports only one of the eight CWDM channels and, in addition, the gray
channel #G1310. The use of the module is restricted to the 1HU Shelf.
785
General Information
Table 114: Optical Filter Module Naming Conventions
Parts of the
Name
Code
Meaning
Number of
client ports
1 client port
16
16 client ports
2 client ports
3 client ports
4 client ports
40
40 client ports
8 client ports
ABSM
Band splitter/combiner module for CWDM
BSM
Red/blue subband splitter/combiner module for

DWDM; band splitter/combiner module for
CWDM
BSM/P
Passive band splitter/combiner module for

CWDM
CLSM
C- and L-band splitter/combiner module
CSM
Channel splitter/combiner module
CSM/P
Passive channel splitter/combiner module
GSM
Group splitter/combiner module
ILM
Interleaver/deinterleaver module
OSFM
Optical supervisory channel filter module
PM/MM
Protection module - multimode
PM/SM
Protection module - single mode
PSM
Power splitter module for power monitoring and

optical spectrum analysis
Application
1HU Shelf only
Upgrade ports
Sign for availability of upgrade port(s)
Sign for non-availability of upgrade port(s)
#G1310
Gray channel operating at wavelengths of 1310

nm
Optical filter
module types
Optical filter
module types
Gray interface
786
General Information
Parts of the
Name
Code
Meaning
Optical
supervisory
channel
(OSC)
#1490
OSC operating at a wavelength of 1490 nm
#1510
#1630
Ranges of WDM channels

DWDM
channels
#D01#D64
C-band channel numbers 01 through 32 and Lband channel numbers 33 through 64 according
to FSP DWDM wavelength table
#D01#D32
C-band channel numbers 01 through 32

#D33#D64
L-band channel numbers 33 through 64 according

to FSP DWDM wavelength table
#DC
C-band channels according to FSP DWDM

wavelength table
#Dxx#Dyy
C-band channel numbers 01 through 32 or L-band

channel numbers 33 through 64 according to FSP
DWDM wavelength table (depending on module
variant)
#xxxxx#yyyyy
C-band channels 19600 through 19200 or 19595

through 19205 or L-band channels 19100 through
18700 according to FSP DWDM wavelength
table
#19xxx#19yyy
C-band channels 19600 19200 according to

FSP DWDM wavelength table
#Dxx
One of the DWDM channel number 01 through 64

#19xxx
One of the DWDM channels 19600 through

19200 according to FSP DWDM wavelength
table
787
General Information
Parts of the
Name
Code
Meaning
CWDM
channels
#C1470#C1610
CWDM channels in the range from #1470 to

#1610 according to FSP CWDM wavelength
table
#G1310#C1610
Channel #G1310 plus CWDM channels in the

range from #1470 to #1610 according to FSP
CWDM wavelength table
#Cxxxx
One of the CWDM channels 1470, 1490, 1510,

1530, 1550, 1570, 1590 and 1610 according to
FSP CWDM wavelength table
#Cxxxx#Cyyyy
Channel numbers #C1470, #C1490, #C1590 and

#C1610 or channel numbers #C1510, #C1530,
#C1550 and #C1590 according to FSP CWDM
wavelength table (depending on module variant)
SFx
Single-fiber working (x stands for location A or B
SFA
Single-fiber working, location A
SFB
Single-fiber working, location B
E/W
For east/west applications
DM
with dual power level monitoring
OM3
optical multimode fiber type according to OM3
Module design
Module Design
Optical filter modules are in passive designs based on specific optical filters. The
modules are of the plug-in type, and are completely compatible with any 7HU shelf
(SH7HU), 9HU Shelf (SH9HU) or 1HU Shelf (SH1HU).
Each optical filter module has either special EMC contact strips or an EMC textile gasket
on the narrow sides of the faceplate, which create a tight seal with neighboring modules.
The EMC contact strips and the EMC textile gaskets respectively avoid unintended
minimum fiber bend radii when connecting the fiber-optic jumpers. The modules fully
conform to the requirements of TELCORDIA SR-3580 (NEBS) level 3 and ETSI EN 300
019/-1-3 Class 3.1 standards.
All optical filter modules are hot swappable and customer installable. This enables a
scalable, in-service expansion at any time.
Depending on the function the modules contain optical filters which
demultiplex/multiplex, drop/add, split/couple or interleave/de-interleave the signals.
788
General Information
Demultiplexer and Multiplexer

The Demultiplexer (DEMUX) is an optical filter that splits a composite DWDM/CWDM
signal into DWDM/CWDM individual channels, channel groups or channel bands
(depends on the module type).
The Multiplexer (MUX) is an optical filter that combines the received DWDM/CWDM
channels, channel groups or channel bands (depends on the module type) into one
composite DWDM/CWDM signal at the same time. Demultiplexer and Multiplexer are
used full duplex in one module.
Drop and Add Filter

Modules with add/drop functionality have optical channel adding/dropping filters and one
or more upgrade ports (depends on the module type). The add filter adds (reinserts) one or
more certain WDM channels and/or a predefined gray channel in the direction of signal
flow to an existing multi-channel WDM signal coming from the upgrade port. These
signals are then combined and transmitted through an optical fiber.
The drop filter drops (removes) one or more certain WDM channels and/or a predefined
gray channel in the direction of signal flow out of a channel spectrum while the remaining
multiplicity of channels are reflected onto the upgrade port(s). The dropped channels are
routed to another network paths. Add and drop optical filters are used full duplex in one
module.
Splitter/Coupler
Optical splitter and couplers are used in protection modules.
A splitter is an optical filter that splits one signal into two optical paths with identical data.
A coupler is an optical filter that couples two received signal paths with identical data to
one output signal.
Optical Interleaver/Deinterleaver
Optical interleaver and deinterleaver are used in interleaver modules.
An interleaver is an optical filter that combines two different sets of channels with the
same channel spacing into one densely packed set with half of the input channel spacing
in the transmit direction.
An deinterleaver is an optical filter that separates the densely packed set of channels into
two different sets of channels with a double-wide channel spacing in the receive
direction.
Module Handling
789
General Information
Management
Using the network control unit (NCU), all FSP 3000R7 optical filter modules are SNMP
Management allows user access to module conditions as well as network status.
Faceplate Markings
All FSP 3000R7 optical filter modules have the same faceplate markings. LED indicator
and optical port markings of the individual modules are explained in the appropriate
module descriptions.
LED Indicators
All optical filter modules have one tri-color LED indicator that are visible through the
faceplates. The colors of the LED indicator display different operating status. The status
that each color of the LED indicator represents is described in the Maintenance and
Labeling
Each optical filter module has several printed labels on the front plate and the board
cover. These labels provide module specific information as shown in Figure 493, Figure
494, Figure 495Figure 496, and Figure 497.
Frontplate Labels
For a quick identification all optical filter modules have two printed labels affixed on its
frontplate. The top label includes the module name and serial number. The label at the
bottom of the faceplate includes the USI code of the module. Figure 493 shows an
example of a ILM50#DC frontplate label.
Figure 493: Example of ILM50#DC Frontplate Labels
Module Type Label

790
the module type
General Information
An example of the ILM50-#DC and 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 module type label are shown in
Figure 494: Example of an ILM50-#DC Module Type Label
Figure 495: Example of a 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 Module Type Label
Certification Label
This label provides approved certification marks. An example of an optical filter module
certification label is shown in the figure below.
791
General Information
Figure 496: Example of an Optical Filter Module Certification Label
Warranty Label
Networking will disclaim the implied warranty of merchantability. An example a module
warranty label is shown in Figure 497.
Figure 497: Example of a Module Warranty Label
792
ILM50-#DC
ILM50-#DC
Figure 498: ILM50-#DC Front View
793
ILM50-#DC
Faceplate Markings
Table below lists all abbreviations on the ILM50-#DC faceplate and their meanings.
Table 115: ILM50-#DC Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
network port
C2
client port C2
C1
client port C1

module
Description
The ILM50-#DC is a C-band 50 GHz/100 GHz optical interleaver and de-interleaver
module used in 50-GHz channel spacing DWDM systems. It provides signal interleaving
in the transmit direction and signal de-interleaving in the receive direction.
The module has two client ports and one network port. On the client side, the ILM50-#DC
works in conjunction with the corresponding 40-port channel splitter modules (40CSMs)
operating in the 100 GHz wavelength grid.
The module incorporates a combination of MUX and DEMUX band filters which the
interleaver and de-interleaver functions perform. The MUX band filter takes two, 100-GHz
even and odd channel signal streams and combines them into one, 50-GHz optical signal
stream for transmission over a single optical fiber. The DEMUX band filter carries out the
opposite process, that is, it separates the 50-GHz signal stream into two, 100-GHz even
and odd channel signal streams prior to further channel de-multiplexing by the appropriate
40CSMs. Even channels refer to the 100 GHz ITU-T wavelengths grid, and odd channels
refer to the channels in between.
Thus, the system capacity per fiber can be increased from 40 channels to a maximum of
80 channels in the C band. However, to build up such a high-capacity DWDM system the
whole set of splitter/combiner modules for multiplexing and de-multiplexing the C-band
channels is absolutely essential.
If the ILM50#DC is used with the initial DWDM installation, it will provide cost-effective
future proofing of the system capacity and avoid interruption of data traffic when the
increase of capacity is required.
The ILM50#DC is specifically designed for DWDM in dual-fiber point-to-point, linear
add/drop, ring and meshed configurations.
Features
794
Input channel spacing of 100 GHz
Output channel spacing of 50 GHz
Full C-band coverage (40 even and 40 odd 100 GHz spaced channels according to
ITU-T G.694.1)
ILM50-#DC
High channel isolation
Low dispersion
Low insertion loss
LC type receptacle connectors
Transport protocol independent
Signal Path
The figure below shows the operation of the ILM50-#DC and illustrates the signal path,
Figure 499: ILM50-#DC Operation Scheme
Receive Direction
The ILM50#DC receives a composite 50-GHz spaced C-band channel signal through the
input N-D of the network port from the far end of the link. The DEMUX band filter splits
this signal into even and odd channel signals of 100 GHz spacing and couples them into
to a different dedicated fiber to have each set of channels separate on the C1-D and C2D outputs of the client ports. The even and odd channel signals are then transmitted to
the corresponding 40-port channel splitter modules for further de-multiplexing.
Transmit Direction
The ILM50#DC receives the multiplexed even and odd C-band channels signals with 100
GHz spacing from the corresponding 40-port channel splitter modules through the inputs
C1-M and C2-M of the client ports. The MUX band filter combines both sets of channels
into one signal of 50 GHz channel spacing and couples it into a single fiber. This signal is
directed to the output N-M of the network port for transmission to the far end of the link.
795
ILM50-#DC
Slot Positions
The ILM50#DC is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and slots:
Specifications
796
2CLSM-#D01-#D64
2CLSM-#D01-#D64
Figure 500: 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 Front View
Faceplate Markings
Table below lists all abbreviations on the 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 faceplate and their
meanings.
797
2CLSM-#D01-#D64
Table 116: 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
network port
C2
client port C2
C1
client port C1

module
Description
The 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 is an optical C-band/L-band splitter. It is designed for
bidirectional data transfer in dual-fiber point-to-point configurations. The module supports
up to 80 channels in the C band (#D01#D32) and up to 40 channels in the L band (#D33
#D64).
The module incorporates a combination of MUX and DEMUX band filters. The DEMUX
band filter splits the composite signal received from the far end of the link into the C- and
L-band channel spectrums prior to further channel group de-multiplexing by the
appropriate optical modules. Simultaneously the MUX band filter combines the C- and Lband channel spectrums from the client side into a composite signal for transmission
through one optical fiber to the far end of the link.
Consequently, the existing channel system in the C band can be expanded up to a 120channel capacity using the 2CLSM-#D01-#D64. It provides the system with further 40
channels in the L band. However, to build up high-capacity DWDM networks (up to 120
channels) the whole set of splitter/combiner modules for multiplexing and de-multiplexing
the C and Lbands are required. The 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 is mainly used for fullband
amplification along with the group-based EDFA modules. The module provides two
optical ports on the client side and one port on the network side.
Features
Support of up to 40 channels (wavelengths) in the C band and up to

40 channels (wavelengths) in the L band according to ITU-T G.694.1 (100 GHz
spacing)
Support of up to 80 channels (wavelengths) in the C band according to ITU-T G.694.1

(50 GHz spacing)
Signal Path
Figure 501 shows the operation of the 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 and illustrates the signal path,
798
2CLSM-#D01-#D64
Figure 501: 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 Operation Scheme
Receive Direction
The 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 receives a composite C/L-band signal through the input N-D of
the network port from the far end of the link. The DEMUX band filter in the splitter section
splits the incoming signal into the C-band channels (#D01-#D32) as well as the L-band
channels (#D33-#D64) and couples them into single fibers to have the channel groups
separate on the C1-D and C2-D outputs of the client ports. The C and Lband channels
are then transmitted to the corresponding group splitter modules for further demultiplexing or the appropriate EDFA modules for optical amplification.
Transmit Direction
The 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 receives the C-band channels (#D01-#D32) and the L-band
channels (#D33-#D64) from the corresponding group splitter modules or EDFA modules
through the inputs C1-M and C2-M of the client ports. The MUX band filter in the
combiner section combines the C and Lband channels into a composite signal and
couples it into a single fiber. This signal is directed to the output N-M of the network port
for transmission to the far end of the link.
Slot Positions
The 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and slots:
SH1HU, slots 1, 2
Specifications
799
40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy
40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy
Figure 502: Example of 40CSM/2HU-#D02-#D32 Front View
Faceplate Markings
the table below lists all abbreviations on the 40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 117: 40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy Faceplate Markings
800
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
Electrical Port
C1 to
C40
client ports 1 through 40
network port

module
Interconnect Port
40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy
Variants
The 40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy (40-port MUX/DMX Channel Splitter 2HU Shelf - C or L
band) is available in two variants:
40CSM/2HU-#D02-#D32
(40-port MUX/DMX channel splitter 2HU shelf - even C band channels)
40CSM/2HU-#D34-#D64
(40-port MUX/DMX channel splitter 2HU Shelf - L band)
The part #D02-#D32 of the shelf name refers to the total channel spectrum of the C band
inc. the channels #DC1-#DC9.
The part #D34-#D64 of the shelf name refers to the total channel spectrum of the L band
inc. the channels #DL1-#DL9.
Both shelf variants feature the same design and use the same faceplate. They differ in
the optical filters supporting either 40 C-band channels or 40 L-band channels. The shelf
designation for the C-band shelf is 40CSM/2HU-#D02-#D32 and the name for the L-band
shelf is 40CSM/2HU-#D34-#D64.
The front view of a 40CSM/2HU-#D02-#D32 is illustrated in Figure 549 as an example.
Description
The 40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy is a monolithic shelf of 2 HU height without any kind of
modularity supporting the multiplexing and de-multiplexing of 40 channels either in the C
band or in the L band. It is a 40-port MUX/DEMUX channel splitter for C band or L band,
integrated in a separate shelf to save slots in the master shelf. It is designed for
bidirectional data transfer in 40-channel dual-fiber DWDM point-to-point configurations.
The shelf contains a combination of particular channel MUX and DEMUX filters for the C
band or L band. These filters multiplex/demultiplex up to 40 separate channels into/from
the full duplex signal carried by the network fiber pair. For this purpose the 40CSM/2HU#Dxx-#Dyy provides 40 client ports and one network port. On the client side, the
40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy works in conjunction with the corresponding channel modules.
Each of the 40 separate channels of the C band and Lband is assigned to a specific
client port as shown in the following table.
Table 118: 40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy Client Port Description
40CSM/2HU-#D02-#D32 (C Band)
40CSM/2HU-#D34-#D64 (L Band)
Channel
No.
Channel
No.
Client ports*
Client ports*
#D02
C1 195.90 (C1-M; C1-D)
#D34
C1 190.90 (C1-M; C1-D)
#D03
C2 195.80 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D35
C2 190.80 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D04
C3 195.70 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D36
C3 190.70 (C3-M; C3-D)
#DC1
C4 195.60 (C4-M; C4-D)
#DL1
C4 190.60 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D05
C5 195.50 (C5-M; C5-D)
#D37
C5 190.50 (C5-M; C5-D)
801
40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy
802
Channel
No.
Channel
No.
Client ports*
Client ports*
#D06
C6 195.40 (C6-M; C6-D)
#D38
C6 190.40 (C6-M; C6-D)
#D07
C7 195.30 (C7-M; C7-D)
#D39
C7 190.30 (C7-M; C7-D)
#D08
C8 195.20 (C8-M; C8-D)
#D40
C8 190.20 (C8-M; C8-D)
#DC2
C9 195.10 (C9-M; C9-D)
#DL2
C9 190.10 (C9-M; C9-D)
#D09
C10 195.00 (C10-M; C10-D)
#D41
C10 190.00 (C10-M; C10-D)
#D10
C11 194.90 (C11-M; C11-D)
#D42
C11 189.90 (C11-M; C11-D)
#D11
C12 194.80 (C12-M; C12-D)
#D43
C12 189.80 (C12-M; C12-D)
#D12
C13 194.70 (C13-M; C13-D)
#D44
C13 189.70 (C13-M; C13-D)
#DC3
C14 194.60 (C14-M; C14-D)
#DL3
C14 189.60 (C14-M; C14-D)
#D13
C15 194.50 (C15-M; C15-D)
#D45
C15 189.50 (C15-M; C15-D)
#D14
C16 194.40 (C16-M; C16-D)
#D46
C16 189.40 (C16-M; C16-D)
#D15
C17 194.30 (C17-M; C17-D)
#D47
C17 189.30 (C17-M; C17-D)
#D16
C18 194.20 (C18-M; C18-D)
#D48
C18 189.20 (C18-M; C18-D)
#DC4
C19 194.10 (C19-M; C19-D)
#DL4
C19 189.10 (C19-M; C19-D)
#DC9
C20 194.00 (C20-M; C20-D)
#DL9
C20 189.00 (C20-M; C20-D)
#DC5
C21 193.90 (C21-M; C21-D)
#DL5
C21 188.90 (C21-M; C21-D)
#D17
C22 193.80 (C22-M; C22-D)
#D49
C22 188.80 (C22-M; C22-D)
#D18
C23 193.70 (C23-M; C23-D)
#D50
C23 188.70 (C23-M; C23-D)
#D19
C24 193.60 (C24-M; C24-D)
#D51
C24 188.60 (C24-M; C24-D)
#D20
C25 193.50 (C25-M; C25-D)
#D52
C25 188.50 (C25-M; C25-D)
#DC6
C26 193.40 (C26-M; C26-D)
#DL6
C26 188.40 (C26-M; C26-D)
#D21
C27 193.30 (C27-M; C27-D)
#D53
C27 188.30 (C27-M; C27-D)
#D22
C28 193.20 (C28-M; C28-D)
#D54
C28 188.20 (C28-M; C28-D)
#D23
C29 193.10 (C29-M; C29-D)
#D55
C29 188.10 (C29-M; C29-D)
#D24
C30 193.00 (C30-M; C30-D)
#D56
C30 188.00 (C30-M; C30-D)
#DC7
C31 192.90 (C31-M; C31-D)
#DL7
C31 187.90 (C31-M; C31-D)
#D25
C32 192.80 (C32-M; C32-D)
#D57
C32 187.80 (C32-M; C32-D)
40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy
Channel
No.
Channel
No.
Client ports*
Client ports*
#D26
C33 192.70 (C33-M; C33-D)
#D58
C33 187.70 (C33-M; C33-D)
#D27
C34 192.60 (C34-M; C34-D)
#D59
C34 187.60 (C34-M; C34-D)
#D28
C35 192.50 (C35-M; C35-D)
#D60
C35 187.50 (C35-M; C35-D)
#DC8
C36 192.40 (C36-M; C36-D)
#DL8
C36 187.40 (C36-M; C36-D)
#D29
C37 192.30 (C37-M; C37-D)
#D61
C37 187.30 (C37-M; C37-D)
#D30
C38 192.20 (C38-M; C38-D)
#D62
C38 187.20 (C38-M; C38-D)
#D31
C39 192.10 (C39-M; C39-D)
#D63
C39 187.10 (C39-M; C39-D)
#D32
C40 192.00 (C40-M; C40-D)
#D64
C40 187.00 (C40-M; C40-D)
* The input and output connectors of the client ports are not explicitly labeled on
the faceplate.
The 40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy can be combined with a 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 to form an 80channel bidirectional transmission system, thus resulting in 40 channel granularity.
For management purposes, the 40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy shelf is connected to a PSCU
(Passive Shelf Control Unit) via the interconnect port. The PSCU registers the
40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy shelf to the NE controller.
40CSM/2HU-#D02-#D32 is functionality identical to 40CSM/2HU#19590-#19200 and 40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#19200.
Note
To provision 40CSM/2HU-#D02-#D32, select:

Equipment Type = 40CSM/2HU-#D and Band = C
To provision 40CSM/2HU-#D34-#D64, select

Equipment Type = 40CSM/2HU-#D and Band = L
The interconnect port has a 6-pin panel-mounted IEEE1394 (FireWire) socket. Four pins
are used for transferring inventory data, and two pins receive power from the PSCU. This
allows the 40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy to operate without a separate power supply.
Note
Although the PSCU and 40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy use FireWire 400

connectors for interconnecting, the FireWire itself is not supported
(neither the protocol nor pinout).
The cable for connecting the 40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy to the PSCU is delivered by

ADVA Optical Networking. This cable must be used solely. The use of a cable other than
that delivered by ADVA Optical Networking will void the warranty and the EMC
certificate. For more information, refer to Electrical Cables on p.1279.
803
40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy
Features
Support of 40 channels (wavelengths) in the C band or 40 channels (wavelengths) in

the L band according to ITU-T G.694.1 (100 GHz channel spacing)
Support of mixed ROADM deployments
Full management support when connected to a PSCU
Signal Path
Figure below shows the operation of the 40CSM/2HU-#D02-#D32 as an example and
illustrates the signal path, which is described. The same principle applies to the
40CSM/2HU-#D34-#D64 shelf.
Figure 503: 40CSM/2HU-#D02-#D32 Operation Scheme
Receive Direction
The 40CSM/2HU-#D02-#D32 receives a composite C-band signal through the input N-D
of the network port from the far end of the link. The DEMUX filter in the splitter section
splits the incoming signal into 40 individual channels and couples them into just as many
fibers to have the channels separate on the C1-D to C40-D outputs of the client ports.
The channels are then transmitted to the corresponding DWDM channel modules.
Transmit Direction
The 40CSM/2HU-#D02-#D32 receives up to 40 individual channels of the C band from
the corresponding DWDM channel modules through the inputs C1-M to C40-M of the
client ports. The MUX filter in the combiner section combines the incoming channels into
a composite signal and couples it into a single fiber. This signal is directed to the output
N-M of the network port for transmission to the far end of the link.
804
40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy
Placement
The 40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy can be placed in a 19 inch, ETSI or NEBS compliant rack
by using the appropriate adaptor brackets. It also fits into a 300 mm (0.984 ft.) deep ETSI
Accessories
Adaptor Brackets
1 x 23-inch NEBS bracket pair
The 40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy shelf comes with no rackmount brackets pre-installed. The

19-inch rackmount, NEBS and ETSI bracket pair is included in the shipping box. The
relevant bracket pair must be fitted on the outside of the left-hand and right-hand side
walls for mounting the shelf.
The procedures for removing and fitting the different adaptor brackets are described in the
FIBER FINGER/2HU
The FIBER FINGER/2HU attaches to the right-hand side ETSI or NEBS bracket of the
shelf as shown in Figure 504. This assembly consists of four fiber fingers. Each finger
space can be used to retain the optical fiber jumpers connected to corresponding optical
channel module.
Figure 504: Example of the FIBER FINGER/2HU Attached with an
ETSI Bracket to the Shelf
805
40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy
The procedure for attaching the FIBER FINGER/2HU to the shelf is described in the
Front Cover
The front cover is placed on the front of the shelf. It protects the fiber optic connectors of
the 40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy against external influences and prevents the fibers from
being pulled out inadvertently. The cover consists of strong magnet pins which has to be
positioned to bolts attached to the front panel of the shelf. If not enclosed in the shelf
delivery, the front cover has to be ordered separately.
The operation status of the shelf can be observed when the front cover is removed. The
procedure for removing and mounting the front cover is described in the Maintenance and
LED Indicator
The 40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy has one LED indicator on the faceplate. It indicates the
status of the shelf, i.e. that the communication is operating correctly or not.
Table 119: Description of the 40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy Status LED
LED
Name
LED
Color
Status Indications
Red
Firmware or hardware mismatch
Off
Power source has failed. The shelf receives no power.
Green
Power ok
Shelf Labeling
Each 40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy shelf can be identified by several labels located on the
top of the shelf.
Figure 505: Labels on Top of the Shelf
The labels provide shelf specific information as shown in Figure 506 to Figure 509.
806
40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy
Shelf Type Label

Figure 506: Example of a 40CSM/2HU-#D02-#D32 Shelf Type Label
Certification Label
Figure 507: Example of a 40CSM/2HU-#D02-#D32 Certification Label
Japanese Label
This certification label contains the EMC and Compliance Statement for our Japanese
customers. Figure 508 shows an example.
807
40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy
Figure 508: Japanese Label

The ESD and laser safety label is delivered with the shelf. The figure below shows the
label.
Note
The ESD and laser safety label is not visible when the shelf is installed.
For safety reasons, it is recommended to place an additional label on a
visible location when the rack is installed.
Specifications
808
40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200
40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200
Figure 510: Example of a 40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200 Front View
Faceplate Markings
These are the abbreviations used for the 40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200 faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 120: 40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Electrical Port
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
C1 to
C40
client ports 1 through

40
network port
Shelfs
power
supply
status
Interconnect
Port
Description
The 40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200 is a monolithic shelf of 2 HU height without any kind of
modularity including the channel MUX and DEMUX filters. The filters
multiplex/demultiplex up to 40 even C-band channels (#19590 through #19200) into/from
the full duplex signals carried by the network fiber pair. The shelf is meant for the use in a
40-channel dual-fiber DWDM point-to-point network topology. Therefore the
40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200 provides one bidirectional network port and 40 bidirectional
client ports as shown in Figure 510. Each client port is labeled with the port number (C1 to
809
40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200
C40) as well as the corresponding frequency [THz] which the port supports. Refer to the
following table for more information.
Table 121: 40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200 Client Port Description
810
FSP
3000R7
Channel
Names
Frequencies
[THz]
Wavelengths
[nm]
Client ports*
19590
195.90
1530.334
C1 195.90 (C1-M; C1-D)
19580
195.80
1531.116
C2 195.80 (C2-M; C2-D)
19570
195.70
1531.898
C3 195.70 (C3-M; C3-D)
19560
195.60
1532.681
C4 195.60 (C4-M; C4-D)
19550
195.50
1533.465
C5 195.50 (C5-M; C5-D)
19540
195.40
1534.250
C6 195.40 (C6-M; C6-D)
19530
195.30
1535.036
C7 195.30 (C7-M; C7-D)
19520
195.20
1535.822
C8 195.20 (C8-M; C8-D)
19510
195.10
1536.609
C9 195.10 (C9-M; C9-D)
19500
195.00
1537.397
C10 195.00 (C10-M; C10-D)
19490
194.90
1538.186
C11 194.90 (C11-M; C11-D)
19480
194.80
1538.976
C12 194.80 (C12-M; C12-D)
19470
194.70
1539.766
C13 194.70 (C13-M; C13-D)
19460
194.60
1540.557
C14 194.60 (C14-M; C14-D)
19450
194.50
1541.349
C15 194.50 (C15-M; C15-D)
19440
194.40
1542.142
C16 194.40 (C16-M; C16-D)
19430
194.30
1542.936
C17 194.30 (C17-M; C17-D)
19420
194.20
1543.730
C18 194.20 (C18-M; C18-D)
19410
194.10
1544.526
C19 194.10 (C19-M; C19-D)
19400
194.00
1545.322
C20 194.00 (C20-M; C20-D)
19390
193.90
1546.119
C21 193.90 (C21-M; C21-D)
19380
193.80
1546.917
C22 193.80 (C22-M; C22-D)
19370
193.70
1547.715
C23 193.70 (C23-M; C23-D)
19360
193.60
1548.515
C24 193.60 (C24-M; C24-D)
19350
193.50
1549.315
C25 193.50 (C25-M; C25-D)
19340
193.40
1550.116
C26 193.40 (C26-M; C26-D)
40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200
FSP
3000R7
Channel
Names
Frequencies
[THz]
Wavelengths
[nm]
Client ports*
19330
193.30
1550.918
C27 193.30 (C27-M; C27-D)
19320
193.20
1551.721
C28 193.20 (C28-M; C28-D)
19310
193.10
1552.524
C29 193.10 (C29-M; C29-D)
19300
193.00
1553.329
C30 193.00 (C30-M; C30-D)
19290
192.90
1554.134
C31 192.90 (C31-M; C31-D)
19280
192.80
1554.940
C32 192.80 (C32-M; C32-D)
19270
192.70
1555.747
C33 192.70 (C33-M; C33-D)
19260
192.60
1556.555
C34 192.60 (C34-M; C34-D)
19250
192.50
1557.363
C35 192.50 (C35-M; C35-D)
19240
192.40
1558.173
C36 192.40 (C36-M; C36-D)
19230
192.30
1558.983
C37 192.30 (C37-M; C37-D)
19220
192.20
1559.794
C38 192.20 (C38-M; C38-D)
19210
192.10
1560.606
C39 192.10 (C39-M; C39-D)
19200
192.00
1561.419
C40 192.00 (C40-M; C40-Tx)
the faceplate.
The 40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200 requires a PSCU (Passive Shelf Control Unit) or the of

a 9HU shelf for interconnection to the NE controller (NCU). The PSCU is the connecting
point of any 40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200 shelf to support management functionality. The
PSCU basically registers the shelf to the NCU and provides inventory data and power
supply. The connection is made using the interconnect ports of the shelf and the PSCU
or CEM/9HU.
40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200 is functionality identical to 40CSM/2HU#D02-#D32 and 40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#19200.
Note
To provision 40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200, select:

allows the 40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200 to operate without a separate power supply.
Note
Although the PSCU and 40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200 use FireWire 400

811
40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200
The cable for interconnecting the 40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200 to the PSCU or
CEM/9HU is delivered by ADVA Optical Networking. This cable must be used solely.
The use of a cable other than that delivered by ADVA Optical Networking will void the
warranty and the EMC certificate. For more information, refer to Electrical Cables on
p.1279.
Features
Standalone 2HU high shelf
Shelf dimensions ETSI back-to-back compliant
Support of 40 even channels (wavelengths) in the C band according to ITU-T G.694.1

(50 GHz spacing) and acc. to ADVA Optical Networking channel plan
Powered via internal management interface of PSCU module with non-redundant

nominal 3V3DC feed
Power monitoring of the complete received network signal and the complete network
transmit signal
One two-color module LED (P)
Manually selectable LED test via CLI for service purposes
Full management support when connected to a PSCU or CEM/9HU
Fault management of the shelf is handled by PSCU or CEM/9HU
Signal Path
Figure 511 illustrates the signal path of the 40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200.
Figure 511: 40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200 Operation Scheme
812
40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200
Receive Direction
The 40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200 receives a composite C-band network signal through
the input N-D of the network port from the far end of the link. The DEMUX filter in the
splitter section splits the incoming signal into 40 individual channels and couples them
into just as many fibers to have the 40 channels separate on the C1-D to C40-D outputs
of the client ports. The channels are then transmitted to the corresponding DWDM
channel modules.
Transmit Direction
The 40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200 receives up to 40 individual DWDM channels of the C
band from the corresponding DWDM channel modules through the inputs C1-M to C40M of the client ports. The MUX filter in the combiner section multiplexes the incoming
channels into a composite signal and couples it into a single fiber. This signal is then
directed to the output N-M of the network port for transmission to the far end of the link.
Placement
The 40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200 can be placed in a 19 inch, ETSI or NEBS compliant
rack by using the appropriate adaptor brackets. The shelf also fits into a 300 mm (0.984
ft.) deep ETSI rack. The shelf occupies 2 HU of vertical rack space.
Accessories
Adaptor Brackets
The following rack mounting adaptors are available:
The 40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200 shelf shipped without installed rackmount brackets.

The 19-inch rackmount, NEBS, and ETSI brackets are included in the shipping box. Base
on the planned rack or shelf type, the appropriate mounting brackets must be attached to
the left-hand and right-hand side walls of the shelf.
The procedures for installing and removing adaptor brackets are described in the
FIBER FINGER/2HU
A fiber finger set (FIBERFINGER/2HU) for routing and retaining a plurality of optical
fibers is provided (for installation in a 21-inch rack only).
The FIBER FINGER/2HU attaches to the right-hand side of the shelf over the ETSI or
NEBS bracket as shown in Figure 512. The assembly consists of four fiber fingers. Each
finger space can be used to retain the optical fiber jumpers connected to corresponding
optical channel module.
813
40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200
ETSI Bracket to the 40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200 Shelf
Front Cover
the 40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200 against external influences and prevents the fibers from
Shelf Labeling
Each 40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200 shelf is identified and labeled on the top cover and
frontplate as shown in Figure 513.
814
40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200
Figure 513: Labels on the Top of the 40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200 Shelf
These labels provide shelf specific information.
Frontplate Labels
The 40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200 has two printed labels placed on top right corner of the
frontplate. The upper frontplate label identifies the shelf name and the serial number. The
lower frontplate label contains the USI code of the shelf. Figure 514 shows the location of
frontplate labels.
Shelf Type Label

The shelf type label contains the following:
Shelf name, type and version
USI number with bar code
serial number with bar code
item number with bar code
figo number with bar code
Figure 514: Example of a 40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200 Shelf Type Label
815
40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200
Certification Label
Figure 515: Example of a 40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200 Certification Label
Japanese Label
Figure 516: 40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200 Japanese Label

Figure 517: 40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200 ESD and Laser Safety Label
Note
816
40CSM/2HU-#19595-#19205
Specifications
40CSM/2HU-#19595-#19205
Faceplate Markings
These are the abbreviations that are used for the 40CSM/2HU-#19595-#19205 faceplate
and their meanings.
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Electrical Port
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
C1 to
C40
client ports 1
through 40
network port
Shelfs
power
supply
status
Interconnect
Port
817
40CSM/2HU-#19595-#19205
Description
The 40CSM/2HU-#19595-#19205 is a 40-port MUX/DMX channel splitter and combiner
2HU shelf for interleaved C-band channels. It is a monolithic shelf of 2 HU height
including a combination of specific channel MUX and DEMUX filters. This shelf is
designed for data transfer in 40-channel dual-fiber DWDM point-to-point configurations.
The front view of a this shelf is illustrated in Figure 518 as an example.
The filters multiplex/demultiplex up to 40 separate channels into/from the full duplex
signal carried by the network fiber pair. For this purpose the 40CSM/2HU-#19595-#19205
provides one network port and 40 client ports. Each client port is labeled with the port
number (C1 to C40) as well as the corresponding frequency [THz] which the port
supports. See Table 123.
818
FSP 3000R7
Channel Names
Frequencies
[THz]
Wavelengths
[nm]
Client ports
19595
195.95
1529.943
C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
19585
195.85
1530.725
C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
19575
195.75
1531.507
C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
19565
195.65
1532.289
C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
19555
195.55
1533.073
C5 (C5-M; C5-D)
19545
195.45
1533.857
C6 (C6-M; C6-D)
19535
195.35
1534.643
C7 (C7-M; C7-D)
19525
195.25
1535.429
C8 (C8-M; C8-D)
19515
195.15
1536.215
C9 (C9-M; C9-D)
19505
195.05
1537.003
C10 (C10-M; C10-D)
19495
194.95
1537.791
C11 (C11-M; C11-D)
19485
194.85
1538.581
C12 (C12-M; C12-D)
19475
194.75
1539.371
C13 (C13-M; C13-D)
19465
194.65
1540.162
C14 (C14-M; C14-D)
19455
194.55
1540.953
C15 (C15-M; C15-D)
19445
194.45
1541.746
C16 (C16-M; C16-D)
19435
194.35
1542.539
C17 (C17-M; C17-D)
19425
194.25
1543.333
C18 (C18-M; C18-D)
19415
194.15
1544.128
C19 (C19-M; C19-D)
19405
194.05
1544.923
C20 (C20-M; C20-D)
19395
193.95
1545.720
C21 (C21-M; C21-D)
40CSM/2HU-#19595-#19205
FSP 3000R7
Channel Names
Frequencies
[THz]
Wavelengths
[nm]
Client ports
19385
193.85
1546.917
C22 (C22-M; C22-D)
19375
193.75
1547.316
C23 (C23-M; C23-D)
19365
193.65
1548.115
C24 (C24-M; C24-D)
19355
193.55
1548.915
C25 (C25-M; C25-D)
19345
193.45
1549.715
C26 (C26-M; C26-D)
19335
193.35
1550.517
C27 (C27-M; C27-D)
19325
193.25
1551.319
C28 (C28-M; C28-D)
19315
193.15
1552.123
C29 (C29-M; C29-D)
19305
193.05
1552.927
C30 (C30-M; C30-D)
19295
192.95
1553.731
C31 (C31-M; C31-D)
19285
192.85
1554.537
C32 (C32-M; C32-D)
19275
192.75
1555.343
C33 (C33-M; C33-D)
19265
192.65
1556.151
C34 (C34-M; C34-D)
19255
192.55
1556.959
C35 (C35-M; C35-D)
19245
192.45
1557.768
C36 (C36-M; C36-D)
19235
192.35
1558.578
C37 (C37-M; C37-D)
19225
192.25
1559.387
C38 (C38-M; C38-D)
19215
192.15
1560.200
C39 (C39-M; C39-D)
19205
192.05
1561.013
C40 (C40-M; C40-D)
On the client side, the 40CSM/2HU-#19595-#19205 works in conjunction with the

corresponding channel modules. On the network side, the interleaver filter ILM50#DC
must be used to combine the 40 even and odd channels to a 80- channel C-band
transmission system in a 50 GHz channel grid.
For management purposes, the 40CSM/2HU-#19595-#19205 shelf is connected to a
PSCU (Passive Shelf Control Unit) via the interconnect port. The PSCU registers the
40CSM/2HU-#19595-#19205 shelf to the NE controller and provides inventory data and
power supply.
Note
To provision 40CSM/2HU-#19595-#19205, select:

Equipment Type = 40CSM/2HU-#D and Band = CI / C (odd channels
only)
allows the 40CSM/2HU-#19595-#19205 to operate without a separate power supply.
819
40CSM/2HU-#19595-#19205
Note
Although the PSCU and 40CSM/2HU-#19595-#19205 use FireWire 400

The cable for connecting the 40CSM/2HU-#19595-#19205 to the PSCU is delivered by

ADVA Optical Networking. This cable must be used solely. The use of a cable other than
that delivered by ADVA Optical Networking will void the warranty and the EMC
certificate. For more information, refer to Electrical Cables on p.1279.
Interworking with all channel modules released in FSP3000 R7, all released DWDM
network architectures and with all released hybrid network architectures as well as
optical C-band optical amplifiers is supported.
The front view of the 40CSM/2HU-#19595-#19205 is illustrated in Figure 518.
Features

nominal 3V3DC feed
Support of 40 Offset channels (wavelengths) in the C band according to ITU-T

G.694.1 and acc. to ADVA Optical Networking channel plan
Support of 80 channels in 50 GHz channel grid configurations with an ILM50#DC and

40CSM/2HU-#D02-#D32
Full management support when connected to a PSCU module
Fault management of the shelf is handled by PSCU module
Signal Path
Figure 519 shows the operation of the 40CSM/2HU-#19595-#19205 as an example and
illustrates the signal path, which is described below.
820
40CSM/2HU-#19595-#19205
Receive Direction
The 40CSM/2HU-#19595-#19205 receives a composite C-band network signal through
the input N-D of the network port from the far end of the link. The DEMUX filter in the
splitter section de-multiplexes the incoming signal into 40 individual channels and
couples them into just as many fibers to have the 40 channels separate on the C1-D to
C40-D outputs of the client ports. The channels are then transmitted to the
corresponding DWDM channel modules.
Transmit Direction
band from the corresponding DWDM channel modules through the inputs C1-M to C40M of the client ports. The MUX filter in the combiner section multiplexes the incoming
channels into a composite signal and couples it into a single fiber. This signal is directed
to the output N-M of the network port for transmission to the far end of the link.
Placement
rack by using the appropriate adaptor brackets. It also fits into a 300 mm (0.984 ft.) deep
ETSI rack. The shelf occupies 2 HU of space in a rack.
Accessories
Adaptor Brackets
821
40CSM/2HU-#19595-#19205
The 40CSM/2HU-#19595-#19205 shelf comes with no rackmount brackets pre-installed.

The 19-inch rackmount, NEBS and ETSI bracket pair is included in the shipping box. The
FIBER FINGER/2HU
channel module.
ETSI Bracket to the 40CSM/2HU-#19595-#19205 Shelf
Front Cover
822
40CSM/2HU-#19595-#19205
LED Indicator
The 40CSM/2HU-#19595-#19205 has one LED indicator on the faceplate. It indicates the
status of the shelf, i.e. that the communication is operating correctly or not.
Table 124: Description of the 40CSM/2HU-#19595-#19205 Status LED
LED
Name
LED
Color
Status Indications
Red
Off
Green
Power ok
Shelf Labeling
Each 40CSM/2HU-#19595-#19205 shelf can be identified by several labels located on
the top of the shelf and on its frontplate as shown in Figure 521.
Figure 521: Labels on the Top of the Shelf
Frontplate Labels
For a quick identification the 40CSM/2HU-#19595-#19205 has two printed labels affixed
on its frontplate top right. The top label includes the shelf name and the serial number.
The label underneath contains the USI code of the shelf. Figure 521 shows the location of
frontplate labels.
Shelf Type Label

823
40CSM/2HU-#19595-#19205

Certification Label
Figure 523: Example of a 40CSM/2HU-#19595-#19205 Certification Label
Japanese Label
824
40CSM/2HU-#19595-#19205

Note
Specifications
825
40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#19200
40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#19200
Figure 526: Example of a 40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#19200 Front View
Faceplate Markings
These are the abbreviations used for the 40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#19200 faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 125: 40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#19200 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Electrical Port
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
C1 to
C40
client ports 1
through 40
network port
Shelfs
power
supply
status
Interconnect
Port
Description
The 40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#19200 is a rack-mountable, 40-port MUX/DEMUX channel
splitter and combiner shelf of 2HU height for even C-band channels and fiber
connections to the left. The shelf includes the channel MUX and DEMUX filters and does
not provide any kind of modularity.
826
40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#19200
The filters multiplex/demultiplex up to 40 even C-band channels (#19590 through #19200)
into/from the full duplex signals carried by the network fiber pair. The connectors are
designed for routing the optical fibers to the left of the shelf. It is meant for the use in a 40channel dual-fiber DWDM point-to-point network topology. Therefore the 40CSMFL/2HU-#19590-#19200 provides one bidirectional network port and 40 bidirectional client
ports as shown in Figure 526. Each client port is labeled with the port number (C1 to C40)
as well as the corresponding frequency [THz] which the port supports. Refer to the
following table.
Table 126: 40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#19200 Client Port Description
FSP 3000R7
Channel
Names
Frequencies
[THz]
Wavelengths
[nm]
Client ports*
19590
195.90
1530.334
C1 195.90 (C1-M; C1-D)
19580
195.80
1531.116
C2 195.80 (C2-M; C2-D)
19570
195.70
1531.898
C3 195.70 (C3-M; C3-D)
19560
195.60
1532.681
C4 195.60 (C4-M; C4-D)
19550
195.50
1533.465
C5 195.50 (C5-MM; C5-D)
19540
195.40
1534.250
C6 195.40 (C6-MM; C6-D)
19530
195.30
1535.036
C7 195.30 (C7-M; C7-D)
19520
195.20
1535.822
C8 195.20 (C8-M; C8-D)
19510
195.10
1536.609
C9 195.10 (C9-M; C9-D)
19500
195.00
1537.397
C10 195.00 (C10-M; C10-D)
19490
194.90
1538.186
C11 194.90 (C11-M; C11-D)
19480
194.80
1538.976
C12 194.80 (C12-M; C12-D)
19470
194.70
1539.766
C13 194.70 (C13-M; C13-D)
19460
194.60
1540.557
C14 194.60 (C14-M; C14-D)
19450
194.50
1541.349
C15 194.50 (C15-M; C15-D)
19440
194.40
1542.142
C16 194.40 (C16-M; C16-D)
19430
194.30
1542.936
C17 194.30 (C17-M; C17-D)
19420
194.20
1543.730
C18 194.20 (C18-M; C18-D)
19410
194.10
1544.526
C19 194.10 (C19-M; C19-D)
19400
194.00
1545.322
C20 194.00 (C20-M; C20-D)
19390
193.90
1546.119
C21 193.90 (C21-M; C21-D)
19380
193.80
1546.917
C22 193.80 (C22-M; C22-D)
19370
193.70
1547.715
C23 193.70 (C23-M; C23-D)
827
40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#19200
Table 126: 40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#19200 Client Port Description
FSP 3000R7
Channel
Names
Frequencies
[THz]
Wavelengths
[nm]
Client ports*
19360
193.60
1548.515
C24 193.60 (C24-M; C24-D)
19350
193.50
1549.315
C25 193.50 (C25-M; C25-D)
19340
193.40
1550.116
C26 193.40 (C26-M; C26-D)
19330
193.30
1550.918
C27 193.30 (C27-M; C27-D)
19320
193.20
1551.721
C28 193.20 (C28-M; C28-D)
19310
193.10
1552.524
C29 193.10 (C29-M; C29-D)
19300
193.00
1553.329
C30 193.00 (C30-M; C30-D)
19290
192.90
1554.134
C31 192.90 (C31-M; C31-D)
19280
192.80
1554.940
C32 192.80 (C32-M; C32-D)
19270
192.70
1555.747
C33 192.70 (C33-M; C33-D)
19260
192.60
1556.555
C34 192.60 (C34-M; C34-D)
19250
192.50
1557.363
C35 192.50 (C35-M; C35-D)
19240
192.40
1558.173
C36 192.40 (C36-M; C36-D)
19230
192.30
1558.983
C37 192.30 (C37-M; C37-D)
19220
192.20
1559.794
C38 192.20 (C38-M; C38-D)
19210
192.10
1560.606
C39 192.10 (C39-M; C39-D)
19200
192.00
1561.419
C40 192.00 (C40-M; C40-D)
the faceplate.
The 40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#19200 requires a PSCU (Passive Shelf Control Unit) or

the CEM/9HU of a 9HU shelf for interconnection to the NE controller (NCU). The PSCU
is the connecting point of any 40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#19200 shelf to support
management functionality. The PSCU basically registers the shelf to the NCU and
provides inventory data and power supply. The connection is made using the
interconnect ports of the shelf and the PSCU or CEM/9HU.
40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#19200 is functionality identical to
40CSM/2HU-#D02-#D32 and 40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200.
Note
To provision 40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#19200, select:

allows the 40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#19200 to operate without a separate power supply.
828
40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#19200
Note
Although the PSCU and 40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#19200 use FireWire

400 connectors for interconnecting, the FireWire itself is not supported
The cable for interconnecting the 40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#19200 to the PSCU or

CEM/9HU is delivered by ADVA Optical Networking. This cable must be used solely.
The use of a cable other than that delivered by ADVA Optical Networking will void the
warranty and the EMC certificate. For more information, refer to Electrical Cables on
p.1279.
Features

(50 GHz spacing) and acc. to ADVA Optical Networking channel plan

nominal 3V3DC feed
transmit signal
Full management support when connected to a PSCU or CEM/9HU
Fault management of the shelf is handled by PSCU or CEM/9HU
Signal Path
Figure 527 illustrates the signal path of the 40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#19200.
829
40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#19200
Figure 527: 40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#19200 Operation Scheme
Receive Direction
The 40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#19200 receives a composite C-band network signal
through the input N-D of the network port from the far end of the link. The DEMUX filter in
the splitter section splits the incoming signal into 40 individual channels and couples
them into just as many fibers to have the 40 channels separate on the C1-D to C40-D
outputs of the client ports. The channels are then transmitted to the corresponding
DWDM channel modules.
Transmit Direction
The 40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#19200 receives up to 40 individual DWDM channels of the
C band from the corresponding DWDM channel modules through the inputs C1-M to
C40-M of the client ports. The MUX filter in the combiner section multiplexes the
incoming channels into a composite signal and couples it into a single fiber. This signal is
then directed to the output N-M of the network port for transmission to the far end of the
link.
Placement
The 40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#19200 can be placed in a 19 inch, ETSI or NEBS
compliant rack by using the appropriate adaptor brackets. The shelf also fits into a 300
mm (0.984 ft.) deep ETSI rack. The shelf occupies 2 HU of vertical rack space.
830
40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#19200
Accessories
Adaptor Brackets
The 40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#19200 shelf shipped without installed rackmount brackets.

The 19-inch rackmount, NEBS, and ETSI brackets are included in the shipping box. Base
on the planned rack or shelf type, the appropriate mounting brackets must be attached to
the left-hand and right-hand side walls of the shelf.
FIBER FINGER/2HU LEFT

A fiber finger set (FIBER FINGER/2HU LEFT) for routing and retaining a plurality of
optical fibers is provided (for installation in a 21-inch rack only).
The FIBER FINGER/2HU LEFT is attached to the left-hand side of the shelf over the
ETSI or NEBS bracket as shown in Figure 528. The assembly consists of four fiber
fingers. Each finger space can be used to retain the optical fiber jumpers connected to the
corresponding optical channel modules.
Figure 528: Example of the FIBER FINGER/2HU LEFT Attached to the 40CSMFL/2HU-#19590-#19200 Shelf
831
40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#19200
Front Cover
the 40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#19200 against external influences and prevents the fibers
from being pulled out inadvertently. The cover consists of strong magnet pins which has
to be positioned to bolts attached to the front panel of the shelf. If not enclosed in the
shelf delivery, the front cover has to be ordered separately.
Shelf Labeling
Each 40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#19200 shelf is identified and labeled on the top cover and
frontplate. These labels provide shelf specific information.
Frontplate Labels
The 40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#19200 has two printed labels placed on top right corner of
the frontplate. The upper frontplate label identifies the shelf name and the serial number.
The lower frontplate label contains the USI code of the shelf. Figure 526 shows the
location of frontplate labels.
Shelf Type Label

Figure 529: Example of a 40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#19200 Shelf Type Label
832
40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#19200
Certification Label
Figure 530: Example of a 40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#19200 Certification Label
Japanese Label
customers.
Figure 531: 40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#19200 Japanese Label

Figure 532: 40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#19200 ESD and Laser Safety Label
833
Note
Specifications
Figure 533: Example of a 40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205 Front View
Faceplate Markings
These are the abbreviations that are used for the 40CSM-C80/2HU-#19xxx-#19yyy
Table 127: 40CSM-C80/2HU-#19xxx-#19yyy Faceplate Markings
834
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Electrical Port
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
C1 to
C40
client ports 1
through 40
network port
Shelfs
power
supply
status
Interconnect
Port
Variants
The 40CSM-C80/2HU-#19xxx-#19yyy (40-port MUX/DEMUX channel splitter and
combiner 2HU Shelf - C band) is available in two variants:
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200
(accesses even C-band channels)
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205
(accesses odd C-band channels)
The part name identifier of #19xxx#19yyy refers to the shelf variant, and whether it
operates on even or odd channels in the C band. Both shelf variants have similar design
and faceplate features. They differ in the optical filters supporting either 40 odd C-band
channels or 40 even C-band channels.
The front view of a 40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205 is illustrated in Figure 533 as an
example.
Description
The 40CSM-C80/2HU-#19xxx-#19yyy is a 2HU shelf that splits and combines 40
channels in the C-band. A shelf supports 40 wavelengths spaced every
100 GHz for 80 channel transmission systems.
The front view of this shelf is illustrated in Figure 533 as an example.
The shelf splits/combines up to 40 separate channels. It provides one network port and
40 client ports. Each client port is labeled with the port number (C1 to C40) and is also
labeled with the corresponding frequency [THz] the client port supports. Table 128 shows
the frequencies and wavelengths of both shelf variants (40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590#19200 and 40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205).
Table 128: 40CSM-C80/2HU-#19xxx-#19yyy Client Port Description
Module Variants
Client ports
Channel
Names
Frequencies
[THz]
Wavelengths
[nm]
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200
C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
19590
195.90
1530.334
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200
C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
19580
195.80
1531.116
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200
C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
19570
195.70
1531.898
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200
C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
19560
195.60
1532.681
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200
C5 (C5-M; C5-D)
19550
195.50
1533.465
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200
C6 (C6-M; C6-D)
19540
195.40
1534.250
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200
C7 (C7-M; C7-D)
19530
195.30
1535.036
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200
C8 (C8-M; C8-D)
19520
195.20
1535.822
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200
C9 (C9-M; C9-D)
19510
195.10
1536.609
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200
C10 (C10-M; C10-D)
19500
195.00
1537.397
835
Module Variants
Client ports
Channel
Names
Frequencies
[THz]
Wavelengths
[nm]
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200
C11 (C11-M; C11-D)
19490
194.90
1538.186
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200
C12 (C12-M; C12-D)
19480
194.80
1538.976
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200
C13 (C13-M; C13-D)
19470
194.70
1539.766
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200
C14 (C14-M; C14-D)
19460
194.60
1540.557
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200
C15 (C15-M; C15-D)
19450
194.50
1541.349
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200
C16 (C16-M; C16-D)
19440
194.40
1542.142
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200
C17 (C17-M; C17-D)
19430
194.30
1542.936
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200
C18 (C18-M; C18-D)
19420
194.20
1543.730
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200
C19 (C19-M; C19-D)
19410
194.10
1544.526
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200
C20 (C20-M; C20-D)
19400
194.00
1545.322
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200
C21 (C21-M; C21-D)
19390
193.90
1546.119
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200
C22 (C22-M; C22-D)
19380
193.80
1546.917
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200
C23 (C23-M; C23-D)
19370
193.70
1547.715
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200
C24 (C24-M; C24-D)
19360
193.60
1548.515
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200
C25 (C25-M; C25-D)
19350
193.50
1549.315
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200
C26 (C26-M; C26-D)
19340
193.40
1550.116
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200
C27 (C27-M; C27-D)
19330
193.30
1550.918
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200
C28 (C28-M; C28-D)
19320
193.20
1551.721
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200
C29 (C29-M; C29-D)
19310
193.10
1552.524
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200
C30 (C30-M; C30-D)
19300
193.00
1553.329
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200
C31 (C31-M; C31-D)
19290
192.90
1554.134
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200
C32 (C32-M; C32-D)
19280
192.80
1554.940
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200
C33 (C33-M; C33-D)
19270
192.70
1555.747
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200
C34 (C34-M; C34-D)
19260
192.60
1556.555
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200
C35 (C35-M; C35-D)
19250
192.50
1557.363
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200
C36 (C36-M; C36-D)
19240
192.40
1558.173
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200
C37 (C37-M; C37-D)
19230
192.30
1558.983
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200
C38 (C38-M; C38-D)
19220
192.20
1559.794
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200
C39 (C39-M; C39-D)
19210
192.10
1560.606
836
Module Variants
Client ports
Channel
Names
Frequencies
[THz]
Wavelengths
[nm]
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200
C40 (C40-M; C40-D)
19200
192.00
1561.419
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205
C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
19595
195.95
1529.943
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205
C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
19585
195.85
1530.725
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205
C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
19575
195.75
1531.507
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205
C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
19565
195.65
1532.289
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205
C5 (C5-M; C5-D)
19555
195.55
1533.073
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205
C6 (C6-M; C6-D)
19545
195.45
1533.857
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205
C7 (C7-M; C7-D)
19535
195.35
1534.643
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205
C8 (C8-M; C8-D)
19525
195.25
1535.429
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205
C9 (C9-M; C9-D)
19515
195.15
1536.215
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205
C10 (C10-M; C10-D)
19505
195.05
1537.003
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205
C11 (C11-M; C11-D)
19495
194.95
1537.791
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205
C12 (C12-M; C12-D)
19485
194.85
1538.581
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205
C13 (C13-M; C13-D)
19475
194.75
1539.371
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205
C14 (C14-M; C14-D)
19465
194.65
1540.162
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205
C15 (C15-M; C15-D)
19455
194.55
1540.953
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205
C16 (C16-M; C16-D)
19445
194.45
1541.746
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205
C17 (C17-M; C17-D)
19435
194.35
1542.539
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205
C18 (C18-M; C18-D)
19425
194.25
1543.333
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205
C19 (C19-M; C19-D)
19415
194.15
1544.128
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205
C20 (C20-M; C20-D)
19405
194.05
1544.923
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205
C21 (C21-M; C21-D)
19395
193.95
1545.720
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205
C22 (C22-M; C22-D)
19385
193.85
1546.917
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205
C23 (C23-M; C23-D)
19375
193.75
1547.316
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205
C24 (C24-M; C24-D)
19365
193.65
1548.115
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205
C25 (C25-M; C25-D)
19355
193.55
1548.915
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205
C26 (C26-M; C26-D)
19345
193.45
1549.715
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205
C27 (C27-M; C27-D)
19335
193.35
1550.517
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205
C28 (C28-M; C28-D)
19325
193.25
1551.319
837
Module Variants
Client ports
Channel
Names
Frequencies
[THz]
Wavelengths
[nm]
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205
C29 (C29-M; C29-D)
19315
193.15
1552.123
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205
C30 (C30-M; C30-D)
19305
193.05
1552.927
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205
C31 (C31-M; C31-D)
19295
192.95
1553.731
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205
C32 (C32-M; C32-D)
19285
192.85
1554.537
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205
C33 (C33-M; C33-D)
19275
192.75
1555.343
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205
C34 (C34-M; C34-D)
19265
192.65
1556.151
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205
C35 (C35-M; C35-D)
19255
192.55
1556.959
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205
C36 (C36-M; C36-D)
19245
192.45
1557.768
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205
C37 (C37-M; C37-D)
19235
192.35
1558.578
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205
C38 (C38-M; C38-D)
19225
192.25
1559.387
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205
C39 (C39-M; C39-D)
19215
192.15
1560.200
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205
C40 (C40-M; C40-D)
19205
192.05
1561.013
The client ports of the 40CSM-C80/2HU-#19xxx-#19yyy works in conjunction with the

corresponding channel modules. Use with 8ROADM-C80/0/OPM module in dual client
mode requires 40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200 network port to be connected to a client
port (C1 to C7) and the 40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205 network port to be connected
to client port C8.
For inventory management, the 40CSM-C80/2HU-#19xxx-#19yyy shelf is connected to a
PSCU (Passive Shelf Control Unit) via the interconnect port. The PSCU registers the
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19xxx-#19yyy shelf to the NE controller and provides inventory data
and power supply.
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200 is similar to 40CSM/2HU-#D02-#D32
and 40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200 but channel bandwidth is 50 GHz.
To provision 40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590-#19200, select:
Note
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205 is similar to 40CSM/2HU-#19595#19205 but channel bandwidth is 50 GHz.

To provision 40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205, select:
Equipment Type = 40CSM/2HU-#D and Band = CI / C (odd channels
only)
The interconnect port is a 6-pin panel-mounted IEEE1394 (FireWire) socket. Four pins
are used for transferring inventory data, and two pins receive power. This allows the
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19xxx-#19yyy to operate without a separate power supply.
838
Note
Although the PSCU and 40CSM-C80/2HU-#19xxx-#19yyy use FireWire

400 connectors for interconnecting, the FireWire protocol or pinout is not
supported.
The cable provided by ADVA Optical Networking should be used to connect the 40CSMC80/2HU-#19xxx-#19yyy. The use of cables not provided by ADVA Optical Networking
will void the warranty and the EMC certificate. For more information, refer to Electrical
Cables on p.1279.
Features
Shelf dimensions compliant for ETSI back to back configurations
Powered through 6 pin Interconnect port by connected equipment
Support of 40 channels (wavelengths) in the C band according to ITU-T G.694.1 (100

GHz channel spacing) and acc. to ADVA Optical Networking channel plan
Operation with 8ROADM-C80/0/OPM in dual client configurations for an 80 channel

transmission system in a 50 GHz channel grid spacing
LC type optical connectors
One two-color status LED (P)
LED testing via CLI
Full management support via interconnection to PSCU module
Fault management via interconnected PSCU module
Signal Path
The following illustrates the signal path of the 40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205.
839
Figure 534: 40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205 Operation Scheme
Receive Direction
The 40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205 receives a composite C-band signal from the
8ROADM-C80/0/OPM or amplifier through the input N-D port of the shelf. The internal
DEMUX filter splits the input signal into 40 individual channels connected to the client
ports labeled C1-D to C40-D. From the output connectors, channels are then transmitted
to the corresponding DWDM channel modules.
Transmit Direction
The 40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205 receives up to 40 individual channels from
corresponding DWDM channel modules through the input ports C1-M to C40-M. The
internal MUX filter combines the incoming channels into a composite signal connected to
the output N-M port for transmission to a 8ROADM-C80/0/OPM or booster amplifier.
Placement
The 40CSM-C80/2HU-#19xxx-#19yyy fits in a 19 inch, ETSI or NEBS compliant rack by
using the appropriate adaptor brackets. The shelf may also be mounted in a 300 mm
(0.984 ft.) deep ETSI rack. The shelf occupies 2 HU of rack space.
Accessories
Adaptor Brackets
840
The 40CSM-C80/2HU-#19xxx-#19yyy shelf comes with no pre-installed rackmount

brackets. The 19-inch rackmount, NEBS, and ETSI bracket pair are included in the
shipping box. The brackets are fitted on the left-hand and right-hand side walls for
mounting the rack.
The procedures for attaching and removing adaptor brackets are described in the
FIBER FINGER/2HU
channel module.
Front Cover
the 40CSM-C80/2HU-#19xxx-#19yyy against external influences and prevents the fibers
from being pulled out inadvertently. The cover consists of strong magnet pins which has
to be positioned to bolts attached to the front panel of the shelf. If not enclosed in the
shelf delivery, the front cover has to be ordered separately.
841
LED Indicator
The 40CSM-C80/2HU-#19xxx-#19yyy has one LED indicator on the faceplate. It
indicates the status of the shelf, i.e. that the communication is operating correctly or not.
Table 129: Description of the 40CSM-C80/2HU-#19xxx-#19yyy Status LED
LED
Name
LED
Color
Status Indications
Red
Off
Green
Power ok
Shelf Labeling
Each 40CSM-C80/2HU-#19xxx-#19yyy shelf can be identified by labels on the top of the
shelf and on the frontplate as shown here.
Frontplate Labels
For a quick identification the 40CSM-C80/2HU-#19xxx-#19yyy has two printed labels on
the top right corner of the frontplate. The upper label includes the shelf name and the
serial number. The lower label identifies the USI code of the shelf. Figure 536 shows the
location of frontplate labels.
Shelf Type Label

842

Figure 537: Example of a 40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205 Shelf Type Label
Certification Label
Figure 538: Example of a 40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595-#19205 Certification Label
Japanese Label
843

Note
Specifications
844
40CSM/P-2HU#19590-#19200-DM
40CSM/P-2HU#19590-#19200-DM
Figure 541: Example of a 40CSM/P-2HU#19590-#19200-DM Front View
Faceplate Markings
These are the abbreviations used for the 40CSM/P-2HU#19590-#19200-DM faceplate
and their meanings.
Table 130: 40CSM/P-2HU#19590-#19200-DM Faceplate Markings
Optical Ports
Tx
transmit
Rx
receive
C1 to C40
network port
Mon
monitoring port
total client signals
845
40CSM/P-2HU#19590-#19200-DM
Description
The 40CSM/P-2HU#19590-#19200-DM is a passive 40-port MUX/DMX channel splitter
and combiner 2HU shelf with monitoring port for dual power level monitoring. It is a
monolithic shelf of 2 HU height including channel MUX and DEMUX filters and monitor
taps. This shelf is designed for a 40-channel dual-fiber DWDM point-to-point, linear
add/drop, or ring network topology. The front view of a this shelf is illustrated in Figure
541 as an example.
The filters multiplex/demultiplex 40 separate channels into/from the signals on the
network fiber pair. This shelf supports the even channels #19590 through #19200 of the C
band.
Monitor taps are provided by internal power splitters for power level monitoring and optical
spectrum analyzing.
The 40CSM/P-2HU#19590-#19200-DM provides one bidirectional network port, 40
bidirectional client ports and one unidirectional monitoring port with two connectors (one
for monitoring the ingress and one for monitoring the egress data signal power level).
The front view of the 40CSM/P-2HU#19590-#19200-DM is illustrated in Figure 541.
Each of the 40 separate channels of the C band is assigned to a specific client port as
shown in the following table.
Table 131: 40CSM/P-2HU#19590-#19200-DM Client Port Description
Old
Channel
No.
846
New
Channel
No.
Client ports*
Frequencies
[THz]
Wavelengths
[nm]
#D02
19590
C1 195.90 (C1-Rx; C1-Tx)
195.90
1530.334
#D03
19580
C2 195.80 (C2-Rx; C2-Tx)
195.80
1531.116
#D04
19570
C3 195.70 (C3-Rx; C3-Tx)
195.70
1531.898
#DC1
19560
C4 195.60 (C4-Rx; C4-Tx)
195.60
1532.681
#D05
19550
C5 195.50 (C5-Rx; C5-Tx)
195.50
1533.465
#D06
19540
C6 195.40 (C6-Rx; C6-Tx)
195.40
1534.250
#D07
19530
C7 195.30 (C7-Rx; C7-Tx)
195.30
1535.036
#D08
19520
C8 195.20 (C8-Rx; C8-Tx)
195.20
1535.822
#DC2
19510
C9 195.10 (C9-Rx; C9-Tx)
195.10
1536.609
#D09
19500
C10 195.00 (C10-Rx; C10Tx)
195.00
1537.397
#D10
19490
C11 194.90 (C11-Rx; C11Tx)
194.90
1538.186
#D11
19480
C12 194.80 (C12-Rx; C12Tx)
194.80
1538.976
#D12
19470
C13 194.70 (C13-Rx; C13Tx)
194.70
1539.766
40CSM/P-2HU#19590-#19200-DM
Old
Channel
No.
New
Channel
No.
Client ports*
Frequencies
[THz]
Wavelengths
[nm]
#DC3
19460
C14 194.60 (C14-Rx; C14Tx)
194.60
1540.557
#D13
19450
C15 194.50 (C15-Rx; C15Tx)
194.50
1541.349
#D14
19440
C16 194.40 (C16-Rx; C16Tx)
194.40
1542.142
#D15
19430
C17 194.30 (C17-Rx; C17Tx)
194.30
1542.936
#D16
19420
C18 194.20 (C18-Rx; C18Tx)
194.20
1543.730
#DC4
19410
C19 194.10 (C19-Rx; C19Tx)
194.10
1544.526
#DC9
19400
C20 194.00 (C20-Rx; C20Tx)
194.00
1545.322
#DC5
19390
C21 193.90 (C21-Rx; C21Tx)
193.90
1546.119
#D17
19380
C22 193.80 (C22-Rx; C22Tx)
193.80
1546.917
#D18
19370
C23 193.70 (C23-Rx; C23Tx)
193.70
1547.715
#D19
19360
C24 193.60 (C24-Rx; C24Tx)
193.60
1548.515
#D20
19350
C25 193.50 (C25-Rx; C25Tx)
193.50
1549.315
#DC6
19340
C26 193.40 (C26-Rx; C26Tx)
193.40
1550.116
#D21
19330
C27 193.30 (C27-Rx; C27Tx)
193.30
1550.918
#D22
19320
C28 193.20 (C28-Rx; C28Tx)
193.20
1551.721
#D23
19310
C29 193.10 (C29-Rx; C29Tx)
193.10
1552.524
#D24
19300
C30 193.00 (C30-Rx; C30Tx)
193.00
1553.329
847
40CSM/P-2HU#19590-#19200-DM
Old
Channel
No.
New
Channel
No.
Client ports*
Frequencies
[THz]
Wavelengths
[nm]
#DC7
19290
C31 192.90 (C31-Rx; C31Tx)
192.90
1554.134
#D25
19280
C32 192.80 (C32-Rx; C32Tx)
192.80
1554.940
#D26
19270
C33 192.70 (C33-Rx; C33Tx)
192.70
1555.747
#D27
19260
C34 192.60 (C34-Rx; C34Tx)
192.60
1556.555
#D28
19250
C35 192.50 (C35-Rx; C35Tx)
192.50
1557.363
#DC8
19240
C36 192.40 (C36-Rx; C36Tx)
192.40
1558.173
#D29
19230
C37 192.30 (C37-Rx; C37Tx)
192.30
1558.983
#D30
19220
C38 192.20 (C38-Rx; C38Tx)
192.20
1559.794
#D31
19210
C39 192.10 (C39-Rx; C39Tx)
192.10
1560.606
#D32
19200
C40 192.00 (C40-Rx; C40Tx)
192.00
1561.419
the faceplate.
The power level of the incoming (ingress) network signal is monitored through the Mon-N
port. The signals transmitting out the N-Tx port can be monitored through the Mon-C
port. The monitored signals may be analyzed by connecting a optical power meter or an
optical spectrum analyzer to the monitor port. The monitored signals represent 5% of the
total signal powers being monitored.
Note
This device is passive and not detected or visible through system

inventory. The shelf is not visible by inventory management, control
plane, or the Network Manager system.
Features
848
Filtering of 40 channels (wavelengths) in the C band according to ITU-T G.694.1 (100

GHz spacing) and ADVA Optical Networkings channel plan
transmit signal.
40CSM/P-2HU#19590-#19200-DM
Front accessible LC type connectors
Monitor port for power monitoring (5% tap)
Fully passive with no management
Signal Path
Figure 542 illustrates the signal path of the 40CSM/P-2HU#19590-#19200-DM.
Figure 542: 40CSM/P-2HU#19590-#19200-DM Operation Scheme
Receive Direction
The 40CSM/P-2HU#19590-#19200-DM receives a full C-band network signal through the
N-Rx of the network port. The module splits the incoming network signal for signal
monitoring. 95% of the optical power is coupled into the DEMUX filter, and 5% of the
optical power is fed into the output Mon-N of the ingress monitoring port. The DEMUX
filter de-multiplexes the remainder of the composite DWDM channel signal into its
component channels and couples them into single fibers to have the 40 channels
separate on the C1-Tx to C40-Tx outputs of the client ports. These client channel ports
can be connected to corresponding DWDM channel modules.
Transmit Direction
The 40CSM/P-2HU#19590-#19200-DM receives 40 DWDM channels of the C band from
C1-Rx to C40-Rx of the client ports. The MUX filter multiplexes the incoming channels
into a composite channel signal. Before connecting the composite signal to the network
output, the composite signal is tapped for monitoring. 95% of the optical power is coupled
into the network output N-Tx of the network port and 5% of the optical power is fed to the
output Mon-C of the egress monitoring port.
849
40CSM/P-2HU#19590-#19200-DM
Placement
The 40CSM/P-2HU#19590-#19200-DM can be placed in a 19 inch, ETSI or NEBS
compliant rack by using the appropriate adaptor brackets. The shelf also fits into a 300
mm (0.984 ft.) deep ETSI rack. The shelf occupies 2 HU of vertical rack space.
Accessories
Adaptor Brackets
The 40CSM/P-2HU#19590-#19200-DM shelf shipped without installed rackmount

brackets. The 19-inch rackmount, NEBS, and ETSI brackets are included in the shipping
box. Base on the planned rack or shelf type, the appropriate mounting brackets must be
attached to the left-hand and right-hand side walls of the shelf.
FIBER FINGER/2HU
The FIBER FINGER/2HU attaches to the right-hand side of the shelf over the ETSI or
NEBS bracket as shown in Figure 543. The assembly consists of four fiber fingers. Each
finger space can be used to retain the optical fiber jumpers connected to corresponding
optical channel module.
850
40CSM/P-2HU#19590-#19200-DM
Front Cover
the 40CSM/P-2HU#19590-#19200-DM against external influences and prevents the
fibers from being pulled out inadvertently. The cover consists of strong magnet pins
which has to be positioned to bolts attached to the front panel of the shelf. If not enclosed
in the shelf delivery, the front cover has to be ordered separately.
Shelf Labeling
Each 40CSM/P-2HU#19590-#19200-DM shelf is identified and labeled on the top cover
and frontplate as shown in the following figure.
Frontplate Labels
The 40CSM/P-2HU#19590-#19200-DM has two printed labels placed on top right corner
of the frontplate. The upper frontplate label identifies the shelf name and the serial
number. The lower frontplate label contains the USI code of the shelf. Figure 544 shows
the location of frontplate labels.
Shelf Type Label

851
40CSM/P-2HU#19590-#19200-DM
Figure 545: Example of a 40CSM/P-2HU#19590-#19200-DM Shelf Type Label
Certification Label
Figure 546: Example of a 40CSM/P-2HU#19590-#19200-DM Certification Label
Japanese Label
852
40CSM/P-2HU#19590-#19200-DM

Note
Specifications
853
40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
Figure 549: Example of 40CSM-#D02-#D32 Front View
854
40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 132: 40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
C1 to
C40
network port

module
Variants
The 40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy (40-port MUX/DMX channel splitter module - C or L band) is
available in two variants:
40CSM-#D02-#D32 (40-port MUX/DMX channel splitter module - C band)
40CSM-#D34-#D64 (40-port MUX/DMX channel splitter module - L band)
The part #Dxx-#Dyy of the module name refers to the total channel spectrum of the C
band inc. the channels #DC1-#DC9 or L band inc. the channels #DL1-#DL9. Both module
variants feature the same design and use the same faceplate. They only differ in the
optical filters supporting either 40 C-band channels (40CSM-#D02-#D32) or 40 L-band
channels (40CSM-#D34-#D64). The front view of the 40CSM-#D02-#D32 is illustrated in
Figure 549 as an example.
Description
The 40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy is an optical channel splitter and combiner module. Specifically
it is designed for bidirectional data transfer in 40-channel dual-fiber DWDM point-to-point
configurations.
The module contains a combination of particular channel MUX and DEMUX filters for the
C or L band. These filters multiplex/demultiplex up to 40 separate channels into/from the
full duplex signal carried by the network fiber pair. For this purpose the 40CSM-#Dxx#Dyy provides 40 client ports and one network port. On the client side, the module works
in conjunction with the corresponding channel modules. Each of the 40 separate
channels of the C and L band is assigned to a specific client port as shown in the
following table.
855
40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
Table 133: 40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Client Port Description
856
40CSM-#D02-#D32 (C Band)
40CSM-#D34-#D64 (L Band)
Channel
no.
Client ports*
Channel
no.
Client ports*
#DC9
C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
#DL9
C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
#D02
C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D34
C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D03
C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D35
C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D04
C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D36
C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D05
C5 (C5-M; C5-D)
#D37
C5 (C5-M; C5-D)
#D06
C6 (C6-M; C6-D)
#D38
C6 (C6-M; C6-D)
#D07
C7 (C7-M; C7-D)
#D39
C7 (C7-M; C7-D)
#D08
C8 (C8-M; C8-D)
#D40
C8 (C8-M; C8-D)
#D09
C9 (C9-M; C9-D)
#D41
C9 (C9-M; C9-D)
#D10
C10 (C10-M; C10-D)
#D42
C10 (C10-M; C10-D)
#D11
C11 (C11-M; C11-D)
#D43
C11 (C11-M; C11-D)
#D12
C12 (C12-M; C12-D)
#D44
C12 (C12-M; C12-D)
#D13
C13 (C13-M; C13-D)
#D45
C13 (C13-M; C13-D)
#D14
C14 (C14-M; C14-D)
#D46
C14 (C14-M; C14-D)
#D15
C15 (C15-M; C15-D)
#D47
C15 (C15-M; C15-D)
#D16
C16 (C16-M; C16-D)
#D48
C16 (C16-M; C16-D)
#D17
C17 (C17-M; C17-D)
#D49
C17 (C17-M; C17-D)
#D18
C18 (C18-M; C18-D)
#D50
C18 (C18-M; C18-D)
#D19
C19 (C19-M; C19-D)
#D51
C19 (C19-M; C19-D)
#D20
C20 (C20-M; C20-D)
#D52
C20 (C20-M; C20-D)
#D21
C21 (C21-M; C21-D)
#D53
C21 (C21-M; C21-D)
#D22
C22 (C22-M; C22-D)
#D54
C22 (C22-M; C22-D)
#D23
C23 (C23-M; C23-D)
#D55
C23 (C23-M; C23-D)
#D24
C24 (C24-M; C24-D)
#D56
C24 (C24-M; C24-D)
#D25
C25 (C25-M; C25-D)
#D57
C25 (C25-M; C25-D)
#D26
C26 (C26-M; C26-D)
#D58
C26 (C26-M; C26-D)
#D27
C27 (C27-M; C27-D)
#D59
C27 (C27-M; C27-D)
40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
40CSM-#D02-#D32 (C Band)
40CSM-#D34-#D64 (L Band)
Channel
no.
Client ports*
Channel
no.
Client ports*
#D28
C28 (C28-M; C28-D)
#D60
C28 (C28-M; C28-D)
#D29
C29 (C29-M; C29-D)
#D61
C29 (C29-M; C29-D)
#D30
C30 (C30-M; C30-D)
#D62
C30 (C30-M; C30-D)
#D31
C31 (C31-M; C31-D)
#D63
C31 (C31-M; C31-D)
#D32
C32 (C32-M; C32-D)
#D64
C32 (C32-M; C32-D)
#DC1
C33 (C33-M; C33-D)
#DL1
C33 (C33-M; C33-D)
#DC2
C34 (C34-M; C34-D)
#DL2
C34 (C34-M; C34-D)
#DC3
C35 (C35-M; C35-D)
#DL3
C35 (C35-M; C35-D)
#DC4
C36 (C36-M; C36-D)
#DL4
C36 (C36-M; C36-D)
#DC5
C37 (C37-M; C37-D)
#DL5
C37 (C37-M; C37-D)
#DC6
C38 (C38-M; C38-D)
#DL6
C38 (C38-M; C38-D)
#DC7
C39 (C39-M; C39-D)
#DL7
C39 (C39-M; C39-D)
#DC8
C40 (C40-M; C40-D)
#DL8
C40 (C40-M; C40-D)
* The input and output connectors of the client ports are not explicitly
labeled on the faceplates.
The 40CSM-#D02-#D32 and 40CSM-#D34-#D64 can be combined with a 2CLSM-#D01#D64 to form an 80-channel bidirectional transmission system, thus resulting in 40
channel granularity. Other configurations should be avoided due to the limited isolation
values of the filters used in these modules.
Features
Support of 40 channels (wavelengths) in the C band or 40 channels (wavelengths) in

the L band according to ITU-T G.694.1 (100 GHz channel spacing)
Signal Path
Figure 550 shows the operation of the 40CSM-#D02-#D32 as an example and illustrates
the signal path, which is described. The same principle applies to the 40CSM-#D34-#D64
module.
857
40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
Figure 550: 40CSM-#D02-#D32 Operation Scheme
Receive Direction
The 40CSM-#D02-#D32 receives a composite C-band signal through the input N-D of the
network port from the far end of the link. The DEMUX filter in the splitter section splits the
incoming signal into 40 individual channels and couples them into just as many fibers to
have the channels separate on the C1-D to C40-D outputs of the client ports. The
channels are then transmitted to the corresponding DWDM channel modules.
Transmit Direction
The 40CSM-#D02-#D32 receives up to 40 individual channels of the C band from the
corresponding DWDM channel modules through the inputs C1-M to C40-M of the client
ports. The MUX filter in the combiner section combines the incoming channels into a
composite signal and couples it into a single fiber. This signal is directed to the output NM of the network port for transmission to the far end of the link.
Placement
The 40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy is 32 HP wide and therefore occupy eight regular slots. It can be
placed in any 5 HU slot of the 9HU Shelf or 7HU shelf.
Specifications
858
96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125
96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125
Faceplate Markings
These are the abbreviations used for the 96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125 faceplate and their
meanings.
LED Indicator
Optical Ports
Electrical Port
transmit
receive
C1 to
C96
client ports 1 through

96
network port
Shelfs
power
supply
status
Interconnect
Port
859
96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125
Description
The 96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125 is a 96-port multiplexer/demultiplexer shelf with 4HU
mounting height supporting the C-band channels from #19600 through #19125 spaced at
50 GHz. It is a rack-mountable shelf without any kind of modularity including a
combination of specific channel MUX and DEMUX filters.
The 96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125 is meant for the use in a 96-channel dual fiber point-topoint add-drop application or in a ROADM node.
In addition the 96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125 can be used in 80 channel systems as
replacement of 2x40CSM plus ILM.
For this purpose, the MUX and DEMUX filters multiplex/demultiplex 96 separate
channels into/from the full duplex signal carried by the network fiber pair. Thus the shelf
provides 96 bidirectional client ports and one bidirectional network port. The client ports
are arranged in four rows of connectors.Each client port is labeled with the port number
(C1 to C96) as well as the corresponding frequency [THz] which the port supports. See
Table 135 for channel assignments.
860
Client ports
FSP 3000R7
Channel
Names
Frequencies
[THz]
Wavelengths
[nm]
C1 (C1-R; C1-T)
19600
196.00
1529.55
C2 (C2-R; C2-T)
19595
195.95
1529.94
C3 (C3-R; C3-T)
19590
195.90
1530.33
C4 (C4-R; C4-T)
19585
195.85
1530.73
C5 (C5-R; C5-T)
19580
195.80
1531.12
C6 (C6-R; C6-T)
19575
195.75
1531.51
C7 (C7-R; C7-T)
19570
195.70
1531.90
C8 (C8-R; C8-T)
19565
195.65
1532.29
C9 (C9-R; C9-T)
19560
195.60
1532.68
C10 (C10-R; C10-T)
19555
195.55
1533.07
C11 (C11-R; C11-T)
19550
195.50
1533.47
C12 (C12-R; C12-T)
19545
195.45
1533.86
C13 (C13-R; C13-T)
19540
195.40
1534.25
C14 (C14-R; C14-T)
19535
195.35
1534.64
C15 (C15-R; C15-T)
19530
195.30
1535.04
C16 (C16-R; C16-T)
19525
195.25
1535.43
C17 (C17-R; C17-T)
19520
195.20
1535.82
96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125
Client ports
FSP 3000R7
Channel
Names
Frequencies
[THz]
Wavelengths
[nm]
C18 (C18-R; C18-T)
19515
195.15
1536.22
C19 (C19-R; C19-T)
19510
195.10
1536.61
C20 (C20-R; C20-T)
19505
195.05
1537.00
C21 (C21-R; C21-T)
19500
195.00
1537.40
C22 (C22-R; C22-T)
19495
194.95
1537.79
C23 (C23-R; C23-T)
19490
194.90
1538.19
C24 (C24-R; C24-T)
19485
194.85
1538.58
C25 (C25-R; C25-T)
19480
194.80
1538.98
C26 (C26-R; C26-T)
19475
194.75
1539.37
C27 (C27-R; C27-T)
19470
194.70
1539.77
C28 (C28-R; C28-T)
19465
194.65
1540.16
C29 (C29-R; C29-T)
19460
194.60
1540.56
C30 (C30-R; C30-T)
19455
194.55
1540.95
C31 (C31-R; C31-T)
19450
194.50
1541.35
C32 (C32-R; C32-T)
19445
194.45
1541.75
C33 (C33-R; C33-T)
19440
194.40
1542.14
C34 (C34-R; C34-T)
19435
194.35
1542.54
C35 (C35-R; C35-T)
19430
194.30
1542.94
C36 (C36-R; C36-T)
19425
194.25
1543.33
C37 (C37-R; C37-T)
19420
194.20
1543.73
C38 (C38-R; C38-T)
19415
194.15
1544.13
C39 (C39-R; C39-T)
19410
194.10
1544.53
C40 (C40-R; C40-T)
19405
194.05
1544.92
C41 (C41-R; C41-T)
19400
194.00
1545.32
C42 (C42-R; C42-T)
19395
193.95
1545.72
C43 (C43-R; C43-T)
19390
193.90
1546.12
C44 (C44-R; C44-T)
19385
193.85
1546.92
C45 (C45-R; C45-T)
19380
193.80
1546.92
861
96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125
862
Client ports
FSP 3000R7
Channel
Names
Frequencies
[THz]
Wavelengths
[nm]
C46 (C46-R; C46-T)
19375
193.75
1547.32
C47 (C47-R; C47-T)
19370
193.70
1547.72
C48 (C48-R; C48-T)
19365
193.65
1548.12
C49 (C49-R; C49-T)
19360
193.60
1548.52
C50 (C50-R; C50-T)
19355
193.55
1548.92
C51 (C51-R; C51-T)
19350
193.50
1549.32
C52 (C52-R; C52-T)
19345
193.45
1549.72
C53 (C53-R; C53-T)
19340
193.40
1550.12
C54 (C54-R; C54-T)
19335
193.35
1550.52
C55 (C55-R; C55-T)
19330
193.30
1550.92
C56 (C56-R; C56-T)
19325
193.25
1551.32
C57 (C57-R; C57-T)
19320
193.20
1551.72
C58 (C58-R; C58-T)
19315
193.15
1552.12
C59 (C59-R; C59-T)
19310
193.10
1552.52
C60 (C60-R; C60-T)
19305
193.05
1552.93
C61 (C61-R; C61-T)
19300
193.00
1553.33
C62 (C62-R; C62-T)
19295
192.95
1553.73
C63 (C63-R; C63-T)
19290
192.90
1554.13
C64 (C64-R; C64-T)
19285
192.85
1554.54
C65 (C65-R; C65-T)
19280
192.80
1554.94
C66 (C66-R; C66-T)
19275
192.75
1555.34
C67 (C67-R; C67-T)
19270
192.70
1555.75
C68 (C68-R; C68-T)
19265
192.65
1556.15
C69 (C69-R; C69-T)
19260
192.60
1556.56
C70 (C70-R; C70-T)
19255
192.55
1556.96
C71 (C71-R; C71-T)
19250
192.50
1557.36
C72 (C72-R; C72-T)
19245
192.45
1557.77
C73 (C73-R; C73-T)
19240
192.40
1558.17
96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125
Client ports
FSP 3000R7
Channel
Names
Frequencies
[THz]
Wavelengths
[nm]
C74 (C74-R; C74-T)
19235
192.35
1558.58
C75 (C75-R; C75-T)
19230
192.30
1558.98
C76 (C76-R; C76-T)
19225
192.25
1559.39
C77 (C77-R; C77-T)
19220
192.20
1559.79
C78 (C78-R; C78-T)
19215
192.15
1560.20
C79 (C79-R; C79-T)
19210
192.10
1560.61
C80 (C80-R; C80-T)
19205
192.05
1561.01
C81 (C81-R; C81-T)
19200
192.00
1561.42
C82 (C82-R; C82-T)
19195
191.95
1561.83
C83 (C83-R; C83-T)
19190
191.90
1562.23
C84 (C84-R; C84-T)
19185
191.85
1562.64
C85 (C85-R; C85-T)
19180
191.80
1563.05
C86 (C86-R; C86-T)
19175
191.75
1563.45
C87 (C87-R; C87-T)
19170
191.70
1563.86
C88 (C88-R; C88-T)
19165
191.65
1564.26
C89 (C89-R; C89-T)
19160
191.60
1564.67
C90 (C90-R; C90-T)
19155
191.55
1565.08
C91 (C91-R; C91-T)
19150
191.50
1565.48
C92 (C92-R; C92-T)
19145
191.45
1565.89
C93 (C93-R; C93-T)
19140
191.40
1566.30
C94 (C94-R; C94-T)
19135
191.35
1566.70
C95 (C95-R; C95-T)
19130
191.30
1567.11
C96 (C96-R; C96-T)
19125
191.25
1567.52
Note
Note that ADVA Optical Networkings 80-DWDM channel plan has been
extended by 16 C-band channels (channel 19600 on C1 and channels
19195 on C82 through 19125 on C96) to cover a 96-channel system.
Labeling of the corresponding additional 16 client ports on the front panel
is highlighted in white color.
A set of fiber management guides on the front side of the shelf keeps the fiber cables
organized and allows for quick and easy installation or removal.
The front view of a this shelf is illustrated in Figure 551 on p.859.
863
96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125
On the client side, the 96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125 works with all released FSP 3000R7
channel modules that support channels in the 50-GHz wavelength grid and have
specified maximum Tx power of 6.0 dBm. On the network side, the 96CSM/4HU-#19600#19125 can be connected to the 9ROADM-C96/0/OPM or to the network line. The
8ROADM-C80/0/OPM or ROADM-C80/0/OPM modules can also be connected to
network port for 80-channel operation.
The 96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125 requires a Passive Shelf Control Unit (PSCU) or the
Common Equipment Module of a 9HU shelf (CEM/9HU) for interconnection to a network
control unit (NCU). The PSCU or CEM/9HU are the connecting point of the
96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125 shelf to support management functionality. The PSCU or
CEM/9HU basically registers this shelf to the NCU and provides inventory data and
power supply. The connection is made using the interconnect ports of the shelf and the
PSCU or CEM/9HU. Each interconnect port has a 6-pin panel-mounted IEEE1394
(FireWire) socket. Four pins are used for transferring inventory data, and two pins receive
power from the PSCU. This allows the 96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125 to operate without a
separate power supply.
Note
Although the PSCU, CEM/9HU and 96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125 use

FireWire 400 connectors for interconnecting, the FireWire standard itself
is not supported (neither the protocol nor pinout).
The cable for connecting the 96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125 to the PSCU or CEM/9HU is

included in delivery (see IEEE 1394 Interface Cable on p.866). This cable must be used
solely. The use of a cable other than that delivered by ADVA Optical Networking will void
the warranty and the EMC certificate.
Features
Powered via internal management interface of PSCU module or CEM/9HU with nonredundant nominal 3V3DC feed
Support of 96 C-band channels (wavelengths) on the 50 GHz grid according to ITU-T

G.694.1 and ADVA Optical Networking channel plan
Electrical signal interface front accessible
Full management support when connected to a PSCU module or CEM/9HU
Fault management of the shelf is handled by PSCU module or CEM/9HU
Signal Path
Figure 552 provides a simplified functional block diagram illustrating the 96CSM/4HU#19600-#19125 signal path. The transmit and receive signal paths are described below.
864
96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125
De-Multiplexing Direction
The 96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125 receives a combined network signal through the input
N-R connector of the network port from the far end of the link. The combined signal is
input to the DEMUX filter. The DEMUX filter de-multiplexes this signal into 96 individual
DWDM channels and couples them into just as many fibers to have the 96 channels
separate on the C1-T to C96-T outputs of the client ports. The DWDM channels are then
transmitted to the corresponding DWDM channel modules.
Multiplexing Direction
band from the corresponding DWDM channel modules through the inputs C1-R to C96R of the client ports.The MUX filter multiplexes the incoming DWDM channels into one
DWDM signal and couples it into a single fiber. The combined network signal is
forwarded to the output N-T of the network port for transmission to the far end of the link.
Placement
rack by using the appropriate adaptor brackets. It also fits into a 300mm (0.984 ft.) deep
ETSI rack. The shelf occupies 4 HU of space in a rack.
865
96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125
Accessories
Adaptor Brackets
The 96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125 shelf comes with no rackmount brackets pre-installed.

The 19-inch rackmount, NEBS and ETSI bracket pair is included in the shipping box. The
Front Cover
being pulled out inadvertently. The front cover is equipped with four snap-in elements
which make the installation and removal an easy job. The front cover is included in the
shelf delivery.

The IEEE 1394 interface cable (IC300/PSCU/IEEE1394) is used for connecting the
96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125 to the PSCU or CEM/9HU. The cable is supplied with the
equipment by ADVA Optical Networking. For more information about this cable, refer to
Electrical Cables on p.1279.
LED Indicator
The 96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125 has one LED indicator on the faceplate. It indicates the
status of the shelf.
Table 136: Description of the 96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125 Status LED
866
LED
Name
LED
Color
Status Indications
Red
Off
Green
Power ok; communication is operating correctly
96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125
Shelf Labeling
Each 96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125 shelf can be identified by several labels located on
the top of the shelf and on its frontplate. These labels provide shelf specific information.
Frontplate Labels
For a quick identification the 96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125 shelf has two printed labels
affixed on its frontplate top right. The top label includes the shelf name, item number, HW
revision and serial number. The label underneath contains the USI code of the shelf.
Figure 551 on p.859 shows the location of frontplate labels, and Figure 553 illustrates an
example of these labels.
Figure 553: Example of a 96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125 Frontplate Labels
Shelf Type Label

certification labels
label for class 1M laser product
867
96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125
Japanese Label
customers. Figure 555 on p.868 shows an example.

868
96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125
Figure 556: 96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125 ESD and Laser Safety Label
Note
Specifications
869
2BSM-#D01-#D32
2BSM-#D01-#D32
Figure 557: 2BSM-#D01-#D32 Front View
Faceplate Markings
Table 137 lists all abbreviations on the 2BSM-#D01-#D32 faceplate and their meanings.
Table 137: 2BSM-#D01-#D32 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
870
Optical Ports
2BSM-#D01-#D32
Table 137: 2BSM-#D01-#D32 Faceplate Markings
P
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
network port
C2
client port 2
C1
client port 1
Description
The 2BSM-#D01-#D32 is an optical red/blue subband splitter and combiner module for
the C band. It is designed for bidirectional data transfer in dual-fiber DWDM linear
add/drop and ring configurations.
The 2BSM-#D01-#D32 contains a combination of specific subband MUX and DEMUX
filters that combine/split the red and blue subband channel signals of the C band into/from
the full duplex signal carried by the network fiber pair. The blue subbands comprise the
shorter wavelengths, channels #D01-#D16. The red subbands include the longer
wavelengths, channels #D17-#D32.
The module provides two client ports and one network port. On the client side, the 2BSM#D01-#D32 works in conjunction with the appropriate group splitter modules only.
The front view of the 2BSM-#D01-#D32 is illustrated in Figure 557.
Features
Support of 32 channels in the C band according to ITU-T G.694.1 (100 GHz spacing)
Signal Path
Figure 558 shows the operation of the 2BSM-#D01-#D32 module and illustrates the
871
2BSM-#D01-#D32
Figure 558: 2BSM-#D01-#D32 Operation Scheme
Receive Direction
The 2BSM-#D01-#D32 receives a composite C-band signal through the input N-D of the
network port from the far end of the link. The DEMUX band filter in the splitter section
splits the incoming signal into the blue subband (#D01-#D16) as well as the red subband
(#D17-#D32) and couples them into single fibers to have the subbands separate on the
C1-D and C2-D outputs of the client ports. Both subbands are then transmitted to the
corresponding group splitter modules for further de-multiplexing.
Transmit Direction
The 2BSM-#D01-#D32 receives the blue subband channels (#D01-#D16) and the red
subband channels (#D17-#D32) from the corresponding group splitter modules through
the inputs C1-M and C2-M of the client ports. The MUX band filter in the combiner
section combines the blue and red subband channels into a composite signal and couples
it into a single fiber. This signal is directed to the output N-M of the network port for
transmission to the far end of the link.
Slot Positions
The 2BSM-#D01-#D32 is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and slots:
SH1HU, slots 1, 2
Specifications
872
4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
Figure 559: 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Front View
873
4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 138: 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Tx
transmit
Rx
receive
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
network port
C4
client port 4
C3
client port 3
C2
client port 2
C1
client port 1
Variants
The 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy module (4-port DWDM group splitter module - C band) is
available in 2 variants. The variants are listed in Table 139.
Table 139: 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Module Variants
Variants
Description
4GSM-#D01-#D16
4-port DWDM group splitter module - blue band (C

band)
4GSM-#D17-#D32
4-port DWDM group splitter module - red band (C band)
The part #Dxx-#Dyy of the module name refers to a definite range of channel groups
within the C band. Both module variants feature the same design and use the same
faceplate. They only differ in the optical filters supporting adding/dropping a specific
channel group of the Cband (see above). The front view of a 4GSM-#D01-#D16 is
illustrated in Figure 559 as an example.
Description
The 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy is an optical channel group splitter and combiner module for the C
band. It is designed for bidirectional data transfer in dual-fiber DWDM linear add/drop and
ring configurations.
The 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy module contains a combination of MUX and DEMUX filters for
874
4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
the C band. These filters combine/split four different channel group signals into/from the
full duplex signal carried by the network fiber pair.
The module provides four client ports and one network port. On the client side, the 4GSM#Dxx-#Dyy works in conjunction with the corresponding channel splitter modules. Table
140 lists the module variants and the allocation of the channel groups to the client ports.
Table 140: 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Client Port Description
Client ports*
Channel Groups of the C Band

4GSM-#D01-#D16
4GSM-#D17-#D32
C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D13-#D16
#D29-#D32
C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D09-#D12
#D25-#D28
C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D05-#D08
#D21-#D24
C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
#D01-#D04
#D17-#D20
Features

GHz spacing)
Signal Path
Figure 560 shows the operation of the 4GSM-#D01-#D16 as an example and illustrates
the signal path, which is described. The same principle applies to the other module
variants.
875
4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
Figure 560: 4GSM-#D01-#D16 Operation Scheme
Receive Direction
The 4GSM-#D01-#D16 receives a composite C-band signal through the input N-D of the
incoming signal into four channel group signals and couples them into single fibers to
have the different channel groups separate on the C1-D to C4-D outputs of the client
ports. The channel groups are then transmitted to the appropriate channel splitter
modules for further de-multiplexing.
Transmit Direction
The 4GSM-#D01-#D16 receives up to four channel groups from the corresponding
channel splitter modules through the inputs C1-M to C4-M of the client ports. The MUX
filter in the combiner section combines the incoming channel groups into a composite
signal and couples it into a single fiber. This signal is directed to the output N-M of the
network port for transmission to the far end of the link.
Slot Positions
The 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and slots:
Specifications
876
8GSM-#D01-#D32
8GSM-#D01-#D32
Figure 561: 8GSM-#D01-#D32 Front View
877
8GSM-#D01-#D32
Faceplate Markings
The table below lists all abbreviations on the 8GSM-#D01-#D32 faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 141: 8GSM-#D01-#D32 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
network port
C1 to C8

modules
Description
The 8GSM-#D01-#D32 is an optical channel group splitter and combiner module. It is
designed for bidirectional data transfer in dual-fiber DWDM linear add/drop and ring
configurations.
The 8GSM-#D01-#D32 module contains a combination of MUX and DEMUX filters for
the C band. These filters combine/split eight different channel group signals into/from the
full duplex signal carried by the network fiber pair. The module supports the channels
#D01 through #D32 of the C band.
The 8GSM-#D01-#D32 provides eight client ports and one network port. On the client
side, the module works in conjunction with the carbon-dating channel splitter modules.
Each of the 8 channel groups of the Cband is assigned to a specific client port as shown
in Table 142.
Table 142: 8GSM-#D01-#D32 Client Port Description
878
Client Ports
8GSM-#D01-#D32 C-Band Channel Groups
C8 (C8-M; C8-D)
#D29-#D32
C7 (C7-M; C7-D)
#D25-#D28
C6 (C6-M; C6-D)
#D21-#D24
C5 (C5-M; C5-D)
#D17-#D20
C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D13-#D16
C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D09-#D12
C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D05-#D08
C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
#D01-#D04
8GSM-#D01-#D32
The advantage of using the 8GSM-#D01-#D32 is that the number of channel groups to be
added or dropped can be increased or decreased without having to change this module.
However, the use of the 8GSM-#D01-#D32 module means that there will be a great deal
of insertion loss.
Features

GHz spacing)
Signal Path
Figure 562 shows the operation of the 8GSM-#D01-#D32 as an example and illustrates
the signal path, which is described.
Figure 562: 8GSM-#D01-#D32 Operation Scheme
Receive Direction
The 8GSM-#D01-#D32 receives a composite C-band signal through the input N-D of the
incoming signal into eight channel group signals and couples them into single fibers to
ports. The channel groups are then transmitted to the corresponding 4-port channel
splitter modules for further demultiplexing.
879
8GSM-#D01-#D32
Transmit Direction
The 8GSM-#D01-#D32 receives up to eight channel groups of the C band from the
corresponding 4-port channel splitter modules through the inputs C1-M to C8-M of the
client ports. The MUX filter in the combiner section combines the incoming channel
groups into a composite signal and couples it into a single fiber. This signal is directed to
the output N-M of the network port for transmission to the far end of the link.
Slot Positions
The 8GSM-#D01-#D32 is 8 HP wide and therefore occupies 2 regular slots. It can be
SH1HU, 1
Specifications
880
1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy
1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy
Figure 563: 1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy Front View
Faceplate Markings
Table 143 list all abbreviations on the 1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy faceplate and their meanings.
Table 143: 1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Tx
transmit
881
1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy
Table 143: 1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy Faceplate Markings
Rx
receive
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
network port
upgrade port
client port
Variants
The 1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy module (1-port DWDM group splitter module with upgrade port C band) is available in 8 variants covering 8 C-band channel groups. The variants are
listed in the following table.
Table 144: 1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy Module Variants
Variants
Description
1GSM+#D01-#D04
1-port DWDM group splitter module - group

#D01-#D04, C band
1GSM+#D05-#D08

#D05-#D08, C band
1GSM+#D09-#D12

#D09-#D12, C band
1GSM+#D13-#D16

#D13-#D16, C band
1GSM+#D17-#D20

#D17-#D20, C band
1GSM+#D21-#D24

#D21-#D24, C band
1GSM+#D25-#D28

#D25-#D28, C band
1GSM+#D29-#D32

#D29-#D32, C band
The part #Dxx-#Dyy of the module name refers to a specific channel group within the C
band each module variant adds or drops. All module variants feature the same design and
use the same faceplate. They only differ in the optical filters adding/dropping a specific
channel group of the Cband (see above). The front view of the 1GSM+#D01-#D04 is
882
1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy
Description
The 1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy is an optical channel group splitter and combiner module. It is
designed for bidirectional data transfer in dual-fiber DWDM linear add/drop and ring
configurations.
The 1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy contains a combination of specific add and drop optical filters
which allows access to specific channel groups of the Cband from a network fiber while
passing through the remaining channel spectrum. The module provides one client port,
network port and upgrade port each. On the client side, the 1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy work in
conjunction with the corresponding group splitter modules.
Features

GHz spacing)
Adding/dropping a single channel group
Signal Path
Figure 564 shows the operation of the 1GSM+#D01-#D04 as an example and illustrates
the signal path, which is described below. The same principle applies to the other module
variants.
Figure 564: 1GSM+#D01-#D04 Operation Scheme
883
1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy

The 1GSM+#D01-#D04 receives a composite C-band channel signal through the input ND of the network port from the far end of the link. In the direction of signal flow, the drop
filter drops a specific channel group (e.g. #D01-#D04) out of the channel spectrum and
couples it into a single fiber to have the channel group signal separated on the C-D output
of the client port. The same filter reflects all remaining channels onto the output U-M of
the upgrade port. The separated channels are then transmitted to the appropriate channel
splitter module for further de-multiplexing.

The 1GSM+#D01-#D04 receives a single channel group (e.g. #D01-#D04) from the
corresponding channel splitter module through the input C-M of the client port. The add
filter adds this channel group in the direction of signal flow to the channel spectrum
received through the input U-D of the upgrade port. The combined channel group signal is
coupled into a single fiber and directed to the output N-M of the network port for
transmission to the far end of the link.
Slot Positions
The 1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and slots:
SH7HU/SH7HU-R, slots1 through 20
Specifications
884
5GSM-#19590-#19200
5GSM-#19590-#19200
Figure 565: 5GSM-#19590-#19200 Front View
885
5GSM-#19590-#19200
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 5GSM-#19590-#19200 faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 145: 5GSM-#19590-#19200 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
network port
C1 to C5

modules
Description
The 5GSM-#19590-#19200 is a 5-port optical channel group splitter and combiner
module. It is designed for bidirectional data transfer in dual-fiber DWDM linear add/drop
and ring configurations.
The 5GSM-#19590-#19200 module contains a combination of MUX and DEMUX filters
for the C band. These filters combine/split five different channel group signals into/from
the full duplex signal carried by the network fiber pair. The 5GSM-#19590-#19200
supports the even channels #19590 through #19200 of the C band.
The module provides five client ports and one network port. On the client side, the 5GSM#19590-#19200 works in conjunction with the channel group splitter modules. Each of the
5 channel groups is assigned to a specific client port as shown in the following table.
Table 146: 5GSM-#19590-#19200 Client Port Description
Client Ports*
Channel Groups
C5 (C5-M; C5-D)
#19270 - #19200
C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#19350 - #19280
C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#19430 - #19360
C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#19510 - #19440
C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
#19590 - #19520
* The input/output connectors of the client ports are not explicitly labeled on
the faceplates.
Features
886

(100 GHz spacing) and ADVA Optical Networkings channel plan
Adding/dropping five even channel groups of the C band
5GSM-#19590-#19200
Signal Path
Figure 566 shows the operation of the 5GSM-#19590-#19200 as an example and
Figure 566: 5GSM-#19590-#19200 Operation Scheme

The 5GSM-#19590-#19200 receives a composite C-band signal through the input N-D of
the network port from the far end of the link. The DEMUX filter in the splitter section splits
the incoming signal into five channel group signals and couples them into single fibers to
ports. The channel groups are then transmitted to the corresponding channel splitter
modules for further demultiplexing.

The 5GSM-#19590-#19200 receives up to five channel groups of the C band from the
corresponding channel splitter modules through the inputs C1-M to C8-M of the client
ports. The MUX filter in the combiner section combines the incoming channel groups into
a composite signal and couples it into one fiber. This signal is directed to the output N-M
of the network port for transmission to the far end of the link.
887
5GSM-#19590-#19200
Slot Positions
The 5GSM-#19590-#19200 is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and
slots:
Specifications
888
8CSM-#19xxx-#19yyy
8CSM-#19xxx-#19yyy
Figure 567: 8CSM-#19xxx-#19yyy Front View
889
8CSM-#19xxx-#19yyy
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 8CSM-#19xxx-#19yyy faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 147: 8CSM-#19xxx-#19yyy
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
network port
C1 - C8

module
Variants
The 8CSM-#19xxx-#19yyy (8-port DWDM channel splitter and combiner module) is
available in five variants covering 40 even C-band channels. The variants are listed in
Table 148.
Table 148: 8CSM-#19xxx-#19yyy Module Variants
Variants
Description
8CSM-#19590-#19520
8-port DWDM channel spiltter and combiner module

adding/dropping C-band channels #19590-#19520
8CSM-#19510-#19440

8CSM-#19430-#19360

8CSM-#19350-#19280

8CSM-#19270-#19200

The part #19xxx#19yyy of the module name refers to a specific channel group in the C
band each module variant adds and drops. All module variants feature the same design
and use the same faceplate. They only differ in the optical filters adding/dropping four
different channels of the respective channel group (see above). The front view of the
8CSM-#19270-#19200 is illustrated in Figure 567 as an example.
890
8CSM-#19xxx-#19yyy
Description
The 8CSM-#19xxx-#19yyy is an optical 8-port DWDM channel splitter and combiner
module. It is designed for bidirectional data transfer in dual-fiber DWDM linear add/drop
and ring configurations. The module contains a combination of specific add/drop optical
filters and MUX/DEMUX filters which multiplex/de-multiplex eight specific channels of
the C band into/from the full duplex signal carried by the network fiber pair.
The module provides eight bidirectional client ports and one bidirectional network port. On
the client side, the 8CSM-#19xxx-#19yyy works in conjunction with the corresponding
channel modules.
891
8CSM-#19xxx-#19yyy
The following table lists the module variants, the channels they support and the allocation
of the channels to the client ports.
Table 149: 8CSM-#19xxx-#19yyy Client Port Description
Module Variants
Client Ports*
Channel
Names
Frequencies
[THz]
Wavelengths
[nm]
8CSM-#19590#19520
C8 (C8-M; C8D)
#19520
195.20
1535.822
C7 (C7-M; C7D)
#19530
195.30
1535.036
C6 (C6-M; C6D)
#19540
195.40
1534.250
C5 (C5-M; C5D)
#19550
195.50
1533.465
C4 (C4-M; C4D)
#19560
195.60
1532.681
C3 (C3-M; C3D)
#19570
195.70
1531.898
C2 (C2-M; C2D)
#19580
195.80
1531.116
C1 (C1-M; C1D)
#19590
195.90
1530.334
C8 (C8-M; C8D)
#19440
194.40
1542.142
C7 (C7-M; C7D)
#19450
194.50
1541.349
C6 (C6-M; C6D)
#19460
194.60
1540.557
C5 (C5-M; C5D)
#19470
194.70
1539.766
C4 (C4-M; C4D)
#19480
194.80
1538.976
C3 (C3-M; C3D)
#19490
194.90
1538.186
C2 (C2-M; C2D)
#19500
195.00
1537.397
C1 (C1-M; C1D)
#19510
195.10
1536.609
8CSM-#19510#19440
892
8CSM-#19xxx-#19yyy
Module Variants
Client Ports*
Channel
Names
Frequencies
[THz]
Wavelengths
[nm]
8CSM-#19430#19360
C8 (C8-M; C8D)
#19360
193.60
1548.515
C7 (C7-M; C7D)
#19370
193.70
1547.715
C6 (C6-M; C6D)
#19380
193.80
1546.917
C5 (C5-M; C5D)
#19390
193.90
1546.119
C4 (C4-M; C4D)
#19400
194.00
1545.322
C3 (C3-M; C3D)
#19410
194.10
1544.526
C2 (C2-M; C2D)
#19420
194.20
1543.730
C1 (C1-M; C1D)
#19430
194.30
1542.936
C8 (C8-M; C8D)
#19280
192.80
1554.940
C7 (C7-M; C7D)
#19290
192.90
1554.134
C6 (C6-M; C6D)
#19300
193.00
1553.329
C5 (C5-M; C5D)
#19310
193.10
1552.524
C4 (C4-M; C4D)
#19320
193.20
1551.721
C3 (C3-M; C3D)
#19330
193.30
1550.918
C2 (C2-M; C2D)
#19340
193.40
1550.116
C1 (C1-M; C1D)
#19350
193.50
1549.315
8CSM-#19350#19280
893
8CSM-#19xxx-#19yyy
Module Variants
Client Ports*
Channel
Names
Frequencies
[THz]
Wavelengths
[nm]
8CSM-#19270#19200
C8 (C8-M; C8D)
#19200
192.00
1561.419
C7 (C7-M; C7D)
#19210
192.10
1560.606
C6 (C6-M; C6D)
#19220
192.20
1559.794
C5 (C5-M; C5D)
#19230
192.30
1558.983
C4 (C4-M; C4D)
#19240
192.40
1558.173
C3 (C3-M; C3D)
#19250
192.50
1557.363
C2 (C2-M; C2D)
#19260
192.60
1556.555
C1 (C1-M; C1D)
#19270
192.70
1555.747
* The allocation for the input and output (M and D) of the client ports are not
explicitly labeled on the faceplate.
Features
Support of five channel groups with a total of 40 even channels (19200-19590) in the
C band according to ITU-T G.694.1 (100 GHz spacing) and ADVA Optical
Networkings channel plan
Adding/dropping eight even C-band channels into/from each channel group
Front accessible LC type receptacle connectors
Signal Path
Figure 568 shows the operation of the 8CSM-#19270-#19200 as an example and
illustrates the signal path, which is described. The same principle applies to the other
module variants.
894
8CSM-#19xxx-#19yyy
Figure 568: 8CSM-#19xxx-#19yyy Operation Scheme
Receive Direction
The 8CSM-#19270-#19200 receives a composite DWDM channel signal through the
input N-D of the network port from the far end of the link. The DEMUX filter demultiplexes the composite DWDM channel signal into its component channels and
couples them into single fibers to have the eight channels separate on the C1-D to C8-D
outputs of the client ports. These channels are then transmitted to the corresponding
Transmit Direction
The 8CSM-#19270-#19200 receives eight individual DWDM channels from the
corresponding channel modules through the inputs C1-M to C8-M of the client ports. The
MUX filter multiplexes the incoming channels into one channel signal and couples it into
the output fiber. The composite DWDM channel signal is then transmitted through the
output N-M of the network port to the far end of the link.
Slot Positions
The 8CSM-#19xxx-#19yyy module is 8 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves
and slots:
SH1HU, slot 1
895
4CSM+#19xxx-#19yyy
Specifications
4CSM+#19xxx-#19yyy
Figure 569: 4CSM+#19xxx-#19yyy Front View
896
4CSM+#19xxx-#19yyy
Faceplate Markings
See "4CSM+#19xxx-#19yyy Faceplate Markings" on page 897 lists all abbreviations on
the 4CSM+#19xxx-#19yyy faceplate and their meanings.
Table 150: 4CSM+#19xxx-#19yyy Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
network port
upgrade port
C1 - C4
Variants
The 4CSM+#19xxx-#19yyy (4-port DWDM channel splitter and combiner module with
upgrade port - C band) is available in 10 variants covering 40 C-band channels. The
variants are listed in Table 151.
Table 151: 4CSM+#19xxx-#19yyy Module Variants
Variants
Description
4CSM+#19590-#19560
4-port DWDM channel splitter and combiner module with

upgrade port adding/dropping C-band channels 1959019560
4CSM+#19550-#19520

4CSM+#19510-#19480

4CSM+#19470-#19440

4CSM+#19430-#19400

4CSM+#19390-#19360

897
4CSM+#19xxx-#19yyy
Table 151: 4CSM+#19xxx-#19yyy Module Variants
Variants
Description
4CSM+#19350-#19320

4CSM+#19310-#19280

4CSM+#19270-#19240

4CSM+#19230-#19200

The part #19xxx#19yyy of the module name refers to a specific channel group in the C
band each module variant adds and drops. All module variants feature the same design
and use the same faceplate. They only differ in the optical filters adding/dropping four
different channels of the respective channel group (see above). The front view of the
4CSM+#19230-#19200 is illustrated in Figure 569 as an example.
Description
The 4CSM+#19xxx-#19yyy is a 4- port optical channel splitter and combiner module with
upgrade port. It is designed for bidirectional data transfer in dual-fiber point-to-point
DWDM networks with up to 40 channels, linear add/drop and ring configurations. The
module contains a combination of specific add/drop optical filters and MUX/DEMUX
filters which allows access to four specific channels of the C band from a network fiber
while passing through the remaining channel spectrum. For this purpose, the module
provides four client ports, one network port and one upgrade port. On the client side, the
4CSM+#19xxx-#19yyy works in conjunction with the corresponding channel modules.
Using the upgrade port this module can be cascaded to add/drop specific channel groups
at a certain site. Table 152 lists the module variants, the channels they support and the
allocation of the channels to the client ports.
898
4CSM+#19xxx-#19yyy
Table 152: 4CSM+#19xxx-#19yyy Client Port Description
Module Variants
Client Ports*
Channel
Frequencies
[THz]
Wavelengths
[nm]
4CSM+#19590#19560
C4 (C4-M;
C4-D)
19560
195.60
1532.681
C3 (C3-M;
C3-D)
19570
195.70
1531.898
C2 (C2-M;
C2-D)
19580
195.80
1531.116
C1 (C1-M;
C1-D)
19590
195.90
1530.334
C4 (C4-M;
C4-D)
19520
195.20
1535.822
C3 (C3-M;
C3-D)
19530
195.30
1535.036
C2 (C2-M;
C2-D)
19540
195.40
1534.250
C1 (C1-M;
C1-D)
19550
195.50
1533.465
C4 (C4-M;
C4-D)
19480
194.80
1538.976
C3 (C3-M;
C3-D)
19490
194.90
1538.186
C2 (C2-M;
C2-D)
19500
195.00
1537.397
C1 (C1-M;
C1-D)
19510
195.10
1536.609
C4 (C4-M;
C4-D)
19440
194.40
1542.142
C3 (C3-M;
C3-D)
19450
194.50
1541.349
C2 (C2-M;
C2-D)
19460
194.60
1540.557
C1 (C1-M;
C1-D)
19470
194.70
1539.766
4CSM+#19550#19520
4CSM+#19510#19480
4CSM+#19470#19440
899
4CSM+#19xxx-#19yyy
Module Variants
Client Ports*
Channel
Frequencies
[THz]
Wavelengths
[nm]
4CSM+#19430#19400
C4 (C4-M;
C4-D)
19400
194.00
1545.322
C3 (C3-M;
C3-D)
19410
194.10
1544.526
C2 (C2-M;
C2-D)
19420
194.20
1543.730
C1 (C1-M;
C1-D)
19430
194.30
1542.936
C4 (C4-M;
C4-D)
19360
193.60
1548.515
C3 (C3-M;
C3-D)
19370
193.70
1547.715
C2 (C2-M;
C2-D)
19380
193.80
1546.917
C1 (C1-M;
C1-D)
19390
193.90
1546.119
C4 (C4-M;
C4-D)
19320
193.20
1551.721
C3 (C3-M;
C3-D)
19330
193.30
1550.918
C2 (C2-M;
C2-D)
19340
193.40
1550.116
C1 (C1-M;
C1-D)
19350
193.50
1549.315
C4 (C4-M;
C4-D)
19280
192.80
1554.940
C3 (C3-M;
C3-D)
19290
192.90
1554.134
C2 (C2-M;
C2-D)
19300
193.00
1553.329
C1 (C1-M;
C1-D)
19310
193.10
1552.524
4CSM+#19390#19360
4CSM+#19350#19320
4CSM+#19310#19280
900
4CSM+#19xxx-#19yyy
Module Variants
Client Ports*
Channel
Frequencies
[THz]
Wavelengths
[nm]
4CSM+#19270#19240
C4 (C4-M;
C4-D)
19240
192.40
1558.173
C3 (C3-M;
C3-D)
19250
192.50
1557.363
C2 (C2-M;
C2-D)
19260
192.60
1556.555
C1 (C1-M;
C1-D)
19270
192.70
1555.747
C4 (C4-M;
C4-D)
19200
192.00
1561.419
C3 (C3-M;
C3-D)
19210
192.10
1560.606
C2 (C2-M;
C2-D)
19220
192.20
1559.794
C1 (C1-M;
C1-D)
19230
192.30
1558.983
4CSM+#19230#19200
the faceplates.
Features
Support of ten channel groups with a total of 40 channels (19590 - 19200) in the C
band according to ITU-T G.694.1 (100 GHz spacing) and according to ADVA Optical
Signal Path
Figure 570 shows the operation of the 4CSM+#19230-#19200 as an example and
module variants.
901
4CSM+#19xxx-#19yyy
Figure 570: 4CSM+#19230-#19200 Operation Scheme
Receive Direction
The 4CSM+#19230-#19200 receives a composite C-band channel signal through the
input N-D of the network port from the far end of the link. In the direction of signal flow,
the drop filter drops a specific channel group, e.g. 1923019200 out of the channel
spectrum and reflects all remaining channels onto the output U-M of the upgrade port.
The DEMUX filter in the splitter section de-multiplexes the isolated channel group into its
component channels and couples them into single fibers to have the four channels
separate on the C1-D to C4-D outputs of the client ports. These channels are then
transmitted to the corresponding DWDM channel modules.
Transmit Direction
The 4CSM+#19230-#19200 receives four individual channels, e.g. 1923019200, from the
ports. The MUX filter in the combiner section multiplexes the incoming channels into a
channel group signal and couples it into a single fiber. The add filter adds this channel
group signal in the direction of signal flow to the channel spectrum received through the
input U-D of the upgrade port. The composite channel signal is coupled into the output
fiber and transmitted through the output N-M of the network port to the far end of the link.
Slot Positions
The 4CSM+#19xxx-#19yyy module is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves
and slots:
902
SH1HU, 1 and 2
4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
Specifications
4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
Figure 571: 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Front View
903
4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 153: 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Tx
transmit
Rx
receive
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
network port
C1 - C4
Variants
The 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy (4-port DWDM channel splitter module - C band) is available in 8
variants covering 32 C-band channels. The variants are listed in the table below.
Table 154: 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Module Variants
904
Variants
Description
4CSM-#D01-#D04
4-port DWDM channel splitter module - channels

#D01-#D04, C band
4CSM-#D05-#D08

#D05-#D08, C band
4CSM-#D09-#D12

#D09-#D12, C band
4CSM-#D13-#D16

#D13-#D16, C band
4CSM-#D17-#D20

#D17-#D20, C band
4CSM-#D21-#D24

#D21-#D24, C band
4CSM-#D25-#D28

#D25-#D28, C band
4CSM-#D29-#D32

#D29-#D32, C band
4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
The part #Dxx-#Dyy of the module name refers to a specific channel group of the C band
each module variant supports. All module variants feature the same design and use the
same faceplate. They only differ in the optical filters multiplexing/de-multiplexing the
channels of the respective channel group. The front view of the 4CSM-#D01-#D04 is
Description
The 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy is an optical channel splitter and combiner module. It is designed
for bidirectional data transfer in dual-fiber DWDM linear add/drop and ring configurations.
The module contains a combination of MUX and DEMUX channel filters for the C band.
These filters multiplex/demultiplex four different channel group signals into/from the full
duplex signal carried by the network fiber pair.
The module provides four client ports and one network port. On the network side, the
4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy works in conjunction with the appropriate group splitter module, and
on the client side with the corresponding channel modules. The table below lists the
module variants, the channels they support and the allocation of the channels to the client
ports.
Client Ports*
C-Band Channel No.
Module Variants
C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D04
4CSM-#D01-#D04
C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D03
C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D02
C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
#D01
C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D8
C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D7
C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D6
C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
#D5
C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D12
C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D11
C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D10
C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
#D09
C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D16
C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D15
C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D14
C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
#D13
4CSM-#D05-#D08
4CSM-#D09-#D12
4CSM-#D13-#D16
905
4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
Client Ports*
C-Band Channel No.
Module Variants
C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D20
4CSM-#D17-#D20
C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D19
C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D18
C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
#D17
C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D24
C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D23
C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D22
C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
#D21
C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D28
C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D27
C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D26
C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
#D25
C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D32
C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D31
C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D30
C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
#D29
4CSM-#D21-#D24
4CSM-#D25-#D28
4CSM-#D29-#D32
Features
Support of eight channel groups with a total of 32 channels (wavelengths) in the C

band according to ITU-T G.694.1 (100 GHz spacing)
Signal Path
The figure below shows the operation of the 4CSM-#D01-#D04 as an example and
module variants.
906
4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
Figure 572: 4CSM-#D01-#D04 Operation Scheme
Receive Direction
The 4CSM-#D01-#D04 receives a specific channel group signal, e.g. #D01-#D04,
through the input N-D of the network port from the far end of the link. The DEMUX filter in
the splitter section de-multiplexes the incoming signal into its component channels and
couples them into single fibers to have the four channels separate on the C1-D to C4-D
Transmit Direction
The 4CSM-#D01-#D04 receives four individual channels, e.g. #D01-#D04, from the
channel group signal and couples it into the output fiber. This signal is directed to the
output N-M of the network port and transmitted to the far end of the link.
Slot Positions
The 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy module is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and
slots:
Specifications
907
4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy
4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy
Figure 573: 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy Front View
908
4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 156: 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
network port
upgrade port
C1 - C4

module
Variants
The 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy (4-port DWDM channel splitter module with upgrade port - C
band) is available in 8 variants covering 32 C-band channels. The variants are listed in the
table below.
Table 157: 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy Module Variants
Variants
Description
4CSM+#D01-#D04
4-port DWDM channel splitter module with upgrade port

adding/dropping channels #D01-#D04, C band
4CSM+#D05-#D08

4CSM+#D09-#D12

4CSM+#D13-#D16

4CSM+#D17-#D20

4CSM+#D21-#D24

4CSM+#D25-#D28

4CSM+#D29-#D32

909
4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy
The part #Dxx-#Dyy of the module name refers to a specific channel group of the C band
each module variant adds and drops. All module variants feature the same design and
use the same faceplate. They only differ in the optical filters adding/dropping four different
channels of the respective channel group (see above). The front view of the
4CSM+#D01-#D04 is illustrated in Figure 573 as an example.
Description
The 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy is an optical channel splitter and combiner module. It is designed
for bidirectional data transfer in dual-fiber DWDM linear add/drop and ring configurations.
The module contains a combination of specific add/drop optical filters and MUX/DEMUX
filters which allows access to four specific channels of the C band from a network fiber
while passing through the remaining channel spectrum.
The module provides four client ports, one network port and one upgrade port. On the
client side, the 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy works in conjunction with the corresponding channel
modules.
The table below lists the module variants, the channels they support and the allocation of
the channels to the client ports.
Table 158: 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy Client Port Description
910
Client Ports*
C-Band Channel No.
Module Variants
C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D04
4CSM+#D01-#D04
C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D03
C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D02
C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
#D01
C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D8
C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D7
C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D6
C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
#D5
C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D12
C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D11
C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D10
C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
#D09
C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D16
C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D15
C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D14
C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
#D13
4CSM+#D05-#D08
4CSM+#D09-#D12
4CSM+#D13-#D16
4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy
Table 158: 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy Client Port Description
Client Ports*
C-Band Channel No.
Module Variants
C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D20
4CSM+#D17-#D20
C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D19
C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D18
C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
#D17
C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D24
C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D23
C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D22
C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
#D21
C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D28
C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D27
C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D26
C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
#D25
C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D32
C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D31
C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D30
C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
#D29
4CSM+#D21-#D24
4CSM+#D25-#D28
4CSM+#D29-#D32
Features
Support of eight channel groups with a total of 32 channels (wavelengths) in the C

band according to ITU-T G.694.1 (100 GHz spacing)
Signal Path
The figure below shows the operation of the 4CSM+#D01-#D04 as an example and
module variants.
911
4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy
Figure 574: 4CSM+#D01-#D04 Operation Scheme
Receive Direction
The 4CSM+#D01-#D04 receives a composite C-band channel signal through the input ND of the network port from the far end of the link. In the direction of signal flow, the drop
filter drops a specific channel group (e.g. #D01-#D04) out of the channel spectrum and
reflects all remaining channels onto the output U-M of the upgrade port. The DEMUX
filter in the splitter section de-multiplexes the isolated channel group into its component
channels and couples them into single fibers to have the four channels separate on the
C1-D to C4-D outputs of the client ports. These channels are then transmitted to the
corresponding DWDM channel modules.
Transmit Direction
The 4CSM+#D01-#D04 receives four individual channels, e.g. #D01-#D04, from the
channel group signal and couples it into a single fiber. The add filter adds this channel
group signal in the direction of signal flow to the channel spectrum received through the
input U-D of the upgrade port. The composite channel signal is coupled into the output
Slot Positions
The 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy module is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and
slots:
912
SH1HU, 1 and 2
1CSM+#Dxx-E/W
Specifications
1CSM+#Dxx-E/W
Figure 575: 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W Front View
913
1CSM+#Dxx-E/W
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 159: 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
NW
network port west
NE
network port east
UW
upgrade port west
UE
upgrade port east
CW
client port west
CE
client port east
Variants
The 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W (east/west single channel DWDM splitter module with upgrade
port) is available in 64 variants, one for each of the 64 DWDM channels the module
supports. A few variants are listed here:
Table 160: 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W Module Variants
Variants
Description
1CSM+#D01-E/W
east/west single channel DWDM splitter module with

upgrade port adding/dropping channel #D01, C band
1CSM+#D02-E/W

914
1CSM+#D31-E/W

1CSM+#D32-E/W

1CSM+#D33-E/W

upgrade port adding/dropping channel #D33, L band
1CSM+#Dxx-E/W
Table 160: 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W Module Variants
Variants
Description
1CSM+#D34-E/W

1CSM+#D63-E/W

1CSM+#D64-E/W

The part #Dxx of the module name refers to a specific channel of the C or L band each
module variant adds and drops. All module variants feature the same design and use the
same faceplate. They only differ in the optical filters adding/dropping a single channel
(see above). The front view of the 1CSM+#D01-E/W is illustrated in Figure 575 as an
example.
Description
The 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W is an optical east/west single channel DWDM splitter and
combiner module. It is designed for bi-directional data transfer in dual-fiber linear add/drop
and ring configurations. On a per-wavelength basis it allows access to a specific channel
from an east-side and west-side network fiber pair while passing the remaining channel
spectrum. Consequently, the module provides two network ports, two client ports and
two upgrade ports.
The 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W contains two identical full-duplex add/drop optical filter sets for
east-west applications on one module. The filters add/drop a specific channel to/out of
the DWDM channel spectrum while reflecting all other channels to the upgrade ports. The
module feeds the isolated (single) channel as well as the passed through DWDM channel
spectrum into separate two-fiber paths, going in opposite directions into the network
(east/west). The isolated channel is interfaced to the corresponding channel modules on
the client side. Using the upgrade ports the 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W module can be cascaded
to add and drop specific DWDM channels at a certain site. However, the upgrade port
connectors UW-D and UE-M as well as UW-M and UE-D of the last module of the
cascade connection must be interconnected with the appropriate single-mode fiber-optic
jumpers to route the signal. Failure to do so will result in interruption of signal flow in both
directions.
Features
Support of 32 channels (wavelengths) in the C band and 32 channels (wavelengths)

in the L band according to ITU-T G.694.1 (100 GHz spacing)
Adding/dropping a specific (single) DWDM channel
915
1CSM+#Dxx-E/W
Supports full management
Signal path
Figure 576 shows the operation of the 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W as an example and illustrates
variants.
Figure 576: 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W Operation Scheme

The 1CSM+#D01-E/W receives a composite C/L-band channel signal through the
network port inputs NW-D and NE-D from the west and the east direction. In the
direction of signal flow, the drop filters drop a specific channel, e.g. #D01, from either
input fibers into the outputs CW-D and CE-D of the client ports west and east for
transmission to the corresponding channel modules. Simultaneously the remaining
channel spectrum is reflected onto the outputs UW-D and UE-D of the upgrade ports
west and east.

The 1CSM+#D01-E/W receives a specific channel, e.g. #D01, from the corresponding
channel modules through the inputs CW-M and CE-M of the client ports west and east.
The add filters again add this channel in the direction of signal flow into the channel
spectrum received through the inputs UW-M and UE-M of the upgrade ports west and
east. The composite C/L-band channel signals are coupled into either output fibers and
transmitted through the network port outputs NW-M westwards and NE-M eastwards.
Slot Positions
The 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and slots:
916
1CSM+#Dxx-E/W
Specifications
1CSM+#Dxx-E/W
Figure 577: Example of a 1CSM+#19xxx-E/W Front View
917
1CSM+#Dxx-E/W
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 1CSM+#19xxx-E/W faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 161: 1CSM+#19xxx-E/W Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
NW
network port west
NE
network port east
UW
upgrade port west
UE
upgrade port east
CW
client port west
CE
client port east
Variants
The 1CSM+#19xxx-E/W (east/west single channel DWDM splitter and combiner module
with upgrade port) is available in 9 variants, one for each of the 9 DWDM C-band
channels the module supports. The variants are listed here:
Table 162: 1CSM+#19xxx-E/W Module Variants
918
Variants
Description
1CSM+#19560-E/W
east/west single channel DWDM splitter and combiner

module with upgrade port adding/dropping the channel
#19560
1CSM+#19510-E/W

#19510
1CSM+#19460-E/W

#19460
1CSM+#19410-E/W

#19410
1CSM+#19400-E/W

#19400
1CSM+#Dxx-E/W
Table 162: 1CSM+#19xxx-E/W Module Variants
Variants
Description
1CSM+#19390-E/W

#19390
1CSM+#19340-E/W

#19340
1CSM+#19290-E/W

#19290
1CSM+#19240-E/W

#19240
The part #19xxx of the module name refers to a specific DWDM channel of the C-band
channels each module variant adds and drops. All module variants feature the same
design and use the same faceplate. They only differ in the optical filters adding/dropping a
single channel (see above). The front view of the 1CSM+#19240-E/W is illustrated in
Figure 577 as an example.
Description
The 1CSM+#19xxx-E/W supports the channels #19240, #19290, #19340, #19390,
#19400, #19410, #1946, #192510, #19560. These channels are related to the new
DWDM C-band channel namings introduced with Release 9.1. The supported channels
of 1CSM+#19xxx-E/W are additional channels to the supported channels of the
1CSM+#Dxx-E/W.
The 1CSM+#19xxx-E/W is an optical east/west single channel DWDM splitter and
two upgrade ports.
The 1CSM+#19xxx-E/W contains two identical full-duplex add/drop optical filter sets for
east-west applications on one module. The filters add/drop a specific C-band channel
to/out of the DWDM channel spectrum while reflecting all other C-band channels to the
upgrade ports. The module feeds the isolated (single) channel as well as the passed
through DWDM channel spectrum into separate two-fiber paths, going in opposite
directions into the network (east/west). The isolated channel is interfaced to the
corresponding channel modules on the client side. Using the upgrade ports the
1CSM+#19xxx-E/W module can be cascaded to add and drop specific DWDM C-band
channels at a certain site. However, the upgrade port connectors UW-D and UE-M as
well as UW-M and UE-D of the last module of the cascade connection must be
interconnected with the appropriate single-mode fiber-optic jumpers to route the signal.
Failure to do so will result in interruption of signal flow in both directions.
919
1CSM+#Dxx-E/W
Features

GHz spacing)
Adding/dropping a specific (single) DWDM C-band channel
Signal path
Figure 578 shows the operation of the 1CSM+#19xxx-E/W as an example and illustrates
variants.
Figure 578: 1CSM+#19xxx-E/W Operation Scheme

The 1CSM+#19240-E/W receives a composite C-band channel signal through the
direction of signal flow, the drop filters drop a specific channel (#19240) from either input
fibers into the outputs CW-D and CE-D of the client ports west and east for transmission
to the corresponding channel modules. Simultaneously the remaining channel spectrum
is reflected onto the outputs UW-D and UE-D of the upgrade ports west and east.
Transmit Direction (Adding a single Channel)

The 1CSM+#19240-E/W receives a specific channel (#19240), from the corresponding
channel modules through the inputs CW-M and CE-M of the client ports west and east.
The add filters again add this channel in the direction of signal flow into the channel
spectrum received through the inputs UW-M and UE-M of the upgrade ports west and
east. The composite C-band channel signals are coupled into either output fibers and
920
1CSM+#19xxx
Slot Positions
The 1CSM+#19xxx-E/W is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and slots:
Specifications
1CSM+#19xxx
Figure 579: Example of a 1CSM+#19xxx Front View
921
1CSM+#19xxx
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 1CSM+#19xxx faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 163: 1CSM+#Cxxxx Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Tx
transmit
Rx
receive
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
network port
upgrade port
client port
Rx
receive
Tx
transmit
Variants
The 1CSM+#19xxx (single channel DWDM splitter and combiner module with upgrade
port) is available in 40 variants, one for each of the 40 DWDM C-band channels the
module supports. A few variants are listed here:
Table 164: 1CSM+#19xxx Module Variants
Variants
Description
1CSM+#19590
single channel DWDM splitter and combiner module with

upgrade port adding/dropping the channel #19590
1CSM+#19580

1CSM+#19570

1CSM+#19560

922
1CSM+#19xxx
Table 164: 1CSM+#19xxx Module Variants
Variants
Description
1CSM+#19240

1CSM+#19230

1CSM+#19220

1CSM+#19210

1CSM+#19200

The part #19xxx of the module name refers to a specific DWDM channel of the 40 C-band
channels each module variant adds and drops. All module variants feature the same
design and use the same faceplate. They only differ in the optical filters adding/dropping a
single channel (see above). The front view of the 1CSM+#19200 is illustrated in Figure
579 as an example.
Description
The 1CSM+#19xxx is an optical single channel DWDM splitter and combiner module. It
is designed for bi-directional data transfer in dual-fiber linear add/drop and ring
configurations. On a per-wavelength basis, it allows access to a specific channel from a
network fiber while passing the remaining channel spectrum. For this purpose, the
module provides one network port, one client port and one upgrade port.
The 1CSM+#19xxx contains a combination of specific add/drop optical filters. These
filters add/drop a specific C-band channel to/out of the DWDM channel spectrum while
reflecting all other C-band channels onto the upgrade port.
The isolated channel is interfaced to the corresponding channel module on the client side.
Using the upgrade port the 1CSM+#Cxxxx module can be cascaded to add and drop
specific DWDM C-band channels at a certain site.
Features
Support of 40 DWDM C-band channels (wavelengths) according to ITU-T G.694.1

(100 GHz spacing)
Adding/dropping a specific (single) DWDM C-band channel
923
1CSM+#19xxx
Signal Path
Figure 580 shows the operation of the 1CSM+#19xxx as an example and illustrates the
signal path, which is described below. The same principle applies to the other module
variants.
Figure 580: 1CSM+#19200 Operation Scheme

The 1CSM+#19200 receives a composite DWDM C-band channel signal through the
input N-D of the network port from the far end of the link.
In the direction of signal flow, the drop filter separates a specific channel (#19200) from
the input fiber into the output C-D of the client port for transmission to the corresponding
channel module. Simultaneously the remaining channel spectrum is reflected onto the
output U-D of the upgrade port.
Transmit direction (Adding a Single Channel)

The 1CSM+#19200 receives a specific channel (#19200) from the corresponding channel
module through the input C-M of the client port. The add filter reinserts this channel in the
direction of data flow into the channel spectrum received through the input U-M of the
upgrade port. The composite DWDM channel signal is coupled into the output fiber and
transmitted through output N-M of the network port to the far end of the link.
Slot Positions
The 1CSM+#19xxx is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and slots:
924
2CLSM-#D01-#D64-SFx
Specifications
2CLSM-#D01-#D64-SFx
Figure 581: Example of a 2CLSM-#D01-#D64-SFx Front View
925
2CLSM-#D01-#D64-SFx
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 2CLSM-#D01-#D64-SFx faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 165: 2CLSM-#D01-#D64-SFx Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
M/D
multiplexing/de-multiplexing
nc
not connected (unused ports)
network port
C2
client port 2
C1
client port 1

module
Variants
The 2CLSM-#D01-#D64-SFx module (DWDM 2-port C/L band splitter module - singlefiber working) is available in two variants:
2CLSM-#D01-#D64-SFA (DWDM 2-port C/L band splitter module - single-fiber

working, location A)
2CLSM-#D01-#D64-SFB (DWDM 2-port C/L band splitter module - single-fiber

working, location B)
Both module variants feature the same design and use the same face-plate. The front
view of a 2CLSM-#D01-#D64-SFA is illustrated in Figure 581 as an example.
Description
The 2CLSM-#D01-#D64-SFx is an optical C/L-band splitter and combiner module for
DWDM in single-fiber working point-to-point configurations. It is specifically designed for
the bi-directional transmission of 32 channels over one strand of fiber using 64
wavelengths. These wavelengths are split between 32 in the transmit direction and 32 in
the receive direction. The x at the end of the module name stands for the location A or B.
The module incorporates only one MUX/DEMUX band filter that handles the combining
and the splitting of up to 16 C-band channels and up to 16 L-band channels into/from the
full duplex signal carried by a single network fiber. The 2CLSM-#D01-#D64-SFA and
2CLSM-#D01-#D64-SFB must be used as a pair. One module is at the near end of the
link (e.g. location A) and the other module is at the far end of the link (e.g. location B).
The 2CLSM-#D01-#D64-SFA combines the C-band channels #D01-#D16 and L-band
channels #D33-#D48 and transmits them over one strand of fiber to the far end of the link.
Simultaneously, it receives the combined C/L-band channel spectrum from the far end of
the link, splits it into the C-band channels #D17-#D32 and the L-band channels #D49#D64 and forwards each band to the corresponding 16-port channel splitter module.
926
2CLSM-#D01-#D64-SFx
The 2CLSM-#D01-#D64-SFB receives the combined C/L-band channel spectrum from
the far end of the link, splits it into the C-band channels #D01-#D16 and L-band channels
#D33-#D48 and forwards each band to the corresponding 16-port channel splitter module.
At the same time, it combines the C-band channels #D17-#D32 and L-band channels
#D49-#D64 and transmits them over one strand of fiber to the far end of the link.
The module provides two optical ports on the client side and one port for common signal
input and output on the network side. On the client side, the 2CLSM-#D01-#D64-SFx
operates in conjunction with the appropriate 16-port channel splitter modules - single-fiber
working only.
Features
Support of single-fiber working based on 16 channels (32 wavelengths) in the C band

and 16 channels (32 wavelengths) in the Lband according to ITU-T G.694.1 (100
GHz spacing)
Signal Path
Figure 582 shows the operation of the 2CLSM-#D01-#D64-SFA as an example and
illustrates the signal path, which is described below. The 2CLSM-#D01-#D64-SFB at the
other end of the link functions the same way.
Figure 582: 2CLSM-#D01-#D64-SFA Operation Scheme
927
2CLSM-#D01-#D64-SFx
Receive Direction
The 2CLSM-#D01-#D64-SFA receives a composite C/L-band signal through the common
input/output N-M/D of the network port from the far end of the link. The MUX/DEMUX
band filter splits the incoming signal into the C-band channels (#D17-#D32) as well as the
L-band channels (#D49-#D64) and couples them into single fibers to have the channel
groups separate on the C1-M/D and C2-M/D outputs of the client ports. The C and Lband channels are then transmitted to the corresponding 16-port channel splitter modules
for further de-multiplexing or the appropriate EDFA modules for optical amplification.
Transmit Direction
The 2CLSM-#D01-#D64-SFA receives the C-band channels (#D01-#D16) and L-band
channels (#D33-#D48) from the corresponding 16-port channel splitter modules or EDFA
modules through the inputs C1-M/D and C2-M/D of the client ports. The MUX/DEMUX
band filter combines the C and L-band channels into a composite signal and couples it
into a single fiber. This signal is directed to the common input/output N-M/D of the
network port for transmission over one strand of fiber to the far end of the link.
Slot Positions
The 2CLSM-#D01-#D64-SFx is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and
slots:
Specifications
928
16CSM-#D01-#D32-SFx
16CSM-#D01-#D32-SFx
Figure 583: Example of a 16CSM-#D01-#D32-SFA Front View
929
16CSM-#D01-#D32-SFx
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 16CSM-#D01-#D32-SFx faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 166: 16CSM-#D01-#D32-SFx Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
receive
transmit
nc
unused port
network port
Booster
port for connecting a booster
Preamp
port for connecting a preamplifier
C1 to
C16
client ports 1 to 16
power supply status of

the module
Variants
The 16CSM-#D01-#D32-SFx module (16-port channel splitter module - single-fiber
working - C band) is available in two variants:
16CSM-#D01-#D32-SFA (16-port channel splitter module - single-fiber working - C

band, location A)
16CSM-#D01-#D32-SFB (16-port channel splitter module - single-fiber working - C

band, location B)
Both module variants feature the same design and use the same faceplate. They differ in
the multiplexing and de-multiplexing of specific wavelength ranges in the transmit and the
receive direction. As an example, the front view of the 16CSM-#D01-#D32-SFA is
illustrated in Figure 581.
Description
The 16CSM-#D01-#D32-SFx is an optical 16-port channel splitter and combiner module
for DWDM in single-fiber working point-to-point configurations. It is specifically designed
for the bi-directional transmission of 16 C-band channels over one strand of fiber using 32
the receive direction. The high band isolation ensures the operability of the single-fiber
system.
930
16CSM-#D01-#D32-SFx
The 16CSM-#D01-#D32-SFx incorporates a combination of specific channel
MUX/DEMUX filters that perform the multiplexing/de-multiplexing of the 16 channels
onto/from a single fiber in full duplex. Because the traffic is transmitted asymmetrically,
the MUX/DEMUX filters of the near-end module and the far-end module show differences
with respect to the wavelength ranges. This asymmetrical filter architecture is reflected in
the module naming by the use of the characters A and B (x at the end of the module name
stands for the location A or B). Therefore, the 16CSM-#D01-#D32-SFA and 16CSM#D01-#D32-SFB can only be used as a pair. One module is at the near end of the link
(e.g. location A) and the other module is at the far end of the link (e.g. location B).
The 16CSM-#D01-#D32-SFA combines the channels #D01-#D16 and transmits them
over a single fiber to the far end of the link. At the same time, it receives the combined
channels #D17-#D32 from the far end of the link, splits them into individual channels and
forwards each channel to a specific channel module.
The 16CSM-#D01-#D32-SFB receives the combined channels #D01-#D16 from the far
end of the link, splits them into individual channels and forwards each channel to a
specific channel module. At the same time, it combines the channels #D17-#D32 and
transmits them over a single fiber to the far end of the link.
The 16CSM-#D01-#D32-SFx module provides 16 optical ports on the client side, each
mapped to a different DWDM wavelength, and one port for common signal input and
output on the network side. In addition, there are two ports available which allow
connecting optical amplifiers in the transmit direction and the receive direction.
Each of the 16 individual DWDM C-band channels is assigned to a specific client port as
shown here:
931
16CSM-#D01-#D32-SFx
Table 167: 16CSM-#D01-#D32-SFx Client Port Description
932
Module Variants
Channel
Name
Client ports
Channel
Name
Client ports
16CSM-#D01-#D32-SFA
#D01
C1 (C1-M)
#D17
C1 (C1-D)
#D02
C2 (C2-M)
#D18
C2 (C2-D)
#D03
C3 (C3-M)
#D19
C3 (C3-D)
#D04
C4 (C4-M)
#D20
C4 (C4-D)
#D05
C5 (C5-M)
#D21
C5 (C5-D)
#D06
C6 (C6-M)
#D22
C6 (C6-D)
#D07
C7 (C7-M)
#D23
C7 (C7-D)
#D08
C8 (C8-M)
#D24
C8 (C8-D)
#D09
C9 (C9-M)
#D25
C9 (C9-D)
#D10
C10 (C10M)
#D26
C10 (C10-D)
#D11
C11 (C11M)
#D27
C11 (C11-D)
#D12
C12 (C12M)
#D28
C12 (C12-D)
#D13
C13 (C13M)
#D29
C13 (C13-D)
#D14
C14 (C14M)
#D30
C14 (C14-D)
#D15
C15 (C15M)
#D31
C15 (C15-D)
#D16
C16 (C16M)
#D32
C16 (C16-D)
16CSM-#D01-#D32-SFx
Module Variants
Channel
Name
Client ports
Channel
Name
Client ports
16CSM-#D01-#D32-SFB
#D17
C1 (C1-M)
#D01
C1 (C1-D)
#D18
C2 (C2-M)
#D02
C2 (C2-D)
#D19
C3 (C3-M)
#D03
C3 (C3-D)
#D20
C4 (C4-M)
#D04
C4 (C4-D)
#D21
C5 (C5-M)
#D05
C5 (C5-D)
#D22
C6 (C6-M)
#D06
C6 (C6-D)
#D23
C7 (C7-M)
#D07
C7 (C7-D)
#D24
C8 (C8-M)
#D08
C8 (C8-D)
#D25
C9 (C9-M)
#D09
C9 (C9-D)
#D26
C10 (C10M)
#D10
C10 (C10-D)
#D27
C11 (C11M)
#D11
C11 (C11-D)
#D28
C12 (C12M)
#D12
C12 (C12-D)
#D29
C13 (C13M)
#D13
C13 (C13-D)
#D30
C14 (C14M)
#D14
C14 (C14-D)
#D31
C15 (C15M)
#D15
C15 (C15-D)
#D32
C16 (C16M)
#D16
C16 (C16-D)
The 16CSM-#D01-#D32-SFx allows the optional connection of a preamplifier and booster

using the appropriate upgrade ports. If this option is not used, each upgrade port must be
terminated with an appropriate single-mode fiber-optic jumper to route the signal. For this
purpose, one end of the jumper is attached to the receive connector (R) and the other end
to the transmit connector (T). Failure to do so will result in interruption of signal flow in
both directions.
Features
Support of single-fiber working on a 16-channel granularity based on use of 32

wavelengths in the C band according to ITU-T G.694.1 (100 GHz spacing)
Two ports for optional connecting a preamplifier and booster
933
16CSM-#D01-#D32-SFx
Signal Path
Figure 584 shows the operation of the 16CSM-#D01-#D32-SFA as an example and
illustrates the signal path, which is described below. The 16CSM-#D01-#D32-SFB at the
other end of the link functions the same way.
Figure 584: 16CSM-#D01-#D32-SFA Operation Scheme
Receive Direction
The 16CSM-#D01-#D32-SFA receives the composite C-band signal through the common
input/output of the network port N from the far end of the link. The band filter on the
network side filters out the channel spectrum in the range from #D17 to #D32 and directs
it to the splitter section of the module. This signal is split into 16 individual channels that
are then passed through the outputs C1-D to C16-D onto the corresponding DWDM
channel modules.
934
16CSM-#D01-#D32-SFx
Transmit Direction
The 16CSM-#D01-#D32-SFA receives up to 16 individual C-band channels (#D01-#D16)
from the DWDM channel modules through the inputs C1-M to C16-M. In the combiner
section, all channels are combined into a composite output signal and directed to the
band filter on the network side. The signal is filtered out, coupled into a single fiber and
passed on to the common input/output of the network port N for transmission over one
strand of fiber to the far end of the link.
Slot Positions
The 16CSM-#D01-#D32-SFx is 16 HP wide and therefore occupies four regular slots. It
Specifications
935
16CSM-#D33-#D64-SFx
16CSM-#D33-#D64-SFx
Figure 585: Example of a 16CSM-#D33-#D64-SFA Front View
936
16CSM-#D33-#D64-SFx
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 16CSM-#D33-#D64-SFx faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 168: 16CSM-#D33-#D64-SFA Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
receive
transmit
nc
unused port
network port
Booster
port for connecting a booster
Preamp
port for connecting a preamplifier
C1 to C16
client ports 1 to 16

the module
Variants
The 16CSM-#D33-#D64-SFx module (16-port channel splitter module - single-fiber
working - L band) is available in two variants:
16CSM-#D33-#D64-SFA (16-port channel splitter module - single-fiber working - L

band, location A)
16CSM-#D33-#D64-SFB (16-port channel splitter module - single-fiber working - L

band, location B)
receive direction. As an example, the front view of the 16CSM-#D33-#D64-SFA is
illustrated in Figure 581.
Description
The 16CSM-#D33-#D64-SFx is an optical 16-port channel splitter and combiner module
for DWDM in single-fiber working point-to-point configurations. It is specifically designed
for the bi-directional transmission of 16 L-band channels over one strand of fiber using 32
the receive direction. The high band isolation ensures the operability of the single-fiber
system.
937
16CSM-#D33-#D64-SFx
The 16CSM-#D33-#D64-SFx incorporates a combination of specific channel
the module naming by the use of the characters A and B (x at the end of the module name
stands for the location A or B). Therefore, the 16CSM-#D33-#D64-SFA and 16CSM#D33-#D64-SFB can only be used as a pair. One module is at the near end of the link
(e.g. location A) and the other module is at the far end of the link (e.g. location B).
The 16CSM-#D33-#D64-SFA combines the channels #D33-#D48 and transmits them
over a single fiber to the far end of the link. At the same time, it receives the combined
channels #D49-#D64 from the far end of the link, splits them into individual channels and
forwards each channel to a specific channel module.
The 16CSM-#D33-#D64-SFB receives the combined channels #D33-#D48 from the far
end of the link, splits them into individual channels and forwards each channel to a
specific channel module. At the same time, it combines the channels #D49-#D64 and
transmits them over a single fiber to the far end of the link.
The 16CSM-#D33-#D64-SFx module provides 16 optical ports on the client side, each
mapped to a different DWDM wavelength, and one port for common signal input and
output on the network side. In addition, there are two ports available which allow
connecting optical amplifiers in the transmit direction and the receive direction.
Each of the 16 individual DWDM L-band channels is assigned to a specific client port as
shown here:
938
16CSM-#D33-#D64-SFx
Module Variants
Channel
Name
Client ports
Channel
Name
Client ports
16CSM-#D33-#D64-SFA
#D33
C1 (C1-M)
#D49
C1 (C1-D)
#D34
C2 (C2-M)
#D50
C2 (C2-D)
#D35
C3 (C3-M)
#D51
C3 (C3-D)
#D36
C4 (C4-M)
#D52
C4 (C4-D)
#D37
C5 (C5-M)
#D53
C5 (C5-D)
#D38
C6 (C6-M)
#D54
C6 (C6-D)
#D39
C7 (C7-M)
#D55
C7 (C7-D)
#D40
C8 (C8-M)
#D56
C8 (C8-D)
#D41
C9 (C9-M)
#D57
C9 (C9-D)
#D42
C10 (C10-M)
#D58
C10 (C10-D)
#D43
C11 (C11-M)
#D59
C11 (C11-D)
#D44
C12 (C12-M)
#D60
C12 (C12-D)
#D45
C13 (C13-M)
#D61
C13 (C13-D)
#D46
C14 (C14-M)
#D62
C14 (C14-D)
#D47
C15 (C15-M)
#D63
C15 (C15-D)
#D48
C16 (C16-M)
#D64
C16 (C16-D)
939
16CSM-#D33-#D64-SFx
Module Variants
Channel
Name
Client ports
Channel
Name
Client ports
16CSM-#D33-#D64-SFB
#D49
C1 (C1-M)
#D33
C1 (C1-D)
#D50
C2 (C2-M)
#D34
C2 (C2-D)
#D51
C3 (C3-M)
#D35
C3 (C3-D)
#D52
C4 (C4-M)
#D36
C4 (C4-D)
#D53
C5 (C5-M)
#D37
C5 (C5-D)
#D54
C6 (C6-M)
#D38
C6 (C6-D)
#D55
C7 (C7-M)
#D39
C7 (C7-D)
#D56
C8 (C8-M)
#D40
C8 (C8-D)
#D57
C9 (C9-M)
#D41
C9 (C9-D)
#D58
C10 (C10-M)
#D42
C10 (C10-D)
#D59
C11 (C11-M)
#D43
C11 (C11-D)
#D60
C12 (C12-M)
#D44
C12 (C12-D)
#D61
C13 (C13-M)
#D45
C13 (C13-D)
#D62
C14 (C14-M)
#D46
C14 (C14-D)
#D63
C15 (C15-M)
#D47
C15 (C15-D)
#D64
C16 (C16-M)
#D48
C16 (C16-D)
The 16CSM-#D33-#D64-SFx allows the optional connection of a preamplifier and booster

using the appropriate upgrade ports. If this option is not used, each upgrade port must be
terminated with an appropriate single-mode fiber-optic jumper to route the signal. For this
purpose, one end of the jumper is attached to the receive connector (R) and the other end
to the transmit connector (T). Failure to do so will result in interruption of signal flow in
both directions.
Features
940
Support of single-fiber working on a 16-channel granularity based on use of 32

wavelengths in the L band according to ITU-T G.694.1 (100 GHz spacing)
Two ports for optional connecting a preamplifier and booster
16CSM-#D33-#D64-SFx
Signal Path
Figure 586 shows the operation of the 16CSM-#D33-#D64-SFA as an example and
illustrates the signal path, which is described below. The 16CSM-#D33-#D64-SFB on the
other side of the link functions the same way.
Figure 586: 16CSM-#D33-#D64-SFA Operation Scheme
Receive Direction
The 16CSM-#D33-#D64-SFA receives the composite L-band signal through the common
input/output of the network port N from the far end of the link. The band filter on the
network side filters out the channel spectrum in the range from #D49 to #D64 and directs
it to the splitter section of the module. This signal is split into 16 individual channels that
are then passed through the outputs C1-D to C16-D onto the corresponding DWDM
channel modules.
Transmit Direction
The 16CSM-#D33-#D64-SFA receives up to 16 individual L-band channels (#D33-#D48)
from the DWDM channel modules through the inputs C1-M to C16-M. In the combiner
941
16CSM-#D33-#D64-SFx
Slot Positions
The 16CSM-#D33-#D64-SFx is 16 HP wide and therefore occupies four regular slots. It
Specifications
942
OSFM+#1490-SFA
OSFM+#1490-SFA
Figure 587: OSFM+#1490-SFA Front View
943
OSFM+#1490-SFA
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the OSFM+#1490-SFA faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 170: OSFM+#1490-SFA Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
M/D
nc
unused port
network port
upgrade port
client port

module
Description
The OSFM+#1490-SFA is an optical supervisory channel filter module that provides the
capability of adding and dropping an optical supervisory channel (OSC) at two pre-defined
wavelengths in single-fiber working DWDM point-to-point configurations.
For this purpose the module contains a set of optical filters in a tiered arrangement. This
allows the module to add the OSC #1490 to and drop the OSC #1510 out of the full duplex
signal carried by a single network fiber. The C- and L-band spectra are passed through
the module.
The OSFM+#1490-SFA can only be used in conjunction with the OSFM+#1510-SFB
module installed on the other side of the communication link. The characters A and B at
the end of the module names indicate the location A or B. Accordingly, the OSFM+#1490SFA is deployed in location A (e.g. at the near end of the link), and the OSFM+#1510SFB is deployed in location B (e.g. at the far end of the link).
The OSFM+#1490-SFA module provides three optical ports. The network port and the
upgrade port on the network side of the module have one common connector for signal
input and output. The client port on the client side has two connectors. The upgrade port
is connected to the 2CLSM-#D01-#D64-SFA to access individual DWDM channels. The
client port is directly connected to an appropriate OSCM. The OSFM+#1490-SFA is only
required in configurations where an OSC is to be used.
Features
944
Support of single-fiber working based on 16 channels (32 wavelengths in the C band

GHz spacing)
Transparent for all 64 DWDM wavelengths
OSC at the wavelengths of 1510 nm and 1490 nm
OSFM+#1490-SFA
Signal Path
Figure 588 shows the operation of the OSFM+#1490-SFA and illustrates the signal path,

The OSFM+#1490-SFA receives the C/L-band spectrum through the common
input/output U-M/D of the upgrade port and passes it through the optical filters. The OSC
#1490 received through the input C-M of the client port is added by the appropriate filter in
the direction of signal flow to the C/L-band spectrum. The resulting composite output
signal is then coupled into a single fiber an directed to the common input/output N-M/D of
the network port for transmission over one strand of fiber to the far end of the link.

The OSFM+#1490-SFA receives a composite C/L-band signal through the common
input/output N-M/D of the network port from the far end of the link. This signal consisting
of a multiplicity of DWDM channels and the OSC #1510 is passed through the optical
filters. The OSC #1510 is dropped out of the C/L-band spectrum by the appropriate filter
in direction of signal flow and directed to the output C-D of the client port. The same filter
reflects the remaining C/L-band spectrum onto the common input/output N-M/D of the
upgrade port.
Figure 588: OSFM+#1490-SFA Operation Scheme
Slot Positions
The OSFM+#1490-SFA is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and slots:
945
OSFM+#1510-SFB
Specifications
OSFM+#1510-SFB
Figure 589: OSFM+#1510-SFB Front View
946
OSFM+#1510-SFB
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the OSFM+#1510-SFB faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 171: OSFM+#1510-SFB Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
M/D
nc
unused port
network port
upgrade port
client port

module
Description
The OSFM+#1510-SFB is an optical supervisory channel filter module that provides the
capability of adding and dropping an optical supervisory channel (OSC) at two pre-defined
wavelengths in single-fiber working DWDM point-to-point configurations.
For this purpose the module contains a set of optical filters in a tiered arrangement. This
allows the module to add the OSC #1510 to and drop the OSC #1490 out of the full duplex
signal carried by a single network fiber. The C and L-band spectra are passed through the
module.
The OSFM+#1510-SFB can only be used in conjunction with the OSFM+#1490-SFA
module installed on the other side of the communication link. The characters A and B at
the end of the module names indicate the location A or B. Accordingly, the OSFM+#1490SFA is deployed in location A (e.g. at the near end of the link), and the OSFM+#1510SFB is deployed in location B (e.g. at the far end of the link).
The OSFM+#1510-SFB module provides three optical ports. The network port and the
upgrade port on the network side of the module have one common connector for signal
input and output. The client port on the client side has two connectors. The upgrade port
is connected to the 2CLSM-#D01-#D64-SFB to access individual DWDM channels. The
client port is directly connected to an appropriate OSCM. The OSFM+#1510-SFB is only
required in configurations where an OSC is to be used.
Features
Support of single-fiber working based on 16 channels (32 wavelengths in the C band

GHz spacing)
Transparent for all 64 DWDM wavelengths
OSC at the wavelengths of 1510 nm and 1490 nm
947
OSFM+#1510-SFB
Signal Path
Figure 590 shows the operation of the OSFM+#1510-SFB and illustrates the signal path,

The OSFM+#1510-SFB receives the C/L-band spectrum through the common
input/output U-M/D of the upgrade port and passes it through the optical filters. The OSC
#1510 received through the input C-M of the client port is added by the appropriate filter in
the direction of signal flow to the C/L-band spectrum. The resulting composite output
signal is then coupled into a single fiber and directed to the common input/output N-M/D
of the network port for transmission over one strand of fiber to the far end of the link.

The OSFM+#1510-SFB receives a composite C/L-band signal through the common
input/output N-M/D of the network port from the far end of the link. This signal consisting
of a multiplicity of DWDM channels and the OSC #1490 is passed through the optical
filters. The OSC #1490 is dropped out of the C/L-band spectrum by the appropriate filter
in direction of signal flow and directed to the output C-D of the client port. The same filter
reflects the remaining C/L-band spectrum onto the common input/output N-M/D of the
upgrade port.
Figure 590: OSFM+#1510-SFB Operation Scheme
Slot Positions
The OSFM+#1510-SFB is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and slots:
948
2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610
Specifications
2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610
Figure 591: 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 Front View
Faceplate Markings
Table 172 lists all abbreviations on the 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 faceplate and their
meanings.
949
2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610
Table 172: 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
network port
C2
client port 2
C1
client port 1

module
Description
The 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 is an optical 2-port CWDM subband splitter module. It is
designed for bidirectional data transfer in dual-fiber linear add/drop and ring
configurations.
The module serves as combiner and splitter of two groups of multiplexed CWDM
channels. One group comprises the channels #C1470, #C1490, #C1590 and #C1610
with the corresponding center wavelengths 1471 nm, 1491 nm, 1591 nm and 1611 nm.
The other group includes the channels #C1510, #C1530, #C1550 and #C1570 with the
center wavelengths 1511nm, 1531 nm, 1551 nm and 1571 nm.
The 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 incorporates a combination of specific MUX and DEMUX
band filters. These filters multiplex/demultiplex the wavelength bands of the two groups
of channels into/from one full duplex signal carried by the network fiber pair.
The module provides two client ports and one network port. On the client side, the
2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 works in conjunction with the appropriate CWDM channel
splitter modules.
Features
Support of 8 CWDM channels (wavelengths) according to ITU-T G.694.2 (20 mm

channel spacing) in two groups of 4 channels each
Signal Path
Figure 592 shows the operation of the 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 and illustrates the signal
950
2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610
Figure 592: 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 Operation Scheme
Receive Direction
The 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 receives a composite CWDM channel signal (the entire
channel spectrum) through the input N-D of the network port from the far end of the link.
The DEMUX band filter de-multiplexes the incoming signal into two groups of channels.
The groups are coupled into the corresponding output fibers to have them separate at the
C1-D and C2-D outputs of the client ports. Both channel groups are then transmitted to
the appropriate channel splitter modules for further de-multiplexing.
Transmit Direction
The 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 receives two groups of channels from the corresponding
channel splitter modules through the inputs C1-M and C2-M of the client ports. The MUX
band filter multiplexes the groups of channels into a composite CWDM channel signal
and couples it into the output fiber. This signal is directed to the output N-M of the
network port and transmitted to the far end of the link.
Slot Positions
The 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and
slots:
SH1HU, slots 1, 2
Specifications
951
3BSM-#G1310-#C1610
3BSM-#G1310-#C1610
Figure 593: 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610 Front View
952
3BSM-#G1310-#C1610
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610 faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 173: 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
network port
C3
client port 3
C2
client port 2
C1
client port 1

module
Description
The 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610 is an optical CWDM band splitter module with gray interface
at 1310 nm . It is designed for bi-directional data transfer in dual-fiber point-to-point, linear
add/drop and ring configurations.
The module serves as combiner and splitter of two groups of multiplexed CWDM
channels. One group comprises the channels #C1470, #C1490, #C1590 and #C1610
with the corresponding center wavelengths 1471 nm, 1491 nm, 1591 nm and 1611 nm.
The other group includes the channels #C1510, #C1530, #C1550 and #C1570 with the
center wavelengths 1511nm, 1531 nm, 1551 nm and 1571 nm. In addition, it enables the
transmission of a gray channel (#G1310) over the CWDM network without having to
upgrade existing infrastructure and without affecting running services.
The 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610 incorporates a combination of full-duplex MUX and DEMUX
band filters. These filters multiplex/demultiplex the wavelength bands of the two groups
of channels and the gray channel on the pre-defined wavelengths around 1310 nm
into/from one full duplex signal carried by the network fiber pair. Multiplexing and demultiplexing of up to nine channels is executed in one stage.
The module provides three client ports and one network port. On the client side, the
3BSM-#G1310-#C1610 works in conjunction with the appropriate CWDM channel splitter
modules. The isolated gray channel is inter-faced to the corresponding channel module
on the client side. Connecting the 1310-nm channel to the third party equipment without
using a channel module requires special attention.
CAUTION
If third party equipment with a wavelength of 1310 nm is connected to

the interface C1 of the 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610, the operating
organization of the network has to make sure that the output power of
this equipment does not exceed the power limit of laser hazard level 1 as
specified in IEC 60825. The operating organization is solely responsible
for the safety of the end-to-end system.
953
3BSM-#G1310-#C1610
Features
Support of 8 CWDM channels (wavelengths) according to ITU-T G.694.2 (20 nm

channel spacing) in two groups of 4 channels each and a gray channel (wavelengths
around 1310 nm)
Signal Path
Figure 594 shows the operation of the 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610 and illustrates the signal
Figure 594: 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610 Operating Scheme
Receive Direction
The 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610 receives a multi-channel signal (the entire channel spectrum)
through the input N-D of the network port from the far end of the link. The DEMUX band
filter de-multiplexes the incoming signal into two groups of channels and the gray
channel. The resulting signals are coupled into the corresponding output fibers to have
them separate at the C1-D to C3-D outputs of the client ports. Both channel groups are
then transmitted to the appropriate channel splitter modules for further de-multiplexing.
The gray channel #G1310 is passed on to third party equipment.
954
3BSM-#G1310-#C1610
Transmit Direction
The 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610 receives two groups of channels from the corresponding
channel splitter modules and the gray channel #G1310 from third party equipment through
the inputs C1-M to C3-M of the client ports. The MUX band filter multiplexes the groups
of channels and the gray channel #G1310 into a multi-channel signal and couples it into
the output fiber. This signal is directed to the output N-M of the network port and
transmitted to the far end of the link.
Slot Positions
The 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610 is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and
slots:
SH1HU, slots 1, 2
Specifications
955
3BSM-#G1310-#C1610-E/W
3BSM-#G1310-#C1610-E/W
Figure 595: 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610-E/W Front View
956
3BSM-#G1310-#C1610-E/W
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610-E/W faceplate
and their meanings.
Table 174: 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610-E/W Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
NW
network port west
NE
network port east
C3E
client port 3 east
C3W
client port 3 west
C2E
client port 2 east
C2W
client port 2 west
C1E
client port 1 east
C1W
client port 1 west

module
Description
The 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610-E/W is an optical east/west CWDM band splitter module
with gray interface at 1310 nm. It is designed for bi-directional data transfer in dual-fiber
CWDM point-to-point, linear add/drop and ring configurations. The module serves as
combiner and splitter of two groups of multiplexed CWDM channels and a gray channel
(#G1310) from an east-side and west-side network fiber pair. Consequently, the 3BSM#G1310-#C1610-E/W provides six ports on the client side and two ports on the network
side. The client ports C1W and C1E can optionally be used for further CWDM filters to
support the CWDM wavelengths 1290 nm, 1310 nm, 1330 nm and 1350 nm or for 1310nm gray interfaces. Hence the module offers the possibility to pass on legacy
SDH/SONET traffic in addition to the eigth FSP 3000R7CWDM channels without having
to upgrade existing infrastructure and without affecting running services.
The 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610-E/W contains two identical full-duplex MUX and DEMUX
band filter sets for east-west application on one module. Each filter set multiplexes/demultiplexes the wavelength bands of the two groups of channels and the gray channel on
the pre-defined wavelengths around 1310 nm into/from one full duplex signal. One group
comprises the channels #C1470, #C1490, #C1590 and #C1610 with the corresponding
center wavelengths 1471 nm, 1491 nm, 1591 nm and 1611 nm. The other group includes
the channels #C1510, #C1530, #C1550 and #C1570 with the center wavelengths 1511
nm, 1531 nm, 1551 nm and 1571 nm.
Multiplexing and de-multiplexing of up to nine channels is executed in one stage. The
module feeds the multiplexed/de-multiplexed groups of channels and the isolated gray
channel into separate two-fiber paths, going in opposite directions into the network
(east/west).
On the client sides, the 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610-E/W works in conjunction with the
957
3BSM-#G1310-#C1610-E/W
appropriate CWDM channel splitter modules. The isolated gray channel is interfaced to
the corresponding channel module on the client sides. Connecting the 1310-nm channel
to the third party equipment without using a channel module requires special attention.
CAUTION

the interface C1 of the 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610, the operating
The use of the 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610-E/W is restricted to the 1HU Shelf (SH1HUF/2DC) only. In combination with the 4TCA-PCN-4GU+4G, the 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610E/W can be used for DSL backhauling applications.
Features

wavelengths spacing) in two groups of 4 channels each and a gray channel
(wavelengths around 1310 nm)
Signal Path
Figure 596 shows the operation of the 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610-E/W and illustrates the
Figure 596: 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610-E/W Operation Scheme
958
3BSM-#G1310-#C1610-E/W
Receive Direction
The 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610-E/W receives two multi-channel signals over different input
fibers one signal through the network port input NW-D from the west direction and one
signal through the network port input NE-D from the east direction. The demux filter west
and demux filter east demultiplex the incoming signals into two groups of four CWDM
channels each and separate the gray channel (#G1310) from the CWDM spectrum. The
resulting signals are coupled into single fibers and passed on to the corresponding
outputs C1W-D to C3W-D as well as C1E-D to C3E-D of the client ports east and west
for transmission to the appropriate CWDM channel splitter modules and third party
equipment.
Transmit Direction
The 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610-E/W receives two groups of CWDM channels and the gray
channel #G1310 from the corresponding west and east CWDM channel splitter modules
and third party equipment. The signals enter the module through the inputs C1W-M to
C3W-M as well as C1E-M to C3E-M of the client ports east and west. The mux filter
west and mux filter east multiplex the groups of channels and the gray channel #G1310
on each side into a multi-channel signal. These two signals, which can consist of up to 9
channels, are coupled into the associated output fiber for transmission through the
network port output NW-M toward the west and through the network port output NE-M
toward the east.
Slot Positions
The 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610-E/W is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves
and slots:
Specifications
959
4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy
4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy
Figure 597: 4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy Front View
Faceplate Markings
Table 175 lists all abbreviations on the 4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy faceplate and their
meanings.
960
4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy
Table 175: 4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Tx
transmit
Rx
receive
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
network port
C1 - C4

module
Variants
The 4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy (4-port CWDM channel splitter module - subband #C1470#C1610 or #C1510-#C1590) is available in two variants:
4CSM-#C1470-#C1610 (CWDM 4-port channel splitter module for #C1470, #1490,

#1590, #C1610)
4CSM-#C1510-#C1570 (CWDM 4-port Channel Splitter Module for #C1510, #1530,

#1550, #C1570)
The part #Cxxxx-#Cyyyy of the module name refers to a definite group of four CWDM
channels each module variant covers. Both variants feature the same design and use the
same faceplate. They only differ in the optical filters supporting either the group of
channels #C1470-#C1610 or #C1510-#C1570 (see above). The front view of a 4CSM#C1470-#C1610 is illustrated in Figure 597 as an example.
Description
The 4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy is an optical 4-port CWDM channel splitter and combiner
module. It is designed for bidirectional data transfer in dual-fiber CWDM linear add/drop
and ring configurations.
The module contains a combination of MUX and DEMUX channel filters for the above
mentioned groups of channels. These filters multiplex/demultiplex four different channel
signals of a defined group into/from the full duplex signal carried by the network fiber pair.
One group comprises the channels #C1470, #C1490, #C1590 and #C1610 with the
corresponding center wavelengths 1471 nm, 1491 nm, 1591 nm and 1611 nm. The other
group includes the channels #C1510, #C1530, #C1550 and #C1570 with the center
wavelengths 1511 nm, 1531 nm, 1551 nm and 1571 nm.
The module provides four client ports and one network port. On the network side, the
4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy works in conjunction with the appropriate CWDM band splitter
and combiner module, and on the client side with the corresponding CWDM channel
modules. Table 176 lists the module variants, the channels they support and the
allocation of the channels to the client ports.
961
4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy
Table 176: 4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy Client Port Description
4CSM-#C1470-#C1610
4CSM-#C1510-#C1570
Channel
Name
Client ports*
Channel
Name
Client ports*
#C1610
C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#C1570
C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#C1590
C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#C1550
C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#C1490
C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#C1530
C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#C1470
C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
#C1510
C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
0 * The input and output connectors of the client ports are not explicitly
labeled on the faceplates
Features

wavelength spacing)
Signal Path
Figure 598 shows the operation of the 4CSM-#C1470-#C1610 as an example and
illustrates the signal path, which is described below. The same principle applies to the
4CSM-#C1510-#C1570.
Figure 598: 4CSM-#C1470-#C1610 Operation Scheme
962
4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy
Receive Direction
The 4CSM-#C1470-#C1610 receives a composite CWDM channel signal (group
#C1470-#C1610) through the input N-D of the network port from the far end of the link.
The DEMUX filter in the splitter section de-multiplexes the incoming signal into its
component channels and couples them into single fibers to have the four channels
transmitted to the corresponding CWDM channel modules.
Transmit Direction
The 4CSM-#C1470-#C1610 receives four individual channels (#C1470, #C1490, #C1590
and #C1610) from the corresponding CWDM channel modules through the inputs C1-M
to C4-M of the client ports. The MUX filter in the combiner section multiplexes the
incoming channels into a channel group signal and couples it into the output fiber. This
signal is directed to the output N-M of the network port and transmitted to the far end of
the link.
Slot Positions
The 4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and
slots:
Specifications
963
8CSM+#C1470-#C1610
8CSM+#C1470-#C1610
Figure 599: 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 Front View
964
8CSM+#C1470-#C1610
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 177: 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
network port
upgrade port
C1 - C8

module
Description
The 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 is an optical 8-port CWDM channel splitter module with
upgrade port. It is designed for bidirectional data transfer in dual-fiber linear add/drop and
ring configurations.
The module allows access to a single gray channel (#G1310) from a network fiber and
splits/combines the entire CWDM channel spectrum which ranges from #C1470 to
#C1610. For this purpose, the 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 provides one network port, eight
client ports and one upgrade port.
The 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 contains a combination of specific add/drop optical filters
and MUX/DEMUX filters. These filters perform the add/drop function on the pre-defined
wavelengths around 1310 nm and multiplex/demultiplex the eight CWDM channels
into/from the full duplex signal carried by the network fiber pair.
On the client side, the 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 works in conjunction with the
corresponding channel modules. Table 178 lists the allocation of the client ports of the
module to the individual CWDM channels.
Table 178: 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 Client Port Description
Client Ports*
Channel Names
C8 (C8-M; C8-D)
#C1610
C7 (C7-M; C7-D)
#C1590
C6 (C6-M; C6-D)
#C1570
C5 (C5-M; C5-D)
#C1550
C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#C1530
C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#C1510
965
8CSM+#C1470-#C1610
Table 178: 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 Client Port Description
Client Ports*
Channel Names
C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#C1490
C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
#C1470
0 * The input and output connectors of the client ports are not
explicitly labeled on the faceplates.
The isolated gray channel is interfaced to an appropriate channel module. Connecting the
1310-nm channel to the client equipment without using a channel module requires special
attention.
CAUTION

the 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610, the operating organization of the network
has to make sure that the output power of this equipment does not
exceed the power limit of laser hazard level 1 as specified in IEC 60825.
The operating organization is solely responsible for the safety of the endto-end system.
Features
Support of 8 channels (wavelengths) according to ITU-T G.694.2 (20nm wavelength

spacing) and a gray channel (wavelengths around 1310 nm)
Signal Path
Figure 600 shows the operation of the 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 and illustrates the signal
966
8CSM+#C1470-#C1610
Figure 600: 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 Operation Scheme
Receive Direction
The 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 receives a composite CWDM channel signal through the
input N-D of the network port from the far end of the link. In the direction of signal flow,
the drop filter separates the entire CWDM channel spectrum from the input fiber and
couples it into the DEMUX filter. The remaining gray channel #G1310 is reflected onto the
output U-D of the upgrade port.
The DEMUX filter in the splitter section de-multiplexes the channel spectrum into its
component channels and couples them into single fibers to have the eight channels
transmitted to the corresponding CWDM channel modules.
Transmit Direction
The 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 receives eight individual CWDM channels from the
MUX filter in the combiner section multiplexes the incoming channels into one channel
signal and couples it into a single fiber. The add filter adds this combined channel signal
in the direction of signal flow to the gray channel #G1310 received through the input U-M
of the upgrade port. The resulting composite channel signal is coupled into the output
Slot Positions
The 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and
slots:
SH1HU, slot 1
967
1CSM+#G1310
Specifications
1CSM+#G1310
Figure 601: 1CSM+#G1310 Front View
968
1CSM+#G1310
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 1CSM+#G1310 faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 179: 1CSM+#G1310 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Tx
transmit
Rx
receive
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
network port
upgrade port
client port
Description
The 1CSM+#G1310 is an optical single channel CWDM splitter module with 1310-nm
connectivity. It is designed for bidirectional data transfer in dual-fiber linear add/drop and
ring configurations. The module allows access to a single gray channel (#G1310) from a
network fiber while passing all CWDM channels. For this purpose, the 1CSM+#G1310
provides one network port, one client port and one upgrade port.
The 1CSM+#G1310 contains a combination of specific add/drop optical filters. These
filters perform the add/drop function on the pre-defined wavelengths around 1310 nm. The
module is transparent for the entire CWDM channel spectrum which ranges from #C1470
to #C1610.
The isolated gray channel is interfaced to the corresponding channel module on the client
side. Connecting the 1310-nm channel to the third party equipment without using a
channel module requires special attention.
CAUTION

the 1CSM+#G1310, the operating organization of the network has to
make sure that the output power of this equipment does not exceed the
power limit of laser hazard level 1 as specified in IEC 60825. The
operating organization is solely responsible for the safety of the end-toend system.
The 1CSM+#G1310 is deployed at sites where future access to a single 1310-nm gray
channel may be required. It can be used in virtually all types of CWDM networks, unless
a 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610 is part of the configuration.
Features

969
1CSM+#G1310
Signal Path
Figure 602 shows the operation of the 1CSM+#G1310 and illustrates the signal path,
which is described.
Receive Direction (Dropping the Gray Channel)

The 1CSM+#G1310 receives a composite CWDM channel signal through the input N-D
of the network port from the far end of the link. In the direction of signal flow, the drop filter
separates the gray channel #G1310 from the input fiber into the output C-D of the client
port for transmission to the corresponding client equipment. Simultaneously the entire
CWDM channel spectrum is reflected onto the output U-D of the upgrade port to be
transmitted to an optical filter module.
Transmit Direction (Adding the Gray Channel)

The 1CSM+#G1310 receives the gray channel #G1310 from the corresponding client
equipment through the input C-M of the client port. The add filter reinserts this channel in
the direction of signal flow into the channel spectrum received through the input U-M of
the upgrade port. The composite CWDM channel signal which can consist of up to nine
channels, is coupled into the output fiber and transmitted through output N-M of the
network port to the far end of the link.
Figure 602: Operation Scheme of the 1CSM+#G1310
Slot Positions
The 1CSM+#G1310 is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and slots:
970
1CSM+#Cxxxx
Specifications
1CSM+#Cxxxx
Figure 603: 1CSM+#Cxxxx Front View
971
1CSM+#Cxxxx
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 1CSM+#Cxxxx faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 180: 1CSM+#Cxxxx Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Tx
transmit
Rx
receive
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
network port
upgrade port
client port
Variants
The 1CSM+#Cxxxx (single channel CWDM splitter module with upgrade port) is
available in eight variants, one for each of the 8 CWDM channels the module supports.
The variants are listed here:
Table 181: 1CSM+#Cxxxx Module Variants
972
Variants
Description
1CSM+#C1470
single channel CWDM splitter module with upgrade port

adding/dropping channel #C1470
1CSM+#C1490

1CSM+#C1510

1CSM+#C1530

1CSM+#C1550

1CSM+#C1570

1CSM+#C1590

1CSM+#C1610

1CSM+#Cxxxx
The part #Cxxxx of the module name refers to a specific CWDM channel each module
variant adds and drops. All module variants feature the same design and use the same
faceplate. They only differ in the optical filters adding/dropping a single channel (see
above). The front view of the 1CSM+#C1510 is illustrated in Figure 603 as an example.
Description
The 1CSM+#Cxxxx is an optical single channel CWDM splitter and combiner module. It
is designed for bidirectional data transfer in dual-fiber linear add/drop and ring
configurations. On a per-wavelength basis, it allows access to a specific channel from a
network fiber while passing the remaining channel spectrum. For this purpose, the
module provides one network port, one client port and one upgrade port.
The 1CSM+#Cxxxx contains a combination of specific add/drop optical filters. These
filters add/drop a specific channel to/out of the CWDM channel spectrum while reflecting
all other channels onto the upgrade port.
Using the upgrade port the 1CSM+#Cxxxx module can be cascaded to add and drop
specific CWDM channels at a certain site.
Features

spacing)
Signal Path
Figure 604 shows the operation of the 1CSM+#C1510 as an example and illustrates the
signal path, which is described below. The same principle applies to the other module
variants.
973
1CSM+#Cxxxx
Figure 604: 1CSM+#C1510 Operation Scheme

The 1CSM+#C1510 receives a composite CWDM channel signal through the input N-D
of the network port from the far end of the link. In the direction of signal flow, the drop filter
separates a specific channel, e.g. #C1510, from the input fiber into the output C-D of the
client port for transmission to the corresponding channel module. Simultaneously the
remaining channel spectrum is reflected onto the output U-D of the upgrade port.

The 1CSM+#C1510 receives a specific channel, e.g. #C1510, from the corresponding
channel module through the input C-M of the client port. The add filter reinserts this
channel in the direction of data flow into the channel spectrum received through the input
U-M of the upgrade port. The composite CWDM channel signal is coupled into the output
fiber and transmitted through output N-M of the network port to the far end of the link.
Slot Positions
The 1CSM+#Cxxxx is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and slots:
Specifications
974
1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W
1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W
Figure 605: 1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W Front View
Faceplate Markings
Table 182 lists all abbreviations on the 1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 182: 1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Tx

module
transmit
975
1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W
Table 182: 1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W Faceplate Markings
Rx
receive
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
NW
network port west
NE
network port east
UW
upgrade port west
UE
upgrade port east
CW
client port west
CE
client port east
Variants
The 1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W (east/west single channel CWDM splitter module with upgrade
port) is available in eight variants, one for each of the 8 CWDM channels the module
supports. The variants are listed here:
Table 183: 1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W Module Variants
976
Variants
Description
1CSM+#C1470-E/W
east/west single channel CWDM splitter module

with upgrade port adding/dropping channel #C1470
1CSM+#C1490-E/W

1CSM+#C1510-E/W

1CSM+#C1530-E/W

1CSM+#C1550-E/W

1CSM+#C1570-E/W

1CSM+#C1590-E/W

1CSM+#C1610-E/W

1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W
above). The front view of the 1CSM+#C1510-E/W is illustrated in Figure 605 as an
example.
Description
The 1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W is an optical east/west single channel CWDM splitter and
two upgrade ports.
The 1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W contains two identical full-duplex add/drop optical filter sets for
east-west applications on one module. The filters add/drop a specific channel to/out of
the CWDM channel spectrum while reflecting all other channels to the upgrade ports. The
module feeds the isolated (single) channel as well as the passed through CWDM channel
spectrum into separate two-fiber paths, going in opposite directions into the network
(east/west). The isolated channel is interfaced to the corresponding channel modules on
the client side. Using the upgrade ports the 1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W module can be
cascaded to add and drop specific CWDM channels at a certain site.
Features

spacing)
Signal path
Figure 606 shows the operation of the 1CSM+#C1510-E/W as an example and illustrates
variants.
977
1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W
Figure 606: 1CSM+#C1510-E/W Operation Scheme

The 1CSM+#C1510-E/W receives a composite CWDM channel signal through the
direction of signal flow, the drop filters separate a specific channel, e.g. #C1510, from
either input fibers into the outputs CW-D and CE-D of the client ports west and east for
channel spectrum is reflected to the outputs UW-D and UE-D of the upgrade ports west
and east.

The 1CSM+#C1510-E/W receives a specific channel, e.g. #C1510, from the
corresponding channel modules through the inputs CW-M and CE-M of the client ports
west and east. The add filters reinsert this channel in the directions of signal flow into the
channel spectra received through the inputs UW-M and UE-M of the upgrade ports west
and east. The composite CWDM channel signals are coupled into either output fibers and
Slot Positions
The 1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and slots:
Specifications
978
Figure 607: 1CSM/P-#Cxxxx-#Cxxxx-SF-E/W Front View
Faceplate Markings
Table 184 lists all abbreviations on the 1CSM/P-#Cxxxx-#Cxxxx-SF-E/W faceplate and
their meanings.
979
Table 184: 1CSM/P-#Cxxxx-#Cxxxx-SF-E/W) Faceplate Markings
CW
client port west
CE
client port east
network port
transmit
receive
Variants
The 1CSM/P-#Cxxxx-#Cxxxx-SF-E/W is a passive (east/west single channel CWDM
splitter and combiner module. There are four separate modules:
1CSM/P-#C1470-#C1550-SF-E/W
1CSM/P-#C1490-#C1570-SF-E/W
1CSM/P-#C1510-#C1590-SF-E/W
1CSM/P-#C1530-#C1610-SF-E/W
Table 185: 1CSM/P-#Cxxxx-#Cxxxx-SF-E/W Module Variants
Variants
Description
1CSM/P-#C1470#C1550-SF-E/W
Adds channel #C1470 and drops #C1550 at the

west port. Adds channel #C1550 and drops #C1470
at the east port.
1CSM/P-#C1490#C1570-SF-E/W

at the east port.
1CSM/P-#C1510#C1590-SF-E/W

at the east port.
1CSM/P-#C1530#C1610-SF-E/W

at the east port.
above). The front view of the 1CSM/P-#Cxxxx-#Cxxxx-SF-E/W is illustrated in Figure
605 as an example.
980
Description
The 1CSM/P-#Cxxxx-#Cxxxx-SF-E/W is an optical channel splitter and combiner
module for CWDM in single-fiber working point-to-point configurations. The 1CSM/P#Cxxxx-#Cxxxx-SF-E/W is an add drop module for a one channel east and west
application. The high channel isolation and high directivity of the deployed filters ensures
operation of the single-fiber system.
The 1CSM/P-#Cxxxx-#Cxxxx-SF-E/W contains 4 add/drop optical filters for east-west
applications on one module. The filters add/drop a specific channel to/out of the CWDM
channel spectrum while reflecting all other channels. The module feeds the isolated
(single) channel as well as the passed through CWDM channel spectrum into separate
fiber paths, going in opposite directions into the network (east/west) ports. The isolated
channel is interfaced to the corresponding channel modules on the client side.
Note
As this module is completely passive, it is not visible in the inventory

database. Therefore, it is not supported by inventory management, the
control plane, or the Network Manager.
Features
Support of single-fiber working on 8 CWDM channels (wavelengths) according to

ITU-T G.694.2 (20nm wavelength spacing)
Signal Path
Figure 608 shows the operation of the 1CSM/P-#C1470-#C1550-SF-E/W as an example
and illustrates the signal path. The same principle applies to the other module variants.
981
Figure 608: 1CSM/P-#Cxxxx-#Cxxxx-SF-E/W Operation Scheme
Refer to Figure 1: 1CSM/P Operational Scheme. The 1CSM/P-#C1470-#C1550-SF-E/W

is used as an example.
In the west to east direction, the 1CSM/P-#C1470-#C1550-SF-E/W receives the CWDM
channels #C1550 to #C1610 through the bi-directional input/output of network port NW
from the west end of the link. The first channel filter on the network west side passes the
CWDM channels except the one being dropped (#C1550) at port CW-T. A second
channel filter adds a different channel (#C1470) from port CW-R to the CWDM channel
spectrum in the east to west direction.
In the east to west direction, the 1CSM/P-#C1470-#C1550-SF-E/W receives the CWDM
channels #C1470 to #C1530 through the bi-directional input/output of network port NE
from the east end of the link. The first channel filter on the network east side passes the
CWDM channels except the one being dropped (#C1470) at port CE-T. A second channel
filter adds a different channel (#C1550) from port CE-R to the CWDM channel spectrum
in the west to east direction.
Slot Positions
The 1CSM/P-#Cxxxx-#Cxxxx-SF-E/W) is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following
shelves and slots:
Specifications
982
4CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-SF-E(W)
4CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-SF-E(W)
Figure 609: 4CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-SF-E(W) Front View
Faceplate Markings
Table 186 lists all abbreviations on the 4CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-SF-E(W) faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 186: 4CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-SF-E(W) Faceplate Markings
C1-C4
transmit
receive
network port
nc
unused port
983
4CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-SF-E(W)
Variants
The 4CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-SF-E(W), 4-port channel splitter module - single-fiber
working - CWDM) is available in two variants:
4CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-SF-W, 4-port channel splitter module - single-fiber working

- CWDM, terminal west location
4CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-SF-E, 4-port channel splitter module - single-fiber working

- CWDM, terminal east location
receive direction. The front view of the 4CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-SF-E(W) is illustrated
in Figure 1.
Description
The 4CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-SF-E(W) is an optical 4-port channel splitter and combiner
module for CWDM in single-fiber working point-to-point configurations. It is specifically
designed for the bi-directional transmission of 4 CWDM channels over one strand of fiber
using 8 wavelengths. These wavelengths are split between 4 in the transmit direction and
4 in the receive direction. The high channel isolation and high directivity of the deployed
filters ensures operation of the single-fiber system.
The 4CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-SF-E(W) incorporates a combination of specific channel
the module naming by the use of the characters W and E (W is the terminal west location
and E is the terminal east location). Therefore, the 4CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-SF-W and
4CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-SF-E can only be used as a pair. One module is at the near
end of the link (e.g. location terminal west) and the other module is at the far end of the
link (e.g. location terminal east).
The 4CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-SF-W combines the channels #C1470-#C1530 and
transmits them over a single fiber to the far end of the link. At the same time, it receives
the combined channels #C1550-#C1610 from the far end of the link, splits them into
individual channels and forwards each channel to a specific channel module.
The 4CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-SF-E receives the combined channels #C1470-#C1530
from the far end of the link, splits them into individual channels and forwards each
channel to a specific channel module. At the same time, it combines the channels
#C1550-#C1610 and transmits them over a single fiber to the far end of the link.
The 4CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-SF-E(W) module provides 4 optical ports on the client
side, each mapped to a different CWDM wavelength, and one port for common signal
input and output on the network side.
Each of the 4 individual CWDM channels is assigned to a specific client port as shown in
the table below:
984
4CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-SF-E(W)
Table 187: 4CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-SF-E(W) Client Port Description
Module Variants
Channel
Name
Client
ports
Channel
Name
Client ports
4CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-SFW
#C1470
C1 (C1-R)
#C1550
C1 (C1-T)
#C1490
C2 (C2-R)
#C1570
C2 (C2-T)
#C1510
C3 (C3-R)
#C1590
C3 (C3-T)
#C1530
C4 (C4-R)
#C1610
C4 (C4-T)
#C1550
C1 (C1-R)
#C1470
C1 (C1-T)
#C1570
C2 (C2-R)
#C1490
C2 (C2-T)
#C1590
C3 (C3-R)
#C1510
C3 (C3-T)
#C1610
C4 (C4-R)
#C1530
C4 (C4-T)
4CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-SFE
Note

Features
Support of single-fiber working on a 4-channel granularity based on use of 8 CWDM

wavelengths according to ITU-T G.694.1 (100 GHz spacing)
Signal Path
Figure 610 shows both the 4CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-SF-W and 4CSM/P-#C1470#C1610-SF-E and illustrates their signal path. The 4CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-SF-W
module receive and transmit paths are explained. Both modules function the same way.
985
4CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-SF-E(W)
Figure 610: 4CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-SF-E(W) Operation Scheme
Receive Direction
Refer to Figure 1: 4CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-SF-E(W) Operation Scheme. The 4CSM/P#C1470-#C1610-SF-W receives the CWDM channels through the common input/output
of the network port N from the far end of the link. The band filter on the network side filters
out the channel spectrum in the range from #C1550-#C1610 and directs it to the splitter
section of the module. This signal is split into 4 individual channels that are then passed
through the outputs C1-T to C4-T onto the corresponding CWDM channel modules.
Transmit Direction
Refer to Figure 1: 4CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-SF-E(W) Operation Scheme. The 4CSM/P#C1470-#C1610-SF-W receives up to 4 individual CWDM channels (#C1470-#C1530)
from the CWDM channel modules through the inputs C1-R to C4-R. In the combiner
Slot Positions
The 4CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-SF-E(W) is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following
shelves and slots:
986
Specifications
Figure 611: 2CSM+#G1310-#Cxxxx-E/W Front View
987
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 2CSM+#G1310-#Cxxxx-E/W faceplate
and their meanings.
Table 188: 2CSM+#G1310-#Cxxxx-E/W Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
NW
network port west
NE
network port east
UW
upgrade port west
UE
upgrade port east
C2W
client port 2 west
C2E
client port 2 east
C1W
client port 1 west
C1E
client port 1 east

module
Variants
The 2CSM+#G1310-#Cxxxx-E/W (east/west CWDM channel splitter module with 1310nm connectivity) is available in 8 variants, one for each of the 8 channels the module
supports.
The variants are listed here:
Table 189: 2CSM+#G1310-#Cxxxx-E/W Module Variants
988
Variants
Description
2CSM+#G1310-#C1470-E/W
east/west 2-port CWDM channel splitter module

with upgrade ports adding/dropping channels
#G1310 and #C1470
2CSM+#G1310-#C1490-E/W

#G1310 and #C1490
2CSM+#G1310-#C1510-E/W

#G1310 and #C1510
Table 189: 2CSM+#G1310-#Cxxxx-E/W Module Variants
Variants
Description
2CSM+#G1310-#C1530-E/W

#G1310 and #C1530
2CSM+#G1310-#C1550-E/W

#G1310 and #C1550
2CSM+#G1310-#C1570-E/W

#G1310 and #C1570
2CSM+#G1310-#C1590-E/W

#G1310 and #C1590
2CSM+#G1310-#C1610-E/W

#G1310 and #C1610
variant inserts and separates. All module variants feature the same design and use the
same faceplate. They only differ in the optical filters inserting/separating a specific
CWDM channel (see above). The front view of the 2CSM+#G1310-#C1530-E/W is
Description
The 2CSM+#G1310-#Cxxxx-E/W is an optical east/west CWDM channel splitter and
combiner module with 1310-nm gray interface. It is designed for bi-directional data
transfer in dual-fiber CWDM point-topoint and ring configurations.
The module allows access to a gray channel (#G1310) and on a per-wavelength basis to
a specific CWDM channel from an east-side and west-side network fiber pair while
passing the remaining channel spectrum. Consequently, the 2CSM+#G1310-#CxxxxE/W provides two network ports, four client ports and two upgrade ports. The client ports
C1W and C1E can be used for 1310-nm gray interfaces without having to upgrade
existing infrastructure and without affecting running services.
The 2CSM+#G1310-#Cxxxx-E/W contains two identical full-duplex filter sets
(MUX/DEMUX) for east-west application on one module. The filters insert/separate a
1310-nm channel (#G1310) and a specific channel into/from the CWDM channel
spectrum while directing all other channels to the upgrade ports. The module feeds the
isolated channels as well as the passed through CWDM channel spectrum into separate
two-fiber paths, going in opposite directions into the network (east/west). The isolated
CWDM channel and gray channel are interfaced to the corresponding channel modules
on the client side. Using the upgrade ports the 2CSM+#G1310-#Cxxxx-E/W module can
be cascaded to insert and separate specific CWDM channels at a certain site.
Connecting the 1310-nm channel to the client equipment without using a channel module
requires special attention.
989
CAUTION

the client port C1 of the 2CSM+#G1310-#Cxxxx-E/W, the operating
The use of the 2CSM+#G1310-#Cxxxx-E/W is restricted to the 1HU Shelf (SH1HUF/2DC) only.
Features

Signal Path
Figure 612 shows the operation of the 2CSM+#G1310-#C1530-E/W as an example and
other module variants.
Receive Direction (Separating Channels)

The 2CSM+#G1310-#C1530-E/W receives two multi-channel signals over different input
fibers one signal through the network port input NW-D from the west direction and one
signal through the network port input NE-D from the east direction. The demux filter west
and the demux filter east drop the channel #G1310 and a specific CWDM channel, e.g.
#C1530, out of the CWDM spectra to have them separate at the outputs C1W-D and
C2W-D of the client ports west as well as at the outputs C1E-D and C2E-D of the client
ports east. The same filter reflects all remaining channels to the outputs UW-D and UED of the upgrade ports west and east. The isolated channels are transmitted to the
corresponding east and west channel modules and third party equipment.
Transmit Direction (Adding Channels)

The 2CSM+#G1310-#C1530-E/W receives the gray channel #G1310 and a specific
CWDM channel, e.g. #C1530, from the corresponding west and east channel modules
and the third party equipment. The signals enter the module through the inputs C1W-M
and C2W-M as well as C1E-M and C2E-M of the client ports east and west. The mux
filter west and the mux filter east add these two channels on each side in the direction of
signal flow to the west and east CWDM channel spectra received through the inputs
UW-M and UE-M of the upgrade ports west and east. The two resulting multi-channel
signals, which can consist of up to 9 channels, are coupled into the associated output
fiber for transmission through the network port output NW-M toward the west and through
the network port output NE-M toward the east.
990
Figure 612: 2CSM+#G1310-#C1530-E/WOperation Scheme
Slot Positions
The 2CSM+#G1310-#Cxxxx-E/W is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves
and slots:
Specifications
991
5GSM/P-#19590-#19200-DM
5GSM/P-#19590-#19200-DM
Figure 613: 5GSM/P-#19590-#19200-DMFront View
Faceplate Markings
These are the abbreviations that are used for the 5GSM/P-#19590-#19200-DM faceplate
and their meanings.
Table 190: 5GSM/P-#19590-#19200-DM Faceplate Markings
Optical Ports
Tx
992
transmit
5GSM/P-#19590-#19200-DM
Table 190: 5GSM/P-#19590-#19200-DM Faceplate Markings
Rx
receive
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
network port
Mon
monitoring port
C1 - C5
Description
The 5GSM/P-#19590-#19200-DM is a passive 5-port DWDM channel group splitter and
combiner module with monitoring port for dual power level monitoring. It is designed for
bidirectional signal transfer in dual-fiber point-to-point, linear add/drop, and ring
configurations.
The 5GSM/P-#19590-#19200-DM contains a combination of optical splitters and
combiners. The MUX/DEMUX filters multiplex/demultiplex five different groups of
channels between the network port and client ports. The 5GSM/P-#19590-#19200-DM
supports the even channels #19590 through #19200 of the C band.
Optionally, the power level of the incoming network signal and outgoing client signal may
be monitored. The power level of the incoming (ingress) network signal will be monitored,
if the output connector Mon-D is connected to a power meter or OSA. If the output
connector Mon-M is connected to a power meter or OSA, the power level of the outgoing
(egress) client signal will be monitored. The optical monitoring ports provide visibility to
the signals to enable troubleshooting and power leveling. The monitor on the network
input port taps 5% of the received network signals. The second monitoring port taps 5%
of the multiplexed client signals transmitted out the network port.
The module has 5 bidirectional client ports, one bidirectional network port, and one
unidirectional monitoring port with two connectors (one for monitoring the ingress and one
for the egress data signal power level).
On the client ports, the 5GSM/P-#19590-#19200-DM works in conjunction with the
corresponding channel group splitter modules. One of the 5 channel groups is assigned to
a specific client port as shown here:
Table 191: 5GSM/P-#19590-#19200-DM Client Port Description

Client Ports*
Channel Groups
C5 (C5-M; C5-D)
#19270 - #19200
C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#19350 - #19280
C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#19430 - #19360
993
5GSM/P-#19590-#19200-DM
Table 191: 5GSM/P-#19590-#19200-DM Client Port Description
Client Ports*
Channel Groups
C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#19510 - #19440
C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
#19590 - #19520
0 * The input/output connectors of the client ports are not explicitly labeled on
the faceplates.
Note
The module is completely passive and is not detectable for inventory

retrieval. The network element does not support inventory management
of this module, and is transparent to the Network Manager and Control
Plane applications.
This module is designed for use in an SH1HU/PASSIVE shelf.
Features
Supports group splitting of 40 even channels (wavelengths) in the C band according

to ITU-T G.694.1 (100 GHz spacing) and ADVA Optical Networkings channel plan
Refer to Chapter 1 of the Module and System Specification.
Splits and combines five even channel groups of the C band
Power level monitoring of the incoming network signal and outgoing client signal
Support of extended temperature range -25C to +70C with insertion loss penalty
Signal Path
Figure 614 illustrates the signal path of the 5GSM/P-#19590-#19200-DM.
994
5GSM/P-#19590-#19200-DM
Figure 614: 5GSM/P-#19590-#19200-DM Operation Scheme
Receive Direction
The 5GSM/P-#19590-#19200-DM receives a composite C-band channel signal on the
input N-D of the network port. The module splits the incoming network signal for signal
monitoring. 95% of the optical power is coupled into the DEMUX filter, and 5% of the
optical power is fed to the output Mon-D of the ingress monitoring port. The DEMUX filter
de-multiplexes the remainder of the composite DWDM signal into five channel groups
and couples them to C1-D to C5-D of the client ports. The channel groups are then
transmitted to the corresponding channel splitter modules for further demultiplexing.
Transmit Direction
The 5GSM/P-#19590-#19200-DM receives five DWDM channel groups signals on the
inputs C1-M to C5-M of the client ports. The MUX filter multiplexes the incoming channel
signal groups into a composite signal. Before connecting the composite signal to the
network output, the composite signal is tapped for monitoring. 95% of the optical power is
coupled into the network output port and 5% of the optical power is fed to the output MonM for monitoring.
Slot Positions
The 5GSM/P-#19590-#19200-DM is 8 HP wide and occupies two regular slots. It can be
placed in slots 1 and 3 of the SH1HU/PASSIVE shelf.
Specifications
995
8CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-DM
8CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-DM
Figure 615: 8CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-DM Front View
996
8CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-DM
Faceplate Markings
These are the abbreviations that are used for the 8CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-DM faceplate
and their meanings.
Table 192: 8CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-DM Faceplate Markings
Optical Ports
Tx
transmit
Rx
receive
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
network port
Mon
monitoring port
C1 - C8
Description
The 8CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-DM is a passive 8-port CWDM channel splitter module
with monitoring port for dual power level monitoring. It is designed for bidirectional data
transfer in dual-fiber linear add/drop and ring configurations.
Note

database. Therefore it is not supported by inventory management, the
control plane or the Network Manager.
The 8CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-DM contains a combination of MUX/DEMUX filters and

power splitters. The MUX/DEMUX filters multiplex/demultiplex the entire CWDM
channel spectrum ranging from #C1470 to #C1610 into/from the full duplex signal carried
by the network fiber pair. The power splitters provide a facility for power level monitoring
and optical spectrum analyzing. For this purpose, they drop 5% of the multiplexed/demultiplexed network signals to be passed on to the ingress/egress monitoring interfaces.
The module has 8 bidirectional client ports, one bidirectional network port and one
unidirectional monitoring port with two connectors (one for monitoring the ingress and one
for the egress data signal power level).
On the client side, the 8CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-DM works in conjunction with the
module to the individual ADVA Optical Networking CWDM channels.
997
8CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-DM
Table 193: 8CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-DM Client Port Description
Client Ports*
Channel Names
C8 (C8-M; C8-D)
#C1610
C7 (C7-M; C7-D)
#C1590
C6 (C6-M; C6-D)
#C1570
C5 (C5-M; C5-D)
#C1550
C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#C1530
C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#C1510
C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#C1490
C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
#C1470
the faceplates.
(egress) client signal will be monitored.
Because the 8CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-DM is a totally passive module it cannot be
managed in any management application. This module is intended for use in an
SH1HU/PASSIVE shelf only.
Features
Support of 8 channels (#C1470 - #C1610) according to ITU-T G.694.2 (20 nm

wavelength spacing) and ADVA Optical Networkings channel plan
Power level monitoring of the incoming and outgoing network signals
Not manageable in any management application
Signal Path
Figure 602 shows the operation of the 8CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-DM and illustrates the
998
8CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-DM
Figure 616: 8CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-DM Operation Scheme
Receive Direction
The 8CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-DM receives a composite CWDM channel signal through
the input N-D of the network port from the far end of the link. In the direction of signal
flow, the optical splitter splits the incoming network signal at the ratio of 95:5. 95% of the
optical power is coupled into the DEMUX filter, and 5% of the optical power is fed into the
output Mon-D of the ingress monitoring port. The DEMUX filter de-multiplexes the
composite CWDM channel signal into its component channels and couples them into
single fibers to have the eight channels separate on the C1-D to C8-D outputs of the
client ports. These channels are then transmitted to the corresponding CWDM channel
modules.
Transmit Direction
The 8CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-DM receives eight individual CWDM channels from the
MUX filter multiplexes the incoming channels into one channel signal and couples it into a
single fiber. In the direction of signal flow, the optical splitter splits the outgoing network
signal at the ratio of 95:5. 95% of the optical power is coupled into the output fiber and
transmitted through the output N-M of the network port to the far end of the link. 5% of the
optical power is fed into the output Mon-M of the egress monitoring port.
Slot Positions
The 8CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-DM is 8 HP wide and therefore occupies two regular slots.
It can be placed in slots 1 and 3 of the SH1HU/PASSIVE shelf.
999
2BSM/P-#C1270-#C1610-DM
Specifications
2BSM/P-#C1270-#C1610-DM
Figure 617: 2BSM/P-#C1270-#C1610-DM Front View
Faceplate Markings
Table 194 lists all abbreviations on the 2BSM/P-#C1270-#C1610-DM faceplate and their
meanings.
1000
2BSM/P-#C1270-#C1610-DM
Table 194: 2BSM/P-#C1270-#C1610-DM Faceplate Markings
Optical Ports
Tx
transmit
Rx
receive
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
network port
Mon
monitoring port
C2
client port 2
C1
client port 1
Description
The 2BSM/P-#C1270-#C1610-DM is a passive 2-port CWDM band splitter module with
gray interface at 1310 nm and monitoring port for dual power level monitoring. It is
designed for bidirectional data transfer in dual-fiber linear add/drop and ring
configurations. The module allows access either to additional CWDM channels in the
range between C#1270 and C#1450 or to gray channel (#G1310) from a network fiber
while passing through all 8 FSP 3000R7 CWDM channels (#1470 - #1610).
The 2BSM/P-#C1270-#C1610-DM incorporates a combination of specific MUX/DEMUX
band filters and power splitters. The MUX/DEMUX band filters multiplex/demultiplex the
wavelength bands of the two groups of CWDM channels into/from one full duplex signal
carried by the network fiber pair. One band comprises the channels #C1270 to #C1450
including the #G1310 channel. The other band includes the channels #C1470 through
#C1610. Multiplexing and de-multiplexing of the wavelengths is executed in one stage.
The power splitters provide a facility for power level monitoring and optical spectrum
analyzing. For this purpose, they drop 5% of the multiplexed/de-multiplexed network
signals to be passed on to the ingress/egress monitoring interfaces.
The module has two bidirectional client ports, one bidirectional network port and one
unidirectional monitoring port with two connectors (for monitoring the ingress and one for
the egress data signal power level). On the client side, the 2BSM/P-#C1270-#C1610-DM
works in conjunction with the appropriate CWDM channel splitter modules. The client
port C1 can optionally be used for 1310-nm gray interfaces or for further CWDM filters to
support the CWDM wavelengths 1270 nm to 1450 nm. Hence this module offers the
possibility to pass on legacy SDH/SONET traffic in addition to the eight FSP 3000R7
CWDM channels without having to upgrade existing infrastructure and without affecting
running services. The isolated gray channel may be interfaced to a corresponding
channel module on the client side. Connecting the 1310-nm channel to the third party
equipment without using a channel module requires special attention.
1001
2BSM/P-#C1270-#C1610-DM
CAUTION

the interface C1 of the 2BSM/P-#C1270-#C1610-DM, the operating
Note

Control Plane or the Network Manager.
This module is intended for use in an SH1HU/PASSIVE shelf only.
Features
Support of 8 CWDM channels (#C1470 - #C1610) according to ITU-T G.694.2 (20

mm channel spacing) and ADVA Optical Networkings channel plan in one group
Support of additional CWDM channels (#C1270 - #C1450) according to ITU-T

G.694.2 (20 mm channel spacing) including gray channel #G1310 at pre-defined
wavelengths around 1310 nm
Signal Path
Figure 618 shows the operation of the 2BSM/P-#C1270-#C1610-DM and illustrates the
1002
2BSM/P-#C1270-#C1610-DM
Figure 618: 2BSM/P-#C1270-#C1610-DM Operation Scheme
Receive Direction
The 2BSM/P-#C1270-#C1610-DM receives a composite CWDM channel signal (the
entire channel spectrum including #G1310 channel) through the input N-D of the network
port from the far end of the link. In the direction of signal flow, the optical splitter splits the
incoming network signal at the ratio of 95:5. 95% of the optical power is coupled into the
DEMUX filter, and 5% of the optical power is fed into the output Mon-D of the ingress
monitoring port. The DEMUX band filter de-multiplexes the composite CWDM channel
signal into two groups of channels: group #C1470 - #C1610 and group #C1270 - #C1450,
and #G1310 respectively. The group signals are fed into single fibers to have them
separate at the C1-D and C2-D outputs of the client ports. The group of eight ADVA
Optical Networking CWDM channels is transmitted to the appropriate channel splitter
modules for further de-multiplexing. The gray channel is passed on to third party
equipment.
Transmit Direction
The 2BSM/P-#C1270-#C1610-DM receives the gray channel from third party equipment,
and the group of CWDM channels #C1270 - #C1450 respectively as well as the group
#C1470 - #C1610 from the appropriate channel splitter module through the client port
inputs C1-M and C2-M. The MUX band filter multiplexes the incoming groups of
channels into a composite CWDM channel signal and couples it into a single fiber. In the
direction of signal flow, the optical splitter splits this signal at the ratio of 95:5. 95% of the
optical power is coupled into the output fiber and transmitted through the output N-M of
the network port to the far end of the link. 5% of the optical power is fed into the output
Mon-M of the egress monitoring port.
Slot Positions
The 2BSM/P-#C1270-#C1610-DM is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in slots 1 through 4 of
the SH1HU/PASSIVE shelf.
1003
8CSM/P+#C1470-#C1610-DM
Specifications
8CSM/P+#C1470-#C1610-DM
Figure 619: 8CSM/P+#C1470-#C1610-DM Front View
1004
8CSM/P+#C1470-#C1610-DM
Faceplate Markings
These are the abbreviations that are used for the 8CSM/P+#C1470-#C1610-DM
Table 195: 8CSM/P+#C1470-#C1610-DM Faceplate Markings
Optical Ports
Tx
transmit
Rx
receive
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
network port
upgrade port
Mon
monitoring port
C1 C8
Description
The 8CSM/P+#C1470-#C1610-DM is a passive 8-port CWDM channel splitter and
combiner module with upgrade port and monitoring port for dual power level monitoring. It
is designed for bidirectional data transfer in dual-fiber linear add/drop and ring
configurations.
The module allows access to the CWDM channels #C1270 to #C1450 or a single gray
channel (#G1310) from a network fiber and splits/combines the CWDM channel set
which ranges from #C1470 to #C1610.
The 8CSM/P+#C1470-#C1610-DM contains power splitters and a combination of
specific add/drop optical filters as well as MUX/DEMUX filters. These filters perform the
add/drop function on the pre-defined wavelengths and multiplex/de-multiplex the eight
CWDM channels #C1470 to #C1610 to/from the full duplex signal carried by the network
fiber pair. The other eight CWDM channels of the spectrum or the gray channel are
passed on to the upgrade port. The power splitters provide a facility for power level
monitoring and optical spectrum analyzing. For this purpose, they drop 5% of the
multiplexed/demultiplexed network signals to be passed on to the ingress/egress
monitoring interfaces.
The module has eight bidirectional client ports, one bidirectional network port, one
bidirectional upgrade port and one unidirectional monitoring port with two connectors (one
for monitoring the ingress and one for the egress data signal power level).
On the client side, the 8CSM/P+#C1470-#C1610-DM works in conjunction with the
module to the individual CWDM channels.
1005
8CSM/P+#C1470-#C1610-DM
Table 196: 8CSM/P+#C1470-#C1610-DM Client Port Description
Client Ports*
Channel Names
C8 (C8-M; C8-D)
#C1610
C7 (C7-M; C7-D)
#C1590
C6 (C6-M; C6-D)
#C1570
C5 (C5-M; C5-D)
#C1550
C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#C1530
C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#C1510
C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#C1490
C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
#C1470
0 * The input and output connectors of the client ports are not explicitly
The isolated gray channel is interfaced to an appropriate channel module. Connecting the
1310-nm channel to the client equipment without using a channel module requires special
attention.
CAUTION

the 8CSM/P+#C1470-#C1610-DM, the operating organization of the
network has to make sure that the output power of this equipment does
not exceed the power limit of laser hazard level 1 as specified in IEC
60825. The operating organization is solely responsible for the laser
safety of the end-to-end system.
Note

Features
1006
Support of 16 channels (#C1270 - #C1610) according to ITU-T G.694.2 (20nm

8CSM/P+#C1470-#C1610-DM
Signal Path
Figure 620 shows the operation of the 8CSM/P+#C1470-#C1610-DM and illustrates the
Figure 620: 8CSM/P+#C1470-#C1610-DM Operation Scheme
Receive Direction
The 8CSM/P+#C1470-#C1610-DM receives a composite CWDM channel signal through
the input N-D of the network port from the far end of the link. In the direction of signal
flow, the incoming network signal is split at the ratio of 95:5. 95% of the optical power is
fed into the drop filter, and 5% of the optical power is fed into the output Mon-D of the
ingress monitoring port. The drop filter drops the channel set #C1470 #C1610 out of the
composite CWDM channel signal and couples them into the DEMUX filter. The
remaining the gray channel #G1310 or the channel set #C1270 #C1450 is reflected onto
the output U-D of the upgrade port for further de-multiplexing. The DEMUX filter in the
splitter section de-multiplexes the set of CWDM channels into eight channels and
CWDM channel modules.
Transmit Direction
The 8CSM/P+#C1470-#C1610-DM receives the channels #C1470 to #C1610 from the
MUX filter in the combiner section multiplexes these eight individual channels into one
channel signal and couples it into a single fiber. The add filter adds this combined channel
signal in the direction of signal flow to the gray channel #G1310 or the eight blue band
channels (#C1270 #C1450) received through the input U-M of the upgrade port. The
power splitter splits the resulting composite channel signal at the ratio of 95:5. 95% of the
optical power is coupled into the output fiber and transmitted through the output N-M of
the network port to the far end of the link. 5% of the optical power is fed into the output
Mon-M of the egress monitoring port.
1007
Slot Positions
The 8CSM/P+#C1470-#C1610-DM is 8 HP wide and therefore occupies two regular
slots. It can be placed in slots 1 and 3 of the SH1HU/PASSIVE shelf.
Specifications
Figure 621: 8CSM/P-#19270-#19200 Front View
1008
Faceplate Markings
These are the abbreviations that are used for the 8CSM/P-#19xxx-#19yyy faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 197: 8CSM/P-#19xxx-#19yyy Faceplate Markings
Optical Ports
Tx
transmit
Rx
receive
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
network port
C1 - C8
Variants
The 8CSM/P-#19xxx-#19yyy (passive 8-port DWDM channel splitter and combiner
module) is available in five variants covering 40 even C-band channels at 100 GHz
spacing. The variants are listed in Table 198.
Table 198: 8CSM/P-#19xxx-#19yyy Module Variants
Variants
Description
8CSM/P-#19590-#19520
passive 8-port DWDM channel spiltter and combiner

module adding/dropping even C-band channels
#19590-#19520
8CSM/P-#19510-#19440

#19510-#19440
8CSM/P-#19430-#19360

#19430-#19360
8CSM/P-#19350-#19280

#19350-#19280
8CSM/P-#19270-#19200

#19270-#19200
1009
The portion of the module part labeled with #19xxx#19yyy refers the set of C-band 100
GHz channels that the modules filters. All module variants feature the same physical
design with the same faceplate (excluding the label). The modules differ only in the
optical filters adding/dropping eight different channels of the respective channel group
(see above). The front view of the 8CSM/P-#19270-#19200 is illustrated in Figure 621 as
an example.
Description
The 8CSM/P-#19xxx-#19yyy is a passive 8-port DWDM channel splitter and combiner
module. It is designed for bidirectional signal flow in dual-fiber DWDM point-to-point,
linear add/drop, and ring configurations.
The module contains specific optical filters to multiplex/de-multiplex eight specific
DWDM C-band channels to/from a network fiber pair.
The module provides eight bidirectional client ports and one bidirectional network port. On
the client side, the 8CSM/P-#19xxx-#19yyy works in conjunction with the channel
modules with the specified wavelength.
Table 199 lists the module variants with the client ports and specified channels.
Table 199: 8CSM/P-#19xxx-#19yyy Client Port Description
1010
Module Variants
Client Ports*
Channel
Names
Frequencies
[THz]
Wavelengths
[nm]
8CSM/P-#19590#19520
C8 (C8-M;
C8-D)
#19520
195.20
1535.822
C7 (C7-M;
C7-D)
#19530
195.30
1535.036
C6 (C6-M;
C6-D)
#19540
195.40
1534.250
C5 (C5-M;
C5-D)
#19550
195.50
1533.465
C4 (C4-M;
C4-D)
#19560
195.60
1532.681
C3 (C3-M;
C3-D)
#19570
195.70
1531.898
C2 (C2-M;
C2-D)
#19580
195.80
1531.116
C1 (C1-M;
C1-D)
#19590
195.90
1530.334
Module Variants
Client Ports*
Channel
Names
Frequencies
[THz]
Wavelengths
[nm]
8CSM/P-#19510#19440
C8 (C8-M;
C8-D)
#19440
194.40
1542.142
C7 (C7-M;
C7-D)
#19450
194.50
1541.349
C6 (C6-M;
C6-D)
#19460
194.60
1540.557
C5 (C5-M;
C5-D)
#19470
194.70
1539.766
C4 (C4-M;
C4-D)
#19480
194.80
1538.976
C3 (C3-M;
C3-D)
#19490
194.90
1538.186
C2 (C2-M;
C2-D)
#19500
195.00
1537.397
C1 (C1-M;
C1-D)
#19510
195.10
1536.609
C8 (C8-M;
C8-D)
#19360
193.60
1548.515
C7 (C7-M;
C7-D)
#19370
193.70
1547.715
C6 (C6-M;
C6-D)
#19380
193.80
1546.917
C5 (C5-M;
C5-D)
#19390
193.90
1546.119
C4 (C4-M;
C4-D)
#19400
194.00
1545.322
C3 (C3-M;
C3-D)
#19410
194.10
1544.526
C2 (C2-M;
C2-D)
#19420
194.20
1543.730
C1 (C1-M;
C1-D)
#19430
194.30
1542.936
8CSM/P-#19430#19360
1011
Module Variants
Client Ports*
Channel
Names
Frequencies
[THz]
Wavelengths
[nm]
8CSM/P-#19350#19280
C8 (C8-M;
C8-D)
#19280
192.80
1554.940
C7 (C7-M;
C7-D)
#19290
192.90
1554.134
C6 (C6-M;
C6-D)
#19300
193.00
1553.329
C5 (C5-M;
C5-D)
#19310
193.10
1552.524
C4 (C4-M;
C4-D)
#19320
193.20
1551.721
C3 (C3-M;
C3-D)
#19330
193.30
1550.918
C2 (C2-M;
C2-D)
#19340
193.40
1550.116
C1 (C1-M;
C1-D)
#19350
193.50
1549.315
C8 (C8-M;
C8-D)
#19200
192.00
1561.419
C7 (C7-M;
C7-D)
#19210
192.10
1560.606
C6 (C6-M;
C6-D)
#19220
192.20
1559.794
C5 (C5-M;
C5-D)
#19230
192.30
1558.983
C4 (C4-M;
C4-D)
#19240
192.40
1558.173
C3 (C3-M;
C3-D)
#19250
192.50
1557.363
C2 (C2-M;
C2-D)
#19260
192.60
1556.555
C1 (C1-M;
C1-D)
#19270
192.70
1555.747
8CSM/P-#19270#19200
0 * The allocation for the input and output (M and D) of the client ports are not
explicitly labeled on the faceplate.
Note
1012
The module is completely passive and is not detectable for inventory

retrieval. The network element does not support inventory management
of this module, and is transparent to the Network Manager and Control
Plane applications.
This module is designed for use in an SH1HU/PASSIVE shelf.
Features
Five module variants to support all 40 even channels (19200-19590) in the C band
according to ITU-T G.694.1 (100 GHz spacing) in the ADVA Optical Networkings
channel plan
Refer to Chapter 1 of the Module and System Specification.
Splits/combines eight even C-band channels per module
Support of extended temperature range -25C to +70C with insertion loss penalty
Signal Path
Figure 622 illustrates the optical signal paths through the module. In the example, the
module type 8CSM/P-#19270-#19200 is described.
Figure 622: 8CSM/P-#19270-#19200 Operation Scheme
Receive Direction
The 8CSM/P-#19270-#19200 receives a composite DWDM channel signal on input N-D
of the network port. The filter de-multiplexes the composite DWDM channel signals and
couples the signals to the C1-D to C8-D outputs of the client ports. The output channels
are then transmitted to the corresponding DWDM channel modules.
1013
Transmit Direction
The 8CSM/P-#19270-#19200 receives eight individual DWDM channels from the
filter multiplexes the incoming channels into a composite signal connected to output N-M
of the network port.
Slot Positions
The 8CSM/P-#19xxx-#19yyy is 8 HP in width and occupies two regular slots. It can be
placed in slots 1 and 3 of the SH1HU/PASSIVE shelf.
Specifications
1014
8CSM/P-#C1270-#C1450
8CSM/P-#C1270-#C1450
Figure 623: 8CSM/P-#C1270-#C1450 Front View
1015
8CSM/P-#C1270-#C1450
Faceplate Markings
These are the abbreviations that are used for the 8CSM/P-#C1270-#C1450 faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 200: 8CSM/P-#C1270-#C1450 Faceplate Markings
Optical Ports
Tx
transmit
Rx
receive
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
network port
C1 - C8
Description
The 8CSM/P-#C1270-#C1450 is a passive 8-port CWDM channel splitter and combiner
module for channels #C1270 - #C1450. It is designed for bidirectional data transfer in
dual-fiber CWDM linear add/drop and ring configurations. The 8CSM/P-#C1270-#C1450
contains a combination of MUX/DEMUX channel filters for CWDM. The MUX/DEMUX
filters multiplex/de-multiplex the CWDM channel set ranging from #C1270 to #C1450
into/from the full duplex signal carried by the network fiber pair.
The module has 8 bidirectional client ports and one bidirectional network port.
On the client side, the 8CSM/P-#C1270-#C1450 works in conjunction with the
module to the individual ADVA CWDM channels.
Table 201: 8CSM/P-#C1270-#C1450 Client Port Description
Client Ports*
Channel Names
C8 (C8-M; C8-D)
#C1450
C7 (C7-M; C7-D)
#C1430
C6 (C6-M; C6-D)
#C1370
C5 (C5-M; C5-D)
#C1350
C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#C1330
C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#C1310
C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#C1290
C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
#C1270
the faceplates.
1016
8CSM/P-#C1270-#C1450
Note

Features

Signal Path
Figure 624 shows the operation of the 8CSM/P-#C1270-#C1450 and illustrates the signal
Figure 624: 8CSM/P-#C1270-#C1450 Operation Scheme
Receive Direction
The 8CSM/P-#C1270-#C1450 receives a composite CWDM channel signal through the
input N-D of the network port from the far end of the link. The DEMUX filter demultiplexes the composite CWDM channel signal into its component channels and
CWDM channel modules.
1017
8CSM/P-#C1270-#C1450
Transmit Direction
The 8CSM/P-#C1270-#C1450 receives eight individual CWDM channels from the
MUX filter multiplexes the incoming channels into one channel signal and couples it into
the output fiber. The composite CWDM channel signal is then transmitted through the
output N-M of the network port to the far end of the link.
Slot Positions
The 8CSM/P-#C1270-#C1450 is 8 HP wide and therefore occupies two regular slots. It
can be placed in slots 1 and 3 of the SH1HU/PASSIVE shelf.
Specifications
1018
1CSM/P+#Cxxxx
1CSM/P+#Cxxxx
Figure 625: 1CSM/P+#Cxxxx Front View
1019
1CSM/P+#Cxxxx
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 1CSM/P+#Cxxxx faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 202: 1CSM/P+#Cxxxx Faceplate Markings
Optical Ports
M
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
network port
upgrade port
client port
Variants
The 1CSM/P+#Cxxxx (passive optical single channel CWDM splitter and combiner
module with upgrade port) is available in 16 variants, one for each of the 16 CWDM
channels the module supports. The variants are listed in Table 203.
Table 203: 1CSM/P+#Cxxxx Module Variants
1020
Variants
Description
1CSM/P+#C1270
passive optical single channel CWDM splitter and

combiner module with upgrade port adding/dropping
channel #C1270
1CSM/P+#C1290

channel #C1290
1CSM/P+#C1310

channel #C1310
1CSM/P+#C1330

channel #C1330
1CSM/P+#C1350

channel #C1350
1CSM/P+#C1370

channel #C1370
1CSM/P+#Cxxxx
Table 203: 1CSM/P+#Cxxxx Module Variants
Variants
Description
1CSM/P+#C1430

channel #C1430
1CSM/P+#C1450

channel #C1450
1CSM/P+#C1470

channel #C1470
1CSM/P+#C1490

channel #C1490
1CSM/P+#C1510

channel #C1510
1CSM/P+#C1530

channel #C1530
1CSM/P+#C1550

channel #C1550
1CSM/P+#C1570

channel #C1570
1CSM/P+#C1590

channel #C1590
1CSM/P+#C1610

channel #C1610
above). The front view of the 1CSM/P+#C1270 is illustrated in Figure 625 as an example.
Description
The 1CSM/P+#Cxxxx is a passive optical single channel CWDM splitter and combiner
module with upgrade port. It is designed for bidirectional data transfer in dual-fiber linear
add/drop and ring configurations. On a per-wavelength basis, it allows access to a
specific channel from a network fiber while passing the remaining channel spectrum. For
this purpose, the module provides one network port, one client port and one upgrade port.
1021
1CSM/P+#Cxxxx
The 1CSM/P+#Cxxxx contains a combination of specific add/drop optical filters. These
filters add/drop a specific channel to/out of the CWDM channel spectrum while reflecting
all other channels onto the upgrade port.
Using the upgrade port the 1CSM/P+#Cxxxx module can be cascaded to add and drop
specific CWDM channels at a certain site.
Note

Features
Support of 16 channels (#C1270 - #C1610) in accordance with ITU-T G.694.2 (20nm

channel spacing) and according to ADVA Optical Networkings channel plan
Signal Path
Figure 626 shows the operation of the 1CSM/P+#C1270 as an example and illustrates
variants.
Figure 626: 1CSM/P+#C1270 Operation Scheme
1022
1CSM/P+#Cxxxx

The 1CSM/P+#C1270 receives a composite CWDM channel signal through the input ND of the network port from the far end of the link. In the direction of signal flow, the drop
filter separates a specific channel, e.g. #C1270, from the input fiber into the output C-D of
the client port for transmission to the corresponding channel module. Simultaneously the
remaining channel spectrum is reflected onto the output U-D of the upgrade port.
Transmit Direction (Adding a single channel)

The 1CSM/P+#C1270 receives a specific channel, e.g. #C1270, from the corresponding
channel module through the input C-M of the client port.
The add filter reinserts this channel in the direction of data flow into the channel spectrum
received through the input U-M of the upgrade port. The composite CWDM channel
signal is coupled into the output fiber and transmitted through output N-M of the network
port to the far end of the link.
Slot Positions
The 1CSM/P+#Cxxxx is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in slots 1 through 4 of the
SH1HU/PASSIVE shelf.
Specifications
1023
1CSM/P+#Cxxxx-E/W
1CSM/P+#Cxxxx-E/W
Figure 627: 1CSM/P+#Cxxxx-E/W Front View
1024
1CSM/P+#Cxxxx-E/W
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 1CSM/P+#Cxxxx-E/W faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 204: 1CSM/P+#Cxxxx-E/W Faceplate
Markings
Optical Ports
M
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
NW
network port west
NE
network port east
UW
upgrade port west
UE
upgrade port east
CW
client port west
CE
client port east
Variants
The 1CSM/P+#Cxxxx-E/W (passive optical east/west single channel CWDM splitter
and combiner module with upgrade port) is available in 16 variants, one for each of the 16
CWDM channels the module supports. The variants are listed in Table 205.
Table 205: 1CSM/P+#Cxxxx-E/W Module Variants
Variants
Description
1CSM/P+#C1270-E/W
passive optical east/west single channel CWDM

splitter and combiner module with upgrade port
1CSM/P+#C1290-E/W

1CSM/P+#C1310-E/W

1CSM/P+#C1330-E/W

1025
1CSM/P+#Cxxxx-E/W
Table 205: 1CSM/P+#Cxxxx-E/W Module Variants
Variants
Description
1CSM/P+#C1350-E/W

1CSM/P+#C1370-E/W

1CSM/P+#C1430-E/W

1CSM/P+#C1450-E/W

1CSM/P+#C1470-E/W

1CSM/P+#C1490-E/W

1CSM/P+#C1510-E/W

1CSM/P+#C1530-E/W

1CSM/P+#C1550-E/W

1CSM/P+#C1570-E/W

1CSM/P+#C1590-E/W

1CSM/P+#C1610-E/W

above). The front view of the 1CSM/P+#C1270-E/W is illustrated in Figure 627 as an
example.
1026
1CSM/P+#Cxxxx-E/W
Description
The 1CSM/P+#Cxxxx-E/W is a passive optical east/west single channel CWDM splitter
and combiner module with upgrade port. It is designed for bi-directional data transfer in
dual-fiber linear add/drop and ring configurations. On a per-wavelength basis it allows
access to a specific channel from an east-side and west-side network fiber pair while
passing the remaining channel spectrum. For this purpose, the module provides two
network ports, two client ports and two upgrade ports.
The 1CSM/P+#Cxxxx-E/W contains two identical full-duplex add/drop optical filter sets
for east-west applications on one module. The filters add/drop a specific channel to/out of
the CWDM channel spectrum while reflecting all other channels to the upgrade ports.
The module feeds the isolated (single) channel as well as the passed through CWDM
channel spectrum into separate two-fiber paths, going in opposite directions into the
network (east/west). The isolated channel is interfaced to the corresponding channel
modules on the client side. Using the upgrade ports the 1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W module can
be cascaded to add and drop specific CWDM channels at a certain site.
Note

Features
Support of 16 channels (#C1270 - #C1610) in accordance with ITU-T G.694.2 (20nm

channel spacing) and according to ADVA Optical Networkings channel plan
Signal Path
Figure 628 shows the operation of the 1CSM/P+#C1270-E/W as an example and
other module variants.
1027
1CSM/P+#Cxxxx-E/W
Figure 628: 1CSM/P+#C1270-E/W Operation Scheme

The 1CSM/P+#C1270-E/W receives a composite CWDM channel signal through the
direction of signal flow, the drop filters separate a specific channel, e.g. #C1270, from
either input fibers into the outputs CW-D and CE-D of the client ports west and east for
channel spectrum is reflected to the outputs UW-D and UE-D of the upgrade ports west
and east.

The 1CSM/P+#C1270-E/W receives a specific channel, e.g. #C1270, from the
corresponding channel modules through the inputs CW-M and CE-M of the client ports
west and east. The add filters reinsert this channel in the directions of signal flow into the
channel spectra received through the inputs UW-M and UE-M of the upgrade ports west
and east. The composite CWDM channel signals are coupled into either output fibers and
Slot Positions
The 1CSM/P+#C1270-E/W is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in slots 1 through 4 of the
SH1HU/PASSIVE shelf.
Specifications
1028
OSFM+#1510
OSFM+#1510
Figure 629: OSFM+#1510 Front View
1029
OSFM+#1510
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the OSFM+#1510 faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 206: OSFM+#1510 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
network port
upgrade port
client port

module
Description
The OSFM+#1510 is an optical supervisory channel filter module with upgrade port. It is
used to add/drop an optical supervisory channel (OSC#1510) into/from the network fiber
while passing through the DWDM channel spectrum. For this purpose, the module
contains a set of identical optical filters performing the add/drop function at the predefined OSC wavelength of 1510 nm.
The OSFM+#1510 provides one network port, one client port and one upgrade port. The
client port is directly connected to an OSCM-PN module. The upgrade port is connected
to the appropriate optical filter modules in order to access individual DWDM channels.
The OSFM+#1510 is only required in configurations where an OSCM-PN equipped with
an SFP/FE/C1510V/SM/LC is to be used.
Features
1030
Support of up to 40 channels (wavelengths) in the C band and up to 40 channels

(wavelengths) in the L band according to ITU-T G.694.1 (100 GHz spacing)

(50 GHz spacing)
OSC at the wavelength of 1510 nm
Transparent for all 120 DWDM channels
OSFM+#1510
Signal Path
Figure 630 shows the operation of the OSFM+#1510 and illustrates the signal path, which
is described below.
Figure 630: OSFM+#1510 Operation Scheme

The OSFM+#1510 receives a composite DWDM channel signal along with the OSC
#1510 through the input N-D of the network port from the far end of the link. In the
direction of signal flow, the optical filter separates the OSC #1510 from the input fiber into
the output C-D of the client port for transmission to the OSCM-PN module (configured
with the OSC wavelength of 1510 nm). Simultaneously the entire DWDM channel
spectrum is reflected onto the output U-D of the upgrade port to be transmitted to an
optical filter module.

The OSFM+#1510 receives the OSC #1510 from the OSCM-PN module (configured with
the OSC wavelength of 1510 nm) through the input C-M of the client port. The optical
filter reinserts this channel in the direction of signal flow into the DWDM channel
spectrum received through the input U-M of the upgrade port. The resulting output signal
is coupled into the output fiber and transmitted through output N-M of the network port to
the far end of the link.
Slot Positions
The OSFM+#1510 is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and slots:
1031
OSFM+#1630
Specifications
OSFM+#1630
Figure 631: OSFM+#1630 Front View
1032
OSFM+#1630
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the OSFM+#1630 faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 207: OSFM+#1630 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Tx
transmit
Rx
receive
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
network port
upgrade port
client port

module
Description
The OSFM+#1630 is an optical supervisory channel filter module with upgrade port. It is
used to add/drop an optical supervisory channel (OSC#1630) into/from the network fiber
while passing through the CWDM or DWDM channel spectrum. For this purpose, the
module contains a set of identical optical filters performing the add/drop function at the
pre-defined wavelength of 1630 nm.
The OSFM+#1630 provides one network port, one client port and one upgrade port. The
client port is directly connected to an OSCM-V#1630 module. The upgrade port is
connected to the appropriate optical filter modules in order to access individual
DWDM/CWDM channels. The OSFM+#1630 is only required in configurations where an
OSC is to be used.
Features
Support of up to 40 channels (wavelengths) in the C band and 40 channels


(50 GHz spacing)
Support of 16 channels (wavelengths) according to ITU-T G.694.2 (20 nm

wavelength spacing)
OSC at the wavelength of 1630 nm
Transparent for all 80 DWDM channels and for the 8 CWDM channels
1033
OSFM+#1630
Signal Path
Figure 632 shows the operation of the OSFM+#1630 and illustrates the signal path, which
is described below.
Figure 632: OSFM+#1630 Operation Scheme

The OSFM+#1630 receives a composite CWDM or DWDM channel signal along with the
OSC #1630 through the input N-D of the network port from the far end of the link. In the
direction of signal flow, the optical filter separates the OSC #1630 from the input fiber into
the output C-D of the client port for transmission to the OSCM-V#1630 module.
Simultaneously the entire CWDM or DWDM channel spectrum is reflected onto the
output U-D of the upgrade port to be transmitted to an optical filter module.

The OSFM+#1630 receives the OSC #1630 from the OSCM-V#1630 module through the
input C-M of the client port. The optical filter reinserts this channel in the direction of
signal flow into the CWDM or DWDM channel spectrum received through the input U-M
of the upgrade port. The resulting output signal is coupled into the output fiber and
transmitted through output N-M of the network port to the far end of the link.
Slot Positions
The OSFM+#1630 is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and slots:
Specifications
1034
2-OTFM+#1650
2-OTFM+#1650
Figure 633: 2-OTFM+#1650 Front View
1035
2-OTFM+#1650
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 2-OTFM+#1650 faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 208: 2-OTFM+#1650 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Input/Output
Input/Output
network port
upgrade port
client port

module
Description
The 2-OTFM+#1650 is an optical time-domain reflectometer filter module with upgrade
port. It is used to add/drop one or two OTDR signals at a wavelength of
#1650 nm into/from one or two network fibers while passing through the CWDM or
DWDM channel spectrum. For this purpose, the module contains a set of identical optical
filters performing the add/drop function at the pre-defined wavelength of 1650 nm in
single-fiber working DWDM/CWDM point-to-point configurations.
The 2-OTFM+#1650 provides one network port, one client port and one upgrade port. The
data signal transmission of the network and client ports is bi-directional. Therefore each
connector of the network and client ports are used as common connector for signal input
and output. The connectors of the upgrade port are used for unidirectional data signal
transmission to receive or transmit the DWDM or CWDM signal.
The client port is directly connected to the OTDR/8-OTH/1HU/AC of the OTDR for
monitoring the optical link. The upgrade port is connected to the appropriate optical filter
modules in order to access individual DWDM or CWDM channels.
Features
1036
Support of up to 40 channels (wavelengths) in the C band and 40 channels


(50 GHz spacing)

wavelength spacing)
Support of two OTDR channels at 1650 nm in four different traffic scenarios
Bi-directional network/client port and unidirectional upgrade port
Consists of two single network lines
Transparent for all 120 DWDM and 16 CWDM channels
2-OTFM+#1650
Signal Path
The 2-OTFM+#1650 can be used in four different traffic scenarios, which are illustrated in
Figure 634, Figure 635, Figure 636 and Figure 637. The signal path of each operation is
described.
Traffic of N-1 to U-1 and N-2 to U-2

(Dropping/Adding the 1650 nm Wavelength)
Figure 634: 2-OTFM+#1650 Operation Scheme - N-1 to U-1 and N-2 to U-2
Receive Direction
On the first and second network line, the 2-OTFM+#1650 receives a composite DWDM
or CWDM channel spectrum from the far end along with two OTDR channels at a
wavelength of 1650 nm from the dark fiber through the input/output N-1 and N-2 of the
network port. In the direction of signal flow, the optical filters separate the OTDR
channels from the network fiber into the input/output C-1 and C-2 of the client port for
transmission to the OTDR/8-OTH/1HU/AC. The entire DWDM or CWDM channel
spectrum is passed onto the output U-1 and U-2 of the upgrade port to be transmitted to
an optical filter module.
1037
2-OTFM+#1650
Transmit Direction
On the first and second network line, the 2-OTFM+#1650 receives OTDR channels at a
wavelength of 1650 nm through the input/output C-1 and C-2. The optical filters add the
OTDR channels in the opposite direction of the signal flow towards the input/output N-1
and N-2 of the network port to the dark fiber of the link.
Traffic of U-1 to N-1 and N-2 to U-2

Figure 635: 2-OTFM+#1650 Operation Scheme - U-1 to N-1 and U-2 to N-2
Receive Direction
On the first and second network line, the 2-OTFM+#1650 receives in opposite direction of
signal flow two OTDR channels at a wavelength of 1650 nm through the input/output N-1
and N-2 of the network port from the dark fiber of the link. The optical filters separate the
OTDR channels from the network fiber into the input/output C-1 and C-2 of the client port
for transmission to the OTDR/8-OTH/1HU/AC.
Transmit Direction
On the first and second network line, the 2-OTFM+#1650 receives in direction of signal
flow a DWDM or CWDM signal spectrum through the input U-1 and U-2 of the upgrade
port onto the optical filters. Simultaneously the 2-OTFM+#1650 receives two OTDR
channels at a wavelength of 1650 nm through the input/output C-1 and C-2 of the client
port. In direction of signal flow, the optical filters add the OTDR channels. The OTDR
channels and the DWDM/CWDM channels are then transmitted through the input/output
N-1 and N-2 of the network port onto the dark fiber and far end of the link.
1038
2-OTFM+#1650
Traffic of N-1 to U-1 and U-2 to N-2

Figure 636: 2-OTFM+#1650 Operation Scheme - N-1 to U-1 and U-2 to N-2
Receive Direction
On the first network line, the 2-OTFM+#1650 receives a composite DWDM or CWDM
channel spectrum from the far end along with an OTDR channel at a wavelength of 1650
nm from the dark fiber through the input/output N-1 of the network port. In direction of
signal flow, the optical filter separates the OTDR channel from the network fiber into the
common input/output C-1 of the client port for transmission to the OTDR/8OTH/1HU/AC. The entire DWDM/CWDM channel spectrum received through N-1 is
reflected onto the output U-1 of the upgrade port to be transmitted to an optical filter
module.
On the second network line, the 2-OTFM+#1650 receives in the opposite direction of
signal flow an OTDR channel at a wavelength of 1650 nm through the input/output N-2 of
the network port from the dark fiber of the link. The optical filter separates the OTDR
channel from the network fiber into the input/output C-2 of the client port for transmission
to the OTDR/8-OTH/1HU/AC.
Transmit Direction
On the first network line, the 2-OTFM+#1650 receives an OTDR channel at a wavelength
of 1650 nm through the input/output C-1 of the client port. In the opposite direction of
signal flow, the optical filter adds the OTDR channel towards the input/output N-1 of the
network port to the dark fiber of the link.
On the second network line, the 2-OTFM+#1650 receives a DWDM/CWDM signal
spectrum through the input U-2 of the upgrade port onto the optical filter. Simultaneously
the 2-OTFM+#1650 receives an OTDR channel at a wavelength of 1650 nm through the
input/output C-2 of the client port. In direction of signal flow, the optical filter adds the
OTDR channels. The OTDR channel and the DWDM/CWDM channels are then
1039
2-OTFM+#1650
transmitted through the input/output N-2 of the network port onto the dark fiber and far
end of the link.
Traffic of N-2 to U-2 and U-1 to N-1

Figure 637: 2-OTFM+#1650 Operation Scheme - N-2 to U-2 and U-1 to N-1
Receive Direction
On the first network line, the 2-OTFM+#1650 receives in the opposite direction of signal
flow an OTDR channel at a wavelength of 1650 nm through the input/output connector N1 of the network port. The optical filter separates the OTDR channel from the network
fiber into the input/output connector C-2 of the client port for transmission to the OTDR/8OTH/1HU/AC.
On the second network line, the 2-OTFM+#1650 receives a composite DWDM or CWDM
channel spectrum from the far end along with one OTDR channel at a wavelength of 1650
nm from the dark fiber through the input/output connector N-2 of the network port. In
direction of signal flow, the optical filter of the first network line separates the OTDR
channel from the network fiber into the input/output connector C-2 of the client port for
transmission to the OTDR/8-OTH/1HU/AC. The entire DWDM/CWDM channel
spectrum received through the network port connector N-2 is reflected onto the output
connector U-2 of the upgrade port to be transmitted to an optical filter module.
Transmit Direction
On the first network line, the 2-OTFM+#1650 receives a DWDM/CWDM signal spectrum
through the input U-1 of the upgrade port onto the optical filters. Simultaneously the 2OTFM+#1650 receives an OTDR channel at a wavelength of 1650 nm through the
input/output C-1 of the client port. In direction of signal flow, the optical filter adds the
OTDR channel and combines it with the DWDM/CWDM signal spectrum. The combined
channels are then transmitted through the input/output N-1 of the network port to the far
end of the link.
1040
2-OTFM+#1650
On the first network line, the 2-OTFM+#1650 receives an OTDR channel at a wavelength
of 1650 nm through the input/output C-2 of the client port. In the opposite direction of
signal flow, the optical filter adds the OTDR channel towards the input/output N-2 of the
network port to the dark fiber of the link.
Slot Positions
The 2-OTFM+#1650 is 4HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and slots:
Specifications
1041
5PSM
5PSM
Figure 638: 5PSM Front View
Faceplate Markings
Table 209 lists all abbreviations on the 5PSM faceplate and their meanings.
Table 209: 5PSM Faceplate Markings
1042
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Multiplex
Demultiplex
Power supply status
5PSM
C1 - C5
Client port 1 - client port 5
Network port
Description
The 5PSM is a 5-port optical power splitter and combiner module. It is designed for bidirectional data transfer in dual-fiber point to point, linear add/drop and ring configurations.
The 5PSM incorporates one splitter and one combiner with 5 client ports each.
This module is used to split and combine 5 client ports, each containing an optical
multiplex of up to 40 channels, to and from one network port. The 5PSM combined with
five CCM-C40/8 or CCM-C80/8 filters enables supports up to 40 channels. The channels
can be dynamically configured to add/drop at any client port of the CCM-C40/8 or CCMC80/8 reconfigurable filter.
In the de-multiplex path the module splits network port input signals into 5 signals that
each contain the entire optical multiplex of up to 80 channels. This means that all
wavelengths received on the network input are duplicated and sent to the client port
outputs. In the multiplex path the module combines the optical signals received on all 5
client input ports into a single optical multiplex of up to 80 channels and forwards the
combined aggregated signals to the network output port. Network element provisioning
software validates that duplicate channels are not assigned on separate client ports. This
prevents wavelength collisions from occurring from duplicate wavelength assignments
on a client add port.
The 5PSM is functionally an optical device. However, the module is capable of reporting
equipment inventory information and related alarms in a FSP3000-R7 chassis. The
5PSM does not support optical performance monitoring or system alarms.
Features
The 5PSM key features are:
Support all DWDM wavelengths in the C-Band (up to 80 channels) in accordance

with the ITU-T G.694.1 channel plan
Transport of optical signals modulated at any rate from 100 Mbps to 40 Gbps
Size: 5 HU high, 4 HP wide (occupies 1 slot)
Client Port
The 5PSM module features 5 client ports with dual LC optical bulkhead connectors. M is
the input connection and D is the output connection. The client ports always connect to
CCM-C40/8 or CCM-C80/8 modules. No special tools are required to install or remove
the fiber connections.
1043
5PSM
Network Port
The 5PSM module features one network port with dual LC optical bulkhead
connectors.One network connector is the output labeled N-M, and second connector is
the input labeled with N-D. The network port generally connects to optical amplifiers. No
special tools are required to install or remove the fiber connections.
Signal Path
Figure 639 shows a simplified block diagram of the 5PSM module.
Figure 639: 5PSM Block Diagram
5PSM
C 1-M
C 2-M
C 3-M
C 4-M
C 5-M
1 x 5
N -M
Combiner
C 1-D
C 2-D
C 3-D
C 4-D
C 5-D
1 x 5
Splitter
N -D
+12 VDC
Power
Supply
CM -S
CAN
The signal path through a node is typically bi-directional. By using the 5PSM to split and
combine signals together with five CCM-C40/8 reconfigurable filters, up to 40 channels
can be added and dropped on a one interface of a network element. Figure 640 illustrates
a supported optical signal path.
1044
5PSM
Figure 640: Example of 5PSM Optical Signal Flow
Receive Direction
The 5PSM receives composite DWDM channel signals through the network port input ND. In this path the module optically splits the network port input signals into 5 identical
signals that each contain the entire optical signal multiplex of up to 40 channels. Each of
the 5 client ports output the copy of the optical signal multiplex to the 8 port reconfigurable
filter modules at client ports C1-D to C5-D.
Transmit Direction
The 5PSM receives 5 sets of optical multiplexed channels from the 8 port reconfigurable
filter modules through the inputs C1-M to C5-M of the client ports. In this path the module
optically combines the 5 client port input signals into a single multiplex of up to 40
channels for output on network port N-M.
Note: The network egress path does not prevent channels for the same wavelength from
interfering with each other.
1045
5PSM
Slot Positions
The 5PSM module is 4HP (one slot wide). It can be placed into following shelves and
slots:
Specifications
1046
8PSM
8PSM
Figure 641: 8PSM Front View
1047
8PSM
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 8PSM faceplate and their meaning.
LED Indicators
Ports
Receive
Transmit
C1 - C8
Client ports 1 - 8
Network port
Inventory port
Power status
Description
The 8PSM is an optical splitter and combiner module. This module is used to split an
optical signal received on the network to the 8 client ports and combine the optical signal
from 8 client ports and route them to the network port. The 8PSM supports up to 96
DWDM channels (19125 to 19600).
The 8PSM is an optical device that is capable of reporting inventory information. The
8PSM can be installed in either SH9HU shelves or passive shelves. In SH9HU shelves
inventory information is collected across the backplane. In passive shelves, A cable
must be connected from a CEM or PSCU I port to the 8PSM I port to report inventory
information.The 8PSM does not support optical performance monitoring or optical alarms.
Features
The 8PSM key features are:
Supports up to 96 channels with using 50 GHz channel spacing
Routes channels from the network port to all client ports
Routes all channels received on client ports to the network port
Client Port
The 8PSM module features 8 client ports with dual LC optical connectors. R is the input
connection and T is the output connection. No special tools are required to install or
remove the fiber connections.
Network Port
The 8PSM module features one network port with dual LC connectors. R is the input
connection and T is the output connection. No special tools are required to install or
remove the fiber connections.
1048
8PSM
Signal Path
The following is an example of a simplified block diagram for the 8PSM module.
Figure 642: 8PSM Block Diagram
Using the 8PSM in combination with a CCM-C96/9 reconfigurable filter, up to 72 coherent

channels can be added and dropped Figure 643 illustrates a supported optical signal path.
Figure 643: Example of 8PSM Optical Signal Flow
N to C Path
The 8PSM module splits the network port input signal into 8 identical signals. Each of the
8 client ports output is a copy of the optical signal network port input signal.
1049
8PSM
C to N Path
The 8PSM combines optical channels received on the 8 client ports and combines them
for transmission out the network port.
Note: This path does not prevent channels of the same wavelength from interfering with
each other.
Slot Positions
The 8PSM module is 8HP (two slots wide). It can be placed into following shelves and
slots:
SH1HU-R, SH1HU-R/PF, SH1HU-F/2DC, SH1HU-HP/2DC, SH1HU-HP/ETEMP/2DC, slot 1
SH1HU/PASSIVE/FT, slot 1 and 3
Specifications
1050
PSM-95/5
PSM-95/5
Figure 644: PSM-95/5 Front View
1051
PSM-95/5
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the PSM-95/5 faceplate and their meanings.
Table 211: PSM-95/5 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
receive
transmit
nc
not connected (unused port)
Mon
monitoring port
client port/network port

module
Description
The PSM-95/5 is an optical power splitter module used for power monitoring and optical
spectrum analyzing. It contains a splitter that splits the optical power of the input signal
into two portions. One portion of the optical power is launched into the network line and
the other one onto the monitor line to provide monitor functionality. The signal traffic is
passed through the module in an unidirectional direction.
The input 1-R and the output 1-T are connected the network fibers. The output Mon-T of
the monitoring port is used to connect the module to an OSA.
The PSM-95/5 adds an additional insertion loss to the input (1-T) and
thus decreases the link budget.
Note
Features
Support of operating wavelengths in range between 1470 nm to 1610 nm
Signal Path
Figure 645 shows the operation of the PSM-95/5 and illustrates the signal path, which is
described below.
1052
PSM-95/5
Figure 645: Operation Scheme of the PSM-95/5
The PSM-95/5 receives a power signal over a network fiber through the input 1-R of the
client port. The optical splitter splits the incoming power signal at the ratio of 95:5. That
is, 95% of the optical power is coupled into the output 1-T of the network port and 5% of
the optical power is coupled into the output Mon-T of the monitoring port.
Slot Positions
The PSM-95/5 is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and slots:
Specifications
1053
2PSM-95/5
2PSM-95/5
Figure 646: 2PSM-95/5 Front View
1054
2PSM-95/5
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 2PSM-95/5 faceplate and their meanings.
Table 212: 2PSM-95/5 Faceplate Markings

LED Indicators
Optical Ports
network port
client port
receive
transmit
Mon
monitoring port
N/R to C/T
monitor line from network

port receive to client port
transmit
C/R to N/T
monitor line from client

port receive to network
port transmit

the module
Description
The 2PSM-95/5 is a 2-way optical power splitter module used for power monitoring and
optical spectrum analysis at any point within an network of ADVA Optical Networking.
For this purpose, it can be simply connected into the fiber link where the optical power or
the signal is to be measured. Data traffic is passed through the module in two directions:
from the Network to Client and from the Client to Network.
The 2PSM-95/5 module contains two splitters that divides the client and network receive
signals into the signal path and the monitoring path at the same time. 95% of the optical
power is present at the network or client transmit interfaces and the other 5% is present
on the monitor interfaces to provide monitor functionality.
The client interface C is connected to the network interface of another module, and the
network interface N is connected to the client interface of another module. The outputs of
the monitoring port MON may be connected to a power meter or OSA. The connector
labeled Mon-C/R to N/T is used to monitor signals sent onto the network line. The
connector labeled Mon-N/R to C/T is used to monitor signals coming from the network line.
The 2PSM-95/5 adds an additional insertion loss to the inputs C/R and
N/R, and thus decreases the link budget.
Note
Features
Support of operating wavelengths in the range between 1470 nm through 1610 nm
1055
2PSM-95/5
Power level monitoring of the client and network signal
One bidirectional client and network interface
Dual monitoring interface (client receive and network receive)
Signal Path
Figure 647 shows the operation of the 2PSM-95/5 and illustrates the signal path, which is
described below.
Figure 647: Operation Scheme of the 2PSM-95/5
Ingress Direction
In the ingress direction, the following takes place:
The 2PSM-95/5 receives a power signal over a client fiber through the input connector
C/R of the client port. The optical splitter splits the incoming power signal at the ratio of
95:5. That is, 95% of the optical power is coupled into the output N/T of the network port,
and 5% of the optical power is coupled into the output Mon-C/R to N/T of the monitoring
port.
Egress Direction
In the egress direction, the following takes place:
The 2PSM-95/5 receives a power signal over a network fiber through the input connector
N/R of the network port. The optical splitter splits the incoming power signal at the ratio of
95:5. That is, 95% of the optical power is coupled into the output C/T of the client port,
and 5% of the optical power is coupled into the output Mon-N/R to C/T of the monitoring
port.
1056
2PSM-95/5
Slot Positions
The 2PSM-95/5 is1 slot (4 HP) wide. It can be placed into following shelves and slots:
Specifications
1057
1PM/SM
1PM/SM
Figure 648: 1PM/SM Front View
Faceplate Markings
Table 213 lists all abbreviations on the 1PM/SM faceplate and their meanings.
Table 213: 1PM/SM Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
1058
Optical Ports
1PM/SM
P

module
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
client port
NW
network port west
NE
network port east
Description
The 1PM/SM (single-port protection module single-mode) is an optical module that
provides channel card protection. It has one client port that supports single-mode signals.
The network ports of the 1PM/SM are typically connected to the client ports of channel
modules.
The 1PM/SM contains an optical splitter and an optical combiner to de-multiplex and
multiplex optical signals between the client port and the two network ports.
In the de-multiplex path, the module splits one optical signal received on the client port
into two duplicate signals for output on the network ports west and east. In the multiplex
path, the module combines the optical signals received on each network port into a
multiplex for output on the client port.
The 1PM/SM works exclusively with channel modules supporting channel card
protection. The 1PM/SM network ports are connected to client ports of protected channel
modules. The network ports of the channel modules are typically connected to filter
modules that interface to separate network fibers. The separate network fiber pairs carry
the channels in the east and west directions. The client signals from the channel modules
are attenuated by the 1PM/SM module insertion loss in both transmit and receive
directions.
Features
Supports following wavelengths in accordance with ITU-T G.694.1 and according to

ADVA Optical Networkings channel plan:
o
o
o
any single-mode signal at 1310 nm, 1510 nm or 1550 nm

any DWDM C-band or L-band wavelength
any CWDM wavelength
Support of one protected service
Signal Path
Figure 649 shows the operation of the 1PM/SM and illustrates the signal path, which is
described below.
1059
1PM/SM
Figure 649: Operation Scheme of the 1PM/SM
Transmit Direction
The 1PM/SM receives a client signal on the C-D input from a CPE over a single fiber.
The module optically splits the client port input into two identical signals. These optical
signals are transmitted to the outputs NW-D and NE-D, which are typically connected to
the pair of channel modules.
Receive Direction
The 1PM/SM receives signal inputs on the NW-M and NE-M network ports. The module
optically combines the input signals and transmits them through the output C-M port,
which is connected to the CPE.
Slot Positions
The 1PM/SM is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and slots:
Specifications
1060
1PM/MM
1PM/MM
Figure 650: 1PM/MM Front View
Faceplate Markings
Table 214 lists all abbreviations on the 1PM/MM faceplate and their meanings.
Table 214: 1PM/MM Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
1061
1PM/MM
P

module
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
client port
NW
network port west
NE
network port east
Description
The 1PM/MM (single-port protection module multimode) is an optical module that
provides channel card protection. It has one client port that supports multi-mode signals.
The network ports of the 1PM/MM are typically connected to the client ports of channel
modules.
The 1PM/MM contains an optical splitter and an optical combiner to de-multiplex and
multiplex optical signals between the client port and the two network ports.
In the de-multiplex path, the module splits one optical signal received on the client port
into two duplicate signals for output on the network ports west and east. In the multiplex
path, the module combines the optical signals received on each network port into a
multiplex for output on the client port.
The 1PM/MM works exclusively with channel modules supporting channel card
protection. The 1PM/MM network ports are connected to client ports of protected channel
modules. The network ports of the channel modules are typically connected to filter
are attenuated by the 1PM/MM module insertion loss in both transmit and receive
directions.
Features
Support multimode wavelengths
Support of one protected service
Signal Path
Figure 651 shows the operation of the 1PM/MM and illustrates the signal path, which is
described below.
1062
1PM/MM
Figure 651: Operation Scheme of the 1PM/MM
Transmit Direction
The 1PM/MM receives a client signal on the C-D input from a CPE over a multi-mode
fiber. The module optically splits the client port input into two identical signals. These
optical signals are transmitted to the outputs NW-D and NE-D, which are typically
connected to the pair of channel modules.
Receive Direction
The 1PM/MM receives signal inputs on the NW-M and NE-M network ports. The module
optically combines the input signals and transmits them through the output C-M port,
which is connected to the CPE.
Slot Positions
The 1PM/MM is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and slots:
Specifications
1063
2PM/SM
2PM/SM
Figure 652: 2PM/SM Front View
Faceplate Markings
Table 215 lists all abbreviations on the 2PM/SM faceplate and their meanings.
LED Indicators
1064
Optical Ports
2PM/SM
P

module
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
2C
client port 2
1C
client port 1
2NW
network port west 2
1NW
network port west 1
2NE
network port east 2
1NE
network port east 1
Description
The 2PM/SM (2-port protection module single-mode) is an optical module that provides
channel card protection. It has two client ports supporting single-mode signals. The four
network ports of the 2PM/SM are typically connected to the client ports of channel
modules.
The 2PM/SM contains an optical splitter and an optical combiner to de-multiplex and
multiplex optical signals between the client ports and the network ports.
In the de-multiplex path, the module splits two optical signals received on the client ports
into four duplicate signals for output on the network ports west and east. In the multiplex
path, the module combines the optical signals received on each network ports into a
multiplex for output on the client ports.
The 2PM/SM works exclusively with channel modules supporting channel card
protection. The 2PM/SM network ports are connected to client ports of protected channel
modules. The network ports of the channels modules are typically connected to filter
are attenuated by the 2PM/SM module insertion loss in both transmit and receive
direction.
Features

o
o
o

any CWDM wavelength
Support of two protected services
1065
2PM/SM
Signal Path
Figure 653 shows the operation of the 2PM/SM and illustrates the signal path, which is
described below.
Figure 653: Operation Scheme of the 2PM/SM
Transmit Direction
The 2PM/SM receives two client signals on the 1C-D and 2C-D inputs from the CPE
over two single fibers. The module optically splits the client port input signals into four
identical signals. These optical signals are transmitted to the output 1NW-D and 1NE-D
as well as 2NW-D and 2NE-D, which are typically connected to the pair of channel
modules.
Receive Direction
The 2PM/SM receives signal inputs on the 1NW-D and 1NE-D as well as 2NW-D and
2NE-D network ports.The module optically combines the four input signals into two
signals and transmits them through the output 1C-M and 2C-M, which are connected to
the CPE.
Slot Positions
The 2PM/SM is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and slots:
1066
2PM/SM
Specifications
1067
2PM/MM
2PM/MM
Figure 654: 2PM/MM Front View
1068
2PM/MM
Faceplate Markings
Table 216 lists all abbreviations on the 2PM/MM faceplate and their meanings.
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
2C
client port 2
1C
client port 1
2NW
network port west 2
1NW
network port west 1
2NE
network port east 2
1NE
network port east 1

module
Description
The 2PM/MM (2-port protection module multimode) is an optical module that provides
channel card protection. It has two client ports supporting multi-mode signals. The four
network ports of the 2PM/MM are typically connected to the client ports of channel
modules.
The 2PM/MM contains an optical splitter and an optical combiner to de-multiplex and
multiplex optical signals between the client ports and the network ports.
In the de-multiplex path, the module splits two optical signals received on the client ports
into four duplicate signals for output on the network ports west and east. In the multiplex
path, the module combines the optical signals received on each network ports into a
multiplex for output on the client ports.
The 2PM/MM works exclusively with channel modules supporting channel card
protection. The 2PM/MM network ports are connected to client ports of protected channel
modules. The network ports of the channels modules are typically connected to filter
are attenuated by the 2PM/MM module insertion loss in both transmit and receive
direction.
Features
Support multimode wavelengths
Support of two protected services
1069
2PM/MM
Signal Path
Figure 655 shows the operation of the 2PM/MM and illustrates the signal path, which is
described below.
Figure 655: Operation Scheme of the 2PM/MM
Transmit Direction
The 2PM/MM receives two client signals on the 1C-D and 2C-D inputs from the CPE
over two multi-mode fibers. The module optically splits the client port input signals into
four identical signals. These optical signals are transmitted to the output 1NW-D and
1NE-D as well as 2NW-D and 2NE-D, which are typically connected to the pair of
channel modules.
Receive Direction
The 2PM/MM receives signal inputs on the 1NW-M and 1NE-M as well as 2NW-M and
2NE-M network ports.The module optically combines the four input signals into two
signals and transmits them through the output 1C-M and 2C-M, which are connected to
the CPE.
Slot Positions
The 2PM/MM is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and slots:
1070
2PM/MM
Specifications
1071
2PM/MM-OM3
2PM/MM-OM3
Figure 656: 2PM/MM-OM3 Front View
1072
2PM/MM-OM3
Faceplate Markings
Table 217 lists all abbreviations on the 2PM/MM-OM3 faceplate and their meanings.
Table 217: 2PM/MM-OM3 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
multiplexing
de-multiplexing
2C
client port 2
1C
client port 1
2NW
network port west 2
1NW
network port west 1
2NE
network port east 2
1NE
network port east 1

module
Description
The 2PM/MM-OM3 is a protection module with optical multimode fibers according to the
OM3 standard. It has two client ports and four network ports. The 2PM/MM-OM3 is an
optical module that provides client channel card protection.
The 2PM/MM-OM3 contains two optical splitter and two optical combiner to de-multiplex
and multiplex optical signals between the client ports and the network ports.
In the de-multiplex path, the module splits the optical signal received on the client ports
into two duplicate signals for output on the network line west and east. In the multiplex
path, the module collects the optical signals received on the network line west and east
into a multiplex for output on the client ports.
The 2PM/MM-OM3 works exclusively with channel modules supporting the OM3
standard and client channel card protection. The 2PM/MM-OM3 network ports are
connected to OM3 supported client ports of protected channel modules. The network
ports of the channels modules are typically connected to filter modules that interface to
separate network fibers. The separate network fiber pairs carry the channels in the east
and west directions. The client signals from the channel modules are attenuated by the
2PM/MM-OM3 module insertion loss in both transmit and receive direction.
Features
Support multimode fiber signal transport
Designed for CCCP to support two protected services
Optical multimode fiber type of 50 m according to OM3
1073
2PM/MM-OM3
Signal Path
Figure 657 shows the operation of the 2PM/MM-OM3 and illustrates the signal path,
Figure 657: Operation Scheme of the 2PM/MM-OM3
Transmit Direction
The 2PM/MM-OM3 receives one client signal on the 1C-D input and one client signal on
the 2C-D input from the CPE over multimode fibers. The signal coming from 1C-D is
splitted optically into two identical signals and transmitted to the output ports 1NW-D or
1NE-D. The signal coming from 2C-D is splitted as well optically into two signals, but
then transmitted to the output ports 2NW-D or 2NE-D.The network output ports are
typically connected to the pair of channel modules.
If the network line west or east is the working or protection path depends on the
application.
1074
2PM/MM-OM3
Receive Direction
The 2PM/MM-OM3 receives signal inputs on the 1NW-M or 1NE-M network ports as
well as on the 2NW-M or 2NE-M network ports. The module optically combines the two
input signals coming from 1NW-M or 1NE-M into one signal and transmits them through
the output 1C-M. The two input signals coming from 2NW-M or 2NE-M are combined by
the module as well for transmitting through the output 2C-M,
The client output ports are connected to the CPE.
Slot Positions
The 2PM/MM-OM3 is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and slots:
Specifications
1075
J-Y/SM Cable
J-Y/SM Cable
Figure 658: Example of a J-Y/SM/LC-FC/0310 Cable.
Description
The J-Y/SM (single-mode y-cable) is a 3-port fiber-optic cable with an integrated 50/50
coupler. It has one client port, two network ports and accepts single-mode signals only.
Figure 658 on p.1076 depicts an example of a single-mode y-cable.
The common end of the single-mode y-cable includes the coupler to de-multiplex or
multiplex optical signals between the client port and the two network ports. The split fiber
leads carry the signals in the West and East directions.
The common end of the single-mode y-cable (client port) may be terminated with different
types of connectors such as LC, FC, or SC. The two other ends (network ports) are
terminated with an LC connector only. For easy identification, the jacket of the fibers is
colored yellow (yellow meaning single-mode fiber).
To avoid any contamination on the end face of the ferrules make sure that the
connectors are covered with protective caps when not in use.
1076
J-Y/SM Cable
The amount of single-mode y-cables needed for accomplishing channel card protection
depends on the pluggable transceiver types (standard, bidirectional or video), and not so
much on the type of the protected channel modules.
The single-mode y-cables are handled in the same manner as standard optical cables
with the exception that y-cables should not be employed for fixed shelf installations.
Note
The single-mode y-cables can be delivered with the equipment, but you
have to order them separately. For ordering, contact ADVA Optical
Networking.
Variants
Six variants of single-mode y-cable are currently available. Table 218 lists the singlemode y-cable variants.
Table 218: J-Y/SM Cable Variants
Y-Cable/SM Variants
Description
J-Y/SM/LC/0310
Y-cable for Channel card protection, 3.10 m long, singlemode fiber, LC connectors on client and network ports
J-Y/SM/LC/1000
Y-cable for Channel card protection, 10.00 m long,

single-mode fiber, LC connectors on client and network
ports
J-Y/SM/LC-SC/0310
Y-cable for Channel card protection, 3.10 m long, singlemode fiber, LC to SC
J-Y/SM/LC-SC/1000

single-mode fiber, LC to SC
J-Y/SM/LC-FC/0310
Y-cable for Channel card protection, 3.10 m long, singlemode fiber, LC to FC
J-Y/SM/LC-FC/1000

single-mode fiber, LC to FC
Features

o
o
o

any CWDM wavelength
Support protected services
Unidirectional client and network ports
Fiber type: SM G652
Fiber-optic connectors:
1077
J-Y/SM Cable
o
male, non-angled, simplex LC, FC or SC type connectors on client port

(depends on variant)
male, non-angled, simplex LC type connectors on network ports
Standard lengths: 3.10 meters (10.17 ft.) and 10.00 meters (32.81 ft.), (depends on
variant)
Ease of installation
Signal Path
The single-mode y-cable is designed to allow optical signals to travel only in one
direction. For this reason, two y-cable/SM assemblies must be used together to deliver
the same function as a protection module (1PM/SM)1. While the protection module
occupies a module slot in a shelf, the y-cable/SM assembly pair is installed in the fiber
tray and does not occupy a slot. Using the y-cable/SM pair in place of a protection
module provides the advantage of additional slot space for other modules. The
disadvantage is that the network management system cannot detect the presence of the
y-cable/SM. Please note that the y-cable/SM is not a module, it is a piece of hardware,
that must be provisioned by the user.
The number of single-mode y-cables needed to configure channel card protection
(CCCP) operation depends on the pluggable transceiver types (standard, bidirectional or
video), and not so much on the type of the PM modules (1PM/SM or 2PM/SM). For
example video signals are typically unidirectional and only a single y-cable/SM is needed
for CCCP operation. The remainder of this section describes bidirectional CCCP
operation with two y-cable/SM assemblies used in place of a 1PM/SM module.
One y-cable/SM assembly is used for the Transmit (Tx) direction and a second ycable/SM assembly is used in the Receive (Rx) direction. The signal path in both
directions is described below.
Transmit Direction
The single-mode y-cable splits one client optical signal received on the client port (single
end) into two identical signals for output on the network ports West and East which are
typically connected to the pair of channel modules. See Figure 659 for illustration of the
signal path.
1The 2PM/SM module integrates the function of two 1PM/SM modules into a single
module. Thus four y-cables/SM assemblies are needed to replace one 2PM/SM.
1078
J-Y/SM Cable
Figure 659: Signal Flow in Transmit Direction
As an installation aid, use a permanent pen to mark the fiber connectors.

For the assembly used for the transmit direction, mark these ports:
Note
Network port West as WT
Network port East as ET
Client port as CR
With these markings, the receive and transmit units can be assembled
with the proper orientation to their associated plug interface connectors.
Receive Direction
The single-mode y-cable combines the optical signals received from the Network East
and Network West ports into a multiplex for output on the client port, which is connected
to the customer premises equipment (CPE). See Figure 660 for illustration of the signal
path.
Figure 660: Signal Flow in Receive Direction
1079
J-Y/SM Cable
For the assembly used for the receive direction, mark these ports:
Note
Network port West as WR
Network port East as ER
Client port as CT
Specifications
1080
J-Y/MM62 Cable
J-Y/MM62 Cable
Figure 661: Example of a J-Y/MM62/LC/0310
Description
The J-Y/MM62 (62.5 m multimode y-cable) is a 3-port fiber-optic cable with an integrated
50/50 coupler. It has one client port, two network ports and accepts multimode signals
only. Figure 661 on p.1081 depicts an example of a multimode y-cable.
The common end of the multimode y-cable includes the coupler to de-multiplex or
multiplex optical signals between the client port and the two network ports. The split fiber
leads carry the signals in the West and East directions.
The common end of the multimode y-cable (client port) may be terminated with different
types of connectors such as LC, FC or SC. The two other ends (network ports) are
terminated with a LC connector only. For easy identification, the jacket of the fibers is
colored orange (orange meaning multimode fiber).
To avoid any contamination on the end face of the ferrules, make sure that the
1081
J-Y/MM62 Cable
The amount of multimode y-cables needed for accomplishing channel card protection
depends on the pluggable transceiver types (standard, bidirectional or video), and not so
much on the type of the protected channel modules.
The multimode y-cables are handled in the same manner as standard optical cables with
the exception that y-cables should not be employed for fixed shelf installations.
Note
The multimode y-cables can be delivered with the equipment, but you
Networking.
Variants
Six variants of the J-Y/MM62 cable are currently available. Table 219 lists these variants.
Table 219: J-Y/MM62 Variants
Y-Cable/MM Variants
Description
J-Y/MM62/LC/0310
Y-cable for Channel card protection, 3.10 m long, 62.5

m multimode fiber, LC connectors on client and network ports
J-Y/MM62/LC/1000

62.5 m multimode fiber, LC connectors on client and
network ports
J-Y/MM62/LC-SC/0310
Y-cable for Channel card protection, 3.10 m long, 62.5

m multimode fiber, LC to SC
J-Y/MM62/LC-SC/1000

62.5 m multimode fiber, LC to SC
Features
Support of 850 nm multimode wavelength
Support protected services
Unidirectional client and network ports
Fiber type: 62.5 m MM G.651
Fiber-optic connectors:
o
1082
male, non-angled, simplex LC, FC, or SC type connectors on client port

(depends on variant)
male, non-angled, simplex LC type connectors on network ports
Standard lengths: 3.10 meters (10.17 ft.) and 10.00 meters (32.81 ft.), (depends on
variant)
J-Y/MM62 Cable
Signal Path
The multimode y-cable is designed to allow optical signals to travel only in one direction.
For this reason, two y-cable/MM assemblies must be used together to deliver the same
function as a protection module (1PM/MM)1. While the protection module occupies a
module slot in a shelf, the y-cable/MM assembly pair is installed in the fiber tray and does
not occupy a slot. Using the y-cable/MM pair in place of a protection module provides the
advantage of additional slot space for other modules. The disadvantage is that the
network management system cannot detect the presence of the y-cable/MM. Please
note that the y-cable/MM is not a module, it is a piece of hardware that must be
provisioned by the user.
The number of multimode y-cables needed to configure channel card protection (CCCP)
operation depends on the pluggable transceiver types (standard, bidirectional or video),
and not so much on the type of the PM modules (1PM/MM or 2PM/MM). For example
video signals are typically unidirectional and only a single y-cable/MM is needed for
CCCP operation. The remainder of this section describes bidirectional CCCP operation
with two y-cable/MM assemblies used in place of a 1PM/MM module.
One y-cable/MM assembly is used for the Transmit (Tx) direction and a second ycable/MM assembly is used in the Receive (Rx) direction. The signal path in both
directions is described below.
Transmit Direction
The multimode y-cable splits one client optical signal received on the client port (single
end) into two identical signals for output on the network ports West and East which are
typically connected to the pair of channel modules. See Figure 662 for illustration of the
signal path.
Figure 662: Signal Flow in Transmit Direction
1The 2PM/MM module integrates the function of two 1PM/MM modules into a single
module. Thus four y-cables/MM assemblies are needed to replace one 2PM/MM.
1083
J-Y/MM62 Cable
For the assembly used for the transmit direction, mark these ports:
Note
Network port West as WT
Network port East as ET
Client port as CR
Receive Direction
The multimode y-cable combines the optical signals received on the Network East and
Network West ports into a multiplex for output on the client port, which is connected to
the customer premises equipment (CPE). See Figure 663 for illustration of the signal
path.
Figure 663: Signal Flow in Receive Direction

For the assembly used for the receive direction, mark these ports:
Note
Network port West as WR
Network port East as ER
Client port as CT
Specifications
1084
J-Y/MM-OM3 Cable
J-Y/MM-OM3 Cable
Figure 664: Example of a J-Y/MM-OM3/LC/0310
Description
The J-Y/MM-OM3 is a fiber-optic cable with 50 m multimode fibers according to the
OM3 standard. It is available as J-Y/MM-OM3/LC/0310 terminated with LC connectors at
the client line and the network lines. It has a length of 3.10 m.
The J-Y/MM-OM3 cable has an integrated 50/50 coupler to facilitate bidirectional client
channel card protection for services. It has one client line and two network lines. Figure
664 on p.1085 depicts an example of this y-cable.
The client line is connected to the customer premises equipment (CPE) and the network
lines east and west are connected to the OM3 supported client ports of the channel
modules.
1085
J-Y/MM-OM3 Cable
The single end (client line) of this multimode y-cable includes the coupler to de-multiplex
or multiplex optical signals between the client line and the two network lines. The split
fiber leads carry the signals in the west and east directions. For dual fiber working two JY/MM-OM3 cables are needed.
For easy identification, the jacket of the fibers is colored aqua (aqua meaning multimode
fiber according to the OM3 standard).
To avoid any contamination on the end face of the ferrules, make sure that the
The amount of J-Y/MM-OM3 cables needed for accomplishing client channel card
protection depends on the pluggable transceiver types (standard or bidirectional) and on
the number of services which have to be protected. For example, four J-Y/MM-OM3
cables have to be used for configuring client channel card protection for two services on
channel modules equipped with bidirectional pluggable transceivers.
The J-Y/MM-OM3 cables are handled in the same manner as standard optical cables with
the exception that y-cables should not be employed for fixed shelf installations. For fixed
shelf installations a 2PM/MM-OM3 module can be used as it has the same function as
four J-Y/MM-OM3 cables.
Note
The multimode y-cable can be delivered with the equipment, but you
have to order it separately. For ordering, contact ADVA Optical
Networking.
The J-Y/MM-OM3 cables are installed in a fiber tray of the shelf and does not occupy a
slot.
Note
The network management software cannot detect the presence of the JY/MM-OM3 cable. It must be provisioned by the user. The equipment
type used for provisioning the J-Y/MM-OM3 cable can be found in
Equipment Types of FSP 3000R7 Hardware Components on p.1327.
Features
1086
Support of multimode fiber signal transport
Designed to support protected services for CCCP
Unidirectional client and network lines
Optical multimode fiber type of 50 m according to OM3
Fiber-optic connectors: male, simplex LC type connectors at client line and at

network lines
Standard lengths: 3.10 meters (10.17 ft.)
J-Y/MM-OM3 Cable
Signal Paths
The J-Y/MM-OM3 cable is designed to allow optical signals to travel only in one direction.
For this reason, four J-Y/MM-OM3 cables must be used for the transmit (Tx) and receive
(Rx) directions in total to provide bidirectional client channel card protection for two
services on channel modules. That means two cables for each direction are needed.
The signal paths for bidirectional CCCP operation are described below.
1087
J-Y/MM-OM3 Cable
Figure 665: Signal Flow of the J-Y/MM-OM3/LC/0310
1088
J-Y/MM-OM3 Cable
Transmit Directions
The signal paths of the transmit directions are the same for client service 1 and client
service 2. Thus the general description below is valid for both services.
From the CPE the J-Y/MM-OM3 cable receives one client signal at the client line (single
end). This client signal is splitted into two identical signals for output on the network lines
west and east which are typically connected to the pair of channel modules.
If the network line west or east is the working or protection path depends on the
application.
See Figure 665 on p.1088 for illustration of the signal paths.
As an installation aid, use a thin permanent pen to mark the fiber
connectors.
For the assemblies used for the transmit direction, mark these lines:
Note
Network line 1 west as 1WT
Network line 1 east as 1ET
Client line 1 as 1CR
Network line 2 west as 2WT
Network line 2 east as 2ET
Client line 2 as 2CR

Receive Directions
The signal paths of the receive directions are the same for combining the network optical
signals into signals for client service 1 and client service 2. Thus the general description
below is valid for both services.
From the client channel modules the J-Y/MM-OM3 cable receives optical signals at the
network east and network west lines. These optical signals are combined into a multiplex
for output on the client line, which is connected to the customer premises equipment
(CPE).
See Figure 665 on p.1088 for illustration of the signal paths.
As an installation aid, use a thin permanent pen to mark the fiber
connectors.
For the assemblies used for the receive directions of the, mark these
lines:
Note
Network line 1 west as 1WR
Network line 1 east as 1ER
Client line 1 as 1CT
Network line 2 west as 2WR
Network line 2 east as 2ER
Client line 2 as 2CT

1089
J-Y/MM-OM3 Cable
Specifications
1090
J/SM/4CS-#C1270-#C1330/LC/0400
J/SM/4CS-#C1270-#C1330/LC/0400
Figure 666: Example of a J/SM/4CS-#C1270-#C1330/LC/0400
Description
The J/SM/4CS-#C1270-#C1330/LC/0400 is a 5-port unidirectional CWDM channel
splitter/combiner for channels #C1270 - #C1330. It is designed for connecting a 40G
transceiver (LR4) to a channel module equipped with four 10G transceiver SFP+
interfaces, enabling transparent transmission of 40G traffic over 10G channels.
Each port of the J/SM/4CS-#C1270-#C1330/LC/0400 is terminated with a single mode
LCconnector. The ports associated with the four separate wavelengths are the network
ports, while the port associated with the aggregate 40G signal is the client port. The
corresponding wavelength is printed on each network port.
Note
As the J/SM/4CS-#C1270-#C1330/LC/0400 is a passive unit, it is not

visible in the inventory database. Therefore, it is not supported by
inventory management, the control plane, or the Network Manager.
Features

Unidirectional ports
LC connectors
1091
J/SM/4CS-#C1270-#C1330/LC/0400
Fiber Cable Operation

Two J/SM/4CS-#C1270-#C1330/LC/0400 units are used to support bidirectional traffic
between a 40G LR4 interface and an associated channel module. One of the two
J/SM/4CS-#C1270-#C1330/LC/0400 units supports the Transmit Direction. The other
unit supports the Receive Direction.
In the multiplex direction, the J/SM/4CS-#C1270-#C1330/LC/0400 receives four
individual CWDM channels from a channel module with four separate 10G client
interfaces. The embedded CWDMfilter multiplexes the incoming channels into one
channel signal and couples it into the output fiber. The composite CWDM channel signal
is then transmitted to the 40G LR4 module.
In the demultiplex direction, the J/SM/4CS-#C1270-#C1330/LC/0400 receives a
composite CWDM channel signal from the 40G LR4 module. The embedded
CWDMfilter de-multiplexes the composite CWDM channel signal into its component
channels and couples each to a single fiber. These channels are then transmitted to four
separate 10G client interfaces.
Figure 667 illustrates the signal path for a bidirectional link equipped with two J/SM/4CS#C1270-#C1330/LC/0400 units, one used as a CWDM channel multiplexer (transmit
direction)and the other as a CWDM channel demultiplexer (receive direction).
Figure 667: J/SM/4CS-#C1270-#C1330/LC/0400 Signal Path
Any LR4 compatible plug is acceptable, including CFP and QSFP plug
types.
Note
1092
J/SM/4CS-#C1270-#C1330/LC/0400
Note
For the assembly used for the demultiplexer direction:
Mark the connectors 1271 nm, 1291 nm, 1311 nm, and
1331 nm as NT
Mark the connector C as CR
For the assembly used for the multiplexer direction:
Mark the connectors 1271 nm, 1291 nm, 1311 nm, and
1331 nm as NR
Mark the connector C as CT

Specifications
1093
8-Port CWDM Passive MUX/DMX for Tyco FIST

Enclosure
The 8MUX/P+#C1470-#C1610-DM-TE-Ry-SC9, 8DMX/P+#C1470-#C1610-DM-TE-LySC9, 8MUX/P-#C1270-#C1450-DM-TE-Ry-SC9, and 8DMX/P-#C1270-#C1450-DM-TELy-SC9 are passive CWDM channel multiplexers and demultiplexers (MUX and DMX).
The MUX or DMX filters are assembled and mounted in a FIST-GPST-12 Tyco brand
splice tray. Each splice tray contains one filter, a MUX or a DMX. The splice tray
connects to customer equipment using optical patch cords and is not intended to be
mounted in FSP 3000R7 shelves. The splice tray does occasionally connect to 4WCA or
10TCC cards, depending on the application.
There are eight filter variants and four filter bundles. A bundle contains one MUX tray and
one DMX tray containing filters with the same wavelength range and fiber output. The
eight filter variants have monitor ports and fiber shelf left or right plug positions. Four
filters operate in the 1270-1450 nm range without upgrade port, while the other four
operate in the 1470-1610 nm range with upgrade port. The table below shows the bundles
and the appropriate MUX and DMX trays.
Table 220: MUX and DMX Variants
1094
ADVA Part
Number
Description
Details
BC00000226
8MDX/P+#C1470#C1610-DM-TER-SC9
A bundle containing one 8-port CWDM multiplexer and one 8-port CWDM demultiplexer,
each in a FIST-GPST-12 enclosure for right
fiber shelf output with upgrade port and dual
monitoring points. SC-APC 9 degree connectors.
106300887101
8MUX/P+#C1470#C1610-DM-TERR-SC9
One 8-port CWDM multiplexer in a FIST-GPST12 enclosure with left fiber output and right plug
position with upgrade port and dual monitoring
points. SC-APC 9 degree connectors.
106300887201
8DMX/P+#C1470#C1610-DM-TELR-SC9
One 8-port CWDM demultiplexer in a FISTGPST-12 enclosure with left fiber output and left
plug position with upgrade port and dual monitoring points. SC-APC 9 degree connectors.
BC00000227
8MDX/P-#C1270#C1450-DM-TER-SC9
each in a FIST-GPST-12 enclosure for right
fiber shelf output without upgrade and dual monitoring points. SC-APC 9 degree connectors.
106300887301
8MUX/P-#C1270#C1450-DM-TERR-SC9
One 8-port CWDM multiplexer in a FIST-GPST12 enclosure with left fiber output and right plug
position with dual monitoring points. SC-APC 9
degree connectors.

106300887401
8DMX/P-#C1270#C1450-DM-TELR-SC9
One 8-port CWDM demultiplexer in a FISTGPST-12 enclosure with left fiber output and left
plug position with dual monitoring points. SCAPC 9 degree connectors.
BC00000228
8MDX/P+#C1470#C1610-DM-TE-LSC9
each in a FIST-GPST-12 enclosure for left fiber
shelf output with upgrade port and dual monitoring points. SC-APC 9 degree connectors.
106300887501
8MUX/P+#C1470#C1610-DM-TERL-SC9
One 8-port CWDM multiplexer in a FIST-GPST12 enclosure with right fiber output and right
plug position with upgrade port and dual monitoring points. SC-APC 9 degree connectors.
106300887601
8DMX/P+#C1470#C1610-DM-TELL-SC9
One 8-port CWDM demultiplexer in a FISTGPST-12 enclosure with right fiber output and
left plug position with upgrade port and dual monitoring points. SC-APC 9 degree connectors.
BC00000229
8MDX/P-#C1270#C1450-DM-TE-LSC9
each in a FIST-GPST-12 enclosure for left fiber
shelf output without upgrade port and dual monitoring points. SC-APC 9 degree connectors.
106300887701
8MUX/P-#C1270#C1450-DM-TERL-SC9
One 8-port CWDM multiplexer in a FIST-GPST12 enclosure with right fiber output and right
plug position with dual monitoring points. SCAPC 9 degree connectors.
106300887801
8DMX/P-#C1270#C1450-DM-TELL-SC9
One 8-port CWDM demultiplexer in a FISTGPST-12 enclosure with right fiber output and
left plug position with dual monitoring points.
SC-APC 9 degree connectors.
The figure below shows a filter mounted in a Tyco brand splice tray.
1095

Figure 668: Tyco Splice Tray
1096
8-Port CWDM Passive MUX/DMX for Tyco FOSC

Closures
This section describes the 8-port CWDM passive channel multiplexer and demultiplexer
module (8MDX/P) designed for installation in outside plant environment. The optical
filters are assembled and mounted in a TE FOSC brand splice tray allowing for easy
integration in FOSC 450 fiber-optic splice closures. There are two variants of this unit
which have different CWDM wavelengths. See table below.
Table 221: 8MDX/P Module Variants
Part Number
Description
Details
1063008881-01
8MDX/P+#C1470-#C1610TE02
Passive 8-port CWDM channel

multiplexer and demultiplexer
with upgrade port mounted in a
TE FOSC-A-TRAY-S24-1
fiber-optic splice tray enclosure
for outside plant installation;
adds/drops upto 8 CWDM
channels ranging from #C1470
to #C1610
1063008882-01
8MDX/P-#C1270-#C1450TE02
Passive 8-port CWDM channel

multiplexer and demultiplexer
mounted in a TE FOSC-ATRAY-S24-1 fiber-optic splice
tray enclosure for outside plant
installation; separates/combines 8 CWDM
channels ranging from #C1270
to #C1450
1097
8MDX/P+#C1470-#C1610-TE02
Figure 669: Example of a 8MDX/P+#C1470-#C1610-TE02
Description
The 8MDX/P+#C1470-#C1610-TE02 is a passive 8-port CWDM channel multiplexer and
demultiplexer with upgrade port designed for use in any outside plant environment. A pair
of specific MUX/DEMUX filters are integrated into the TE FOSC-A-TRAY-S24-1 fiberoptic splice tray. The device features eight client ports, one network port, and one
upgrade port, but there are no connectors. The splice tray connects to the customer
equipment using spliced fibers. The CWDM filter is designed for bidirectional data
transfer in dual-fiber linear add/drop and linear or ring configurations.
The 8MDX/P+#C1470-#C1610-TE02 is used to add/drop up to eight CWDM
wavelengths to/from a set of CWDM wavelengths, where the wavelengths are 1471 nm,
1491 nm, 1511 nm, 1531 nm, 1551 nm, 1571 nm, 1591 nm, and 1611 nm on the CWDM
ITU grid. The remaining CWDM wavelengths of the set of CWDM wavelengths are
transferred to the upgrade port. Each CWDM wavelength added or dropped requires a
separate fiber pair.
The 8MDX/P+#C1470-#C1610-TE02 provides access to one network fiber pair, eight
client fiber pairs and one upgrade fiber pair. The fibers are labeled as shown in Table 222.
On the client side, the 8MDX/P+#C1470-#C1610-TE02 works in conjunction with the
corresponding channel modules. Table 222 lists the allocation of the optical fibers of the
CWDM filter to the CWDM channels.
1098

Table 222: Port Description
Virtual
Port
Names
Fiber
Labeling
Channel
Names
CWDM Wavelengths
C8
1610 Rx, 1610 Tx
#C1610
1611nm Rx, 1611nm Tx
C7
1590 Rx, 1590 Tx
#C1590
C6
1570 Rx, 1570 Tx
#C1570
C5
1550 Rx, 1550 Tx
#C1550
C4
1530 Rx, 1530 Tx
#C1530
C3
1510 Rx, 1510 Tx
#C1510
C2
1490 Rx, 1490 Tx
#C1490
C1
1470 Rx, 1470 Tx
#C1470
Network
port
COM-Rx, COMTx
#C1270 to
#C1610
1271nm COM-Rx to
1611nm COM-Tx,
Upgrade
port
EXT-Rx, EXT-Tx
#C1270 to
#C1450
1271nm EXT- Rx to
1451nm EXT- Tx
Optical
Ports
Client
ports
Note
As this CWDM filter is completely passive, it is not visible in the

inventory database. Therefore it is not supported by inventory
management, the Control Plane or the Network Manager.
Features
Adding/dropping upto eight CWDM channels (#C1470 - #C1610) according to ITU-T

G.694.2 (20 nm wavelength spacing) and ADVA Optical Networkings channel plan
Low optical loss
Low polarization sensitivity
Fast installation and commissioning
Signal Path
Figure 670 on p.1100 shows the operation of the 8MDX/P+#C1470-#C1610-TE02 and
1099

Figure 670: 8MDX/P+#C1470-#C1610-TE02 Operation Scheme
Receive Direction
The 8MDX/P+#C1470-#C1610-TE02 receives a composite CWDM channel signal
through the input COM-Rx fiber of the network port from the far end of the link. The
received network signal enters the demultiplexer (DEMUX) to be split up. The DEMUX
separates the blue-band channel set #C1270 #C1450 from the combined network
signal and couples it into the output EXT-Tx fiber of the upgrade port for further demultiplexing. At the same time, the remaining channel set #C1470 #C1610 is demultiplexed into its component channels. Each of the different channels is launched into
a dedicated optical fiber to have the eight channels separate on the output fibers 1470 Tx
through 1610 Tx of the client ports. These channels are then transmitted to the
corresponding CWDM channel modules.
Transmit Direction
The 8MDX/P+#C1470-#C1610-TE02 receives the individual channels #C1470 to #C1610
from the corresponding channel modules through the input fibers 1470 Rx to 1610 Rx of
the client ports and optionally the blue-band channel set #C1270 #C1450 through the
input fiber EXT-Rx of the upgrade port. The received multiple channels enter the
multiplexer (MUX) to be combined. The MUX multiplexes the eight CWDM channels and
the optional channel set (#C1270 #C1450) into a composite channel signal and couples
it into the output fiber COM-Tx of the network port for transmission to the far end of the
link.
Location Placement
The 8MDX/P+#C1470-#C1610-TE02 is designed to the FOSC-TRAY-A form factor and
can be placed in TE enclosures FOSC-450 size A or B.
1100
Labeling
Printed labels that are affixed on the cover of the 8MDX/P+#C1470-#C1610-TE02
provide module specific information. For details, see Figure 671 on p.1101.
Figure 671: Example of an 8MDX/P+#C1470-#C1610-TE02 Module Type Label
Specifications
1101
8MDX/P-#C1270-#C1450-TE02
Figure 672: Example of a 8MDX/P-#C1270-#C1450-TE02
Description
The 8MDX/P-#C1270-#C1450-TE02 is a passive 8-port CWDM channel multiplexer and
demultiplexer designed for use in any outside plant environment. A pair of specific
MUX/DEMUX filters are integrated into the TE FOSC-A-TRAY-S24-1 fiber-optic splice
tray. The device features eight client ports and one network port, but there are no
connectors. The splice tray connects to the customer equipment using spliced fibers.
The CWDM filter is designed for bidirectional data transfer in dual-fiber linear add/drop
and linear or ring configurations.
The 8MDX/P-#C1270-#C1450-TE02 enables 8 CWDM channels in the range of between
#C1270 and #C1450 to be either combined (added) or separated (dropped). The filters
operate with a channel spacing of 20 nm corresponding to standard CWDM wavelengths.
Each CWDM channel added or dropped requires a separate fiber pair.
The 8MDX/P-#C1270-#C1450-TE02 provides access to one network fiber pair, and eight
client fiber pairs. The fibers are labeled as shown in Table 223 on p.1103.
On the client side, the 8MDX/P-#C1270-#C1450-TE02 works in conjunction with the
corresponding channel modules. Table 223 on p.1103 lists the allocation of the optical
fibers of the CWDM filter to the CWDM channels.
1102

Table 223: Port Description
Optical
Ports
Client
ports
Network
port
Virtual
Port
Names
Fiber
Labeling
C8
1450 Rx, 1450 Tx
C7
Channel
Names
CWDM Wavelengths
#C1450
1451nm Rx, 1451nm

Tx
1430 Rx, 1430 Tx
#C1430
1431nm Rx,1431nm Tx
C6
1370 Rx, 1370 Tx
#C1370
1371nm Rx,1371nm Tx
C5
1350 Rx, 1350 Tx
#C1350
1351nm Rx,1351nm Tx
C4
1330 Rx, 1330 Tx
#C1330
1331nm Rx,1331nm Tx
C3
1310 Rx, 1310 Tx
#C1310
1311nm Rx,1311nm Tx
C2
1290 Rx, 1290 Tx
#C1290
1291nm Rx,1291nm Tx
C1
1270 Rx, 1270 Tx
#C1270
1271nm Rx,1271nm Tx
COM-Rx, COM-Tx
#C1270 to
#C1450
1271nm COM-Rx to
1451nm COM-Tx
Note
As this CWDM filter is completely passive, it is not visible in the

inventory database. Therefore it is not supported by inventory
management, the Control Plane or the Network Manager.
Features
Adding/dropping upto eight CWDM channels (#C1270 - #C1450)

according to ITU-T G.694.2 (20 nm wavelength spacing) and ADVA Optical
Low optical loss
Low polarization sensitivity
Fast installation and commissioning
Signal Path
Figure 673 on p.1104 shows the operation of the 8MDX/P-#C1270-#C1450-TE02 and
1103

Figure 673: 8MDX/P-#C1270-#C1450-TE02 Operation Scheme
Receive Direction
The 8MDX/P-#C1270-#C1450-TE02 receives a composite CWDM channel signal
through the input COM-Rx fiber of the network port from the far end of the link. The
received network signal enters the demultiplexer (DEMUX) to be separated. The DEMUX
de-multiplexes the composite CWDM channel signal into its component channels. Each
of the different channels is launched into a dedicated optical fiber to have the eight
channels separate on the output fibers 1270 Tx through 1450 Tx of the client ports.
These channels are then transmitted to the corresponding CWDM channel modules.
Transmit Direction
The 8MDX/P-#C1270-#C1450-TE02 receives the individual channels #C1270 to #C1450
from the corresponding channel modules through the input fibers 1270 Rx to 1450 Rx of
the client ports. The received multiple channels enter the multiplexer (MUX) to be
combined. The MUX multiplexes the eight CWDM channels into one channel signal and
couples it into the output fiber COM-Tx of the network port for transmission to the far end
of the link.
Location Placement
The 8MDX/P-#C1270-#C1450-TE02 is designed to the FOSC-TRAY-A form factor and
can be placed in TE enclosures FOSC-450 size A or B.
1104
Labeling
Printed labels that are affixed on the cover of the 8MDX/P-#C1270-#C1450-TE02 provide
module specific information. For details, see Figure 674 on p.1105.
Figure 674: Example of an 8MDX/P-#C1270-#C1450-TE02 Module Type Label
Specifications
1105
1106
Chapter 16
Optical Amplification Hardware
This chapter provides general descriptions of all optical amplifiers (OAs) available at the
ports, the operation scheme and module specific details. The module key features are
The descriptions are merely supposed to convey a basic understanding of the access
Before each amplifier module is described in a separate section, general information of
the optical amplifiers are provided such as module types, naming conventions, module
design, management and operation status as well as labeling.
EDFA-C-S10 on p.1117
EDFA-C-S18-GCB on p.1120
EDFA-C-S18-GC on p.1123
EDFA-C-S20-GCB on p.1126
EDFA-C-D20-VGC on p.1130
EDFA-C-D20-GC on p.1134
EDFA-C-D17-GC on p.1138
EDFA-L-D17-GC on p.1142
EDFA-C-S20-GCB-DM on p.1146
EDFA-C-D20-VGC-DM on p.1149
EDFA-C-D20-VLGC-DM on p.1153
EDFA-C-S26-VGC-DM on p.1157
EDFA-C-S26-VGCB-DM on p.1163
EDFA-C-D27-GCB-DM on p.1168
RAMAN-C10 on p.1170
2RAMAN-C15-LL on p.1179
AMP-S20H-C15 on p.1192
AMP-S20L-C15 on p.1202
EDFA-S20H on p.1213
EDFA-S20L on p.1220
2EDFA-S20L-S10L on p.1227
1107
General Information
General Information
Light signals transmitted in DWDM networks over multi-kilometer fiber-optic links are
subject to attenuation due to fiber loss and component insertion losses. Optical amplifiers
(OAs) are used in such networks to reconstitute attenuated optical signals. OAs are
therefore key devices in DWDM networks that allow expanding the effective fiber span
between the data source and the destination without the need for repeaters at
intermediate points.
Optical amplification is typically performed by erbium-doped fiber amplifiers (EDFAs) and
distributed Raman fiber amplifiers (Raman amplifiers). EDFAs and Raman amplifiers
differ in their operating principles.
Raman amplifiers use the network transmission fiber itself as the gain medium. Data
signals transmitted over this fiber are optically amplified by multiplexing a powerful pump
wavelength with signal wavelength (stimulated Raman scattering effect). Optical signal
amplification is distributed several kilometers along the transmission path. A Raman
amplifier is typically stationed at the end of a transmission fiber run and pumps in
opposite direction toward the data source. This means that the data signals are amplified
many kilometers before they reach the output end of the transmission fiber.
The gain medium of an EDFA is a several meters long Erbium-doped fiber that is pumped
by either 980 nm or 1480 nm pump lasers. Incoming light of longer wavelengths in the
1550-nm range is amplified within this fiber.
Both the C band and the L band can be amplified by EDFAs, but two different amplifiers
are required, each optimized for one of the bands. There are several types of EDFAs that
are designed for different purposes. EDFAs may include gain control for providing a
constant gain. Table 224 gives an overview of the EDFA module types available:
This table provides an overview of all optical amplifier module types.
Table 224: Overview of Optical Amplifier Module Types
1108
Module Type
Module Name
Description
Fixed pumppower
amplifier
EDFA-C-S10
single-stage amplifier designed for group

amplification in the C band with a total output
power from 10 dBm to 13 dBm
Fixed gaincontrolled
amplifiers
EDFA-C-D17-GC
double-stage amplifier designed for

amplification of the C band with a nominal
output power of 17.2 dBm; power level
monitoring of the output signal
EDFA-L-D17-GC

amplification of the L band with a nominal
EDFA-C-S18-GC
single-stage amplifier designed for

amplification of the C band with a total
output power from 18 dBm to 21 dBm; power
level monitoring of the output signal
General Information
Module Type
Module Name
Description
Fixed gaincontrolled
amplifiers
EDFA-C-S18-GCB

EDFA-C-D20-GC

output power of 21.3 dBm
EDFA-C-S20-GCB

EDFA-C-S20-GCBDM

monitoring of the input and output signal
EDFA-C-S26-VGCDM
full C-band, variable gain and transientcontrolled single-stage amplifier, designed

for amplification with a max. total output
power of
27 dBm; power level monitoring of the input
and output signal; OSC 1510 nm and Raman
1450 nm pilot signals can be detected
EDFA-C-D20-VGC
full C-band, variable gain and transientcontrolled, double-stage EDFA, output at

21.3 dBm nominal;
EDFA-C-D20-VGCDM
full C-band, variable gain and transientcontrolled, double-stage EDFA, output at

21.3 dBm nominal; power level monitoring of
the input and output signal
EDFA-C-D20-VLGCDM
full C-band, variable low gain and transientcontrolled, double-stage EDFA, output at 20
dBm nominal; power level monitoring of the
input and output signal
EDFA-C-D27-GCBDM
full C-band, double-stage, high output power

amplifier designed for amplification with a
total output power of 27 dBm; power level
monitoring of the input and output signal;
OSC 1510 nm and Raman 1450 nm pilot
signals can be detected
Variable gaincontrolled
amplifier
Variable gain
amplifier
1109
General Information
Module Type
Module Name
Description
Distributed
Raman fiber
amplifier
RAMAN-C10
Raman amplifier designed for amplification

of the C band with a maximum output power
of approx. 10 dBm; monitoring the pump
back reflection as an indication of a
transmission fiber break or connector
opening); monitoring the output power level
at the upgrade port; internal monitoring the
OSC input signal to distinguish between a
break of the network fiber and a loss of
network port input signal
Dual Raman
fiber amplifier
2RAMAN-C15-LL
Raman amplifier module designed for

amplification of optical data signals in the C
band with a maximum total output pump
power at N-R of 30dBm; optimized for use in
low latency networks; minimum ASE noise
and maximum flatness for extended links;
contains a forward (FWD) and a backward
(BWD) facing Raman amplifier; monitoring
of the optical output power levels at the
upgrade port and network port as well as
fault management; support of forward and
counter-propagating configurations; OSC as
essential element of the laser safety
mechanisms
Unlike an EDFA, which amplifies all the channels in a DWDM signal simultaneously, the
Raman amplifier increases the data signal strength of any C-band wavelength in transit.
Further, it provides compared with EDFAs a low noise figure, flexible gain spectral region
and stable performance. Raman amplifiers are preferably used in conjunction with an
EDFA to extend the link budget in a 40-channel DWDM system.
Identification
OAs (relates to EDFA and Raman amplifiers) are identified by faceplate codes and a
label printed on the board cover. Identification information is provided in each module
description.
Naming Conventions of EDFAs

The EDFA module name is made up of a set of parts assembled according to a very
specific rule as exemplified below. The parts of the name represent the modules specific
features. For clarification, see the example below.
1110
General Information
This example describes a fixed gain-controlled, single-stage booster amplifier module

that amplifies the entire C band (40 channels) with a total output power around 20 dBm.
The module consists of a dual monitoring port to monitor the power level of the weak and
amplified signals. Table 225 lists the naming conventions used by the FSP 3000R7.
Table 225: Optical Amplifier Module Naming Convention
Parts of the Name
Code
Meaning
Module name
EDFA
Erbium-doped fiber amplifier
RAMAN
Raman fiber amplifier
2RAMAN
Dual Raman fiber amplifier
Band and its channels or

groups to be amplified
C band (40 channels)
L band (40 channels)
Type of amplifier stage
single-stage (one pump laser)
double-stage (two pump lasers)
GC
gain-controlled with power level

monitoring of the amplified signal
GCB
gain-controlled booster with power level

monitoring (amplified signal)
VGC
variable gain-controlled with power level

monitoring (amplified signal)
GCB-DM
gain-controlled booster with dual power

level monitoring of the (weak and
amplified signal)
VGC-DM
variable gain-controlled with dual power

level monitoring (weak and amplified
signal)
VLGCDM
variable low gain-controlled with dual

power level monitoring (weak and
amplified signal)
Gain and monitoring

design (if applicable)
1111
General Information
Basic EDFA Functionality and Design

EDFA modules differ in their design but they have the same basic functionality and
common properties which are discussed below. Module specific features and properties
are described in the respective sections.
EDFA modules allow to extend the reach of an optical fiber system without any optoelectronic or electro-optical conversion. For optical amplification, they use a specific
length of optical fiber doped with the rare-earth element Erbium, thus the name Erbiumdoped fiber amplifier (EDFA).
Features
EDFA modules have the following common features:
Monitor the level of optical input and output power.
Are a class 1M laser product.
Provide LED indicators (module attributes and operating status).
Are protocol and transmission speed transparent.
Can be added or replaced at any time during operation of the system.
Functions
EDFA modules have the following main functions:
increase span budget
compensate attenuation of dispersion compensating fibers (DCF)
compensate attenuation of remote fibers
Components
An EDFA module consists of the following major components:
Erbium-doped silica fiber
pump laser
coupling device
two isolators
optical interfaces
Mode of Operation
When the weak signal passes through silica fiber, a semiconductor pump laser applies
external energy, usually at a shorter wavelength than the input signal. This so-called
pumping excites the atoms in the Erbium-doped section of optical fiber to higher energy
levels and the input signal stimulates them to release photonic energy in phase and at the
same wavelength.
An input and output monitor supervise the power levels. An input and output isolator
suppress the light reflections caused by the incoming and outgoing fiber.
Normally, an EDFA designed for amplification of the C band uses a 980 nm laser,
whereas an EDFA designed for amplification of the L band utilizes a 1480 nm source.
1112
General Information
Use
EDFA modules boost optical signals passing through at wavelengths in the 1550 and
1600 nm range. They may be deployed as inline-, booster- or pre-amplifiers.
Note
Note
Only configurations approved by ADVA Optical Networking are

guaranteed as laser class 1M. For more information on permissible
configurations and connecting, see the deployment rules addressed in
Laser Safety Compliant Amplifier Configurations on p.1235.
For all services up to 2.5 Gbit/s and especially for 10 Gbit/s, a minimum
OSNR has to be obtained. For details on OSNR restrictions, see the
FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2 Module and System Specification.
Module design
Optical amplifiers are designed as single-slot plug-in modules that are compatible with
any 7HU shelf (SH7HU) or 1HU Shelf (SH1HU).
Each OA module has either special EMC contact strips or an EMC textile gasket on the
narrow sides of the faceplate, which create a tight seal with neighboring modules. The
EMC contact strips and the EMC textile gaskets respectively avoid unintended
minimum fiber bend radii when connecting the fiber-optic jumpers.
and ETSI EN 300 019-1-3 Class 3.1 standards and all relevant SDH ITU-T and SONET
ANSI/Telcordia standards. All OAs are hot swappable and customer installable. This
Module Handling

The status of the OAs can either be read off the front panel LEDs or can be monitored by
the the FSP 3000R7 Craft Console or Network Element Director. Power input and output
levels are monitored at all times. Commands for controlling the optical amplifier modules
and status queries are transmitted via the internal system bus between the OA modules
and the NCU. Operating temperature of each OA module can be monitored via the
management software in real time. The equipment type names of the optical amplifier
modules used by the management software can be found in Equipment Types of FSP
3000R7 Hardware Components on p.1327 of this documentation.
1113
General Information
Faceplate Markings
All FSP 3000R7 EDFAs have the same faceplate markings. LED indicator and optical
port markings of the individual modules are explained in the appropriate module
descriptions.
LED Indicators
All OA modules have tri-color LED indicators that are visible through the faceplates. The
colors display different operating status. The status that each color of the LED indicators
represents is described in the Maintenance and Troubleshooting Manual.
Labeling
Each optical amplifier module has several printed labels on the front plate and the board
cover. These labels provide module specific information as shown in example Figure 675,
Frontplate Labels
For a quick identification all OA modules have two printed labels affixed on its frontplate.
The top label includes the module name and serial number. The label at the bottom of the
faceplate includes the USI code of the module. Figure 675 shows examples of EDFA-CS10 frontplate labels.
Figure 675: Example of EDFA-C-S10 Frontplate Labels
Module Type Label

1114
the module type
the USI code and its bar code
General Information
technical specifications (total input power, minimum gain, total output power and
noise figure)

Figure 676: Example of an EDFA-C-S10 Module Type Label
Figure 677: Example of a RAMAN-C10 Module Type Label
Certification Label
This label provides approved certification marks. An example of an OA module
1115
General Information
Figure 678: Example of an OA Module Certification Label
Depending on the OA module type the certification label may slightly differ.
Warranty Label
Networking will disclaim the implied warranty of merchantability. An example of an OA
module warranty label is shown in Figure 679.
Figure 679: Example of an OA Module Warranty Label
1116
EDFA-C-S10
EDFA-C-S10
Figure 680: EDFA-C-S10 Front View
Variants:
none
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the EDFA-C-S10 faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 226: EDFA-C-S10 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
On
amplifier port
Err
transmit
1117
EDFA-C-S10
Table 226: EDFA-C-S10 Faceplate Markings
1/R
operating status of the amplifier port 1R
1/T
operating status of the amplifier port 1-T
Note
receive
The EDFA-C-S10 is a converted FSP 2000 Release 6.6 module as

full FSP2000 Release 6.5 functionality. Monitoring and troubleshooting
behavior.
Description
The EDFA-C-S10 is a fixed pump-power Erbium-doped fiber amplifier that amplifies up to
4 channels of a DWDM C band group suitable for inline or preamplifier applications. The
module supports LC connectors.

guaranteed to comply with laser class 1M.
Note
Read and understand the user manual, especially the deployment rules
addressed in Laser Safety Compliant Amplifier Configurations on
p.1235, before installing and using this device. Failure to follow
operating instructions could result in personal injury or damage to the
equipment.
Features
Wavelength-dependent amplification
Designed as 8 HP wide plug-in module
Used as inline or preamplifier
Provided with an Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) functionality
For the common functions and features of EDFAs, refer to Basic EDFA Functionality
and Design on p.1112.
Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)

In case of a fiber break, a loss of signal (LOS) is raised at the EDFA input port. If the LOS
persists, the automatic power reduction (APR)/automatic power shutdown (APS) will
then reduce the output power to a safe level as defined by a Class 1M Hazard level
product. However, the EDFA is capable of amplifying the ALS pulses from the channel
modules in order to quickly return to normal operation as soon as a data signal is received
again.
1118
EDFA-C-S10
Signal Path
Figure 681 shows the operation of the EDFA-C-S10 (very simplified) and illustrates the
The weak optical signal enters the module via the input connector 1-R. When passing
through the section of Erbium-doped silica (Er3+) fiber, the input signal gets amplified.
The amplified optical signal leaves the module via the output connector 1-T.
Figure 681: Operation Scheme of an EDFA-C-S10
Slot Positions
The EDFA-C-S10 is 8 HP wide and therefore occupies two regular slots. It can be placed
into following shelves and slots:
SH1HU, slot 1
LED indicators
EDFA-C-S10 and its ports. For details, refer to the FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2 Maintenance
Labeling
Printed labels that are affixed on the frontplate and board cover of the EDFA-C-S10
provide module specific information. For details, see Labeling on p.1114.
Specifications
1119
EDFA-C-S18-GCB
EDFA-C-S18-GCB
Figure 682: EDFA-C-S18-GCB Front View
Variants:
none
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the EDFA-C-S18-GCB faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 227: EDFA-C-S18-GCB Faceplate Markings
1120
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Mon
monitoring port
Mod
amplifier port
EDFA-C-S18-GCB
1
operating status of the amplifier port
receive
transmit
Description
The EDFA-C-S18-GCB is a fixed gain-controlled, single-stage Erbium-doped fiber
amplifier that amplifies up to 40 channels in the C band group suitable for booster, inline
or preamplifier applications.
The gain and transient controller regulates the pump laser to stabilize the ratio between
output and input power, i.e. the gain of the amplification stage. The power level of the
outgoing amplified signal may be monitored.

Note
equipment.
Features
Wavelength-independent amplification
Gain and transient controlled
Used as booster, inline and preamplifier
Completely supports the channel modules ALS scheme
Provided with a standby mode
Power level monitoring of the amplified signal
Standby Mode
In case of a fiber break, a loss of signal (LOS) is raised at EDFAs input port. The EDFA
will then start operating in a mode in which it is emitting noise at a reduced output power.
However, the EDFA is capable of amplifying the ALS pulses from the channel modules in
order to quickly return to the normal operation mode as soon as a data signal is received
again.
1121
EDFA-C-S18-GCB
Signal Path
Figure 683 shows the operation of the EDFA-C-S18-GCB and illustrates the signal path,
The amplified optical signal leaves the module via the output connector 1-T. Optionally,
1% of the signal may be dropped by a coupler to leave the module via the output
connector Mon-T connected to a power meter or OSA.
Figure 683: Operation Scheme of the EDFA-C-S18-GCB
Slot Positions
An EDFA-C-S18-GCB is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and slots:
LED indicators
EDFA-C-S18-GCB and its ports. For details, refer to the FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2
Labeling
Printed labels that are affixed on the frontplate and board cover of the EDFA-C-S18-GCB
Specifications
1122
EDFA-C-S18-GC
EDFA-C-S18-GC
Figure 684: EDFA-C-S18-GC Front View
Variants:
none
1123
EDFA-C-S18-GC
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the EDFA-C-S18-GC faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 228: EDFA-C-S18-GC Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Mon
monitoring port
Mod
amplifier port
operating status of amplifier port
receive
transmit
Description
The EDFA-C-S18-GC is a fixed gain-controlled, single-stage Erbium-doped fiber amplifier
to amplify up to 40 channels in the C band. The gain and transient controller regulates the
pump laser to stabilize the ratio between output and input power, i.e. the gain of the
amplification stage. The power level of the outgoing amplified signal may be monitored.
The EDFA-C-S18-GC can be used as booster, inline or preamplifier.

Note
equipment.
Features
Used as booster, inline or preamplifier
1124
EDFA-C-S18-GC
Standby Mode
again.
Signal Path
Figure 685 shows the operation of the EDFA-C-S18-GC (very simplified) and illustrates
the signal path, which is described below.
Optionally, 1% of the signal may be dropped by a coupler to leave the module via the
output connector Mon-T connected to a power meter or OSA.
Figure 685: Operation Scheme of an EDFA-C-S18-GC
Slot Positions
An EDFA-C-S18-GC is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and slots:
LED Indicators
EDFA-C-S18-GC and its ports. For details, refer to the FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2
1125
EDFA-C-S20-GCB
Labeling
Printed labels that are affixed on the frontplate and board cover of the EDFA-C-S18-GC
Specifications
EDFA-C-S20-GCB
Figure 686: EDFA-C-S20-GCB Front View
Variants:
none
1126
EDFA-C-S20-GCB
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the EDFA-C-S20-GCB faceplate and their
meanings.
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Mon
monitoring port
Mod
amplifier port
receive
transmit
Description
The EDFA-C-S20-GCB is a fixed gain-controlled, single-stage Erbium-doped fiber
booster amplifier to amplify up to 80 channels in the C band group suitable for booster,
inline or preamplifier applications.

Note
equipment.
Features
Used as booster, inline and preamplifier
1127
EDFA-C-S20-GCB
Standby Mode
again.
Signal Path
Figure 687 shows the operation of the EDFA-C-S20-GCB and illustrates the signal path,
The amplified optical signal leaves the module via the output connector 1-T. Optionally,
1% of the signal may be dropped by a coupler to leave the module via the output
connector Mon-T connected to a power meter or OSA.
Figure 687: Operation Scheme of the EDFA-C-S20-GCB
Slot Positions
An EDFA-C-S20-GCB is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and slots:
LED Indicators
EDFA-C-S20-GCB and its ports. For details, refer to the FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2
1128
EDFA-C-S20-GCB
Labeling
Printed labels that are affixed on the frontplate and board cover of the EDFA-C-S20-GCB
Specifications
1129
EDFA-C-D20-VGC
EDFA-C-D20-VGC
Figure 688: EDFA-C-D20-VGC Front View
Variants:
none
1130
EDFA-C-D20-VGC
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the EDFA-C-D20-VGC faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 230: EDFA-C-D20-VGC Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Mon
monitoring port
Mod
amplifier port
midstage port
operating status of the midstage port
receive
transmit
Description
The EDFA-C-D20-VGC is a gain-controlled, double-stage Erbium-doped fiber amplifier
with a variable gain supporting amplification of up to 80 channels in the C band. The first
gain block works as preamplifier, the second as booster amplifier. The midstage access
allows to insert a dispersion compensation module without effecting the line budget. A
variable optical attenuator (VOA) at the midstage access controls and suitably adjusts
attenuation of up to 16 dB depending on whether a dispersion compensating module or a
jumper connects the two gain blocks. The gain and transient controller regulates the
pump laser to stabilize the ratio between output and input power, i.e. the gain of the
amplification stage. The power level of the outgoing amplified signal may be monitored.
The EDFA-C-D20-VGC can be used as preamplifier, booster or inline amplifier.

Note
equipment.
Features
Variable-gain amplification
Automatic attenuation adjustment at the midstage access using a VOA
Used as preamplifier, booster or inline amplifier
1131
EDFA-C-D20-VGC
Standby Mode
again.
Note
If the optical midstage loss is less than 3 dB (e.g. a jumper instead of a

DCM) the midstage connection should be made before any signal is fed
to the input of the first stage. Otherwise, the transient controller might
switch off the module requiring a module reboot.
Signal Path
Figure 689 shows the operation of the EDFA-C-D20-VGC and illustrates the signal path,
which is described below. The weak optical signal enters the first gain block of the
amplifier module via the input connector 1-R. When passing through the section of
Erbium-doped silica (Er3+) fiber, the input signal gets amplified for the first time (preamplification). The amplified signal is then forwarded to the midstage output connector 2T to a potential dispersion compensating fiber module. The signal re-enters the second
gain block of the amplifier module via the midstage input connector 2-R. When passing
through the section of Erbium-doped silica (Er3+) fiber, the input signal gets amplified for
the second time (booster amplification). The amplified optical signal leaves the amplifier
module via the output connector 1-T. Optionally, 1% of the signal may be dropped by a
coupler to leave the module via the output connector Mon-T connected to a power meter
or OSA.
Figure 689: Operation Scheme of an EDFA-C-D20-VGC
1132
EDFA-C-D20-VGC
Slot Positions
An EDFA-C-D20-VGC is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and slots:
LED indicators
EDFA-C-D20-VGC and its ports. For details, refer to the FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2
Labeling
Printed labels that are affixed on the frontplate and board cover of the EDFA-C-D20-VGC
Specifications
1133
EDFA-C-D20-GC
EDFA-C-D20-GC
Figure 690: EDFA-C-D20-GC Front View
Variants:
none
1134
EDFA-C-D20-GC
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the EDFA-C-D20-GC faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 231: EDFA-C-D20-GC Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Mon
monitoring port
Mod
amplifier port
midstage port
receive
transmit
Description
The EDFA-C-D20-GC is a fixed gain-controlled, double-stage Erbium-doped fiber
amplifier that amplifies up to 80 channels in the C band.
The first gain block works as preamplifier, the second as a booster amplifier. The
midstage access allows to insert a dispersion compensation module without effecting the
line budget. A variable optical attenuator (VOA) at the midstage access controls and
suitably adjusts attenuation of up to 10 dB depending on whether a dispersion
compensating module or a jumper connects the two gain blocks.
The EDFA-C-D20-GC can be used as booster, inline or preamplifier.
Note

equipment.
Features
1135
EDFA-C-D20-GC
Standby Mode
again.
Note

Signal Path
Figure 691 shows the operation of the EDFA-C-D20-GC and illustrates the signal path,
The weak optical signal enters the first gain block of the amplifier module via the input
connector 1-R. When passing through the section of Erbium-doped silica (Er3+) fiber, the
input signal gets amplified for the first time (pre-amplification). The amplified signal is
then forwarded to the midstage output connector 2-T to a potential dispersion
compensating fiber module. The signal re-enters the second gain block of the amplifier
module via the midstage input connector 2-R. When passing through the section of
Erbium-doped silica (Er3+) fiber, the input signal gets amplified for the second time
(booster amplification). The amplified optical signal leaves the amplifier module via the
output connector 1-T. Optionally, 1% of the signal may be dropped by a coupler to leave
the module via the output connector Mon-T connected to a power meter or OSA.
Figure 691: Operation Scheme of the EDFA-C-D20-GC
1136
EDFA-C-D20-GC
Slot Positions
The EDFA-C-D20-GC is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and slots:
If used in an SH7HU/SH7HU-R: This module consumes more than 20

W. Check the power consumption of the shelf to be below 400 W.
Note
LED Indicators
EDFA-C-D20-GC and its ports. For details, refer to the FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2
Labeling
Printed labels that are affixed on the frontplate and board cover of the EDFA-C-D20-GC
Specifications
1137
EDFA-C-D17-GC
EDFA-C-D17-GC
Figure 692: EDFA-C-D17-GC Front View
Variants:
none
1138
EDFA-C-D17-GC
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the EDFA-C-D17-GC faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 232: EDFA-C-D17-GC Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Mon
monitoring port
Mod
amplifier port
midstage port
receive
transmit
Description
The EDFA-C-D17-GC is a fixed gain-controlled, double-stage Erbium-doped fiber
amplifier that amplifies up to 80 channels in the C band.
line budget.
The EDFA-C-D17-GC can be used as booster, inline or preamplifier.

Note
equipment.
Features
1139
EDFA-C-D17-GC
Standby Mode
again.
Note

Signal Path
Figure 693 shows the operation of the EDFA-C-D17-GC and illustrates the signal path,
compensating fiber module.
Note
No matter whether a dispersion compensating module (DCM) or a

jumper connects the two gain blocks, attenuation of < 10 dB is
mandatory.
The signal re-enters the second gain block of the amplifier module via the midstage input
input signal gets amplified for the second time (booster amplification). The amplified
optical signal leaves the amplifier module via the output connector 1-T.
1140
EDFA-C-D17-GC
Figure 693: Operation Scheme of an EDFA-C-D17-GC
Slot Positions
An EDFA-C-D17-GC is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and slots:
If used in an SH7HU: This module consumes more than 20 W. Check

the power consumption of the shelf to be below 400 W.
Note
LED indicators
EDFA-C-D17-GC and its ports. For details, refer to the FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2
Labeling
Printed labels that are affixed on the frontplate and board cover of the EDFA-C-D17-GC
Specifications
1141
EDFA-L-D17-GC
EDFA-L-D17-GC
Figure 694: EDFA L D17 GC Front View
Variants:
none
1142
EDFA-L-D17-GC
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the EDFA-L-D17-GC faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 233: EDFA-L-D17-GC Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Mon
monitoring port
Mod
amplifier port
midstage port
receive
transmit
Description
The EDFA-L-D17-GC is a fixed gain-controlled, double-stage Erbium-doped fiber
amplifier that amplifies up to 40 channels in the L band.
line budget.
The EDFA-L-D17-GC can be used as booster, inline or preamplifier.

Note
equipment.
Features
1143
EDFA-L-D17-GC
Standby Mode
again.
Note

Signal Path
Figure 695 shows the operation of the EDFA-L-D17-GC and illustrates the signal path,
Note
No matter whether a dispersion compensating module (DCM) or a

jumper connects the two gain blocks, attenuation of < 10 dB is
mandatory.
1144
EDFA-L-D17-GC
Figure 695: Operation Scheme of an EDFA-L-D17-GC
Slot Positions
An EDFA-L-D17-GC is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and slots:
SH1HU, slots 1
If used in an SH7HU/SH7HU-R: This module consumes more than

20 W. Check the power consumption of the shelf to be below 400 W.
Note
LED indicators
EDFA-L-D17-GC and its ports. For details, refer to the FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2
Labeling
Printed labels that are affixed on the frontplate and board cover of the EDFA-L-D17-GC
Specifications
1145
EDFA-C-S20-GCB-DM
EDFA-C-S20-GCB-DM
Figure 696: EDFA-C-S20-GCB-DM Front View
Variants:
none
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the EDFA-C-S20-GCB-DM faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 234: EDFA-C-S20-GCB-DM Faceplate Markings
1146
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Mon
monitoring port
Mod
amplifier port
receive
transmit
EDFA-C-S20-GCB-DM
Description
The EDFA-C-S20-GCB-DM is a fixed gain-controlled, single-stage Erbium-doped fiber
booster amplifier to amplify up to 80 channels in the C band group suitable for booster,
inline or preamplifier applications.
output and input power, i.e. the gain of the amplification stage. The amplifier also has
improved transient control, allowing for better regulation of variations in channel
amplitudes. The power level of the outgoing amplified signal may be monitored.

Note
equipment.
Features
Power level monitoring of the weak and amplified signal
Standby Mode
again.
Signal Path
Figure 697 shows the operation of the EDFA-C-S20-GCB-DM and illustrates the signal
Optionally, the power level of the incoming weak and outgoing amplified signal may be
1147
EDFA-C-S20-GCB-DM
monitored. The weak signal will be monitored, if the input connector Mon-R is connected
to a power meter or OSA. Hence, 1% of the weak signal will be added by a coupler to get
into the module. If the output connector Mon-T is connected to a power meter or OSA,
the amplified signal will be monitored and 1% of the amplified signal will be dropped by a
coupler to leave the module.
Figure 697: Operation Scheme of the EDFA-C-S20-GCB-DM
Slot Positions
An EDFA-C-S20-GCB-DM is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and
slots:
LED Indicators
EDFA-C-S20-GCB-DM and its ports. For details, refer to the FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2
Labeling
Printed labels that are affixed on the frontplate and board cover of the EDFA-C-S20-GCBDM provide module specific information. For details, see Labeling on p.1114.
Specifications
1148
EDFA-C-D20-VGC-DM
EDFA-C-D20-VGC-DM
Figure 698: EDFA-C-D20-VGC-DM Front View
Variants:
none
1149
EDFA-C-D20-VGC-DM
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the EDFA-C-D20-VGC-DM faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 235: EDFA-C-D20-VGC-DM Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Mon
monitoring port
Mod
amplifier port
midstage port
receive
transmit
Description
The EDFA-C-D20-VGC-DM is a gain-controlled, double-stage, dual monitoring Erbiumdoped fiber amplifier with a variable gain supporting amplification of up to 80 channels in
the C band.
The first gain block works as preamplifier, the second as booster amplifier. The midstage
access allows to insert a dispersion compensation module without effecting the line
budget. A variable optical attenuator (VOA) at the midstage access controls and suitably
adjusts attenuation of up to 16 dB depending on whether a dispersion compensating
module or a jumper connects the two gain blocks. The gain and transient controller
regulates the pump laser to stabilize the ratio between output and input power, i.e. the
gain of the amplification stage. The amplifier also has improved transient control, allowing
for better regulation of variations in channel amplitudes. The power level of the incoming
weak signal and outgoing amplified signal may be monitored.
The EDFA-C-D20-VGC-DM can be used as preamplifier, booster or inline amplifier.

Note
equipment.
Features
1150
EDFA-C-D20-VGC-DM
Used as preamplifier, booster or inline amplifier
Power level monitoring of the weak and amplified signal
Standby Mode
again.
Note

Signal Path
Figure 699 shows the operation of the EDFA-C-D20-VGC-DM and illustrates the signal
Optionally, the power level of the incoming weak and outgoing amplified signal may be
monitored. The weak signal will be monitored, if the input connector Mon-R is connected
to a power meter or OSA. Hence, 1% of the weak signal will be added by a coupler to get
into the module. If the output connector Mon-T is connected to a power meter or OSA,
the amplified signal will be monitored and 1% of the amplified signal will be dropped by a
coupler to leave the module.
1151
EDFA-C-D20-VGC-DM
Figure 699: Operation Scheme of an EDFA-C-D20-VGC-DM
Slot Positions
An EDFA-C-D20-VGC-DM is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and
slots:
LED indicators
EDFA-C-D20-VGC-DM and its ports. For details, refer to the FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2
Labeling
Printed labels that are affixed on the frontplate and board cover of the EDFA-C-D20VGC-DM provide module specific information. For details, see Labeling on p.1114.
Specifications
1152
EDFA-C-D20-VLGC-DM
EDFA-C-D20-VLGC-DM
Figure 700: EDFA-C-D20-VLGC-DM Front View
Variants:
none
1153
EDFA-C-D20-VLGC-DM
Faceplate Markings
The table below lists all abbreviations on the EDFA-C-D20-VLGC-DM faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 236: EDFA-C-D20-VLGC-DM Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Mon
monitoring port
Mod
amplifier port
midstage port
receive
transmit
Description
The EDFA-C-D20-VLGC-DM is a gain-controlled, double-stage Erbium-doped fiber
amplifier with a variable low gain supporting amplification of up to 80 channels in the Cband region. The EDFA-C-D20-VLGC-DM can be used as preamplifier, booster or inline
amplifier.
The first gain block works as a preamplifier, the second as a booster amplifier. The
midstage access allows the amplifier to connect to a dispersion compensation module
without effecting the line budget. A variable optical attenuator (VOA) at the midstage
access controls and adjusts attenuation from 12 to 27 dB depending on whether a
dispersion compensating module or a jumper connects the two gain blocks. The gain and
transient controller regulates the pump laser to stabilize the ratio between output and
input power, i.e. the gain of the amplification stage. The power level of the lower power
input signal and outgoing amplified signal could be monitored.

Note
equipment.
Features
1154
4 HP wide plug-in module
EDFA-C-D20-VLGC-DM
Operates as a preamplifier, booster or inline amplifier
Supports the channel modules operating with ALS
Standby mode
Standby Mode
In case of a fiber break, a loss of signal (LOS) is raised at the EDFAs input port. The
EDFA will start operating in a mode in which it emits signal noise at a reduced power
level. However, the EDFA is capable of amplifying the ALS pulses from the channel
modules in order to quickly return to the normal operation mode as soon as a data signals
return.
Note

Signal Path
The figure below shows the operation of the EDFA-C-D20-VLGC-DM and illustrates the
Figure 701: Operation Scheme of an EDFA-C-D20-VLGC-DM
The low power optical signal enters the first gain block of the amplifier module through the
input connector 1-R. An optical coupler at connector Mon-R drops 1% of the incoming
signal for monitoring by a power meter or OSA. When passing through the section of
Erbium-doped silica (Er3+) fiber, the input signal is amplified for the first time (preamplification). The amplified signal continues to the midstage output connector 2-T to an
optional dispersion compensation module if present.
The signal re-enters the amplifier module through the midstage input connector 2-R and
continues to the second gain block. When passing through the section of Erbium-doped
silica (Er3+) fiber, the input signal is amplified a second time (booster amplification). The
amplified optical signal leaves the amplifier module through the output connector 1-T.
1155
EDFA-C-D20-VLGC-DM
At the Mon-T connector, 1% of the amplified signal is dropped by a coupler for monitoring
by a power meter or OSA.
Slot Positions
An EDFA-C-D20-VLGC-DM is 4HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and
slots:
LED Indicators
EDFA-C-D20-VLGC-DM and its ports. For details, refer to the FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2
Labeling
Printed labels that are affixed on the frontplate and board cover of the EDFA-C-D20VLGC-DM provide module specific information. For details, see Labeling on p.1114.
Specifications
1156
EDFA-C-S26-VGC-DM
EDFA-C-S26-VGC-DM
Figure 702: EDFA-C-S26-VGC-DM Front View
1157
EDFA-C-S26-VGC-DM
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the EDFA-C-S26-VGC-DM faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 237: EDFA-C-S26-VGC-DM Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Mon
monitoring port
Mod
network port
upgrade port
client port
receive
transmit
Description
The EDFA-C-S26-VGC-DM is a variable gain-controlled, single-stage, high output power,
dual monitoring Erbium-doped fiber amplifier. The amplifier module is capable of
amplifying up to 80 channels in the C-band group. It can be used as a booster or preamplifier for in-line amplifier configurations.
An integrated variable optical attenuator (VOA) at the input amplification stage controls
the gain and adjusts attenuation to achieve the desired gain. The pump laser is regulated
to stabilize the ratio between output and input power.
The module provides a filter and optical access (via client port) of a 1510 nm OSC when
used as a booster amplifier. If the EDFA-C-S26-VGC-DM is terminated to another EDFAC-S26-VGC-DM, an OSC connection with a wavelength of 1510 nm is available as a pilot
signal and the presence of the OSC is detected to verify a proper connectivity allowing a
maximum power output level of 27 dBm.
If it is terminated to a Raman, a 1450 nm pilot is available to verify proper connectivity,
allowing for a maximum power output level of 27 dBm.
Since this pilot detection method is used to achieve optical safety of the network, the
EDFA-C-S26-VGC-DM has to operate in networks terminated to another EDFA-C-S26VGC-DM or inter-operate with a Raman amplifier. The pilot detection safety mechanism
can also be used for providing relevant diagnostic information and alerting system
management upon line deterioration and reduction in the amplifier gain. After a possible
defect in the transmission link has been remedied, the module will restart automatically.
Comprehensive optical performance monitoring on both the network port and upgrade
port as well as fault management are supported.
In addition, two monitor taps are available on the amplifier input and output to enable
external monitoring of signal.
The amplifier also has improved transient control, allowing for better regulation of
variations in channel amplitudes.
1158
EDFA-C-S26-VGC-DM
Features
Class 1M laser product with respect to laser safety
Amplification of optical data signals (up to 80 wavelengths) in the C band with 50

GHz channel spacing from 1529 nm to 1562 nm according to ITU-T G.694.1
Gain adjustment range 13.5 dB to 23.5 dB
High output power booster with a total maximum output power of 27 dBm
High loss single spans up to 50 dB combined with Raman
Low Polarization Dependent Gain
Support of pilot signals detection
Automatic Power reduction (APR)
1510 nm OSC or 1450 nm Raman pilot are essential elements of the laser safety
mechanisms
Automatic restart of pump laser
Performance monitoring of the optical output power levels at the upgrade port and
network port
Power monitoring of the amplified optical signal at the upgrade port and network port
LED indicators (module attributes and operating status)
VSM protected configurations are not supported
Protocol and transmission speed transparent
Full management support (Web and Craft Console, SNMP, TL1, NM, NP)
Field replaceable
Designed as 8 HP/5HU plug-in module
Bidirectional interface
Support of 80 C-band DWDM channels
Wavelength range: 1529 nm - 1562 nm
LC/PC type receptacle connectors
LC/PC type receptacle connectors for fiber termination
Support single OSC at a DWDM wavelength of 1528.77 nm
1159
EDFA-C-S26-VGC-DM
Monitoring Interface Characteristics
Unidirectional interface (two outputs only)
Upgrade port monitoring interface (Mon-R)
Passband monitoring port: 1529 nm - 1562 nm
Monitoring port coupling ratio: 1% of upgrade Rx port U-R
Network port monitoring interface (Mon-T)
Monitoring port coupling ratio: 1% of network Tx port N-T

Optionally, the optical output power levels at the upgrade port and network port may be
monitored. The monitoring port is provided for connecting test equipment such as an OSA
or OPM.
The signal power at the U-R interface can be monitored, if the connector Mon-R is
attached to an OPM or OSA. For this purpose, 1% of the signal power will be dropped by
a tap to leave the module. If the connector Mon-T is attached to an OPM or OSA, the
signal power at the N-T interface will be monitored and 1% of the signal power will be
dropped by a tap to leave the module. The signal power at the N-T interface should only
be measured when the laser pump is on. The taps for the monitoring ports are passive, so
their use will not affect the quality of the signals traversing the amplifier.
Laser Safety
Risk of invisible laser radiation!
CAUTION
In the event of fiber break or connector opening, a larger amount of

invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the network port output
connector or from the end of the unterminated fiber cable connected to
this port. Although the fiber break will interrupt the pilot signal, thereby
reducing the output level to approximately 10 dBm, do not look into the
beam and do not view the end of the fiber directly with optical
instruments. Place a protective cap over the fiber-optic connector when
the optical cable is not attached.
Optical power launched from the amplifier port output connector labeled N-T into the
transmission fiber can be higher than the class 1M hazard level specified in the IEC
60825-2. Such a high optical power can be potentially harmful to the human eye and skin.
To avoid these risks, the EDFA-C-S26-VGC-DM is equipped with firmware safety
mechanisms designed to detect a fiber break or connector opening, and to activate APR
to reduce the pump power. These safety mechanisms include the following criteria:
1160
Presence and detection of 1450 nm Raman pilot
Presence and detection of a high reach 1510 nm OSC pilot
EDFA-C-S26-VGC-DM
APR allows the EDFA-C-S26-VGC-DM itself to be classified as a class 1M laser product
(according to IEC 60825-1:2001 and CDRH 21 CFR 1040.10). These features also
enable hazard level 1M classification for the network (according to IEC 60825-2:2004)
within which it will be installed.
APR
The APR function limits the output signal power to +10 dBm at the network port output
connector N-T by reducing the pump power within a specified amount of time (defined by
laser safety class 1, hazard level 1M requirements according to IEC 60825-2:2004).
Recovery from Loss of Pilot Signal

After the fault has been corrected with the pilot signal, this optical amplifier runs a start-up
procedure. The amplifier will start at approximately 10 dBm and ramp up to the desired
power level automatically.
Signal Path
Figure 703 shows the operation of the EDFA-C-S26-VGC-DM and illustrates the
simplified signal path, which is described below.
Figure 703: Operation Scheme of the EDFA-C-S26-VGC-DM
Transmit Direction
The EDFA-C-S26-VGC-DM receives data signal through the upgrade port input
connector U-R. A variable optical attenuator (VOA) at the amplification stage controls
and suitably adjusts attenuation to achieve the desired gain. The pilot, either 1450 nm or
1510 nm, is received through the high power output port N-T. The OSC filter drops the
1510 nm OSC and feeds it into a single fiber to have the 1510 nm OSC signal separated
on the client output connector C-T. In the case of a 1450 nm pilot, there is no drop, but
1161
EDFA-C-S26-VGC-DM
only a detection of the 1450 nm wavelength. The amplified C-band channel spectrum is
passed onto the network output port N-T through which it exits the EDFA-C-S26-VGCDM. Data signal input power at the U-R is monitored by the input power monitor and data
signal output power at the N-T is monitored by the output power monitor. The pilot power
at the N-T port is measured separately for 1450 nm and 1510 nm.
Receive Direction
The EDFA-C-S26-VGC-DM receives data signals within the C-band channel spectrum
through the network port input connector N-R for transmission to the upgrade output
connector U-T. The add filter adds the OSC 1510 nm reentered the module through the
client input connector C-R and transmits the OSC signal out the N-R connector.
Interworking
The EDFA-C-S26-VGC-DM module can be used in conjunction with all FSP 3000R7
native and legacy channel modules, optical filters and released C-band EDFA modules.
Connecting
For laser safety reasons, it is required to connect at least 40 km of fiber to the output port
of the EDFA-C-S26-VGC-DM for proper operation within safety limits.
Slot Positions
The EDFA-C-S26-VGC-DM is 8 HP wide and therefore occupies 2 regular slots. It can be
SH1HU, slot 1
LED Indicators
LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating status of the EDFA-C-S26VGC-DM module and its ports. For details, refer to the FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2
Labeling
Printed labels that are affixed on the frontplate and board cover of the EDFA-C-S26-VGCDM provide module specific information. For details, see Labeling on p.1114.
Specifications
1162
EDFA-C-S26-VGCB-DM
EDFA-C-S26-VGCB-DM
Figure 704: EDFA-C-S26-VGCB-DM Front View
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the EDFA-C-S26-VGCB-DM faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 238: EDFA-C-S26-VGCB-DM Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Mon
monitoring port
Mod
network port
1163
EDFA-C-S26-VGCB-DM
Table 238: EDFA-C-S26-VGCB-DM Faceplate Markings
N
upgrade port
client port
receive
transmit
Description
The EDFA-C-S26-VGCB-DM is a variable gain-controlled, single-stage, high output
power, dual monitoring Erbium-doped fiber amplifier. The amplifier module is capable of
amplifying up to 80 channels in the C-band group. It can be used as a booster or preamplifier for in-line amplifier configurations.
An integrated variable optical attenuator (VOA) at the input amplification stage controls
the gain and adjusts attenuation to achieve the desired gain. The pump laser is regulated
to stabilize the ratio between output and input power.
The module provides a filter and optical access (via client port) of a 1528.77 nm OSC
when used as a booster amplifier. If the EDFA-C-S26-VGCB-DM is terminated to another
EDFA-C-S26-VGCB-DM, an OSC connection with a wavelength of 1528.77 nm is
available as a pilot signal and the presence of the OSC is detected to verify a proper
connectivity allowing a maximum power output level of 27 dBm.
If it is terminated to a Raman, a 1450 nm pilot is available to verify proper connectivity,
allowing for a maximum power output level of 27 dBm.
Since this pilot detection method is used to achieve optical safety of the network, the
EDFA-C-S26-VGCB-DM has to operate in networks terminated to another EDFA-C-S26VGCB-DM or inter-operate with a Raman amplifier. The pilot detection safety mechanism
can also be used for providing relevant diagnostic information and alerting system
management upon line deterioration and reduction in the amplifier gain. After a possible
defect in the transmission link has been remedied, the module will restart automatically.
In addition, two monitor taps are available on the amplifier input and output to enable
external monitoring of signal.
Features
1164
Amplification of optical data signals (up to 80 wavelengths) in the C band with 50

GHz channel spacing from 1529 nm to 1562 nm according to ITU-T G.694.1
Gain adjustment range 13.5 dB to 23.5 dB
High output power booster with a total maximum output power of 26 dBm
High loss single spans up to 50 dB combined with Raman
Low Polarization Dependent Gain
Support of pilot signals detection
EDFA-C-S26-VGCB-DM
Automatic Power reduction (APR)
1528.77 nm OSC or 1450 nm Raman pilot are essential elements of the laser safety
mechanisms
Performance monitoring of the optical output power levels at the upgrade port and
network port
Power monitoring of the amplified optical signal at the upgrade port and network port
Field replaceable
Designed as 8 HP/5HU plug-in module
Laser Safety
CAUTION

this port. Although the fiber break will interrupt the pilot signal, thereby
reducing the output level to approximately 10 dBm, do not look into the
beam and do not view the end of the fiber directly with optical
instruments. Place a protective cap over the fiber-optic connector when
Optical power launched from the amplifier port output connector labeled N-T into the
transmission fiber can be higher than the class 1M hazard level specified in the IEC
60825-2. Such a high optical power can be potentially harmful to the human eye and skin.
To avoid these risks, the EDFA-C-S26-VGCB-DM is equipped with firmware safety
to reduce the pump power. These safety mechanisms include the following criteria:
Presence and detection of 1450 nm Raman pilot
Presence and detection of a high reach 1528.77 nm OSC pilot
APR allows the EDFA-C-S26-VGCB-DM itself to be classified as a class 1M laser

product (according to IEC 60825-1:2001 and CDRH 21 CFR 1040.10). These features
also enable hazard level 1M classification for the network (according to IEC 608252:2004) within which it will be installed.
Signal Path
Figure 705 on p.1166 shows the operation scheme of the EDFA-C-S26-VGCB-DM and
illustrates the simplified signal path, which is described below.
1165
EDFA-C-S26-VGCB-DM
Figure 705: Operation Scheme of the EDFA-C-S26-VGCB-DM
Transmit Direction
The EDFA-C-S26-VGCB-DM receives data signal through the upgrade port input
connector U-R. A variable optical attenuator (VOA) at the amplification stage controls
and suitably adjusts attenuation to achieve the desired gain. The pilot, either 1450 nm or
1528.77 nm, is received through the high power output port N-T. The OSC filter drops the
1528.77 nm OSC and feeds it into a single fiber to have the 1528.77 nm OSC signal
separated on the client output connector C-T. In the case of a 1450 nm pilot, there is no
drop, but only a detection of the 1450 nm wavelength. The amplified C-band channel
spectrum is passed onto the network output port N-T through which it exits the EDFA-CS26-VGCB-DM. Data signal input power at the U-R is monitored by the input power
monitor and data signal output power at the N-T is monitored by the output power
monitor. The pilot power at the N-T port is measured separately for 1450 nm and 1528.77
nm.
Receive Direction
The EDFA-C-S26-VGCB-DM receives data signals within the C-band channel spectrum
through the network port input connector N-R for transmission to the upgrade output
connector U-T. The add filter adds the OSC 1528.77 nm reentered the module through
the client input connector C-R and transmits the OSC signal out the N-R connector.
Interworking
The EDFA-C-S26-VGCB-DM module can be used in conjunction with all FSP 3000R7
native and legacy channel modules, optical filters and released C-band EDFA modules.
1166
EDFA-C-S26-VGCB-DM
Connecting
For laser safety reasons, it is required to connect at least 40 km of fiber to the output port
of the EDFA-C-S26-VGCB-DM for proper operation within safety limits.
Slot Positions
The EDFA-C-S26-VGCB-DM is 8 HP wide and therefore occupies 2 regular slots. It can
SH1HU, slot 1
LED Indicators
LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating status of the EDFA-C-S26VGCB-DM module and its ports. For details, refer to the FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2
Labeling
Printed labels that are affixed on the frontplate and board cover of the EDFA-C-S26VGCB-DM provide module specific information. For details, see Labeling on p.1114.
Specifications
1167
EDFA-C-D27-GCB-DM
EDFA-C-D27-GCB-DM
Figure 706: EDFA-C-D27-GCB-DM Front View
Variants:
none
1168
EDFA-C-D27-GCB-DM
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the EDFA-C-D27-GCB-DM faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 239: EDFA-C-D27-GCB-DM Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Mon
monitoring port
Mod
network port
upgrade port
client port
receive
transmit
Description
The EDFA-C-D27-GCB-DM is a variable gain, high output power, dual monitoring
Erbium-doped fiber amplifier. The amplifier module is capable of amplifying up to 80
channels in the C-band group. It can be used as a booster or pre-amplifier for in-line
amplifier configurations. It has the same design, functionality and appearance as the
EDFA-C-S26-VGC-DM. They only differ in their environmental conditions (operating and
short-term temperature range) and in their module width.
It is 4 HP width and can be placed into following shelves and slots:
Labeling
Printed labels that are affixed on the frontplate and board cover of the EDFA-C-D27GCB-DM provide module specific information. For details, see Labeling on p.1114.
Specifications
1169
RAMAN-C10
RAMAN-C10
Figure 707: RAMAN-C10 Front View
Variants:
none
1170
RAMAN-C10
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the RAMAN-C10 faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 240: RAMAN-C10 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Mon
monitoring port
Mod
network port
upgrade port
client port
receive
transmit
Description
The RAMAN-C10 is a fiber Raman amplifier with constant pump power used for
backward distributed Raman amplification in DWDM networks. The amplifier module is
capable of amplifying up to 81 channels in the Cband.
The RAMAN-C10 makes use of the Raman effect in silica fibers (stimulated Raman
scattering) to provide optical gain. The so-called Raman amplification takes place in the
transmission fiber itself. Optical signal amplification is distributed along the transmission
path, thereby enabling the length of spans between amplifiers to increase.
The RAMAN-C10 improves the Optical Signal to Noise Ratio (OSNR) of the
transmission fiber in amplified regional and long-haul DWDM networks by boosting the
optical signal in transit. Due to the fact that the transmission fiber itself is used as an
amplification medium, low point losses (patch, splice) have to be considered. The
RAMAN-C10 is able to use almost any installed network optical fiber such as G.652
SMF, G.653 DSF, G.655 LEAF and G.655 TRUEWAVE fiber types. The transmission
fiber connected to the network port should be a minimum of 40km (24.84 mi) long.
The RAMAN-C10 also has improved transient control, allowing for better regulation of
To achieve optical safety of the network, the RAMAN-C10 provides additional laser
safety mechanisms that enable automatic reduction of the total pump power and shut
down of the pump lasers. The safety mechanisms also include presence and detection of
an OSC to comply with Class 1M laser safety requirements. OSC is handled on the
OSCM-PN in the FSP 3000R7 platform.
The same safety mechanisms can also be used for providing relevant diagnostic
information and alerting system management upon line deterioration and reduction in the
amplifier distributed gain. After a possible defect in the transmission link has been
remedied, the module will restart automatically.
1171
RAMAN-C10
Features
The RAMAN-C10 module has the following common features:
Up to 10 dB Raman gain in G.652 fiber
Amplification of optical data signals in the C band ranging from 1530 nm to 1562 nm
according to ITU-T G.694.1
High loss single spans up to 50 dB
Gain Flattening optimization
Small Polarization Dependent Gain
Support of counter-propagating configuration only
Support of the channel modules ALS scheme
Automatic Power reduction (APR) and automatic power shut down (APS)
OSC as an essential element of Laser Safety Class 1M
Monitoring of the optical output power levels at the upgrade port and network port
Network ready
Hot swappable
Field replaceable
Designed as 4 HP/5 HU plug-in module
Components
The RAMAN-C10 module principally consists of the motherboard, a Raman subassembly board, micro-controller module (CM) and power supply. The essential
elements of the Raman sub-assembly board are the high-power Raman pump lasers,
polarization beam combiner (PBC), pump wavelength/WDM wavelengths multiplexer,
gain flattening filter (GFF), taps, PDs as well as the integrated OSC add and drop filters.
1172
Support of 81 C-band DWDM channels and single OSC (DWDM wavelength)
Minimum per channel input data signal power at input Rx: -45 dBm (when pumps are
off)
Maximum total input data signal power at input Rx: -5 dBm (when pumps are off)
Minimum input OSC power at Rx: -47 dBm (when pumps are off)
Maximum input OSC power at Rx: -16 dBm (when pumps are on)
RAMAN-C10
Support of single OSC at a DWDM wavelength of 1528.77 nm
Network port monitoring interface (MON-T):
Monitoring port coupling ratio: 1% of network Tx port
Upgrade port monitoring interface (MON-R):
Monitoring port coupling ratio: 1% of upgrade Tx port
Power and Gain Control

The RAMAN-C10 uses two pump lasers with the same wavelength at 1450nm. The
polarization beam combiner is used to combine the pump beams orthogonally. The
backward propagating pump has a maximum fiber launch power of about 27.6 dBm. The
launch power can be adjusted between 23 dBm to 27.6 dBm in 0.2 dB steps to allow the
user to optimize the Raman gain for different fiber types and characteristics. Setting the
pump power is accomplished through ADVA Optical Networkings management
software. Gain control is not supported. This Raman optical amplifier has a wide gain
bandwidth (up to 100 nm). The module provides power monitoring on the amplified optical
signal as well as on the condition of the internal laser pumps.

RAMAN-C10 supports two operation modes:
Max pump power mode:
1173
RAMAN-C10
In this mode, maximum pump power is launched through the network port into the
transmission fiber.
Manual pump power mode:

Only total power can be set, not individual pump powers.
Read and understand the operating instructions in the Provisioning and
Operations Manual as well as the deployment rules addressed in Laser
Safety Compliant Amplifier Configurations on p.1235, before installing
and using this device. Failure to follow operating instructions could result
in personal injury and/or damage to the equipment.

or OPM.
The Raman amplified signal power at the U-T interface can be monitored, if the connector
Mon-R is attached to an OPM or OSA. For this purpose, 1% of the signal power will be
dropped by a tap to leave the module. The signal power at the U-T interface can only be
measured when the laser pumps are on. If the connector Mon-T is attached to an OPM or
OSA, the signal power at the N-T interface will be monitored and 1% of the signal power
will be dropped by a tap to leave the module. The taps for the monitoring ports are
passive, so their use (or lack thereof) will not affect the quality of the signals traversing
the Raman amplifier.
Laser Safety
CAUTION

this port. Do not look into the beam and do not view the end of the fiber
directly with optical instruments. Viewing the laser output with optical
instruments within a distance of approx. 100 mm (3.9 in) may pose a risk
of eye injury. Place a protective cap over the fiber-optic connector when
Pump power launched from the amplifier network port input connector labeled N-R into
the transmission fiber is higher than the class 1M hazard level specified in the IEC 608252. Such a high pump power can be potentially harmful to the human eye and skin. Another
risk is that a loss of input signal will not be detected even if a fiber break occurs. This is
due to large ASE generated along the transmission line within the operating band.
To avoid these risks, the Raman Amplifier is equipped with different firmware safety
to reduce the Raman pump power or to activate APS to shut down the pumps. These
safety mechanisms include the following criteria
1174
Presence and detection of optical data signal in the C band
Presence and detection of a high reach OSC
Detection of pump back-reflection energy
RAMAN-C10
Detection of ASE inside the C band
APR and APS allow the Raman amplifier itself to be classified as a class 1M laser
product (according to IEC 60825-1:2001 and CDRH 21 CFR 1040.10). These features
also enable hazard level 1M classification for the network (according to IEC 608252:2004) within which it will be installed.
ALS
To ensure that the FSP 3000R7 operates as a hazard level 1M system according to IEC
60825-2:2004, the RAMAN-C10 supports ADVA Optical Networkings auto laser
shutdown (ALS) scheme.
The RAMAN-C10 is capable of distinguishing between a real fiber break and the channel
modules performing ALS. To allow the channel modules to establish their respective
links, the Raman amplifier detects the test pulses, amplifies them and lets them pass.
For this purposes, the amplifier must be active, and its APS function must be enabled.
APR
APR function limits the output signal power at the upgrade port output connector U-T by
reducing the Raman pump power to a safe level within a specified amount of time
(defined by laser safety class 1, hazard level 1M requirements according to IEC 608252:2004).
When the output signal power at U-T attempts to exceed the limit threshold, the pump
current is regulated to maintain the output power at the threshold level. The power limit is
a fixed threshold value. The threshold level is set to values that maintain the output power
below the eye safety limit. The limit threshold can be set by the user through
management software. APR is not user configurable. It is password-protected.
APS
In the event of opening the network port input connector N-R of the amplifier, or
occurrence of a fiber break, APS function will be activated. When activated, APS shuts
down the pump lasers within less than 1 s to prevent the amplified signal or Raman pump
out from being transmitted into the fiber.
To distinguish between a fiber break and a loss of data signal, an OSC signal is required
so some optical data signal is always present. In order that the RAMAN-C10 to shut
down, there must be a loss of both the OSC signal and the data signal. On one side, the
loss of OSC alone is not deemed sufficient to turn off the Raman amplifier, since a faulty
OSC laser does not have an adverse effect on traffic conditions. On the other side, the
loss of data signal alone does not turn off the Raman amplifier because it would violate
ALS conditions which require the amplifier to be on, without the presence of a data signal,
in order to pass the ALS pulses allowing link initialization. Alarms are raised to indicate
the operational shut down. Once the pumps are shut down, the pump control will enter an
automatic restart sequence to attempt to re-establish service.
1175
RAMAN-C10
Start-Up
After the fault has been corrected, the RAMAN-C10 runs a start-up procedure. Typically,
automatic re-start requires the detection of the OSC signal. Please note, the amplifier will
not initiate start-up if the OSCM-PN is configured for ALS. Furthermore, the pump lasers
will not turn up automatically until the OSC power level is -45 dBm at the network port
input connector N-R. With the pumps off, the control function waits for the trigger of OSC
being present. When OSC power is detected, there is confirmation that the fiber is
connected and the pump control attempts to ramp the laser pumps.
If no defects are detected, then the pumps are turned on and initially ramp up to 100mW
for laser class 1M eye safety. At this point, the pumps will ramp up to full power. The
pumps are fully up when the pump power has reached the provisioned value (useradjustable). The conditions are continually checked during the gradual increase of the
pump power from off to the requested pump power. The pumps stay active unless a
defect occurs that results in a pump shut down.
This turn-up procedure is repeated whenever both OSC and the data signal are lost.
Signal Path
Figure 708 shows the operation of the RAMAN-C10 and illustrates the simplified signal
Figure 708: Operation Scheme of the RAMAN-C10 deployed in Backward
Pumping Configuration
1176
RAMAN-C10
The Raman amplifier section is principally composed of two pump lasers, two pump PDs
and the control mechanism. The Raman pump lasers operating at a wavelength of 1450
nm each generate the pumping light beams. The polarization beam combiner (PBC)
orthogonally combines the pump beams into a single fiber, thereby doubling the effective
pump power output. Using the pump wavelength/WDM wavelengths multiplexer, the
pump light beam is launched into the transmission fiber through the network port input
connector N-R with minimal optical loss. Pumping light wavelength propagates counter
to the data signal light wavelengths at a distance of tens of kilometers from the RAMANC10 (contra-directional pumping). Signal amplification arises along the span's
transmission fiber as a result of the Raman Effect. PD1 and PD2 provide measurement
points to control the operation of the pumps and to monitor pump back reflection.
Receive Direction
The RAMAN-C10 receives the Raman amplified data signals along with the OSC signal
through the network port input connector N-R from the far-end of the link. After the
Raman amplifier output, the drop filter drops the OSC from the C-band channel spectrum
and feeds it into a single fiber to have the OSC signal separated on the client port output
connector C-T. The whole C-band channel spectrum is passed on via the gain flattening
filter (GFF) to the upgrade port output connector U-T through which it exits the RAMANC10 module. The OSC is transmitted to an OSCM-PN on the client side. Data signal
output power at the U-T connector is monitored by PD3 when pumps are on. Data signal
input power at the N-R connector is monitored by PD4 when pumps are off. The received
OSC power is measured by PD5. The OSC power is computed by conditioning the PD5
reading with the estimated ASE value.
Transmit Direction
The RAMAN-C10 receives data signals within the C-band channel spectrum through the
upgrade port input connector U-R. The add filter adds the OSC reentered the module
through the client input connector C-R in the direction of data signal flow to the C-band
channel spectrum. The resulting signal is coupled into a single fiber and directed to the
network output connector N-T for transmission to the far end of the link.
Note
When OSC signal is lost, the Raman amplifier requires one data signal
as long as the input power is -43 dBm or higher to maintain the traffic.
Turn on of the pumps does not depend on the receive data signal level,
but requires only OSC.
ASE Table
The Raman amplifier will not be operational without a valid ASE table. The table must be
built over dark transmission fiber. This means that there are not data signals, but OSC
must be present. No ALS pulses are allowed. The ASE table must be built on
commissioning or after some fiber maintenance activities. To create an ASE table, a
special user command is available.
1177
RAMAN-C10
Application
The RAMAN-C10 module is designed for single- or multiple-span fiber types for regional
and extended-regional networks with reconfigurable add/drop capability. It is preferably
used as a preamplifier in conjunction with conventional EDFA technology to extend the
link budget in DWDM optical transport systems (long span optical transmission). The
Raman amplifier allows for lower signal launch power in order to traverse the span above
the noise floor while still increasing the signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR). This enables
increased reach and increased amplifier spacing.
Combined with ADVA Optical Networkings EDFA modules, very wide optical gainflattened bandwidth can be obtained. For example, in combination with EDFA-C-D20VGC or EDFA-C-D20-VGC-DM, the RAMAN-C10 is capable of up to 50dB span loss.
Note

guaranteed to comply with laser class 1M. For more information on
permissible configurations and connecting, see the deployment rules
p.1235.
Interworking
The RAMAN-C10 module can be used in conjunction with all FSP 3000R7 native and
legacy channel modules, optical filter modules and released C-band EDFA modules.
Slot Positions
The RAMAN-C10 is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and slots:
SH1HU, slot 1 and 2
LED Indicators
RAMAN-C10 module and its ports. For details, refer to the FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2
Labeling
Printed labels that are affixed on the frontplate and board cover of the RAMAN-C10
Specifications
1178
2RAMAN-C15-LL
2RAMAN-C15-LL
Figure 709: 2RAMAN-C15-LL Front View
Variants:
none
1179
2RAMAN-C15-LL
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the 2RAMAN-C15-LL faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 241: 2RAMAN-C15-LL Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Mon
monitoring port
Mod
network port
upgrade port
operating status of the upgrade port
client port
receive
transmit
Description
The 2RAMAN-C15-LL is a dual Raman amplifier module optimized to be used in low
latency networks. It offers minimum ASE noise and maximum flatness for extended
links. Each Raman is designed to operate over spans supporting 81C- band channels.
The Raman operates without EDFA booster amplifiers. Each module contains a forward
(FWD) and a backward (BWD) facing Raman amplifier. The module is designed to
operate with both Raman amplifiers turned on.
The forward Raman cannot be used without the backward Raman because it will not turn
on without having the backward Raman running on the same span. The backward Raman
does not need the forward Raman, but it does need to receive the 1528 nm OSC signal,
which is added to the built-in OSC filter at the upstream forward Raman amp C-R port.
The module occupies two slots in a FSP 3000R7 7HU and 9HU shelves.
The span is amplified with a pair of Raman modules, one module at each end of the span.
A span is amplified with forward propagating (FWD) Raman amplification on the ingress
of the span, and with counter propagating (BWD) Raman amplification at the egress of
the fiber span.
Each of the Raman amplifiers contains a variable gain adjustment that can cover a range
of span loses. If desired, two Raman amplifier modules may be used as line amplifiers in
a back to back configuration with dispersion compensation applied between the two. The
Raman module does not provide an access port for connection to a dispersion
compensation module (DCM), but instead provides in-line configuration with a DCM.
However, it is recommended that a Dispersion Compensation Grating (DCG) be used.
The primary application of this amplifier is low latency. The DCG latency and loss
characteristics are much less than a DCM.
The OSC channel itself is provided by a standard OSCM module. OSC filters and
monitors are integrated on the module. Comprehensive optical performance monitoring
on both the network port and upgrade port as well as fault management are supported.
1180
2RAMAN-C15-LL
The Raman amplifiers are sensitive to fiber type since they produce their gain in the
transport fiber. Raman amplifiers may be used with multiple fiber types. The user must
provision a fiber type. This user selection is used to control the amplifier in a manner
allowing for optimized performance for that fiber type. If the user chooses the wrong fiber
type, it cannot be detected by the amplifier and amplifier performance will most likely be
degraded by the incorrect network fiber selection.
To achieve optical safety of the network, the 2RAMAN-C15-LL provides additional laser
safety mechanisms that enable automatic shut down of the pump lasers. The safety
mechanisms also include presence and detection of an OSC to comply with Class 1M
laser safety requirements. OSC is handled on the OSCM-PN in the FSP 3000R7
platform. To insure fiber continuity a pilot signal must be present, and within limits, in
each direction. The BWD Raman pilot is the OSC. The FWD Raman pilot is one of the
BWD Raman pump wavelengths. If the pilot is too low or too high, then the amplifier
cannot be started. A pilot that is too high is an indication that the fiber span is too short.
The same safety mechanisms can also be used for providing relevant diagnostic
information and alerting system management upon line deterioration and reduction in the
amplifier distributed gain. After a possible defect in the transmission link has been
remedied, the module will restart automatically.
The 2RAMAN-C15-LL module is supported by the network control unit

NCU-IIand NCU-II-P only.
Note
Features
The 2RAMAN-C15-LL module has the following common features:
Up to 30 dB Raman gain in G.652 (SMF28, Allwave), G.655 (TW-RS, Teralight,TWReach), ULL (Ultra-Low Loss) fiber
Optimized for use in low latency networks
Amplification of optical data signals in the C band ranging from 1529 nm to 1563 nm
according to ITU-T G.694.1
High loss single spans up to 50 dB (in conjunction with an EDFA)
Gain Flattening optimization
Small Polarization Dependent Gain
Support of forward and counter-propagating configurations
Support of the channel modules ALS scheme
Automatic power shut down (APS)
OSC as an essential element of Laser Safety Class 1M
Automatic restart of FWD and BWD pump lasers
Hot swappable
1181
2RAMAN-C15-LL
Field replaceable
Designed as 8HP/ 5 HU plug-in module which occupies 2 slots
Components
The 2RAMAN-C15-LL module principally consists of the motherboard, a Raman subassembly board, micro-controller module (CM) and power supply. The essential
elements of the Raman sub-assembly board are the high-power Raman pump lasers,
polarization beam combiner (PBC), pump wavelength/WDM wavelengths multiplexer,
gain flattening filter (GFF), taps, PDs as well as the integrated OSC add and drop filters.
Support of 81C-band DWDM channels and single OSC (DWDM wavelength)
Support of single OSC at a DWDM wavelength of 196.10 THz (or 1528.77nm)
1182
Support of 81C-band DWDM channels
2RAMAN-C15-LL

The 2RAMAN-C15-LL BWD and FWD Raman uses four pump lasers. The polarization
beam combiner is used to combine the pump beams orthogonally. Both amps have a
maximum fiber launch power of about 29.0 dBm The gain can be adjusted from 7.0 dB to
15.0 dB in 0.1 dB steps to allow the user to optimize the Raman gain for different fiber
types and characteristics.
2RAMAN-C15-LL supports two operation modes:
user can set Gain and Tilt on BWD Raman.
user can set Gain only on FWD Raman
Note


or OPM.
The BWD Raman amplified signal power at the U-T interface can be monitored. If the
connector Mon-R is attached to an OPM or OSA for example, 1% of the signal power will
be dropped by the tap as the signal leaves the module. The signal power at the U-T
interface can only be measured when the laser pumps are on. If the connector Mon-T is
attached to an OPM or OSA, the FWD Raman signal power at the N-T interface will be
monitored and dropped by 1% of the signal power by the tap as it leaves the module. The
taps used to monitor the ports are passive, so their use (or lack thereof) will not affect the
quality of the signals traversing the Raman amplifier.
Laser Safety
CAUTION

Pump power launched from the FWD and BWD amplifier network ports into the
transmission fiber is higher than the class 1M hazard level specified in the IEC 60825-2.
Such a high pump power can be potentially harmful to the human eye and skin. Another
risk is that a loss of input signal will not be detected even if a fiber break occurs. This is
due to large ASE generated along the transmission line within the operating band.
1183
2RAMAN-C15-LL
mechanisms designed to detect a fiber break or connector opening, and to activate APS
to shut down the pumps. These safety mechanisms include the following criteria
Presence and detection of a high reach OSC
Presence and detection of BWD Raman pump
APS allows the Raman amplifier itself to be classified as a class 1M laser product
APS
In the event of an opening in the FWD or BWD amplifier network port connector or a fiber
break occurs, the APS function will be activated. When activated, APS shuts down the
pump lasers within less than 1 second to prevent the amplified signal or Raman pump
output from being transmitted into the fiber.
The APS function acts slightly different for the FWD Raman than it does for the BWD
Raman amplifier. The conditions that trigger APS are different for each Raman type.
APS triggers for the FWD Raman: The FWD Raman amplifier will shut down its pumps if
there is either a loss of pilot or a loss of the data channel. In this case the pilot being
received at the FWD Raman is one of the far end BWD Raman pump wavelengths.
APS triggers for the BWD Raman: The BWD Raman will shut down its pumps if there is
both a loss of pilot and a loss of the data channel. In this case the pilot being received at
the BWD Raman is the OSC.
Alarms are raised to indicate the operational shut down. Once the pumps are shut down,
the pump control will enter an automatic restart sequence to attempt to re-establish
service.
Start-Up
To get the pumps to start, a valid ASE table must exist and the pilot must be present and
within limits. If the pilot is too low the amplifier will not start. If the pilot is too high, or the
span is too short, the pumps will not start.
After the fault has been corrected, the 2RAMAN-C15-LL runs a start-up procedure.
Automatic re-start for the BWD Raman requires the detection of the OSC signal. Please
note, the amplifier will not initiate start-up if the OSCM-PN is configured for ALS.
Furthermore, the pump lasers will not turn up automatically until the OSC power level is 38 dBm at the network port input connector N-R. With the pumps off, the control function
waits for the trigger of OSC being present. When OSC power is detected, there is
confirmation that the fiber is connected and the pump control attempts to start the laser
pumps.
If no defects are detected, then the pumps are turned on and will ramp up to full power.
The pumps are fully up when the pump power has reached the correct power to provide
the provisioned gain (gain is user-adjustable). The conditions are continually checked
during the gradual increase of the pump power from off to the requested pump power. The
pumps stay active unless a defect occurs that results in a pump shut down. This turn-up
procedure is repeated whenever both OSC and the data signal are lost.
1184
2RAMAN-C15-LL
Automatic re-start for the FWD Raman requires the detection of the FEND BWD pump.
Furthermore, the pump lasers will not turn up automatically until the pump received power
level is -28 dBm at the network port input connector N-T. With the pumps off, the control
function waits for the trigger of the BWD pump being present. When BWD pump power is
detected, there is confirmation that the fiber is connected and the pump control attempts
to start the laser pumps. If no defects are detected, then the pumps are turned on and will
ramp up to full power. The pumps are fully up when the pump power has reached the
correct power to provide the provisioned gain (gain is user-adjustable). The conditions are
continually checked during the gradual increase of the pump power from off to the
requested pump power. The pumps stay active unless a defect occurs that results in a
pump shut down. This turn-up procedure is repeated whenever either the BWD pump or
the data signal is lost.
Signal Path
Figure 710 below shows a simplified signal path of the 2RAMAN-C15-LL.
Figure 710: Operation Scheme of the 2RAMAN-C15-LL (Simplified)
1185
2RAMAN-C15-LL
Each of the FWD and BWD Raman amplifier sections are principally composed of four
pump lasers, a pump PD and the control mechanism. The Raman pump lasers generate
the pumping light beams. The polarization beam combiner (PBC) orthogonally combines
the pump beams into a single fiber. Using the pump wavelength/WDM optical
multiplexer, the pump light beam is launched into the network transmission fiber through
the network port connector.
For the BWD Raman, the pump power wavelength is propagated counter to the data
signal wavelengths at a distance of tens of kilometers from the 2RAMAN-C15-LL (contradirectional pumping). Signal amplification arises along the span's transmission fiber as a
result of the Raman Effect. PD1 provides measurement points to control the operation of
the pumps.
The FWD Raman amplifies like the BWD Raman except the pumping light wavelength
propagates out of the NT port with the data signal at a distance of tens of kilometers. In
other words the FWD Raman pumps are co-propagating pumps. Signal amplification
arises along the transmission fiber in the forward span as a result of the Raman Effect.
FWD RAMAN Path

The composite C-band data signals power is input to the FWD Raman via the UpgradeRx U-R port. This signal first passes through an isolator, then through a 2X2 Coupler
where portions of the signal are split off into two monitoring circuits and the remainder
passed to a GFF, or gain flattening filter. One split off portion is selectively filtered and
routed to PD's that detect ASE noise. The other split off portion is divided into two paths,
one directly routed to a PD providing an internal measurement of the Input power and the
remainder is routed to the front panel Tap Mon-T port for external signal monitoring
purposes.
The output of the GFF is routed to a WDM where the composite C-band signal is coupled
with the input OSC signal. This combined C-band + OSC signal is then passed to another
WDM where it is combined with the output of the Raman pumps and then routed to the
Network Tx N-T port. The light from the Raman pumps propagates in the same direction
as the composite C-band + OSC signals, thus the name Forward Raman. Raman
amplification is achieved in the network fiber connected to the N-T port.
BWD RAMAN Path

The BWD Raman amplifier performs its amplification in the network fiber through
excitation of the plant fiber with the Raman pumps. The pump power travels out the
amplifier stage through the Network Rx N-R port into the network fiber. The amplified C
band data and OSC signals travel through the WDM where the Raman pumps are
inserted and into the OSC filter. Here the OSC is split off, detected by the OSC PD and
routed to the Client Tx C-T port. The C band data signals continue through the OSC filter
to a tap coupler where a portion of the signal is split off to an Output power PD, ASE PD
and through to the front panel Tap Mon-R port. The remainder of the C-band signal is
routed to the Upgrade Tx U-T port.
There is no GFF in the Backward Raman path. Flatness will be achieved by adjusting the
power levels of the various Raman pump wavelengths.
1186
2RAMAN-C15-LL
Note
When OSC signal is lost, the BWD Raman amplifier requires one data
signal as long as the input power is -36 dBm or higher to maintain the
traffic. Turn on of the pumps does not depend on the receive data signal
level, but requires only OSC.
ASE Table
The Raman amplifier will not be operational without a valid ASE table. The table must be
built over dark transmission fiber. This means that there are no data signals. The ASE
table must be built on commissioning or after some fiber maintenance activities. To
create an ASE table, a special user command is available.
Note that the ASE table is dependent on the selected network fiber type, and tilt of the
BWD Raman. If the user changes the network fiber type selection and/or the BWD tilt,
then any existing ASE table is deleted and a new table must be built. If the user spares an
existing Raman amplifier (i.e. replaces with another exact amplifier) the ASE table will no
longer be valid and a new ASE table must be built. If the ASE table is valid in slot 2 and
the user moves the Raman card to slot 4, the ASE table is permanently invalidated. If the
user moves the Raman card back to slot 2, the ASE table will remain invalid.
The ASE table must be built for each amplifier independently. For the user to initiate the
build operation, the amplifier ADMIN state must be in Maintenance. To perform a
successful build, the pilot must be present. Since the pilot for the FWD amplifier is the
one of the FEND BWD pumps and the pilot for the BWD is the OSC, the table for the
BWD must be built first allowing its pumps to come up. For the BWD amplifier, the fiber
must be dark, the pilot (OSC) must be present and not too high. When the table build is
complete, the BWD pumps will start.
At this point, the BWD Raman FWD ASE Pilot operation should be turned on. This will
turn on a single BWD pump to provide a pilot signal for the FWD Raman without
corrupting the FWD Raman ASE table values. The FWD Raman ASE table may not be
built if the BWD Raman is not in pilot mode. Once the BWD ASE table is built and the
FWD ASE Pilot is turned on, the FWD ASE table may be built. The fiber must be dark
and pilot (one of the FEND BWD pumps) present, but not too high. Note: that the FWD
data signal is dark when nothing is entering the U port.
Application
The 2RAMAN-C15-LL module is designed for use in low latency networks. The module
operates with single or multiple-span fiber types for regional and extended-regional
networks with reconfigurable add/drop capability. It is preferably used as a preamplifier in
conjunction with conventional EDFA technology to extend the link budget in DWDM
optical transport systems (long span optical transmission). The Raman amplifier allows
for lower signal launch power in order to traverse the span above the noise floor while still
increasing the signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR). This enables increased reach and increased
amplifier spacing.
Combined with ADVA Optical Networkings EDFA modules, very wide optical gainflattened bandwidth can be obtained. For example, in combination with EDFA-C-D20VGC-DM, as well as other compatible EDFA modules, the 2RAMAN-C15-LL is capable
of up to 50dB span loss. See compatible modules list below.
1187
2RAMAN-C15-LL
Note

p.1235.
Compatible Modules
The 2RAMAN-C15-LL module can be used in conjunction with all FSP 3000R7 native
and legacy channel modules, however, the primary application is for the FWD and BWD
amplifiers to perform with low latency transponder channel cards., The Raman is
compatible with all optical filter modules. The Raman is compatible with the following
EDFA amplifier types used as a pre-amp:
EDFA-C-D20-VGC-DM
EDFA-C-D20-VLGC-DM
EDFA-C-S20-GCB
EDFA-C-S20-GCB-DM
The Raman is not allowed to interoperate with EDFA-C-D27-GCB-DM, EDFA-C-S26GCB-DM or EDFA-C-S26-VGC-DM.
Functional Applications
The key application of the 2RAMAN-C15-LL is to provide low latency amplification of
networks with multiple spans in a linear network. The module must be capable of
cascading multiple spans all amplified with the 2RAMAN-C15-LL. The figure below
illustrates the types of network configurations that are allowed.
Figure 711: 2RAMAN-C15-LL Network Diagram
1188
2RAMAN-C15-LL
Terminal Node Configurations

The following figure illustrate the allowed Terminal Node configurations using the
2Raman-C15-LL.
Figure 712: Terminal Node Diagram
Line Node Configurations

The following figure illustrates the allowed Line-Amp Node configurations using the
2Raman-C15-LL. Note that if dispersion compensation is needed. Dispersion
Compensation Grating (DCG) is preferred. The use of a DCM here will add extra optical
loss and latency.
1189
2RAMAN-C15-LL
Figure 713: Line-Amp Node Diagram
Thru/Add/Drop/Regeneration Node Configurations

The following figure illustrates the allowed Regeneration/Through/Add/Drop Node
configurations using the 2RAMAN-C15-LL. DCM/DCG's are not shown but can be used
as required.
1190
2RAMAN-C15-LL
Figure 714: Thru/Add/Drop/Regeneration Diagram
Slot Positions
The 2RAMAN-C15-LL is 8 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and slots:
LED Indicators
2RAMAN-C15-LL module and its ports. For details, refer to the FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2
Labeling
Printed labels that are affixed on the front plate and board cover of the 2RAMAN-C15-LL
1191
AMP-S20H-C15
Specifications
AMP-S20H-C15
Figure 715: AMP-S20H-C15 Front View
Variants:
none
1192
AMP-S20H-C15
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the AMP-S20H-C15 faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 242: AMP-S20H-C15 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Mon
monitoring port
Mod
network port
upgrade port
client port
receive
transmit
Description
The AMP-S20H-C15 module is an integrated high gain EDFA and BWD Raman amplifier
pair designed to operate over spans supporting 96 C band channels. It offers minimum
ASE noise and maximum flatness for extended links. If the span is relatively short or a
pre-amp/post amp is needed, the Raman amplifier is not needed. The EDFA may be used
independently.
Integration of two amplifiers on the same module reduces the number of individual
amplifier types needed. Usage of the EDFA or Raman amplifiers is dependent on the
application. The module allows usage of the EDFA amplifier alone, or both the EDFA and
BWD Raman. If the BWD Raman is used, the EDFA must also be used because when
the EDFA pumps are turned off the signal path is severely attenuated. If the EDFA is
used alone, there is a 2 dB loss through the BWD Raman without the pumps on.
The AMP-S20H-C15 does not provide mid-stage access since the 100G network
interfaces include integrated electronic dispersion compensation.
The AMP-S20H-C15 contains a backward acting Raman. The backward acting Raman
provides variable gain and variable tilt.
To comply with class 1M LASER eye safety, the BWD Raman output provides an APS
mechanism to shut off the BWD Raman pumps when the network fiber is open. The
EDFA maximum output power is below the class 1M limit so there is no direct eye safety
issue.
Because the pilot (OSC) is used for confirmation of fiber continuity and for estimation of
gain, the amplifier module also includes a bi-directional OSC filter1. The module allows
for setting and detection of the OSC level present on the network fiber. The OSC
frequency for the BWD Raman is 1528.77 nm which is added to the built-in OSC filter.
1To use the OSCfunctions, the AMP-S20H-C15 must be part of a bidirectional
configuration. When deploying the AMP-S20H-C15 in a unidirectional setup, the

OSCfilter is not included in the path and hence the OSC cannot be utilized. This results
in OSC alarms and PMs which may be suppressed by provisioning the AMP-S20H-C15
in "passive mode" (OSCOperation = Passive).
1193
AMP-S20H-C15
The AMP-S20H-C15 module is supported by the network control unit

Note
Features
The AMP-S20H-C15 module has the following common features:
Can be used with multiple fiber types
Amplifier may be used as an EDFA only or EDFA/BWD Raman
VOA at output of EDFA allowing best fit for noise and launch power
OSC filter is included on the module (OSC signal must be present to start the BWD
Raman)
Fiber detection circuitry for network element facing interface U port
Span Equalization
Amplification of optical data signals in the C band ranging from 1528.5 nm to 1568.5
nm according to ITU-T G.694.1
OSC as an essential element of APSfor the EDFA and Laser Safety Class 1M for
the BWDRaman
Automatic restart of BWD pump lasers
Hot swappable
Field replaceable
1194
Support of 96C-band DWDM channels and single OSC (DWDM wavelength)
Wavelength range: 1528.5 nm - 1568.5 nm
AMP-S20H-C15
Support of single OSC at a DWDM wavelength of 1528.77nm
Passband monitoring port: 1528.5 nm - 1568.5 nm

The AMP-S20H-C15 BWD Raman uses four pump lasers. The polarization beam
combiner is used to combine the pump beams orthogonally. The BWD Raman has a
AMP-S20H-C15 supports two operation modes:
user can set Gain only on EDFA amp

1195
AMP-S20H-C15

or OPM.
attached to an OPM or OSA, the input signal power at the U-R interface will be monitored
and dropped by 1% of the signal power by the tap. The taps used to monitor the ports are
the AMP-S20H-C15 module.
Laser Safety
CAUTION

Pump power launched from the BWD amplifier network ports, into the transmission fiber,
is higher than the class 1M hazard level specified in the IEC 60825-2. Such a high pump
power can be potentially harmful to the human eye and skin. Another risk is that a loss of
input signal will not be detected even if a fiber break occurs. This is due to large ASE
generated along the transmission line within the operating band.
To avoid these risks, the Raman amplifier is equipped with different firmware safety
Presence and detection of OSC
Shut Down Behavior

Amplifiers pumps may be shut down due to some command or defect. Shut down
behavior for the EDFA and Raman amplifier is detailed below.
1196
AMP-S20H-C15
EDFA Shut Down

Shut Down for the EDFA consists of shutting down the pumps due to various defects to
prevent propagation of ASE noise. Possible causes of pump shut down are:
EDFA ADMIN state is UAS or DSBLD
LASER temperature reaches a threshold where the pumps may be damaged
output power attempts to exceed eye safety limit and cannot be regulated
loss of input signal (prevents propagation of noise)
When the pumps are shut down, due to a defect or ADMIN state, the LASERs are shut
off within microseconds. On an input loss of signal condition, the input loss is soaked for
200 ms before the shut down sequence is initiated. After the 200 ms soak time, the shut
down is activated and completes within the microseconds time to shut off the pump
LASERs.
service.
Raman Shut Down

The Raman amplifiers will shut down the pumps under the following conditions:
Raman ADMIN state is UAS or DSBLD
pump temperature exceeds a threshold that will damage the pumps
no valid ASE table
if there is both a loss of pilot and a loss of the data channel
When a shut down is activated, the pump lasers shut down within microseconds to
prevent the amplified signal or Raman pump output from being transmitted into the fiber.
service.
Fiber Detection
The fiber detection feature is available only on the network element facing interface, the
U interface. Fiber detection uses an out-of-band pilot to form a communication link
between the U interface and the next attached interface. If the fiber detection feature is
enabled, then the fiber detection circuits will attempt to determine the from-to relationship
between the U interface and the interface it is attached to.
If the fiber detection communication link is established, then the from-to information is
passed between the two and the NE will determine if the connection is a valid one. If the
connection is valid, the connection is entered into the NEs database. If the connection is
not valid, then a defect is indicated.
The fiber detection circuits include a set of optical filters to drop and insert the fiber
detection pilot. The C-band signal passes through these optical add/drop filters on its way
to and from the U connection. Note that the addition of the fiber detection circuits creates
additional loss in the optical path.
1197
AMP-S20H-C15
BWD Raman Start-Up

For the BWD Raman pumps to start, a valid ASE table must exist and the pilot must be
present and within limits. If the pilot is too low the amplifier will not start. If the pilot is too
high, the pumps will not start.
If a valid ASE table exists and the OSC is present, the pumps will attempt to turn on.
During the turn on process the pump power is ramped up while checking for possible
defects. The pumps are fully up when the pump power has reached the correct power to
provide the provisioned gain (gain is user-adjustable). The conditions are continually
checked during the gradual increase of the pump power from off to the requested pump
power. The pumps stay active unless a defect occurs that results in a pump shut down.
Signal Path
The figure below shows a simplified signal path of the AMP-S20H-C15.
Figure 716: Operation Scheme of the AMP-S20H-C15 (Simplified)
Signal Path
The AMP-S20H-C15 has three different signal paths, EDFA, BWD Raman, and OSC
path. The following subsections explain these signal paths.
EDFA Path
EDFA amplifiers provide gain by their pumps providing excitation to special doped fiber
that is internal to the amplifier. Since the pumps and doped fiber are internal to the
amplifier, the gain of the EDFA can be set and controlled in the EDFA itself.
1198
AMP-S20H-C15
The composite C-band data signal is input to the EDFA through the U-R interface and
passes through the fiber detect circuit to the EDFA amplifier. The EDFA amplifies the
incoming C-band signals. The OSC signal is optically combined with the amplified Cband signals after the EDFA amplifier and VOA.
If the EDFA is enabled and pumps are on, then the pump levels are set based on the
amplifier settings for gain. Once the incoming C-band signals are amplified, the amplified
C-band signal is passed through an output power VOA allowing control of the output
power. The amplified C-band signal and OSC signal are launched into the network fiber.
If the EDFA is enabled but its pumps are shut down or if the EDFA is disabled, the Cband signal is considered shut off from the network fiber at the N-T port. However, the
OSC signal that was optically combined after the VOA, is still output to the network fiber
at the N-T port.
Setting of the VOA is based on a balance between achieving the best noise margin and
the desired optical launch power into the network fiber. In general the EDFA is optimized
for minimum noise at high gain.
The output VOA can be set to attenuate the amplifier power, at minimum noise, to the
desired launch power. In some cases, the incoming C-band signal may include 96
channels at a level which would saturate the amplifier at maximum gain, so the VOA is
adjusted to decrease the EDFA gain and prevent the amplifier from saturating. Refer to
the setup procedure in the Provisioning and Operations (POM) manual.
The total optical power is within safe limits since the signal levels are well below the eye
safety limit.
BWD RAMAN Path

excitation of the plant fiber with the Raman pump lasers. The BWD Raman amplifier is
principally composed of four pump lasers, a pump PD and the control mechanism. The
Raman pump lasers generate the pumping light beams. The polarization beam combiner
(PBC) orthogonally combines the pump beams into a single fiber. Using the pump
wavelength/WDM optical multiplexer, the pump light beam is launched into the network
transmission fiber through the network port connector.
The BWD Raman pump power wavelength is propagated counter to the data signal
wavelengths at a distance of tens of kilometers from the N-R port (contra-directional
pumping). Signal amplification arises along the span's transmission fiber as a result of
the Raman Effect. A PD at the pump LASER output provides measurement points to
control the operation of the pumps. The pump power travels out the amplifier stage
through the Network N-R port into the network fiber.
The amplified C-band data and OSC signals travel through the WDM where the Raman
pumps are inserted and into the OSC filter. Here the OSC is split off, detected by the
OSC PD and routed to the Client C-T port. The C band data signals continue through the
OSC filter to a monitor tap coupler where a small portion of the signal is split off to the
front panel Tap Mon-R port. The remainder of the C-band signal is routed to the Upgrade
U-T port.
Flatness will be achieved by adjusting the power levels of the various Raman pump
wavelengths.
Note
1199
AMP-S20H-C15
OSC Path
The OSC signals are terminated on the OSCM (OSC module). The BWD Raman
amplifier contains the OSC filters and an OSC level set. The level set allows the user to
provision the OSC launch power while the filters perform the optical add/drop process
with the other network side signals.
In the add direction, the OSCM routes the OSC signal into the C-R port. From the C-R
port the OSC signal passes through a VOA. The VOA is set by the user to provision the
desired OSC launch power out of the N-T port. From the VOA, the adjusted OSC signal is
routed to the OSC filter where it is combined with the EDFA amplified C-band signals.
The combined C-band and OSC signals are routed to the N-T port and launched onto the
network fiber.
In the drop direction, the OSC and C-band data signals enter at the N-R port and pass
through the Raman pump coupler to the OSC filter. At the OSC filter, the OSC signal is
separated from the C-band channels. From the OSC filter, the OSC signal is routed to the
Client C-T port and ultimately to the OSCM module for processing.
ASE Table
The BWD Raman amplifier will not be operational without a valid ASE table. The table
must be built over dark transmission fiber. This means that there are no data signals. The
ASE table must be built on commissioning or after some fiber maintenance activities. To
Raman. If the user changes the network fiber type selection and/or the BWD tilt, then any
existing ASE table is deleted and a new table must be built. If the user spares an existing
EDFA/Raman amplifier (i.e. replaces with another exact amplifier) the ASE table will no
the user moves the EDFA/Raman card to slot 4, the ASE table is permanently
invalidated. If the user moves the EDFA/Raman card back to slot 2, the ASE table will
remain invalid.
For the user to initiate the build operation, the amplifier ADMIN state must be in
Maintenance. To perform a successful build, the fiber must be dark, the pilot (OSC) must
be present and not too high. When the table build is complete, the BWD pumps will start.
Application
The primary benefit of the AMP-S20H-C15 with its integrated EDFA and Raman
amplifiers is simplicity in network engineering due to the limited number of required
amplifier types. These amplifiers are designed for use in longer spans in linear and mesh
network configurations.The module also operates with single or multiple-span fiber types
for regional and extended-regional networks with reconfigurable add/drop capability. The
Raman enables increased reach and increased amplifier spacing and allows for lower
signal launch power. A lower launch power allows the optical signal to traverse the span
above the noise floor while still increasing the signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR).
Note
1200

p.1235.
AMP-S20H-C15
Compatible Modules
The AMP-S20H-C15 module can be used in conjunction with all FSP 3000R7 native and
legacy channel modules. The EDFA/Raman is compatible with all optical filter modules.
The Raman is compatible with the following EDFA amplifier types used as a pre-amp:
EDFA-C-D20-VGC-DM
EDFA-C-D20-VLGC-DM
EDFA-C-S20-GCB
EDFA-C-S20-GCB-DM
The EDFA/Raman is not allowed to interoperate with EDFA-C-D27-GCB-DM, EDFA-CS26-GCB-DM or EDFA-C-S26-VGC-DM.
Slot Positions
The AMP-S20H-C15 is 8 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and slots:
SH9HU: slots 3 through 17
SH7HU/SH7HU-R: slots 1 through 17
SH1HU-HP/2DC, SH1HU-HP/E-TEMP/2DC, SH1HU-F/2DC, SH1HU-R, SH1HUR/PF: slot 1
LED Indicators
Different LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating status of the AMPS20H-C15 module and its ports. For details, refer to Chapter 3 of the Maintenance and
Labeling
Printed labels that are affixed on the front plate and board cover of the AMP-S20H-C15
Specifications
1201
AMP-S20L-C15
AMP-S20L-C15
Figure 717: AMP-S20L-C15 Front View
1202
AMP-S20L-C15
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the AMP-S20L-C15 faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 243: AMP-S20L-C15 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Mon
monitoring port
Mod
network port
upgrade port
client port
receive
transmit
Description
The AMP-S20L-C15 module is an integrated low gain EDFA and BWD Raman amplifier
pair designed to operate over spans supporting 96 C band channels. It offers minimum
ASE noise and maximum flatness for moderate links. If the span is relatively short or a
pre-amp/post amp is needed, the Raman amplifier is not needed. The EDFA may be used
independently.
Integration of two amplifiers on the same module reduces the number of individual
amplifier types needed. Usage of the EDFA or Raman amplifiers is dependent on the
application. The module allows usage of the EDFA amplifier alone, or both the EDFA and
BWD Raman. If the BWD Raman is used, the EDFA must also be used because when
the EDFA pumps are turned off the signal path is severely attenuated. If the EDFA is
used alone, there is a 2 dB loss through the BWD Raman without the pumps on.
The AMP-S20L-C15 does not provide mid-stage access since the 100G network
interfaces include integrated electronic dispersion compensation.
The AMP-S20L-C15 contains a backward acting Raman. The backward acting Raman
provides variable gain and variable tilt.
To comply with class 1M LASER eye safety, the BWD Raman output provides an APS
mechanism to shut off the BWD Raman pumps when the network fiber is open. The
EDFA maximum output power is below the class 1M limit so there is no direct eye safety
issue.
Since the pilot (OSC) is used for confirmation of fiber continuity and for estimation of
gain, the amplifier module also includes a bi-directional OSC filter1. The module allows
for setting and detection of the OSC level present on the network fiber. The OSC
frequency for the BWD Raman is 1528.77 nm which is added to the built-in OSC filter.
1To use the OSCfunctions, the AMP-S20L-C15 must be part of a bidirectional
configuration. When deploying the AMP-S20L-C15 in a unidirectional setup, the

OSCfilter is not included in the path and hence the OSC cannot be utilized. This results
in OSC alarms and PMs which may be suppressed by provisioning the AMP-S20L-C15 in
"passive mode" (OSCOperation = Passive).
1203
AMP-S20L-C15
The AMP-S20L-C15 module is supported by the network control unit

Note
Features
The AMP-S20L-C15 module has the following common features:
1204
Amplifier may be used as an EDFA only or EDFA/BWD Raman
VOA at output of EDFA allowing best fit for Noise and launch power
OSC filter is included on the module (OSC signal must be present to start the BWD
Raman)
Fiber detection circuitry for network element facing interface U port
Span Equalization
OSC as an essential element of APSfor the EDFA and Laser Safety Class 1M for
the BWDRaman
Automatic restart of BWD pump lasers
Hot swappable
Field replaceable
AMP-S20L-C15
Components
The AMP-S20L-C15 module principally consists of the motherboard, a EDFA-Raman
sub-assembly board, micro-controller module (CM) and power supply. The essential
elements of the EDFA-Raman sub-assembly board are the high-power Raman pump
lasers, polarization beam combiner (PBC), pump wavelength/WDM wavelengths
multiplexer, taps, photodetectors (PD) as well as the integrated OSC add and drop filters.
1205
AMP-S20L-C15

The AMP-S20L-C15 BWD Raman uses four pump lasers. The polarization beam
combiner is used to combine the pump beams orthogonally. The BWD Raman has a
AMP-S20L-C15 supports two operation modes:
user can set Gain only on EDFA amp


or OPM.
attached to an OPM or OSA, the input signal power at the U-R interface will be monitored
and dropped by 1% of the signal power by the tap. The taps used to monitor the ports are
the AMP-S20H-C15 module.
Laser Safety
CAUTION

Pump power launched from the BWD amplifier network ports, into the transmission fiber,
is higher than the class 1M hazard level specified in the IEC 60825-2. Such a high pump
power can be potentially harmful to the human eye and skin. Another risk is that a loss of
input signal will not be detected even if a fiber break occurs. This is due to large ASE
generated along the transmission line within the operating band.
1206
AMP-S20L-C15
Presence and detection of OSC
Shut Down Behavior

Amplifiers pumps may be shut down due to some command or defect. Shut down
behavior for the EDFA and Raman amplifier is detailed below.
EDFA Shut Down

Shut Down for the EDFA consists of shutting down the pumps due to various defects to
prevent propagation of ASE noise. Possible causes of pump shut down are:
EDFA ADMIN state is UAS or DSBLD
LASER temperature reaches a threshold where the pumps may be damaged
output power attempts to exceed eye safety limit and cannot be regulated
loss of input signal (prevents propagation of noise)
When the pumps are shut down, due to a defect or ADMIN state, the LASERs are shut
off within microseconds. On an input loss of signal condition, the input loss is soaked for
200 ms before the shut down sequence is initiated. After the 200 ms soak time, the shut
down is activated and completes within the microseconds time to shut off the pump
LASERs.
service.
Raman Shut Down

The Raman amplifiers will shut down the pumps under the following conditions:
Raman ADMIN state is UAS or DSBLD
pump temperature exceeds a threshold that will damage the pumps
no valid ASE table
if there is both a loss of pilot and a loss of the data channel
When a shut down is activated, the pump lasers shut down within microseconds to
prevent the amplified signal or Raman pump output from being transmitted into the fiber.
service.
1207
AMP-S20L-C15
Fiber Detection
BWD Raman Start-Up

For the BWD Raman pumps to start, a valid ASE table must exist and the pilot must be
present and within limits. If the pilot is too low the amplifier will not start. If the pilot is too
high, the pumps will not start.
If a valid ASE table exists and the OSC is present, the pumps will attempt to turn on.
During the turn on process the pump power is ramped up while checking for possible
defects. The pumps are fully up when the pump power has reached the correct power to
provide the provisioned gain (gain is user-adjustable). The conditions are continually
checked during the gradual increase of the pump power from off to the requested pump
power. The pumps stay active unless a defect occurs that results in a pump shut down.
Signal Path
Figure 718 below shows a simplified signal path of the AMP-S20L-C15.
1208
AMP-S20L-C15
Figure 718: Operation Scheme of the AMP-S20L-C15(Simplified)
Signal Path
The AMP-S20L-C15 has three different signal paths, EDFA, BWD Raman, and OSC
path. The following subsections explain these signal paths.
EDFA Path
EDFA amplifiers provide gain by their pumps providing excitation to special doped fiber
that is internal to the amplifier. Since the pumps and doped fiber are internal to the
amplifier, the gain of the EDFA can be set and controlled in the EDFA itself.
The composite C-band data signal is input to the EDFA through the U-R interface and
passes through the fiber detect circuit to the EDFA amplifier. The EDFA amplifies the
incoming C-band signals. The OSC signal is optically combined with the amplified Cband signals after the EDFA amplifier and VOA.
If the EDFA is enabled and pumps are on, then the pump levels are set based on the
amplifier settings for gain. Once the incoming C-band signals are amplified, the amplified
C-band signal is passed through an output power VOA allowing control of the output
power. The amplified C-band signal and OSC signal are launched into the network fiber.
If the EDFA is enabled but its pumps are shut down or if the EDFA is disabled, the Cband signal is considered shut off from the network fiber at the N-T port. However, the
OSC signal that was optically combined after the VOA, is still output to the network fiber
at the N-T port.
Setting of the VOA is based on a balance between achieving the best noise margin and
the desired optical launch power into the network fiber. In general the EDFA is optimized
for minimum noise at high gain.
1209
AMP-S20L-C15
The output VOA can be set to attenuate the amplifier power, at minimum noise, to the
desired launch power. In some cases, the incoming C-band signal may include 96
channels at a level which would saturate the amplifier at maximum gain, so the VOA is
adjusted to decrease the EDFA gain and prevent the amplifier from saturating. Refer to
the setup procedure in the Provisioning and Operations (POM) manual.
The total optical power is within safe limits since the signal levels are well below the eye
safety limit.
BWD RAMAN Path

excitation of the plant fiber with the Raman pump lasers. The BWD Raman amplifier is
principally composed of four pump lasers, a pump PD and the control mechanism. The
Raman pump lasers generate the pumping light beams. The polarization beam combiner
(PBC) orthogonally combines the pump beams into a single fiber. Using the pump
wavelength/WDM optical multiplexer, the pump light beam is launched into the network
transmission fiber through the network port connector.
The BWD Raman pump power wavelength is propagated counter to the data signal
wavelengths at a distance of tens of kilometers from the N-R port (contra-directional
pumping). Signal amplification arises along the span's transmission fiber as a result of
the Raman Effect. A PD at the pump LASER output provides measurement points to
control the operation of the pumps. The pump power travels out the amplifier stage
through the Network N-R port into the network fiber.
The amplified C-band data and OSC signals travel through the WDM where the Raman
pumps are inserted and into the OSC filter. Here the OSC is split off, detected by the
OSC PD and routed to the Client C-T port. The C band data signals continue through the
OSC filter to a monitor tap coupler where a small portion of the signal is split off to the
front panel Tap Mon-R port. The remainder of the C-band signal is routed to the Upgrade
U-T port.
Flatness will be achieved by adjusting the power levels of the various Raman pump
wavelengths.
Note
OSC Path
The OSC signals are terminated on the OSCM (OSC module). The BWD Raman
amplifier contains the OSC filters and an OSC level set. The level set allows the user to
provision the OSC launch power while the filters perform the optical add/drop process
with the other network side signals.
In the add direction, the OSCM routes the OSC signal into the C-R port. From the C-R
port the OSC signal passes through a VOA. The VOA is set by the user to provision the
desired OSC launch power out of the N-T port. From the VOA, the adjusted OSC signal is
routed to the OSC filter where it is combined with the EDFA amplified C-band signals.
The combined C-band and OSC signals are routed to the N-T port and launched onto the
network fiber.
1210
AMP-S20L-C15
In the drop direction, the OSC and C-band data signals enter at the N-R port and pass
through the Raman pump coupler to the OSC filter. At the OSC filter, the OSC signal is
separated from the C-band channels. From the OSC filter, the OSC signal is routed to the
Client C-T port and ultimately to the OSCM module for processing.
ASE Table
The BWD Raman amplifier will not be operational without a valid ASE table. The table
must be built over dark transmission fiber. This means that there are no data signals. The
ASE table must be built on commissioning or after some fiber maintenance activities. To
Raman. If the user changes the network fiber type selection and/or the BWD tilt, then any
existing ASE table is deleted and a new table must be built. If the user spares an existing
EDFA/Raman amplifier (i.e. replaces with another exact amplifier) the ASE table will no
the user moves the EDFA/Raman card to slot 4, the ASE table is permanently
invalidated. If the user moves the EDFA/Raman card back to slot 2, the ASE table will
remain invalid.
For the user to initiate the build operation, the amplifier ADMIN state must be in
Maintenance. To perform a successful build, the fiber must be dark, the pilot (OSC) must
be present and not too high. When the table build is complete, the BWD pumps will start.
Application
The primary benefit of the AMP-S20L-C15 with its integrated EDFA and Raman
amplifiers is simplicity in network engineering due to the limited number of required
amplifier types. These amplifiers are designed for use in longer spans in linear and mesh
network configurations.The module also operates with single or multiple-span fiber types
for regional and extended-regional networks with reconfigurable add/drop capability. The
Raman enables increased reach and increased amplifier spacing and allows for lower
signal launch power. A lower launch power allows the optical signal to traverse the span
above the noise floor while still increasing the signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR).
Note

p.1235.
Compatible Modules
The AMP-S20L-C15 module can be used in conjunction with all FSP 3000R7 native and
legacy channel modules. The EDFA/Raman is compatible with all optical filter modules.
The Raman is compatible with the following EDFA amplifier types used as a pre-amp:
EDFA-C-D20-VGC-DM
EDFA-C-D20-VLGC-DM
EDFA-C-S20-GCB
EDFA-C-S20-GCB-DM
1211
AMP-S20L-C15
The EDFA/Raman is not allowed to interoperate with EDFA-C-D27-GCB-DM, EDFA-CS26-GCB-DM or EDFA-C-S26-VGC-DM.
ADVA Optical Networking does not support using the AMP-S20L-C15 in a 9ROADMC96/0/OPM node as a booster/pre-amp. The AMP-S20H-C15 is recommended for this
type of application.
Slot Positions
The AMP-S20L-C15 is 8 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and slots:
SH1HU-HP/2DC, SH1HU-HP/E-TEMP/2DC, SH1HU-F/2DC, SH1HU-R, SH1HUR/PF: slot 1
LED Indicators
Different LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating status of the AMPS20L-C15 module and its ports. For details, refer to Chapter 3 of the Maintenance and
Labeling
Printed labels that are affixed on the front plate and board cover of the AMP-S20L-C15
Specifications
1212
EDFA-S20H
EDFA-S20H
Figure 719: EDFA-S20H Front View
1213
EDFA-S20H
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the EDFA-S20H faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 244: EDFA-S20H Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Mon
monitoring port
Mod
network port
upgrade port
client port
receive
transmit
Description
The EDFA-S20H module is an integrated high gain EDFA designed to operate over spans
supporting 96 C band channels. It is primarily used with the 100G channel cards that
apply electronic dispersion compensation. The amplifier has an output VOA that allows
optimization of the amplifier gain setting and launch power. The amplifier gain setting is
selected to minimize noise while the launch power is selected to minimize distortions in
the fiber. The module contains OSC filters1 that remove the need for an additional
external OSC filter module therefore reducing equipment requirements. The amplifier also
has improved gain and transient control, allowing for better regulation of variations in
channel amplitudes. An optional OSC VOA is available and is used to set the optimal
OSC launch power based on the span loss.
The EDFA-S20H can be used as a booster amplifier, pre-amplifier or in-line amplifier.
Fiber Detection is available on the amplifier U ports. The amplifier can be used with
multiple fiber types.
The module occupies one slot in the FSP 3000R7 1HU, 7HU and 9HU shelves. It can be
placed in slots 1 and 2 in the 1HU shelf, 1 through 20 in the 7HU shelf and 3 through 18 in
the 9HU shelf.
The EDFA-S20H module is supported by the network control unit NCUII and NCU-II-P only.
Note
1To use the OSCfunctions, the EDFA-S20H must be part of a bidirectional configuration.
When deploying the EDFA-S20H in a unidirectional setup, the OSCfilter is not included
in the path and hence the OSC cannot be utilized. This results in OSC alarms and PMs
which may be suppressed by provisioning the EDFA-S20H in "passive mode"
(OSCOperation = Passive).
1214
EDFA-S20H
Features
OSC filters are included on the module
Fiber detection for the Upgrade interface
Span Equalization
OSC as an essential element of APS
Versatile switched protection (in conjunction with the VSM, RSM-OLM and RSM-SF)
Full management support (Web and Craft Console, SNMP, TL1, NED, NM, NP)
Hot swappable
Field replaceable
Designed as 4HP/ 5 HU plug-in module which occupies 1 slot
Components
The EDFA-S20H module principally consists of the motherboard, a EDFA sub-assembly
board, micro-controller module (CM) and power supply. The essential elements of the
EDFA sub-assembly board are the EDFA pump lasers, polarization beam combiner
(PBC), pump wavelength/WDM wavelengths multiplexer, taps, photodetectors (PD),
fiber detection circuit and integrated OSC add and drop filters.
1215
EDFA-S20H
Support of single OSC at a DWDM wavelength of 1528.77nm)

or OPM.
If the connector Mon-R is attached to an OPM or OSA, the output signal power at the UT interface will be monitored and dropped by 1% of the signal power by the tap as the
signal leaves the module. If the connector Mon-T is attached to an OPM or OSA, the
output signal power at the N-T interface will be monitored and dropped by 1% of the
signal power by the tap. The signal power at the N-T interface should only be measured
when the laser pump is on. The taps used to monitor the ports are passive, so their use
(or lack thereof) will not affect the quality of the signals traversing the EDFA-S20H
module.
Laser Safety
The EDFA-S20H complies with laser safety class 1M hazard level specified in the IEC
60825-2. Since the amplifier maximum output power is below the eye safety limit, there is
no direct threat for eye safety during normal operation.
To prevent hazardous conditions due to other defects, including hardware defects, the
amplifier provides optical output power limiting. The optical output power limiting is
applied if the optical output power attempts to exceed the eye safety limit. When the
optical output power limiting is applied, the circuits attempt to maintain the output power
at the safe limit. If the actions of the regulation cannot maintain the output power at a safe
limit and the limiting continues for more than 800ms, the amplifier pumps will be shut
down and notification is given indicating the shutdown.
1216
EDFA-S20H
Fiber Detection
Signal Path
This figure shows a simplified signal path of the EDFA-S20H.
Figure 720: Operation Scheme of the EDFA-S20H (Simplified)
Application
The EDFA-S20H is used for 100G services. The amplifier is used as a pre-amplifier,
booster amplifier, or Inline amplifier in either bi-directional or uni-directional applications.
The amplifiers are used in linear, ring, and mesh network configurations that may support
FOADM and ROADM applications.
A pre-amplifier is generally at the end of the fiber span. The pre-amplifier increases the
fiber span signals to levels sufficient to operate the optical receivers on the local channel
cards or pass signals through the element.
1217
EDFA-S20H
The booster amplifier is generally at the launch end of the fiber span and provides
sufficient optical power to launch the optical channels into the fiber span. In ROADM
applications, the booster amplifier may be required to provide gain to overcome
attenuation applied by the ROADM equalization process.
The OSC filter is included in the amplifier so the OSC is inserted and removed at the
node. The OSC connections are point to point between the two neighboring nodes. If the
optional OSC VOA is included, then the VOA launch power is settable. If the OSC VOA
is not included, then the OSC launch power is based on the OSCM optics and the OSC
filter insertion loss.
Note

p.1235.
Compatible Modules
The EDFA-S20H module is intended to be used for 100G services. The amplifier can be
used with these modules:
WCC-PCTN-100GB
WCE-PCN-100G
10TCE-PCN-10G+100G
AMP-S20L-C15
AMP-S20H-C15
50GHz fixed wavelength 11G and 16G XFPs that are used on 4WCE, 2WCA,
2WCC, and 10TCCADM channel modules.
all 96 channel ROADMs
The EDFA-S20H is not allowed to interoperate with EDFA-C-D27-GCB-DM, EDFA-CS26-GCB-DM or EDFA-C-S26-VGC-DM.
Slot Positions
The EDFA-S20H is 4 HP (1 slot) wide. It can be placed into these shelves and slots:
LED Indicators
EDFA-S20H module and its ports. For details, refer to Chapter 3 of the Maintenance and
1218
EDFA-S20H
Labeling
Printed labels that are affixed on the front plate and board cover of the EDFA-S20H
Specifications
1219
EDFA-S20L
EDFA-S20L
Figure 721: EDFA-S20L Front View
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the EDFA-S20L faceplate and their
meanings.
1220
EDFA-S20L
Table 245: EDFA-S20L Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Mon
monitoring port
Mod
network port
upgrade port
client port
receive
transmit
Description
The EDFA-S20L module is an integrated low gain EDFA designed to operate over spans
supporting 96 C band channels. It is primarily used with the 100G channel cards that
apply electronic dispersion compensation. The amplifier has an output VOA that allows
the fiber. The module contains OSC filters1 that remove the need for an additional
external OSC filter module therefore reducing equipment requirements. The amplifier also
has improved gain and transient control, allowing for better regulation of variations in
channel amplitudes. An optional OSC VOA is available and is used to set the optimal
OSC launch power based on the span loss.
The EDFA-S20L can be used as a booster amplifier, pre-amplifier or in-line amplifier.
Fiber Detection is available on the amplifier U ports. The amplifier can be used with
multiple fiber types.
The module occupies one slot in the FSP 3000R7 1HU, 7HU and 9HU shelves. It can be
placed in slots 1 and 2 in the 1HU shelf, 1 through 20 in the 7HU shelf and 3 through 18 in
the 9HU shelf.
The EDFA-S20L module is supported by the network control unit NCU-II

and NCU-II-P only.
Note
Features
OSC filters are included on the module
1To use the OSCfunctions, the EDFA-S20L must be part of a bidirectional configuration.
When deploying the EDFA-S20L in a unidirectional setup, the OSCfilter is not included in
the path and hence the OSC cannot be utilized. This results in OSC alarms and PMs
which may be suppressed by provisioning the EDFA-S20L in "passive mode"
(OSCOperation = Passive).
1221
EDFA-S20L
Span Equalization
Hot swappable
Field replaceable
Designed as 4HP/ 5 HU plug-in module which occupies 1 slot
Components
The EDFA-S20L module principally consists of the motherboard, a EDFA sub-assembly
board, micro-controller module (CM) and power supply. The essential elements of the
EDFA sub-assembly board are the EDFA pump lasers, polarization beam combiner
(PBC), pump wavelength/WDM wavelengths multiplexer, taps, photodetectors (PD),
fiber detection circuit and integrated OSC add and drop filters.
1222
EDFA-S20L

or OPM.
If the connector Mon-R is attached to an OPM or OSA, the output signal power at the UT interface will be monitored and dropped by 1% of the signal power by the tap as the
signal leaves the module. If the connector Mon-T is attached to an OPM or OSA, the
output signal power at the N-T interface will be monitored and dropped by 1% of the
signal power by the tap. The signal power at the N-T interface should only be measured
when the laser pump is on. The taps used to monitor the ports are passive, so their use
(or lack thereof) will not affect the quality of the signals traversing the EDFA-S20L
module.
Laser Safety
The EDFA-S20L complies with laser safety class 1M hazard level specified in the IEC
60825-2. Since the amplifier maximum output power is below the eye safety limit, there is
no direct threat for eye safety during normal operation.
1223
EDFA-S20L
Fiber Detection
Signal Path
This figure shows a simplified signal path of the EDFA-S20L.
Figure 722: Operation Scheme of the EDFA-S20L (Simplified)
Application
The EDFA-S20L is used for 100G services. The amplifier is used as a pre-amplifier,
booster amplifier, or Inline amplifier in either bi-directional or uni-directional applications.
The amplifiers are used in linear, ring, and mesh network configurations that may support
FOADM and ROADM applications.
1224
EDFA-S20L
Note

p.1235.
Compatible Modules
The EDFA-S20L module is intended to be used for 100G services. The amplifier can be
used with these modules:
WCC-PCTN-100GB
WCE-PCN-100G
10TCE-PCN-10G+100G
AMP-S20L-C15
AMP-S20H-C15
The EDFA-S20H is not allowed to interoperate with EDFA-C-D27-GCB-DM, EDFA-CS26-GCB-DM or EDFA-C-S26-VGC-DM.
Slot Positions
The EDFA-S20L is 4 HP (1 slot) wide. It can be placed into these shelves and slots:
LED Indicators
EDFA-S20L module and its ports. For details, refer to Chapter 3 of the Maintenance and
1225
EDFA-S20L
Labeling
Printed labels that are affixed on the front plate and board cover of the EDFA-S20L
Specifications
1226
2EDFA-S20L-S10L
2EDFA-S20L-S10L
Figure 723: 2EDFA-S20L-S10L Front View
1227
2EDFA-S20L-S10L
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the10TCE-PCN-16GU+100G 2EDFA-S20LS10L faceplate and their meanings.
Table 246: 2EDFA-S20L-S10L Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
Mon
monitoring port
Mod
network port
upgrade port
client port
receive
transmit
Description
The 2EDFA-S20L-S10L module is a dual EDFA designed to be an EDFA only alternative
to the EDFA/RAMAN amplifier AMP-S20H in 9ROADM applications where use of a
Raman amplifier is not desired. The amplifier gain and output power are similar to the
AMP-S20H. The 2EDFA-S20L-S10L is primarily used with the 100G channel cards that
apply electronic dispersion compensation.The amplifier is designed to operate over
spans supporting 96 C band channels. The amplifier has an output VOA that allows
the fiber. The amplifier contains OSC filters1 that remove the need for an additional
external OSC filter module therefore reducing equipment requirements. The amplifier has
improved gain and transient control, allowing for better regulation of variations in channel
amplitudes. An OSC VOA is available and is used to set the optimal OSC launch power
based on the span loss.
The 2EDFA-S20L-S10L can be used as a booster amplifier, pre-amplifier or in-line
amplifier. Fiber Detection is available on the amplifier U ports. The amplifier can be used
with multiple fiber types.
The 2EDFA-S20L-S10L module is supported by the network control unit

Note
Features
1Provisioning the 2EDFA-S20L-S10L in "passive"mode (OSC Operation = Passive)
suppresses OSC alarms and PMs at this module.
1228
2EDFA-S20L-S10L
Dual EDFAs (booster and pre-amp)
VOA at output of booster EDFA allowing best fit for noise and launch power
OSC filters are included on the module plus settable OSC Tx launch power
Span Equalization
Hot swappable
Field replaceable
Components
The 2EDFA-S20L-S10L module principally consists of the motherboard, a 2 EDFA subassembly boards, micro-controller module (CM) and power supply. The essential
elements of the EDFA sub-assembly boards are the EDFA pump lasers, polarization
beam combiner (PBC), pump wavelength/WDM wavelengths multiplexer, taps,
photodetectors (PD), fiber detection circuit and integrated OSC add and drop filters.
1229
2EDFA-S20L-S10L

or OPM.
If the connector Mon-R is attached to an OPM or OSA, the output signal power at the U-T
interface will be monitored and dropped by 1% of the signal power by the tap as the signal
leaves the module. If the connector Mon-T is attached to an OPM or OSA, the output
signal power at the N-T interface will be monitored and dropped by 1% of the signal power
by the tap. The signal power at the N-T interface should only be measured when the laser
pump is on. The taps used to monitor the ports are passive, so their use (or lack thereof)
will not affect the quality of the signals traversing the EDFA module.
Laser Safety
The 2EDFA-S20L-S10L complies with laser safety class 1M hazard level specified in the
IEC 60825-2. Since the amplifier maximum output power is below the eye safety limit,
there is no direct threat for eye safety during normal operation.
1230
2EDFA-S20L-S10L
Fiber Detection
Signal Path
This figure shows a simplified signal path of the 2EDFA-S20L-S10L.
Figure 724: Operation Scheme of the 2EDFA-S20L-S10L (Simplified)
1231
2EDFA-S20L-S10L
Application
The 2EDFA-S20L-S10L is used for 100G services with 9ROADM applications and is
primarily used in place of the AMP-S20x type EDFA/RAMAN amplifier as a Raman
alternative . The amplifier is used as a pre-amplifier, booster amplifier, or Inline amplifier
in either bi-directional or uni-directional applications. The amplifiers are used in linear,
ring, and mesh network configurations that may support FOADM and ROADM
applications.
Note

p.1235.
Compatible Modules
The 2EDFA-S20L-S10L module is intended to be used for 100G services. The amplifier
can be used with these modules:
WCC-PCTN-100GB
WCE-PCN-100G
10TCE-PCN-10G+100G
AMP-S20L-C15
AMP-S20H-C15
The 2EDFA-S20L-S10L is not allowed to interoperate with EDFA-C-D27-GCB-DM,

EDFA-C-S26-GCB-DM or EDFA-C-S26-VGC-DM.
Slot Positions
The 2EDFA-S20L-S10L is 8 HP (2 slot) wide. It can be placed into these shelves and
slots:
1232
SH1HU, slot 1
2EDFA-S20L-S10L
LED Indicators
2EDFA-S20L-S10L module and its ports. For details, refer to Chapter 3 of the
Labeling
Printed labels that are affixed on the front plate and board cover of the 2EDFA-S20L-S10L
provide module specific information. For examples of these labels, see Labeling on
p.1114.
Specifications
1233
2EDFA-S20L-S10L
1234
Chapter 17
Laser Safety Compliant Amplifier
Configurations
Optical amplifiers can be configured to operate in series, in parallel, or a combination of
both. Because not every possible combination meets Laser Safety requirements, it is
important only to deploy those configurations that do.
The following sections describe the only possible configurations that meet Laser Safety
requirements. They are grouped according to their function in the node.
This chapter contains the following sections:
Important Safety Information on p.1236
Series Optical Amplifier Configurations on p.1237
Parallel Optical Amplifier Configurations on p.1240
RAMAN-C10 on p.1245
2RAMAN-C15-LL on p.1246
Amp-S20H-C15 and Amp-S20L-C15 on p.1247
1235

The FSP 3000R7 system is a Class 1M Laser Product with Hazard Level 1M. Strict
attention to the following precautions is important for your protection when working with
optical amplifiers and optical equipment.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Configurations not in accordance with this document are not covered by

the classification for laser product safety standards issued by ADVA
Optical Networking. In that case, they must not be deployed without
written consent by ADVA Optical Networking.
If a configuration not in accordance with these deployment rules is
installed without prior written consent by ADVA Optical Networking, the
classification for laser product safety standard (laser safety class 1M/
hazard level class 1M) is invalid. In that case, it is the customer's
responsibility to reclassify the product and take appropriate actions.
In accordance with the Code of Federal Regulations, Sec. 1040.10, the
following is applicable for laser products:
CAUTION
The modification of a laser product, previously certified under 1010.2, by

any person engaged in the business of manufacturing, assembling, or
modifying laser products shall be construed as manufacturing under the
act if the modification affects any aspect of the product's performance or
intended function(s) for which this section and 1040.11 have an
applicable requirement.
The manufacturer who performs such modification shall recertify and
reidentify the product in accordance with the provisions of 1010.2. and
1010.3.
Risk of damage to fiber-optic connectors.
Do not disconnect or re-connect optical cables in amplified network
configurations while the laser sources are on. If the optical output
power is greater than 13dBm, it is recommended to always disable
the laser source before you disconnect or re-connect the optical
cable. If you ignore this, the core of the fiber can be destroyed at
high optical power levels.
Clean and inspect the fiber-optic connectors carefully before you reconnect it to the optical ports.
1236

There are instances where series connections of optical amplifiers are required in field
deployments. The following sub-sections provide guidance on how to connect optical
amplifiers in series based on their function in the node, i.e. pre-amp, line-amp or booster
amp.
This section contains the following sub-sections:
Series Pre-amp Configurations on p.1237
Series Line-Amp Configurations on p.1238
Series Booster-Amp Configurations on p.1239
Series Pre-amp Configurations

Figure 725 provides series pre-amp configurations that meet Laser Safety requirements.
Figure 725: Series Pre-Amp Configurations
First Amp
Suggested Pairing
Raman
EDFA -C -D 20 -VGC -DM

EDFA -C -D 20 -VLGC -DM
Possible Pairing
EDFA -C -S 20 -GCB
EDFA -C -S 20 -GCB -DM
EDFA -C -D 20 -VGC
EDFA -C -S 18 -GC
EDFA -C -S 18 -GCB
First Amp
Suggested Pairing
EDFA -C -D 20 -VGC
EDFA -C -D 20 -VCG -DM

EDFA -C -D 20 VLGC -DM
Possible Pairing
EDFA -C -S 20 -GCB
EDFA -C -D 20 -VGC
EDFA -C -S 18 -GC
EDFA -C -S 18 -GCB
EDFA -C -S 10
First Amp
Suggested Pairing
EDFA -C -S 20 -GCB
EDFA -C -S 20 -GCB
Possible Pairing
EDFA -C -D 20 -VGC
EDFA -C -S 18 -GC
EDFA -C -S 18 -GCB
EDFA -C -S 10
Any of the EDFAs listed above can be configured as a stand-alone pre-amplifier.
1237
Series Line-Amp Configurations

Figure 726 provides series line-amp configurations that meet Laser Safety requirements.
Figure 726: Series Line-Amp Configurations
First Amp
Suggested Pairing
Raman

Possible Pairing
EDFA -C -S 20 -GCB
EDFA -C -D 20 -VGC
EDFA -C -S 18 -GC
EDFA -C -S 18 -GCB
First Amp
Suggested Pairing
EDFA -C -D 20 -VGC
EDFA -D 20 -VCG -DM

Possible Pairing
EDFA
EDFA
EDFA
EDFA
-C -S 20 -GCB
-C -D 20 -VGC
-C -S 18 -GC
-C -S 18 -GCB
First Amp
Suggested Pairing
EDFA -C -S 20 -GCB
EDFA -C -S 20 -GCB
Possible Pairing
EDFA
EDFA
EDFA
EDFA
-C -D 20 -VGC
-C -D 20 -VGC -DM
-C -D 20 -VLGC -DM
-C -S 18 -GC
EDFA -C -S 18 -GCB
Suggested Pairing
Second Amp
EDFA -C -D 20 -VGC
EDFA -C -D 27 -GCB -DM

EDFA -C -S 26 -VGC -DM
Possible Pairing
EDFA -C -S 20 -GC
EDFA -C -S 20 -GCB
EDFA -C -D 20 -GC
Any of the EDFAs listed above can be configured as a stand-alone line amp.
1238
Series Booster-Amp Configurations

Figure 727 provides series booster-amp configurations that meet Laser Safety
requirements.
Figure 727: Series Booster-Amp Configurations
First Amp
Second Amp
EDFA -C -S 10
EDFA -C -S 10
First Amp
Possible Pairing
EDFA -C -S 10
EDFA
EDFA
EDFA
EDFA
EDFA
EDFA
EDFA
-C -S 20 -GCB
-C -S 20 -GCB -DM
-C -D 20 -VGC
-C -S 18 -GC
-C -S 18 -GCB
-C -D 20 -VGC
-C -D 20 -VGC -DM
Suggested Pairing
EDFA -C -D 20 -VGC
Second Amp
Possible Pairing
EDFA -C -S 20 -GC
EDFA -C -S 20 -GCB
EDFA -C -D 20 -GC
Any of the EDFAs listed above can be configured as a stand-alone booster amp.
1239

Parallel configurations are possible with optical amplifiers, however there is a limited
number that meet Laser Safety requirements.
This section contains the following sub-sections:
S-Type EDFAs in Parallel Configurations on p.1240
Hybrid EDFA in Parallel Configurations on p.1242
S-Type EDFAs in Parallel Configurations

The S-type of optical amplifiers can be configured in parallel to provide amplification of
banded channels prior to being multiplexed together via a 4GSM module or an 8GSM
module. There is one C-band S-type optical amplifier. The possible configurations via a
4GSM module and an 8GSM module that meet Laser Safety requirements are shown in
Figure 728 and Figure 730
Figure 728: S-Type EDFA Parallel Configuration via a 4GSM,
Add Direction
EDFA -C -S 10
4GSM
EDFA -C -S 10
EDFA -C -S 10
EDFA -C -S 10
Figure 729 and Figure 731 show that in the drop direction of the 4GSM and 8GSM the
outputs of the EDFAs are not combined and thus essentially in series.
Figure 729: S-Type EDFA Parallel Configuration via a 4GSM,
Drop Direction
EDFA -C -S 10
4GSM
EDFA -C -S 10
EDFA -C -S 10
EDFA -C -S 10
1240

Figure 730: S-Type EDFA Parallel Configuration via an 8GSM,
Add Direction
EDFA -C -S 10
8GSM
EDFA -C -S 10
EDFA -C -S 10
EDFA -C -S 10
EDFA -C -S 10
EDFA -C -S 10
EDFA -C -S 10
EDFA -C -S 10
1241

Figure 731: S-Type EDFA Parallel Configuration via an 8GSM,
Drop Direction
EDFA -C -S 10
8 GSM
EDFA -C -S 10
EDFA -C -S 10
EDFA -C -S 10
EDFA -C -S 10
EDFA -C -S 10
EDFA -C -S 10
EDFA -C -S 10
EDFA -L-S 10
8 GSM
EDFA -L-S 10
EDFA -L-S 10
EDFA -L-S 10
EDFA -L-S 10
EDFA -L-S 10
EDFA -L-S 10
EDFA -L-S 10
Hybrid EDFA in Parallel Configurations

The following two configurations meet Laser Safety requirements for 80 channel (40 Cband + 40 L-band) configurations in the add direction.
When a single C-band and L-band EDFA are sufficient, the following configuration can be
used.
1242

Figure 732: Hybrid EDFA Parallel Configuration, Single C-Band and Single LBand Amplifiers
2CLSM
EDFA -C -D 17 -GC
EDFA -L -D 17 -GC
When additional optical amplification is required the following configuration can be used.
Figure 733: Hybrid EDFA Parallel Configuration, Dual C-Band and Dual L-Band
Amplifiers
EDFA -C -D 17 -GC
2CLSM
EDFA -L-D 17 -GC
The following two configurations meet Laser Safety requirements for 80 channel (40 C
band + 40 L band) and 120 channel (80 C band +40 L band) configurations in the add
direction.
When a single C-band and single L-band EDFA are sufficient, the following configuration
can be used.
Figure 734: Hybrid EDFA Parallel Configuration, Single C-Band and Single LBand Amplifiers
2 CLSM
EDFA -L-D 17 -GC
When additional optical amplification is required the configuration in Figure 735 can be
used.
1243

Figure 735: Hybrid EDFA Parallel Configuration, Dual C-Band and Dual L-Band
Amplifiers
Suggested Pairing

EDFA -C -D 20 -VGC
2CLSM
Possible Pairing
EDFA -C -S 20 -GC
EDFA -C -S 20 -GCB
EDFA -C -D 20 -GC
EDFA -L-D 17 -GC
For the drop direction the outputs of the EDFAs are not combined in parallel so the Serial
configurations described in the previous sections apply.
1244
RAMAN-C10
RAMAN-C10
The RAMAN-C10 amplifier is used as a pre-amp and achieves gain by
"pumping" a high power signal at 1450 nm into the fiber from the N-R port. Since the
power level of the pump signal can exceed Laser Safety limits, Raman amplifiers have
built-in safety mechanisms to insure that sufficient fiber is connected to the N-R port
before allowing the pump laser power level to exceed Laser Safety limits. One of these
mechanisms is detection of an OSC signal from the upstream node that must also
contain a RAMAN-C10 amplifier. The figure below illustrates a simple two node Raman
amplified network with OSC insertion and detection.
Figure 736: RAMAN-C10 Amplifier Example
Node A
Node B
R aman -C 10
Booster Amp
OSCF
U -R
OSCF
N -T
Pre -Amp
Pumps
N -R
U -T
OSC
C -T
C -R
OSCM
Raman -C 10
OSCM
C -T
C -R
OSC
Booster Amp
Pre -Amp
Pumps
U -T
N -R
N -T
OSCF
U -R
OSCF
Any of the C-band EDFAs listed in the pre-amp section can inter-operate with a RAMANC10 in the pre-amp position shown in the Figure 736.
Any of the C-band EDFAs listed in the booster-amp section can inter-operate with a
RAMAN-C10 in the booster-amp position shown in the Figure 736.
1245
2RAMAN-C15-LL
2RAMAN-C15-LL
The 2RAMAN-C15-LL is a dual Raman amplifier module containing a Backward and a
Forward Raman and optimized for low-latency applications. Both ends of network fiber
connection must be terminated in a 2RAMAN-C15-LL for these modules to work.
The Backward Raman operates by pumping optical power into the fiber from the N-R port
in the opposite direction to the Data Channels being amplified, like the RAMAN-C10, with
higher total pump power capability. Since the power level of the pump signals can exceed
Laser Safety limits, the Backward Raman has built-in safety mechanisms to insure that
sufficient fiber is connected to the N-R port before allowing pump laser power levels to
exceed Laser Safety limits. One of these mechanisms is detection of the 1528.77nm
OSC signal from the upstream Forward Raman.
The Forward Raman operates by pumping optical power into the fiber from the N-T port in
the same direction as the Data Channels being amplified. Since the power level of the
pump signals can exceed Laser Safety limits, the Backward Raman has built-in safety
mechanisms to insure that sufficient fiber is connected to the N-T port before allowing
pump laser power levels to exceed Laser Safety limits. One of these mechanisms is
detection of the 1434nm pump laser signal from the downstream Backward Raman.
The figure below illustrates a connection of two 2RAMAN-C15-LL amplifiers in a network
segment.
Figure 737: 2RAMAN-C15-LL Amplifier Example
2Raman -C 15 -LL
OSCF
2Raman -C 15 -LL
FWD
OSCF
BWD
N -T
U -R
N -R
U -T
C -T
C -R
EDFA Pre -amp
OSCM
OSCM
C -R
C -T
FWD
BWD
N -R
U -T
OSCF
N -T
U -R
OSCF
EDFA Pre -amp
Any of the C-band EDFAs listed in the pre-amp section can inter-operate with a
2RAMAN-C15-LL in the pre-amp position.
EDFA Booster amps are not allowed and will not inter-operate with 2RAMAN-C15-LL.
1246

The Amp-S20H-C15 and Amp-S20L-C15 are both hybrid amplifiers, meaning they
contain both an EDFA and a BWD Raman in one module. The AMP-S20H-C15 combines
a high gain optimized EDFA and BWD Raman while the AMP-S20L-C15 combines a low
gain optimized EDFA and BWD Raman.
These modules are typically used with both the EDFA and BWD Raman amplifiers
active. It is possible to configure the modules where only the EDFA is active and the
Raman pumps are off. In this mode of operation the data traffic through the BWD Raman
path experiences approximately 1.5 dB of attenuation. BWD Raman only operation is not
supported with these modules.
Both EDFA's have a maximum output power of +21 dBm and thus meet Laser Safety
requirements with further power shutdown capabilities. The BWD Raman pump lasers do
exceed +21 dBm and utilize built in laser safety mechanisms based on the OSC and
Data signals to ensure sufficient fiber is connected to the network port of the amplifier,
similar to the Raman C-10.
Figure 738 on p.1248 and Figure 739 on p.1249 illustrate the allowed network
configurations for both of these modules. No parallel configurations are supported.
1247

Figure 738: EDFA/Raman Booster and Pre-Amp Network Connections
Low Gain to Low Gain
AMP -S 20 L-C 15
AMP -S 20 L-C 15
Raman Pumps
EDFA
VOA
UR
NT
NR
UT
BWD
C -R /C -T
C -R /C -T
OSC
OSC
Raman Pumps
BWD
UT
NR
UR
NT
VOA
High Gain to High Gain

AMP -S 20 H -C 15
EDFA
AMP -S 20 H -C 15
Raman Pumps
EDFA
VOA
UR
NT
NR
UT
BWD
C -R /C -T
C -R /C -T
OSC
OSC
Raman Pumps
BWD
UT
NR
UR
NT
VOA
EDFA
High Gain to Low Gain

AMP -S 20 H -C 15
AMP -S 20 L-C 15
Raman Pumps
EDFA
VOA
UR
NT
NR
UT
BWD
C -R /C -T
C -R /C -T
OSC
OSC
Raman Pumps
BWD
UT
NR
UR
NT
VOA
EDFA
Low Gain to High Gain

AMP -S 20 L-C 15
AMP -S 20 H -C 15
Raman Pumps
EDFA
VOA
UR
NT
NR
UT
BWD
C -R /C -T
C -R /C -T
OSC
OSC
Raman Pumps
UT
BWD
NR
UR
NT
VOA
EDFA
The figure below illustrates the EDFA/Raman used as an In-Line amplifier.
1248

Figure 739: EDFA/Raman In-Line Amplifier Network Connection
AMP -S 20 x-C 15
AMP -S 20 x-C 15
Pump direction
BWD
OSCF
EDFA
N -R
U -T
OSCF
N -T
Variable
Gain
Variable Gain /
TILT
VOA
C -R
DWDM
Network
VOA
U -R
Network
Element
Side
OSCM
C -T
DWDM
Network
C -T
OSCM
C -R
VOA
Variable
Gain
N -T
OSCF
VOA
Variable Gain /
TILT
U -R
U -T
EDFA
N -R
OSCF
BWD
Pump direction
1249
1250
Chapter 18
This chapter contains the descriptions of all dispersion compensation modules available
at the publication date of this Hardware Description.
ports and module specific details. The module key features are presented, the signal path
within the module is briefly discussed, and examples of module labeling are given.
The descriptions are merely supposed to convey a basic understanding of the dispersion
compensation modules to the reader. For detailed information on these modules and
dispersion compensation modules are provided.
DCF-M/xxx/SSMF on p.1254
DCG-M/xxx/SSMF on p.1257
DCG50-M/xxx/SSMF on p.1260
DCG-M/xxx/TWRS on p.1263
DCG50-M/xxx/TWRS on p.1266
DCF1HU-P Shelf on p.1269
1251
General Information
General Information
Chromatic dispersion is the speed at which optical signals travel along an optical fiber at
different frequencies. The amount of dispersion varies with the wavelength. This
phenomenon causes optical signals to spread out and degrade over long distances.
Chromatic dispersion adversely affects the ability to transmit at high bit rates at
approximately 4 Gbit/s or higher per wavelength. Signal degradation can be compensated
by adding dispersion compensating fiber modules (DCMs) to the transmitting fiber.
ADCM includes a spool of dispersion compensating fiber (DCF) which provides an
inverse dispersion to shift the optical pulses closer together.
Labeling
Each dispersion compensation module has printed several labels on the frontplate and
the board cover. These labels provide module specific information as shown in Figure
740, Figure 741, Figure 742 and Figure 743.
Frontplate Labels
For a quick identification all dispersion compensation modules have two printed labels
affixed on its frontplate. These labels include the module name, serial number and the
USI code of the module. The following shows an example of DCM-P/80 frontplate labels.
Figure 740: Example of DCM-P/80
Module Type Label

All module type labels of the dispersion compensation modules contain module
information, such as
the module type
the USI number and its code
Additionally, some module type labels of the dispersion compensation modules can
contain specific module information, such as
1252
General Information
technical specifications
An example of the DCF-M/010/SSMF is shown in Figure 741.

Figure 741: Example of a DCF-M/010/SSMF Module Type Label
Certification Label
This label provides approved certification marks. An example of a dispersion
compensation module certification label is shown in the following figure.
Figure 742: Example of a Dispersion Compensation Module Certification Label
Depending on the dispersion compensation module type the certification label may
slightly differ.
Warranty Label
dispersion compensation module warranty label is shown in the following figure.
Figure 743: Example of a Dispersion Compensation Module Warranty Label
1253
DCF-M/xxx/SSMF
DCF-M/xxx/SSMF
Figure 744: Example of DCF-M/010/SSMF Front View
Variants:
DCF-M/010/SSMF
DCF-M/020/SSMF
DCF-M/030/SSMF
DCF-M/040/SSMF
DCF-M/050/SSMF
DCF-M/060/SSMF
DCF-M/070/SSMF
DCF-M/080/SSMF
DCF-M/090/SSMF
DCF-M/100/SSMF
Faceplate Markings
The following table lists all abbreviations on the DCF-M/xxx/SSMF faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 247: DCF-M/xxx/SSMF Faceplate Markings
1254
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
receive
transmit
optical port named 1

module
DCF-M/xxx/SSMF
Description
The DCF-M/xxx/SSMF is a Dispersion Compensation Fiber Module. In the FSP 3000R7
DWDM transmission system, it provides a flexible solution for overcoming the effects of
dispersion in standard single-mode fiber according to G.652, and enabling operation in the
C and L band. The DCFs have special dispersion characteristics that eliminate the
wavelength dispersion and return signals to their original state.
Chromatic dispersion is compensated for different lengths of fiber span regardless of the
wavelength (channel number). The DCF-M/xxx/SSMF module does not exceed the
attenuation of 10 dB.
The part /xxx of the module name refers to the compensation capability. The DCFM/xxx/SSMF is a managed module. The equipment type name of this module used by
the management software can be found in Equipment Types of FSP 3000R7 Hardware
Features
Small size plug-in module that enables flexible solutions
Full dispersion slope compensation
Operation over the entire C- and L bands (from 1529 nm through 1602 nm)
Optical Connectors
The DCF-M/xxx/SSMF module has LC type receptacles, non-angled for fiber termination
on its faceplate. Each optical connector has a blind plug and a shutter for providing
protection from potential laser radiation. The blind plugs also protect against dirt and dust.
Variants
The Standard Single-Mode Fiber (SSMF acc. to G.652) of the DCF-M/xxx/SSMF module
is available with different fiber lengths. Each module variant is designed to compensate
for a specific amount of dispersion. Table 248 lists the module variants currently available
and their compensation capabilities.
1255
DCF-M/xxx/SSMF
Table 248: DCF-M/xxx/SSMF Module Variants
Compensation Type
DCF-M/xxx/SSMF
Variants
Compensation
Capabilities
SSMF (G.652)
DCF-M/010/SSMF
ca. 10 km (ca. 6.2 mi.)
DCF-M/020/SSMF
ca. 20 km (ca. 12.4 mi.)
DCF-M/030/SSMF
ca. 30 km (ca. 18.6 mi.)
DCF-M/040/SSMF
ca. 40 km (ca. 24.8 mi.)
DCF-M/050/SSMF
ca. 50 km (ca. 31.1 mi.)
DCF-M/060/SSMF
ca. 60 km (ca. 37.2 mi.)
DCF-M/070/SSMF
ca. 70 km (ca. 43.5 mi.)
DCF-M/080/SSMF
ca. 80 km (ca. 49.6 mi.)
DCF-M/090/SSMF
ca. 90 km (ca. 55.9 mi.)
DCF-M/100/SSMF
ca. 100 km (ca. 62.0 mi.)
Signal Path
When the DCF-M/xxx/SSMF is connected to a conventional transmission fiber (G.652
SSMF), light enters via the input connector (1-R) and passes through the DCF for
compensation. Chromatic dispersion is compensated for a specific fiber span. The light
is coupled again into the transmission fiber via the output connector (1-T).
Slot Positions
The DCF-M/xxx/SSMF is 8 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and slots:
SH1HU, slot 1
LED Indicator
The LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating status of the module.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 of the Maintenance and Troubleshooting Manual.
Labeling
Printed labels that are affixed on the frontplate and board cover of the DCF-M/xxx/SSMF
1256
DCG-M/xxx/SSMF
Specifications
DCG-M/xxx/SSMF
Figure 745: Example of DCG-M/060/SSMF Front View
Variants:
DCG-M/060/SSMF
DCG-M/080/SSMF
DCG-M/100/SSMF
Faceplate Markings
Table below lists all abbreviations on the DCG-M/xxx/SSMF faceplate and their
meanings.
1257
DCG-M/xxx/SSMF
Figure 746: DCG-M/xxx/SSMF Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
receive
transmit

module
Description
The DCG-M/xxx/SSMF is a fiber-bragg-grating dispersion compensation module. In the
FSP 3000R7 DWDM transmission system, it is capable of compensating the chromatic
dispersion of standard single-mode fiber according to G.652 in the C band. The DCGM/xxx/SSMF contains a grating and a circulator spliced to the optical connectors on the
faceplate.
The DCG-M has a high negative dispersion and a dispersion slope that matches that of a
conventional single-mode fiber according to G.652.
wavelength (channel number). Up to 4 modules can be cascaded in one link.
Fiber bragg grating modules have lower cost, less insertion loss, and lower transmission
latency than dispersion compensation fiber modules.
The DCG-M/xxx/SSMF is designed to be used on SSMF according to G.652 only. The
part /xxx of the module name refers to the compensation capability. The DCGM/xxx/SSMF is a managed module. The equipment type name of this module used by
Please use the Network Planner tool or contact Network Consultant for
assistance in case of using
Note
data rates >10 Gbit/s or
more than 4 pieces of DCG modules cascaded in one link.
Features
Operation over the entire C band (195.90 THz through 192.00 THz)
Optical Connectors
The DCG-M/xxx/SSMF module has LC type receptacles, non-angled for fiber termination
on its faceplate. Each optical connector has a blind plug and a shutter for providing
protection from potential laser radiation. The blind plugs also protect against dirt and dust.
1258
DCG-M/xxx/SSMF
Variants
This Fiber Bragg Grating dispersion compensation module for standard single-mode fiber
is available in three module variants. Each module variant compensates for a specific
amount of dispersion.
DCG-M/060/SSMF that compensates for ca. 60 km (ca. 37.2 mi.) of G. 652 Standard
Single-Mode Fiber
DCG-M/080/SSMF that compensates for ca. 80 km (ca. 49.6 mi.) of G. 652 Standard
Single-Mode Fiber
DCG-M/100/SSMF that compensates for ca. 100 km (ca. 62.0 mi.) of G. 652
Standard Single-Mode Fiber
Signal Path
When the DCG-M/xxx/SSMF is connected to a conventional transmission fiber (G.652
SSMF), light enters via the input connector (1-R) and passes through the DCG for
Slot Positions
The DCG-M/xxx/SSMF is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and slots:
LED Indicator
Labeling
Printed labels that are affixed on the frontplate and board cover of the DCG-M/xxx/SSMF
Specifications
1259
DCG50-M/xxx/SSMF
DCG50-M/xxx/SSMF
Figure 747: Example of DCG50-M/060/SSMF Front View
Variants:
DCG50M/020/SSMF
DCG50M/040/SSMF
DCG50M/060/SSMF
DCG50M/080/SSMF
DCG50M/100/SSMF
Faceplate Markings
The table below lists all abbreviations on the DCG50-M/xxx/SSMF faceplate and their
meanings.
Figure 748: DCG50-M/xxx/SSMF Faceplate Markings
1260
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
receive
transmit

module
DCG50-M/xxx/SSMF
Description
The DCG50-M/xxx/SSMF is a fiber-bragg-grating dispersion compensation module. In a
50 GHz channel grid of the FSP 3000R7 DWDM transmission system, it is capable of
compensating the chromatic dispersion of standard single-mode fiber according to G.652
in the C band. The DCG50-M/xxx/SSMF contains a grating and a circulator spliced to the
optical connectors on the faceplate.
The DCG50-M has a high negative dispersion and a dispersion slope that matches that of
a conventional single-mode fiber according to G.652.
The DCG50-M/xxx/SSMF is designed to be used on SSMF according to G.652 only. The
part /xxx of the module name refers to the compensation capability. The DCG50M/xxx/SSMF is a managed module. The equipment type name of this module used by
Components of this documentation.
Note
Features
Operation over 81 channels in the entire C band (frequency range from 195.95 THz
through 192.00 THz) at 50 GHz channel spacing according to ITU-T G.694.1
Optical Connectors
The DCG50-M/xxx/SSMF module has LC type receptacles, non-angled for fiber
termination on its faceplate. Each optical connector has a blind plug and a shutter for
providing protection from potential laser radiation. The blind plugs also protect against dirt
and dust.
Variants
This Fiber Bragg Grating dispersion compensation module for standard single-mode fiber
is available for 50 GHz channel spacing in five module variants. Each module variant
compensates for a specific amount of dispersion.
DCG50-M/020/SSMF that compensates for 20 km (12.4 mi.) of

G. 652 Standard Single-Mode Fiber

1261
DCG50-M/xxx/SSMF



Signal Path
When the DCG50-M/xxx/SSMF is connected to a conventional transmission fiber (G.652
SSMF), light enters via the input connector (1-R) and passes through the DCG for
Slot Positions
The DCG50-M/xxx/SSMF is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and slots:
LED Indicator
For details, refer to Chapter 3 of the FSP 3000R7 Rel. 13.2 Maintenance and
Labeling
Printed labels that are affixed on the frontplate and board cover of the DCG50M/xxx/SSMF provide module specific information. For details, see Labeling on p.1252.
Specifications
1262
DCG-M/xxx/TWRS
DCG-M/xxx/TWRS
Figure 749: Example of DCG-M/160/TWRS Front View
Variants:
DCGM/160/TWRS
DCGM/240/TWRS
DCGM/320/TWRS
Faceplate Markings
The table below lists all abbreviations on the DCG-M/xxx/TWRS faceplate and their
meanings.
Figure 750: DCG-M/xxx/TWRS Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
receive
transmit

module
1263
DCG-M/xxx/TWRS
Description
The DCG-M/xxx/TWRS is a fiber-bragg-grating dispersion compensation module. In the
FSP 3000R7 DWDM transmission system, it is capable of compensating the chromatic
dispersion of TrueWave RS Fiber (according to G.655.C and G.655.D standards) in the
C band. The DCG-M/xxx/TWRS contains a grating and a circulator spliced to the optical
connectors on the faceplate.
The DCG-M module has a high negative dispersion and a dispersion slope that matches
that of TrueWave RS Fiber. The module is designed to be used on TrueWave RS
Fiber according to G.655.C and G.655.D standards only.
The part /xxx of the module name refers to the length of the compensated TrueWave
RS Fiber. The DCG-M/xxx/TWRS is a managed module. The equipment type name of
this module used by the management software can be found in Equipment Types of FSP
3000R7 Hardware Components on p.1327 of this documentation.
Note
Features
Operation over the entire C band (195.95 THz through 192.00 THz)
Optical Connectors
The DCG-M/xxx/TWRS module has LC type receptacles, non-angled for fiber
and dust.
Variants
The Fiber Bragg Grating dispersion compensation module for TrueWave RS Fiber is
available in three module variants. Each module variant compensates for a specific
amount of dispersion.
1264
DCG-M/160/TWRS that compensates for ca. 160 km (ca. 99.36 mi.) of

TrueWave RS Fiber
DCG-M/240/TWRS that compensates for ca. 240 km (ca. 149.04 mi.) of

TrueWave RS Fiber
DCG-M/320/TWRS that compensates for ca. 320 km (ca.198.72 mi.) of

TrueWave RS Fiber
DCG-M/xxx/TWRS
Signal Path
When the DCG-M/xxx/TWRS is connected to the transmission fiber (TrueWave RS
Fiber), light enters via the input connector (1-R) and passes through the DCG-M module
for compensation. Chromatic dispersion is compensated for a specific fiber span. The
light is coupled again into the transmission fiber via the output connector (1-T).
Slot Positions
The DCG-M/xxx/TWRS is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and slots:
LED Indicator
Labeling
Printed labels that are affixed on the frontplate and board cover of the DCG-M/xxx/TWRS
Specifications
1265
DCG50-M/xxx/TWRS
DCG50-M/xxx/TWRS
Figure 751: Example of DCG50-M/160/TWRS Front View
Variants:
DCG50M/160/TWRS
DCG50M/240/TWRS
DCG50M/320/TWRS
Faceplate Markings
The table below lists all abbreviations on the DCG50-M/xxx/TWRS faceplate and their
meanings.
Figure 752: DCG50-M/xxx/TWRS Faceplate Markings
1266
LED Indicators
Optical Ports
receive
transmit

module
DCG50-M/xxx/TWRS
Description
The DCG50-M/xxx/TWRS is a fiber-bragg-grating dispersion compensation module. Set
on the 50 GHz channel grid of the FSP 3000R7 DWDM transmission system, it is
capable of compensating the chromatic dispersion of TrueWave RS Fiber (according to
G.655.C and G.655.D standards) in the C band. The DCG50-M/xxx/TWRS contains a
grating and a optical circulator spliced to the optical connectors on the faceplate.
The DCG50-M module has a high negative dispersion and a dispersion slope that
matches that of TrueWave RS Fiber.
The part /xxx of the module name refers to the length of the compensated TrueWave
RS Fiber. The DCG50-M/xxx/TWRS is a inventory managed module. The equipment
type name of this module used by the management software can be found in Equipment
Types of FSP 3000R7 Hardware Components on p.1327 of this documentation.
Note
Features
Operation over 81 channels in the entire C band (frequency range from 195.95 THz
through 192.00 THz) at 50 GHz channel spacing according to ITU-T G.694.1
Optical Connectors
The DCG50-M/xxx/TWRS module has LC type receptacles, non-angled for fiber
and dust.
Variants
The Fiber Bragg Grating dispersion compensation module for TrueWave RS Fiber is
available for 50 GHz channel spacing in three module variants. Each module variant
compensates for a specific amount of dispersion.
DCG50-M/160/TWRS that compensates for ca. 160 km (ca. 99.36 mi.) of

TrueWave RS Fiber

TrueWave RS Fiber

TrueWave RS Fiber
1267
DCG50-M/xxx/TWRS
Signal Path
When the DCG50-M/xxx/TWRS is connected to the transmission fiber (TrueWave RS
Fiber), the optical signals enter the input connector (1-R) and passes through the DCG50M module for dispersion compensation. The chromatic dispersion compensates for a
specific fiber span. The optical signals exit through output connector (1-T) to the
transmission fiber.
Slot Positions
The DCG50-M/xxx/TWRS is 4 HP wide. It can be placed into following shelves and
slots:
LED Indicator
Labeling
Printed labels that are affixed on the frontplate and board cover of the DCG50M/xxx/TWRS provide module specific information. For details, see Labeling on p.1252.
Specifications
1268
DCF1HU-P Shelf
DCF1HU-P Shelf
Figure 753: Front View DCF1HU-P/40/SSMF Shelf
Description
The DCF1HU-P is an all passive and unmanaged Dispersion Compensation Module
Shelf. It consists of the rack-mountable, 1 HU high case and a removable module
designed to support different spool lengths of a specific dispersion compensating fiber
(DCF). Access to the DCF module is provided through LC type connectors in front. A
DCF module is inserted from the front of the shelf, and paddle latches secure the DCF
module in position.
The DCF1HU-P provides a flexible solution for overcoming the effects of chromatic
dispersion in transmission fibers operating in the C band without dropping and
regenerating the wavelengths on the link. The DCF has special dispersion characteristics
that eliminate the wavelength dispersion and return signals to their original state.
Chromatic dispersion is compensated for different fiber types (SSMF, TrueWaver, Leaf,
MetroCor) and different lengths of fiber span regardless of the wavelength (channel
number).
This shelf is a modular platform that enables you to easily add/remove the DCF spools
to/from a network element as needed to support changing requirements.
Features
Modular rack-mountable design
Dimensions of the case: width x height x depth

Robust and compact case
Access to the DCF spool from the front of the shelf
Field-replaceable
Dispersion compensation across the 1529 nm to 1562 nm wavelength range (C band)
1269
DCF1HU-P Shelf
Optical Connectors
The DCF1HU-P Shelf has LC type receptacles for fiber connections from the front. Each
optical connector has a blind plug that provides protection from potential laser radiation.
The blind plugs also protect against dirt and dust.
Variants
The compensation capability of the DCF1HU-P Shelf is determined by the type and
length of the integrated DCF spool. The shelf is available with a box for compensation of
Standard Single-Mode Fiber (SSMF; G.652), Large Effective Area Fiber (LEAF; G.655),
True Wave Reduced Slope Fiber (TWRS; G.655) and MetroCor Fiber (MCOR, G.655).
Table 249 lists the shelf variants currently available and their compensation capabilities.
Table 249: DCF1HU-P Shelf Variants
Compensation
Types
DCF1HU-P Shelf
Variants
Compensation
Capabilities
SSMF (G.652)
DCF1HU-P/10/SSMF
ca. 10 km (ca. 6.2 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/20/SSMF
ca. 20 km (ca. 12.4 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/40/SSMF
ca. 40 km (ca. 24.8 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/60/SSMF
ca. 60 km (ca. 37.2 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/80/SSMF
ca. 80 km (ca. 49.6 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/100/SSMF
ca. 100 km (ca. 62.0 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/120/SSMF
ca. 120 km (ca. 74.4 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/140/SSMF
ca. 140 km (ca. 86.8 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/160/SSMF
ca. 160 km (ca. 99.2 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/180/SSMF
ca. 180 km (ca. 111.6 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/20/LEAF
ca. 20 km (ca. 12.4 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/40/LEAF
ca. 40 km (ca. 24.8 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/60/LEAF
ca. 60 km (ca. 37.2 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/80/LEAF
ca. 80 km (ca. 49.6 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/100/LEAF
ca. 100 km (ca. 62.0 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/120/LEAF
ca. 120 km (ca. 74.4 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/140/LEAF
ca. 140 km (ca. 86.8 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/160/LEAF
ca. 160 km (ca. 99.2 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/180/LEAF
ca. 180 km (ca. 111.6 mi.)
LEAF (G.655)
1270
DCF1HU-P Shelf
Table 249: DCF1HU-P Shelf Variants
Compensation
Types
MCOR (G.655)
DCF1HU-P Shelf
Variants
Compensation
Capabilities
DCF1HU-P/20/TWRS
ca. 20 km (ca. 12.4 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/40/TWRS
ca. 40 km (ca. 24.8 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/80/TWRS
ca. 80 km (ca. 49.6 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/100/TWRS
ca. 100 km (ca. 62.0 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/120/TWRS
ca. 120 km (ca. 74.4 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/140/TWRS
ca. 140 km (ca. 86.8 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/160/TWRS
ca. 160 km (ca. 99.2 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/180/TWRS
ca. 180 km (ca. 111.6 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/10/MCOR
ca. 10 km (ca. 6.2 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/20/MCOR
ca. 20 km (ca. 12.4 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/30/MCOR
ca. 30 km (ca. 18.63 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/40/MCOR
ca. 40 km (ca. 24.8 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/50/MCOR
ca. 50 km (ca. 31.05 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/60/MCOR
ca. 60 km (ca. 37.2 mi.)
Adaptor Brackets
Separate adaptor brackets are provided for rack mounting into different sized racks and
cabinets:
1 x 19-inch rack-mount bracket pair
All brackets are included in the shipping box. The appropriate bracket pair must be fitted
on the outside of the left-hand and right-hand side walls of the case. The procedures for
fitting the different adaptor brackets are described in the Installation and Commissioning
Manual.
Signal Path
When the DCF1HU-P is connected to an appropriate transmission fiber type, light enters
via the input connector In and passes through the DCF for compensation. Chromatic
dispersion is compensated for a specific fiber span (or link) regardless of the wavelength
(channel number). The light is again coupled into the transmission fiber via the output
connector Out.
1271
DCF1HU-P Shelf
Placement
The DCF1HU-P can be placed in a 19-inch, ETSI or NEBS compliant rack by using the
appropriate adaptor brackets. It also fits into a 300 mm (0.984ft.) deep ETSI rack. The
shelf only occupies 1 HU of space in a rack.
Due to its greater depth, the DCF1HU-P Shelf should be mounted in the
lowest rack position when installing in an ETSI cabinet, in order to not
inhibit air flow in the cabinet.
Note
When mounting the DCF1HU-P Shelf below a 7HU shelf, ensure that
there is at least 1 HU of space between the bottom of a 7HU shelf and
the DCF1HU-P Shelf to allow a free air flow to the 7HU shelf above.
Labeling the Shelf

Each DCF1HU-P Shelf can be identified by a several labels located on the top of the
shelf.
Shelf Type Label

The shelf type label contains following relevant information about the shelf:

Figure 754: Example of a DCF1HU-P Shelf Type Label

The following figure shows an example of the DCF1HU-P ESD and laser safety label.
Figure 755: DCF1HU-P ESD and Laser Safety Label
1272
DCF1HU-P Shelf
Specifications
1273
DCF1HU-P Shelf
1274
Chapter 19
Dummy Modules
This chapter describes the dummy modules used by the FSP3000R7.
For safety reasons, a 9HU shelf, 7HU shelf, or a 1HU shelf must never be operated with
open or empty slots. Each unoccupied shelf slot must be filled with an appropriate
dummy module. Figure 756 shows an example of a dummy module.
Figure 756: View of a DM/5HU
1275
Variants
Variants
Two dummy module variants are available. The following table lists the mechanical
specifications of the modules.
Table 250: Dummy Module Specifications
Variants
Sizes
Sales Code
Usage
DM/5HU
4 HP* wide
and 5HU**
high
0063709901
Used for populating each

5 HU shelf slot
DM/2HU5
4 HP* wide
and 2.5 HU**
high
0063709902
Used for populating each

2.5 HU shelf slot
0 * HP stands for Horizontal Pitch (1 HP = 5.08 mm = 1/5 in)

0 ** HU stands for Height Unit (1 HU = 44.45 mm = 1.75 in)
Description
Dummy modules are an integral part of the safety design of the FSP 3000R7 system and
perform various functions. They
prevent exposure to hazardous voltages and currents inside the shelf
prevent dust and debris from entering the shelf
ensure continued EMC and safety compliance
direct the flow of cooling air through the shelf.
Dummy modules are passive devices and therefore cannot be monitored by the
management system. They have neither connectors nor LEDs on their frontplates. The
EMC contact strips avoid unintended propagation of electromagnetic energy towards the
external environment that might disrupt other equipment.
modules. They can also be ordered separately.
Slot Positions
Dummy modules can be placed into any slot of following shelves:
1276
SH9HU
SH7HU/SH7HU-R
SH1HU
Labeling
Labeling
Each dummy module is identified by a printed label that is affixed to its board. The label
contains the item number and the bar code.
1277
Labeling
1278
Appendix A
Electrical Cables
This appendix provides details about FSP 3000R7 power cables, the earthing kit, and
serial and Ethernet cables.
It includes the following sections:
Power Cables on p.1280 which describes the AC and DC power supply cables
provided by ADVA Optical Networking.
Earthing Kit for Shelves on p.1306 which describes the earthing kits for grounding 1HU
Shelves, 7HU Shelves and the 9HU shelf.
Serial and Ethernet Cables on p.1307 which describes usage of a serial null modem
cable, USB cable and Ethernet cables, and lists the pin-to-pin connections for these
cables used by the FSP 3000R7. Also provided are wiring methods for Ethernet cables
using Cat 5 and Cat6.
IEEE 1394 Interface Cable on p.1315 which describes the cable specifications.
Telemetry Interface Cable on p.1315 which describes the cable specifications.
1279
Power Cables
Power Cables
AC power cables and DC power cables provided by ADVA Optical Networking are briefly
described in the following subsections. This information is given as an aid to determine
which type of power cables has to be used to power the FSP 3000R7. In addition, it is to
assist you in selecting properly rated and assembled power cables, because the
according power cables for the used shelf must be ordered separately.
AC Power Cables
For redundancy, two AC power cables are required per AC powered shelf. The type of the
power cable depends on the region or country where the FSP 3000R7 is employed and
the line power voltage available at the installation site. One power cable is used for
primary power supply (Power A), and the other for backup power supply (Power B). Two
power cables of the same length and with the same attachment connectors constitute a
cable set that belongs to a specific shelf.
The AC cables are black or gray colored and approximately 2.5 m (8.203 ft.) long.
The cable should have three conductors of minimum 1.5 mm2 cross sectional area or 18
AWG and are assembled with an IEC-320-C13 appliance coupler on its female end. The
AC wall attachment connector on the male end of the cable must be a country-specific,
three-conductor grounding type that fits only the corresponding grounding-type power
outlet. It is not allowed to circumvent this safety feature. The AC wall attachment
connector must be certified and approved in the specific country.
WARNING
If necessary, the customer is responsible for assembling the

appropriate AC wall attachment connector at the male end that is
connected to the line power outlet.
For North America, the cable must be UL Listed/CSA Certified, SVT type and rated
105C (221F). The cable should have three conductors of minimum No.18 AWG and is
fitted with an female end IEC-320-C13 appliance coupler and a NEMA 5-15P or NEMA 620P attachment connector.
Suitable AC power cables can be delivered with each shelf but must be
ordered separately.
Note
Naming Conventions
The cable name is made up of a set of parts assembled according to a very specific rule
as exemplified below. The parts of the name represent the cables specific features.
Example:
1280
Power Cables
This example describes a AC power cable with a length of 2.5 m and a right angled
connector device of the equipment end. It has to be used in United Kingdom and
incorporates a replaceable 10 A fuse. For all available AC power cable types the naming
part CBL/AC/250/ is always the same. Only the naming part for the female end
connector type and the naming part for the country-specific use are different in the cable
variants.
The table below shows the different naming conventions used for the connector type of
the female end and the country where the cable can be used.
Table 251: Different Naming Conventions of AC Power Cables
Parts of the Name
Code
Meaning
Connector type of the female end
RA
Right angled female end
ST
Straight female end
EU
Cable is used in Continental

Europe
UK
Cable is used in United

Kingdom
CH
Cable is used in Switzerland
US
Cable is used in North America
AR
Cable is used in Argentina
AU
Cable is used in China
IN
Cable is used in India
JP
Cable is used in Japan
05A
5 A fuse
10A
10 A fuse
Specific country
Value of the replaceable fuse (only

for power cables used in UK)
Variants
The following table lists all available AC power cable variants and the required power
supplies.
1281
Power Cables
Table 252: AC Power Cables and Required Power Supplies
Power Cable
Required Power Supplies
CBL/AC/250/RA/EU
CBL/AC/250/RA/UK-10A
CBL/AC/250/RA/CH
CBL/AC/250/RA/US
CBL/AC/250/RA/AR
CBL/AC/250/RA/AU
CBL/AC/250/RA/IN
CBL/AC/250/RA/JP
PSU/7HU-AC
PSU/7HU-AC-HP
CBL/AC/250/ST/EU
CBL/AC/250/ST/UK-05A
CBL/AC/250/ST/CH
CBL/AC/250/ST/US
CBL/AC/250/ST/AR
CBL/AC/250/ST/AU
CBL/AC/250/ST/IN
CBL/AC/250/ST/JP
PSU/1HU-R-AC
PSU/1HU-R-AC-200
OTDR/THC/2HU/AC
OTDR/8-OTH/1HU/AC
The AC power cables of the FSP 3000R7 are assembled with a molded right angled or a
molded straight device plug of the C13 type according to IEC 60320 standard at the
female end.
A right angled device plug is shown in Figure 757 and a straight device plug is shown in
Figure 758.
Figure 757: Right Angled Device Plug
Figure 758: Straight Device Plug
The plug type of the attachment plug at the male end depends on the region, where it is
used. In Figure 759, Figure 760 and Figure 761 AC power cables for the use in
Continental Europe, United Kingdom and North America are shown as examples for
complete assembled AC power cables.
1282
Power Cables
AC Power Cable used in Europe Continental

The power cable shown in Figure 759 is used in Europe Continental. It is assembled with
a right angled device plug at the female end and with a CEE 7/7 (Schuko) attachment
plug at the male end. Both plugs are molded. The CEE 7/7 (Schuko) attachment plug
has two round pins. In addition, it has grounding clips on both sides to connect with the
CEE 7/4 outlet and a contact to accept the earth pin found in the type E outlet.
Figure 759: AC Power Cable used in Europe Continental (CBL/AC/250/RA/EU)
AC Power Cable used in United Kingdom

The power cable shown in Figure 760 is used in United Kingdom. It is assembled with a
straight device plug of C13 type according to IEC 60320 standard at the female end and
with a BS 1363 UK attachment plug at the male end. Both plugs are molded. This power
cable is ASTA-approved and designed to carry 250 V AC/50 Hz. The BS 1363 power plug
is compatible with the BS1363 type wall sockets that are normally used in the United
Kingdom, Ireland, and many former British colonies. A BS 1363 plug has three
rectangular prongs forming a triangle.
The power plug incorporates a replaceable fuse, the value of which is indicated on the pin
face of the plug. Should the fuse need to be replaced, an ASTA approved BS1362 fuse
must be used of the same rating, marked thus ASTA. If the fuse cover is detachable,
never use the plug with the cover omitted. If a replacement fuse cover is required, ensure
it is of the same color as that visible on the pin face of the plug. Fuse covers are available
from the Parts Department indicated in your user instructions.
Risk of electric shock!

The BS 1363 plug is not waterproof. Keep dry.
WARNING
1283
Power Cables
Figure 760: AC Power Cable used in United Kingdom (CBL/AC/250/ST/UK-05A)
AC Power Cable used in North America

The power cable shown in Figure 761 is used in North America. It is assembled with a
right angled device plug of C13 type according to IEC 60320 standard at the female end
and with a NEMA 5-15P attachment plug at the male end. Both plugs are molded. This
power cable is UL compliant and designed to carry 125 V AC/10 A.
The NEMA 5-15P attachment plug is compatible with the NEMA 5-15 wall outlets that are
standard in the United States, Canada and Mexico. If the electrical and safety
requirements are fulfilled, this cable could also be employed in various other countries
that use the same type of outlet. The NEMA 5-15 has two flat parallel blades (live and
neutral) and a round ground pin which is longer than the blades. This allows the
PSU/7HU-AC to be grounded before the power is connected.
Figure 761: AC Power Cable used in North America (CBL/AC/250/RA/US)
1284
Power Cables
DC Power Cables
For redundancy, two detachable DC flexible power cables are needed per DC powered
shelf (excepting the SH1HU-HP/2DC Shelf). One cable is used for primary power supply
(Power A), and the other for backup power supply (Power B). Two power cables of the
same length and with the same terminal ends constitute a cable set that belongs to a
specific shelf.
For the SH1HU-HP/2DC Shelf two DC flexible power cables assembled to a 4-pole
connector with screw flange are needed. Two poles of the connector are used for primary
power supply (Power A), and the other two poles for backup power supply (Power B).
Depending on the types of the PSUs, DC power cables of different cross section areas
(1.5 mm2, 16AWG; 2.5 mm2, 14 AWG and 4 mm2, 10 AWG) are used.
This section does not describe special power cables. It provides information about the
following most frequently used DC power cables:
CBL/DC/300/3AWG14/TB on p.1285
CBL/DC/300/3AWG14/FLT/R-/B+ on p.1288
PC300/3WIRE/RED/BLACK/14AWG on p.1291
CBL/DC/300/2AWG16/TB on p.1292
CBL/DC/300/2AWG16/1HU-HP on p.1294
CBL/DC/300/2AWG10/SUB-D on p.1297
The CBL/DC/300/3AWG14/TB is a UL-compliant, flexible, 3-conductor plastic coated
DC power cable. The conductors are 2.5 mm2 in cross-sectional area (14AWG). Figure
762 shows the power cable. For identification of the individual conductors, the wires are
surrounded by resistant color coded plastic insulation. The colors are different for each of
the three CBL/DC/300/3AWG14/TB variants. See Table 253 for more information about
the variants and their colors.
1285
Power Cables
Figure 762: Example of a 3-Conductor DC Power Cable
(CBL/DC/300/3AWG14/TB/GR-BL)
One end of the cable is assembled with ring lugs that connect to the screw terminals of
the power supply units (PSUs) of the shelf. Ring lugs for terminal screws M3.5 provide an
easy and reliable connection to the screw terminals of the terminal block and the
necessary high degree of contact reliability.
The wires at the other end of the cables that attach to the external power source, e.g. a
Power Distribution Unit (PDU), have no terminal ends. However, the terminal ends are
required. They depend on the type of connectors installed on the power source.
Therefore, wire terminals that meet the required power source must be assembled by the
customer.
The customer is responsible for assembling the appropriate terminal

ends at the wiring end that is connected to the external power source.
Note
The DC power cable is available with the equipment, but it has to be

ordered separately in the specific colors.
Note
1286
Power Cables
The equipment end of the cable is shown here:
Figure 763: Equipment End of the CBL/DC/300/3AWG14/TB/GR-BL
The wires must be in accordance with the wire insulation colors described in the table
below.
Table 253: Wire Coding and Cable Terminal End Specifications of
CBL/DC/300/3AWG14/TB Cables
Cable Variant
Color of
Plastic
Insulation
Wire
Function
Voltage
Use
CBL/DC/300/3AWG14/TB/R/B+
with switched polarity
(Item number: 1036700021)
Red
DC
negative
conductor
-48 V
to
negative
(-)
terminal
Black
DC
positive
conductor
0V
(return)
to
positive
(+)
terminal
Yellow/green
Protective
earth
(ground)
Red
DC
positive
conductor
0V
(return)
to
positive
(+)
terminal
Black
DC
negative
conductor
-48 V
to
negative
(-)
terminal
Yellow/green
Protective
earth
(ground)
CBL/DC/300/3AWG14/TB/RDBK
to
protective
earth
terminal
to
protective
earth
terminal
1287
Power Cables
Cable Variant
Color of
Plastic
Insulation
Wire
Function
Voltage
Use
CBL/DC/300/3AWG14/TB/GRBL
Blue
DC
positive
conductor
0V
(return)
to
positive
(+)
terminal
Gray
DC
negative
conductor
-48 V
to
negative
(-)
terminal
Yellow/green
Protective
earth
(ground)
Black
DC
positive
conductor
0V
(return)
to
positive
(+)
terminal
Blue
DC
negative
conductor
-48 V
to
negative
(-)
terminal
Yellow/green
Protective
earth
(ground)
CBL/DC/300/3AWG14/TB/BLBK
to
protective
earth
terminal
to
protective
earth
terminal
The CBL/DC/300/3AWG14/TB power cable is used for a 7HU shelf equipped with a
PSU/7HU-DC and PSU/7HU-DC-HP. This cable must be used for altitudes of site
higher than 2000 m (1.24 mi.) and for voltages higher than 60 V DC. It is provided by
ADVA Optical Networking is 3 meters (9.84 ft.) long. The actual length of each DC power
cable depends on the location of the shelf within the rack and its proximity to the DC
power source. Therefore, each power cable should be cut to the proper length and
assembled with the appropriate connectors.
The CBL/DC/300/3AWG14/FLT/R-/B+ is a UL-compliant, flexible, 3-conductor DC
power cable plastic coated DC power cable. The cross-sectional area of the conductors
is 2.5 mm2 (AWG). Figure 764 shows the power cable. For identification of the individual
conductors, the wires are surrounded by resistant color-coded plastic insulation.
1288
Power Cables
Figure 764: Wire Coding and Cable Terminal End Specifications of the
The wires must be in accordance with the insulation colors described in the table below.
Table 254: Wire Coding and Cable Terminal End Specifications
Wire Insulation Color
Wire Function
Voltage
Use
Red
DC negative
conductor
-48 V
to negative (-)
terminal
Black
DC positive
conductor
0 V (return)
to positive (+)
terminal
Yellow/green
Protective earth
(ground)
to protective
earth terminal
The equipment end of the cable is assembled with flag terminals. To ensure a natural
bend of the cable, the flag terminals have to be attached to tab connectors mounted to the
screw terminals of the power supply units of the shelf.
The tab connectors for terminal screws M3.5 provide an easy and reliable connection to
the screw terminals of the terminal block and the necessary high degree of contact
reliability.
1289
Power Cables
The procedure for mounting the tab connectors to the power supply unit and attaching the
flag terminals to the tab connectors is described in the Installation and Commissioning
Manual.
Figure 765: Equipment End of the CBL/DC/300/3AWG14/FLT/R-/B+
required. The type of end depends on the type of connectors installed on the power
source. Therefore, wire terminals that meet the required power source must be
assembled by the customer.

Note
The CBL/DC/300/3AWG14/FLT/R-/B+ can be delivered with the

equipment but must be ordered separately.
Note
The CBL/DC/300/3AWG14/FLT/R-/B+ power cable is used for a 7HU shelf equipped
with a PSU/7HU-DC and PSU/7HU-DC-HP. This cable must be used for site locations
at altitudes higher than 2000 m (1.24 mi.) and for voltages higher than 60 V DC. It is
provided by ADVA Optical Networking and is 3 meters (9.84 ft.) long. The actual length of
each DC power cable depends on the location of the shelf within the rack and its
proximity to the DC power source. Therefore, each power cable should be cut to the
proper length and assembled with the appropriate connectors.
1290
Power Cables
PC300/3WIRE/RED/BLACK/14AWG
The PC300/3WIRE/RED/BLACK/14AWG is a flexible DC power cable for the 7HU shelf
equipped with PSU/7HU-DC-HP. This cable includes three separate multiple-wire
stranded copper conductors with a cross section area of each 2.5mm2 (14 AWG) and
each 3 meters (9.84 ft.) in length. Each conductor is surrounded by resistant color coded
plastic insulation. The three conductors are held together by heat shrink tubes arranged at
intervals of about 300 mm over the total cable length.
The PC300/3WIRE/RED/BLACK/14AWG cable complies with UL 1015. It must be used
for connecting a PSU/7HU-DC-HP but it works with all other power supplies as well.
Figure 766 shows this DC power cable.
Figure 766: PC300/3WIRE/RED/BLACK/14AWG
One end of the cable is assembled with ring lugs that connect to the PSU/7HU-DC-HP or
PSU/7HU-DC of the 7HU shelf. The wires at the other end of the cable that attach to the
external power source have no terminal ends. However, the terminal ends are required,
and they depend on the type of connectors installed on the power source. Therefore, wire
terminals that meet the required power source must be assembled. The wires must be in
accordance with the color code described in Table 255.
Table 255: Wire Coding and Cable Terminal End Specifications
Wire Insulation Color
Wire Function
Voltage
Use
Red
DC positive
conductor
0 V (return)
to positive (+)
terminal
Black
DC negative
conductor
-48 V
to negative ()
terminal
Yellow/green
DC Grounding
conductor
protective
earth
to protective
earth terminal

ends at the wiring end that is attached to the external power source.
Note
1291
Power Cables
The DC power cable is available with the equipment.
Note
Cable length on delivery is 3 meters (9.84 ft). Different lengths of cables are needed, due
to distance differences between the power input connectors on the 9 HU Shelves within
the rack and the external DC power source. Because of safety and cable routing, ADVA
Optical Networking recommends cutting the cables to the proper lengths and assembling
the appropriate connectors.
The CBL/DC/300/2AWG16/TB is a UL-compliant, flexible, 2-conductor plastic coated
DC power cable . The conductors are 1.5 mm2 in cross-sectional area (16AWG). Figure
767 shows the power cable. For identification of the individual conductors, the wires are
surrounded by resistant color coded plastic insulation. The colors are different for each of
the three CBL/DC/300/3AWG14/TB variants. See Table 256 for more information about
the variants and their colors.
Figure 767: Example of a 2-Conductor DC Power Cable
(CBL/DC/300/2AWG16/TB/GR-BL)
One end of the cable is assembled with ring lugs that connect to the screw terminals of
the power supply units (PSUs) of the shelf. Ring lugs for terminal screws M3.5 provide an
easy and reliable connection to the screw terminals of the terminal block and the
necessary high degree of contact reliability.
required. They depend on the type of connectors installed on the power source.
customer.
1292
Power Cables

Note

Note
Figure 768: Equipment End of the CBL/DC/300/2AWG16/TB/GR-BL
The wires must be in accordance with the wire insulation colors described in the table
below.
Cable Variant
Color of
Plastic
Insulation
Wire
Function
Voltage
Use
CBL/DC/300/2AWG16/TB/RD-BK
Red
DC
positive
conductor
0V
(return)
to
positive
(+)
terminal
Black
DC
negative
conductor
-48 V
to
negative
(-)
terminal
1293
Power Cables
Cable Variant
Color of
Plastic
Insulation
Wire
Function
Voltage
Use
CBL/DC/300/2AWG16/TB/GR-BL
Blue
DC
positive
conductor
0V
(return)
to
positive
(+)
terminal
Gray
DC
negative
conductor
-48 V
to
negative
(-)
terminal
Black
DC
positive
conductor
0V
(return)
to
positive
(+)
terminal
Blue
DC
negative
conductor
-48 V
to
negative
(-)
terminal
CBL/DC/300/2AWG16/TB/BL-BK
The CBL/DC/300/2AWG16/TB power cable is used for the power supplies of a SH1HUF/2DC Shelf. This cable must be used for altitudes of site higher than 2000 m (1.24 mi.)
and for voltages higher than 60 V DC.
Risk of fire!
WARNING
It is not allowed to connect the CBL/DC/300/2AWG16/TB power

cable to the power supply of the SH1HU-HP/2DC Shelf.
The CBL/DC/300/2AWG16/TB power cable provided by ADVA Optical Networking is 3

meters (9.84 ft.) long. The actual length of each DC power cable depends on the location
of the shelf within the rack and its proximity to the DC power source. Therefore, each
power cable should be cut to the proper length and assembled with the appropriate
connectors.
CBL/DC/300/2AWG16/1HU-HP
The CBL/DC/300/2AWG16/1HU-HP consists of two flexible DC power cables
specifically designed for the SH1HU-HP/2DC. Each of the two cables includes two
multiple-wire stranded copper conductors with a cross section area of each 1.5 mm2
(16AWG) and each 3 meters (9.84 ft) in length. For identification of the individual
conductors, the wires are surrounded by resistant color coded plastic insulation. The
colors are different for each of the three CBL/DC/300/2AWG16/1HU-HP variants. See
Table 257 for more information about the variants and their colors.
The cables are UL-listed flexible plastic coated cables. The CBL/DC/300/2AWG16/1HUHP can only be used to connect the shelf to a DC power source. Figure 769 shows the
CBL/DC/300/2AWG16/1HU-HP.
1294
Power Cables
Figure 769: Example of CBL/DC/300/2AWG16/1HU-HP/RD-BK
Two ends of the cables are assembled with a 4-pole power plug that connects to the
power supply unit of the SH1HU-HP/2DC. This plug has an integrated strain relief and is
fixed to the shelf via captive screws. A 4-pole plug of a CBL/DC/300/2AWG16/1HUHP/RD-BK is shown in Figure 770. The wires at the other end of the cables that attach to
the external power source have no terminal ends. However, the terminal ends are
required, and they depend on the type of connectors installed on the power source.
customer.

Note

Note
Figure 770: Equipment End of CBL/DC/300/2AWG16/1HU-HP/R-/B+
The wires must be in accordance with the wire insulation colors described in Table 257.
1295
Power Cables
CBL/DC/300/2AWG16/1HU-HP Cables
Cable Variant
Wire
Insulation
Color
Wire
Function
Voltage
Use
CBL/DC/300/2AWG16/1HU-HP/R/B+
Red
DC
negative
conductor
-48 V
to
negative
()
terminal
Black
DC
positive
conductor
0V
(return)
to
positive
(+)
terminal
Red
DC
positive
conductor
0V
(return)
to
positive
(+)
terminal
Black
DC
negative
conductor
-48 V
to
negative
(-)
terminal
Blue
DC
positive
conductor
0V
(return)
to
positive
(+)
terminal
Gray
DC
negative
conductor
-48 V
to
negative
(-)
terminal
Black
DC
positive
conductor
0V
(return)
to
positive
(+)
terminal
Blue
DC
negative
conductor
-48 V
to
negative
(-)
terminal
CBL/DC/300/2AWG16/1HUHP/RD-BK
CBL/DC/300/2AWG16/1HUHP/GR-BL
CBL/DC/300/2AWG16/1HUHP/BL-BK
Each CBL/DC/300/2AWG16/1HU-HP provided by ADVA Optical Networking is 3 meters

(9.84 ft.) long. The actual length of DC power cables depends on the location of the shelf
within the rack and its proximity to the DC power source. Therefore, each power cable
should be cut to the proper length and assembled with the appropriate connectors.
1296
Power Cables
The CBL/DC/300/2AWG10/SUB-D is a flexible DC power cable specifically designed for
the 9HU Shelf. This cable includes two separate multiple-wire stranded copper
conductors with a cross section area of each 5.2 mm2 (10AWG) and each 3 meters (9.84
ft) in length. The conductors are surrounded by resistant color coded plastic insulation.
The colors are different for each of the three CBL/DC/300/2AWG10/SUB-D variants. See
Table 258 for more information about the variants and their colors.
The CBL/DC/300/2AWG10/SUB-D cable complies with UL 1015. It can only be used to
connect the 9HU shelf to a DC power source. Figure 771 shows this DC power cable.
Figure 771: Example of CBL/DC/300/2AWG10/SUB-D
One end of the cable is assembled with an angled 2-pin Sub-D power plug that connects
to the 9HU shelf. The wires at the other end of the cable that attach to the external power
source have no terminal ends. However, the terminal ends are required, and they depend
on the type of connectors installed on the power source. Therefore, wire terminals that
meet the required power source must be assembled. The wires must be in accordance
with the color code described in Table 258.
Table 258: Wire Coding and Cable Terminal End Specifications of the
Cable Variant
Wire
Insulation
Color
Wire
Function
Voltage
Use
CBL/DC/300/2AWG10/SUB-D/R/B+
Red
DC
negative
conductor
-48 V
to
negative
() terminal
Black
DC
positive
conductor
0V
(return)
to positive
(+)
terminal
1297
Power Cables
Cable Variant
Wire
Insulation
Color
Wire
Function
Voltage
Use
CBL/DC/300/2AWG10/SUBD/RD-BK
Red
DC
positive
conductor
0V
(return)
to positive
(+)
terminal
Black
DC
negative
conductor
-48 V
to
negative
() terminal
Blue
DC
positive
conductor
0V
(return)
to positive
(+)
terminal
Gray
DC
negative
conductor
-48 V
to
negative
() terminal
Black
DC
positive
conductor
0V
(return)
to positive
(+)
terminal
Blue
DC
negative
conductor
-48 V
to
negative
() terminal
CBL/DC/300/2AWG10/SUBD/GR-BL
CBL/DC/300/2AWG10/SUBD/BL-BK

Note

Note
Cable length on delivery is 3 meters (9.84 ft). The actual length of each DC power cable
depends on the location of the shelf within the rack and its proximity to the DC power
source. Because of safety and cable routing, ADVA Optical Networking recommends
cutting the cables to the proper lengths and assembling the appropriate connectors.
the 9HU Shelf. This cable includes two separate multiple-wire stranded copper
conductors with a cross section area of each 5.2 mm2 (10AWG) and each 6 meters
(19.686 ft) in length. The conductors are surrounded by resistant color coded plastic
insulation. The colors are different for each of the three CBL/DC/600/2AWG10/SUB-D
variants. See Table 258 for more information about the variants and their colors.
1298
Power Cables
The CBL/DC/600/2AWG10/SUB-D cable complies with UL 1015. It can only be used to
connect the 9HU shelf to a DC power source. Figure 772 shows this DC power cable.
Figure 772: Example of CBL/DC/600/2AWG10/SUB-D
to the 9HU shelf. The wires at the other end of the cable that attach to the external power
source have no terminal ends. However, the terminal ends are required, and they depend
on the type of connectors installed on the power source. Therefore, wire terminals that
meet the required power source must be assembled. The wires must be in accordance
with the color code described in Table 259.
Wire Insulation
Color
Wire Function
Voltage
Use
Red
DC negative conductor
-48 V
to negative ()
terminal
Black
DC positive conductor
0 V (return)
to positive (+)
terminal

Note
1299
Power Cables

ordered separately.
Note
Cable length on delivery is 6 meters (19.686 ft). The actual length of each DC power
power source. Because of safety and cable routing, ADVA Optical Networking
recommends cutting the cables to the proper lengths and assembling the appropriate
connectors.
the 7HU shelf and 9HU shelf. This cable includes three separate multiple-wire stranded
copper conductors with a cross section area of each 5.2 mm2 (10AWG) and each 3
meters (9.84 ft) in length. The conductors are surrounded by resistant color coded plastic
insulation. The colors are different for each of the three CBL/DC/300/3AWG10/SUB-D
variants. See Table 260 for more information about the variants and their colors.
The CBL/DC/300/3AWG10/SUB-D cable complies with the UL 1015.
Figure 773: Example of CBL/DC/300/3AWG10/SUB-D/R-/B+
1300
Power Cables
to the 7HU shelf or 9HU shelf. Pin1 (0V), pin3 (-48V) and pin5 (earth) of this power plug
are assigned for connecting to the shelves. The wires at the other end of the cable that
attach to the external power source have no terminal ends. However, the terminal ends
are required, and they depend on the type of connectors installed on the power source.
Therefore, wire terminals that meet the required power source must be assembled. The
wires must be in accordance with the color code described in Table 260.
Cable Variant
Wire
Insulation
Color
Wire
Function
Voltage
Use
CBL/DC/300/3AWG10/SUBD/R-/B+
(Item number: not yet
available)
Black
DC
positive
conductor
0V
(return)
to positive
(+)
terminal
Red
DC
negative
conductor
-48 V
to
negative
()
terminal
Yellow/green
DC
Grounding
conductor
protective
earth
to protective
earth terminal
Blue
DC
positive
conductor
0V
(return)
to positive
(+)
terminal
Gray
DC
negative
conductor
-48 V
to
negative
()
terminal
Yellow/green
DC
Grounding
conductor
protective
earth
to protective
earth terminal
Black
DC
positive
conductor
0V
(return)
to positive
(+)
terminal
Blue
DC
negative
conductor
-48 V
to
negative
()
terminal
Yellow/green
DC
Grounding
conductor
protective
earth
to protective
earth terminal
available)
available)
1301
Power Cables

Note

Note
Cable length on delivery is 3 meters (9.84 ft). The actual length of each DC power cable
depends on the location of the shelf within the rack and its proximity to the DC power
source. Because of safety and cable routing, ADVA Optical Networking recommends
cutting the cables to the proper lengths and assembling the appropriate connectors.
The CBL/DC/1000/3AWG10/SUB-D is a flexible DC power cable specifically designed
for the 7HU shelf and 9HU shelf. This cable includes three separate multiple-wire
stranded copper conductors with a cross section area of each 5.2 mm2 (10AWG) and
each 10 meters (32.81 ft) in length. The conductors are surrounded by resistant color
coded plastic insulation. The colors are different for each of the three
CBL/DC/1000/3AWG10/SUB-D variants. SeeTable 261 for more information about the
variants and their colors.
The CBL/DC/1000/3AWG10/SUB-D cable complies with the UL 1015.
1302
Power Cables
Figure 774: Example of CBL/DC/1000/3AWG10/SUB-D/R-/B+
to the 7HU shelf or 9HU shelf. Pin1 (0V), pin3 (-48V) and pin5 (earth) of this power plug
are assigned for connecting to the shelves. The wires at the other end of the cable that
attach to the external power source have no terminal ends. However, the terminal ends
are required, and they depend on the type of connectors installed on the power source.
Therefore, wire terminals that meet the required power source must be assembled. The
wires must be in accordance with the color code described in Figure 774.
1303
Power Cables
Cable Variant
Wire
Insulation
Color
Wire
Function
Voltage
Use
CBL/DC/1000/3AWG10/SUBD/R-/B+
available)
Black
DC
positive
conductor
0V
(return)
to positive
(+)
terminal
Red
DC
negative
conductor
-48 V
to
negative
()
terminal
Yellow/green
DC
Grounding
conductor
protective
earth
to protective
earth terminal
Blue
DC
positive
conductor
0V
(return)
to positive
(+)
terminal
Gray
DC
negative
conductor
-48 V
to
negative
()
terminal
Yellow/green
DC
Grounding
conductor
protective
earth
to protective
earth terminal
Black
DC
positive
conductor
0V
(return)
to positive
(+)
terminal
Blue
DC
negative
conductor
-48 V
to
negative
()
terminal
Yellow/green
DC
Grounding
conductor
protective
earth
to protective
earth terminal
available)
available)

Note
1304
Power Cables

Note
Cable length on delivery is 10 meters (32.81 ft). The actual length of each DC power
power source. Because of safety and cable routing, ADVA Optical Networking
recommends cutting the cables to the proper lengths and assembling the appropriate
connectors.
1305

This section describes the earthing kit for the 9HU shelf, 7HU Shelf, 3HU Shelf variants
and 1HU Shelve types. The earthing kit is delivered with each shelf.
The earthing kit is used to earth the above mentioned shelves to the rack (protective earth
connection). The earthing kit includes the following:
1 protective earthing conductor in compliance with UL1015

conductor material: copper
conductor type: stranded
cross sectional area: 5.26 mm2 (10 AWG)
insulation material: PVC (green/yellow)
terminals: non-insulated M6 ring lugs (RNB5-6)
wire length: 500 mm (1.641 ft.), measured from terminal to terminal
2 cage nuts M6 1.83-2.64 mm (consisting of 2 parts), zinc plated
2 pozidrive screws M6X16
2 lock washers M6 extern
2 plain washers M6
Figure 775: Example of an Earthing Kit for the SH9HU
The earth wire is assembled with two ring lug terminals. One ring lug must be attached to
the 9HU shelf and one ring lug must be attached to the rack or cabinet. The ring lug
terminals are intended for earthing bolt/screws sizes of M4 to M6. One Earthing Kit is
needed per shelf.
Note
1306
If the Earthing Kit cannot be used, a minimum 10AWG ( 2.59 mm,

cross section area of 5.26 mm2) solid or stranded copper wire with green
or green/yellow insulation color as an protective earthing conductor is
required. Shelf earthing must be performed according to local and
national electrical codes.

This section is intended to provide information about standard serial and Ethernet cables
required for the management of the FSP 3000R7. The types of interfaces are important
considerations. Port and cable pinouts must be compatible. The following information is
to assist you in choosing the appropriate cables. Please be aware that modifying or
creating serial and Ethernet cables incorrectly will cause loss of network connectivity.
Make sure that all plugs and cables are in accordance with the relevant standards.
Overview
The following table lists the cable types which are used for a complete rack.
Table 262: Serial and Ethernet Cable Types
Cable Types
Connections
Serial null
modem cable
from an NCU (including the NCU-II, NCU-II-P, NCU-A,

NCU-B or NCU-GDPS) to a management PC
USB cable
from an NCU, NCU-IIor NCU-II-P to a management PC
Ethernet
Straight-through
cable
from an OSCM to a management PC

from an OSCM to an NCU, NCU-II, NCU-II-P, NCU-A,
NCU-B or NCU-GDPS
from CPE to an SFP/GBE/ELECTRICAL/RJ45 of a channel
module
Ethernet
crossover cable
from an NCU, NCU-II, NCU-II-P, NCU-A, NCU-B, or NCUGDPS to a management PC
For details on each cable type, see separate subsections.
The cables listed in Table 262 can be delivered with the equipment but
must be ordered separately.
Note
Serial Null Modem Cable

The easiest way to connect the NCU (including the NCU-II, NCU-II-P, NCU-A, NCU-B
or NCU-GDPS) to the management PC is using a serial null modem cable. The only
problem is the large variety of serial null modem cables available. Use the information in
this subsection to find the proper cable. All null-modem cables are not alike. Many nullmodem cables merely trick the computer into thinking that all the appropriate signals are
present by swapping the transmit and receive data. This behavior means that software
flow control (XON/XOFF), which is less efficient than hardware flow control, must be
used. A serial null-modem cable provides the best possible signaling between machines
and allows the use of hardware (RTS/CTS) flow control.
1307

Table 263 shows how the serial null modem cable must be wired. Note that the transmit
and receive lines are crosslinked. The cable must be assembled with two female SUBD9 connectors.
Table 263: Wiring for Serial Null Modem Cable
Pin Signal
Pin
X-Link
Pin
Pin Signal
CD (Data Carrier Detect)
--------------
DTR
RxD (Receive Data)
--------------
TxD
TxD (Transmit Data)
--------------
RxD
DTR (Data Terminal

Ready)
--------------
DCD
GND (Ground)
--------------
GNGD
DSR (Data Set Ready)
--------------
DTR
RTS (Request To Send)
--------------
CTS
CTS (Clear To Send)
--------------
RTS
RI (Ring Indicator)
--------------
RI
USB Cable
For creating a direct serial connection between a management PC and the NCU, NCU-II
and NCU-II-P a USB cable can be used instead of a serial null modem cable. The USB
cable must be assembled with a 5-pin Mini-USB type A plug on one end and a standard
USB type A plug on the other end. Table 264 and Table 265 show the pinouts of the
plugs.
Table 264: Standard USB Type A Plug Pinout and Cable Color Code
Standard A-Plug
1308
Pin
Function
Description
Wire Color
V BUS
USB power
Red
D-
Negative Data
signal
White
D+
Positive Data
signal
Green
GND
Signal ground
Black
Shell
Shield
Drain

Table 265: Mini-USB Type A Plug Pinout and Cable Color Code
Mini-A USB Plug
Pin
Function
Description
Wire Color
V BUS
USB power
Red
D-
Negative Data
signal
White
D+
Positive Data
signal
Green
ID
Identification
Joined to pin 5
GND
Shield
Black
The standard USB type A plug has 4 contacts and is rectangular in shape.
The contact opening on this plug measures approximately 13.1(W) x 5.5(H) mm. The
Mini-USB type A plug has 5 contacts. Pin 4 is called "ID" and, in the Mini-A plug, is
connected to ground (contacts 4 and 5 joined together on the inside). This Mini-USB plug
is rectangular in shape, with the contact opening measuring approximately 6.8(W) x 3.1
(H) mm.
Data signals are transmitted on a twisted pair of the data cable, labelled D+ and D-.
These collectively use half-duplex differential signaling to combat the effects of
electromagnetic noise on longer lines. D+ and D- usually operate together; they are not
separate simplex connections.
The twisted pair data wires and the drain wire are 28AWG with the non-twisted power
wires being from 28AWG to 20AWG. A USB cable with 20AWG power conductors will
give a maximum usable length of 5 meters; greater lengths require hubs.
Note
A USB connection requires a respective driver in the management PC.

This driver is available on the User Documentation Suite disc or can be
obtained from ADVA Optical Networking.
Ethernet Cables
This subsection provides information about color coding and wiring of Ethernet cables.
The following table lists the cable types that are required for Ethernet connections.
Table 266: Ethernet Cable Types Used by the FSP 3000R7
Cable Category Level
Cable
Type
Frequency
Bandwidth
Uses
Cat 5e* (TIA/EIA-568-B.2)
4-pair
STP
up to 100 MHz
100BASE-TX
10Base-T
Cat 6* (ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.21)
4-pair
STP
up to 250 MHz
1000Base-T
100BASE-TX
10Base-T
* Maximum segment distance = 100 meters (328 ft.)
1309

Category 6 (Cat 6) cables have been designed specifically for Gigabit Ethernet
applications. They deliver improved performance over standard Category 5e (Cat 5e)
cables. ADVA Optical Networking strongly recommends using Cat 6 cable for Gigabit
Ethernet over copper installations. Cat 6 is backward compatible with Cat 5e, Cat 5 and
Cat 3 cable standards. Cat 5e and Cat 6 cables support full duplex communication.
The 8 wires inside the Cat 5e and Cat 6 cables are twisted into 4 pairs of wires. Each pair
has a specific color code. Pair 1 (on pins 4 + 5) is the blue pair, pair 2 (on pins 3 + 6) is
orange, pair 3 (on pins 1 + 2) is green, and pair 4 (on pins 7 + 8) is brown. Odd numbered
pins are always striped, even numbered pins are always solid colored.
Two male RJ-45 plugs (correctly referred to as male 8-position modular connectors)
terminate a Cat 5e and Cat 6 cable.
Cable Wiring
The TIA/EIA-568-A standard specifies two wiring schemes for RJ-45 plugs: 568-A and
568-B. 568-A wiring is identical to 568-B wiring except that pairs 2 and 3 are
interchanged. Choice may depend on which wiring scheme your system uses. Check
your system before you begin to adapt or build your own Ethernet cable.
Note
All male and female RJ-45 connectors on the installation concerning

must be wired for the same wiring scheme. A mix of 568-A and 568-B
wiring is not allowed.
Follow one of the wiring schemes but stay consistent. When used as a patch cable, both
ends must be the same. Otherwise it will not work.
Table 267 describes the color-coding and the pin assignments to the pairs of an Ethernet
cable for both 568A and 568B wiring scheme.
Table 267: RJ-45 Connector Wiring Schemes
RJ-45 Plug
Pinouts
Pin#
568A
Pair
568B
Pair
Wire*
568A Wire
Color
568B Wire
Color
Ring
Blue solid
Blue solid
Tip
White/blue
stripe
White/blue
stripe
Tip
White/orange
stripe
White/green
stripe
Ring
Orange solid
Green solid
Tip
White/green
stripe
White/orange
stripe
Ring
Green solid
Orange solid
Tip
White/brown
stripe
White/brown
stripe
Ring
Brown solid
Brown solid
5
3
6
1
2
7
8
1310

Table 267: RJ-45 Connector Wiring Schemes
RJ-45 Plug
Pinouts
Pin#
568A
Pair
568B
Pair
Wire*
568A Wire
Color
568B Wire
Color
0 *Tip (T) refers to the positive (+) side, and ring (R) refers to the negative side of the
circuit.
Wires referred to as tip transmit and receive data. Wires called ring provide earthing.
There is no specified color coding for cables under 10Base-T, 100BASE-TX and
1000BASE-T. Color coding for wiring under the EIA/TIA-568B standard is given for use
with striped twisted pair. Whether you are using striped twisted pair or solid color twisted
pair, follow the appropriate wiring specifications listed in Table 268 and Table 271.
Note
It is important that wiring for Ethernet cables is done using twisted pairs.
For 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX pins 1 and 2 should be wired using one
twisted pair and pins 3 and 6 should be wired using a second twisted
pair. A cable for 1000Base-T uses all four wire pairs available in a Cat 6
cable. Make sure you count the pins in the right order. Use a cable tester
to verify the proper connectivity of the cable.
Identifying Pin Numbering

Figure 776 shows the pin numbering of a male RJ-45 plug with the pins on the bottom and
the tab on the top. In this position, pin 1 is always the leftmost and pin 8 is the rightmost.
Figure 776: Pin Positioning of a Male RJ-45 Plug
8
There are RJ-45 plugs for both braided/stranded wires and solid wires.
Choosing the wrong one will make difficulties when wiring the cable.
Note
Straight-Through Ethernet Cable Pinouts

Standard straight-through Ethernet cables are used in a star-based setup to connect
systems to a hub. A straight-through cable (STP Cat-6) is also used when connecting a
channel module with a SFP/GBE/ELECTRICAL/RJ45 to the CPE.
A straight-through Ethernet cable has identical wiring in both ends. Both cable ends
follow either 568A or 568B termination. That is, each pin of the plug on one end is
connected to the corresponding pin of the plug on the other end. Table 268 describes the
wiring for a straight-through 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX Ethernet cable.
1311

Table 268: Example of a 10Base-T/100Base-TX Straight-Through Cable Pinout
according to 568B
Cable End 1
Cable End 2
Striped Color
RJ45*
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Signal
RJ45*
Striped Color
White/Orange
Pin 1
TX+ (Data Transmit+) ----------- TX+
Pin 1
White/Orange
Orange
Pin 2
TX- (Data Transmit-) ------------ TX-
Pin 2
Orange
White/Green
Pin 3
RX+ (Data Receive+) ------------ RX+
Pin 3
White/Green
Blue
Pin 4
Not used by 10BASET/100BASE-TX
Pin 4
Blue
White/Blue
Pin 5
Pin 5
White/Blue
Green
Pin 6
RX- (Data Receive-) ------------ RX-
Pin 6
Green
White/Brown
Pin 7
Pin 7
White/Brown
Brown
Pin 8
Pin 8
Brown
0 * Incorrectly connected unused wires generate noise on long lengths.
1000BASE-T uses all four cable pairs for simultaneous transmission in both directions. A
1000Base-T straight-through cable is wired as shown in Table 268.
Table 269: Example of a 1000Base-T Straight-Through Cable Pinout according
to 568B
Cable End 1
1312
Cable End 2
Striped Color
RJ45*
1000BASE-T Signal
RJ45*
Striped Color
White/Orange
Pin 1
BI_DA+ (Bi-directional Data

pair +A) ------------ BI_DA+
Pin 1
White/Orange
Orange
Pin 2
BI_DA- (Bi-directional Data

pair -A) ------------- BI_DA-
Pin 2
Orange
White/Green
Pin 3
BI_DB+ (Bi-directional Data

pair +B) ------------ BI_DB+
Pin 3
White/Green
Blue
Pin 4
BI_DC+ (Bi-directional Data

pair +C) ----------- BI_DC+
Pin 4
Blue

Table 269: Example of a 1000Base-T Straight-Through Cable Pinout according
to 568B
Cable End 1
Cable End 2
Striped Color
RJ45*
1000BASE-T Signal
RJ45*
Striped Color
White/Blue
Pin 5
BI_DC- (Bi-directional Data

pair -C) ------------ BI_DC-
Pin 5
White/Blue
Green
Pin 6
BI_DB- (Bi-directional Data

pair -B) ------------ BI_DB-
Pin 6
Green
White/Brown
Pin 7
BI_DD+ (Bi-directional Data

pair +D) ----------- BI_DD+
Pin 7
White/Brown
Brown
Pin 8
BI_DD- (Bi-directional Data

pair -D) ------------ BI_DD-
Pin 8
Brown
Crossover Ethernet Cable

Crossover Ethernet cables are normally used to directly connect two devices of the same
type to each other without using a hub, or can be used to cascade two hubs without using
an uplink port. Sometimes crossover cables are also used for connecting stacked
10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX hubs.
A crossover cable has different wiring in both ends. A 100Base-TX Crossover Cable
swaps pairs 2 and 3 (not the wires within each pair), and a GbE crossover cable crosses
all four pairs. One cable end follows 568A and the other 568B. That is, the send and
receive wires are crossed.
Table 270 describes the wiring for the crossover 10Base-T and 100Base-TX Ethernet
cable.
Table 270: Example of a 10Base-T/100Base-TX Crossover Cable Pinout
according to 568B
Cable End 1
Striped Color
RJ45*
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Signal
RJ45*
Striped Color
White/Orange
Pin 1
TX+ (Data Transmit+) ----------- RX+
Pin 3
White/Orange
Orange
Pin 2
TX- (Data Transmit-) ------------RX-
Pin 6
Orange
White/Green
Pin 3
RX+ (Data Receive+) ------------ RX+
Pin 1
White/Green
Blue
Pin 4
Pin 4
White/Brown
1313

Table 270: Example of a 10Base-T/100Base-TX Crossover Cable Pinout
according to 568B
Cable End 1
Striped Color
RJ45*
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Signal
RJ45*
Striped Color
White/Blue
Pin 5
Pin 5
Brown
Green
Pin 6
RX- (Data Receive-) -------------TX-
Pin 2
Green
White/Brown
Pin 7
Pin 7
Blue
Brown
Pin 8
Pin 8
White/Blue
1000BASE-T uses all four cable pairs for simultaneous transmission in both directions. A
1000Base-T crossover cable is wired as shown in Table 271.
Table 271: Example of a 1000Base-T Crossover Cable Pinout according to 568B
Cable End 1
Striped Color
RJ45*
1000BASE-T Signal
RJ45*
Striped Color
White/Orange
Pin 1
BI_DA+ ------------- BI_DB+
Pin 3
White/Orange
Orange
Pin 2
BI_DA+ -------------- BI_DB-
Pin 6
Orange
White/Green
Pin 3
BI_DB+ -------------- BI_DA+
Pin 1
White/Green
Blue
Pin 4
BI_DC+ -------------- BI_DC+
Pin 7
Blue
White/Blue
Pin 5
BI_DC- -------------- BI_DC-
Pin 8
White/Blue
Green
Pin 6
BI_DB- -------------- BI_DA+
Pin 2
Green
White/Brown
Pin 7
BI_DD+ -------------- BI_DD+
Pin 4
White/Brown
Brown
Pin 8
BI_DD- -------------- BI_DD-
Pin 5
Brown
1314

The IEEE 1394 interface cable (IC300/PSCU/IEEE1394) is a standard FireWire 400
cable. It is used for connecting a 40-port MUX/DMX channel splitter/combiner 2HU shelf
and the 96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125 to the PSCU or CEM/9HUwhere the sockets of the
interconnect ports are type IEEE1394.
The IEEE 1394 interface cable is 3 meters (9.84 feet) in length. The ends of this six-wire
cable are assembled with 6-pin male IEEE-1394 connector plugs. The IEEE 1394
interface cable is delivered with each type of a 40-port MUX/DMX channel
splitter/combiner 2HU shelf and the 96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125 shelf.
Note
Although a FireWire 400 cable is used for interconnecting the above

mentioned equipment, the FireWire itself is not supported (neither the
protocol nor pinout).

The telemetry interface cable is used to connect the UTM or CEM/9HU to device alarm
inputs and to external alarm devices. This cable is not provided by ADVA Optical
Networking. Therefore the customer has to build his own cable according to the network
requirements.
To build such a cable an appropriate flexible electrical cable (max. 44 conductors) with an
adequate wire gage and a female HD SUB-D44 Connector are needed.
The following table lists the signal assignments of the connector pins as viewed facing
the connector housing.
1315

Table 272: Male HD SUB-D44 Connector Pinout
31
16
44 30
Pin Number
Relay No.
Signal
31, 16, 1
Relay 1
32, 17, 2
Relay 2
33, 18, 3
Relay 3
34, 19, 4
Relay 4
15
5, 20
Input 1 (Ground 1)
6, 21
Input 2 (Ground 2)
7, 22
Input 3 (Ground 3)
8, 23
Input 4 (Ground 4)
9, 24
Input 5 (Ground 5)
10, 25
Input 6 (Ground 6)
11, 26
Input 7 (Ground 7)
12, 27
Input 8 (Ground 8)
13, 28
Input 9 (Ground 9)
14, 29
15, 30
44, 43
42, 41
40, 39
38, 37
36, 35
All pins belonging to one relay form a triple of pins. The remaining pins have been paired
with a return signal in such a way that one pair is used to connect a switch.
For supplemental information, refer to ChapterA: Management and Switch Modules,
Telemetry Port on p.621. If you encounter any technical difficulties, please contact
ADVA Optical Networkings Technical Support.
1316
IC1/HBNCP/BNCJ/100
IC1/HBNCP/BNCJ/100
The IC1/HBNCP/BNCJ/100 is an HD-BNC plug to BNC jack coaxial interconnect cable.
It is specifically designed to adapt the HD-BNC connectors of the coaxial video SFP
modules to the standard BNC connectors of customer equipment.
The IC1/HBNCP/BNCJ/100 cable consists of a 23 AWG solid bare copper conductor
symmetrically surrounded by a layer of gas-injected foam HDPE insulation covered with
Duofoil plus tinned copper braid shield. The cable jacket is made of PVC.
This cable offers throughput for serial digital video signals and digital audio signals. It can
handle data rates up to 3 Gbit/s, while supporting the broadcast industrys SMPTE
standards.
Figure 777 illustrates the cable assembly. Table 273 lists the most important
specifications of the coaxial interconnect cable.
Figure 777: IC1/HBNCP/BNCJ/100 Cable Assembly
Table 273: IC1/HBNCP/BNCJ/100 Cable Specifications

Electrical Characteristics
Coaxial cable type
Belden 1855A
Connector A
HD-BNC crimp plug, male
Connector B
BNC true 75-Ohm crimp jack, male
Connector body style
straight plugs
Nominal impedance
75 Ohms
Maximum frequency
4.5 GHz
Mechanical Characteristics
Operating Temperature Range
-30C to +75C
UL Temperature Rating
75C
Length L
100 cm (39.4 inches)
Weight (including Connectors)
40 g (0.088 lbs)
Bulk Cable Weight
25.299 Kg/Km
Max. Recommended Pulling Tension
160.135 N
Min. Bend Radius (Install)/Minor Axis
38.100 mm
Outer cable diameter
4.039 mm
1317
IC1/HBNCP/BNCJ/100
The IC1/HBNCP/BNCJ/100 coaxial interconnect cable can be delivered

with the equipment, but it has to be ordered separately.
Note
1318
Appendix B
Fiber-Optic Accessories
This appendix provides information about the FSP 3000R7 fiber-optic accessories. It
includes the following sections:
SCU-Intercom-Kit on p.1320 which describes the equipment used for interconnecting
Optical Fiber Bundles on p.1322 which describes the bundles of fibers used for
connecting the 40-port MUX/DMX Channel Splitter and Combiner Shelves.
Breakout Cables for SR4 and SR10 Clients on p.1324 which describes the fiber cables
used for connecting SR4 clients to 100G metro muxponders.
1319
SCU-Intercom-Kit
SCU-Intercom-Kit
ADVA Optical Networking provides an SCU-Intercom-Kit to interconnect SCU (Shelf
Control Unit) modules.
Each shelf requires an SCU-Intercom-Kit.
Note
The SCU-Intercom-Kit includes:
four SFP Transceiver (SFP/2G1/850I/MM/LC or SFP/2G5U/1310S/SM/LC)
one duplex patch cable with LC connector (J/MM62/LC/DUP/0090/RED) with a

length of 90 cm (2.953 ft.)
one duplex patch cable with LC connector (J/MM62/LC/DUP/0500/RED) with a

length of 5.0 m (16.405 ft.)
The patch cables are assembled with duplex LC multi-mode connectors on both ends.
See Figure 778.
Figure 778: Example of an SCU-Intercom-Kit
Four red markers identify the connection from the transmitter to the receiver of the SCU.
One marker is located behind the both connectors and two markers are slipped on the
cables. See Figure 779.
1320
SCU-Intercom-Kit
Figure 779: Connecting Patch Cables to the SCU
Two transceivers and the short patch cable (J/MM62/LC/DUP/0090/RED) have to be

used to interconnect two SCU modules.
Note
The SCU-Intercom-Kit can be delivered with the equipment, but you

have to order it separately. For ordering, contact ADVA Optical
Networking.
1321

ADVA Optical Networkings optical fiber bundles feature an outer PVC jacket which
surrounds and protects a specific number of individually jacketed jumpers within. Two
variants of optical fiber bundles are available:
J/SM/LC/OCT/0800
J/SM/LC/HEX/0800
The optical fiber bundles are pre-connectorized. They are designed to be used for making
multiple fiber connections on a 40-port MUX/DMX Channel Splitter and Combiner Shelf.
The design of the bundles enables the individual routing of individual fibers for
termination.
To avoid any contamination on the end face of the ferrules make sure
that the connectors are covered with protective caps when not in use.
Note
The optical fiber bundles can be delivered with the equipment, but you
Networking.
J/SM/LC/OCT/0800
The J/SM/LC/OCT/0800 is a flexible assembly, in which eight single-mode fiber optic
jumpers are bundled together within the same jacket. Each jumper is equipped with
flexible bend protection and non-angled duplex LC connectors on both ends. The jumpers
having each a 2.0 mm nominal diameter are numbered and color coded (yellow meaning
single-mode) for easy identification.
The J/SM/LC/OCT/0800 cable is 8 m (26.25 ft.) long. See Figure 780 for an example.
Figure 780: Example of a J/SM/LC/OCT/0800 Optical Fiber Bundle
1322
J/SM/LC/HEX/0800
The J/SM/LC/HEX/0800 is a flexible assembly, in which 16 single-mode fiber optic
jumpers are bundled together within the same jacket. Each jumper is equipped with
flexible bend protection and non-angled duplex LC connectors on both ends. The jumpers
having each a 2.0 mm nominal diameter are numbered and color coded (yellow meaning
single-mode) for easy identification.
The J/SM/LC/HEX/0800 cable is 8 m (314.96 in.) long. See Figure 781 for an example.
Figure 781: Example of a J/SM/LC/HEX/0800 Optical Fiber Bundle
1323

Breakout cables are used for connecting SR4/SR10 clients to 100G muxponders.
For SR4 clients, these variants are used:
J/MM50/MPO12-LC08/0300
J/MM50/MPO12-LC08/1000
For SR10 clients, these variants are used:
J/MM50/MPO24-LC20/0300
J/MM50/MPO24-LC20/1000
J/MM50/MPO12-LC08/0300
The J/MM50/MPO12-LC08/0300 cable connects an SR4 transceiver operating at
40Gbps to four 10G transceiver SFP+ client interfaces of a 100G muxponder, enabling
transparent transmission of 40G traffic over 10G channels. It comprises of 12 integrated
multi-mode fibers, out of which four are used for the transmit direction and four for the
receive direction. This cable is terminated with an MPO connector at one end and four
duplex LC connectors at the other. The MPO connector interfaces with the SR4 client,
while the four duplex LC connectors interface with the SFP+ clients of a 100G
muxponder.
The J/MM50/MPO12-LC08/0300 cable is 3 m (9.84 ft) long.
J/MM50/MPO12-LC08/1000
40Gbps to four 10G transceiver SFP+ client interfaces of a 100G muxponder, enabling
multi-mode fibers, out of which four are used for the transmit direction and four are used
for the receive direction. This cable is terminated with an MPO connector at one end and
four duplex LC connectors at the other. The MPO connector interfaces with the SR4
client, while the four duplex LC connectors interface with the SFP+ clients of a 100G
muxponder.
J/MM50/MPO24-LC20/0300
100Gbps to ten 10G transceiver SFP+ client interfaces of a 100G muxponder, enabling
multi-mode fibers, out of which ten are used for the transmit direction and ten for the
receive direction. This cable is terminated with an MPO connector at one end and ten
while the ten duplex LC connectors interface with the SFP+ clients of a 100G
muxponder.
1324
J/MM50/MPO24-LC20/1000
100Gbps to ten 10G transceiver SFP+ client interfaces of a 100G muxponder, enabling
multi-mode fibers, out of which ten are used for the transmit direction and ten are used for
the receive direction. This cable is terminated with an MPO connector at one end and ten
while the ten duplex LC connectors interface with the SFP+ clients of a 100G
muxponder.
1325

The following patch cords are used for connecting SR10 client interfaces between two
100G modules:
l
J/MM50/MPO24/0310
J/MM50/MPO24/1000
J/MM50/MPO24/0310
The J/MM50/MPO24/0310 is a patch cord equipped with two MPO connectors, one at
each end. It comprises of 24 integrated multi-mode fibers, out of which ten are used for
the transmit direction and ten for the receive direction. The J/MM50/MPO24 /0310 is
3.10 m (10.171 ft) long.
To connect SR10 client interfaces between two modules the J/MM50/MPO24/0310 has
to be used. Transparent transmission of 100GbE and OTU4 traffic is supported between
the connected modules.
J/MM50/MPO24/1000
The J/MM50/MPO24/1000 is a patch cord equipped with two MPO connectors, one at
each end. It comprises of 24 integrated multi-mode fibers, out of which ten are used for
the transmit direction and ten for the receive direction. The J/MM50/MPO24/1000 is 10 m
(32.81 ft) long.
To connect SR10 client interfaces between two modules the J/MM50/MPO24/1000 has
to be used. Transparent transmission of 100GbE and OTU4 traffic is supported between
the connected modules.
1326
Equipment Types of FSP 3000R7

Hardware Components
This appendix provides the official names of the FSP 3000R7 hardware components and
their equipment type names used in the management software. The components are
grouped according to their type and function within the system. The official names are
listed in alphabetical order. The meaning of the abbreviations (official names of the
components) can be found in Acronyms and Abbreviations.
Official Names of the HW Components
Type Equipment
Names
GUI Names of Type Equipment
FMT/1HU
SH1HU/PASSIVE
SH1HU-P
SH1HU/PASSIVE
SH1HU/PASSIVE/FT
SH1HU-P
SH1HU/PASSIVE
SH1HU-F/2DC
SH1HU-DC
SH1HU-DC
SH1HU-HP/2DC
SH1HU-DC
SH1HU-DC
SH1HU-HP/E-TEMP/2DC
SH1HU-DC-ETEMP
SH1HU-HP/E-TEMP/2DC
SH1HU-R
SH1HU
SH1HU-R
SH1HU-R/PF
SH1HUPF
SH1HU-R/PF
SH7HU
SH7HU
SH7HU
SH7HU-R
SH7HU
SH7HU
SH9HU
SH9HU
SH9HU
OTDR/8-OTH/1HU/AC
OTDR8OTH1HU-AC
OTDR8OTH1HU-AC
OTDR/THC/2HU/AC
OTDRTHC2HU-AC
OTDRTHC2HU-AC
PSU/1HU-R-AC
PSU1HU-AC
PSU/1HU-AC
PSU/1HU-R-AC-200
PSU1HU-AC
PSU/1HU-AC
PSU/1HU-R-DC-200
PSU1HU-DC
PSU/1HU-DC
PSU/7HU-AC
PSU7HU-AC
PSU7HU-AC
PSU/7HU-AC-800
PSU7HU-AC
PSU/7HU-AC
Shelves
Power Supplies
1327
Type Equipment
Names
PSU/7HU-DC-800
PSU7HU-DC
PSU/7HU-DC
PSU/7HU-AC-HP
PSU7HU-AC
PSU/7HU-AC
PSU/7HU-AC-800
PSU7HU-AC
PSU7HU-AC
PSU/7HU-DC
PSU7HU-DC
PSU/7HU-DC
PSU/7HU-DC-HP
PSU7HU-DC
PSU/7HU-DC
PSU/7HU-R-DC
PSU7HU-DC
PSU/7HU-DC
PSU/7HU-R-DC-HP
PSU7HU-DC
PSU/7HU-DC
PSU/9HU-AC
PSU9HU-AC
PSU/9HU-AC
PSU/9HU-DC
PSU9HU-DC
PSU/9HU-DC
FAN/Plug-In for a 7HU shelf
FCU7HU
FAN/Plug-In
FAN/9HU
FAN9HU
FAN/9HU
10TCC10GT-D
10TCC-PCTN-4GU+10G-x#D
10TCC10GT-D
10TCC10GT-D
10TCCS10GT-D
10TCC-PCTN-4GUS+10G-x#D
10TCCS10GT-D
10TCCS10GT-D
10TCC100G
10TCC100GTC-D
10TCC-PCN-2G7US+10G
10TCC10G
10TCC-PCN-2G7US+10G
10TCC-PCN-3GSDI+10G
10TCCSDI10G
10TCC-PCN-3GSDI+10G
10WXC-PCN-10G
10WXC10G
10WXC-PCN-10G
2TWCC-PCN-2G7U
2TWCC2G7
2TWCC-PCN-2G7U
4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5
4TCC2G5
4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5
4TCC40GT-D
4TCC-PCTN-10G+40G-x#D
4TCC10GT-D
4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-x#D
4TCC10GT-D
4TCC10GT-D
Fan Unit
1328
Type Equipment
Names
WCC-PC1N-2G7U
WCC2G7-1N
WCC-PC1N-2G7U
WCC-PCTN-10G-LN#DC
WCC10GT-D
WCC-PCTN-10G-x#D
WCC-PCTN-10G-V#DC
WCC10GT-D
WCC-PCTN-10G-x#D
WCC-PCN-100G
WCC-PCN-100G
WCC-PCN-100G
WCC-PCTN-100G
WCC100GT-D
WCC-PCTN-100GA
WCC-PCTN-100GB
WCC100G
WCC-PCTN-100GB
WCC-TN-40G-L#DC
(HW Rev. 2.00 and 2.10)
WCC40GT-D
WCC-TN-40G-x#D
2WCC-PCN-10G
2WCC10G
2WCC-PCN-10G
2PCA-PCN-10G
2PCA10G
2PCA-PCN-10G
10PCA-PCN-1G3-10G
10PCA10G
10PCA-PCN-1G3+10G
2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5
2TCA2G5
2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5
2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5
2TCA2G5S
2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5
4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Cxxxx1
4TCA1G3-C
4TCA-LS+1G3-x#C
4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx1
4TCA1G3-D
4TCA-LS+1G3-x#D
4TCA-PCN-4GU+4G
4TCA4G
4TCA-PCN-4GU+4G
4TCA-PCN-4GUS+4G
4TCA4GUS
4TCA-PCN-4GUS+4G
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Cxxxx1
8TCA10G-C
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-x#C
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx1
8TCA10G-D
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-x#D
2WCA-PCN-10G
2WCA10G
2WCA-PCN-10G
5WCA-PCN-16GU
5WCA16G
5WCA-PCN-16GU
WCA-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx1
WCA10G-C
WCA-PC-10G-x#C
WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx1
WCA10G-D
WCA-PC-10G-x#D
WCA-PCN-2G5U1
WCA2G5
WCA-PCN-2G5U
WCE-PCN-100G
WCE100G
WCE-PCN-100G
WCE-PCN-100GB
WCE100GB
WCE-PCN-100GB
8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx1
8TCE2G5-D
8TCE-ESCON+2G5-x#D
8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Cxxxx1
8TCE2G5-C
8TCE-ESCON+2G5-x#C
1329
Type Equipment
Names
8TCE-GLINK+2G5-V#Dxx1
8TCEGL2G5-D
8TCE-GLINK+2G5-x#D
8TCE-GLINK+2G5-V#Cxxxx1
8TCEGL2G5-C
8TCE-GLINK+2G5-x#C
5TCE10GT-D
5TCE-PCTN-10GU+10G-x#D
5TCE10GT-D
5TCE10GT-D
5TCES10GT-D
5TCE-PCTN-8GU+10GS-x#D
5TCES10GT-D
5TCE-PCTN-8GU+10GS-x#D
4WCE-PCN-16GFC
4WCE16G
4WCE-PCN-16G
5TCES10GTAES-D
5TCE-PCTN-8GU+AES10GS-x#D
5TCES10GTAES-D
5TCE-PCTN-8GU+AES10GS-x#D
5TCE10GTAES-D
5TCE10GTAES-D
5TCE10GTAES-D
5TCE-PCN-8GU+10GS
5TCES10G
5TCE-PCN-8GU+10GS
5TCES10GAES
5TCE-PCN-10GU+10G
5TCE10G
5TCE-PCN-10GU+10G
5TCE10GAES
10TCE100G-GF
10TCE-PCN-10GU+100G-GF
10TCE-PCN-10G+100G
10TCE100G
10TCE-PCN-10GU+100G
10TCE100GAES
10TCE-PCN-16GU+100G
10TCE100GB
10TCE-PCN-16GU+100G
SFP/2G1/850I/MM/LC
SFP-G
SFP/x/G
SFP/2G5U/1310L/SM/LC
SFP-G
SFP/x/G
SFP/2G5U/1310S/SM/LC
SFP-G
SFP/x/G
SFP/2G5U/CxxxxL/SM/LC
SFP-C
SFP/x/C
SFP-C
SFP/x/C
SFP/2G5U/#xxxxxU/SM/LC#Dxx
SFP-D
SFP/x/D
SFP/2G5U/#xxxxxV/SM/LC#Dxx
SFP-D
SFP/x/D
SFP/3GU/BCxxxxL/SM/LC/TIN
SFP-B-C
SFP-B/x/C
1330
Type Equipment
Names
SFP/3GSDI/xxxxxV/SM/LC
SFP-D
SFP/x/D
SFP-2TX-G
SFP-2TX/x/G
SFP-2RX-G
SFP-2RX/x/G
SFP-2TX-E
SFP-2TX/x/E
SFP-2RX-E
SFP-2RX/x/E
SFP/3GSDI/ELECTRICALl/DIN
SFP-E
SFP/x/E
SFP-E
SFP/x/E
SFP/4GU/1310S/SM/LC
SFP-G
SFP/x/G
SFP/4GU/850I/MM/LC
SFP-G
SFP/x/G
SFP/4GU/CxxxxL/SM/LC
SFP-C
SFP/x/C
SFP/4GU/CxxxxV/SM/LC
SFP-C
SFP/x/C
SFP/4GU/#xxxxxV/SM/LC#Dxx
SFP-D
SFP/x/D
SFP/CL/1310I/SM/LC
SFP-G
SFP/x/G
SFP/FE/C1490U/SM/LC
SFP-C
SFP/x/C
SFP/FE/C1490V/SM/LC
SFP-C
SFP/x/C
SFP/FE/C1510U/SM/LC
SFP-C
SFP/x/C
SFP/FE/C1510V/SM/LC
SFP-C
SFP/x/C
SFP-D
SFP/x/D
SFP/FE/Dxxxxx.xxV/SM/LC
SFP-D
SFP/x/D
SFP-E
SFP/x/E
SFP/GBE/1310S/SM/LC/TIN
SFP-G
SFP/x/G
SFP/GBE/1310L/SM/LC/TIN
SFP-G
SFP/x/G
SFP/GBE/1550V/SM/LC/TIN
SFP-G
SFP/x/G
SFP/GBE/850I/MM/LC/TIN
SFP-G
SFP/x/G
SFP/GBE/B1310L/SM/LC
SFP-B-G
SFP-B/x/G
SFP/GBE/B1490L/SM/LC
SFP-B-G
SFP-B/x/G
SFP/GBE/B1310S/SM/LC
SFP-B-G
SFP-B/x/G
SFP/GBE/B1490S/SM/LC
SFP-B-G
SFP-B/x/G
SFP/HS/1310S/SM/LC
SFP-G
SFP/x/G
SFP-OJDE/GBE/1310S/SM/LC
SFP-OD-G
SFP-OJDE/x/G
1331
Type Equipment
Names
SFP-OJDE/GBE/CxxxxV/SM/LC
SFP-OD-C
SFP-OJDE/x/C
SFP+CDR/10GU/1550L/SM/LC
SFP-CDR-G
SFP-CDR/x/G
SFP-G
SFP/x/G
SFP+/10G/1310S/SM/LC
SFP-G
SFP/x/G
SFP+CDR/11G/1310S/SM/LC
SFP-CDR-G
SFP-CDR/x/G
SFP+/16GFC/1310S/SM/LC
SFP-G
SFP/x/G
SFP+/8GU/850I/MM/LC
SFP-G
SFP/x/G
SFP+/10G/850I/MM/LC
SFP-G
SFP/x/G
SFP+/11GU/DCTV/SM/LC
SFPT-D
SFP/xT/D
SFP+/11GU/#19xxxL50/SM/LC
SFP-D
SFP/x/D
SFP+/11GU/CxxxxL/SM/LC
SFP-C
SFP/x/C
SFP-G
SFP/x/G
SFP+/11GU/850I/MM/LC
SFP-G
SFP/x/G
SFP+/16GFC/#19xxxL50/SM/LC
SFP-D
SFP/x/D
SFP+CDR/11GU/CxxxxL/SM/LC
SFP-CDR-C
SFP-CDR/x/C
SFP+CDR/11GU/CxxxxS/SM/LC
SFP-CDR-C
SFP-CDR/x/C
SFP+CDR/11GU/#19xxxV/SM/LC
SFP-CDR-D
SFP-CDR/x/D
SFP+CDR/10G/850I/SM/LC
SFP-CDR-G
SFP-CDR/x/G
SFP+/16GFC/850I/MM/LC
SFP-G
SFP/x/G
XFP/10G/1310S/SM/LC
XFP-G
XFP/x/G
XFP/10G/1550L/SM/LC
XFP-G
XFP/x/G
XFP/10G/850I/MM/LC
XFP-G
XFP/x/G
XFP/10G-2R/1310S/SM/LC
XFP-G
XFP/x/G
XFP/10G-2R/850I/MM/LC
XFP-G
XFP/x/G
XFP/11G/1310S/SM/LC
XFP-G
XFP/x/G
XFP/11G/1550L/SM/LC
XFP-G
XFP/x/G
XFP/11G/CxxxxL/SM/LC
XFP-C
XFP/x/C
XFP/11G/CxxxxV/SM/LC
XFP-C
XFP/x/C
XFP/11G/#xxxxxV/SM/LC#Dxx
XFP-D
XFP/x/D
XFP/11G/DCTV/SM/LC
XFPT-D
XFP/xT/D
1332
Type Equipment
Names
XFP/11G/DCTLNR/SM/LC
XFPTLN-D
XFP/LNT/D
XFP/11G/DCTLN/SM/LC
XFPTLN-D
XFP/LNT/D
XFP/OTN11G/#19xxxV/SM/LC
XFP-OTN-D
XFP/OTN/x/D
XFP/16GFC/#xxxxxV/SM/LC#Dxx
XFP-D
XFP/x/D
CFP/112G/LR4/SM/LC
CFP-4-G
CFP/112G/LR4/SM/LC
CFP-10-G
CFP/112G/#DCTC/SM/LC
CFPT-CD
CFP/112G/DCTC
CFP/4x28G/#19xxx-#19xxxL/SM/LC
4CFP-D
4CFP/xT/D
CFP/4x28G/#19xxx-#19xxxLR/SM/LC
4CFP-D
4CFP/x/D
CFP/4x28G/#DCTL/SM/LC
4CFP-D
4CFP/xT/D
2OSCM-V#1630
2OSCM
2OSCM
CEM/9HU
CEM9HU
CEM/9HU
NCU
NCU2E
NCU
NCU-A
NCU
NCU-X
NCU-B
NCU
NCU-X
NCU-GDPS
NCU
NCU-X
NCU-II
NCU-II
NCU-II
NCU-II-P
NCU-II-P
NCU-II-P
OSCM-PN
OSCMPN
OSCM-PN
OSCM-V#1630
OSCM
OSCM
PSCU
PSCU
PSCU
SCU
SCU
SCU
SCU-S
SCU-S
SCU-S
SCU-II
SCU-II
SCU-II
UTM
UTM
UTM
RSM-OLM#16301
RSM-OLM
RSM-OLM
RSM-SF#13101
RSM-SF
RSM-SF
RSM-SF#15101
RSM-SF
RSM-SF
Management and Supervision Modules
Optical Protection Switch Modules
1333
Type Equipment
Names
VSM
VSM
VSM
4-OPCM
4OPCM
4-OPCM
ROADM-C40/40/OPM-3HU-2DC
EROADM-DC
ROADM-2DC
4ROADM-C96/0/OPM
4ROADM-C96
4ROADM-C96
8ROADM-C40/0/OPM
8ROADM-C40
8ROADM-C40
8ROADM-C80/0/OPM
8ROADM-C80
8ROADM-C80
9ROADM-C96/0/OPM
9ROADM-C96
9ROADM-C96
ROADM-C80/0/OPM
ROADM
ROADM
4ROADM-E-C96/0/OPM
4ROADM-E-C96
4ROADM-E-C96
CCM-C40/8
8CCM-C40
CCM-C40/8
CCM-C80/8
8CCM-C80
CCM-C80/8
CCM-C96/9
9CCM-C96
CCM-C96/9
16CSM-#D01-#D32-SFx
16CSM-SF-D
16CSM-#D-SF
16CSM-#D33-#D64-SFx
16CSM-SF-D
16CSM-#D-SF
1CSM+#Cxxxx
1CSMU-C
1CSM+#C
1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W
1CSMU-EW-C
1CSM+#Cx-E/W
1CSM+#G1310
1CSMU-G
1CSM+#G
1CSM/P+#Cxxxx
1CSM/P+#Cxxxx-E/W
1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy
1GSMU-D
1GSM+#D
1PM/MM
1PM
1PM
1PM/SM
1PM
1PM
2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610
2ABSM-C
2ABSM
2BSM-#D01-#D32
2BSM-D
2BSM-#D
2BSM/P-#C1270-#C1610-DM
2CLSM-#D01-#D64
2CLSM-D
2CLSM
2CLSM-#D01-#D64-SFx
2CLSM-SF-D
2CLSM-#D-SF
2CSMU-EW-C
2CSM+#C-E/W
1334
Type Equipment
Names
8CSM-#19xxx-#19yyy
8CSM-D
8CSM-#D
2PM/MM-OM3
2PM
2PM
2PM/MM
2PM
2PM
2PM/SM
2PM
2PM
J-Y/MM62/LC/0310
Y_MM_LC
Y_MM_LC
J-Y/MM62/LC/1000
Y_MM_LC
Y_MM_LC
J-Y/MM50/LC/0310
Y_MM_LC
Y_MM_LC
3BSM-#G1310-#C1610
3BSM-C
3BSM-#C
3BSM-#G1310-#C1610-E/W
3BSM-EW-C
3BSM-#Cx-E/W
40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
40CSM-D
40CSM
40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy2
40CSM2HU-D
40CSM/2HU-#D
40CSM/2HU-#19590-#192002
40CSM2HU-D
40CSM/2HU-#D
40CSM/2HU-#19595-#192052
40CSM2HU-D
40CSM/2HU-#D
40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#192002
40CSM2HU-D
40CSM/2HU-#D
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19xxx#19yyy2
40CSM2HU-D
40CSM/2HU-#D
40CSM/P-2HU-#19590-#19200-DM
96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125
96CSM-4HU-D
96CSM/4HU-#D
1CSM+#19xxx
1CSMU-D
1CSM+#D
1CSM+#19xxx-E/W
1CSMU-EW-D
1CSM+#Dx-E/W
4CSM+#19xxx-#19yyy
4CSMU-D
4CSM+#D
4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy
4CSM-C
4CSM-#C
4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
4CSM-D
4CSM-#D
4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy
4CSMU-D
4CSM+#D
4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
4GSM-D
4GSM-#D
5GSM-#19590-#19200
5GSM-D
5GSM-#D
5GSM/P-#19590-#19200-DM
8CSM/P-#C1270-#C1450
8CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-DM
8CSM/P+#C1470-#C1610-DM
1335
Type Equipment
Names
8CSM+#C1470-#C1610
8CSMU-C
8CSM+#C
8GSM-#D01-#D32
8GSM-D
8GSM-#D
ILM50-#DC
ILM
ILM-#D
OSFM+#1490-SFA
OSFM-SF
OSFM-SF
OSFM+#1510
OSFM
OSFM
OSFM+#1510-SFB
OSFM-SF
OSFM-SF
OSFM+#1630
OSFM
OSFM
2-OTFM+#1650
2-OTFM
2-OTFM
PSM-95/5
PSM
PSM
2PSM-95/5
2PSM
2PSM
5PSM
5PSM
5PSM
8PSM
8PSM
8PSM
EDFA-C-D17-GC
EDFA-DGC
EDFA-DGC
EDFA-C-D20-GC
EDFA-DGC
EDFA-DGC
EDFA-C-D27-GCB-DM
EDFA-D27
EDFA-DGCB
EDFA-C-S26-VGC-DM
EDFA-S26
EDFA-SGCV
EDFA-C-S26-VGCB-DM
EDFA-S26
EDFA-SGCV
EDFA-C-D20-VGC
EDFA-DGCV
EDFA-DGCV
EDFA-C-D20-VGC-DM
EDFA-DGCV
EDFA-DGCV
EDFA-C-D20-VLGC-DM
EDFA-DGCV
EDFA-DGCV
EDFA-C-S101
EDFA-S
EDFA-S
EDFA-C-S18-GC
EDFA-SGC
EDFA-SGC
EDFA-C-S18-GCB
EDFA-SGCB
EDFA-SGCB
EDFA-C-S20-GCB
EDFA-SGCB
EDFA-SGCB
EDFA-C-S20-GCB-DM
EDFA-SGCB
EDFA-SGCB
EDFA-L-D17-GC
EDFA-DGC
EDFA-DGC
EDFA-S20H
EDFA-S20H
EDFA-S20H
EDFA-S20L
EDFA-S20L
EDFA-S20L
2EDFA-S20L-S10L
2EDFA-S20-S10
2EDFA-S20L-S10L
Optical Amplifiers
1336
Type Equipment
Names
RAMAN-C10
RAMAN
RAMAN
2RAMAN-C15-LL
2RAMAN-C15-LL
2RAMAN-C15-LL
AMP-S20H-C15
AMP-SHGCV
AMP-S20H-C15
AMP-S20L-C15
AMP-SLGCV
AMP-S20L-C15
DCM-P/xx
DCF-M/xxx/SSMF
DCF
DCF-M
DCG-M/xxx/SSMF
DCG
DCG-M
DCG50-M/xxx/SSMF
DCG
DCG-M
DCG-M/xxx/TWRS
DCG
DCG-M
DCG50-M/xxx/TWRS
DCG
DCG-M
1Legacy module - converted FSP 2000 module indicated by an asterisk printing on its
faceplate
2
The following shelves have the same equipment type but are different as shown:
Equipment
Band
Channel
Numbers
Channel
bandwidth
Notes
40CSM/2HU-#D02-#D32
19590 - 19200
(even channels)
100 GHz
old C Band
channel
number
plan
40CSM/2HU-#D34-#D64
D34-D64, DL1DL8
100 GHz
40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200
19590-19200
(even channels)
100 GHz
40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590#19200
19590-19200
(even channels)
100 GHz
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19590#19200
19590-19200
(even channels)
50 GHz
40CSM/2HU-#19595-#19205
CI
19595-19205
(odd channels)
100 GHz
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19595#19205
CI
19595-19205
(odd channels)
50 GHz
LC
connectors
face left
1337
1338
10TCC-PCTN-4GUS+10G
faceplate markings 282
Index
front view 281

module description 282
signal path 285
type equipment name 1328
variants 282
10PCA-PCN-1G3-10G
10TCE-PCN-10G+100G
front view 464
10PCA-PCN-1G3+10G
connection management 353
port description 467-468
signal path 461, 468
features 354
front view 350
interoperabilty 353
SFP transceivers 355
front view 457
signal path 355
slot positions 357
10TCC-PCN-2G7US+10G
10TCE-PCN-16GU+100G 441
front view 288, 304
front view 448
16CSM-#D01-#D32-SFx
front view 255
front view 929
signal path 261
port description 932, 985
10TCC-PCTN-4GU+10G
signal path 934
slot positions 935
front view 275
variants 930
signal path 279

variants 276
16CSM-#D33-#D64-SFx
front view 936
port description 939
signal path 941
slot positions 942
1339
variants 937
1CSM/P+#Cxxxx
1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W
front view 975
front view 1019
signal path 977
signal path 1022
slot positions 978
slot positions 1023
variants 976
variants 1020
1CSM/P+#Cxxxx-E/W
1CSM+#Dxx-E/W
front view 913
front view 1024
signal path 916
signal path 1027
slot positions 916
slot positions 1028
variants 914

variants 1025
1CSM+#19xxx
1CSM+#G1310
front view 968
front view 921
signal path 970
slot positions 970
signal path 924
slot positions 924
1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy
variants 922
front view 881
1CSM+#19xxx-E/W
signal path 883
front view 917
slot positions 884, 888
signal path 920
variants 882
slot positions 921
1PM/MM
variants 918
front view 1061
1CSM+#Cxxxx
signal path 1062
front view 971
slot positions 1063
signal path 973
1PM/SM
slot positions 974
front view 1058
variants 972
1340
signal path 1059
slot positions 1060
variants 926
front view 987
2-OTFM+#1650
2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610

signal path 990
slot positions 991
front view 949
variants 988
2EDFA-S20L-S10L
signal path 950
front view 1227
slot positions 951

2BSM-#D01-#D32
2OSCM-V#1630
battery 691
front view 870
front view 687
labeling 691
signal path 871
LED description 691
slot positions 872
reset button 690
2BSM/P-#G1310-#C1610-DM
signal path 690
slot positions 691
front view 1000
2OTFM+#1650
signal path 1002
slot positions 1003
signal path 1037
2CLSM-#D01-#D64
slot positions 1041

2PCA-PCN-10G
front view 797
connection management 345
signal path 798
features 345
slot positions 799
front view 342
interoperabilty 345
2CLSM-#D01-#D64-SFx
front view 925
signal path 348
slot positions 349
signal path 927
system requirements 344
slot positions 928
1341
XFP transceivers 346
pump modes of operation 1183, 1195, 1206
2PM/MM
signal amplification 1186, 1198, 1209
signal path 1185, 1198, 1208
front view 1068
slot positions 1191, 1201, 1212
start-up 1184, 1198, 1208
signal path 1070
terminal node configurations 1189
slot positions 1070
thru/add/drop/regeneration node
configurations 1190
2PM/SM
upgrade interface 1182, 1195, 1205
2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5
front view 1064

signal path 1066
front view 405
slot positions 1066
signal path 407

2PSM-95/5
2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5

front view 1054
front view 409
signal path 1056
slot positions 1057
signal path 411

2RAMAN-C15-LL
applications 1187-1188, 1200-1201, 1211-1212
2TWCC-PCN-2G7U
ASE table 1187, 1200, 1210
BWD RAMAN path 1186, 1199, 1210
front view 315
client interface 1182, 1195, 1205
compatible modules 1188, 1201, 1211
components 1182, 1205
signal path 318
faceplate markings 1180, 1193, 1203

2WCA-PCN-10G
features 1181, 1194, 1204

functional applications 1189
FWD RAMAN path 1186, 1199, 1210
front view 358
labeling 1191, 1201, 1212
laser safety 1183, 1196, 1206
signal path 362
LED description 1191, 1201, 1212
transmission modes 361
line node configurations 1189
module description 1180, 1193, 1203
2WCC-PCN-10G
monitoring interface 1182, 1195, 1205
network interface 1182, 1194, 1205
features 312
optical output power monitoring 1183, 1196,

1206
front view 310
1342
signal path 313
adaptor brackets 840

fiber fingers 841
front cover 841
3BSM-#G1310-#C1610
front view 834
labeling 842
front view 952
LED description 842
signal path 954
placement 840
slot positions 955
signal path 839

3BSM-#G1310-#C1610-E/W
40CSM-C80/2HU-#19xxx#19yyy
40CSM-FL/2HU-#19590-#19200
front view 956
signal path 958
features 829
slot positions 959
fiber fingers 831
front cover 832

front view 826
4
4-OPCM
applications 774
front view 772
labeling 776
LED description 776
operating modes 773
signal path 775
slot positions 776
40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
front view 854
placement 858
signal path 857
variants 855

signal path 829
40CSM-OJG/3HU-F/2DC#C
DC power cables 1294
40CSM/2HU-#19590-#19200
features 812
fiber fingers 813
front cover 814
front view 809
shelf labeling 814
signal path 812
40CSM/2HU-#19595-#19205
adaptor brackets 821, 866
1343
fiber fingers 822
signal path 962
front cover 822
slot positions 963
front view 817
labeling 823
variants 961
LED description 823
4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
placement 821
front view 903
port description 818, 835, 860
signal path 820
signal path 906
40CSM/2HU-#D02-#D32
slot positions 907
fiber fingers 805
variants 904
front cover 806
4CSM+#19xxx-#19yyy
40CSM/2HU-#Dxx-#Dyy
front view 800
front view 896
labeling 806
LED description 806
signal path 901
placement 805
slot positions 902
signal path 804
variants 897
4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy
variants 801
40CSM/P-2HU-#19590-#19200-DM
front view 908
features 848
signal path 911
fiber fingers 850
slot positions 912
front view 845
variants 909
module placement 850
4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
shelf labeling 851
signal path 849
front view 873, 885
40CSM/P-2HU#19590-#19200-DM
front cover 851
4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy

signal path 875
slot positions 876
front view 960
variants 874
1344
4TCA-LS+1G3-V

front view 413



signal path 416

variants 415

4WCE-PCN-16GFC
4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Cxxxx
front view 541
4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx
4TCA-PCN-4GU+4G
signal path 544
front view 383, 392

signal path 391
4TCA-PCN-4GUS+4G
5
5GSM-#19590-#19200
5GSM/P-#19590-#19200-DM
front view 992
front view 392
signal path 994
slot positions 995
signal path 397

4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5
5PSM
front view 1042
front view 328
signal path 1044
signal path 330
slot positions 1046
5TCE-PCN-10GU+10G
front view 471
front view 224
loop backs 228
front view 478
signal path 227

4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G
5TCE-PCN-8GU+10GS
description 504
front view 269
front view 503
module descriptions 270
signal path 506
signal path 272
1345
shipping 528
battery 515
signal path 526
description 510
variants 523
faceplate 510
limitations 515
shipping 515
7
7HU Shelf. See SH7HU 64
signal path 513

5TCE-PCTN-10GU+10G
front view 487
signal path 490
variants 488
battery 502
data encryption 497
front view 494
limitations 502
shipping 502
signal path 499
variants 495
5TCE-PCTN-8GU+10GS
front view 516
signal path 519
variants 517
battery 528
data encryption 525
front view 522
limitations 528
1346
8
8CSM-#19xxx-#19yyy
signal Path 894
slot positions 895
variants 890
front view 1008
signal path 1013
slot positions 1014
variants 1009
8CSM/P-#C1270-#C1450
front view 1015
signal path 1017
slot positions 1018
8CSM/P-#C1470-#C1610-DM
front view 992, 996
signal path 998
slot positions 999
8CSM/P+#C1470-#C1610-DM
front view 1004, 1008
port description 728, 733, 739
slot positions 729, 734, 740, 746
signal path 1007
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V
slot positions 1008
front view 376
8CSM+#C1470-#C1610
front view 964
signal path 380
variants 378
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Cxxxx
signal path 966

slot positions 967

8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx

8GSM-#D01-#D32

8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Cxxxx
front view 877
8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx
signal path 879
front view 529
slot positions 880
8PSM
signal path 533
front view 1047
variants 531
8ROADM-C40/0/OPM
8TCE-GLINK+2G5-V
front view 721
labeling 724
LED description 724
signal path 539
variants 537
8TCE-GLINK+2G5-V#Cxxxx
signal path 723

slot positions 724

8TCE-GLINK+2G5-V#Dxx
front view 535
8ROADM-C80/0/OPM
faceplate markings 727, 732, 738

front view 726, 731
labeling 729, 735, 741
9
96CSM/4HU-#19600-#19125
LED description 729, 735, 740
module description 727, 732, 738
1347
front cover 866
front view 859
IEEE 1394 interface cable 866
ROADM fixed add/drop 752
LED description 866
signal path 750
slot positions 755
9HU Shelf. See SH9HU 28
CCM-C80/8
40 channel colorless add/drop 762
colorless directionless add/drop 761
access type channel modules
compatible modules 759
general information 334
overview 3
front view 757
air filter 19, 32, 67, 79, 170
labeling 764
air filter pad 170
LED description 764
air filter unit 64

ROADM fixed add/drop 760
signal path 759
band splitter modules 781
slot positions 764
overview 6
basic system structure of FSP 3000R7 2

CCM-C96/9
front view 766

C-/L-band splitter module. See 2CLSM-#D01-#D64
and 2CLSM-#D01-#D64-SFx 797
C/L band splitter modules 781
Ethernet ports 58
AC power cords 1280
features 57
DC power cords 1285
front panel markings 55
Ethernet crossover 1313

Ethernet straight-through 1311
serial null modem 1307
telemetry interface cable 1315
USB 1308
40 channel colorless add/drop 754
colorless directionless add/drop 753
front view 748

labeling 755
LED description 755
1348
front view 55
general description 56
interconnect ports 58
labeling 63
LED description 61
CCM-C40/8
application software 61
EMC 57
cables
compatible modules 750
CEM/9HU
placement 61
replacing 61
shelf display 62
signal transmission path 61
telemetry port 59
TIF alarm contact reset button 61
channel modules, overview 3
LED description 1265
channel splitter modules 782-783
signal path 1265
contact ADVA, details 73
slot positions 1265
core type channel modules
variants 1264

overview 3
DCG50-M/xxx/SSMF
front view 1260
data encryption 497, 525
labeling 1262
DCF-M/xxx/SSMF
module variants 1261
front view 1254
signal path 1262
labeling 1256
slot positions 1262
DCG50-M/xxx/TWRS
signal path 1256
front view 1266
slot positions 1256
labeling 1268
variants 1255
DCF1HU-P
signal path 1268
slot positions 1268
front view 1269
variants 1267

labeling 1272
DCM-P/xx
placement 1272
dispersion compensation 1252
signal path 1271
dispersion compensation modules, overview 10
variants 1270
dispersion compensation shelf. See DCF1HUP 199
DCG-M/xxx/SSMF
front view 1257
labeling 1259, 1265
signal path 1259
slot positions 1259
variants 1259
DCG-M/xxx/TWRS
front view 1263
disposal
batteries 11
FSP 3000R7 equipment 11
pluggable transceivers 11
distributed Raman fiber amplifier 1110
documentation
obtaining 71
dual Raman fiber amplifier 1110
dummy module
labeling 1277
module view 1275
slot positions 1276
1349
variants 1276
front view 1153

labeling 1156
EDFA-C-D17-GC
signal path 1155
front view 1138
slot positions 1156
labeling 1141
EDFA-C-D27-GCB-DM
connecting 1162
signal path 1140
faceplate markings 1158, 1169
slot positions 1141
front view 1157, 1168
interworking 1162
EDFA-C-D20-GC
labeling 1162, 1169
laser safety 1160
front view 1134
LED indicators 1162
labeling 1137
module description 1158, 1169
recovery from loss of pilot signal 1161
signal path 1161
signal path 1136
slot positions 1162
slot positions 1137

EDFA-C-D20-VGC
EDFA-C-S10
front view 1117
front view 1130
labeling 1119
labeling 1133
signal path 1119
signal path 1132
slot positions 1119
slot positions 1133

EDFA-C-D20-VGC-DM
EDFA-C-S18-GC
front view 1123
front view 1149
labeling 1126
labeling 1152
signal path 1125
signal path 1151
slot positions 1125
slot positions 1152

EDFA-C-D20-VLGC-DM
1350
EDFA-C-S18-GCB
front view 1120
labeling 1122
overview 1108
enterprise type channel modules
signal path 1122
slot positions 1122
overview 4
Ethernet cables
EDFA-C-S20-GCB
crossover, pinouts 1313
straight-through, pinouts 1311
front view 1126
types 1309
labeling 1129
Example 509

signal path 1128
Faceplate 1036
slot positions 1128
fan moule 177
fan unit. See FAN/Plug-In 64
EDFA-C-S20-GCB-DM
FAN/1HU
LED description 179
front view 1146
monitoring 179
labeling 1148
replacing 179
slot position 179
FAN/9HU
signal path 1147
EMC 50, 53
slot positions 1148
features 49
fuse 50, 53
EDFA-L-D17-GC
labeling 51
front view 1142
LED description 51
labeling 1145
monitoring 50
replacing 50
slot positions 50
signal path 1144
top view 48
slot positions 1145

EDFA-S20H
FAN/Plug-In 64
fan LED 124, 178
front view 1213
front view 124
EDFA-S20L
labeling 126
front view 1220
LED description 125
shelf display 126
EDFA modules
basic functionality 1112
signal path 125

slot position 125
1351

fiber optic breakout cables 1322
NCU 157, 167
fixed gain-controlled amplifiers 1108-1109

fixed pump-power amplifiers 1108
FMT/1HU
application software 606, 614

battery 607, 616
default settings 607, 615
features 204
front view 603, 610
front view 202
labeling 608, 616
LED description 608, 616
labeling 205
placement 204
operating system 606, 614
front cover of a SH7HU 70, 81
front cover of a SH9HU 22
reset button 607, 615

group splitter modules 781
GUI names of type equipment 1327

battery 698
default settings 697
IEEE 866
IEEE 1394 interface cable 866
front view 693
ILM50-#DC
labeling 699
LED description 699
front view 793
management capabilities 694
signal path 795
operating system 697
slot positions 796
reset button 697

slot positions 698
interleaver module 781
NCU-HP
J/SM/4CS-#C1270-#C1330/LC/0400 1091
J/SM/LC/HEX/0800. See fiber optic breakout
cables 1323
J/SM/LC/OCT/0800. See fiber optic breakout
cables 1322

NCU-II
battery 601
default settings 601
front view 596
management modules
labeling 602
LED description 602
overview 5
1352
reset button 671
signal path 671
reset button 601
slot positions 672
NCU-II-P

features 676
front view 674
optical amplifiers
interworking 678
labeling 679
overview 9
LED description 679
See EDFA modules and RAMAN-C10 1108
optical filter modules
demultiplexer and multiplexer 789
drop and add filter 789
signal path 678
slot positions 679
labeling 790
OSCM-V#1630
optical interleaver/deinterleaver module 789
battery 684
overview 781
splitter/coupler 789
front view 681
optical interleaver/deinterleaver 789
labeling 685
optical power splitter modules 784
LED description 685
optical protection switch modules
reset button 683
overview 5
signal path 684
optical supervisory channel filter modules 784
slot positions 685
optical supervisory channel modules

overview 5
OSCM-PN
OSFM+#1490-SFA
battery 679
signal path 945
slot positions 945
OSFM+#1510
features 669
front view 667
signal path 1031
interworking 671
slot positions 1031
labeling 672
LED description 672

OSFM+#1510-SFB
1353
pluggable optojack transceiver
signal path 948
application notes 575
slot positions 948
management 575
pluggable transceivers
OSFM+#1630
cardbox labeling 567
signal path 1034
labeling 566
slot positions 1034
naming and conventions 548
types and variants 556
OTDR
power cords
cooling 208
AC 1280
description of LEDs 208
DC 1285
earthing 208
DC for 40CSM-OJG/3HU-F/2DC#C 1294
front view 206
DC for SH7HU 1288, 1290, 1294
DC for SH9HU 1297
labeling 208
power supply unit. See PSU/7HU-AC, PSU/7HUAC-HP, PSU/7HU-DC, PSU/7HU-DC-HP

and PSU/1HU-R-AC 96
placement 208
power supply 208
protection modules, overview 784
rear view 206
PSCU

front view 625
labeling 627
pluggable electrical 3G-SDI transceiver
description 583
pluggable electrical GbE transceiver

description 582
PSM-95/5
features 582
front view 1051
pluggable fiber-optic transceivers

features 569
management 572
optical connectors 572
pluggable optical transceivers
disposal 11
general description 569, 572
management 569, 572
1354
slot positions 627

pluggable electrical transceiver
LED description 627
signal path 1052

slot positions 1053
PSU/1HU-R-AC 158, 168
connecting 182
features 181
front view 180
labeling 183
LED description 183
monitoring 182
removing and replacing 182

slot positions 183
PSU/1HU-R-AC-200 168

PSU/7HU-AC-HP
connecting 112
EMC 111
connecting 186
features 111
EMC 186
front view 110
features 185
fuses 111
front view 184, 189
fuses 186
labeling 113
LED description 113
labeling 187
monitoring 113
LED description 187
monitoring 187
slot positions 113
slot positions 187

PSU/7HU-AC
PSU/7HU-DC
connecting 88
EMC 87
connecting 97
features 87
EMC 97
front view 86
features 97
fuses 87
front view 96
fuses 97
labeling 89
LED description 89
labeling 99
monitoring 89
LED description 99
monitoring 98
slot positions 89
slot positions 99
PSU/7HU-AC-800
PSU/7HU-DC-HP
connecting 102
EMC 101
connecting 122
features 101
EMC 121
front view 100
features 121
fuses 101
front view 120
fuses 121
labeling 103
LED description 103
labeling 123
monitoring 103
LED description 123
monitoring 122
slot positions 103
placement 123
1355
PSU/7HU-R-DC
slot positions 41
connecting 93
DC-input load step 92

EMC 92
features 92
R
RAMAN-C10
front view 90
application 1178
fuses 92
ASE table 1177
client interface 1173
labeling 94
components 1172
LED indicator 94
monitoring 94
features 1172
rear view 91
front view 1170
interworking 1178
slot positions 94
labeling 1178
laser safety 1174
PSU/7HU-R-DC-HP
connecting 108
DC-input load step 107
monitoring interface 1173
EMC 107
network interface 1172
features 107
optical output power monitoring 1174
front view 105
power and gain control 1173
fuses 107
pump modes of operation 1173
signal path 1176
labeling 109
slot positions 1178
LED indicator 109
start-up 1176
monitoring 109
rear view 106
upgrade interface 1173

slot positions 109
Raman amplifier. See RAMAN-C10 and 2RAMANC15-LL 1108
RJ-45 connector wiring schemes 1310
PSU/9HU-DC
connecting 41
EMC 40
front panel markings 703
features 40
front view 703
front view 39, 44
hardware architecture 706
fuses 40
key features 706
labeling 712
labeling 42
LED description 712
LED description 42
overview 703
monitoring 41
power supply 707
1356
signal path 711
LED description 662
ROADM-C80/0/OPM
slot positions 660
40 Channel ROADM NEs 717
80 Channel ROADM NEs 718

block diagram 715
S
SCU 167
front view 713
functional applications 717
front view 629, 637
labeling 720
labeling 631, 640
LED description 720
LED description 631, 639
line amp NE 719
SFP transceivers 631, 639
signal path 716
slot positions 719

RSM-OLM#1630
SCU-II
SCU-S 157, 167
front view 649
labeling 656
labeling 635
LED description 655
LED description 635
push button description 651
signal path 652
slot positions 635
slot positions 655

RSM-SF#1310
front view 662
serial null modem cable 1307

labeling 666
LED description 666
description 582
management 582
signal path 660, 665
SH1HU-F/2DC
slot positions 665
description of the LEDs 151
RSM-SF#1510
features 148
front view 147
front view 657
labeling 660
grounding 149
1357
labeling 153
placement 160
module cooling 149
power supply 158
naming 152
rear view 157, 167
placement 151
shelf display 162
power supply 148
signal path 160
rear view 147
slots 160
shelf display 152
signal path 150
SH1HU-R/PF
slots 150
air filter 170
SH1HU-HP/2DC
adaptor brackets 132, 143
fan module 169
DC power cable 1291
features 168
front view 166, 177
features 128
front view 127
grounding 169
labeling 174
grounding 129
module cooling 169
labeling 133
naming 174
module cooling 129
placement 171
naming 133
power supply 168
placement 131
shelf display 173
power supply 129
signal path 171
rear view 127
slots 170
shelf display 132, 143
signal path 131
slots 130
features 200
front view 199
SH1HU-HP/E-TEMP-2DC
SH1HU-P/DCM Shelf 199
SH1HU-R

labeling 201
placement 201
SH1HU/PASSIVE 196
features 196
features 157
front view 196
front view 156
labeling 197
grounding 158
placement 197
labeling 162
module cooling 159

naming 162
1358
SH1HU/PASSIVE/FT
features 194
front view 193

SH9HU
adaptor brackets 33
labeling 195
air filter 19, 32
placement 195
DC power cable 1297
description of the LEDs. See CEM/9HU 33
SH7HU
earthing 17
AC power cords 1280
fiber management 20
adaptor brackets 69
front cover 22
air filter 67, 79
front view 28
DC power cords 1288, 1290, 1294
description of the LEDs. See Fan/Plug-In 69
labeling 35
earthing 66
naming 34
fiber management 68
placement 33
front cover 70, 81
power supply 30
front view 64
shelf cooling 30
signal path 33
labeling 70
slots 32
naming 70
placement 68
shelves
power supply 65
overview 2
shelf cooling 66
signal path 68
slots 67
technical assistance 72
telemetry interface cable 1315
SH7HU-R
type equipment names 1327
accessories 81
earthing 77
features 76
fiber finger set 80
fiber management tray 80
front view 75
labeling 82
placement 80
power supply 76
shelf cooling 78
shelf naming 82
signal transmission path 80
U
USB cable 1308
UTM
front view 618
labeling 623
LED description 623
slot positions 623
slots 79
status LED indicators 80
1359

signal path 239
variable gain-controlled amplifiers 1109

variable gain amplifier 1109
WCC-PCTN-10G
VSM
front view 264
front view 645
signal path 267
labeling 648
variants 265
LED description 648

WCC-PCTN-10G-LN#DC

signal path 646
WCC-PCTN-10G-V#DC
slot positions 647

WCC-TN-40G-L#DC
front view 219
loop backs 223
WCA-PC-10G-V
signal path 222

signal path 374
WCA-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx
WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx
front view 371

WCC-TN-40G-L#DC (HW Rev. 2.00)
WCC-TN-40G-L#DC (HW Rev. 2.10)
WCE-PCN-100G
front view 436
WCA-PCN-2G5U
front view 400
signal path 439

signal path 403

WCE-PCN-100GB
front view 431
WCC-PC1N-2G7U

front view 324

signal path 327
XFP transceivers. See pluggable optical transceivers 569, 572
WCC-PCTN-100GA
front view 236
1360

FSP 3000R7 R13.3 Hardware Description IssA

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

FSP 3000R7 R13.3 Hardware Description IssA

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Fiber Service Platform 3000R7

Product Release 13.3

Copyright 2001-2015 ADVA Optical Networking SE

Purpose and Scope

Shelves and Components

FSP 3000R7 Hardware Description - Product Release 13.3 - Document Issue A

SHX9HU NEBS-KIT 9HU

FSP 3000R7 Hardware Description - Product Release 13.3 - Document Issue A

FSP 3000R7 Hardware Description - Product Release 13.3 - Document Issue A

Signal Transmission Path

FSP 3000R7 Hardware Description - Product Release 13.3 - Document Issue A

Status LED Indicators

FSP 3000R7 Hardware Description - Product Release 13.3 - Document Issue A

FSP 3000R7 Hardware Description - Product Release 13.3 - Document Issue A

FSP 3000R7 Hardware Description - Product Release 13.3 - Document Issue A

ESD and Laser Safety Label

FSP 3000R7 Hardware Description - Product Release 13.3 - Document Issue A

FSP 3000R7 Hardware Description - Product Release 13.3 - Document Issue A

FSP 3000R7 Hardware Description - Product Release 13.3 - Document Issue A

FSP 3000R7 Hardware Description - Product Release 13.3 - Document Issue A

FSP 3000R7 Hardware Description - Product Release 13.3 - Document Issue A

FSP 3000R7 Hardware Description - Product Release 13.3 - Document Issue A

FSP 3000R7 Hardware Description - Product Release 13.3 - Document Issue A

Signal Path for Bidirectional GbE Client Services

FSP 3000R7 Hardware Description - Product Release 13.3 - Document Issue A

Dual Transponder Mode

FSP 3000R7 Hardware Description - Product Release 13.3 - Document Issue A

Dual Transponder Mode

Unprotected Dual Transponder

Forcing the Network Laser

FSP 3000R7 Hardware Description - Product Release 13.3 - Document Issue A

Network Interface Characteristics

Add-Drop Multiplexer Mode (ADM)

Terminal Multiplexer Operation Modes (Multiplexer NE Only/Multiplexer NW Only/Multiplexer NE &

FSP 3000R7 Hardware Description - Product Release 13.3 - Document Issue A

Client Interface Characteristics

Terminal Multiplexer Operation Modes (Multiplexer NE Only/Multiplexer NW Only/Multiplexer NE &

FSP 3000R7 Hardware Description - Product Release 13.3 - Document Issue A

FSP 3000R7 Hardware Description - Product Release 13.3 - Document Issue A

FSP 3000R7 Hardware Description - Product Release 13.3 - Document Issue A

TDM Mode (Multiplexer Mode)

TDM Mode (Multiplexer Mode)

FSP 3000R7 Hardware Description - Product Release 13.3 - Document Issue A

Client Interface Characteristics

FSP 3000R7 Hardware Description - Product Release 13.3 - Document Issue A

Network Interface Characteristics

FSP 3000R7 Hardware Description - Product Release 13.3 - Document Issue A

FSP 3000R7 Hardware Description - Product Release 13.3 - Document Issue A

Management and Switch Modules

FSP 3000R7 Hardware Description - Product Release 13.3 - Document Issue A

FSP 3000R7 Hardware Description - Product Release 13.3 - Document Issue A

FSP 3000R7 Hardware Description - Product Release 13.3 - Document Issue A

FSP 3000R7 Hardware Description - Product Release 13.3 - Document Issue A

FSP 3000R7 Hardware Description - Product Release 13.3 - Document Issue A

FSP 3000R7 Hardware Description - Product Release 13.3 - Document Issue A

Reconfigurable Optical Layer Device Hardware

FSP 3000R7 Hardware Description - Product Release 13.3 - Document Issue A

FSP 3000R7 Hardware Description - Product Release 13.3 - Document Issue A

FSP 3000R7 Hardware Description - Product Release 13.3 - Document Issue A

CCM-C40/8 Block Diagram

FSP 3000R7 Hardware Description - Product Release 13.3 - Document Issue A

FSP 3000R7 Hardware Description - Product Release 13.3 - Document Issue A

FSP 3000R7 Hardware Description - Product Release 13.3 - Document Issue A

FSP 3000R7 Hardware Description - Product Release 13.3 - Document Issue A